7939 Exhibit N - MMB - Project Manual Volume 1 - 2017-03-24 PDF

EXHIBIT N - PROJECT MANUAL - VOLUME 1
MADISON MUNICIPAL BUILDING RENOVATION

215 Martin Luther King Jr. Blvd
Madison, WI 53703
BPW CONTRACT #7939 MUNIS 10129

BID ISSUE
Date: 24 MARCH 2017
ARCHITECT
MSR, Ltd.
PRESERVATION ARCHITECT
Charles Quagliana, AIA
LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT
KSD, Inc.
CIVIL ENGINEER
Vierbicher, Inc.
STRUCTURAL AND TECHNOLOGY ENGINEER

KJWW, Inc.
BUILDING ENVELOPE CONSULTANT

Insite Consulting Architects
MECHANICAL / ELECTRICAL / PLUMBING ENGINEER

MEP Associates
LIGHTING DESIGN
Gallina Associates
CODE AND LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS

Summit Fire Consulting
ACOUSTICAL CONSULTING
KRA, Inc.
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 00 00 05
2 TABLE OF CONTENTS
3 VOLUME I
4 DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
5 INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION
6 00 00 05 Table of Contents
7 00 00 20 Material Tag Index
8 00 01 07 Certifications Page
9 00 31 46 Permits
10 DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

11 01 23 00 Alternates
12 01 25 13 Product Substitution Procedures
13 01 26 13 Request for Information (RFI)
14 01 26 46 Construction Bulletin (CB)
15 01 26 57 Change Order Request (COR)
16 01 26 63 Change Order (CO)
17 01 29 73 Schedule of Values
18 01 29 76 Progress Payment Procedures
19 01 31 13 Project Coordination
20 01 31 19 Project Meetings
21 01 31 23 Project Management Web Site
22 01 32 16 Construction Progress Schedules
23 01 32 19 Submittals Schedule
24 01 32 26 Construction Progress Reporting
25 01 32 33 Photographic Documentation
26 01 33 20 Electronic Media Release Statement
27 01 33 23 Submittals
28 01 40 00 Quality Requirements
29 01 42 00 References
30 01 43 39 Mockups
31 01 43 50 Air Barrier Systems
32 01 45 16 Field Quality Control Procedures
33 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls
34 01 57 19.11 Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management
35 01 58 13 Temporary Project Signage
36 01 60 00 Product Requirements
37 01 71 23 Field Engineering
38 01 73 00 Execution
39 01 73 29 Cutting and Patching
40 01 74 13 Progress Cleaning
41 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal
42 01 76 00 Protecting Installed Construction
43 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures
44 01 78 13 Completion and Correction List
45 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data
46 01 78 36 Warranties
47 01 78 39 As-Built Drawings
48 01 78 43 Spare Parts and Extra Materials
49 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training
50 01 81 13.13 Sustainable Design Requirements
51 01 91 00 Commissioning
52 01 95 00 Measurement and Verification
53
MADISON MUNICIPAL BUILDING RENOVATION BID ISSUE

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 00 00 05 - 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 DIVISION 02 – SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

2 02 41 19 Selective Demolition
3 02 41 50 Historic Selective Demolition/Deconstruction
4 DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
5 03 10 00 Concrete Formwork
6 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement
7 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete
8 03 35 43 Concrete Floor Finishing
9 03 53 00 Concrete Topping
10 DIVISION 04 –MASONRY
11 04 01 20.63 Historic Brick Masonry Preservation/Restoration
12 04 01 40 Historic Stone Preservation/Restoration
13 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry
14 04 45 50 Existing Marble Refurbishment
15 DIVISION 05 - METALS
16 05 12 23 Structural Steel
17 05 12 50 Historic Structural Steel Preservation/Restoration
18 05 31 00 Steel Decks
19 05 40 00 Cold-formed Steel Framing (CFSF) System
20 05 45 00 Equipment Support Systems
21 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications
22 05 51 13 Metal Pan Stairs
23 05 51 16 Metal Floor Plate Stairs
24 05 52 13 Pipe and Tube Railings
25 05 70 00 Decorative Metal
26 05 73 00 Decorative Metal Railings
27 05 75 00 Decorative Formed Metal
28 DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

29 06 03 12 Historic Wood Repair and New Wood Handrails
30 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry
31 06 15 16 Wood Roof Decking
32 06 16 00 Sheathing
33 06 40 23 Interior Architectural Woodwork
34 06 41 16 Plastic Laminate Faced Architectural Cabinets
35 06 46 00 Wood Trim
36 DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

37 07 01 50.19 Preparation for Reroofing
38 07 01 90.71 Historic Sealant Rehabilitation
39 07 13 50 Historic Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing
40 07 14 16 Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing
41 07 16 13 Polymer Modified Cement Waterproofing
42 07 18 00 Traffic Coatings
43 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation
44 07 21 29 Sprayed Cellulose Acoustical Insulation
45 07 27 15.13 Non-bituminous Self-adhering Sheet Air Barriers
46 07 42 13.13 Formed Metal Wall Panels
47 07 52 13 APP Modified Asphalt Bituminous Roofing
48 07 52 16 SBS Modified Asphalt Bituminous Roofing
49 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
50 07 62 50 Historic Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
51 07 71 00 Roof Specialties
52 07 71 29 Manufactured Roof Expansion Joints
53 07 72 00 Roof Accessories
54 07 81 00 Applied Fireproofing
55 07 84 13 Penetration Firestopping
56 07 84 43 Joint Firestopping

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 07 92 00 Joint Sealants
2 07 92 19 Acoustical Joint Sealants
3 07 95 00 Expansion Control
4 DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
5 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
6 08 21 10 Wood Door Rehabilitation
7 08 31 13 Access Doors and Frames
8 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors
9 08 33 26 Overhead Coiling Grilles
10 08 34 73.13 Metal Sound Control Door Assemblies
11 08 41 13 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts
12 08 41 14 Glass Partition System
13 08 44 10 Fire Rated Aluminum Curtain Wall
14 08 44 13 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls
15 08 51 13 Aluminum Windows
16 08 51 13.23 Aluminum Accessory Windows
17 08 62 00 Unit Skylights
18 08 62 10 Steel Door Rehabilitation
19 08 71 00 Door Hardware
20 08 80 00 Glazing
21 08 81 13 Decorative Glass Glazing
22 08 88 13 Fire-Resistant Glazing
23 08 88 53 Security Glazing
24 08 91 19 Fixed Louvers
25 DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
26 09 03 20 Historic Treatment of Plaster
27 09 21 16.23 Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies
28 09 22 16 Non-structural Metal Framing
29 09 24 00 Cement Plastering
30 09 29 00 Gypsum Board
31 09 30 13 Ceramic Tiling
32 09 30 16 Clay Tile Floor Rehabilitation
33 09 51 13 Acoustical Panel Ceilings
34 09 51 23 Acoustical Tile Ceilings
35 09 64 29 Wood Flooring
36 09 65 13 Resilient Base and Accessories
37 09 66 13 Portland Cement Terrazzo Flooring
38 09 67 23 Resinous Flooring
39 09 68 13 Tile Carpeting
40 09 75 16 Stone Base
41 09 84 33 Sound-Absorbing Fabric Units
42 09 91 13 Exterior Painting
43 09 91 23 Interior Painting
44 09 93 00 Stains and Varnishes
45 09 96 46 Intumescent Painting
46

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
2 10 11 00 Visual Display Units
3 10 12 00 Display Cases
4 10 21 13.15 Stainless-Steel Toilet Compartments
5 10 21 16.19 Shower Compartments
6 10 28 00 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories
7 10 44 16 Fire Extinguishers
8 10 51 13 Lockers
9 DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
10 Not Used
11 DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12 12 24 13 Roller Window Shades
13 12 36 61 Simulated Stone Countertops
14 12 48 13 Entrance Floor Mats and Frames
15 12 93 00 Site Furnishings
16 12 93 00.10 Bicycle Racks
17 DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

18 14 21 00 Electric Traction Elevator
19

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 VOLUME II
2 DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

3 21 10 00 Water-Based Fire Protection Systems
4 DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
5 22 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment
6 22 05 17 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping
7 22 05 18 Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping
8 22 05 19 Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping
9 22 05 23 General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping
10 22 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
11 22 05 48.13 Vibration Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
12 22 05 53 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
13 22 07 19 Plumbing Piping Insulation
14 22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping
15 22 11 19 Domestic Water Piping Specialties
16 22 11 23 Domestic Water Pumps
17 22 13 16 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping
18 22 13 19 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties
19 22 14 13 Facility Storm Drainage Piping
20 22 14 23 Storm Drainage Piping Specialties
21 22 14 29 Sump Pumps
22 22 31 00 Domestic Water Softeners
23 22 34 00 Fuel-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters
24 22 42 13.13 Commercial Water Closets
25 22 42 13.16 Commercial Urinals
26 22 42 16.13 Commercial Lavatories
27 22 42 16.16 Commercial Sinks
28 22 42 23 Commercial Showers
29 22 47 13 Drinking Fountains
30 DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

31 23 05 17 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping
32 23 05 18 Escutcheons for HVAC Piping
33 23 05 19 Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping
34 23 05 23 General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping
35 23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment
36 23 05 48.13 Vibration Controls for HVAC
37 23 05 53 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment
38 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing For HVAC
39 23 07 13 Duct Insulation
40 23 07 16 HVAC Equipment Insulation
41 23 07 19 HVAC Piping Insulation
42 23 09 00 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC
43 23 09 13.33 Control Valves
44 23 09 13.43 Control Dampers
45 23 11 23 Facility Natural-Gas Piping
46 23 21 13 Hydronic Piping
47 23 21 16 Hydronic Piping Specialties
48 23 21 23 Hydronic Pumps
49 23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping
50 23 25 13 Water Treatment for Closed-Loop Hydronic Systems
51 23 31 13 Metal Ducts
52 23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories
53 23 34 23 HVAC Power Ventilators
54 23 36 00 Air Terminal Units
55 23 37 13 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles
56 23 37 23 HVAC Gravity Ventilators
57 23 52 16 Condensing Boilers
58 23 63 13 Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condensers
59 23 64 23 Scroll Water Chillers

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 23 73 13 Modular Indoor Central-Station Air-Handling Units

2 23 81 26 Split-System Air-Conditioners
3 23 82 16.11 Hydronic Air Coils
4 23 82 16.14 Electric Resistance Air Coils
5 23 82 19 Fan Coil Units
6 23 82 29 Radiators
7 DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
8 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
9 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
10 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
11 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems
12 26 05 44 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling
13 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems
14 26 09 23 Lighting Control Devices
15 26 22 00 Low-Voltage Transformers
16 26 24 13 Switchboards
17 26 24 16 Panelboards
18 26 27 13 Electricity Metering
19 26 27 26 Wiring Devices
20 26 28 13 Fuses
21 26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
22 26 29 13.03 Manual and Magnetic Motor Controllers
23 26 33 23 Central Battery Equipment for Emergency Lighting
24 26 50 00 Historic Lighting Restoration & Replication
25 26 51 00 Interior Lighting
26 26 56 00 Exterior Lighting
27 DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS
28 27 05 00 Basic Communications Systems Requirements
29 27 05 03 Through Penetration Firestopping
30 27 05 05 Technology Demolition for Remodeling
31 27 05 26 Communications Bonding
32 27 05 28 Interior Communication Pathways
33 27 05 53 Identification and Administration
34 27 11 00 Communication Equipment Rooms
35 27 13 00 Backbone Cabling Requirements
36 27 15 00 Horizontal Cabling Requirements
37 27 17 10 Testing
38 27 17 20 Support and Warranty
39 27 21 33 Wireless Access Points (WAP)
40 27 41 00 Professional Audio Video System
41 27 51 19 Sound Masking System
42 DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

43 28 05 00 Basic Electronic Safety and Security Systems Requirements
44 28 05 03 Through Penetration Firestopping
45 28 13 00 Access Control System (Keyscan)
46 28 20 00 Electronic Surveillance
47 28 31 11 Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System
48 DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
49 31 10 00 Site Clearing and Removals
50 31 23 00 Foundation Excavating and Backfilling
51 31 25 13 Erosion Controls
52
53

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

2 32 11 23 Aggregate Base Courses
3 32 13 00 Portland Cement Concrete Paving
4 32 91 13 Soil Preparation
5 32 92 00 Turf and Grasses
6 32 93 00 Plants
7
8 DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES
9 33 12 13 Water Service Connections
10 33 31 00 Sanitary Utility Sewer Piping
11 33 41 00 Storm Utility Drainage Piping
12 END OF DOCUMENT

MSR, LTD 3/21/2017; 5:35 PM
24 MARCH 2017
SECTION TAG DESCRIPTION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

DIVISION 2 DEMOLITION
XSTONE-1 Historic exterior limestone cladding to be retained and protected for re-use.
XSTONE-2 Historic exterior limestone cladding to be removed.
XBRICK-1 Historic exterior brick cladding to be retained and protected for re-use.
XBRICK-2 Historic exterior brick cladding to be salvaged (on existing annex)
XTRIM Historic wood trim to be demounted and set aside for re-use.
XPANEL-1 Historic wood paneling to be retained and protected for re-use.
XPANEL-2 Historic wood paneling to be demounted and set aside for re-use.
SEE SPEC XBASE-1 Historic wood wall base to be retained and protected for re-use.
SECTIONS BELOW
XBASE-2 Historic wood wall base to be demounted and set aside for re-use.
FOR SPECIFIC
XBASE-3 Historic marble base to be retained and protected for re-use.
DETAILS AND
TAGS XBASE-4 Historic marble base to be demounted and set aside for re-use.
XWIN Historic windows and frames to be retained and protected for re-use.
XENTRY Historic entry doors to be retained and protected for re-use.
XDOOR Historic interior doors and frames to be demounted and set aside for re-use.
XTHOLD-1 Historic marble door thresholds to be retained and protected for re-use.
XTREAD Existing exterior granite stair treads to be demounted and set aside for re-use.
XEIFS Existing EIFS finish to elevator penthouse exterior walls to be retained and trimmed and refinished to new base line for new roof flashing.
XTOIL Existing marble toilet partition to be retained and protected for re-use.
DIVISION 3 CONCRETE
033000 XCONC EXISTING CONCRETE INCLUDING PATCHING
031000 WSTOP-1 WATERSTOP BASE OF RETAINING WALL JUNCTION WITH FOOTING
033000 CONC SLAB NEW CONCRETE SLAB
033000 SAF SLIP-RESISTANT AGGREGATE FINISH
AT LOCATIONS PER DRAWINGS TO BRING EXISTING FLOORS UP TO GENERAL

035300 TPNG-1 CONCRETE TOPPING
FLOOR ELEVATIONS PRIOR TO FINAL FINISH.
033000 VB-1 UNDER-SLAB VAPOR RETARDER
033543 CFF-1 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING AT INTERIOR FLOOR SLABS - SEE FINISH PLANS
DIVISION 4 MASONRY
040120.63 XBRICK-1 EXTERIOR BRICK CLADDING TO BE REPAIRED
040120.63 XBRICK-2 EXTERIOR BRICK CLADDING TO BE SALVAGED
040120.63 BRICK-1 NEW EXTERIOR BRICK CLADDING IN SELECTED LOCATIONS - SEE
042200 CMU-1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT (6" NOM.)
042200 CMU-2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT (8" NOM.) Class C-3 CMU - FILL ALL CELLS WHERE INDICTED ON THE DRAWINGS
044550 XTILE-2B HISTORIC MARBLE FLOOR TILE - REFURBISH PERIMETER MARGINS AND HEXAGONAL MOZAICS L-2 AND L-3

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS 10129 00 00 20 - 1 MATERIALS LIST
MSR, LTD 3/21/2017; 5:35 PM
24 MARCH 2017
NEW WHITE CARRARA FLOOR TILE TO MATCH FEATURE

044550 XTILE-2C LEVEL 1 PUBLIC AREA
DIAMOND TILE AND PERIMETER MARGINS.
044550 XTILE-2D LEVEL 1 PUBLIC AREA

MATCH FEATURE TRANGLE TILE.
044550 XTILE-3 HISTORIC MARBLE WALL PANEL - REFURBISH EXISTING RESTROOMS AT LEVELS 2 AND 3
044550 XBASE-3 HISTORIC MARBLE BASE - RETAIN to be retained and protected for re-use.
044550 XBASE-4 HISTORIC MARBLE BASE - REUSE ELSEWHERE to be demounted and set aside for re-use.
DIVISION 5 METALS
051223 STL FRAME STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS
052100 STL JOIST STEEL JOIST FRAMING
053100 STL DECK STEEL DECKING
054000 CFSF COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING
054500 ESS-1 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT SYSTEM AT ACT-3 ZONES PROVIDED FOR SERVICES SUPPORT IN OPEN CEILING AREAS.
055000 MTLFAB-1 METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 GUARD-1 STEEL PIPE OR DOWNSPOUT GUARDS
055113 STAIR-1 METAL PAN STAIRS CIRCULATION STAIR BETWEEN LEVELS G AND 1
055116 STAIR-2 STEEL SERVICE STAIR FROM ROOF HATCH TO LEVEL 3 ROOF, AND TO L-2 ROOF
055116 NOSING-1 SERVICE STAIR NOSINGS: SLIPNOT 3" x 1/8" thick stainless steel. FOR EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR STEEL AND CONCRETE SERVICE STAIRS.
055213 RAIL-4 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS FOR STAIR-2
LINEAR BAR GRILLE: Harrington & King: Large Sea Shell, Style 30067.
057000 GR-1 Made from either 20ga. steel, factory painted PT- 2H, or 20ga. clear NEW AT LEVEL 1 PUBLIC AREA: 65% OPEN AREA.
anodized alum. sheet.
057000 GR-2 HYDRONIC RADIATOR COVER PANEL: EXTG AT ROOM 260 EXISTING AT ROOM 260, REPAINTED.
STAINLESS STEEL WALL CORNER GUARD: 2" x 2" x 48" high. 90
057000 GUARD-2
Degree, 16ga, Type 304, Satin #4 (Brushed) Finish.
057300 RAIL-1 EXTERIOR METAL GUARD RAILS AT LIGHT WELLS AND STAIRS SEE DRAWINGS FOR LOCATIONS AND DETAILS
BRACKETS FOR NEW HARDWOOD HANDRAILS: SEE WD-3 FOR NEW HANDRAILS AT HISTORIC STAIRS AT EAST AND WEST, AND NEW
057300 RAIL-2
HANDRAIL MATERIAL. INTERIOR STAIR.
057300 RAIL-3 METAL GUARD RAIL AT NEW INTERIOR STAIR - SEE DRAWINGS
057500 MTL-1 ALUMINUM CLOSURE PANELS
057500 MTL-2 POCKETS FOR WINDOW TREATMENT IF NOT PART OF WINDOW TREATMENT PRODUCT RANGE
057500 MTL-3 WINDOW STOOLS AT BASE OF NEW STORM WINDOWS
STAINLESS STEEL FINISH PANEL - SNAPCAB 5WL TEXTURED ELEVATOR CAR - NEW WALL PANELS - "INDUSTRIAL 1" STYLE. SEE ELEVATOR
142100 SS-1
PANELS. SPEC.
055000 GRATE-1 PEDESTRIAN GRATE: McNichols GW-125, Galv. steel. AT LIGHT WELLS AT DOTY PLAZA
055000 GRATE-2 TRANSFORMER VAULT EQUIPMENT COVER: Hughes Bros C4270.13 CENTRAL SERVICE GRATE
055000 GRATE-3 TRANSFORMER VAULT MANHOLE COVER: Hughes Bros C4270.1 MAN HOLE DOORS

MSR, LTD 3/21/2017; 5:35 PM
24 MARCH 2017

DIVISION 6 WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES
060312 XTRIM Historic wood trim repair/refinishing to be demounted and set aside for re-use.
060312 XPANEL-1 Historic wood paneling repair/refinishing to be retained and protected for re-use.
060312 XBASE-1 Historic wood wall base repair/refinishing to be retained and protected for re-use.
061000 WD-FRMG INTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY FRAMING
061000 WD-BLKG WOOD BLOCKING - LUMBER & PLYWOOD
061000 CURB-2 WOOD CURB BASE FOR ROOF EQUIPMENT SUPPORT
061516 WD-DECK WOOD ROOF DECK BOARDS
061600 SHTG-1 EXTERIOR WALL SHEATHING
061600 SHTG-2 ROOF AND PARAPET SHEATHING
064023 PLSHLF-1 PLASTIC LAMINATE SHELVING: White melamine MELAMINE FACED WOOD SHELVING
064023 WDSHLF-1 STORAGE SHELVING MAY NOT BE NEEDED
064116 PLAM-1 PLASTIC LAMINATE: Formica - Paloma Polar Finish - 6698-58 ARCHITECTURAL FACED CABINETS
064116 PLAM-2 PLASTIC LAMINATE: Not used ARCHITECTURAL FACED CABINETS
VARIES - SEE SPEC SECTION - Doug Mockett DP105A/2 26M Matte Chrome 4-3/16"
064116 HRDW CABINET HARDWARE
3/8" square profile
064116 MA-1 GROMMET-Not Used IN COUNTER TOPS FOR CABLE ACCESS TO/FROM BELOW
064116 MA-3 GROMMET: Doug Mockett MAX11/B/M - Satin Aluminum IN COUNTER TOPS FOR CABLE ACCESS TO/FROM BELOW
DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

070150.19 AB-1 AIR AND VAPOR BARRIER (ROOF SYSTEM)
BELOW GRADE WALLS AROUND EXTERIOR AREAWAYS AND LIGHT WELLS, AT
071416 WP-1 COLD FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING
WILSON ST STAIR BELOW FINISH, AND AT ROOF OF ELECTRICAL VAULT.
TROWEL APPLIED WATER PROOFING AND PROTECTION
071613 WP-2 BELOW GRADE WALLS AROUND NEW ADDITION SUBSTRUCTURE WALLS
BOARD
071800 PTC-1 TRAFFIC COATING FOR CONCRETE FLOORS MECHANICAL ROOM FLOORS
072100 INSUL-1 UNDERSLAB BOARD INSULATION EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE
072100 INSUL-2 POLYISOCYANURATE INSULATION BOARD AT ROOFS (MANUF. LIMITED) AND EXTERIOR WALLS AROUND ADDITION.
072100 INSUL-3 MINERAL WOOL BLANKET INSULATION VOID FILLING AT EXTERIOR DETAILS, INTERIOR SOUND-RATED PARTITIONS
072100 INSUL-4 MINERAL WOOL BOARD INSULATION UNDERSIDE L-1 SLAB AT TRASH ROOM AND EQUIPMENT STORAGE ROOM.
072100 TAPE-1 ADHESIVE FOR BONDING INSULATION
072100 INSUL-5 CLOSED CELL SPRAY FOAM OR GLASS FIBER INSULATION MISCELLANEOUS SMALL VOIDS WHERE THERMAL LINE NEEDS CONT.
SPRAY-APPLIED ACOUSTICAL INSULATION: K13 SonaSpray "fc", 1.5"
072129 SAI-1 AT UNDERSIDE FLOOR DECK ABOVE L-0 MECH ROOM
THICK, WHITE.
072715.13 AB-2 SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIER CAVITY WALLS BEHIND NEW RAINSCREEN SYSTEM (074213)
074213.13 MTLP-1 FORMED METAL WALL PANELS EXTERIOR CLADDING TO NEW ADDITION - ZINC
074213.13 CLIP-1 THERMALLY BROKEN GIRT CLIPS SMARTci 200 PULTRUDED FIBERGLASS CLIPS

MSR, LTD 3/21/2017; 5:35 PM
24 MARCH 2017

075213 ROOF-1 (OPTION A) APP MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING - OPTION 1 ALL NEW AND REFURBISHED ROOFING
075216 ROOF-1 (OPTION B) SBS MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING - OPTION 2 ALL NEW AND REFURBISHED ROOFING
075213 / 075216 SHTG-3 ROOF SUBSTRATE BOARD / THERMAL BARRIER
076200 FLASH-3 TERNE-COATED STAINLESS STEEL BRAKE METAL FLASHING
077100 SCUPPER-1 METAL PARAPET SCUPPER
TERNE-COATED STAINLESS STEEL REGLET AND
077100 REGLET-1
COUNTERFLASHING
077100 COPING-1 ALUM. PARAPET CAP
077129 ROOFJNT-1 ROOF EXPANSION JOINT AT JUNCTION OF NEW ADDITION ROOF AND MMB NORTH WALL
077200 HATCH-1 ROOF HATCH UPPER ROOF ACCESS TO ATTIC OVER ROOM 260
078110 SFRM-2 SPRAY-APPLIED FIRE RESISTANT MATERIAL FOR 1HR FIRE PROTECTION OF NON-VISIBLE INTERIOR STEEL STRUCTURE
078413 FB-1 PENETRATION FIRE BARRIER FOR VERTICAL ASSEMBLIES
078413 FB-2 PENETRATION FIRE BARRIER FOR HORIZONTAL ASSEMBLIES
078443 JFS JOINT FIRESTOPPING
079200 JS-X JOINT SEALANT (SEE SCHEDULE FOR TYPES 1 through 8)
079200 JS-EXP EXPANDING FOAM SEALANT: EMSEAL
079219 AJS-1 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANT
079500 JNT-1 FLOOR MOVEMENT JOINT: EMSEAL FP-55, GREY AT FLOOR JOINT BETWEEN EXISTING BUILDING NEW ADDITION.
079500 JNT-2 WALL MOVEMENT JOINT: JOINTMASTER 620 SERIES, GREY AT WALL JOINT BETWEEN EXISTING BUILDING NEW ADDITION, BELOW GRADE.
DIVISION 8 OPENINGS
082110 XDOOR INTERIOR HISTORIC WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES TO BE DEMOUNTED AND SET ASIDE FOR RE-USE.
083113 ACCESS-1 ACCESS PANEL 1 FLUSH ACCESS PANELS WITH EXPOSED FRAME
083113 ACCESS-2 FIRE RATED ACCESS PANEL 1 FIRE RATED ACCESS PANEL WITH EXPOSED FRAME
083326 COIL-1 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES AT GROUND LEVEL SERVICE COUNTERS
083323 COIL-2 OVERHEAD COILING DOOR AT GROUND LEVEL TRASH STORAGE ROOM
ALUMINUM FRAMED INTERIOR STOREFRONT SYSTEM. B.O.D.:
084113 GLWS-1 TYPICAL INTERIOR STOREFRONT SYSTEM
Kawneer Trifab 451 SSG, single glazed.
ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONT SYSTEM (acoustical). B.O.D.:
084113 GLWS-2 ACOUSTICAL INTERIOR STOREFRONT SYSTEM
Kawneer Trifab 451 SSG, double glazed.
084410 GLWS-3 FIRE RATED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALL. B.O.D.: SaftiFirst GPX. AT EGRESS STAIR SHAFTS ON ALL FLOORS (120 MIN FR)
INTERIOR PAINT FOR GLWS-3 DOORS TO MATCH CLEAR

084410 PT-11_ FACTORY-APPLIED
ANODIZED ALUM.
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALL (exterior). B.O.D.: Kawneer
084413 GLWS-4 CURTAIN WALL SYSTEM AT NEW ADDITION
1600-series.

MSR, LTD 3/21/2017; 5:35 PM
24 MARCH 2017
ALUMINUM WINDOWS (New, generally). B.O.D.: Wausau 4250 Invent

085113 WIN-1 NEW WINDOWS REPLACING EXISTING 1980s WINDOWS
Retro series.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS (Ground and First in North bricked up
085113 WIN-2 NEW WINDOWS REPLACING BRICK-FILLED OPENINGS NORTH
openings): B.O.D.: St Cloud 2500.
ALUMINUM INTERIOR ACCESSORY WINDOWS: B.O.D.: Wausau
085113.23 IAW-1 INTERIOR "STORM" WINDOWS AT LEVELS 2 AND 3
SEAL IAWs.
085113 AL-A ALUMINUM COLOR PAINT FINISH: Benjamin Moore HC-131 PVF2 FACTORY FINISH ON ALUMINUM WINDOW EXTRUSIONS
085113 AL-B CLEAR ANODIZED ALUM. FINISH FINISH TO INTERIOR STOREFRONT SYSTEMS
086210 XENTRY REHABILITATED EXISTING HISTORIC DOORS AND FRAMES EXISTING, HISTORIC DOORS AND CAST IRON SUBFRAMES AND GRILLES ABOVE.
086210 PT-6A EXTERIOR HISTORIC DOOR, FRAME AND SUBFRAME PAINT EXISTING, HISTORIC DOORS AND CAST IRON SUBFRAMES AND GRILLES ABOVE.
INTERIOR SATIN OIL-ALKYD PAINT ON WROUGHT IRON AND
086210 PT-12A INSIDE FACES OF 1929 HISTORIC WINDOW FRAMES AT LEVELS 2 AND 3.
CAST IRON WINDOW FRAMES
MODULAR UNIT SKYLIGHTS, B.O.D. VELUX, WITH WASCO AS
086300 SKYLIGHT-1 WITH INTEGRAL OSHA FALL PROTECTION LOAD CHARACTERISTICS
ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATE.
087100 HW DOOR HARDWARE REFER TO HW SCHEDULE AND SETS.
088000 GL-1 1/8" MONOLITHIC CLEAR GLASS NEW GLASS IN EXISTING, REHABILITATED WINDOWS
088000 GL-2 MONOLITHIC CLEAR GLASS, THICKNESS BASED ON SIZE. NEW GLASS IN INTERIOR PARTITIONS - NON ACOUSTIC RATED
088000 GL-3 1" THICK INSULATED LOW-E CLEAR GLASS NEW GLASS IN NEW EXTERIOR DOORS AND WINDOWS
NEW GLASS IN NEW EXTERIOR WINDOWS AT U-SHAPED ROOF AREA: PER GL-3,
088000 GL-3A INSULATED AND LAMINATED CLEAR GLASS BUT WITH INNER PANE LAMINATED. SEE WINDOW SCHEDULE FOR
LOCATIONS.
088000 GL-4 1" THICK INSULATED LOW-E CLEAR GLASS NEW GLASS IN INTERIOR ACCESSORY WINDOWS
088000 GL-5 1-1/6" INSULATED, LAMINATED CLEAR GLASS NEW GLASS IN INTERIOR ACOUSTIC RATED PARTITIONS
088000 GL-7 INSULATED, LAMINATED INNER PANE (OSHA FALL RESISTANT) FOR NEW UNIT SKYLIGHTS
BACK-PAINTED GLASS FOR INTERIOR USE: Paint color to match
088000 GL-8 paint color PT_-K as closely as possible using manufacturer's standard FOR BASE PANELS OF SERVICE DESKS: SAFLEX VANCEVA RANGE
color range.
088113 WF-1 3M Fasara decorative film: Essen DECORATIVE ARCHITECTURAL WINDOW FILM
088813 FRGL-1 FIRE RESISTANT RATED GLASS INTERIOR PARTITIONS TO EGRESS STAIRS (120 MIN FR)
088853 SGL-1 FORCED ENTRY RESISTANCE SECURITY GLASS AT H.O.D. RECEPTION COUNTER
089119 LOUVER-1 ALUMINUM FIXED LOUVERS MECHANICAL LOUVERS
DIVISION 9 FINISHES
090320 PLASTER-1 HISTORIC PLASTER REPAIR: CEILINGS SEE DRAWINGS FOR LOCATIONS
090320 PLASTER-2 HISTORIC PLASTER REPAIR: MASONRY WALLS SEE DRAWINGS FOR LOCATIONS
092116.23 GYP-1 GYPSUM BOARD AT FIRE RATED SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
092216.23 FURR-1 METAL FURRING REFER TO DETAILS FOR TYPE: "Z", "HAT", CEILING, ETC.
092900 GYP-2 GYPSUM BOARD AT CEILINGS
092900 GYP-3 GYPSUM BOARD AT ACOUSTIC SEPARATION CEILINGS

MSR, LTD 3/21/2017; 5:35 PM
24 MARCH 2017

092900 GYP-4 GYPSUM BOARD AT INTERIOR WALLS
092900 TRIM-1 "J" EDGE BEAD
092900 TRIM-2 CORNER BEAD
092900 TRIM-3 SHADOW GAP TRIM
092900 TRIM-4 SHADOW GAP TRIM AT EDGE
GLAZED MOSAIC WALL TILE: 'Tile X Design - Market Collection -
093013 CT-1A
Ashbury - 4x7 Rhomboid - Pale Powder
GLAZED MOSAIC WALL TILE COLOR A: 'Rubble Tile - Rewind 8x8
093013 CT-2A
hexagon Vanilla [light grey/ white] - 88HEXRW90
GLAZED MOSAIC WALL TILE COLOR B: 'Rubble Tile - Rewind 8x8
093013 CT-2B
hexagon Polvere [light grey] - 88HEXRW91
GLAZED MOSAIC WALL TILE COLOR C: 'Rubble Tile - Rewind 8x8
093013 CT-2C
hexagon Tabacco [dark brown] - 88HEXRW93
PORCELAIN FLOOR TILE: 'Rubble Tile - Royal Mosa - Global collection -
093013 CT-3
12x12 Agate Grey - 12575050
GLAZED TILE COVE BASE: 'Rubble Tile - Royal Mosa - Global collection
093013 CTACC-1
- 4x6 Cove base - Agate Grey 75050P
093013 CT1ACC-2 GLAZED TILE INTERNAL CORNER STRIP
093013 CT1ACC-3 GLAZED TILE EXTERNAL CORNER STRIP
093013 CT1ACC-4 GLAZED TILE EDGE STRIP
093013 CT2ACC-2 GLAZED TILE INTERNAL CORNER STRIP
093013 CT2ACC-3 GLAZED TILE EXTERNAL CORNER STRIP
093013 CT2ACC-4 GLAZED TILE EDGE STRIP
093013 THOLD-1 NEW STONE THRESHOLDS WHITE CARRERA MARBLE, POLISHED
093013 CTTRIM-1 TILE TRIM: Schluter - DECO-DE - Stainless steel AT OUTSIDE CORNERS OF WALL TILE AREAS
093013 CTTRIM-2 For floor transition from WD-2 to CT-3
093016 XTILE-1 CLAY FLOOR TILE TO BE REHABILITATED LEVEL 1 PUBLIC AREA
093016 XTILE-2A NEW CLAY FLOOR TILE TO MATCH XTILE-1 LEVEL 1 PUBLIC AREA
093016 XTILE-2E NEW CLAY FLOOR TILE TO MATCH XTILE-1 BUT 6" SQUARE. LEVEL 1 PUBLIC AREA
EXTERIOR QUARRY TILE: 'Daltile 6" x 6" quarry tile (field tile). Grout
093016 QT-1 AT EXTERIOR LANDING OUTSIDE WILSON ST STAIR EXIT/ENTRY DOORS.
bed: St. Astier, NHL 3.5.
093016 QT1ACC-1 DRAINAGE PLANE BELOW QT-1: Schluter DITRA Drain. AT EXTERIOR LANDING OUTSIDE WILSON ST STAIR EXIT/ENTRY DOORS.
AT FULL HEIGHT WALLS TO DECK, WITH AXIOM TRIM AT ACT "CLOUDS" AT

095113 ACT-1 ACOUSTIC CEILING TILE 1: Armstrong Optima Tegular
SELECT LOCATIONS PER THE DRAWINGS.
095113 ACT-2 ACOUSTIC CEILING TILE 2: Armstrong Ultima Vector AT OFFICES/CONF ROOMS WITH PARTIAL HEIGHT WALLS
095123 ACT-3 ACOUSTIC CEILING TILE 3: Armstrong Optima Capz AT UNDERSIDE EXISTING FLOOR SLABS

MSR, LTD 3/21/2017; 5:35 PM
24 MARCH 2017
092900 ACA-1 ACOUSTIC CEILING ASSEMBLY BENEATH MECHANICAL ROOMS AT 3, AND IN CHILLER ROOM AT GF
096429 XFLOOR EXISTING WOOD FLOOR RESTORATION 2ND FLOOR OFFICES AT NORTH AND WEST WINGS, AND ROOM 260
096429 WD-1 SOLID WOOD FLOOR AT FLOOR BOXES (ROOM 260) WOOD FLOOR TO MATCH ROOM 260 WOOD FLOOR
096429 WD-2 SOLID WOOD FLOOR OVER EXISTING FLOOR TOPPING LEVEL 2 OFFICE AREAS SOUTH OF HISTORIC CORRIDOR
NEW HARDWOOD HANDRAILS, PANELS AND TRIM TO MATCH LEVEL 2 HISTORIC CORRIDOR, ROOM 260 PANELING, AND NEW HANDRAILS AT
060312 WD-3
XTG WAINSCOT: WHITE OAK STAINED TO MATCH EXISTING. HISTORIC STAIRS AT EAST AND WEST, AND NEW STAIR.
096429 MAT-2 RESILIENT ACOUSTICAL MAT: SONUS 1/8" MAT BELOW WD-2 AT L-2 SOUTH OF CORRIDOR.
096513 RB-1 RESILIENT BASE (GREY): Johnsonite 63 Burnt Umber GENERAL (NON-HISTORIC) AREAS THROUGHOUT
RUBBER SHEET FLOORING (GREY): Noraplan Sentica, Color 6521
142100 RF-1 EXISTING ELEVATOR CAB FLOOR FINISH - SEE ELEVATOR SPEC.
Sunday Paper.
PORTLAND CEMENT TERRAZZO FLOORING: Color based on
096613 TZ-1 AT TREADS AND LANDINGS OF NEW STAIR BTWN LEVELS G AND 1.
Tectura TZ-03: Foggy Day. Use inset non-slip strips per the drawings.
096723 EPOXY-1 EPOXY FLOOR FINISH AT FINAL PREP KITCHEN
096813 CPT-1 CARPET TILE: Tandus Centiva Avant 04840 Galvanized Pewter 11709 SELECTED OFFICE AREAS, PER FINISHES PLAN
096813 CPTTRIM-1 EDGES OF CARPET AT TRANSITIONS, PER FINISHES PLAN

tack bar
ENTRY FLOOR MAT 1, Interface - Style 1290102500 - Entry Level

096813 MAT-1
Color 7187 - Black
097516 BASE-1 NEW GREEN STONE WALL BASE TO MATCH HISTORIC SPECIES: TINOS OASIS GREEN MARBLE, POLISHED
097516 BASE-2 NEW WHITE STONE WALL BASE TO MATCH XTG PROFILE SPECIES: WHITE CARRARA MARBLE, POLISHED
098433 AWP-1A ACOUSTICAL WALL PANEL: ROOM 260 WALLS 1" THICK: ROOM 260 WALLS
098433 AWP-1B ACOUSTICAL WALL PANEL: ROOM 260 CEILING 2" THICK: ROOM 260 CEILING
098433 AWP-2 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANEL - CONF. ROOMS GENERALLY 2" THICK: MEETING / CONFERENCE ROOMS
ACOUSTICAL WALL PANEL FABRIC COVER 1: Luum, Linen Weave
098433 FABRIC-A FABRIC COVER TYPE 1, ROOM 260 WALLS, GRILLES, & CEILING
Sesame, 1018-07.
ACOUSTICAL WALL PANEL FABRIC COVER 2: DesignTex, Gammut
098433 FABRIC-B FABRIC COVER TYPE 2, CONFERENCE ROOM WALLS GENERALLY
3468-808
PT-6A REFER TO 086210 ABOVE EXISTING, HISTORIC DOOR AND FRAME PAINT
099113 PT-7_ EXTERIOR ALKYD, GLOSS LEVEL 3, PAINT EXISTING AND NEW, HISTORIC AND NEW METAL DOORS AND RAILINGS
099113 PT-8_ EXTERIOR LATEX, GLOSS LEVEL 1 (FLAT), PAINT CONCRETE STAIR STRINGERS ETC. AT WILSON ST
099113 PT-9_ EXTERIOR WATER-BASED INDUSTRIAL, GLOSS LEVEL 3, PAINT DUNNAGE AND OTHER EXTERIOR SUPPORT GALVANIZED STEEL
PAINT APPLIED OVER EXISTING ANODIZED ALUM. WINDOW
099113 / 099123 PT-10_ TO MATCH PT-_A IN COLOR.
FRAMES AT LEVELS 0 AND 1, IF ALTERNATE-1 IS NOT TAKEN.

MSR, LTD 3/21/2017; 5:35 PM
24 MARCH 2017

099123 PT-1_ INTERIOR SATIN LATEX PAINT INTERIOR PAINTING AND FINISHING
099123 PT-2_ INTERIOR EGGSHELL LATEX PAINT INTERIOR PAINTING AND FINISHING
099123 PT-3_ INTERIOR SEMI-GLOSS LATEX PAINT INTERIOR PAINTING AND FINISHING
099123 PT-4_ INTERIOR FLAT DRYFALL CEILING AND BDG SERVICES PAINT INTERIOR PAINTING AND FINISHING
099123 PT-5_ INTERIOR ABRASION-RESISTANT PAINT INTERIOR PAINTING AND FINISHING
PT-11_ REFER TO 084410 ABOVE FACTORY-APPLIED FINISH TO GLWS-3 DOORS
PT-12A REFER TO 086210 ABOVE INSIDE FACES OF 1929 HISTORIC WINDOW FRAMES AT LEVELS 2 AND 3.
099123 PT-_A Benjamin Moore Lehigh Green HC-131. HISTORIC GREEN

099123 PT-_B Benjamin Moore Chantily Lace 2121-70 NEW SPACES
099123 PT-_C [NOT USED]
099123 PT-_D [NOT USED]
099123 PT-_E [NOT USED]
Room 260 upper walls, level 1 historic public zone, level 2 corridor, Historic Bathrooms
099123 PT-_F Benjamin Moore Woodland Snow 2161-70
and historic stair walls
099123 PT-_G Benjamin Moore 2121-10 (Gray) steel balustrades externally, metal exterior signage letters.
Benjamin Moore Metallic Silver 2132-60 [similar to AL-B: Clear anodized new metal balustrades internally and other interior exposed metal components as noted
099123 PT-_H
aluminum] on the drawings.
Benjamin Moore 1099 Byzantine Gold: Apply tinted Umber glaze finish
099123 PT-_J Plaster "supports" at ends of fake beams on north and south walls of Room 260 ceiling.
coat to match half-circle plaster medallion above Judge's bench.
099123 PT-_K Scuffmaster: Scrubtough Max, Ref GOH 11459544, Color XC 019 STM Feature walls at levels G and 1, per the drawings.
099123 PT-_L PPG Light Silver, ref: AD3Y1346N steel doors at GLWS-3, to match clear anodized alum.
099300 CCT-1 STAIN TO MATCH HISTORIC TRIM, DOORS, PANELS.

099300 CCT-2 CLEAR COAT FINISH TO HISTORIC TRIM, DOORS, PANELS.
099646 SFRM-1 INTUMESCENT PAINT FOR 1HR FIRE PROTECTION OF VISIBLE INTERIOR STEEL STRUCTURE

MSR, LTD 3/21/2017; 5:35 PM
24 MARCH 2017

DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES
IN ALL CONFERENCE ROOMS EXCEPT ROOM 111 - SEE DRAWINGS FOR
101100 MKBD-1 MARKER BOARD: Clarus Glassboards, Pure White C100
LOCATION AND SIZE.
TACKABLE BOARD: Forbo, Bulletin Board, Koroseal - Aluminum J-Cap
101100 TACK-1 Frame, See drawings for size, Color: per manuf. std range at time of At staff areas where noted on the drawings
procurement.
GLASS DISPLAY CASE: CRL Architectural Products, Self-healing cork,

101200 DISPLAY-1 AT ENTRY VESTIBULES AND OTHER SELECT LOCATIONS - SEE FLOOR PLANS.
satin anodized frame. Size 48" high x 48" wide.
AT NEW RESTROOMS, AND AT SELECTED LOCATIONS ON LEVELS 2 AND 3.

NOTE THAT THE NEW TOILET PARTITIONS IN THE EXISTING, HISTORIC
102113.15 TOIL-1 STAINLESS STEEL TOILET ROOM PARTITION
RESTROOMS AT LEVEL 2 AND 3 WOMEN'S ROOMS ARE FLOOR MOUNTED NOT
HUNG FROM THE DECK ABOVE.
102113 TOIL-2 TOILET ROOM URINAL SCREEN AT ALL MEN'S ROOMS.
102116.19 SHOWER-1 SHOWER COMPARTMENT WALL PANEL AT SHOWER COMPARTMENTS, LEVEL 1.
TERRAZZO SHOWER TRAY: Acorn Engineering Company: Terrazzo
102116.19 SHOWER-2 TERRAZZO - RECESS INTO SLAB FOR ADA COMPLIANCE
ADA Shower Base, Model SBADA-36-3F.
TOILET PAPER DISPENSER - Wausau Paper, Model 80300, Double-roll
102800 TA-04
dispenser, Surface mounted. Color: Black.
PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER: Bobrick B-2860, surface mounted, SS

102800 TA-05 FOR KITCHENETTES AND COMFORT ROOMS.
finish.
102800 TA-07 WASTE RECEPTACLE: ULINE, Model H3622. free standing.
102800 TA-11 LIQUID SOAP DISPENSER: Gojo 2789-12
102800 TA-12 GRAB BARS: Bobrick, satin finish
SANITARY NAPKIN VENDOR: Bobrick B-2706C Classic Series, surface
102800 TA-13 TO BE INSTALLED IN ALL NEW PUBLICLY ACCESSIBLE RESTROOMS
mounted, satin stainless.
SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL: Bobrick B-270, Partition mounted,
102800 TA-14
Stainless steel
102800 TA-18 TOWEL HOLDER
102800 TA-17 WALL MOUNT MIRRORS FRAMED MIRRORS
102800 TA-19 COAT / ROBE HOOK: Bobrick, B-542, Single prong
102800 TA-21 FOLDING SHOWER SEAT: Bobrick B-5181, single phenolic, fold-up.
102800 TA-23 WARM AIR DRYER: XCELRATOReco AT RESTROOMS ONLY
102800 TA-24 DIAPER CHANGING STATION: Koala Kare KB200. LEVEL 0 AND 1 PUBLIC RESTROOMS, AND L-2 NEW UNISEX RESTROOMS ONLY.
102800 TA-25 UNDER-LAVATORY GUARDS: Truebro LAV Shield, Model 2018.

MSR, LTD 3/21/2017; 5:35 PM
24 MARCH 2017

102800 TA-30 MOP HOLDER: American Specialties, Inc.: 0795
102800 TA-31 UTILITY SHELF: American Specialties, Inc.: 1308-3
RECESSED AED CABINET: ALLIED MEDICAL PRODUCTS, SEE FLOOR PLANS FOR LOCATIONS. OWNER TO CONFIRM IF AED UNITS
102800 AED-1 STANDARD, SEMI-RECESSED, 14-1/8" SQUARE X 7" DEEP, COLOR: THEMSELVES TO BE INCLUDED IN THE CABINETS FOR BID (THIS IS NORMALLY
WHITE. AN O.F.O.I. ITEM).
KNOX SERIES 3200 SURFACE MOUNTED KNOX BOX WITH

102800 KNOX BOX MOUNT TO BOLLARD ADJACENT MLK BLVD ENTRY DOOR, PER THE DRAWINGS.
HINGED DOOR, IN BLACK.
104416 FEX-1 FIRE EXTINGUISHER TYPE 1: UL Rated 2A-20B
SOLID PHENOLIC LOCKERS - Hollman: Corporate Locker, Z-style with

105113 LOCKER-1 STAFF SHOWER ROOM
integrated bench. Finish - Solid Surface White Quartz
105113 LOCKER-2 P-LAM LOCKERS - Color: Grey FACILITIES STAFF ROOM

105113 BENCH LOCKER ROOM BENCH: AJW, HPDE
DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT
MICROWAVE, General Electric, JEM3072SHSS, counter top unit -
113100 MICRO-1 IN STAFF KITCHENETTES (OFOI)
OWNER FURNISHED OWNER INSTALLED (OFOI)
113100 REF-1 FULL SIZE FRIDGE, General Electric GDE25ESKSS - OFOI . IN STAFF KITCHENETTES (OFOI)
113100 REF-2 UNDER-COUNTER FRIDGE, General Electric GCE06GSHSB - OFOI. IN COMFORT ROOMS BELOW COUNTER (OFOI)
COMMERCIAL KITCHEN FRIDGE: Central Restaurant Products: True T-

113100 REF-3 IN FINAL PREP KICHEN AT LEVEL 2 (OFOI)
23 Reach-In Refrigerator - One Door. Product ref 675-001. - OFOI .
113100 WASHER-1 CLOTHES WASHER, Bosch, WAT28401UC - OFOI. IN FACILITIES LAUNDRY ROOM (OFOI)
113100 DRYER-1 CLOTHES DRYER, Bosch WTG86401UC - OFOI. IN FACILITIES LAUNDRY ROOM (OFOI)
113100 KEG-1 KEGERATOR - UBC KegMaster Double Tap Model KM15CT2 - OFOI. IN FINAL PREP KICHEN AT LEVEL 2 (OFOI)
ICE-1 ICE MAKER - Ice-O-Matic ICE0320 - OFOI. IN FINAL PREP KICHEN AT LEVEL 2 (OFOI)
DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS
MANUAL ROLLER SHADE - MECHOSHADE, Thermoveil Shadow
122413 SHADE-1
Grey, 3% openness.
123661 SSF-1 SOLID SURFACE 1: Formica Classics - Luna Concrete 781
123661 SSF-2 SOLID SURFACE 2: Sileston - Niebla
123661 SSF-3 SOLID SURFACE 3: Formica Classics - Luna Sand 757

MSR, LTD 3/21/2017; 5:35 PM
24 MARCH 2017
RECESSED MODULAR MATTING, JL Industries: Activar JL-600 series

124813 MAT-3 AT ENTRY ZONES AT GROUND LEVEL AND LEVEL 1 - SEE PLANS.
roll-up grating, 3/4" deep, clear anodizd alum. frame JL-AA. Color - Grey
129313 RACK-1 BICYCLE HANGING RACKS: PARK-A-BIKE SS10. AT NEW ADDITION, LEVEL 1
DIVISION 14 CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

142100 ELEV-1 EXISTING ELEVATOR TO BE REFURBISHED REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE AND FINISHES
DIVISION 22 PLUMBING
224713 DF-X DRINKING FOUNTAIN AND BOTTLE FILLER
221316 / 221423 CO CLEANOUT
221423 DS-X DOWN SPOUT
221316 FCO FLOOR CLEANOUT
221316 FD FLOOR DRAIN
221119 FWH-X FREEZELESS WALL HYDRANT
224216.16 MS-X JANITOR'S MOP SINK
224216.13 L-X LAVATORY
REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS AND SPECS FOR LOCATIONS AND TYPES
224216.16 S-1 COUNTERTOP SINK AT KITCHENETTES
224216.16 S-2 HANDWASH SINK AT FINAL PREP KITCHEN
224216.16 S-3 FOOD PREP SINK AT FINAL PREP KITCHEN
224216.16 S-4 FOUR-BOWL WASHUP SINK AT FINAL PREP KITCHEN
224223 SH-1 SHOWER HEAD
224213.16 UR-X WALL-HUNG URINAL
221316 VTR VENT THROUGH ROOF
224213.13 WC-X WATER CLOSET
221119 GGB OUTLET BOX AT LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT AND KITCHENETTE WATER APPLIANCES
DIVISION 23 MECHANICAL
237313 AHU-X MECHANICAL AIR HANDLING UNIT
233600 AV-X MECHANICAL AIR VALVE
238219 FCU-X FAN COIL UNIT
233300 FDAMPER FIRE DAMPER
SEE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR LOCATIONS
233713 LPH-X MECHANICAL AIR INTAKE/EXHAUST
233713 MGRILLE MECHANICAL RETURN/TRANSFER GRILLE
233713 MVENT MECHANICAL VENT
238229 PR-X MECHANICAL HYDRONIC UNIT / RADIATOR

MSR, LTD 3/21/2017; 5:35 PM
24 MARCH 2017

DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL
260533 FBOX RECESSED FLOOR BOX FOR POWER/DATA/AV
260923 OS OCCUPANCY SENSOR
260923 PC PHOTOCELL
262726 REC RECEPTACLE
DIVISION 27 TECHNOLOGY
AV-MON AV FLAT PANEL MONITOR (OFCI)
AV-MNT AV FLAT PANEL MONITOR MOUNT
CAM CLOSED CIRCUIT CAMERA
CM-X AV SYSTEM PTZ CAMERA (OFCI)
CR-X CARD READER
DR SECURITY DURESS/PANIC BUTTON SEE TECHNOLOGY DRAWINGS FOR LOCATIONS AND SIZES
SP-X AV SYSTEM SPEAKER (OFCI)
SM-X SOUND MASKING SPEAKER
TP-X TABLE TOP AV CONNECTIVITY BOX AND PLATE
WAP WIRELESS ACCESS POINT
WP-1 WALL AV CONNECTIVITY BOX AND PLATE
DIVISION 28 FIRE ALARM AND SECURITY

283111 ANNC ANNUNCIATOR
283111 FAAP FIRE ALARM ANNUNCIATOR PANEL
SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR LOCATIONS AND SIZES
283111 FACP FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL
283111 S SMOKE DETECTOR

CITY OF MADISON
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
REVISED August 29, 2016
1 SECTION 00 31 46
2 PERMITS
3
4 PART 1 – GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
5 1.1. SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
6 1.2. REFERENCES .................................................................................................................................................................. 1
7 1.3. GENERAL CONTRACTORS REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................................... 1
8 PART 2 – PRODUCTS – THIS SECTION NOT USED .............................................................................................................................. 1
9 PART 3 – EXECUTION – THIS SECTION NOT USED ............................................................................................................................. 1
10
11 PART 1 – GENERAL
12
13 1.1. SUMMARY
14 A. Each project has varying requirements for permits, inspections, and fees based on the scope, size, and location of
15 the project.
16 B. The City of Madison (Owner) is subject to all permits, inspections and associated fees for construction,
17 demolition, utility connection, storm water management, and other similar requirements that may be required
18 to complete the scope of work associated with these contract documents.
19 C. The General Contractor (GC) shall be responsible for obtaining all permits, inspections and paying for all
20 associated fees unless specifically identified within this specification.
21
22 1.2. REFERENCES
23 A. The following references are not intended to be all inclusive. It shall be the GC’s responsibility to determine all
24 requirements based on the scope of work in the contract documents.
25 B. City of Madison Ordinances: Review all ordinances that may require a permit or fee that may be connected with
26 a required permit. Contact the following City Agencies to determine the exact requirements during bidding
27 1. Building Inspection
28 2. Zoning
29 3. Engineering
30 4. Water Utility
31 5. Traffic Engineering
32 6. Others as may be specified by the contract documents.
33 B. State Statutes
34 C. Other Regulatory Regulations
35 D. Other Agencies or companies that may have related requirements
36 1. Madison Metropolitan Sewerage District
37 2. Local gas and electric utility companies
38 3. Other utility companies
39
40 1.3. GENERAL CONTRACTORS REQUIREMENTS
41 A. The GC shall be responsible for all of the following:
42 1. Execute application for all required permits as may be required by the scope of work described within the
43 contract documents.
44 2. Paying all fees associated with the application of any required permits.
45 3. Scheduling all required inspections that may be conditions of any required permits.
46 B. The GC shall provide high quality scanned images of all required permits and inspections and upload them to the
47 Contract Documents-Regulatory Documents Library on the Project Management Web Site.
48
49 PART 2 – PRODUCTS – THIS SECTION NOT USED
50
51 PART 3 – EXECUTION – THIS SECTION NOT USED
52
53
54
55 END OF SECTION

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 00 31 46 - 1 PERMITS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 01 23 00
2 ALTERNATES
4 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
5 1.2 SUMMARY
6 1.3 DEFINITIONS
7 1.4 PROCEDURES
8 PART 2 – PRODUCTS
9 NOT USED
10 PART 3 – EXECUTION
11 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
12 PART 1 - GENERAL

14 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
15 other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
16 1.2 SUMMARY
17 A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.
18 1.3 DEFINITIONS
19 A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the
20 bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if the Owner decides to
21 accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products,
22 materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.
23 1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement.
24 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to
25 incorporate alternates into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.
26 1.4 PROCEDURES
27 A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the
28 alternate into Project.
29 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items
30 incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.
31 B. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.
32 C. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced
33 in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each
34 alternate.
35 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
36 PART 3 - EXECUTION
37 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

38
39 A. Alternate No.1: Window Installation.
40 1. Alternate: Provide all work to install window types W1, W5, W5a, W6, W7 AS indicated on sheets
41 A201, A202, A620, A622, A653; and as specified in exhibit "N" specification section 085113 -
42 ALUMINUM WINDOWS.
43
44 B. Alternate No.2: Vegetated Roof Module (Tray) System.
45 1. Alternate: Provide all work to install an extensive vegetated roof module (tray) system to roof areas
46 as indicated on sheet C110 and related details; and as specified in exhibit "N" specification
47 sections 075213 - APP Modified Asphalt Bituminous Roofing or 075216 - SBS Modified Asphalt
48 Bituminous Roofing..
49 END OF SECTION

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 01 23 00 - 1 ALTERNATES
CITY OF MADISON
REVISED November 11, 2016
1 SECTION 01 25 13
2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
3
4 PART 1 – GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
5 1.1. SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
6 1.2. RELATED SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................................................................. 1
7 PART 2 – PRODUCTS.......................................................................................................................................................................... 1
8 2.1. SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM .................................................................................................................................... 1
9 PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................................................................... 1
10 3.1. REQUESTING A SUBSTITUTION DURING BIDDING......................................................................................................... 1
11 3.2. REQUESTING A SUBSTITUTION AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT ..................................................................................... 2
12 3.3. UNAUTHORIZED SUBSTITUTIONS.................................................................................................................................. 2
13
15
16 1.1. SUMMARY
17 A. The City of Madison uses a specific list of preferred products for various specification items to establish
18 standards of quality, utility, and appearance required.
19 B. The City of Madison will not allow substitutions for specified Products except as follows:
20 1. The Product is no longer produced or the product manufacturer is no longer in business.
21 2. The manufacturer has significantly changed performance data, product dimensions, or other such design
22 criteria for the specified Product(s).
23 3. Products specified by naming one or more Products or manufacturer’s and “or approved equal” or
24 “approved equivalent.”
25 C. The City of Madison will not allow substitutions for specified Products as follows:
26 1. For Products specified by naming only one Product and manufacturer, no substitute product will be
27 considered.
28 2. For Products specified by naming several Products or manufacturers select any one of the products or
29 manufacturers named, which complies with the specifications. No substitute product will be considered.
30 D. Request for substitutions from any party other than the General Contractor (GC) will not be accepted.
31
32 1.2. RELATED SPECIFICATIONS
33 A. Section 01 26 13 Request for Information (RFI)
34 B. Section 01 31 23 Project Management Web Site
35 C. Section 01 33 23 Submittals
36
38
39 2.1. SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
40 A. During bidding all contractors (General and Sub-contractors) and suppliers of materials or products shall provide
41 the Substitution Request form and all required attachments directly to the Project Architect and City Project
42 Manager. Submission shall use the form located at the end of this specification.
43 1. Contractors and suppliers shall use the screen shot of the form located at the end of this specification to
44 print a hard copy for all pre-bid substitution requests.
45 B. After bidding only the GC shall submit a request and shall use the form located on the Project Management Web
46 Site.
47
49
50 3.1. REQUESTING A SUBSTITUTION DURING BIDDING
51 A. In the event that a substitution is requested during the bidding phase the Contractor or Supplier shall meet the
52 substitution request deadline listed in the bidding documents. No substitution request will be considered during
53 the bidding period after the stated substitution request deadline. In general this procedure shall be as follows:
54 1. Submit the Substitution Request Form including all required supporting documentation to the City
55 Project Manager and Project Architect by the substitution request deadline specified in Section A of the
56 Contract Documents. Utilize the Substitution Request Form found at the end of this Section.
57 2. Submit a Substitution Request Form for each product, supported with complete data, drawings and
58 samples as appropriate, including:

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 25 13 - 1 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
CITY OF MADISON
1 i. Comparison of qualities of the proposed substitutions with that specified.

2 ii. Changes required in other elements of the Work because of the substitution.
3 iii. Effect on the construction schedule.
4 iv. Cost data comparing the proposed substitution with the Product specified.
5 v. Any required license fees or royalties.
6 vi. Availability of maintenance service and source of replacement materials.
7 3. The Owner and Architect will review the Substitution Request Form and if approved the City of Madison
8 will publish a bidding addendum authorizing the replacement. The Owner and Architect may reject any
9 substitution request without providing specific reasons.
10 B. Substitutions submitted and approved during the bidding phase shall be announced by the City of Madison by
11 addenda prior to the bid due date.
12
13 3.2. REQUESTING A SUBSTITUTION AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT
14 A. A substitution request will only be considered after award of contract if it meets the qualifying provisions as
15 described in 1.1.B.1 and .2 above.
16 B. The GC shall submit a substitution request using the digital form on the Project Management Web Site located in
17 the Construction Administration-Substitution Request library.
18 1. Click on Add document to open a new digital form, fill out form, provide required attachments, then click
19 the Submit button.
20 2. Consulting Staff, Owner and Owners Representatives will review the request and provide the appropriate
21 approvals and feed back to the GC.
22
23 3.3. UNAUTHORIZED SUBSTITUTIONS
24 A. Any Contractor who substitutes products without proper authorization by the Owner and Architect will be
25 required to immediately remove and replace the product and all costs required to conform to the Contract
26 Documents shall be borne by the General Prime Contractor.
27
28
29
30 END OF SECTION
31

CITY OF MADISON
1
2
3
4
5

CITY OF MADISON
1 SECTION 01 26 13
2 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI)
3
4 PART 1 – GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
5 1.1. SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
7 1.3. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS................................................................................................................................... 1
8 1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................................................................................... 1
9 PART 2 – PRODUCTS.......................................................................................................................................................................... 1
10 2.1. REQUEST FOR INFORMATION FORM ............................................................................................................................ 1
11 PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................................................................... 1
12 3.1. CONTRACTOR INITIATED RFI ......................................................................................................................................... 2
13 3.3. RFI RESPONSES .............................................................................................................................................................. 2
14 3.4. COMMENCEMENT OF WORK RELATED TO AN RFI ........................................................................................................ 2
15
17
18 1.1. SUMMARY
19 A. Contractors shall use the RFI form/process to request additional information or clarification regarding the
20 construction documents.
21 B. All RFI documentation will be processed through the through the Construction Administration-Request for
22 Information Library on the Project Management Web Site (PMWS).
23
25 A. Section 01 26 46 Construction Bulletin (CB)
26 B. Section 01 26 57 Change Order Request (COR)
27 C. Section 01 26 63 Change Order (CO)
28 D. Section 01 31 23 Project Management Web Site (PMWS)
29
30 1.3. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
31 A. RFI issues initiated by any contractor shall be done through the General Contractor (GC).
32 1. RFIs submitted by any Sub-contractor under the GCs control shall be returned with no response.
33 B. Submit a new RFI for each issue. Only multiple questions that are of a similar nature may be combined into one
34 RFI shall be allowed and responded to.
35
36 1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE
38 1. Ensure that any request for additional information is valid and the information being requested is not
39 addressed in the construction documents.
40 2. Ensure that all requests are clearly stated and the RFI form is completely filled out.
41 3. Ensure that all Work associated an RFI response is carried out as intended.
42 B. The PA shall be responsible for the following:
43 1. Ensure that all responses to contractor initiated RFIs are properly responded to in a timely fashion.
44 a. The CPM, Owner, consulting staff, and other City staff shall be responsible for the initial review of
45 the RFI. The PA shall be responsible for codifying all consultant and Owner/City staff comments
46 into a unified RFI response.
47
49
50 2.1. REQUEST FOR INFORMATION FORM
51 A. The RFI form is located on the Project Management Web Site. The GC, PA, or CPM as appropriate shall click the
52 link in the left margin of the project web site opening a new form. Project information is pre-loaded, provide
53 additional information as indicated below in the execution to complete the form.
54
56

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 26 13 - 1 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI)
CITY OF MADISON
1 3.1. CONTRACTOR INITIATED RFI

2 A. Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents
3 any contractor may initiate an RFI for additional information or clarification through the GC.
4 B. The GC shall select the “Submit an RFI” link on the Project Management Web Site and completely fill out the
5 form as follows:
6 1. Contract related information will be automatically populated on the form.
7 2. Thoroughly explain the issue at hand, provide backup information (photographs, sketches, drawings,
8 data, etc) as necessary, and clearly state the question or problem that requires a resolution. Combine
9 like or related issues but do not include multiple issues on one form.
10 a. Example. If a duct interferes with other critical piping and electrical work include all issues into
11 one RFI.
12 b. Example. If you have a question regarding the chiller and another regarding toilet partitions
13 create separate RFIs.
14 3. Check all relevant boxes for trades affected. This will assist the design team in determining who should
15 be reviewing the RFI.
16 C. Upon completing the RFI click the “Submit” button. The PMWS software will automatically route the RFI to the
17 appropriate reviewers.
18
19 3.3. RFI RESPONSES
20 A. Responses to simple RFI issues shall use the response section of the RFI form and shall be completed within five
21 (5) working days of the RFI form being submitted.
22 B. Responses to more complex issues may require additional time or may require a Construction Bulletin to be
23 published. The initial RFI shall be responded to within five (5) working days stating that the RFI is being
24 reviewed and provide an estimated date for the response.
25 C. The following GC generated RFIs will be returned without action:
26 1. Requests for approval of submittals
27 2. Requests for approval of substitutions
28 3. Requests for approval of Contractor’s means and methods.
29 4. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents.
30 5. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
31 6. Requests for interpretation of A/E’s actions on submittals.
32 7. Incomplete RFI or inaccurately prepared RFI.
33
34 3.4. COMMENCEMENT OF WORK RELATED TO AN RFI
35 A. The GC shall only proceed with the Work of an RFI when additional information is not required.
36 B. The GC shall not proceed with any Work associated with an RFI while it is under review.
37 C. The GC shall not proceed with any Work associated with an RFI that clearly states a CB will be issued in response
38 to the RFI.
39 D. The GC will be required to immediately remove and replace unauthorized Work and all costs required to
40 conform to the Contract Documents shall be borne by the GC.
41
42
43
44 END OF SECTION
45

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 26 13 - 2 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI)
CITY OF MADISON
1 SECTION 01 26 46
2 CONSTRUCTION BULLETIN (CB)
3
4 PART 1 – GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
5 1.1. SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
9 PART 2 – PRODUCTS.......................................................................................................................................................................... 2
10 2.1. CONSTRUCTION BULLETIN FORM ................................................................................................................................. 2
11 PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2
12 3.1. WRITING THE CONSTRUCTION BULLETIN ..................................................................................................................... 2
13 3.2. EXECUTING THE CONSTRUCTION BULLETIN.................................................................................................................. 2
14
16
17 1.1. SUMMARY
18 A. Construction Bulletins (CB) are formal published construction documents that modify the original contract bid
19 documents after construction has commenced. CBs may be published for many reasons, including but not
20 limited to the following:
21 1. Clarification of existing construction documents including specifications, plans, and details
22 2. Change in product or equipment
23 3. A response to a Request for Information
24 4. Change in scope of the contract as either an add or a deduct of work
25 B. CBs provide a higher degree of detail in response to a Request for Information (RFI) through directives, revised
26 plans/details, and specifications as necessary.
27 C. The CB may change the original contract documents through additions or deletions to the Work.
28 D. Where the directives of a CB are significant enough to warrant a Change Order Request (COR) the GC shall use all
29 information provided in the CB to assemble all required back-up documentation for additions and deletions of
30 materials, labor and other related contract costs for the COR.
31 E. All CB documentation will be processed through the Construction Administration-Construction Bulletin Library
32 on the Project Management Web Site (PMWS).
33
36 B. Section 01 26 57 Change Order Request (COR)
38 D. Section 01 31 23 Project Management Web Site
39
41 A. Project Architect (PA): The PA shall be the only person authorized to publish a CB as needed for any reason
42 indicated in section 1.1.A above. The PA shall consult as necessary with any of the following while drafting the
43 CB and shall confirm final direction with the CPM prior to issuing a CB:
44 1. City Project manager (CPM)
45 2. Owner
46 3. Members of the consulting staff
47 4. Members of city staff
48 5. The General Contractor
49 6. Sub-contractors
50 B. General Contractor: The GC shall be responsible for the following as needed:
51 1. Executing the directives of the CB when he/she believes that no changes in labor, materials, equipment,
52 or contract duration will be required for additions or deletions.
53 2. Submit a COR when he/she believes that a change in labor, materials, equipment or contract duration
54 will be required for additions or deletions.
55
57 A. The PA shall be responsible for ensuring the final CB sufficiently provides direction, details, specifications and
58 other information as necessary for the GC to perform the intended Work.

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 26 46 - 1 CONSTRUCTION BULLETIN (CB)
CITY OF MADISON
1 B. The PA shall be responsible for ensuring the final CB is published as expeditiously as practical based on the
2 complexity of the CB being written. CBs that may affect the GC critical path shall be given priority.
3
5
6 2.1. CONSTRUCTION BULLETIN FORM
7 A. The CB form is located on the Project Management Web Site. The PA shall click the link in the left margin of the
8 project web site opening a new form. Project information is pre-loaded, the PA only needs to enter information
9 and make attachments as needed to complete the form.
10
12
13 3.1. WRITING THE CONSTRUCTION BULLETIN
14 A. The PA shall draft a CB as needed using the Construction Bulletin form on the Project Management Web Site.
15 1. The PA and/or consulting staff as necessary shall provide specifications, model numbers and performance
16 data, details and other such information necessary to clearly state the intentions of the CB.
17 2. The consulting staff, CPM, Owner, and other City Staff shall review the draft and recommend changes as
18 needed.
19 3. The PA shall amend the draft as necessary into a final CB for review
20 B. Once the final CB has been approved the PA shall “Submit” the CB through the Project Management Web Site to
21 the GC.
22
23 3.2. EXECUTING THE CONSTRUCTION BULLETIN
24 A. The GC shall acknowledge receipt of the CB on the Project Management Web Site as instructed in the Tutorial
25 Manual provided to the awarded contractor.
26 B. The GC shall notify all Sub-contractors of the CB and publish the CB to all field sets of drawings and specifications
27 as appropriate.
28 C. The GC shall execute the directives of the CB or submit COR documentation as necessary during the execution
29 and implementation of the CB.
30 1. See Specification 01 26 57 Change Order Request (COR)
31
32
33
34 END OF SECTION

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 26 46 - 2 CONSTRUCTION BULLETIN (CB)
CITY OF MADISON
1 SECTION 01 26 57
2 CHANGE ORDER REQUESTS (COR)
3
4 PART 1 – GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
5 1.1. SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
6 1.2. RELATED SPECIFICATION SECTIONS .............................................................................................................................. 2
7 1.3. DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS ..................................................................................................................................... 2
8 1.4. CONTRACT EXTENSION ................................................................................................................................................. 3
9 1.5. OVERHEAD AND PROFIT MARKUP ................................................................................................................................ 3
12 PART 2 – PRODUCTS.......................................................................................................................................................................... 4
13 2.1. CHANGE ORDER REQUEST FORM.................................................................................................................................. 4
14 PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................................................................... 4
15 3.1. ESTABLISHING A CHANGE ORDER REQUEST ................................................................................................................. 4
16 3.2. SUBMIT A CHANGE ORDER REQUEST FORM ................................................................................................................. 4
17 3.3. CHANGE ORDER REQUEST REVIEW, APPROVAL, AND PROCESSING ............................................................................. 5
18 3.4. EMERGENCY CHANGE ORDER REQUEST ....................................................................................................................... 5
19
21
22 1.1. SUMMARY
23 A. Except in cases of emergency, no changes in the Work required by the Contract Documents may be made
24 by the General Contractor (GC) without having prior approval of the City Engineer or his representative.
25 B. The City may at any time, without invalidating the Contract and without Notice to Sureties, order changes in
26 the Work by written Change Order (CO). Such changes may include additions and/or deletions.
27 C. Where the City desires to make changes in the Work through use of written Change Order Request (COR), the
28 following procedures apply:
29 1. If requested by the City, the GC shall prepare and submit a detailed proposal, including all cost and time
30 adjustments to which the GC believes it will be entitled if the change proposed is incorporated into the
31 Contract. The City shall be under no legal obligation to issue a Change Order for such proposal.
32 2. The parties shall attempt in good faith to reach agreement on the adjustments needed to the Contract to
33 properly incorporate the proposed change(s) into the Work. In the event that the parties agree on such
34 adjustments, the City may issue a Change Order and incorporate such changes and agreed to
35 adjustments, if any.
36 3. In some instances, it may be necessary for the City to authorize Work or direct changes in Work for which
37 no final and binding agreement has been reached and for which unit prices are not applicable. In such
38 cases the following shall apply.
39 a. Upon written request by the City, the GC shall perform proposed Work
40 b. The cost of such change may be determined in accordance with this specification.
41 c. In the event agreement cannot be accomplished as contemplated herein, the City may authorize
42 the Work to be performed by City forces or to hire others to complete the Work. Such action on
43 the part of the City shall not be the basis of a claim by the GC for failure to allow it to perform the
44 changed Work.
45 D. Where changes in the Work are made by the City through use of a force account basis, the GC shall as soon as
46 practicable, and in no case later than ten (10) working days from the receipt of such order, unless another time
47 period has been agreed to by both parties, give the City written Notice, stating:
48 1. The date, circumstances and source of the extra work; and,
49 2. The cost of performing extra work described by such Order, if any; and,
50 3. Effect of the order on the required completion date of the Project, if any.
51 E. The giving of each Notice by the GC as prescribed by this specification, shall be a requirement to liability of the
52 City for payment of any additional costs incurred by the GC in implementing changes in the Work. Under this
53 specification, no order or statement of the City shall be treated as a Change Order, or shall entitle the GC to an
54 equitable adjustment of the terms of this Contract or damages for costs incurred by the GC on any activity for
55 which the Notice was not given.
56 F. In the event Work is required due to an emergency as described in this specification the GC must request an
57 equitable adjustment as soon as practicable, and in no case later than ten (10) working days of the
58 commencement of such emergency.

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 26 57 - 1 CHANGE ORDER REQUESTS
CITY OF MADISON
1 G. All GC requests for equitable adjustment shall be submitted to the CPM per the specifications below. Such
2 requests shall set forth with specificity the amount of and reason(s) for the proposed adjustment and shall be
3 accompanied by supporting information and documents.
4 H. No adjustment of any kind shall be made to this Contract, if asserted by the GC for the first time, after the date
5 of final payment.
6 I. This specification shall be used by the GC when preparing documentation for any COR to ensure each has been
7 properly and completely filled out as required by the City of Madison.
8 J. All COR documentation will be processed through the Construction Administration-Change Order Request
9 Library on the Project Management Web Site (PMWS).
10
11 1.2. RELATED SPECIFICATION SECTIONS
13 B. Section 01 26 46 Construction Bulletins (CB)
16 E. Parts of this specification will reference articles within “The City of Madison Standard Specifications for Public
17 Works Construction”.
18 1. Use the following link to access the Standard Specifications web page:
19 http://www.cityofmadison.com/business/pw/specs.cfm
20 a. Click on the “Part” chapter identified in the specification text. For example if the specification
21 says “Refer to City of Madison Standard Specification 210.2” click the link for Part II, the Part II
22 PDF will open.
23 b. Scroll through the index of Part II for specification 210.2 and click the text link which will take you
24 to the referenced text.
25
26 1.3. DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS
27 A. LABOR: The amount of time and cost associated with the performance of human effort for a defined scope of
28 Work. Labor is further defined as follows:
29 1. Labor rate is the total hourly rate which includes the basic rate of pay, fringe benefits plus each
30 company’s cost of required insurance, also referred to as a reimbursable labor rate.
31 2. Unit labor is the labor hours anticipated to install the corresponding unit of material.
32 3. Labor cost is the labor hours multiplied by the hourly labor rates.
33 B. MATERIAL: Actual material cost is the amount paid, or to be paid, by the GC for materials, supplies and
34 equipment entering permanently into the Work, including cost of transportation and applicable taxes. The cost
35 shall not exceed the usual and customary cost for such items available in the geographical area of the project
36 C. LARGE TOOLS AND MAJOR EQUIPMENT: Large tools and major equipment are those with an initial cost greater
37 than $1,500, whether from the GC or other sources.
38 1. Tool and equipment use and time allowed is only for extra work associated with change orders.
39 a. Rental Rate is the machine cost associated with operating a piece of equipment for a defined
40 length of time (hour, day, week, or month) and shall not exceed the usual and customary amount
41 for such items available in the geographical area of the project.
42 b. Rental cost is the rental rate multiplied by the anticipated duration the equipment shall be
43 required.
44 2. The GC shall provide a breakdown of all rental rates to indicate what items and costs are associated with
45 the rate. Examples of items to include in the breakdown would be fuel consumption, lubrication,
46 maintenance and other similar expenses but not including profit and overhead.
47 3. When large tools and equipment needed for Change Order work are not already at the job site, the
48 actual cost to get the item there is also reimbursable.
49 D. BOND COST: The cost shall be calculated at 1% of the total proposed change order.
50 E. SUB-CONTRACTOR COSTS: Sub-contractor costs are for those labor, material, and equipment costs required by
51 subcontracted specialties to complete the Change Order work including allowable markups as outlined within
52 this specification.
53 F. OVERHEAD AND PROFIT Markup: The allowable markup percentage to a COR by the GC and Sub-contractors for
54 overhead and profit. All of the following are expenses associated with overhead and profit and shall not be
55 reimbursable as individual items on any COR:
56 1. CHANGE ORDER PREPARATION: All costs associated with the preparing and processing of the change
57 order.

CITY OF MADISON
1 2. DESIGN, ESTIMATING, AND SUPERVISION: All such efforts, unless specifically requested by Owner as
2 additional Work to be documented as a COR or portion thereof.
3 3. INSTALLATION LAYOUT: The layout required for the installation of material and equipment, and the
4 installation design, is the responsibility of the GC.
5 4. SMALL TOOLS AND SUPPLIES: The cost of small hand tools with an initial cost of $1,500 or less, along
6 with consumable supplies and expendable items such as drill bits, saw blades, gasoline, lubricating or
7 cutting oil, and similar items.
8 5. GENERAL EXPENSE: The general expense, which is those items that are a specific job cost not associated
9 with direct labor and material such as job trailers, foreman truck, and similar items.
10 6. RECORD DRAWINGS: The preparation of record or as-built drawings.
11 7. OTHER COSTS: Any miscellaneous cost not directly assessable to the execution of the Change Order
12 including but not limited to the following:
13 a. All association dues, assessments, and similar items.
14 b. All education, training, and similar items.
15 c. All drafting and/or engineering, unless specifically requested by Owner as additional Work to be
16 documented as a Change Order proposal or portion thereof.
17 d. All other items including but not limited to review, coordination, estimating and expediting, field
18 and office supervision, administrative work, etc.
19 G. Contract Extension: The necessary amount of time to be added to the contract deadlines for the completion of a
20 change order.
21
22 1.4. CONTRACT EXTENSION
23 A. The GC shall not assume that every COR will require a Contract Extension. If the GC feels a contract extension is
24 warranted he/she shall provide sufficient scheduling information that shows how the COR being requested
25 impacts the critical path of the project.
26 B. The City of Madison strongly encourages the GC to explore alternative methods and practices prior to submitting
27 a COR with a request for contract extension.
28
29 1.5. OVERHEAD AND PROFIT MARKUP
30 A. Pursuant to the City of Madison Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Section 104.7, Extra
31 Work, the following maximum allowable markups shall be strictly enforced on all change orders associated with
32 the execution of this contract.
33 1. The total maximum overhead and profit shall not exceed fifteen percent (15%) of the total costs.
34 2. The total maximum overhead and profit shall be distributed as follows:
35 a. For work performed and materials provided solely by the General Contractor, fifteen percent
36 (15%) of the total costs.
37 b. For work performed and materials provided solely by Sub-contractors and supervised by the
38 General Contractor:
39 i. Supervision of the GC, five percent (5%) of the total Sub-contractor cost.
40 ii. Sub-contractors work and materials ten percent (10%) of the total Sub-contractor cost.
41
43 A. The GC shall become thoroughly familiar with this specification as it will identify procedures and expenses that
44 are or are not allowed under the Change Order and Change Order Request process.
45 B. The GC shall be responsible for all of the following:
46 1. Carefully reviewing the CB that is associated with the COR.
47 2. Collecting required supporting documentation from all contractors that quantify the need for a COR.
48 a. Labor hours and wage rates
49 b. Material costs
50 c. Equipment costs
51 C. The following shall apply to establishing prices for labor, materials, and equipment costs:
52 1. Where Work to be completed has previously been established by individual bid items in the contract bid
53 proposal the GC shall use the unit bid prices previously established.
54 2. Where Work to be completed was bid as a Lump Sum without individual bid items the GC shall provide a
55 breakdown of all labor, materials, equipment including unit rates and quantities required.
56 D. The completion date is determined by Owner. The schedule, however, is the responsibility of the GC. Time
57 extensions for extra Work will be considered when a schedule analysis of the critical path shows that the Change
58 Order Request places the Work beyond the completion date stated in the Contract.

CITY OF MADISON
1
3 A. The GC shall be responsible for ensuring that all COR supporting documentation meets the following
4 requirements prior to completing the COR form on the Project Management Web Site:
5 1. Sufficiently indicates labor, material, and other expenses related to completing the intent of the CB.
6 2. No costs exceed the usual and customary amount for such items available in the geographical area of the
7 project, and no costs exceed those established under the contract.
8 B. The Project Architect (PA), City Project Manager (CPM), other members of the consulting staff, and city staff shall
9 review all COR requests to ensure that the intent of the CB will be met under the proposal of the COR or request
10 additional information as necessary.
11
13
14 2.1. CHANGE ORDER REQUEST FORM
15 A. The COR form is located on the Project Management Web Site. The GC shall click the link in the left margin of
16 the project web site opening a new form. Follow additional instructions below in the execution section for filling
17 out the form.
18
20
21 3.1. ESTABLISHING A CHANGE ORDER REQUEST
22 A. Upon receipt of a Construction Bulletin (CB) where the GC believes a significant change in contract scope
23 warrants the submittal of a COR the GC shall do all of the following within ten (10) working days after receipt of
24 the CB:
25 1. Review the CB with all necessary trades and sub-contractors required by the change in scope.
26 a. Additions or deletions to the contract scope shall be as directed within the CB.
27 b. Additions or deletions of labor and materials shall be determined by the GC based on the
28 directives of the CB.
29 2. Assemble all required back-up documentation for additions and deletions of materials, labor and other
30 related contract costs as previously outlined in this specification.
31 3. Submit a COR request form on the Project Management Web Site.
32 B. Submitting a COR does not obligate the GC to complete the work associated with the COR nor does it obligate
33 the Owner to approve the COR as a change to the contract.
34
35 3.2. SUBMIT A CHANGE ORDER REQUEST FORM
36 A. This specification shall provide a subject overview only. In depth instructions shall be provided to the awarded
37 Contractor in a PDF Instructional Manual.
38 B. The GC shall select the “Submit a COR” link on the Project Management Web Site.
39 C. The software will open a new COR form and the GC shall provide all of the following information:
40 1. DO NOT perform any calculations on this worksheet, only provide the raw data as requested below. All
41 calculations, totals, and markups shall be computed as described within this specification.
42 2. Provide a summary description of the COR request, and justification for any requested time extension to
43 the contract, indicate the number of calendar days being requested for the extension and add any
44 attachments to the form as needed.
45 3. Provide all GC self performance data including all of the following:
46 a. Materials description, quantities, and unit costs.
47 b. Labor hours and rates for all Foremen, Journeymen, and Apprentices by trade.
48 c. Equipment descriptions, quantities, unit costs and rates.
49 4. Provide all Sub-contractor data including all of the following:
50 a. Materials description, quantities, and unit costs.
51 b. Labor hours and rates for all Foremen, Journeymen, and Apprentices by trade.
52 c. Equipment descriptions, quantities, unit costs and rates.
53 5. Ensure all calculations performed by the form have been completed correctly. Contact the CPM directly
54 if you suspect an error before hitting the save button.
55 C. At any time after creating a COR you must at a minimum click “Save as Draft” to save your work.
56 D. When all data has been entered and verified click on the “Submit COR” button. This will kick off the COR Review
57 and Approval process.
58

CITY OF MADISON
1 3.3. CHANGE ORDER REQUEST REVIEW, APPROVAL, AND PROCESSING

2 A. The PA and CPM shall review all CORs submitted by the GC.
3 1. Additional consulting staff and city staff having knowledge of the components of the COR shall review
4 and advise the PA and CPM as to the accuracy of the items, quantities, and associated costs of the COR as
5 directed by the CB.
6 2. The CPM shall review the COR with the Owner.
7 B. If required the PA and CPM, shall in good faith, further negotiate the COR with the GC as necessary. All
8 amendments to any COR shall be documented within the Project Management Web Site software.
9 C. After final review of the COR the CPM and Owner may accept the COR.
10 D. The CPM shall prepare the COR in the form of an official Board of Public Works Change Order for final review and
11 approval as outlined in Section 01 26 63 Change Order (CO).
12 E. The GC shall not act upon any accepted COR until it has received final approval through the Public Works process
13 as an official CO to the Work unless instructed to do so by the CPM. Proceeding without the final approval of a
14 fully authorized Change Order is at the GC’s own risk.
15
16 3.4. EMERGENCY CHANGE ORDER REQUEST
17 A. In the event Work is required due to an emergency as described in the Contract Documents, the GC must
18 request an equitable adjustment as soon as practicable, and in no case later than ten (10) working days of the
19 commencement of such emergency.
20 B. The GC shall provide full documentation of all labor, materials and equipment used during the period of
21 emergency as part of the COR submittal.
22
23
24
25 END OF SECTION

CITY OF MADISON
1 SECTION 01 26 63
2 CHANGE ORDER (CO)
3
4 PART 1 – GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
5 1.1. SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
7 1.3. BOARD OF PUBLIC WORKS PROCEDURE ....................................................................................................................... 1
8 PART 2 – PRODUCTS.......................................................................................................................................................................... 2
9 2.1. CHANGE ORDER FORM.................................................................................................................................................. 2
10 PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2
11 3.1. PREPARATION OF THE CHANGE ORDER ........................................................................................................................ 2
12 3.2. EXECUTION OF THE CHANGE ORDER ............................................................................................................................ 2
13
15
16 1.1. SUMMARY
17 A. Except in cases of emergency, no changes in the Work required by the Contract Documents may be made
18 by the General Contractor (GC) without having prior approval of the City Project Manager (CPM).
19 B. The City may at any time, without invalidating the Contract and without Notice to Sureties, order changes in
20 the Work by written Change Order. Such changes may include additions and/or deletions.
21 C. The Change Order (CO) is a Board of Public Works (BPW) form that is reviewed and approved by a specific
22 process.
23 D. The CO form is typically made up of multiple Change Order Requests (CORs) and/or Bid Items as appropriate
24 depending on the type of project and how the contract was bid.
25 E. All CO documentation shall be processed through the Construction Administration-Change Order Library and
26 digital workflow on the Project Management Web Site (PMWS).
27
30 B. Section 01 26 46 Construction Bulletin (CB)
31 C. Section 01 26 63 Change Order Request (COR)
33
34 1.3. BOARD OF PUBLIC WORKS PROCEDURE
35 A. The Board of Public Works has a very explicit procedure for the review and approval of all change orders
36 associated with any Public Works Contract as follows:
37 1. The Supervisory Chain of the CPM shall review and approve any CO under $10,000 provided it does not
38 include either of the following:
39 a. The CO does not request a time extension to the contract.
40 b. The CO does not cause the contract contingency sum to be exceeded.
41 2. The Board of Public Works shall review and approve any CO that requires any of the following:
42 a. Any CO over $10,000.
43 b. Any CO requesting a time extension to the contract regardless of the monetary value of the CO.
44 c. Any CO that that causes the contract contingency sum to be exceeded.
45 B. The Board of Public Works generally meets every other week and only once in August and December. The GC is
46 cautioned that, under normal scheduling, a CO requiring a BPW review will take a minimum of two (2) weeks to
47 achieve final approval.
48 1. The City shall not be responsible for additional delays to the Work caused by the scheduling constraints
49 of the Board of Public Works.
50 C. SPECIAL NOTE: The GC is cautioned to never proceed unless told to do so by the CPM. Only in rare instances
51 may the CPM give a written notice to proceed on a COR without an approved CO. Proceeding without the
52 written notice of the CPM or an approved CO is at the GC’s own risk.
53

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 26 63 - 1 CHANGE ORDER (CO)
CITY OF MADISON
2
3 2.1. CHANGE ORDER FORM
4 A. The CO form is located on the Project Management Web Site. The CPM shall click the link in the left margin of
5 the project web site opening a new form. Project information is pre-loaded, the CPM only needs to enter
6 information and make attachments as needed to complete the form.
7
9
10 3.1. PREPARATION OF THE CHANGE ORDER
11 A. The CPM shall prepare the required CO forms in the Construction Administration-Change Order Library on the
12 Project Management Web Site as follows:
13 1. Provide information for all contract information.
14 2. Provide a general description of the items described within the change order.
15 3. Provide detailed information for each Item on the CO form. At the option of the CPM he/she may include
16 multiple Change Order Requests each as their own item.
17 4. Provide required pricing and accounting information as needed for the item.
18 5. Insert attachments of contractor/architect provided information that clarifies and quantifies the CO.
19 Attachments may include but not be limited to material lists, estimated labor, revised details or
20 specifications, and other documents that may be related to the requested change.
21 6. Save the final version of the completed CO.
22
23 3.2. EXECUTION OF THE CHANGE ORDER
24 A. Upon saving the CO as described in section 3.1 above the software associated with the Project Management
25 Web Site shall notify the GC that the CO has been drafted and is ready for review. The GC shall do the following:
26 1. Open the appropriate CO form in the Construction Administration-Change Order Library and review all
27 items on the form.
28 2. The GC shall notify the CPM immediately of any errors or discrepancies on the form and shall not sign or
29 save it.
30 a. The CPM shall make any corrections as needed, re-save the form, and notify the GC.
31 3. If/when the GC concurs with the CO form as drafted the GC shall digitally sign the form and click SAVE.
32 B. After the GC digitally signs/saves the CO it shall be routed through the Project Management Web Site for
33 additional review and/or approvals. The CPM shall do the following:
34 1. Monitor the review process to ensure the software is working properly at each review step.
35 2. Ensure that proper BPW procedures are executed as needed by the CO approval process.
36 a. Schedule the CO on the next available BPW agenda if required.
37 i. Attend the BPW meeting to speak on the CO to board members and answer questions.
38 ii. The GC and/or PA may be required to attend the BPW meeting to address specific
39 information as it relates to the Work and/or materials associated with the CO.
40 3. Monitor final approval and distribution of the CO.
41 4. Notify the GC that the CO has been completed.
42 5. Ensure that the CO is posted to the next Public Works payment schedule.
43 6. Verify that the GC’s next Progress Payment-Schedule of Values show the CO as part of the contract sum.
44 C. Upon final approval of the CO the GC may proceed with executing the Work associated with the CO.
45
46
47
48 END OF SECTION

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 26 63 - 2 CHANGE ORDER (CO)
CITY OF MADISON
1 SECTION 01 29 73
2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
3
4 PART 1 – GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
5 1.1. SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
7 1.3. RELATED DOCUMENTS .................................................................................................................................................. 1
8 1.4. BASIS OF VALUES........................................................................................................................................................... 2
10 PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2
11 3.1. AIA DOCUMENT G702 – APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT .................................................................... 2
12 3.2. AIA DOCUMENT G703 – CONTINUATION SHEET ........................................................................................................... 2
13 3.3. INITIAL SCHEDULE OF VALUES SUBMITTAL ................................................................................................................... 3
14 3.4. SOV FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT REQUESTS .................................................................................................................... 3
15
17
18 1.1. SUMMARY
19 A. The Schedule of Values (SOV) is a Contractor provided statement that allocates portions of the total contract
20 sum to various portions of the contracted work and shall be the basis for reviewing the Contractors Progress
21 Payment Requests.
22 B. AIA Document G702 – Application and Certificate for Payment and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheet shall
23 be filled out in sufficient detail to be used as a guideline in determining work completed and materials stored on
24 site when verifying Progress Payment Requests.
25 C. The General Contractor shall be responsible for filling out, updating, and providing these work sheets with each
26 Progress Payment Request.
27
29 A. Section 01 26 63 Change Order (CO)
30 B. Section 01 29 76 Progress Payment Procedures
31 C. Section 01 31 23 Project Management Web Site
32 D. Section 01 32 26 Construction Progress Reporting
33 E. Section 01 33 23 Submittals
34 F. Parts of this specification will reference articles within “The City of Madison Standard Specifications for Public
40 PDF will open.
43
44 1.3. RELATED DOCUMENTS
45 A. The following documents shall be used as the basis for initiating and maintaining the SOV worksheets throughout
46 the execution of this contract.
47 1. Drawing documents and specifications (including general provisions) as provided with the bid set
48 documents and any published addendums.
49 2. Documents associated with revisions or clarifications to number 1 above after awarding of the contract,
50 including but not limited to:
51 a. Construction Bulletins
52 b. Request for Information
53 c. Approved Change Orders
54 3. The latest daily/weekly Construction Progress Report
55 4. Other specifications as identified in Section 1.2 above

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 29 73 - 1 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
CITY OF MADISON
1
2 1.4. BASIS OF VALUES
3 A. The Contractor shall provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to assist the Architect and City
4 Project Manager in evaluating Progress Payment Requests. The breakdown detail may require a labor and
5 material breakdown for each division of work or trade or as directed by the CPM.
6 B. The total sum of all items shall equal the Contract Sum.
7
9
11
12 3.1. AIA DOCUMENT G702 – APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT
13 A. The Contractor shall use AIA Document G-702 Application and Certificate for Payment with each Progress
14 Payment Request.
15 B. Completely fill out the Project Information section as follows:
16 1. TO OWNER; provide all owner related information as provided in the contract documents.
17 2. PROJECT; provide all contract information including contract number, title and address.
18 3. FROM CONTRACTOR; provide all contractor related information.
19 4. VIA ARCHITECT; provide all the architect’s related information including the architect’s project reference
20 number if different from the owners.
21 5. Indicate the current APPLICATION NO., PERIOD TO date, and CONTRACT DATE.
22 C. Completely fill out the Contractors Application for Payment section.
23 1. Fill out lines 1 through 9 to reflect the current status of the contract through the payment date being
24 requested.
25 2. The City of Madison calculates retainage on Public Works Contracts as follows:
26 a. In general, across the duration of the contract, 2.5% of the total contract sum, including change
27 orders, is withheld for retainage as referenced from the City of Madison Standard Specification
28 110.2:
29 i. Beginning with Progress Payment 1, 5% retainage will be withheld until such time that 50%
30 of the total contract sum has been paid out.
31 ii. No additional retainage will be withheld after 50% of the total contract sum has been paid,
32 unless additional change orders have been approved after the 50% milestone has been
33 reached. Per City of Madison Standard Specification 110.2, additional retainage up to 10%,
34 may be held in the event there are holds placed by Affirmative Action or liquidated
35 damages by BPW.
36 iii. Retainage for additional change orders after the 50% milestone will be withheld at the rate
37 of 2.5% of the total cost of the change order.
38 iv. Retainage is based on the change orders posted to the City’s contract worksheet at the
39 time the progress payment is processed.
40 D. Completely fill out the Change Order Summary section. Only change orders that have been finalized and posted
41 to the City of Madison’s Application for Partial Payment worksheet may be itemized into the SOV documents.
42 E. The Contractor shall sign and date the application and it shall be properly notarized.
43 F. The Contractor shall not fill in any information in the Architects Certificate for Payment section.
44
45 3.2. AIA DOCUMENT G703 – CONTINUATION SHEET
46 A. The Contractor shall use AIA Document G-703 Continuation Sheet to itemize his/her SOV for this contract.
47 Provide additional sheets as necessary.
48 B. Provide information in Column A (Item No.), Column B (Description of Work), and Column C (Scheduled Value) by
49 any method that allocates portions of the total contract sum to various portions of the contracted work.
50 Possible methods include combinations of the following:
51 1. By division of work
52 2. By contractor, sub-contractor, sub sub-contractor
53 3. By specialty item or group
54 4. Other methods of breakdown as may be requested by the City Project Manager or City Construction
55 Manager at the pre-construction meeting.
56 C. Provide total cost of the item/description of work including proportionate shares of profit and overhead related
57 to the item.
58

CITY OF MADISON
1 3.3. INITIAL SCHEDULE OF VALUES SUBMITTAL

2 A. The Contractor shall upload his/her initial SOV to the Project Management Web Site, Submittals Library, no later
3 than five (5) working days after the Pre-construction Meeting.
4 1. The initial SOV shall provide information in Column A (Item No.), Column B (Description of Work), and
5 Column C (Scheduled Value) only.
6 2. The level of detail shall be as described in section 3.2 above.
7 B. The Project Architect (PA) and the City Project Manager (CPM) shall review the SOV as any other submittal and
8 may require modifications to reflect additional detail as necessary.
9 C. The Contractor shall resubmit the SOV as necessary until such time as the PPA and CPM have sufficient detail for
10 assessing and approving future Progress Payment Applications.
11 D. Progress Payment Application 1 will not be processed until such time as the Contractor has met this requirement
12 regardless of the amount of work completed per the application.
13
14 3.4. SOV FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT REQUESTS
15 A. The Contractor shall update the initial SOV with each Progress Payment Application as follows:
16 1. Initial items and values as part of Section 3.3 above will not be adjusted once the original Schedule of
17 Values submittal has been approved.
18 2. Change orders shall be added as additional items and values at the bottom of the SOV as they become
19 approved and posted to the City’s contract worksheet. The value for each change order shall be the
20 value indicated on the SOV and shall stand alone. Values shall not be split out or combined with other
21 existing items with similar work descriptions on the original SOV.
22 3. Fill out Columns D, E, F and G to properly reflect the work completed and materials received since the last
23 Progress Payment Application.
24 4. Only materials delivered and stored on the project site may be reflected on SOV progress updates.
25 B. Provide updated G702 and G703 sheets with each Progress Payment application.
26 C. See Specification 01 29 76 Progress Payment Procedures for additional information on submitting Progress
27 Payment Applications.
28
29
30
31 END OF SECTION

CITY OF MADISON
1 SECTION 01 29 76
2 PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES
3
4 PART 1 – GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
5 1.1. SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
8 1.4. PROGRESS PAYMENT MILESTONES ............................................................................................................................... 1
9 1.5. PROGRESS PAYMENT SUBMITTAL ................................................................................................................................. 4
10 PART 2 - PRODUCTS - THIS SECTION NOT USED ................................................................................................................................ 4
11 PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................................................................... 4
12 3.1. GENERAL CONTRACTOR PROCEDURE ........................................................................................................................... 4
13 3.2. PROJECT ARCHITECT PROCEDURE ................................................................................................................................. 5
14 3.3. CITY PROJECT MANAGER PROCEDURE .......................................................................................................................... 5
15
17
18 1.1. SUMMARY
19 A. The General Contractor (GC) shall review this and all related specifications prior to submitting progress payment
20 requests.
21 B. Progress payment requests (Partial Payment-PP) for this contract shall be uploaded digitally by the GC to the
22 Project Management Web Site
23 C. The Project Architect (PA) and City Project Manager (CPM) shall review and amend or approve the PP on the
24 Project Management Web Site.
25 D. After approval of the PP by the CPM, he/she shall forward the PP to the appropriate agencies for BPW
26 contractual review and payment processing.
27
29 A. Section 01 26 63 Change Order (CO)
30 B. Section 01 29 73 Schedule of Values
31 C. Section 01 31 19 Progress Meetings
33 E. Section 01 32 16 Construction Progress Schedules
34 F. Section 01 32 26 Construction Progress Reporting
35 G. Section 01 33 23 Submittals
36 H. Section 01 45 16 Field Quality Control Procedures
37 I. Section 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures
38 J. Section 01 78 13 Completion and Correction List
39 K Section 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data
40 L. Section 01 78 36 Warranties
41 M. Section 01 78 39 As-Built Drawings
42 N. Section 01 78 43 Spare Parts and Extra Materials
43 O. Section 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training
44
46 A. The following documents shall be used when evaluating PP requests.
47 1. Daily and weekly construction progress reports filed since the last payment request.
48 2. Contractors Schedule of Values as updated from the last payment request. See Specification 01 29 73.
49 3. Any document that may be required to be submitted for review and approval, as noted by the
50 specifications listed in Section 1.2 above, or the Progress Payment Milestone Schedule in Section 1.4
51 below, to achieve a required bench mark of contract progression or contract requirement.
52
53 1.4. PROGRESS PAYMENT MILESTONES
54 A. City Engineering-Facility Management has developed the Project Payment Milestone Schedule (Section 1.4
55 below) to assist the GC in providing required construction specific documentation and general contractual
56 documentation in a timely manner.
57 B. The Progress Payment Milestone Schedule is not an all inclusive list. Multiple agencies review progress payment
58 requests and contract closeout requests. Missing, incomplete, or incorrect documentation for any agency may

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 29 76 - 1 PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES
CITY OF MADISON
1 be a cause for not processing progress payments. It shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor for
2 providing documentation as required or requested to the appropriate agencies.
3 C. The milestone schedule is based on the contract total sum and shall be valid for most contracts. Milestone
4 submittals will be required with whatever progress payment hits the percentage of contract total indicated in
5 the schedule.
6 D. The CPM shall review the milestone schedule with each progress payment request and at his/her option may
7 elect to hold processing the progress payment until such time as the contractor has met the requirements for
8 providing construction specific documentation.
9 E. It shall be the General Contractors responsibility to comply with all BPW Contract Administration requirements
10 and related deadlines as outlined in the Award Letter, Award Checklist, and Start Work Letter.
11
Progress Payment (PP) Milestone Schedule
Milestone Description Due Before Remarks
BPW Contract Administration Documentation
• For GC and Sub-contractors before PP-1
• Workforce profiles
regardless of scheduling
PP-1, or start
• Sub-contractors (if applicable), due 10
• Best Value Contracting Documentation work as
days before they may start work
applicable
• Sub-contractors prequalification • Sub-contractors (if applicable), due 10
approval & Affirmative Action plans days before they may start work
• Other as may be required
Required Construction Submittals/Administrative

References
Documents
• Contractors Project Directory • Specification 01 31 23
• Schedule of Values • Specification 01 29 73
• Submittals Schedule PP-1 • Specification 01 32 19
• Waste Management Plan • Specification 01 74 19
• Closeout Requirement Checklist • Specification 01 77 00
• Warranty Checklist • Specification 01 78 36
Construction Progress Milestones See specifications for specific requirements

• Specification 01 32 19, Examples:
• Early submittals, per submittal schedule PP-1 concrete mix, structural steel, products
with long lead times
• Detailed Contract Schedules • See Specification 01 32 16
General Construction Progress Requirements are

Verified with each Progress Payment Request
all up to date
• Progress Schedules •
Specification 01 32 16
• Submittals/Re-submittals (ongoing) •
• Schedule of Values •
• Progress Reporting Each future •
PP •
All specifications with LEED
• LEED Documentation
documentation requirements
• Waste Management documentation • Specification 01 74 19
• QMOs are being addressed and closed • Specification 01 45 16
• Progress Cleaning • Specification 01 74 13
• As-Built Drawings • Specification 01 78 39
* All of the above are being updated on the Project Management Web Site as required
BPW Contract Administration Documentation 25% CT See 1.4.E above. This progress payment will be
• Weekly payroll reports or with held by BPW for any missing contractual
• Best Value Contracting Reports PP 2 documentation.

CITY OF MADISON

• SBE Reports
Construction Progress Milestones

• Construction/Contract Closeout
50% CT • Specification 01 31 19
Meeting #1
• Submittals/Re-submittals complete • Specification 01 33 23
Operation and Maintenance (O & M) drafts 60% CT • Specification 01 78 23
Construction/Contract Closeout Meeting #2 • Specification 01 31 19

70% CT
• Construction closeout checklist • Specification 01 77 00
This is a recommendation to the GC and is not a

80% CT requirement of this PP.
• Request Finalization Review from BPW • Specification 01 77 00
Construction Progress Milestones

• Operation and Maintenance (O & M)
• Specification 01 78 23
finals, accepted
80% CT
• Specification 01 45 16; Items that could
• All major QMO issues resolved
prevent occupancy
• As-Built Drawings, Division Trades ready
for GC review
All of the following shall be completed for this PP: Contractor to determine the proper order of
completion:
• Regulatory Inspections completed • Governing ordinances and statutes
• All QMO reports closed 90% CT • Specification 01 45 16
• Demonstration and Training completed • Specification 01 79 00
• Attic Stock completed • Specification 01 78 43
• Final Cleaning • Specification 01 74 13
Construction Closeout Procedures: • Specification 01 77 00

• Letter of Substantial Compliance sent to
• Generated/Signed by the Architect
BI and DHS as needed
• Certificate of Occupancy issued 100% CT • Building Inspection
• As-Built Drawings, finals, accepted • Specification 01 78 39
• City Letter of Substantial Completion • Signed by the City Engineer
• Warranty letters dated and issued • Specification 01 78 36
* Completion of this begins the one year warranty.

Contract Closeout Procedures
• Construction Closeout has been
completed
• Contractor requests final payment of
Final
retainage upon receiving City Letter of
Substantial Completion
• All BPW contractual requirements are • Contractor must provide any missing
verified BPW Contractual Documentation
* Completion of this closes the contract but not the warranty period/bond.

CITY OF MADISON

NOTE: CT = Contract Total less held retainage
1
2 1.5. PROGRESS PAYMENT SUBMITTAL
3 A. Each progress payment submittal shall be:
4 1. Digital in PDF format
5 2. PDF shall be in color
6 3. Uploaded to the appropriate Project Management library and properly named per the tutorial
7 instructions provided to the awarded contractor.
8 B. Submit all required construction progress documentation to the appropriate Project Management Web Site
9 library.
10 C. In general the following shall apply to all PP requests:
11 1. Materials or products:
12 a. On order, being shipped, etc. may not be invoiced.
13 b. Received and stored on the project site may be invoiced.
14 c. Being manufactured off site at any location may not be invoiced (example: cabinetry, ductwork,
15 etc.)
16 d. Completed products stored off site locally waiting for delivery to the project site may be invoiced
17 with prior approval by the CPM. All of the following conditions must be met to be allowed:
18 i. Items must be visually inspected by CPM to verify product is complete.
19 ii. Item must be stored inside a compatible structure and the structure and contents must be
20 insured.
21 iii. Contractor is responsible for condition until installation is completed.
22 2. All labor and equipment, including rental time for the current progress period may be invoiced.
23 3. Only completed installations may be invoiced to 100% based on the Schedule of Values.
24 D. DO NOT submit BPW Contract Administration Documentation for review with Progress Payment Requests,
25 submit them directly to the correct agency and in the correct format as instructed from information in your BPW
26 Contract Award Packet instructions.
27
28 PART 2 - PRODUCTS - THIS SECTION NOT USED
29
31
32 3.1. GENERAL CONTRACTOR PROCEDURE
33 A. The GC shall provide an updated version of his/her schedule of values (AIA documents G702 & G 703) with each
34 PP request.
35 1. The AIA - Application and Certificate for Payment (G702) shall be properly filled out and prepared for the
36 Architects review. See specification 01 29 73, Schedule of Values for more information.
37 2. The AIA - Continuation sheets (G703) shall be properly filled out and indicate the dollar value of the
38 completed work to date for each item on the form. See specification 01 29 73, Schedule of Values for
39 more information.
40 a. The GC shall subtotal the work completed to date for all of the original Schedule of Value items.
41 b. Divide the sub total of work completed by the Original Contract Total to obtain a percentage
42 complete of the original Lump Sum Bid. This percentage may be taken out to five (5) decimal
43 places (round fifth place up or down as needed).
44 i. Example: $5,192.55 of completed work divided by $10,000 original Contract Total =
45 0.519255, round this to 0.51926
46 c. Write the percentage in Column 10 on the City Tabular Sheet for the original lump sum bid item in
47 RED ink.
48 3. Ensure that any newly posted change orders from the City of Madison provided tabulation sheet have
49 been entered on the G703 continuation sheets. Repeat steps a thru c above for each change order on
50 the schedule of values and the City Tabular Sheet.
51 B. The GC shall fill out the City of Madison Application and Certificate of Payment cover sheet as follows:
52 1. The GC shall not change any pre-printed information and shall not write in the box that indicates previous
53 progress payments.
54 2. The GC shall sign and date the form where indicated.
55 3. The GC shall provide the dates from and to for the PP being requested.

CITY OF MADISON
1 4. The GC shall provide the list of all contractors/sub-contractors that were actively working during the
2 dates indicated above.
3 a. All contractors/sub-contractors named must be in compliance with all City requirements (Pre-
4 qualified, Affirmative Action Plan on file, etc). The PP will be held and not processed by the City of
5 Madison until all contractors/sub-contractors are in compliance.
6 b. Do not list the names of suppliers or manufacturers, doing so will slow down processing and
7 require a re-submittal of the paperwork.
8 C. The General Contractor (GC) shall scan all of the documents listed below in the order shown, save the scan as a
9 single PDF file for each PP request.
10 1. City cover sheet – Application and Certificate for Payment
11 2. City tabulation sheet(s)
12 3. AIA G702 - Application and Certificate for Payment
13 4. AIA G703 - Continuation Sheet(s)
14 5. Any miscellaneous documents that may be requested as backup documentation for the pay request.
15 a. Lien waivers are not required and shall not be submitted.
16 b. Do not provide contractual administrative documents such as pay reports with pay requests.
17 c. Do not supply progress deliverables with pay requests.
18 F. Upload the pay request PDF to the Contract Documents-GC Partial Pay Apps library on the Project Management
19 Web Site.
20
21 3.2. PROJECT ARCHITECT PROCEDURE
22 A. The PA shall review the AIA-continuation sheets provided by the GC to determine if the Schedule of Values
23 accurately reflects the work completed for the inclusive dates indicated.
24 B. The PA shall advise the CPM of any discrepancies in the schedule of values.
25 C. The PA shall work with the GC and the CPM to resolve any issues prior to signing the AIA - Application and
26 Certificate for Payment.
27 D. When verified, the PA shall digitally sign the original PDF version of the AIA - Application and Certificate for
28 Payment on the Project Management Web Site.
29
30 3.3. CITY PROJECT MANAGER PROCEDURE
31 A. The CPM shall review all documents submitted by the GC and work with the PA to ensure the schedule of values
32 accurately reflects the work completed to date.
33 B. The CPM may elect to hold processing of any progress payment pending submittal of required progress payment
34 milestones.
35 C. When verified, the CPM shall digitally sign the City Cover Sheet and forward the required documentation to the
36 appropriate City agencies for further processing of the payment request.
37 D. The CPM shall add a scanned copy of any documents indicating the PP request processing was completed to the
38 PMWS.
39
40
41 END OF SECTION
42

CITY OF MADISON
1 SECTION 01 31 13
2 PROJECT COORDINATION
3
4 PART 1 – GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
5 1.1. SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
7 1.3. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS............................................................................................................................................. 1
8 1.4. GENERAL CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................... 2
9 1.5. SUB-CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS.................................................................................................... 2
12
14
15 1.1. SUMMARY
16 A. Project Coordination covers many areas within the execution of the Contract Documents and the requirements
17 of proper coordination are the applicable to all contractors executing the Work of this contract.
18 B. This specification provides general information regarding project coordination for the General Contractor and all
19 Sub-contractors. All contractors shall be familiar with project coordination requirements and responsibilities
20 that may be defined in other specification within these Contract Documents.
21 C. The General Contractor shall at all times be responsible for the project, project site, and execution of the
22 Contract Documents.
23
25 A. Section 01 29 76 Progress Payment Procedures
26 B. Section 01 31 19 Progress Meetings
28 D. Section 01 32 16 Construction Progress Schedules
29 E. Section 01 32 19 Submittals Schedule
30 F. Section 01 33 23 Submittals
31 G. Section 01 43 39 Mockups
32 H. Section 01 45 16 Field Quality Control Procedures
33 I. Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements
34 J. Section 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures, including all specifications referenced therein
35
36 1.3. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
37 A. The following general requirements shall applicable to all contractors:
38 1. Cooperate with the Owner, all authorized Owner Representatives, Project Architect and all consultants of
39 the Owner.
40 2. Materials, products, and equipment shall be new, as specified and to industry standards except where
41 otherwise noted.
42 3. Labor and workmanship shall be of a high quality and to industry standards.
43 B. Existing conditions:
44 1. Verify all existing conditions noted in the contract documents with actual filed locations. Verify
45 dimensions, sizes and locations, of structural, equipment, mechanical and utility components.
46 2. Report any inconsistencies, errors, omissions, or code violations in writing to the General Contractor (GC)
47 immediately.
48 3. Annotate any inconsistencies, errors, omissions on the GC As-Built record drawings immediately for
49 future reference.
50 C. Contract Documents:
51 1. The Contract Documents are intended to include everything necessary to perform the work. Every item
52 required may not be specifically mentioned, shown, or detailed.
53 a. Except where specifically stated all systems and equipment shall be complete, installed, and fully
54 operable.
55 b. If a conflict exists within the contract documents the contractor shall furnish the item, system, or
56 workmanship of the highest quality, largest, largest quantity, or most closely fits the intent of the
57 contract documents.

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 31 13 - 1 PROJECT COORDINATION
CITY OF MADISON
1 c. Manufacturers recommended installation details shall be verified and used prior to installation of
2 products and equipment so as to not void warranties.
3 D. Errors and Omissions
4 1. No Contractor shall take any advantage of any apparent error or omission in the construction documents.
5 2. The City of Madison shall be permitted to make such corrections and interpretations as may be deemed
6 necessary for the fulfillment of the intent of the construction documents.
7 E. Owners Representatives
8 1. All contractors shall be familiar with various Owner Representatives having Quality Management
9 responsibilities for the duration of this project including but not limited to the following:
10 a. Project Architect, responsible for all decisions affecting the code compliance and design intent of
11 the construction documents.
12 b. Consulting Architects and Engineers, responsible for providing consulting services to the Project
13 Architect, Owner, and City Project Manager, also responsible for Quality Management of the
15 c. Owner, the designated representative of the City Agency that will occupy the project upon
16 completion.
17 d. City Project Manager, responsible for all day to day decisions regarding the execution and
18 performance of this Public Works Contract.
19 e. Consulting City Staff, responsible for providing consulting services to the Project Architect, Owner,
20 and City Project Manager, also responsible for Quality Management of the construction
21 documents.
22 2. Owner Representatives shall be attending progress meetings, pre-installation meetings, performing or
23 being present for final testing and acceptance and quality management reporting during the execution of
24 the contract documents as outlined in other specifications.
25
26 1.4. GENERAL CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
27 A. Assume the responsibility for all Work specified in the Contract Documents except where specifically identified
28 to be performed by the Owner or other contractor separately hired by the Owner.
29 1. Coordinate all work by Owner, equipment provided Owner, or contractor hired by the Owner into the
30 project schedule.
31 B. Provide all construction management responsibilities as specified in other Division 1 specifications including but
32 not limited to:
33 1. Scheduling of work
34 2. Coordination of work between other Trades and Sub-contractors
35 3. Construction administration and management
36 4. Site layout, cleanliness, and protection of completed work/stored materials
37 5. Waste Management
38 6. Quality Assurance and Quality Control
39 C. Use Diggers Hotline and private utility locating companies to accurately locate all public and private utilities on
40 the property as needed. The GC is responsible for any repair or replacement to any public or private utility
41 damaged during the execution of the Work
42 D. Report any inconsistencies, errors, omissions, or code violations in writing to the Project Architect immediately.
43 Failure to report inconsistencies prior to beginning work shall indicate that the GC accepted all existing
44 conditions.
45 E. The GC shall be responsible for assigning work and related responsibilities where the Contract Documents may
46 not clearly state who is responsible for providing the work, material, or product.
47 F. Provide construction management oversight of all items described in Section 1.5 below.
48
49 1.5. SUB-CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
50 A. Be familiar with all of the contract documents as they pertain to your Work, adjacent work and the overall
51 progress of the project.
52 1. All Sub-contractors shall be familiar with all Division 1 specifications as they may apply to progress,
53 progress payments, quality control construction management, and closeout of the contract.
54 B. Coordinate your Work with all adjacent work and existing conditions.
55 1. Perform your work in proper sequence according to the GC’s project schedule and in relation to the work
56 of other trades.
57 2. Notify other sub-contractors and trades whose work may be connected to, combined with, or influenced
58 by your work and allow them reasonable time and access to complete their work.

CITY OF MADISON
1 3. Join your work to the work of others in accordance with the intent of the Contract Documents.
2 4. Order materials and schedule deliveries to facilitate the general progress of the Work.
3 C. Cooperate with all other trades to facilitate the general progress of the work. This shall include providing every
4 reasonable opportunity for the installation of work by others and the storage of their materials and equipment.
5 1. In no case shall any contractor exclude from the premises or work any Sub-contractor or their employees.
6 2. In no case shall any contractor interfere with the execution or installation of Work by any other Sub-
7 contractor or their employees.
8 D. Arrange your work, equipment, and materials and dispose of your construction waste so as to not interfere with
9 the work or storage of materials of others.
10 E. Coordinate all work as indicated during pre-installation meetings with Owner Representatives, the GC and other
11 trades. Any work improperly coordinated shall be relocated as designated by the Owner Representative at no
12 additional cost to the City.
13
15
17
18
19
20 END OF SECTION

CITY OF MADISON
1 SECTION SECTION 01 31 19
2 PROJECT MEETINGS
3
4 PART 1 – GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
5 1.1. SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
7 1.3. PROJECT MEETING TYPES .............................................................................................................................................. 1
9 PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED IN THIS SECTION .......................................................................................................................... 1
10 PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................................................................... 1
11 3.1. PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING ...................................................................................................................................... 1
12 3.2. PROJECT MANAGEMENT WEB SITE – TUTORIAL MEETING ........................................................................................... 2
13 3.3. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS MEETINGS ......................................................................................................................... 2
14 3.4. PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS ...................................................................................................................................... 2
15 3.6 PRE-CONTRACT CLOSEOUT MEETINGS ......................................................................................................................... 3
16 3.7 OTHER SPECIAL MEETINGS............................................................................................................................................ 3
17
19
20 1.1. SUMMARY
21 A. The purpose of this specification is to identify various project related meetings and the responsible parties for
22 scheduling, agendas, minutes, and required attendance.
23 B. This specification is not intended to be inclusive of all meeting types or a complete list of required meetings.
24 C. This specification is not intended to cover planning and execution meetings between the General Contractor
25 (GC) and his/her sub-contractors.
26
28 A. 01 31 23 Project Management Web Site
29 B. 01 32 16 Construction Progress Schedules
30 C. 01 43 39 Mockups
31
32 1.3. PROJECT MEETING TYPES
33 A. The following project meeting types may be used but not limited to the following
34 1. Preconstruction Meeting
35 2. Project Management Web Site – Tutorial Meeting
36 3. Construction Progress Meetings
37 4. Pre-installation Meetings (including mock-up review meetings)
38 5. Weekly Trade Meetings
39 6. Special Meetings
40
42 A. Representatives of Contractors, Subcontractors, and suppliers attending meetings shall be qualified and
43 authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents.
44
45 PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED IN THIS SECTION
46
48
49 3.1. PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
50 A. After execution of the Contract the City Project Manager (CPM) shall schedule and conduct the Preconstruction
51 Meeting at the Owner’s facilities. The CPM shall coordinate the meeting agenda with the Project Architect and
52 the GC Project Manager.
53 B. The CPM shall be responsible for the final agenda.
54 C. The CPM and Project Architect shall take notes on the meeting and post completed meeting minutes.
55 D. Attendance shall be required by all of the following:
56 1. Owner Representative(s)
57 2. Architect and applicable sub consultant(s)
58 3. General Contractor and applicable subcontractors and suppliers

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 SECTION 01 31 19 - 1 PROJECT MEETINGS
CITY OF MADISON
1 4. City Quality Management Staff

2 5. Others, as may be invited for particular agenda items.
3 E. Topics of the Preconstruction Meeting shall include but not be limited to the following:
4 1. Staff and contractor introductions
5 2. Completion Date
6 3. BPW Administrative requirements and due outs
7 a. Small Business Enterprise (SBE) (if applicable)
8 b. Certified payroll forms
9 c. Workforce profiles
10 d. Best Value Contracting (BVC)
11 4. General Facility Management Division 1 Specifications, including:
12 a. Section 01 29 76 Progress Payment Procedures
13 b. Section 01 31 23 Project Management Web Site (overview)
14 c. Section 01 45 16 Field Quality Control Procedures
15 d. Section 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures
16 5. Project Meeting scheduling
17 a. Section 01 31 19 Project Meetings
18 6. Construction Schedule
19
20 3.2. PROJECT MANAGEMENT WEB SITE – TUTORIAL MEETING
21 A. The CPM shall schedule and conduct a tutorial presentation of the PMWS prior to the beginning of construction.
22 B. The CPM shall be responsible for the final agenda, there will be no minutes.
23 C. The required attendance list in 3.1.D. above shall apply except for City Staff in items 1 and 4 who are already
24 familiar with the PMWS system.
25 D. It is recommended that all contractors bring their lap top, tablet or other internet capable device with them
26 including a fully charged battery and internet connection devices as necessary.
27
28 3.3. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS MEETINGS
29 A. In general all of the following shall apply:
30 1. Representatives of Contractors, Subcontractors, and suppliers attending meetings shall be qualified and
31 authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents.
32 2. The attendance shall be from the required attendance list in 3.1.D. above.
33 B. The General Contractor Project Manager (GCPM) shall:
34 1. Schedule and conduct all construction progress meetings biweekly or more frequently as required.
35 2. Prepare agenda for meetings including, but not limited to the following:
36 a. Safety
37 b. Current Schedule, including review of the critical path and 6-week look ahead schedule
38 c. Status of project related documentation (Submittals, RFIs, CBs, etc.)
39 d. Quality Observation Log and status of correction of deficient items
40 e. Project questions and issues from meeting attendees
41 f. BPW Administration Check
42 g. Other as needed
43 h. Status of CORs and COs to be reviewed outside the standard progress meeting time.
44 3. Make physical arrangements for meetings.
45 4. GCPM to post meeting agendas to the appropriate libraries on the Project Management Web Site
46 (PMWS) no less than two (2) working days prior to the scheduled meeting. Notify all required attendees,
47 applicable parties to the contract, and others affected of the posted meeting agenda.
48 5. Preside at meetings.
49 6. Route a meeting attendance roster for attendees to sign-in on.
50 7. GCPM to record the minutes of the meeting; include significant proceedings and decisions. Post meeting
51 minutes to the PMWS no more than two (2) working days after the completed meeting. Meeting
52 minutes shall include a scanned copy of the attendance sign-in sheet. Notify all required meeting
53 attendees, applicable parties to the contract, and others affected by decisions made at the meetings.
54 8. The above requirements do not apply to GC/sub-contractor meetings.
55
56 3.4. PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
57 A. The GCPM shall schedule and conduct all pre-installation meetings, including mockup reviews, before each
58 construction activity that requires coordination with other trades.

CITY OF MADISON
1 B. The GCPM shall be responsible for the final agenda and meeting minutes.
2 C. The GCPM will work with all concerned parties to resolve issues as needed and submit RFI’s if necessary.
3 D. Required attendance shall be from the list in 3.1.D. above and shall be personnel having a stake in the outcome
4 of the installation or knowledge of the system being installed.
5 E. In the event the Contractor installs equipment or materials without a pre-installation meeting the Contractor
6 shall be solely responsible for removing, replacing, repositioning materials and equipment as instructed by the
7 Project Architect or City Project Manager at no additional cost to the City.
8
9 3.6 PRE-CONTRACT CLOSEOUT MEETINGS
10 A. Two (2) Pre-contract Closeout Meetings shall be held to review the closeout procedures, requirements, and
11 contract deliverables.
12 1. Pre-contract Closeout Meeting #1 shall be scheduled prior to the 50% Progress Payment Request is being
13 requested. This meeting shall discuss items such as closing out QMO reports, providing O&M drafts and
14 finals, payroll and Affirmative Action documentation, and other contract deliverables.
15 2. Pre-contract Closeout Meeting #2 shall be scheduled prior to the 80% Progress Payment Request is being
16 requested. This meeting shall discuss, but not be limited to, the status of scheduling final regulatory
17 inspections, cleaning up outstanding QMO’s, demonstration and training, attic stock; and finalization
18 review of payroll and other related documents.
19 B. The GCPM shall schedule, coordinate, and make physical arrangements for both meetings.
20 C. All of the following shall be required to attend both meetings:
21 1. The GCPM and the GC Field superintendent
22 2. All Subcontractor Project Managers regardless of the current status of their work.
23 a. The GCPM may excuse a Subcontractor PM if he is confident that all contractual requirements for
24 closeout by the subcontractor have been completed and/or delivered to the GCPM. The list of
25 attendees shall be reviewed and agreed upon with CPM ahead of the meeting.
26 b. At the option of these project managers the field supervisors may also attend.
27 3. The Project Architect and at least one design consultant from each discipline represented by the plans
28 and specifications to address open QMOs, final tests, reports, etc.
29 4. The Owner
30 5. The CPM
31 6. Quality Management staff as needed to address open QMOs, final tests, reports, etc.
32 7. The Commissioning Agent
33 D. The CPM shall publish an agenda and chair the meeting.
34
35 3.7 OTHER SPECIAL MEETINGS
36 A. The Contractor shall schedule special meetings per the requirements of the LEED Specification, the Project
37 Quality Management Plan, the Commissioning Plan and as indicated by other specifications.
38 B. Special meetings include but are not limited to the following:
39 1. Waste Management Conference
40 2. Equipment start up meetings
41 3. Testing and balancing meetings
42 4. Commissioning meetings
43 5. Other meetings as necessitated by the contract documents
44
45 END OF SECTION

CITY OF MADISON
1 SECTION 01 31 23
2 PROJECT MANAGEMENT WEB SITE
3
4 PART 1 – GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
5 1.1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................................................. 1
6 1.2. SHAREPOINT PROCEDURE OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................................... 1
8 PART 2 - PRODUCTS .......................................................................................................................................................................... 2
9 2.1. SHAREPOINT SYSTEM RELATED PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................. 2
10 PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2
11 3.1. POST BID-OPENING ....................................................................................................................................................... 2
12 3.2. POST PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING ............................................................................................................................ 3
13
15
16 1.1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
17 A. The City of Madison (CoM) has established a web based Project Management Tool (PMT) using a Microsoft
18 product called SharePoint (SP).
19 B. The software is used throughout the design, construction and warranty process of major remodels and new
20 construction projects executed as a City of Madison, Board of Public Works project.
21 C. Initially deployed in mid 2013, the PMT software has been successfully deployed on several projects, and we
22 continue to modify/update/enhance the PMT on a regular basis.
23
24 1.2. SHAREPOINT PROCEDURE OVERVIEW
25 A. The CoM PMT is a system of consolidated Document & Form Libraries and Data Lists that assist in performing
26 day to day functions of design/construction management while reducing the use of surface mail, email and email
27 attachments.
28 1. Document libraries store a wide variety of documents in many different formats including but not limited
29 to Word, Excel, PDF, photographs (all popular formats), etc.
30 2. Data Lists contain consolidated data information that can be generated and stored for further use. Punch
31 Lists and Warranty issues will be examples of Data Lists.
32 3. Form libraries contain snapshot information associated with a particular Data Entry form. An example of
33 this is the Quality Management Observation form.
34 B. The following libraries and sub-libraries on the PMWS are provided for specific workflows and contract
35 documentation. Related specification numbers are in “( )” if applicable.
36
Contract Construction Construction LEED Quality Control Construction
Documents Administration Progress Documentation Closeout
Signed Contract Change Order Schedules LEED Documents Regulatory Misc Closeout
Requests (COR (01 32 16) Inspections Documents
Form) (01 26 57)
GC Partial Pay Apps Change Orders (CO Progress Meetings Waste Commissioning O & M Manuals
(01 29 76) Form) (01 31 19) Management Checklists (01 78 23)
(01 26 63) (01 74 19)
Construction Construction Daily Journal (DJ System Performance Product Warranties
Documents Bulletins (CB Form) Form) (01 32 26) Tests /Guarantees
(01 26 46) (01 78 36)
Regulatory Request for Quality Management As-Builts
Documents Information (RFI Observation (QMO (01 78 39)
Form) (01 26 13) Form) (01 45 16)
Testing Contract Submittals (SUB Safety and Incident Attic Stock
Form) (01 33 23) Reports (01 78 23)
Material Testing & Demonstration and
Field Reports Training
(01 79 00)
Warranty Issues (WI
Form)
(01 78 23)

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 31 23 - 1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT WEB SITE
CITY OF MADISON
1
2 C. A tutorial document on the web based PMT will be provided to the General Contractor (GC) who is awarded the
3 contract. Additional training will be provided as needed for the GC and Sub-Contractors (SC) by the CoM.
4 D. The PMT has predefined work flows that channel automated alerts as documents are uploaded, reviewed, and
5 completed. These workflows are designed for inbound information from the contractor as well as outbound
6 information from the Architectural/Engineer consultant and the Owner.
7 E. The GC will be required to receive email notifications, access the internet to review related documentation and
8 be able to upload/download documentation to the various project libraries.
9 F. The SC’s will be required (at a minimum) to receive email notifications and access the internet to review related
10 documentation. Prior to setting up the final PMT the GC and CPM shall meet to review all SP workflows, the GC
11 will determine to what level over the minimum requirements the SC’s will be involved.
12
14 A. The following specification sections are directly related to the CoM PMT system.
15 1. 01 26 13 Request for Information (RFI)
16 2. 01 26 46 Construction Bulletins (CB)
17 3. 01 26 57 Change Order Request (COR)
18 4. 01 26 63 Change Order (CO)
19 5. 01 29 76 Progress Payment Procedures
20 6. 01 31 19 Project Meetings
21 7. 01 32 16 Construction Progress Schedules
22 8. 01 32 26 Construction Progress Reporting
23 9. 01 32 33 Photographic Documentation
24 10. 01 33 23 Submittals
25 11. 01 45 16 Field Quality Control Procedures (Owner)
26
27 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
28
29 2.1. SHAREPOINT SYSTEM RELATED PRODUCTS
30 A. SharePoint is a Microsoft Windows based software that requires no additional software installation, hardware or
31 other special requirements/applications for the users. There are no costs associated with the use of this system.
32 B. Currently the CoM is using SharePoint 2010.
33 1. SharePoint works best if the user’s computer is running Windows versions 7 through 8.1.
34 2. SharePoint works best when used with Internet Explorer versions 7, 8 and 9 (32 bit).
35 a. At this time SharePoint is not fully supported by Internet Explorer versions 10 and 11.
36 b. At this time SharePoint is not entirely compatible with other internet browsers such as Fire Fox,
37 Google Chrome, and Safari.
38
40
41 3.1. POST BID-OPENING
42 A. After bids have been opened, a successful bidder has been determined, and bid acceptance procedures have
43 been initiated the City Project Manager (CPM) will contact the GC to provide the following information.
44 1. Project Management Software Tutorial. This tutorial is in a PDF printable format with screen shots and
45 associated instructions on how to access and use the PMT.
46 a. Tutorial instructions will include but not be limited to the following:
47 i. Descriptions of various libraries, documents, and forms that will be used throughout the
48 construction project.
49 ii. Uploading procedures for various types of documents including standardized naming
50 conventions.
51 2. A blank Project Directory in an Excel spread sheet format. The contractor shall provide the following
52 information for GC and SC staffs as indicated on the spreadsheet. This will generally be the Project
53 Manager for the GC as well as the Sub-contractors and the GC Site Supervisor.
54 a. Last Name, First Name
55 b. Company Name
56 c. Email address (valid, work related)
57 d. Work Phone Number (required, include area code)
58 e. Cell Phone Number (not required, include area code)

CITY OF MADISON
1 3. The GC shall provide the above information for all SC’s where the GC is not self-performing the work.
2 4. The GC may provide project foreperson information for work being self performed if he/she so desires.
3
4 3.2. POST PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
5 A. The GCPM will return the completed Project Directory spread sheet to the CPM no later than the Pre-
6 construction meeting.
7 B. The CPM is responsible for uploading all project directory data into SharePoint and coordinating with CoM
8 Information Technology (CoM-IT) for creating the logins and passwords of non-city staff (GC/SC staffs).
9 C. All GC/SC staff will be notified through an automated email from CoM IT that logins and passwords are available.
10 It is the responsibility of each GC/SC to call the CoM-IT number provided in the email to receive his/her
11 login/password over the phone. Logins and passwords will not be released via email.
12 D. Once the GCPM has received his/her login/password uploading of contract related documents can begin. This
13 would include but not be limited to project schedules, submittals, RFI’s, and other documents as needed.
14 E. All workflows, review of documentation, and general archiving of construction related documentation will be
15 conducted on the PMWS. These documents will generally not be emailed.
16 F. The following documents related to the execution of the contract will not be part of the PMWS:
17 1. All documentation related to executing the contract, such as:
18 a. Sub Contractors list
19 b. Affirmative Action documentation
20 c. Bonding documentation
21 d. Documentation associated with payroll verification
22 e. Final documentation associated with closing out the contract
23 2. Any documentation required/generated by ordinance, code or statute, such as;
24 a. Erosion Control inspections
25 b. Building Inspection Department inspections
26
27
28
29 END OF SECTION

CITY OF MADISON
1 SECTION 01 32 16
2 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES
3
4 PART 1 – GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
5 1.1. SCOPE ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
8 PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................................................................... 1
9 3.1. OVERALL PROJECT SCHEDULE (OPS) ............................................................................................................................. 1
10 3.2. 6 WEEK LOOK-OUT SCHEDULES (LOS) ........................................................................................................................... 1
11 3.3. PROJECT MANAGEMENT WEB SITE (PMWS)................................................................................................................. 2
12
14
15 1.1. SCOPE
16 A. This specification is to identify various project related schedules associated with indicating construction progress
17 and outlook. The following schedules are the responsibility of the General Contractor (GC).
18 1. Overall Project Schedule
19 2. 6 Week Look-out Schedule
20 B. This specification is not intended to include internal schedules generated by the contractors during their
21 planning and execution of the contract.
22
26 C. Section 01 31 19 Progress Meetings
27 D. Section 01 74 13 Progress Cleaning
28 E. Section 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures
29 F. Section 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data
30 G. Section 01 78 36 Warranties
31 H. Section 01 78 39 As-Built Drawings
32 I. Section 01 78 43 Spare Parts and Extra Materials
33 J. Section 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training
34 K. Other specification within the construction documents that may indicate the need for scheduling any event with
35 Owner, Project Architect, Owner Representatives, including any owner provided equipment.
36
38
40
41 3.1. OVERALL PROJECT SCHEDULE (OPS)
42 A. The GC shall prepare an OPS that covers the duration of the contract from the pre-construction meeting through
43 the end of construction to final contract closeout.
44 1. The GC shall review Specification 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures to become familiar with definitions,
45 differences, and requirements for closing out the construction and contract including the association with
46 progress payments.
47 B. The GC shall provide copies and lead a discussion on the OPS during the pre-construction meeting.
48 C. The OPS shall indicate start and end dates of each task associated with the project.
49 D. The OPS shall clearly indicate the critical path of the project.
50 E. The GC shall update the OPS as often as necessary during the duration of the project. Updates will be briefed as
51 needed during bi-weekly progress meetings.
52
53 3.2. 6 WEEK LOOK-OUT SCHEDULES (LOS)
54 A. The GC shall prepare the initial LOS to include detail of daily tasks for the first six (6) weeks of construction in
55 depth for the Pre-construction meeting. The LOS shall be compatible and complimentary to the OPS.
56 B. The GC shall provide copies and lead a discussion on the LOS during the pre-construction meeting.
57 C. The LOS shall indicate start and end dates of each major task, associated related sub-tasks, and required parallel
58 or pre-requisite tasks required to complete the major task on time.

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 32 16 - 1 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES
CITY OF MADISON
1 D. The LOS shall also include identifying and scheduling such events as:
2 1. Pre-installation meetings and mock-up review meetings.
3 2. Quality management reviews of installations before they are covered.
4 3. Owner provided equipment as designated by the contract documents.
5 4. Work by others as designated by the contract documents.
6 5. Critical submittal dates.
7 E. The GC shall update the LOS prior to each bi-weekly progress meeting to indicate the next 6 weeks of scheduled
8 work. Updates will be briefed during each bi-weekly progress meeting.
9
10 3.3. PROJECT MANAGEMENT WEB SITE (PMWS)
11 A. The GC shall upload all project schedules and updates to the PMWS in an original PDF version of the scheduling
12 document. Scans will not be permitted.
13
14
15 END OF SECTION

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 32 16 - 2 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES
CITY OF MADISON
1 SECTION 01 32 19
2 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE
3
4 PART 1 – GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
5 1.1. SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
8 1.4. SUBMITTAL DEFINITIONS .............................................................................................................................................. 1
9 1.5. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................................................................... 1
10 1.6. ADMINITRATIVE SUBMITTALS ....................................................................................................................................... 2
12 PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2
13 3.1. OVERALL RESPONSIBILITIES OF ALL CONTRACTORS...................................................................................................... 2
14 3.2. GENERAL CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES ................................................................................................................. 2
15 3.3. STAFF REVIEW RESPONSIBILITIES .................................................................................................................................. 3
16
18
19 1.1. SUMMARY
20 A. The General Contractor shall submit a complete and comprehensive list of all submittals anticipated during the
21 execution of this contract.
22 B. The GC shall include the Administrative submittals identified in item 1.5 below and shall be required to up load
23 them to the Project Management Web Site.
24 C. The initial Submittals Schedule shall be based on the original contract documents used at the time of bidding and
25 any posted addenda through awarding of the contract.
26 D. The Submittal Schedule may be appended during the execution of the contract based on amendments to the
27 contract in the form of Change Orders, Construction Bulletins, and other related documents that add, or change
28 the scope of the work.
29
33 C. Section 01 33 23 Submittals
34
36 A. The following documents shall be used as the basis for initiating the original Submittals Schedule.
37 1. Drawing documents and specifications (including general provisions) as provided with the bid set
38 documents and any published addenda.
39 B. The following documents shall be used to amend the submittals schedule as needed during the execution of this
40 contract.
41 1. Documents associated with revisions or clarifications to number A.1 above after awarding of the
42 contract, including but not limited to:
43 a. Construction Bulletins
44 b. Approved Change Orders
45
46 1.4. SUBMITTAL DEFINITIONS
47 A. Administrative Submittal: Any submittal that may be required by a Division 1 Specification and as noted in
48 Section 1.5 below.
49 B. Critical Path Submittal: Any early submittal that needs a priority review due to early construction use or long
50 lead times where a delay could affect the critical path of the construction schedule
51 C. Submittal: Any material, product, equipment, or general requirement as outlined in this and other specifications
52 that require a favorable review or acceptance prior to proceeding with procuring the item or proceeding with
53 the Work.
54
55 1.5. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
56 A. The GC and all Sub-contractors shall review the construction documents including the specifications of their
57 individual Division or Trade to compile a complete list of all materials, products, or equipment that will require a
58 positively reviewed submittal to be completed prior to procurement and installation.

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 32 19 - 1 SUMITTALS SCHEDULE
CITY OF MADISON
1 1. Submittals shall include but not be limited to any of the following that may apply:
2 a. Shop Drawings
3 b. Product Data
4 c. Assembly Drawings
5 d. Engineered Drawings
6 e. Product Samples
7 B. The following items will require an approved submittal, verify with specifications for specific needs and
8 requirements:
9 1. Contractor certifications for specialized work such as asbestos removal, well drilling, controls, AV, etc.
10
11 1.6. ADMINISTRATIVE SUBMITTALS
12 A. The GC shall upload the following submittals within 15 working days of receipt of the City of Madison Start Work
13 Letter. All Administrative Submittals shall be approved prior to requesting Progress Payment Number 1.
14 1. Contractors Project Directory, see specification 01 31 23, discuss requirements with CPM
15 2. Schedule of Values, see Specification 01 29 73
16 3. Submittals Schedule, see Specification 01 32 19
17 4. Waste Management Plan, see Specification 01 74 19
18 5. Closeout Requirement Checklist, see Specification 01 77 00
19 6. Warranty Checklist, see Specification 01 78 36
20
22
24
25 3.1. OVERALL RESPONSIBILITIES OF ALL CONTRACTORS
26 A. All contractors shall be responsible for reviewing the drawings and specifications within their Divisions of Work
27 to provide a complete and comprehensive list of submittals to the General Contractor.
28 B. Each list shall indicate the title of the submittal, the associated specification of the submittal, whether the
29 submittal can be considered an early/middle/late submittal, the anticipated date the submittal will be provided
30 and the anticipated date the submittal needs to be approved.
31 C. Contractors shall be aware that the goals for submittal review by the Architect staff and City staff will be as
32 follows:
33 1. For items on the Critical Path as identified by the GC, five (5) working days
34 2. For most other submittals ten (10) working days
35 3. Additional time may be needed for complex submittals or if re-submittals are required.
36 D. The general format of the Submittal Schedule shall be tabular as per this example:
37
Title Specification Critical Path Date provided Date required Remarks
(Y or N)
Concrete Mix Design 03 30 00 Y Oct 1, 2014 Oct 15, 2014
Paint Draw Downs 09 90 00 N Jan 2, 2015 Jan 20, 2015
38
39 3.2. GENERAL CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES
40 A. The General Contractor shall be responsible for all of the following:
41 1. Consolidating all submittal lists from individual contractors into one master list.
42 2. Reviewing all submitted lists for completeness, timing with the overall contract, etc. The GC shall meet
43 with individual contractors to make changes as necessary.
44 3. Upload the completed Submittals Schedule to the Submittal Library on the Project Management Web Site
45 for review as SD 003.0. See Specification 01 33 23 Submittals for more information on this procedure.
46 4. Resubmit the schedule as needed after initial reviews have been completed.
47 B. The GC shall work with other contractors to amend the Submittals Schedule throughout the execution of the
48 project based on changes and modifications as needed.
49 C. The GC and Project Architect shall be responsible for reviewing and briefing the submittal schedule and
50 submittals status at each bi-weekly construction meeting.
51

CITY OF MADISON
1 3.3. STAFF REVIEW RESPONSIBILITIES

2 A. The Project Architect, consulting staff, Owner, and city staff will review the Submittal Schedule for completeness
3 per the plans and specifications within their divisions of work. The reviewing staff may provide comments as
4 needed. Some examples might include the following:
5 1. Submittal not required
6 2. Provide photos of samples with digital submittal
7 3. Insure one submittal for complete system
8 4. Append the schedule to include…
9 5. See Specification <xyz> for additional requirements
10 B. The Project Architect and City Project Manager will finalize review comments regarding the Submittal Schedule.
11 Re-submittal of the submittal schedule may be required.
12
13
14
15 END OF SECTION

CITY OF MADISON
1 SECTION 01 32 26
2 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS REPORTING
3
4 PART 1 – GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
5 1.1. SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
7 1.3. PERFORMANCE AND QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................... 1
8 PART 2 – PRODUCTS - THIS SECTION NOT USED .............................................................................................................................. 1
9 PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................................................................... 1
10 3.1. DAILY PROGRESS JOURNAL ........................................................................................................................................... 1
11 3.2. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS MEETINGS ......................................................................................................................... 2
12
14
15 1.1. SUMMARY
16 A. Daily records of project activities, resources used, weather conditions, and other information related to the
17 ongoing progress of the project are extremely important at all levels of Construction Management.
18 B. Daily records provide the base for weekly progress reports and updating progress schedules.
19
21 A. Section 01 31 19 Project Meetings
23 C. Section 01 32 23 Photographic Documentation
24
25 1.3. PERFORMANCE AND QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
26 A. The General Contractor (GC) shall be responsible for all Construction Progress Reporting as outlined in this and
27 other specifications as noted.
28 B. The GC shall maintain daily progress journals in a format of his/her choosing provided it is legible and contains
29 the information as outlined in Section3.1 below.
30 C. The journal shall be located in the job trailer and shall be reviewable by the Project Architect or City Project
31 Manager if so requested.
32
33 PART 2 – PRODUCTS - THIS SECTION NOT USED
34
36
37 3.1. DAILY PROGRESS JOURNAL
38 A. The GC shall maintain a daily progress journal of daily Work activities for each day on which Work is performed
39 by any employee or entity for which the GC is responsible. Such reports shall include all relevant data
40 concerning the progress of Work activities the GC and Subcontractors are responsible for and the effect of that
41 activity on the time of performance of the Contract.
42 B. Journal entries shall be made on the Daily Work Report Form located in the Construction Progress-Daily Journal
43 Library on the Project Management Web Site. The form consists of the following areas:
44 1. Weather; include temperature, humidity, precipitation, wind and other related information such as
45 significant storm events, times, and details.
46 2. Work completed by trade
47 3. Delays encountered
48 4. Deliveries received or delayed
49 5. Hot issues that need to be addressed
50 6. Safety issues
51 7. Photograph progress and upload to the Photo Library on the Project Management Web Site.
52 8. Other including inspections, testing, etc.
53 9. Space for attaching documents
54 C. Daily Work activity reports shall be completed and signed by the GC’s Job Superintendent or other on-site
55 representative authorized by the GC confirming each such report is current, accurate and complete.
56 D. If applicable the GC shall include schedules of quantities and costs, progress schedules, wage rates, reports,
57 estimates, invoices, records and other data as requested by the CPM concerning Work performed or to be

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 32 26 - 1 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS REPORTING
CITY OF MADISON
1 performed under this Contract if the CPM determines such information is needed to substantiate Change Order
2 proposals, claims, or to resolve disputes.
3
4 3.2. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS MEETINGS
5 A. The GC shall provide a verbal summary of the previous two (2) weeks progress reports at each bi-weekly
6 construction progress meeting.
7
8
9 END OF SECTION

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 32 26 - 2 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS REPORTING
CITY OF MADISON
1 SECTION 01 32 33
2 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
3
4 PART 1 – GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
5 1.1. SCOPE ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
7 PART 2 – PRODUCTS - THIS SECTION NOT USED ............................................................................................................................... 1
8 PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................................................................... 1
9 3.1. REQUIREMENTS FOR DIGITAL PHOTOGRAPHS.............................................................................................................. 1
10 3.2. PICTURE CONTENT ........................................................................................................................................................ 1
11 3.3. PROJECT MANAGEMENT WEB SITE ............................................................................................................................... 1
12
14
15 1.1. SCOPE
16 A. The General Contractor (GC) shall be required to take weekly digital photographs of construction progress and
17 upload the photos directly to the Project Management Web Site (PMWS).
18
20 A. Section 01 31 23 Project Management Web Site
21 B. Section 01 32 26 Construction Progress Reporting
22
24
26
27 3.1. REQUIREMENTS FOR DIGITAL PHOTOGRAPHS
28 A. All digital photographs shall be taken with a good quality digital camera, cell phone, tablet, and other such digital
29 device.
30 B. Digital photographs shall be properly zoomed in/out to capture a specific level of detail as necessary.
31 C. Digital photographs shall be formatted to achieve a good, clear, and detailed image where the final file size is
32 between 600 KB and 1.2 MB (1200KB).
33 D. The camera default naming convention is acceptable. The GC does not need to rename or specifically identify
34 pictures in the title.
35 E. All digital photographs shall be saved in a JPEG (.jpg) format and uploaded directly to the PMWS.
36
37 3.2. PICTURE CONTENT
38 A. The GC shall take exterior photographs from at least two (2) different angles.
39 1. This requirement shall only be applicable when there is exterior work connected with the project.
40 2. When applicable this requirement shall begin prior to commencing any site work.
41 3. This requirement shall end when the exterior work has been substantially completed.
42 4. This requirement may be suspended due to weather conditions or substantial delays in exterior progress.
43 B. The GC shall take interior photographs of interior construction, equipment installation, rough-ins and other such
44 progress that helps document weekly progress reporting. Interior photographs should focus on specific
45 significant installations as well as general progress throughout the progress of the contract.
46
47 3.3. PROJECT MANAGEMENT WEB SITE
48 A. The GC shall upload the digital photographs to the appropriate progress folder in the Project Images Library.
49 B. Progress folders are labeled with the Construction Week Number and the date for Monday of that week.
50 C. The GC shall notify the City of Madison Project Manager if additional progress folders need to be created.
51
52
53
54 END OF SECTION

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 32 33 - 1 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 01 33 20
2 ELECTRONIC MEDIA RELEASE STATEMENT
3
4 In accepting and utilizing any drawings, specification, or other data on any form of electronic media (the “Data”) gen-
5 erated and provided by Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. (MSR) and its Consultants, the user covenants and agrees
6 that all such drawings and data are instruments of service of Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd., and its Consultants,
7 shall retain all common law, statutory law and other rights, including copyrights, and no transfer of rights is intended
8 by this transmittal.
9
10 The Data is scaled but are not intended for use in construction. The electronic files submitted by MSR to the under-
11 signed are submitted for use in preparing submittals for the project described above (“Project”) only. By accepting
12 and using the Data, you agree to the terms set forth below.
13
14 The user further agrees not to use the Data, in whole or in part, for any client, purpose or project other than the Pro-
15 ject. MSR and its Consultants are not liable for claims resulting in any way from unauthorized changes made by user
16 or user’s reuse of the Data for any other project. User will indemnify and defend MSR and its Consultants from any
17 damage, liability or cost, including reasonable attorneys’ fees, arising from any actions on user’s part that result in
18 changes or reuse of the Data without the prior written consent of MSR.
19
20 The Data is provided without warranties of any kind, including express, implied or statutory warranties of fitness for a
21 particular purpose, merchantability or non-infringement.
22
23 MSR and its Consultants take no responsibility for the Data’s compatibility with software or hardware used by the
24 recipient. We recommend that the Data be screened for virus contamination prior to its use.
25 The user warrants that they have to authority to accept these terms on behalf of the use and MSR can rely upon said
26 authority.
27 END OF SECTION

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 013320 - 1 ELECTRONIC MEDIA RELEASE STATEMENT
CITY OF MADISON
1 SECTION 01 33 23
2 SUBMITTALS
3
4 PART 1 – GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
5 1.1. SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
6 1.2. RELATED REFERENCES ................................................................................................................................................... 1
7 1.3. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................................................................... 1
9 PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2
10 3.1. GENERAL CONTRACTORS PROCEDURES ........................................................................................................................ 2
11 3.2. SUBMITTAL REVIEW ...................................................................................................................................................... 3
12 3.3. PROJECT ARCHITECTS REVIEW ...................................................................................................................................... 3
13
15
16 1.1. SUMMARY
17 A. The General Contractor (GC) shall be responsible for providing submittals for review of all contractors and sub-
18 contractors as designated in the construction documents. Submittals shall include but not be limited to all of the
19 following:
20 1. Equipment specified and pre-approved in the specification; to ensure quality, construction, and
21 performance specifications have not changed since final design.
22 2. Equipment specified by performance in the specification; to ensure that the intended quality,
23 construction, and performance specified is met by the selected material or product.
24 3. Shop, piece, erection, and other such drawings as indicated in the specifications to ensure all structural,
25 dimensional, and assembly requirements are being met.
26 4. Submittals indicating installation sequencing
27 5. Submittals indicating control sequencing
28 6. Contractor licensing, certification, and other such regulatory documentation when required by a
29 specification.
30 7. Other submittals as may be required by individual specifications.
31 B. The submittal process shall not be used to determine alternates to specified products or equipment. All
32 considerations shall be reviewed during the bidding process and acceptable alternates shall be acknowledged by
33 addendum prior to the closing of bidding. See bidding instructions for the information on submitting alternates
34 for consideration.
35 D. In the event that a manufacturer has significantly changed a product (discontinued a model, changed dimension
36 or performance data changed available colors, etc.) since bid opening the GC shall submit a Request for
37 Information (RFI) to the Project Architect requesting other approved alternates prior to uploading a digital
38 submittal.
39 E. Contractors and sub-contractors shall be responsible for knowing the submittal requirements of ALL sections
40 within their scope of work under the contract. The Owner reserves the right to request documentation on any
41 materials, equipment, or product being installed where a submittal is not on file. If the material, equipment, or
42 product installed is determined not to meet the intent of the specification the contractor/sub-contractor shall be
43 required to remove and replace the items involved. The GC shall be solely responsible for all costs associated
44 with the removal and replacement.
45
46 1.2. RELATED REFERENCES
49 C. Section 01 32 19 Submittals Schedule
51 E. All Technical Specifications, contract documents, construction drawings, and any published addendums during
52 the bidding process.
53 F. All contract documents generated during the execution of the contract including but not limited to Requests for
54 Information (RFI) and Construction Bulletins (CB).
55
56 1.3. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
57 A. A completed submittal shall meet the following requirements:

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 33 23 - 1 SUBMITTALS
CITY OF MADISON
1 1. Digital submittal shall be original PDF of manufacturer’s data sheets or high quality color scan of the
2 same.
3 a. Submittals shall not include sales fliers or other similar documents that typically do not provide
4 complete manufacturers data.
5 2. Documents within the PDF submittal shall be printable to a sized sheet no less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches
6 and no larger than 24 by 36 inches.
7 3. At the beginning of each submittal the contractor shall identify the plan reference (WC-1, EF-3, etc.) in
8 RED block letters that the submittal is for.
9 4. Where multiple model numbers appear in a table the contractor shall identify the specific model being
10 submitted by using a RED square, box, or other designation to distinguish the correct model from others
11 on the page.
12 B. A complete submittal will include all information associated with the product or equipment as presented in
13 plans, equipment tables, and specifications. Information shall include but not be limited to the following:
14 1. Dimensional data
15 2. Performance data
16 3. Resource requirements, power, water, waste, etc
17 4. Clearance and maintenance requirements
18 5. Finish information, colors, textures, etc.
19 6. Warranty information
20 C. Where a submittal includes material samples (carpet, tile, paint draw downs, etc.) the contractor shall do the
21 following:
22 1. The Contractor shall submit the sample(s) as indicated in the specification.
23 2. The Contractor shall include a quality photograph(s) of the product with the digital submittal.
24 Photographs shall meet the following requirements:
25 a. Formatted to be between 500Kb and 1.0 Mb in file size
26 b. Have no glare or flash reflection on the sample
27 c. Sample fills the frame of the photo and shows detail as needed. Include multiple photos from
28 other angles as needed.
29 d. Scanned copies of products or photos are not acceptable.
30 D. Uploaded submittals should be relative and related to a specific written specification.
31 1. Do not upload submittals under a broad category or division (I.E. HVAC 23 00 00). Always upload by the
32 specific specification that identifies a required product or performance to be met.
33 2. Group related items together if the specification is written that way. (I.E. all of the plumbing fixtures and
34 trim relative to one specific specification should be submitted together).
35 3. Submittals shall be grouped and adhere to the divisions in the submittal schedule. Submittals that do not
36 conform to the submittal schedule and/or specification divisions will be rejected for re-submittal.
37
39
41
42 3.1. GENERAL CONTRACTORS PROCEDURES
43 A. All required submittals will be uploaded to the Construction Administration-Submittal Drawings Library on the
44 Project Management Web Site (PMWS) by the GC.
45 1. The GC shall open a new Submittal Form in the Submittals Drawings Library for each required submittal
46 from the Submittals schedule.
47 2. Fill in required information on the form that will be used for routing the review and comments.
48 3. Attach all documentation as described in Section 1.3 above.
49 a. Submit samples under separate cover to the Project Architect when necessary.
50 B. Uploading the submittal indicates that the GC has reviewed and approved the submittal against the contract
51 document requirements.
52 C. The GC shall discuss submittal status at all progress meetings and shall monitor submittal review/approval/re-
53 submittal so as to not incur delays in the project schedule.
54 D. A completed upload of the submittal to the PMWS initiates the review process workflow.
55 E. The GC and sub-contractors shall provide re-submittals as required.
56

CITY OF MADISON
1 3.2. SUBMITTAL REVIEW

2 A. Upon completion of the submittal upload by the GC the PMWS automatically notifies the appropriate
3 Architect/Engineer and Owner Representative by Division/Specification number that there is a submittal for
4 review.
5 B. The submittal shall be reviewed internally by the required Architect/Engineer and Owner Representative in a
6 timely fashion and provide commentary on missing items, incorrect information, or incomplete shop drawings,
7 etc as needed.
8 C. When the internal review is completed the PMWS will notify the Project Architect the submittal is ready for final
9 review.
10
11 3.3. PROJECT ARCHITECTS REVIEW
12 A. Upon completion of the internal review the Project Architect shall review all internal review comments, confer
13 with the CPM as needed and determine the appropriate disposition status for the submittal (approved or
14 resubmit).
15 C. The Project Architect shall summarize final internal review comments onto the submittal cover sheet, provide a
16 final disposition of the submittal and update the review status of the submittal to “Complete…” (with or w/o
17 comments) or “Rejected”.
18 D. A completed Final Review status initiates the PMWS to notify the GC and appropriate sub-contractor(s) that the
19 review of the submittal has been completed.
20
21
22
23 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 01 40 00
2 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
4 1.1 SUMMARY
5 1.2 DEFINITIONS
6 1.3 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES
7 1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
8 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
9 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
10 1.7 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS
11 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
12 1.9 QUALITY CONTROL
13 1.10 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
15 NOT USED
17 1.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
18 1.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
19 PART 1 - GENERAL
20 1.1 SUMMARY
21 A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.
22 B. Testing and inspection services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated.
23 These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document
24 requirements.
25 1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance
26 and quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
27 2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and quality-control services required by
28 Architect, Owner, Commissioning Authority, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by
29 provisions of this Section.
30 1.2 DEFINITIONS
31 A. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" unless otherwise further described
32 means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and
33 extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with
34 requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
35 B. Field Quality-Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work
36 and for completed Work.
37 C. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee,
38 Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation,
39 erection, application, assembly, and similar operations.
40 1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain
41 construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements
42 specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).
43 D. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site either as freestanding temporary built
44 elements or as part of permanent construction. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under
45 Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution; to review
46 coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate
47 compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated,
48 approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.
49 1. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies constructed and tested at testing facility to
50 verify performance characteristics.
51 2. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope constructed on-site as as part of
52 permanent construction, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and subassemblies.
53 3. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and ceiling finishes;
54 doors; windows; millwork; casework; specialties; furnishings and equipment; and lighting.
55 E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and
56 materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.
57

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 014000 - 1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 F. Product Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory
2 (NRTL) according to 29 CFR 1910.7, by a testing agency accredited according to NIST's National
3 Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), or by a testing agency qualified to conduct product
4 testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance
5 with specified requirements.
6 G. Source Quality-Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source; for example, plant,
7 mill, factory, or shop.
8 H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall
9 mean the same as testing agency.
10 I. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of
11 the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply
12 with requirements.
13 J. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of
14 the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply
15 with requirements. Contractor's quality-control services do not include contract administration activities
16 performed by Architect.
17 1.3 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

18 A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design
19 professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and
20 systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
21 1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

22 A. Conflicting Standards and Other Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards or requirements
23 are specified and the standards or requirements establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum
24 quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that
25 are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for direction before proceeding.
26 B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum
27 provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality
28 specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements,
29 indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer
30 uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

32 A. Delegated-Design Services Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required
33 submittals, submit a statement signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product
34 and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional
35 currently licensed in the State of Wisconsin, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance
36 with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in
37 performing these services.

39 A. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of
40 written statement of responsibility submitted to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the
41 following systems:
42 1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the Statement
43 of Special Inspections.
44 2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the Statement of Special
45 Inspections.
46 B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
47 their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the
48 inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
49 C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's record, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications,
50 inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments,
51 correspondence, records, and similar documents established for compliance with standards and
52 regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
53

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 1.7 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

2 A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections.
3 Include the following:
4 1. Date of issue.
5 2. Project title and number.
6 3. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of testing agency.
7 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
8 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
9 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
10 7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
11 8. Complete test or inspection data.
12 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
13 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspection.
14 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract
15 Document requirements.
16 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
17 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
18 B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting
19 manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the
20 following:
21 1. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
22 2. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
23 3. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if
24 not, what corrective action was taken.
25 4. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies
27 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
28 C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting
29 manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other
30 Sections. Include the following:
31 1. Statement that equipment complies with requirements.
32 2. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies
34 3. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

36 A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required;
37 individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
38 B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those
39 indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
40 production capacity to produce required units. As applicable, procure products from manufacturers able to
41 meet qualification requirements, warranty requirements, and technical or factory-authorized service
42 representative requirements.
43 C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this
44 Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to
45 produce required units.
46 D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, applying, or assembling work
47 similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in
48 construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
49 E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in
50 jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind
51 indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly,
52 or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
53 F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed
54 by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification
55 requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
56 1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.
57 G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and
58 capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with
59 additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having
60 jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who

2 is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products
3 that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
4 I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer
5 who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are
6 similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
7 J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for
8 compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following:
9 1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:
10 a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.
11 b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to
12 prevent delaying the Work.
13 c. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of
14 construction indicated for the completed Work.
15 d. When testing is complete, remove test specimens and test assemblies, mockups (unless
16 indicated to be part of the final work), and laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on
17 Project.
18 2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and
19 similar quality-assurance service to Architect and Commissioning Authority, with copy to
20 Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected
21 work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
22 K. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of
23 construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the
24 completed Work:
25 1. Build mockups of size indicated.
26 2. Build mockups in location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect or Owner.
27 3. Notify Architect and Owner seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
28 constructed.
29 4. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that will be
30 employed to perform same tasks during the construction at Project.
31 5. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
32 6. Obtain Architect's and Owner's approval of mockups before starting corresponding work,
33 fabrication, or construction.
34 a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.
35 7. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the
36 completed Work.
37 8. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.
38 L. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified in individual
39 Specification Sections.

41 A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will
42 engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
43 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies
44 engaged and a description of types of testing and inspection they are engaged to perform.
45 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed
46 to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor.
47 B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's
48 responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities, whether specified or not, to verify and document
49 that the Work complies with requirements.
50 1. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform quality-control services.
51 a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by
52 Owner.
53 2. Notify testing agencies at least 48 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or
54 inspection will be performed.
55 3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written
56 report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
57 4. Testing and inspection requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are
58 Contractor's responsibility.
59 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they
60 so direct.
61 C. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that
2 replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
3 D. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Commissioning Authority, Owner and
4 Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
5 1. Notify Architect, Commissioning Authority, Owner and Contractor promptly of irregularities or
6 deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
7 2. Determine the locations from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are
8 conducted.
9 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected
10 work complies with or deviates from requirements.
11 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control
12 service through Contractor.
13 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or
14 accept any portion of the Work.
15 6. Do not perform duties of Contractor.
16 E. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to
17 inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report
18 results in writing as specified in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures."
19 F. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to
20 observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in
21 preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation
22 of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.
23 G. Associated Contractor Services: Cooperate with agencies and representatives performing required tests,
24 inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested.
25 Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the
26 following:
27 1. Access to the Work.
28 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
29 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspection.
30 Assist agency in obtaining samples.
31 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
32 5. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency.
33 6. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspection equipment at Project site.
34 H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and quality-
35 control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to
36 accommodate testing and inspection.
37 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
38 1.10 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

39 A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests
40 and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows:
41 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and
42 reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.
43 2. Notifying Architect, Commissioning Authority, Owner, and Contractor promptly of irregularities
44 and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
45 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to
46 Architect and Commissioning Authority, through Owner with copy to Contractor and to
47 authorities having jurisdiction.
48 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes
49 a list of unresolved deficiencies.
50 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work
51 complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
52 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.
53

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
3 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

4 A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
5 1. Date test or inspection was conducted.
6 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.
7 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.
8 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
9 B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and
10 inspection log for Architect's, Commissioning Authority's, and Owner's reference during normal working
11 hours.
12 1. Submit log at Project closeout as part of Project Record Documents.
13 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

14 A. General: On completion of testing, inspection, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged
15 construction and restore substrates and finishes.
16 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification
17 Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend
18 restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with
19 the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 01 73 00 "Execution."
20 B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
21 C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for
22 quality-control services.
23 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
SECTION 01 42 00
REFERENCES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 – EXECUTION
Not Used
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and
requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the
Contract.
C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized,"
"selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."
D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in
Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and
"specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and
rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.
F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and
similar operations.
G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to dimension,
finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site.
H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on
Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.
1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable
construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the
Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents
by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry
standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the
Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies
directly from publication source.
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia of
Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional
Associations of the United States."
B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
1. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council; www.aabc.com.
2. AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association; www.aamanet.org.
3. AAPFCO - Association of American Plant Food Control Officials; www.aapfco.org.
4. AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials;
www.transportation.org.
5. AATCC - American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists; www.aatcc.org.
6. ABMA - American Bearing Manufacturers Association; www.americanbearings.org.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 014200 - 1 REFERENCES
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
7. ABMA - American Boiler Manufacturers Association; www.abma.com.

8. ACI - American Concrete Institute; (Formerly: ACI International); www.abma.com.
9. ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association; www.concrete-pipe.org.
10. AEIC - Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The); www.aeic.org.
11. AF&PA - American Forest & Paper Association; www.afandpa.org.
12. AGA - American Gas Association; www.aga.org.
13. AHAM - Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers; www.aham.org.
14. AHRI - Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The); www.ahrinet.org.
15. AI - Asphalt Institute; www.asphaltinstitute.org.
16. AIA - American Institute of Architects (The); www.aia.org.
17. AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction; www.aisc.org.
18. AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute; http://www.steel.org.
19. AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction; www.aitc-glulam.org.
20. AMCA - Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; www.amca.org.
21. ANSI - American National Standards Institute; www.ansi.org.
22. AOSA - Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.; www.aosaseed.com.
23. APA - APA - The Engineered Wood Association; www.apawood.org.
24. APA - Architectural Precast Association; www.archprecast.org.
25. API - American Petroleum Institute; www.api.org.
26. ARI - Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI).
27. ARI - American Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI).
28. ARMA - Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association; www.asphaltroofing.org.
29. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers; www.asce.org.
30. ASCE/SEI - American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute; (See ASCE).
31. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers;
www.ashrae.org.
32. ASME - ASME International; (American Society of Mechanical Engineers); www.asme.org.
33. ASSE - American Society of Safety Engineers (The); www.asse.org.
34. ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineering; www.asse-plumbing.org.
35. ASTM - ASTM International; www.astm.org.
36. ATIS - Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions; www.atis.org.
37. AWEA - American Wind Energy Association; www.awea.org.
38. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute; www.awinet.org.
39. AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; www.awmac.com.
40. AWPA - American Wood Protection Association; www.awpa.com.
41. AWS - American Welding Society; www.aws.org.
42. AWWA - American Water Works Association; www.awwa.org.
43. BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; www.buildershardware.com.
44. BIA - Brick Industry Association (The); www.gobrick.com.
45. BICSI - BICSI, Inc.; www.bicsi.org.
46. BIFMA - BIFMA International; (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association);
www.bifma.org.
47. BISSC - Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee; www.bissc.org.
48. BWF - Badminton World Federation; (Formerly: International Badminton Federation);
www.bissc.org.
49. CDA - Copper Development Association; www.copper.org.
50. CEA - Canadian Electricity Association; www.electricity.ca.
51. CEA - Consumer Electronics Association; www.ce.org.
52. CFFA - Chemical Fabrics and Film Association, Inc.; www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com.
53. CFSEI - Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute; www.cfsei.org.
54. CGA - Compressed Gas Association; www.cganet.com.
55. CIMA - Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.cellulose.org.
56. CISCA - Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association; www.cisca.org.
57. CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; www.cispi.org.
58. CLFMI - Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; www.chainlinkinfo.org.
59. CPA - Composite Panel Association; www.pbmdf.com.
60. CRI - Carpet and Rug Institute (The); www.carpet-rug.org.
61. CRRC - Cool Roof Rating Council; www.coolroofs.org.
62. CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; www.crsi.org.
63. CSA - Canadian Standards Association; www.csa.ca.
64. CSA - CSA International; (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services); www.csa-
international.org.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
65. CSI - Construction Specifications Institute (The); www.csinet.org.

66. CSSB - Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau; www.cedarbureau.org.
67. CTI - Cooling Technology Institute; (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute); www.cti.org.
68. CWC - Composite Wood Council; (See CPA).
69. DASMA - Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association; www.dasma.com.
70. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute; www.dhi.org.
71. ECA - Electronic Components Association; (See ECIA).
72. ECAMA - Electronic Components Assemblies & Materials Association; (See ECIA).
73. ECIA - Electronic Components Industry Association; www.eciaonline.org.
74. EIA - Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA).
75. EIMA - EIFS Industry Members Association; www.eima.com.
76. EJMA - Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.ejma.org.
77. ESD - ESD Association; (Electrostatic Discharge Association); www.esda.org.
78. ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association; (See PLASA).
79. EVO - Efficiency Valuation Organization; www.evo-world.org.
80. FCI - Fluid Controls Institute; www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org.
81. FIBA - Federation Internationale de Basketball; (The International Basketball Federation);
www.fiba.com.
82. FIVB - Federation Internationale de Volleyball; (The International Volleyball Federation);
www.fivb.org.
83. FM Approvals - FM Approvals LLC; www.fmglobal.com.
84. FM Global - FM Global; (Formerly: FMG - FM Global); www.fmglobal.com.
85. FRSA - Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc.;
www.floridaroof.com.
86. FSA - Fluid Sealing Association; www.fluidsealing.com.
87. FSC - Forest Stewardship Council U.S.; www.fscus.org.
88. GA - Gypsum Association; www.gypsum.org.
89. GANA - Glass Association of North America; www.glasswebsite.com.
90. GS - Green Seal; www.greenseal.org.
91. HI - Hydraulic Institute; www.pumps.org.
92. HI/GAMA - Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association; (See AHRI).
93. HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association; (See NAAMM).
94. HPVA - Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; www.hpva.org.
95. HPW - H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.; www.hpwhite.com.
96. IAPSC - International Association of Professional Security Consultants; www.iapsc.org.
97. IAS - International Accreditation Service; www.iasonline.org.
98. IAS - International Approval Services; (See CSA).
99. ICBO - International Conference of Building Officials; (See ICC).
100. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.
101. ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.; www.icea.net.
102. ICPA - International Cast Polymer Alliance; www.icpa-hq.org.
103. ICRI - International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.; www.icri.org.
104. IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission; www.iec.ch.
105. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The); www.ieee.org.
106. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society; (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering Society of North
America); www.ies.org.
107. IESNA - Illuminating Engineering Society of North America; (See IES).
108. IEST - Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology; www.iest.org.
109. IGMA - Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance; www.igmaonline.org.
110. IGSHPA - International Ground Source Heat Pump Association; www.igshpa.okstate.edu.
111. ILI - Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.; www.iliai.com.
112. Intertek - Intertek Group; (Formerly: ETL SEMCO; Intertek Testing Service NA); www.intertek.com.
113. ISA - International Society of Automation (The); (Formerly: Instrumentation, Systems, and
Automation Society); www.isa.org.
114. ISAS - Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (The); (See ISA).
115. ISFA - International Surface Fabricators Association; (Formerly: International Solid Surface
Fabricators Association); www.isfanow.org.
116. ISO - International Organization for Standardization; www.iso.org.
117. ISSFA - International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; (See ISFA).
118. ITU - International Telecommunication Union; www.itu.int/home.
119. KCMA - Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association; www.kcma.org.
120. LMA - Laminating Materials Association; (See CPA).

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
121. LPI - Lightning Protection Institute; www.lightning.org.

122. MBMA - Metal Building Manufacturers Association; www.mbma.com.
123. MCA - Metal Construction Association; www.metalconstruction.org.
124. MFMA - Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.maplefloor.org.
125. MFMA - Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.metalframingmfg.org.
126. MHIA - Material Handling Industry of America; www.mhia.org.
127. MIA - Marble Institute of America; www.mhia.org.
128. MMPA - Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; www.wmmpa.com.
129. MPI - Master Painters Institute; www.paintinfo.com.
130. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.; www.mss-
hq.org.
131. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; www.naamm.org.
132. NACE - NACE International; (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International);
www.nace.org.
133. NADCA - National Air Duct Cleaners Association; www.nadca.com.
134. NAIMA - North American Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.naima.org.
135. NBGQA - National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.; www.nbgqa.com.
136. NBI - New Buildings Institute; www.newbuildings.org.
137. NCAA - National Collegiate Athletic Association (The); www.ncaa.org.
138. NCMA - National Concrete Masonry Association; www.ncma.org.
139. NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau; www.nebb.org.
140. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association; www.necanet.org.
141. NeLMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; www.nelma.org.
142. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association; www.nema.org.
143. NETA - InterNational Electrical Testing Association; www.netaworld.org.
144. NFHS - National Federation of State High School Associations; www.nfhs.org.
145. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association; www.nfpa.org.
146. NFPA - NFPA International; (See NFPA).
147. NFRC - National Fenestration Rating Council; www.nfrc.org.
148. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association; www.nhla.com.
149. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority; www.nlga.org.
150. NOFMA - National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association; (See NWFA).
151. NOMMA - National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association; www.nomma.org.
152. NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association; www.nrca.net.
153. NRMCA - National Ready Mixed Concrete Association; www.nrmca.org.
154. NSF - NSF International; www.nsf.org.
155. NSPE - National Society of Professional Engineers; www.nspe.org.
156. NSSGA - National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association; www.nssga.org.
157. NTMA - National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The); www.ntma.com.
158. NWFA - National Wood Flooring Association; www.nwfa.org.
159. PCI - Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; www.pci.org.
160. PDI - Plumbing & Drainage Institute; www.pdionline.org.
161. PLASA - PLASA; (Formerly: ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association);
www.plasa.org.
162. RCSC - Research Council on Structural Connections; www.boltcouncil.org.
163. RFCI - Resilient Floor Covering Institute; www.rfci.com.
164. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service; www.redwoodinspection.com.
165. SAE - SAE International; www.sae.org.
166. SCTE - Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; www.scte.org.
167. SDI - Steel Deck Institute; www.sdi.org.
168. SDI - Steel Door Institute; www.steeldoor.org.
169. SEFA - Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (The); www.sefalabs.com.
170. SEI/ASCE - Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers; (See ASCE).
171. SIA - Security Industry Association; www.siaonline.org.
172. SJI - Steel Joist Institute; www.steeljoist.org.
173. SMA - Screen Manufacturers Association; www.smainfo.org.
174. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; www.smacna.org.
175. SMPTE - Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers; www.smpte.org.
176. SPFA - Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance; www.sprayfoam.org.
177. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; www.spib.org.
178. SPRI - Single Ply Roofing Industry; www.spri.org.
179. SRCC - Solar Rating & Certification Corporation; www.solar-rating.org.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
180. SSINA - Specialty Steel Industry of North America; www.ssina.com.

181. SSPC - SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings; www.sspc.org.
182. STI - Steel Tank Institute; www.steeltank.com.
183. SWI - Steel Window Institute; www.steelwindows.com.
184. SWPA - Submersible Wastewater Pump Association; www.swpa.org.
185. TCA - Tilt-Up Concrete Association; www.tilt-up.org.
186. TCNA - Tile Council of North America, Inc.; www.tileusa.com.
187. TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.tema.org.
188. TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association (The); (Formerly: TIA/EIA - Telecommunications
Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance); www.tiaonline.org.
189. TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA).
190. TMS - The Masonry Society; www.masonrysociety.org.
191. TPI - Truss Plate Institute; www.tpinst.org.
192. TPI - Turfgrass Producers International; www.turfgrasssod.org.
193. TRI - Tile Roofing Institute; www.tileroofing.org.
194. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; www.ul.com.
195. UNI - Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association; www.uni-bell.org.
196. USAV - USA Volleyball; www.usavolleyball.org.
197. USGBC - U.S. Green Building Council; www.usgbc.org.
198. USITT - United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.; www.usitt.org.
199. WASTEC - Waste Equipment Technology Association; www.wastec.org.
200. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; www.wclib.org.
201. WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association; www.wcmanet.org.
202. WDMA - Window & Door Manufacturers Association; www.wdma.com.
203. WI - Woodwork Institute; www.wicnet.org.
204. WSRCA - Western States Roofing Contractors Association; www.wsrca.com.
205. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association; www.wwpa.org.
C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
1. DIN - Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.V.; www.din.de.
2. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials; www.iapmo.org.
3. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.
4. ICC-ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org.
D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
1. COE - Army Corps of Engineers; www.usace.army.mil.
2. CPSC - Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov.
3. DOC - Department of Commerce; National Institute of Standards and Technology; www.nist.gov.
4. DOD - Department of Defense; www.quicksearch.dla.mil.
5. DOE - Department of Energy; www.energy.gov.
6. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov.
7. FAA - Federal Aviation Administration; www.faa.gov.
8. FG - Federal Government Publications; www.gpo.gov/fdsys.
9. GSA - General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov.
10. HUD - Department of Housing and Urban Development; www.hud.gov.
11. LBL - Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; Environmental Energy Technologies Division;
www.eetd.lbl.gov.
12. OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov.
13. SD - Department of State; www.state.gov.
14. TRB - Transportation Research Board; National Cooperative Highway Research Program; The
National Academies; www.trb.org.
15. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Agriculture Research Service; U.S. Salinity Laboratory;
www.ars.usda.gov.
16. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Rural Utilities Service; www.usda.gov.
17. USDOJ - Department of Justice; Office of Justice Programs; National Institute of Justice;
www.ojp.usdoj.gov.
18. USP - U.S. Pharmacopeial Convention; www.usp.org.
19. USPS - United States Postal Service; www.usps.com.
E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the
following list.
1. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office;

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
www.gpo.gov/fdsys.
2. DOD - Department of Defense; Military Specifications and Standards; Available from DLA
Document Services; www.quicksearch.dla.mil.
3. DSCC - Defense Supply Center Columbus; (See FS).
4. FED-STD - Federal Standard; (See FS).
5. FS - Federal Specification; Available from DLA Document Services; www.quicksearch.dla.mil.
a. Available from Defense Standardization Program; www.dsp.dla.mil.
b. Available from General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov.
c. Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design Guide;
www.wbdg.org/ccb.
6. MILSPEC - Military Specification and Standards; (See DOD).
7. USAB - United States Access Board; www.access-board.gov.
8. USATBCB - U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; (See USAB).
F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
1. CBHF; State of California; Department of Consumer Affairs; Bureau of Electronic and Appliance
Repair, Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation; www.bearhfti.ca.gov.
2. CCR; California Code of Regulations; Office of Administrative Law; California Title 24 Energy Code;
www.calregs.com.
3. CDHS; California Department of Health Services; (See CDPH).
4. CDPH; California Department of Public Health; Indoor Air Quality Program; www.cal-iaq.org.
5. CPUC; California Public Utilities Commission; www.cpuc.ca.gov.
6. SCAQMD; South Coast Air Quality Management District; www.aqmd.gov.
7. TFS; Texas A&M Forest Service; Sustainable Forestry and Economic Development;
www.txforestservice.tamu.edu.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION

CITY OF MADISON
REVISED March 22, 2017
1 SECTION 01 43 39
2 MOCKUPS
3
4 PART 1 – GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
5 1.1. SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
10 PART 2 - PRODUCTS .......................................................................................................................................................................... 2
11 2.1. MATERIALS .................................................................................................................................................................... 2
12 PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2
13 3.1. REVIEW THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................................................... 2
14 3.2. MOCKUP CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................................................................................. 2
15 3.3. MOCKUP REVIEW .......................................................................................................................................................... 2
16 3.4. FINAL SUBMITTAL ......................................................................................................................................................... 4
17
19
20 1.1. SUMMARY
21 A. Definition
22 1. Mockups are field samples constructed, applied, or assembled at the project site for review by the
23 Owner, Owners Representative, Architect and Consultants.
24 2. Mockups are three dimensional, true scale models that illustrate materials and methods, equipment,
25 workmanship, or location; based on plans, details, and assemblies.
26 B. Approved mockups establish the standard of quality by which the final work will be judged.
27 C. Approved mockups shall be properly documented and entered Into the Submittal Library on the Project
28 Management Web Site like any other required submittal. See section 3.4 below for more information.
29
32 B. Section 01 26 46 Change Bulletin (CB)
34 D. Section 01 31 19 Project Meetings
35 E. Section 01 32 16 Construction Progress Schedules
36 F. Section 01 33 23 Submittals
37 G. Section 01 45 00 Quality Control
38
40 A. The following documents shall be used for preparing mockups.
41 1. All plans, specifications, and details including those derived as revisions (RFI, CB, CO).
42 2. Construction Progress Schedules. Mockups shall be done and completed in a timely fashion for review
43 and approval so as to not impact the Contractors project schedule.
44 3. Any Manufacturers installation/assembly instructions.
45
47 A. All Contractors shall be responsible for providing and constructing mockups as specified in their Division of Work
48 in the plans and specifications.
49 B. Materials to be used shall be as specified in the construction documents, full sized and properly assembled.
50 C. Completed mockups shall be of sufficient size to provide visible detail of all components as needed for the
51 sample.
52
54 A. The General Contractor (GC) shall be responsible for coordinating all of the following as needed:
55 1. Designating the location for the mockup construction
56 2. Coordinating the work of all contractors and materials required to complete the mockup
57 3. Ensuring that the mockup meets the intent of the construction documents before scheduling the mockup
58 review meeting.

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 43 39 - 1 MOCKUPS
CITY OF MADISON
1
2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
3
4 2.1. MATERIALS
5 A. The materials used in mockups shall be only those materials indicated in the plans, specifications, and favorably
6 reviewed submittals.
7 B. Mockups shall be made of full scale materials as delivered to the project site.
8 C. All materials associated with a particular detail, construction method, manufacturer’s installation instructions
9 shall be properly represented and visible in the mockup. This includes but is not limited to finished mortar joints,
10 sealants, backer rods, tie bars, rebar, etc.
11
13
14 3.1. REVIEW THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
15 A. The GC shall review the plans and specifications with all required contractors prior to constructing the mockup.
16 1. Mockups that will be built and remain in place, if favorably reviewed, will be installed in an area easily
17 accessible for review.
18 2. Mockups that will not be built in place or will not remain will be constructed in a space on the project site
19 protected from weather, construction traffic, and other such disturbances until such time as the
20 associated work has been completed.
21 3. Insure all products being represented in the mockup meet the plans, specifications, and any published
22 changes.
23
24 3.2. MOCKUP CONSTRUCTION
25 A. Mockups shall be of sufficient size to show various material adjacencies, connectivity, patterns, and other such
26 related features.
27 B. Mockups shall be constructed in a layered fashion so that all products being used can be seen and evaluated.
28 C. The construction detail below is an example of a properly layered mockup.
29
30
31 D. Required Mockups:
32 1. 26 56 00: Exterior façade lighting on MLK (south elevation) side of building: One new light fixture
33 reference CC attachment to existing lighting (removed) support bracket, including repainting support
34 bracket.
35 2. 26 56 00: Exterior façade lighting on MLK (south elevation) side of building: One pair of new light fixtures
36 reference DD attachment to Level 2 exterior window sill including patch cabling pathway to and from
37 fixtures through sill stone assembly.
38 3. 05 73 00: New exterior railing RAIL-1 installation detail at corner of existing light well / areaway, min. 4ft
39 long from each corner. Location: New expanded areaway at north-west corner of building.
40 4. 05 73 00: New interior stair railing RAIL-3 at new stair: 4ft long railing at floor opening plus 4ft long railing
41 including handrail at stair flight including anchoring detail to floor opening and stair stringer.
42 5. 08 44 13: Junction of new curtain wall system GLWS-4 with existing clay brick masonry wall at the north
43 elevation. Size to be based on either Level 0 or Level 1 entry door framing height and width at the north

CITY OF MADISON
1 elevation, and to include the special shape movement joint at the intersection between framing system
2 and masonry wall.
3 6. 07 42 13.13: Corner of metal panel cladding system MTLP-1 at external corner, and at curtain wall jamb.
4 Base size on at least three typical panel heights per the enlarged elevations and one panel width per
5 manufacturer’s typical panel sizes for the design intent.
6 7. 08 51 13: New replacement window WIN-1 at level 2, Storage Room 221, east end of storage room. One
7 complete window type W12 including window sill and jamb and head finishes.
8 8. 08 51 13: New factory-style replacement window WIN-2 in place of demo’d brick infill panel at north
9 elevation. One entire window type W4 including jamb and head finishes and new window sill.
10 9. 08 51 13: One large interior accessory window IAW-1 on the inside of historic window type W11 at level
11 2 mockup, including jamb and head conditions, and new window sill.
12 10. 09 30 16: New terracotta floor tile XTILE-2A at Level 1 public lobby to match Historic floor tile XTILE-1.
13 Minimum floor area of 4ft x 4ft.
14 11. 04 45 50: Historic floor tile XTILE-2B repair where floor mounted urinal removed, at Level 3, Men’s
15 historic restroom. Minimum floor area of 18” x 18”.
16 12. 08 44 10: Rated glass wall GLWS-3 and associated egress door at Level 3, east stair side. Include glass
17 panel above door, glass panel at one side of door, door hardware, and fire stopping sealant all around
18 frame.
19 13. 075213 / 075216: Typical ROOF-1 assembly at upper roof including termination detail at parapet wall
20 with balusters, parapet wall without balusters, and new roof drain and overflow assembly. Min 4ft wide x
21 8ft long in each location.
22 14. 09 84 33 and 09 93 00: Room 260: One typical acoustical wall panel AWP-1A and new wood muntin
23 detail. West side of Room 260.
24 15. 09 84 33 and 09 93 00: Room 260: Typical acoustical ceiling panel AWP-1B and refinished wood nailer
25 detail. West end of ceiling.
26 16. 09 84 33: Room 260: Typical acoustical ceiling panel AWP-1B at new HVAC diffuser assembly. West end of
27 ceiling.
28 17. 06 03 12 and 09 93 00: Room 260: Typical wall wood paneling refinishing including one new wood panel,
29 one existing wood panel, one intermediate pilaster, wood base, wood cornice and dentil detail, min.
30 width 4ft wide x full height. South-west end of Room 260.
31 18. 06 03 12 and 09 93 00: Room 260: Typical north-south faux wood beam refinishing, min. 8ft long,
32 including new concealed sprinkler head and cap finish, historic rosette detail, and min. 4ft length of
33 intermediate east-west faux cross-beams.
34 19. 05 70 00: Room 260: Typical historic vent grille within wood panel zone, re-finishing and acoustic fabric
35 behind.
36 20. 05 70 00: Room 260: Typical radiator grille refinishing – both the main upper portion and the wall base
37 portion.
38 21. 09 64 29: Room 260: Refinished wood floor, 4’ x 6’ area at west end of room.
39 22. 09 51 23 and 05 45 00: Typical ACT-3 and ESS-1 assembly in open office bay, min. full structural bay x 4ft
40 wide panels each side of ESS-1. Location to be south-east corner of open office at Ground Level.
41 23. 08 81 13: Typical window film WF-1 on conference room storefront system GLWS-2 glass panel. Min.
42 width one glass panel width of finally installed system panel.
43 24. 23 33 00: Typical fire/smoke damper assembly through ceiling deck of room 260. Include fire damper,
44 supply air grille, Young’s regulator, and damper, and access panel. West end of ceiling.
45 25. 26 51 00: Interior Lighting: The light fixture schedule on AL105 calls for sample luminaires Type P, P1 and
46 P2. These are not "installed mock-ups"; but they should be hung and electrified for verification of light
47 quality.
48 26. 09 03 20: Level 1 Historic plaster ceiling, cornice and beam molding: a 4' x 8' section of repair at a
49 selected zone of flat ceiling, intermediate north-south beam, and deep beam along grid 2. Zone of
50 mockup to be between grids 1 and 2, and grids J and K.
51 27. 04 01 20.63: Samples (mock-ups) of typical masonry restoration work, including custom brick. Furnish
52 sample (mock-up) panel 6’ long x 3’ high of the proposed masonry restoration work (new, replaced
53 masonry units and finished repointing) including color range, texture, bond, mortar and workmanship.
54 Provide separate mock-up panels for each type of brick and mortar and include limestone veneer and
55 cap.
56 28. 04 01 40: Prepare mock-ups directly on existing historic wall, for every worker and every treatment for
57 which they are certified. Mock-ups shall include separate treatments as called out on the drawings and
58 related specification Sections and as follows:

CITY OF MADISON
1 a. Repointing Mortar Installation - Repoint mortar joints, twelve feet in length and 3 courses high.
2 b. Engineered Stone Patch – Engineered stone patch material repair on at least 2 stones. Include one
3 stone on which to demonstrate proficiency in removing previous patching material and repairing
4 with new engineered stone patch material.
5 c. Crack Repair – Repair one crack, 18 inches in length, using dispersed hydrated lime injection
6 technique with spachal surface treatment.
7 d. Dutchman - Undertake Dutchman repairs in 2 locations, including one that is only cut and
8 prepared for application.
9 e. Masonry Adhesive – Perform one masonry adhesive process that fully meets the requirements of
10 this specification.
11 f. Stain – Perform one area of stone stain to match adjacent original stone (post-cleaning).
12 g. Redress Stone in-situ – Perform one area of stone resurfacing/redress.
13 h. Baluster Repair – Complete baluster repair in one (1) location/one (1) baluster. The work will
14 include the binding, removal, core-drill, helical anchor installation, lime injection/adhesive
15 installation and stain.
16
17 3.3. MOCKUP REVIEW
18 A. The General Contractor and all associated Sub-contractors (Contracting Team) shall meet with the Owner,
19 Owners Representative, Architect and Consultants (Design Team) as necessary to review the mock-up.
20 Contractors shall be prepared to answer questions on materials and methods as necessary.
21 B. The Contracting and Design Teams shall review the mockup in detail for materials, methods, and workmanship
22 with respect to the intent of the contract documents. Improvements or adjustments shall be discussed as
23 needed.
24 C. If the mockup is incomplete or does not show sufficient detail of products and workmanship the General
25 Contractor shall resubmit a new mockup.
26 D. Re-submittal of mockups to meet the intent of the contract documents shall be the responsibility of the General
27 Contractor. No Change Orders will be processed for additional time or materials associated with re-submitting a
28 mockup for approval.
29 1. In the event that a submitted mockup meets the criteria of the contract documents but does not meet
30 the expectations of the design team and alternative methods or materials are discussed the following
31 procedure shall be used:
32 a. Project Architect shall publish a Construction Bulletin (CB) to detail the required/recommended
33 changes.
34 b. The GC shall prepare and submit a new mockup.
35
36 3.4. FINAL SUBMITTAL
37 A. The field approved mockup shall be submitted by the General Contractor as any other submittal for project
38 documentation purposes. The mockup submittal shall consist of the following:
39 1. Digitally photograph the field approved mockup. Take as many detailed photos as necessary to capture
40 the complexity of the mockup.
41 2. Provide a written summary of the approved mockup. Include all recommended adjustments, level of
42 expected workmanship, and other such detail as discussed during the mockup review.
43 3. Submit the mockup to the Project Management Web Site. See Specification 01 33 23 Submittals for
44 additional information.
45
46
47
48 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
SECTION 01 43 50
AIR BARRIER SYSTEMS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.5 SUBMITTALS
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
Not Used
3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. This section includes administrative and procedural requirements for accomplishing an airtight
building enclosure that controls infiltration or exfiltration of air.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07 13 26: Self-Adhering Sheet Air Barrier [AB-2].
2. Requirements of this section relate to the coordination between subcontractors required to provide
an airtight building enclosure, customized fabrication and installation procedures, not production of
standard products.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. The airtight components of the building enclosure and the joints, junctures and transitions between
materials, products, and assemblies forming the air-tightness of the building enclosure are called “the air
barrier system”. Services include coordination between the trades, the proper scheduling and sequencing
of the work, pre-construction meetings, inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports performed
by Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing authorities. They do not include contract
enforcement activities performed by Architect.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General Performance: The Contractor shall ensure that the intent of constructing the building enclosure
with a continuous air barrier system to control air leakage into, or out of the conditioned space is achieved.
The air barrier system shall have the following characteristics:
1. It shall be continuous, with all joints sealed.
2. It shall be structurally supported to withstand positive and negative air pressures applied to the
building enclosure.
3. Continuity of the air barrier materials and products with joints to provide complete assemblies.
4. Continuity of all the enclosure assemblies with joints and transition materials to provide a whole
building air barrier system.
B. Connection shall be made between:
1. Foundation and walls.
2. Walls and windows or doors.
3. Different wall systems.
4. Wall and roof.
5. Wall and roof over unconditioned space.
6. Walls, floor and roof across construction, control and expansion joints.
7. Walls, floors and roof to utility, pipe and duct penetrations.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 014350 - 1 AIR BARRIER SYSTEMS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
C. Air Barrier Penetrations: All penetrations of the air barrier and paths of air infiltration / exfiltration shall be
made air-tight.
D. Compliance Requirements:
1. Assemblies: an air permeance not to exceed 0.03 cfm/ft2p under a pressure differential of 0.3 in.
water (1.57psf) (0.15 L/s.m2 @ 75 Pa) when tested in accordance with ASTM E 1677.
2. Materials: Materials used for the air barrier system in the opaque envelope shall have an air
permeance not to exceed 0.004 cfm/ft2 under a pressure differential of 0.3 in. water (1.57psf) (0.02
L/s.m2 @ 75 Pa) when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2178. Or,
3. Entire Building: The air leakage of the entire building shall not exceed 0.15 cfm/sf under a pressure
differential of 0.3 in. water (1.57psf) (0.75 L/s.m2 @ 75 Pa) when tested according to ASTM E 779.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
B. Testing agency shall submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each inspection, test, or similar
service to the Architect. If the Contractor is responsible for the service, submit a certified written report, in
duplicate, of each inspection, test, or similar service through the Contractor.
1. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the governing authority, when the
authority so directs.
C. Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test, or similar service include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making the inspection or test.
6. Designation of the Work and test method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete inspection or test data.
9. Test results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether inspected or tested Work complies with Contract
Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting.

A. Requirement for Contractor to provide an airtight building enclosure is not limited by quality-control
services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction and are not limited by provisions of
this section.
B. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated.
These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract Document
requirements.
1. Qualifications for Air Barrier Testing and Inspection Agencies: Engage Air Barrier inspection and
testing service agencies, including independent testing laboratories, that are prequalified and that
specialize in the types of air barrier system inspections and tests to be performed.
C. Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the sections of the
specifications. Requirements in those sections may also cover production of standard products. It is the
Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that each subcontractor is adequately and satisfactorily performing
the quality assurance documentation, tests and procedures required by each section.
D. Specified inspections, tests, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-control procedures that
facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated as the responsibility of another identified entity,
Contractor shall provide coordination of the trades, and the sequence of construction to ensure continuity
of the air barrier system joints, junctures and transitions between materials and assemblies of materials
and products, from substructure to walls to roof. Provide quality assurance procedures, testing and
verification as specified herein. Facilitate inspections, tests, and other quality-control services specified
elsewhere in the Contract Documents and required by authorities having jurisdiction or by the Owner.
Costs for these services are included in the Contract Sum.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
B. Organize preconstruction meetings between the trades involved in the whole building’s air barrier system
to discuss where each trade begins and ends and the responsibility and sequence of installation of all the
air-tight joints, junctures, and transitions between materials, products and assemblies of products specified
in the different sections, to be installed by the different trades.
C. Build a mock-up before proceeding with the work, satisfactory to the Architect, of each air-tight joint type,
juncture, and transition between products. materials and assemblies.
D. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required inspections, tests, and similar
services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify the agency sufficiently in
advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services required include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1. Provide access to the Work.
2. Furnish incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests.
3. Take adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or assist the
agency in taking samples.
4. Deliver samples to testing laboratories.
5. Provide security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project Site.
E. Duties of the Testing and Inspection Agency: The independent agency engaged to perform inspections,
sampling, and testing of air barrier materials, components and assemblies specified in individual Sections
shall cooperate with the Architect and the Contractor in performance of the agency's duties. The testing
agency shall provide qualified personnel to perform required inspections and tests.
1. The agency shall notify the Architect and the Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies
observed in the Work during performance of its services.
2. The agency is not authorized to release, revoke, alter, or enlarge requirements of the Contract
Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work.
3. The agency shall not perform any duties of the Contractor.
F. Coordination: Coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a minimum of
delay. Coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to
accommodate inspections and tests.
1. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples, and
similar activities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Qualitative Testing and Inspection:
a. Daily reports of observations, with copies to the Owner, Contractor and Architect.
b. Continuity of the air barrier system throughout the building enclosure with no gaps, holes.
c. Structural support of the air barrier system to withstand design air pressures.
d. Masonry and concrete surfaces are smooth, clean and free of cavities, protrusions and
mortar droppings, with mortar joints struck flush, or as required by the manufacturer of the
air barrier material.
e. Site conditions for application temperature and dryness of substrates.
f. Maximum length of exposure time of materials to ultra-violet deterioration.
g. Surfaces are properly primed.
h. Laps in material are 2” minimum, shingled in the correct direction (or mastic applied on
exposed edges), with no fishmouths.
i. Mastic applied on cut edges.
j. Roller has been used to enhance adhesion.
k. Measure application thickness of liquid-applied materials to manufacturer’s specifications for
the specific substrate.
l. Materials used for compatibility.
m. Transitions at changes in direction, and structural support at gaps.
n. Connections between assemblies (membrane and sealants) for cleaning, preparation and
priming of surfaces, structural support, integrity and continuity of seal.
o. All penetrations sealed.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
2. ASTM E 1186/98 “Standard Practices for Air Leakage Site Detection in Building Envelopes and Air
Retarder Systems.”
a. Infrared scanning with pressurization/depressurization.
b. Smoke pencil with pressurization/depressurization.
c. Pressurization/depressurization with use of anemometer
d. Generated sound with sound detection
e. Tracer gas measurement of decay rate
f. Chamber pressurization/depressurization in conjunction with smoke tracers
g. Chamber depressurization using detection liquids
3. Quantitative Tests: Provide written test reports of all tests performed, with copies to the Owner,
Contractor and Architect.
a. Material compliance for maximum air permeance, ASTM E 2178.
b. ASTM E 283, Determining rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,
and Doors under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.
c. Assemblies, ASTM E 1677, test pressure and allowable air leakage rate to be determined
by design professional for interior design conditions and location of project.
d. CAN/CGSB 1986 Standard 149.10, Determination of the Airtightness of Building Envelopes
by the Fan Depressurization Method.
e. CAN/CGSB 1996 Standard 149.15 Determination of the Overall Envelope Airtightness of
Office Buildings by the Fan Depressurization Method Using the Building’s Air Handling
System.
f. Canadian National Master Specification Sections 07272 Air Barrier Systems for Exterior
Walls of Low-Rise Buildings.
g. Canadian National Master Specification 07272.1 : Durability Assessment of Bead-Applied
Urethane-Based Sealant Foam for Air Barriers.
h. Whole building, floors, or suites, ASTM E779, Determining Airtightness of Buildings Air
Leakage Rate by Single Zone Air Pressurization.
i. Windows and connections to adjacent opaque assemblies, ASTM E783
j. Tracer gas testing, ASTM E741
k. Pressure test, ASTM E330
l. Bond to substrate, ASTM D4541-95
m. Minimum dry or wet film thickness for liquid-applied materials are per the manufacturer’s
requirements.
3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample taking and similar services, repair damaged construction
and restore substrates and finishes. Comply with Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section
"Cutting and Patching."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities, and protect repaired construction.
C. Repair and protection is Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for
inspection, testing, or similar services.
END OF SECTION

CITY OF MADISON
1 SECTION 01 45 16
2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES
3
4 PART 1 – GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
5 1.1. SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
9 1.5. QUALITY MANAGEMENT OBSERVATION REPORT ......................................................................................................... 2
11 PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2
12 3.1. QUALITY MANAGEMENT RESPONSIBILITIES.................................................................................................................. 2
13 3.2. RESPONDING TO A QMO ............................................................................................................................................... 3
14 3.3. GENERAL CONTRACTORS FOLLOW-UP .......................................................................................................................... 3
15 3.4. QMO CLOSEOUT PROCEDURE ....................................................................................................................................... 3
16 3.5. CONSTRUCTION CLOSEOUT .......................................................................................................................................... 3
17
19
20 1.1. SUMMARY
21 A. The City of Madison has developed a multi-faceted Quality Management Program that begins with contract
22 signing and runs through contract closeout to ensure the best quality materials, workmanship, and product are
23 delivered for the contracted Work.
24 1. The Progress Management Web Site is a Construction Management tool that provides contractors and
25 staff a single on-line location for the daily operations and progression of the Work.
26 2. The Quality Management Observation (QMO) is an ongoing observation of the construction process as it
27 progresses. The City of Madison does not use a “Punch List” or “Corrections List” as it is typically known
28 throughout the construction industry. The QMO process acts as an “in progress punch list”.
29 a. By using the QMO process the City of Madison’s goal is to have a zero item punch list prior to the
30 90% progress payment and owner occupancy.
31 B. All contractors shall be required to review the specifications identified in Section 1.2 below, and other related
32 specifications identified therein to become familiar with the terminology and expectations of this City of
33 Madison Public Works contract.
34 C. It is the intent of this specification to outline the requirements, expectations, and responsibilities of the General
35 Contractor (GC), Project Architect, and other representatives of the Owner for items of Quality Assurance and
36 Quality Control.
37 1. This specification is not intended to conflict with Specification 01 40 00 Quality Requirements or other
38 specifications requiring testing and inspecting services.
39 2. This specification does not relieve the GC from any requirements associated with regulatory inspections
40 performed by the City of Madison Building Inspection Unit, or inspectors from other agencies as required
41 by code.
42 3. Any testing performed by an Owner’s Representative does not relieve the GC from performing any
43 testing that may required by the construction documents.
44
48 C. Section 01 31 13 Project Coordination
50 E. Section 01 40 00 Quality Requirements
51 F. Section 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures
52 G. Section 01 78 13 Completion and Correction List
53
55 A. All contractors shall be responsible for a proper quality assurance/quality control (QA/QC) program throughout
56 the execution of the Work defined within the construction documents, including all recognized construction
57 industry standards and all applicable regulatory codes.

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 45 16 - 1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES
CITY OF MADISON
1 1. Monitor the quality of all workmanship, supplies, materials, and products being installed by all
2 contractors and installers to ensure they meet or exceed the minimum requirements set forth by the
4 2. Submit a Request for Information (RFI) whenever manufacturers’ instructions or referenced standards
5 conflict with the construction documents before proceeding with the Work.
6 3. Ensure that Work requiring special certifications or licensing is being performed by is being performed
7 and supervised by personnel that meet the appropriate requirements.
8 a. Ensure that all certificates and licenses are current throughout the execution of the project.
9 C. The CoM and its representatives shall perform quality assurance and quality control activities throughout the
10 execution of this project. This in no way relieves the GC of maintaining an acceptable QA/QC program. =
11
13 A. The GC shall be responsible for the following:
14 1. All materials, equipment, and products shall be new, clean, undamaged, and meet the performance
15 specifications defined within the construction documents including favorably reviewed submittals.
16 a. Any material, equipment, or product that does not meet the requirements of the construction
17 documents shall be removed and replaced, including any adjacent and related work, at the GCs
18 expense.
19 2. All Work shall be performed by persons properly trained and/or qualified to produce workmanship of the
20 quality specified in the construction documents.
21 3. Providing access to updated as-builts, addenda, submittals, bulletins and other related construction
22 documents at the project site.
23 B. The CoM and its representatives may be responsible for any of the following:
24 1. Attend pre-installation meetings
25 2. Attend construction progress meetings
26 3. Review all submittals
27 4. Conduct field visits for QA/QC purposes, provide feedback to the GC and sub-contractors using Quality
28 Management Observation (QMO) reports.
29 5. Review delivered equipment
30 6. Witness equipment installations, startups, testing as specified in other specifications
31
32 1.5. QUALITY MANAGEMENT OBSERVATION REPORT
33 A. The Quality Management Observation report or QMO is used as a QA/QC tool by those entities responsible for
34 QA/QC activities, including but not limited to, the GC, CoM, PA, CX agent, etc.
35 B. QMOs are designed to be an early observation of non-conforming construction work before it becomes buried
36 by follow on work. As such it is most often used as an “in progress punch list”.
37 C. QMO forms are part of the Quality Control Library on the Project Management Web Site.
38
40
42
43 3.1. QUALITY MANAGEMENT RESPONSIBILITIES
44 A. While making routine progress visits to the construction project the GC, CPM, and A/E, and applicable others
45 shall observe the details of the construction and installations to ensure that the intent of the construction
46 documents is being followed.
47 B. If during the progress visit there is a determination of contract non-conformance a QMO report shall be initiated
48 to begin the documentation process.
49 1. The GC field superintendent shall be informed immediately of any issue that may cause harm, damage to
50 finished work, or be buried prior to properly filing a QMO report.
51 C. The following information when filing a QMO report:
52 1. Open a QMO report in the Quality Control Library on the Project Management Web Site
53 2. Enter the date and time of the field visit
54 2. Provide references to construction documents if any (examples; specification, drawing page, details,
55 approved submittals, RFI, CB, etc)
56 3. Provide a short title for the observation being made
57 4. Provide a detailed description of the observation being made

CITY OF MADISON
1 5. Select all categories (Sitework, Structure, Enclosure, Interior, etc) from the given list that may apply to
2 the observation being reported.
3 a. For each category selected additional boxes shall open with contractor names associated with
4 each category.
5 6. Select all contractors from the lists provided that may need to be aware of the observation.
6 7. Provide any attachments that may help provide reference to the observation.
7 8. Click the SAVE button before closing the form.
8 D. The software for the Project Management Website will email notifications that a QMO report has been initiated.
9 The software will automatically select and notify the following:
10 1. The GC, PA, and CPM for all observation reports being filed.
11 2. Others depending on the observation categories selected.
12 3. Contractors based on the selections made in the sub-contractors lists.
13
14 3.2. RESPONDING TO A QMO
15 A. All contractors receiving email notification of a QMO Observation shall review the details of the observation.
16 B. The GC shall be responsible for determining the course of action required to remedy the non-conforming issue
17 and shall coordinate and direct the contractor(s) responsible for any work related to the observation.
18 C. All contractors assigned to remedy the observation by the GC shall provide follow-up responses on the QMO
19 report as follows:
20 1. Open the QMO report in the Quality Control Library on the Project Management Web Site.
21 2. In the “Follow-Up Response” area enter a description of your follow-up response in the box provided.
22 a. Click “Insert Item” if additional boxes are required.
23 3. Add attachments (pictures) if needed to show the work has been completed.
24 4. Click the SAVE button before closing the form.
25
26 3.3. GENERAL CONTRACTORS FOLLOW-UP
27 A. The GC shall inspect the work to ensure that all assigned contractors have remedied the observation to the
28 intent of the construction documents.
29 B. The GC shall respond with any additional comments in his/her response box.
30 1. If no comments are to be made the GC at a minimum must date the response box to trigger the next
31 work flow.
32 C. Click the SAVE button before closing the form.
33 D. The software will email a notification to the CPM and the person who initiated the QMO that the issue has been
34 remedied.
35
36 3.4. QMO CLOSEOUT PROCEDURE
37 A. The person who initiated the QMO shall review the remedied work and if properly corrected shall close and date
38 the QMO form.
39 1. Click SAVE and the software will email a notification to the CPM that final review of the Observation is
40 required.
41 2. In the event there are still issues the Quality Manager can add additional comments in the response area,
42 click SAVE and re-issue the QMO for additional review as needed.
43 B. Once the person who initiated the QMO has closed the item the CPM shall review and verify with the PA that the
44 Observation has been properly remedied and provide final closure on the QMO.
45
46 3.5. CONSTRUCTION CLOSEOUT
47 A. The GC shall note that successful close out QMOs are required for construction closeout as follows:
48 1. Certain progress payments as identified in Specification 01 29 76 are contingent QMO reports being properly
49 closed out.
50 2. Specification 01 77 00 defines all construction closeout requirements.
51
52
53
54 END OF SECTION

CITY OF MADISON
1 SECTION 01 50 00
2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
3
4 PART 1 – GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
5 1.1. SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
8 1.4. TEMPORARY UTILITIES .................................................................................................................................................. 2
9 1.5. TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES AND WI-FI .............................................................................................................. 2
10 1.6. TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES ................................................................................................................................ 2
11 1.7. BARRIERS ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2
12 1.8. FENCING ........................................................................................................................................................................ 2
13 1.9. EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES................................................................................................................................................. 3
14 1.10. SECURITY ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3
15 1.11. VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING ............................................................................................................................... 3
16 1.12. WASTE REMOVAL .......................................................................................................................................................... 3
17 1.13. PROJECT IDENTIFICATION ............................................................................................................................................. 3
18 1.14. FIELD OFFICES................................................................................................................................................................ 3
19 PART 2 - PRODUCTS .......................................................................................................................................................................... 3
20 2.1. TEMPORARY PARTITIONS .............................................................................................................................................. 3
21 2.2. EQUIPMENT .................................................................................................................................................................. 3
22 PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................................................................... 4
23 3.1. TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION .................................................................................................................................... 4
24 3.2. COLLECTION AND DISPOSAL OF WASTE ........................................................................................................................ 4
25 3.3. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION .................................................................................................................................... 4
26 3.4. REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS .............................................................................. 4
27
29
30 1.1. SUMMARY
31 A. This Section includes general procedural requirements for temporary facilities and controls including, but not
33 1. Temporary Utilities
34 2. Telecommunications Services
35 3. Temporary Sanitary Facilities
36 4. Barriers
37 5. Fencing
38 6. Exterior Enclosures
39 7. Security
40 8. Vehicular Access and Parking
41 9. Waste Removal
42 10. Project Identification
43 11. Field Offices
44
46 A. Section 01 31 19 Progress Meetings
48 C. Section 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal
49
51 A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations if authorities having
52 jurisdiction, including but not limited to:
53 1. Building Code requirements
54 2. Health and safety regulations
55 3. Utility company regulations
56 4. Police, Fire Department and Rescue Squad rules
57 5. Environmental protection regulations
58 6. Joint Commission - Hospital Accreditation Standards

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 50 00 - 1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
CITY OF MADISON
1 B. Standards: Comply with NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition
2 Operations," ANSI A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition," and NECA
3 Electrical Design Library "Temporary Electrical Facilities".
4 C. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service.
5 Install service in compliance with NFPA 70 "National Electric Code".
6
7 1.4. TEMPORARY UTILITIES
8 A. Contractor will provide the following:
9 1. Electrical power and metering, consisting of existing facilities.
10 2. Water supply, consisting of existing facilities.
11 B. General:
12 1. Existing facilities may be used.
13 2. New permanent facilities may be used.
14 C. Water Service: water is available from existing building services.
15 1. Use trigger-operated nozzles for water hoses, to avoid waste of water.
16 D. Temporary Electric Power Service: Electrical Contractor shall extend temporary power from existing building
17 services.
18 E. Temporary Lighting: Electrical Contractor shall provide temporary lighting with local switching
19 1. Install and operate temporary lighting, minimum of 30 fc, to fulfill security and protection requirements,
20 without operating the entire system, and will provide adequate illumination for all areas of work,
21 including construction operations and traffic conditions.
22 F. Temporary Heat: General Contractor shall provide temporary heat required by construction activities, for curing
23 or drying of completed installations or protection of installed construction from adverse effects of low
24 temperatures or high humidity. Select safe equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed
25 installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce the ambient condition
26 required and minimize consumption of energy.
27 1. Heating Facilities: Except where use of the permanent system is authorized, provide vented self-
28 contained LP gas or fuel oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.
29 a. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open flame, or salamander type heating units is
30 prohibited.
31
32 1.5. TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES AND WI-FI
33 A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telecommunications services to field office at time of project mobilization through
34 construction closeout.
35 B. Telecommunications services shall include:
36 1. Windows-based personal computer dedicated to project telecommunications.
37 2. Shared access to the internet via WIFI or similar wireless connection.
38 a. Access must be capable to support minimum of 10 wireless devices.
39 3. Email Account/address dedicated for GC Project Manager of GC Supervisor on site.
40
41 1.6. TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
42 A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization.
43 B. Temporary toilets: Comply with regulations and health codes for the type, number, location, operation, and
44 maintenance of fixtures and facilities. Install where facilities will best serve the Project's needs.
45 1. Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materials for each facility. Provide
46 covered waste containers for used material.
47 2. Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy.
48 C. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition
49 D. Water: Provide potable water approved by local health authorities
50
51 1.7. BARRIERS
52 A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to prevent access to areas that could be
53 hazardous to workers or the public and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from
54 construction operations and demolition.
55
56 1.8. FENCING
57 A. Construction: Refer to Plan Documents and Specification Section 01 76 00: Fencing Materials and Barricades
58

CITY OF MADISON
1 1.9. EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES

2 A. Provide temporary weather tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions
3 and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures
4 identified in individual specification sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors
5 with self-closing hardware and locks.
6
7 1.10. SECURITY
8 A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, existing facilities, and Owner's operations from unauthorized
9 entry, vandalism, or theft.
10
11 1.11. VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING
12 A. Comply with regulations relating to use of streets and sidewalks, access to emergency facilities, and access for
13 emergency vehicles.
14 B. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner.
15 C. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions.
16 D. No construction parking is provided as part of this project.
17
18 1.12. WASTE REMOVAL
19 A. See Section 01 74 19 - Waste Management, for additional requirements.
20 B. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly condition.
21 C. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site periodically.
22 D. If materials to be recycled or re-used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable non-combustible
23 containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure unless otherwise approved by the
25 E. Open free-fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containers with lids.
26
27 1.13. PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
28 A. Provide project identification sign of design and construction indicated in Section 01 58 13.
29 B. Erect on site at location determined by Owner .
30 C. No other signs are allowed without Owner permission except those required by law.
31
32 1.14. FIELD OFFICES
33 A. Office: Weather tight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling equipment, and equipped with sturdy
34 furniture, drawing rack and drawing display table.
35 B. Field Office shall be located within the Project Limits.
36 C. Provide space for Project Meetings with table and chairs to accommodate a minimum of 20 persons.
37 D. Provide a minimum of a 40” LCD monitor or other digital projection device to be connected to the computer
38 identified in Section 1.4 Telecommunications Services (above), for use during progress meetings in connection
39 with reviewing construction progress information posted to the Project Management Web Site (Specification 01
40 31 23) hosted by the Owner.
41 E. All food and drink shall remain in the field offices.
42
44
45 2.1. TEMPORARY PARTITIONS
46 A. Provide dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate occupied areas from fumes and
47 noise.
48 1. Non-fire rated partitions, standard
49 a. Wood stud framing, 6-mil polyethylene
50
51 2.2. EQUIPMENT
52 A. Temporary Lifts and Hoists: Contractors requiring temporary lifts and hoists shall provide facilities for hoisting
53 materials and employees.
54 B. Electrical Outlets: Electrical Contractor shall provide properly configured NEMA polarized outlets to prevent
55 insertion of 110-120 volt plugs into higher voltage outlets. Provide receptacle outlets equipped with ground-fault
56 circuit interrupters, reset button and pilot light, for connection of power tools and equipment.
57 C. Electrical Power Cords: Contractors requiring power cords shall provide grounded extension cords; use "hard-
58 service" cords where exposed to abrasion and traffic. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate

CITY OF MADISON
1 lengths of electric cords, if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do
2 not exceed safe length-voltage ratio.
3 D. Lamps and Light Fixtures: Electrical Contractor shall provide general service incandescent lamps of wattage
4 required for adequate illumination. Provide guard cages or tempered glass enclosures, where exposed to
5 breakage. Provide exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture.
6 E. Heating Units: General Contractor shall provide temporary heating units that have been tested and labeled by
7 UL, FM or another recognized trade association related to the type of fuel being consumed.
8 F. First Aid Supplies: General Contractor shall provide first aid supplies complying with governing regulations.
9 G. Fire Extinguishers: General Contractor shall provide hand-carried, portable UL-rated, fire extinguishers of NFPA
10 recommended classes for the exposures, extinguishing agent and size required by location and class of fire
11 exposure.
12
14
15 3.1. TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION
16 A. Until fire protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, General Contractor shall install and maintain
17 temporary fire protection facilities of the types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and
18 controllable fire losses.
19 B. Comply with NFPA 10 "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers," and NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding
20 Construction, Alterations and Demolition Operations”.
21 C. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose.
22 D. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations.
23 E. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire protection facilities, stairways
24 and other access routes for fighting fires.
25 F. Prohibit smoking on the premises.
26 G. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition
27 according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
28 H. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site
29 I. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods
30 and procedures. Post warnings and information.
31
32 3.2. COLLECTION AND DISPOSAL OF WASTE
33 A. Collect waste from construction areas and elsewhere daily
34 B. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste material and debris. Enforce
35 requirements strictly.
36 C. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days when the temperature is expected to
37 rise above 80 deg F.
38 D. Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by containerizing
39 properly. Dispose of material in a lawful manner.
40 E. Contractor is responsible for rodent and pest control for duration of construction.
41
42 3.3. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
43 A. Provide protection, operate temporary facilities and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply
44 with environmental regulations, and minimize the possibility that air, waterways and subsoil might be
45 contaminated or polluted, or that other undesirable effects might result.
46 B. Avoid use of tools and equipment which produce harmful noise.
47 C. Restrict use of noise making tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms
48 near the site.
49
50 3.4. REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS
51 A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, and materials prior to Substantial Completion inspection.
52 B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet (600 mm). Grade site as indicated.
53 C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.
54 D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition.
55 E. Restore new permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.
56
57
58 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
SECTION 01 57 19.11
INDOOR AIR QUALITY (IAQ) MANAGEMENT
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
Not Used
3.1 IAQ MANAGEMENT - EMMISSIONS CONTROL
3.2 IAQ MANAGEMENT - MOISTURE CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Special requirements for Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) management during construction operations.
a. Control of emissions during construction.
b. Moisture control during construction.
2. Procedures for testing baseline IAQ. Baseline IAQ requirements specify maximum indoor pollutant
concentrations for acceptance of the facility.
B. Related Sections:
1. 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements: Meetings and project coordination.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions pertaining to sustainable development: As defined in ASTM E2114.
B. Adequate ventilation: Ventilation, including air circulation and air changes, required to cure materials,
dissipate humidity, and prevent accumulation of particulates, dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.
C. Hazardous Materials: Any material that is regulated as a hazardous material in accordance with 49 CFR
173, requires a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1200, or which during
end use, treatment, handling, storage, transportation or disposal meets or has components which meet or
have the potential to meet the definition of a Hazardous Waste in accordance with 40 CFR 261. Throughout
this specification, hazardous material includes hazardous chemicals.
1. Hazardous materials include: pesticides, biocides, and carcinogens as listed by recognized
authorities, such as the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and the International Agency for
Research on Cancer (IARC).
D. Indoor Air Quality (IAQ): The composition and characteristics of the air in an enclosed space that affect the
occupants of that space. The indoor air quality of a space refers to the relative quality of air in a building
with respect to contaminants and hazards and is determined by the level of indoor air pollution and other
characteristics of the air, including those that impact thermal comfort such as air temperature, relative
humidity and air speed.
E. Interior final finishes: Materials and products that will be exposed at interior, occupied spaces; including
flooring, wall covering, finish carpentry, and ceilings.
F. Packaged dry products: Materials and products that are installed in dry form and are delivered to the site in
manufacturer's packaging; including carpets, resilient flooring, ceiling tiles, and insulation.
G. Wet products: Materials and products installed in wet form, including paints, sealants, adhesives, special
coatings, and other materials which require curing.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management Plan: Not less than 10 days before the Pre-construction meeting,
prepare and submit an IAQ Management Plan including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Procedures for control of emissions during construction.
a. Identify schedule for application of interior finishes.
2. Procedures for moisture control during construction.
a. Identify porous materials and absorptive materials.
b. Identify schedule for inspection of stored and installed absorptive materials.
3. Revise and resubmit Plan as required by Owner.
a. Approval of Contractor’s Plan will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance
with applicable environmental regulations.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 01571911 - 1 INDOOR AIR QUALITY (IAQ) MANAGEMENT
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
B. Product Data:
1. Submit product data for filtration media used during construction and during operation. Include
Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV).
2. Submit air pressure difference maps for each mode of operation of HVAC.
3. Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit MSDSs for inclusion in Operation and Maintenance Manual for
the following products. Coordinate with Section 01 78 23.
a. Adhesives.
b. Floor and wall patching/leveling materials.
c. Caulking and sealants.
d. Insulating materials.
e. Fireproofing and firestopping.
f. Carpet.
g. Paint.
h. Clear finish for wood surfaces.
i. Lubricants.
j. Cleaning products.
C. Inspection and Test Reports:
1. Moisture control inspections.
2. Moisture penetration testing.
1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. After award of Contract and prior to the commencement of the Work, schedule and conduct meeting with
Owner and Architect to discuss the proposed IAQ Management Plan and to develop mutual understanding
relative to details of environmental protection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 IAQ MANAGEMENT - EMMISSIONS CONTROL

A. During construction operations, follow the recommendations in SMACNA IAQ Guidelines for Occupied
Buildings under Construction, 2nd Edition, 2007, ANSI/SMACNA 008-2008 (Chapter 3).
B. HVAC Protection:
1. Seal return registers during construction operations.
2. Provide temporary exhaust during construction operations.
3. To the greatest extent possible, isolate and/or shut down the return side of the HVAC system during
construction. When ventilation system must be operational during construction activities, provide
temporary filters.
4. Do not use new HVAC equipment for construction ventilation without prior approval of Architect.
C. Source Control: Provide low and zero VOC materials as specified.
D. Pathway Interruption: Isolate areas of work as necessary to prevent contamination of clean or occupied
spaces. Provide pressure differentials and/or physical barriers to protect clean or occupied spaces.
E. Housekeeping: During construction, maintain project and building products and systems to prevent
contamination of building spaces.
F. Temporary Ventilation: Provide an ACH (air changes per hour) of 1.5 or more and as follows:
1. Provide minimum 48 hour pre-ventilation of packaged dry products prior to installation. Remove from
packaging and ventilate in a secure, dry, well-ventilated space free from strong contaminant sources
and residues. Provide a temperature range of 60 degrees F minimum to 90 degree F maximum
continuously during the ventilation period. Do not ventilate within limits of Work unless otherwise
approved by Architect.
2. Provide adequate ventilation during and after installation of interior wet products and interior final
finishes.
3. Provide filtration media with a Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) of 8 as determined by
ASHRAE 52.2 during construction. Coordinate with work of Division 23, Heating Ventilating and Air
Conditioning (HVAC). If permanently installed air handlers are to be used for ventilation (with
approval of Architect), such filtration must be provided at each return air opening.
G. Scheduling: Schedule construction operations involving wet products prior to packaged dry products to the
greatest extent possible.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
H. Flush-Out: After construction ends, prior to occupancy and with all interior finishes installed, perform a
building flush-out by supplying a total air volume of 14,000 cu.ft. of outdoor air per sq.ft. of floor area while
maintaining an internal temperature of at least 60 degrees F and relative humidity no higher than 60%.
Alternatively: if occupancy is desired prior to completion of flush-out, the space may be occupied following
delivery of a minimum of 3,500 cubic feet of outdoor air per square foot of floor area. If this option is taken,
once the building is occupied, it must be ventilated at a minimum rate of 0.30 cubic feet per minute (cfm) or
the design minimum outdoor airflow rate – whichever is greater. During each day of the flush-out period,
ventilation must begin 3 hours prior to occupancy and continue through occupancy. These conditions must
be maintained until the nominal 14,000 cubic feet of outdoor air is delivered. The contractor is responsible
for ensuring this flush-out occurs in any case.
3.2 IAQ MANAGEMENT - MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Housekeeping:
1. Keep materials dry. Protect stored on-site and installed absorptive materials from moisture damage.
2. Verify that installed materials and products are dry prior to sealing and weatherproofing the building
envelope.
3. Install interior absorptive materials only after building envelope is sealed and weatherproofed.
B. Inspections: Document and report results of inspections; state whether of not inspections indicate
satisfactory conditions.
1. Examine materials for dampness as they arrive. If acceptable to Architect/Owner, dry damp materials
completely prior to installation; otherwise, reject materials that arrive damp.
2. Examine materials for mold as they arrive and reject materials that arrive contaminated with mold.
3. Inspect stored and installed absorptive materials regularly for dampness and mold growth. Inspect
weekly,.
a. Where stored on-site or installed absorptive materials become wet, notify Architect. Inspect
for damage. If acceptable to Architect/Owner, dry completely prior to closing in assemblies;
otherwise, remove and replace with new materials.
4. Basement: Monitor basement and crawlspace humidity, and dehumidify when relative humidity is
greater than 85 percent for more than 2 weeks or at the first sign of mold growth.
5. Site drainage: Verify that final grades of site work and landscaping drain surface water and ground
water away from the building.
6. Weather-proofing: Inspect moisture control materials as they are being installed. Include the
following:
a. Air barrier: Verify air barrier is installed without punctures and/or other damage. Verify air
barrier is sealed completely.
b. lashing: Verify correct shingling of the flashing for roof, walls, windows, doors, and other
penetrations.
c. Insulation layer: Verify insulation is installed without voids.
d. Roofing: In accordance with ASTM D7186 Standard Practice for Quality Assurance
Observation of Roof Construction and Repair.
7. Plumbing: Verify satisfactory pressure test of pipes and drains is performed before closing in and
insulating lines.
8. HVAC: Inspect HVAC system as specified in Section 01 91 00 – Commissioning, and the following:
a. Condensate pans are sloped and plumbed correctly.
b. Access panels are installed to allow for inspection and cleaning of coils and ductwork
downstream of coils.
c. Ductwork and return plenums are air sealed.
d. Duct insulation is installed and sealed.
e. Chilled water line and refrigerant line insulation are installed and sealed.
C. Schedule:
1. Schedule work such that absorptive materials, including but not limited to porous insulations, paper-
faced gypsum board, ceiling tile, and finish flooring, are not installed until they can be protected from
rain and construction-related water.
2. Weather-proof as quickly as possible. Schedule installation of moisture-control materials, including
but not limited to air barriers, flashing, exterior sealants and roofing, at the earliest possible time.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
D. Testing for Moisture Penetration:

1. Windows: Test as per ASTM E1105 Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of
Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air
Pressure Difference; unless otherwise indicated, acceptable upper limits are no leakage for 15
minutes.
2. Horizontal Waterproofing (not roofing): Test as per ASTM D5957 Standard Guide for Flood Testing
Horizontal Waterproofing Installations; acceptable upper limits are no leakage for 15 minutes.
3. Exterior Walls:
a. Water Leakage: Review as per ASTM E2128 Standard Guide for Evaluating Water Leakage
of Building Walls.
END OF SECTION

CITY OF MADISON
REVISED NOVEMBER 22, 2016
1 SECTION 01 58 13
2 TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGE
3
4 PART 1 – GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
5 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES ....................................................................................................................................................... 1
7 1.3. SUBMITTALS .................................................................................................................................................................. 1
8 PART 2 - PRODUCTS .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1
9 2.1. SIGN MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................................................... 1
10 2.2. PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN..................................................................................................................................... 1
11 PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................................................................... 1
12 3.1. INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................................................................... 1
13 3.2. REMOVAL ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1
14
16
17 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES
18 A. Project identification sign.
19
21 A. Design sign and structure to withstand 50 miles/hr wind velocity.
22 B. Sign Painter: Experienced as a professional sign painter for minimum three years.
23 C. Finishes, Painting: Adequate to withstand weathering, fading, and chipping for duration of construction.
24
25 1.3. SUBMITTALS
26 A. See Section 01 30 00 – Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
27 B. Shop Drawing: Show content, layout, lettering, color, structure, sizes.
28
30
31 2.1. SIGN MATERIALS
32 A. Structure and Framing: New, wood, structurally adequate.
33 B. Sign Surfaces: Exterior grade plywood with medium density overlay, minimum ¾” thick, standard large sizes to
34 minimize joints.
35 C. Rough Hardware: Galvanized
36
37 2.2. PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN
38 A. One painted sign, 32 sq ft area, bottom 6 feet above ground.
39 B. Content:
40 1. Project title, City of Madison logo and name of Owner as indicated on Contract Documents.
41 2. Names and title of Architect.
42 3. Name of Prime Contractor.
43 4. Full color project rendering from high resolution image as furnished by Architect.
44
46
47 3.1. INSTALLATION
48 A. Install project identification sign within 30 days after date fixed by Notice to Proceed.
49 B. Erect at designated location.
50 C. Install sign surface plumb and level, with butt joints. Anchor securely.
51
52 3.2. REMOVAL
53 A. Remove sign, framing supports, and foundations at completion of Project and restore the area.
54
55
56 END OF SECTION

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 58 13 - 1 TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGE
CITY OF MADISON
1 SECTION 01 60 00
2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
3
4 PART 1 – GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
5 1.1. SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
9 PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2
10 3.1. GENERAL CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................................................... 2
11 3.2. BULK MATERIAL ............................................................................................................................................................ 3
12 3.3. DRY PACKAGED MATERIAL ............................................................................................................................................ 3
13 3.4. STRUCTURAL AND FRAMING MATERIAL ....................................................................................................................... 3
14 3.5. EQUIPMENT .................................................................................................................................................................. 3
15 3.6. FINISH PRODUCTS ......................................................................................................................................................... 3
16 3.7. DUCTWORK, PIPING, AND CONDUIT ............................................................................................................................. 3
17 3.8. OWNER PROVIDED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT......................................................................................... 4
18
20
21 1.1. SUMMARY
22 A. The purpose of this specification is to provide general guidelines and responsibilities related to the receiving,
23 handling, and storage of all materials and products from arrival on the job site through installation.
24 1. Immediate inspection of delivered goods means a timely replacement if damaged.
25 2. Proper storage helps prevent damage and loss by weather, vandalism, theft, and job site accidents.
26 3. Proper storage helps with job site performance and safety.
27 2. Proper handling helps prevent damage and job site accidents.
28 B. Each Contractor shall be directly responsible for the receiving, handling, and storage of all materials and
29 products associated with the Work of their Division or Trade.
30 C. Each Contractor responsible for Work associated with Owner provided materials or products shall be responsible
31 for the receiving, handling and storage of the material/product as outlined in Section 3.8 below..
32
34 A. Parts of this specification will reference articles within “The City of Madison Standard Specifications for Public
40 PDF will open.
43 c. City Standard Detail Drawings (SDD) may be located from the index in Part VIII.
44 B. Section 01 57 21 Indoor Air Quality
45 C. Section 01 74 13 Progress Cleaning
46 D. Section 01 76 00 Protecting Installed Construction
47 E. Other Divisions and Specifications that may address more specifically the requirements for the storage and
48 handling of materials and products associated Work of other Divisions or Trades.
49
51 A. The GC shall be responsible for ensuring that these minimum storage and handling requirements are met by all
52 contractors on the project site including but not limited to the following:
53 1. Receiving deliveries of materials, products, and equipment.
54 a. Inspect all deliveries upon arrival for damage, completeness, and compliance with the
56 i. Deliveries shall remain in original packaging or crates, shipping manifest shall be kept with
57 the delivery and the packaging shall have visible identification of the items within the
58 packaging.

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 60 00 - 1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
CITY OF MADISON
1 b. Immediately report any damaged products or equipment to the GC, begin arrangements for
2 immediate replacement.
3 c. Materials or equipment that have been damaged, are incomplete, or do not comply with the
4 construction documents shall not be permitted to be installed.
5 2. All materials and products shall be stored within the designated limits of the project site. Only store the
6 amount of material necessary for upcoming operations so as not to interfere with other construction
7 activities and access to Work by the Owner and Architect. Any offsite storage shall be at the expense of
8 the contractor storing the material or product. All offsite storage requirements shall comply with this
9 specification. All offsite storage of materials is subject to Owner Representative Quality Management
10 review at any time.
11 3. Large storage containers may be used but shall be weather tight, securable, placed on concrete blocks,
12 timbers, or jack stands and shall be level.
13 4. When lifting equipment is required the equipment rating shall be greater than the loading requirements
14 of the item being lifted. In addition all of the following shall apply as necessary:
15 a. Only designated and/or designed lift points shall be used.
16 b. Large items shall have tag lines and handlers at all times during lifting operations.
17 c. Lift at multiple points as needed to prevent bending.
18 5. Materials and products stored inside of the structure shall comply with all of the following:
19 a. Storage shall not be allowed to impede the flow of work in progress.
20 b. Storage shall not be allowed to hide completed work from review and inspections.
21 c. Storage shall not exceed the design loads of the structural components it is being stored upon.
22 6. All materials and products shall be stored according the manufacturers minimum recommended
23 requirements. All of the following shall be considered before storing any product or material:
24 a. Dust and dirt
25 b. Moisture and humidity, including rain and snow
26 c. Excessive temperatures, direct sun, etc
27 d. Product or material weight and size
28 e. Potential for breakage
29 f. Product incompatibility with other products such as corrosiveness, chemical reactions,
30 flammability, etc.
31 g. Product or material value and replacement cost
32 7. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing fully functional tarps or plastic wrap, to protect
33 materials and products from the weather. All coverings shall be free of large holes and tears, and shall be
34 tied, strapped, or weighted down to resist blowing.
35 8. The Contractor shall be responsible for any temporary heating, cooling, or other utility requirement that
36 may be associated with the storage of a material or product.
37 9. The Contractor shall be responsible for securing materials and products of value such as copper, A/V
38 equipment, etc. Such items shall be stored in securable shipping containers, job trailers or other such
39 storage devices. Container shall be kept secured when not in use.
40 B. The GC shall inspect the job site daily to ensure that all products and materials stay weather tight and are
41 secured against vandalism or theft as required by this specification.
42 C. The Owners Representative may at any time request improvements regarding storage of any material or product
43 being provided under these construction documents.
44
46
48
49 3.1. GENERAL CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS
50 A. Designate material storage and handling areas as needed including all of the following:
51 1. Designate specific areas of the site for delivery and storage of materials to be used during the execution
52 of the Work.
53 2. Designated areas shall not be located so as to interfere with the installation of any Work including Work
54 by others such as the installation of utilities or the maintenance of existing utilities. This shall include not
55 storing items in active utility easements as designated by the site plan.
56 B. Arrange for openings in the building as needed to allow delivery and installation of large items. Openings shall
57 be appropriately sized to include the use of booms, slings, and other such lifting devices that may be larger than
58 the item being installed.

CITY OF MADISON
1 1. When openings are required in completed Work (new or existing) the GC shall be responsible for
2 providing an appropriate opening and for restoring the opening to the original or better condition upon
3 completion. Restoration shall be weather tight and complete.
4 C. Repeated moving and handling of items being stored shall not be allowed. The GC shall be responsible for any
5 damage and replacement because of mishandling or excessive handling.
6
7 3.2. BULK MATERIAL
8 A. Bulk material such as sand, gravel, top soil and other types of fill shall be stored away from the construction area
9 and shall be stock piled as follows:
10 1. All bulk material shall be piled safely and efficiently in as small an area as practical. Only store the
11 amount of material necessary for upcoming operations so as not to interfere with other construction
12 activities and access to Work by the Owner and Architect.
13 2. All stock piles shall have silt fence/sock properly installed around the perimeter to prevent erosion and
14 loss of material. Refer to City of Madison Standard Specification Section 210.1(f) and other related
15 specification or details.
16 3. Fine grained material shall be protected with tarps to prevent blowing. Tarps shall be weighted or staked
17 to stay in place.
18 B. Bulk material such as brick, concrete block, stone, and other palletized materials shall be stored on original
19 shipping pallets until ready for use.
20
21 3.3. DRY PACKAGED MATERIAL
22 A. Dry packaged material such as cement, mortar, etc shall be stored on pallets, on slightly elevated ground or clear
23 stone pad to keep water away from the base of the material being stored. Protect from moisture.
24
25 3.4. STRUCTURAL AND FRAMING MATERIAL
26 A. All structural and framing material shall be stored in an organized manner arranged by type, size and dimension.
27 Materials shall be stored on pallets or timbers as necessary and shall not be allowed to lie directly on the ground.
28 B. Long and heavy items shall be supported at several points to prevent bending and warping.
29
30 3.5. EQUIPMENT
31 A. Equipment delivered to the site shall be stored away from all construction activities until the item can either be
32 moved inside or properly installed.
33 B. Equipment shall be stored on slightly elevated ground or clear stone pad to keep water away from the base of
34 the equipment.
35
36 3.6. FINISH PRODUCTS
37 A. Finish products such as flooring, tile, counters, lockers, toilets, partitions, lighting, and other similar items should
38 not be delivered and stored until the structure has been enclosed, is weather tight, temperature controlled and
39 the contractor is ready for such items to be installed.
40 1. Storage of finished products outside for any length of time shall not be allowed.
41 B. Products that cannot be stored inside the structure shall be stored in secured containers or job trailers until such
42 time as they are ready to be installed.
43 C. Products with a high potential for breakage such as glass, mirrors, tiles, toilet fixtures, etc. shall be stored with
44 additional protection as necessary such as but not limited to the following:
45 1. Store in original shipping containers until ready for installation.
46 2. Do not store in high traffic areas.
47 3. Shield with other materials such as cardboard, plywood, or similar products.
48
49 3.7. DUCTWORK, PIPING, AND CONDUIT
50 A. All piping and conduit shall be stored horizontally unless otherwise specified by the manufacturer or Division and
51 Trade Specifications.
52 1. Do not store directly on grade.
53 2. Cover metal pipes and tubes to prevent rust and corrosion, allow ventilation to prevent condensation.
54 3. Whenever possible use pipe stands for storing pipe and conduit to prevent tripping and rolling hazards.
55 B. All ductwork shall be stored horizontally or vertically as necessary unless otherwise specified by the
56 manufacturer or Division and Trade Specifications.
57 1. During storage, both ends of each duct shall be protected with plastic sheathing to prevent dust and dirt
58 from getting inside the duct. Sheathing shall be sufficiently taped to the duct.

CITY OF MADISON
1 2. After installation, free/open ends shall remain protected with taped plastic sheathing and or temporary
2 filters as specified by division or Trade specifications.
3
4 3.8. OWNER PROVIDED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT
5 A. Section 3.8.A. shall apply to all equipment being provided to any contractor directly from the Owner for
6 installation under the contract.
7 1. The Owner or Owners Representative shall do the following:
8 a. Inspect all deliveries upon receipt and notify manufacturer of any issues directly.
9 b. Review the received shipment with the contractor.
10 i. Only provide products or materials to the contractor that were not damaged through
11 shipping or handling.
12 ii. Confirm missing products or materials and anticipated delivery schedule if known.
13 2. The Contractor responsible for the installation of Work associated with Owner provided materials or
14 products shall “take ownership” and provide safe and secure storage and handling as previously
15 described within this specification.
16 i. The Contractor shall be liable for the repair or replacement of any material or product
17 damaged after taking ownership of the product from receipt through final acceptance.
18 B. Section 3.8.B. shall apply to all equipment being provided by the Owner but shipped directly to any sub-
19 contractor or the project site for installation under the contract.
20 1. The GC and/or Contractor responsible for the Work associated with the Owner provided materials or
21 products shall do the following:
22 a. Inspect all deliveries upon receipt and notify the Owner or Owners Representative of any issues
23 directly.
24 i. Owner or Owners Representative shall notify manufacturer of any issues directly.
25 b. Review the received shipment with the Owner or Owners Representative
26 i. Confirm missing products or materials and anticipated delivery schedule if known.
27 2. The Contractor shall “take ownership” and provide safe and secure storage and handling as previously
28 described within this specification.
29 i. The Contractor shall be liable for the repair or replacement of any material or product
30 damaged after taking ownership of the product from receipt through final acceptance.
31
32
33
34 END OF SECTION

CITY OF MADISON
REVISED SEPTEMBER 14, 2016
1 SECTION 01 71 23
2 FIELD ENGINEERING
3
4 PART 1 – GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
5 1.1. REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED ........................................................................................................................................... 1
6 1.2. RELATED REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................................................. 1
7 1.3. PROCEDURES................................................................................................................................................................. 1
8 1.4. PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................................................ 1
9 1.5. RECORDS ....................................................................................................................................................................... 1
12
14
15 1.1. REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
16 A. The Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering services required for the Project:
17 1. Land surveying services required to execute the Work, to include building addition location and layout,
18 and location and layout of pavements and all proposed site improvements.
19 2. Verification of existing building dimensions, elevations, and relationship to proposed additions.
20 3. Professional Engineering services to execute Contractor’s construction methods.
21 4. Registered Professional Engineer in the State of Wisconsin to determine the load capacity of the existing
22 structure for use of Contractors temporary facilities, equipment, lifts, machinery, material storage, etc.
23
24 1.2. RELATED REQUIREMENTS
25 A. Conditions of the Contract
26
27 1.3. PROCEDURES
28 A. A property survey has been prepared for the Owner and has been bound with Contract Drawings. Surveys shall
29 describe physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal
30 description of the site. If information is incomplete, notify Owner to furnish additional information. Verify
31 easement locations, front, side, and rear yard restrictions, if any; and property line locations. Verify control
32 points, and establish bench marks. Locate and layout roads, walks, parking areas and all civil structures and all
33 proposed site improvements.
34 B. Verify locations of underground services, utilities, structures, etc. which may be encountered or affected by the
35 Work.
36
37 1.4. PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS
38 A. Using datum, the lot lines and present levels have been established as indicated on the Drawings. Other grades,
39 lines, levels and benchmarks, shall be established and maintained by the Contractor, who shall be responsible for
40 them. As work progresses, the Contractor shall layout on forms and floor, the locations of all partitions, walls
41 and fix column centerlines as a guide to all trades. The Contractor shall make provision to preserve property line
42 stakes, benchmarks, or datum point. If any are lost, displaced or disturbed through neglect of any Contractor,
43 Contractor’s agents or employee, the Contractor responsible shall pay the cost of restoration.
44 B. Establish lines and levels, locate and layout, by instrumentation and similar appropriate means, additions,
45 column locations, floor levels, stakes for walks, etc.
46 C. Provide data to all Subcontractors for their use as applicable.
47 D. From time to time, verify layouts by same methods.
48
49 1.5. RECORDS
50 A. Maintain a complete, accurate log of all control and survey work as it progresses.
51
53
55
56
57 END OF SECTION

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 71 23 - 1 FIELD ENGINEERING
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
SECTION 01 73 00
EXECUTION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING
3.5 INSTALLATION
3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING
3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Construction layout.
2. Field engineering and surveying.
3. Installation of the Work.
4. Cutting and patching.
5. Progress cleaning.
6. Starting and adjusting.
7. Protection of installed construction.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 10 00 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site.
2. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record
Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, replacing
defective work, and final cleaning.

A. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by professional engineer licensed in the State of Wisconsin
certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.
B. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous
materials, for hazardous waste disposal.

A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction
where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated.
B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction
elements.
1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations
and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and
support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in
a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection.
2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a
manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased
maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a
manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to
perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or
safety.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 017300 - 1 EXECUTION
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of
cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in
Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that
has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written
recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and
procedures, use products for patching that comply with sustainable design requirements.
B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use
materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will
provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place
materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction
indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence
and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction
affecting the Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary
sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services; and other utilities.
2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving
Project site.
B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work,
examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
Record observations.
1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections
before equipment and fixture installation.
2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be
installed.
3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or
primers.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the
Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility and Owner that is necessary to adjust,
move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances
located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other
construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on
Drawings.
D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification
of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a
request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management
and Coordination."

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in
relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect
promptly.
B. General: Engage a professional engineer licensed in the State of Wisconsin to lay out the Work using
accepted surveying practices.
1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and
elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
2. Establish limits on use of Project site.
3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required
dimensions.
4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances.
7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by
authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil
placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.
D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations,
column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey
markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more
locations.
E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels.
Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each
survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by
Architect.
3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners.
B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points
before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during
construction operations.
C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced
to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of
benchmark.
1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.
D. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring
field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and
elevations of construction and sitework.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as
indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease
of removal for replacement.
3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain
conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in
excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on
site and placement in permanent locations.
F. Tools and Equipment: Where possible, select tools or equipment that minimize production of excessive
noise levels.
G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared
and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other portions of the Work to confirm that adequate provisions
are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and
number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of
the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load
conditions.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights
directed by Architect.
2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for
installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral
anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time
for installation.
I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints
for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
J. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or non-conforming Work.
3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly.
Dispose of materials lawfully.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.
2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the
temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark
containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.
4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are
working concurrently.
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper
execution of the Work.
1. Remove liquid spills promptly.
2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work
area, as appropriate.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of
manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If
specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health
or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure
freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers
or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities
and Controls" and Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already
in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at
Substantial Completion.
I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the
remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability
without damaging effects.
J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to ensure that no part of the construction,
completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure
during the construction period.
3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with requirements in
Section 01 91 13 "General Commissioning Requirements."
B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units,
replace with new units, and retest.
C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.
D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace
damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
E. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 01 40 00 "Quality
Requirements."

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Protection of Existing Items: Provide protection and ensure that existing items to remain undisturbed by
construction are maintained in condition that existed at commencement of the Work.
C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
END OF SECTION

CITY OF MADISON
1 SECTION 01 73 29
2 CUTTING AND PATCHING
3
4 PART 1 – GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
5 1.1. SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
7 1.3. DEFINITIONS .................................................................................................................................................................. 1
9 1.5. WARRANTY.................................................................................................................................................................... 2
10 PART 2 - MATERIALS.......................................................................................................................................................................... 2
11 2.1. GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2
12 PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2
13 3.1. EXAMINATION ............................................................................................................................................................... 2
14 3.2. PREPARATION ............................................................................................................................................................... 2
15 3.3. PERFORMANCE ............................................................................................................................................................. 2
16 3.4. CLEANUP AND RESTORATION ....................................................................................................................................... 3
17
19
20 1.1. SUMMARY
21 A. This Section includes general procedural requirements for cutting and patching including, but not limited to the
22 following:
23 1. Examination
24 2. Preparation
25 3. Performance
26 4. Cleanup and Restoration
27
29 A. Divisions 02 through 32 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching
30 individual parts of the Work.
31 B. Division 07 Section "Penetration Fire Stopping" for patching fire-rated construction.
32
33 1.3. DEFINITIONS
34 A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work.
35 B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other
36 Work.
37 C. Level Alpha
38
40 A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying
41 capacity or load-deflection ratio.
42 B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results
43 in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that may result in increased maintenance or decreased
44 operational life or safety.
45 C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that
46 could change their load-carrying capacity that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that
47 may result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Some miscellaneous elements
48 include the following:
49 1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers
50 2. Membranes and flashings
51 3. Exterior curtain-wall construction
52 4. Equipment supports
53 5. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment
54 6. Noise and vibration control elements and systems
55 D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and
56 patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that
57 would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has
58 been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 73 29 - 1 CUTTING AND PATCHING
CITY OF MADISON
1 1.5. WARRANTY
2 A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting
3 and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
4 B. All cutting and patching work performed under this contract shall be warranted like new work as defined by the
5 Specification governing the work.
6
7 PART 2 - MATERIALS
8
9 2.1. GENERAL
10 A. Comply with requirements specified within other sections of the Specifications.
11 B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to existing in-place materials. For exposed surfaces use materials that
12 visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
13 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the
14 visual and functional performance of in-place materials.
15
17
18 3.1. EXAMINATION
19 A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed.
20 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including
21 compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.
22 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
23
24 3.2. PREPARATION
25 A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
26 B. Protection: Protect in-place construction and existing conditions during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
27 Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting
28 and patching operations. If the failure to protect, or the lack of protection, of in-place construction and/or
29 existing conditions results in damage, the contractor shall be responsible for repair to previous condition.
30 C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.
31 D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be
32 removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to eliminate interruption to
33 occupied areas.
34
35 3.3. PERFORMANCE
36 A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the
37 earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
38 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other
39 construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.
40 B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations,
41 including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If
42 possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written
43 recommendations.
44 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and
45 chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance
46 of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
47 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
48 3. Concrete or Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill.
49 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 3l Sections where required by
50 cutting and patching operations.
51 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap,
52 valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other
53 foreign matter after cutting.
54 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
55 C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following
56 performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and
57 comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections.

CITY OF MADISON
1 D. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of
2 installation.
3
4 3.4. CLEANUP AND RESTORATION
5 A. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a
6 manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.
7 1. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials.
8 2. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
9 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another,
10 patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish,
11 color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new
12 materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
13 4. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch
14 and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats
15 until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
16 5. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or re-hang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of
17 uniform appearance.
18 6. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weather tight
19 condition.
20 7. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint,
21 mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.
22 8. Any smoke and fire caulking that has been disturbed must be replaced by the Contractor as required by
23 code.
24
25
26
27 END OF SECTION

CITY OF MADISON
1 SECTION 01 74 13
2 PROGRESS CLEANING
3
4 PART 1 – GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
5 1.1. SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
6 1.2. RELATED SPECIFICAITONS ............................................................................................................................................. 1
8 PART 2 - PRODUCTS .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1
9 2.1. CLEANING MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT...................................................................................................................... 1
10 PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................................................................... 1
11 3.1. SAFETY CLEANING ......................................................................................................................................................... 1
12 3.2. PROJECT SITE CLEANING ............................................................................................................................................... 2
13 3.3. PROGRESS CLEANING .................................................................................................................................................... 2
14 3.4. FINAL CLEANING............................................................................................................................................................ 3
15 3.5. CALL BACK WORK .......................................................................................................................................................... 4
16
18
19 1.1. SUMMARY
20 A. Throughout the execution of this contract all contractors shall be responsible for maintaining the project site in a
21 standard of cleanliness as described in this specification.
22 B. All contractors shall also comply with the requirements for cleaning as described in other specifications.
23 C. Work included in this specification shall include but not be limited to:
24 1. Safety Cleaning
25 2. Project Site Cleaning
26 3. Progress Cleaning
27 4. Final Cleaning
28
29 1.2. RELATED SPECIFICAITONS
30 A. Section 01 35 00 Special Procedures
31 B. Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements
32 C. Section 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal
33 D. Section 01 76 00 Protecting Installed Construction
34
36 A. The General Contractor (GC) shall conduct daily inspections, more often if necessary, of the entire project site to
37 ensure the requirements of cleanliness are being met as described within these specifications.
38 B. All contractors shall comply with other regulatory requirements as they apply to waste recycling, reuse, hauling,
39 and disposal requirements of any governmental authority having jurisdiction.
40 C. The Owner reserves the right to have work done by others in the event any contractor fails to perform cleaning
41 as described within these specifications. The cost of any Owner provided cleaning shall be charged to the
42 contractor through a deduct change order.
43
45
46 2.1. CLEANING MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
47 A. The Contractor shall provide all required personnel, equipment, and materials necessary to maintain the
48 required level of cleanliness as described in this specification.
49 B. Use only cleaning materials and equipment that are compatible with the surface being cleaned, as
50 recommended by the manufacturer, or as approved by the A/E.
51 C. Use only cleaning materials, equipment, and methods as recommended in the manufacturers care and use guide
52 of the material, finish or equipment being cleaned.
53
55
56 3.1. SAFETY CLEANING
57 A. All Contractors shall be responsible for safety cleaning as required by OSHA and other regulatory requirements
58 as applicable.

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 74 13 - 1 PROGRESS CLEANING
CITY OF MADISON
1 B. Safety Cleaning shall include but not be limited to the following:

2 1. All work areas, passageways, ramps, and stairs shall be kept free of debris, scrap materials, pallets, and
3 other large items that would obstruct exiting routes. Small items such as tools, electrical cords, etc are
4 picked up when not in use.
5 2. Form and scrap lumber shall have nails/screws removed or bent over. Lumber shall be neatly stacked in
6 an area designated by the GC.
7 3. Spills of oil, grease, and other such liquids shall be cleaned immediately or sprinkled with sand/oil-dry
8 first, then cleaned.
9 4. Oily, flammable, or hazardous items shall be stored in appropriate covered containers and storage
10 devices unless actively being used.
11 5. Oily, or flammable rags, and other such waste shall only be disposed of in authorized covered containers.
12 6. Disposal by burning shall not be allowed at any time.
13
14 3.2. PROJECT SITE CLEANING
15 A. This section applies to the general cleanliness of the project site as a whole for the duration of the execution of
16 this contract.
17 B. Exterior Project Site Areas
18 1. The GC and other Contractors as appropriate shall ensure the following levels of cleanliness are applied
19 to the exterior project site areas.
20 a. The overall appearance of the project site is neat and orderly. Defined areas for material storage,
21 material waste, job trailers, and the project area are clean and well maintained.
22 b. The construction fence is maintained, erect with no gaps, and properly posted per all regulatory
23 requirements.
24 c. All erosion control measures are properly maintained, cleaned, and repaired as necessary.
25 d. All loose materials (construction or waste) are properly tied or weighted down to resist blowing.
26 e. All construction materials are properly covered with fully functional tarps or plastic wrap,
27 protected from the weather, coverings are tied, strapped, or weighted down to resist blowing.
28 f. Dust control is applied as necessary or as required by any regulatory requirement.
29 C. Interior Project Site Areas
30 1. All Contractors shall ensure the following levels of cleanliness are applied to the interior project site
31 areas.
32 a. The overall appearance of the project site is neat and orderly. Defined areas for material storage,
33 material waste, and project area are clean and well maintained.
34 b. Stored materials are kept in original shipping containers whenever possible. Stored materials not
35 in shipping containers are properly stored and protected according to other applicable
36 specifications.
37 c. All scraps and debris shall be properly disposed of as often as necessary to keep work areas,
38 passageways, stairs, and ramps free of debris and clear for emergency exiting.
39 d. Boxes, pallets, and other such shipping containers, are broken down, stored in a consolidated area
40 or, disposed of as often as is necessary.
41 e. Hand tools, supplies, materials, electrical cords not being used are picked up and sptored in gang
42 boxes, not left as walking hazards in work areas, passageways, etc.
43 D. Job Trailer
44 1. The interior of the job trailer shall be kept clean and available as a work space at all times. The GC shall
45 ensure that the following is provided for within the job trailer:
46 a. Meeting space including tables and chairs.
47 b. Sufficient space for all contractors to access the official construction documents, provide updates,
48 etc.
49
50 3.3. PROGRESS CLEANING
51 A. This sub-section shall apply to all Progress Cleaning prior to the installation of finishes, fixtures, and trim (IE
52 rough-in).
53 1. For the purposes of this section “clean” shall be defined as a level of cleanliness free of dust and other
54 material capable of being removed by use of reasonable effort using a good quality janitor broom and
55 shop-vac.
56 2. Daily cleanings shall be conducted by all contractors at the end of the work day as follows:
57 a. Debris in excavated areas shall be removed prior to backfill and compaction.
58 b. Debris in wall cavities, chase spaces, etc shall be removed prior to enclosing the spaces.

CITY OF MADISON
1 c. Large items shall be properly stored, returned to designated areas, or disposed of as necessary.
2 d. Loose materials shall be properly secured.
3 e. Flammable or hazardous materials are properly stored or disposed of.
4 3. Weekly cleaning shall be conducted by all contractors as designated by the GC. Weekly cleanings shall
5 include all the above for a daily cleaning and other necessary cleaning as designated by the GC.
6 B. This sub-section shall apply to Progress Cleaning in preparation for the installation of finishes, fixtures, and trim.
7 a. Surfaces receiving finishes shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to contractors applying finish
8 materials. The GC shall be responsible for inspecting the area and surfaces being cleaned for
9 finish prior to the sub-contractor applying the finish. This shall include but not be limited to the
10 following:
11 i. Wall surfaces shall be wiped clean of dirt and oily residues, vacuumed free of dust, and
12 shall be free of surface imperfections prior to painting or installing wall coverings.
13 ii. Metal surfaces shall be wiped clean of dirt and oily residues, and be free of surface
14 imperfections prior to painting.
15 iii. Flooring shall be broom swept of large and loose items then vacuumed clean of dust and
16 small particles, and damp mopped clean and dried prior to installing any flooring finish.
17 Additional cleaning may be required depending on the preparation requirements
18 recommended by the flooring material manufacturer.
19 C. This sub-section shall apply to Progress Cleaning after the installation of finishes, fixtures, and trim.
20 1. For the purposes of this section “clean” shall be defined as a level of cleanliness free of dust and other
21 material capable of damaging or visually disfiguring finished work, finishes, fixtures, and trim.
22 2. Progress Cleaning at this point in the contract shall be conducted immediately as follows:
23 a. Dust, dirt, etc shall be swept and vacuumed off of finish flooring and trim.
24 b. Liquid spills shall be cleaned up according to the spill type. This shall include drips and spills
25 caused by paint, stain, sealants, and other such items.
26 3. The Contractor(s) at no additional cost to the Owner shall be responsible for replacing any finished work,
27 finishes, fixtures, and trim damaged or disfigured because of inadequate or improper cleaning.
28
29 3.4. FINAL CLEANING
30 A. As noted in Specification 01 29 76 Progress Payment Procedures, Progress Payment Milestone Schedule, Final
31 Cleaning shall not be conducted prior to requesting the 90% contract total progress payment and all of the
32 following shall be complete:
33 1. All final regulatory inspections including but not limited to Building Inspection Department and Madison
34 Fire Department inspections have been successfully completed.
35 2. All Quality Management Observation (QMO) reports have been closed out.
36 3. All Demonstration and Training has been completed.
37 4. All Attic Stock has been consolidated and located to its designated area
38 5. All protection for installed construction shall be removed prior to final cleaning by the contractor
39 responsible for providing the protections. This shall include the removal of any adhesive residues left
40 behind from tapes. Contractors shall only use manufacturer authorized cleaning materials for removing
41 adhesives, etc.
42 B. For the purposes of this section “clean” shall be defined as a level of cleanliness generally provided by skilled
43 cleaners using commercial quality building maintenance equipment and materials.
44 C. The GC shall be responsible for ensuring that all requirements under this section are being met.
45 D. General Requirements
46 1. Employ experienced personnel or professional cleaners for final cleaning as necessary for the areas or
47 equipment being cleaned.
48 2. Cleaning equipment used shall be commercial grade equipment commonly used by professional cleaners.
49 3. Cleaning equipment and materials shall be cleaned, rinsed, or replaced to ensure a uniform level of
50 cleanliness is being maintained during the final cleaning. This shall include but not be limited to the
51 following:
52 a. Vacuum cleaner bags and/or filters are changed and/or cleaned as often as necessary.
53 b. Dust & wipe down rags are washed, rinsed, or replaced before starting each room.
54 c. Mopping equipment
55 i. Mop water for washing shall have cleaning solution added to the amount and temperature
56 per manufacturer’s recommendations. Mop washing water shall be replaced often to
57 maintain the levels of the cleaning solution and temperature required.
58 ii. Mop water for rinsing shall remain clean, clear, and be replaced as often as necessary.

CITY OF MADISON
1 iii. Mop heads shall be rinsed often and replaced as necessary.

2 iv. Mop heads and buckets shall be thoroughly rinsed with each change of water.
3 v. Only new mop heads shall be used for rinsing.
4 E. Refer to all other specifications in this contract for specific requirements regarding final cleaning of finishes,
5 fixtures, equipment, etc.
6 F. Exterior Cleaning shall include but not be limited to the following:
7 1. All exterior glazing surfaces have been professionally cleaned and are free of dust and streaking.
8 2. Metal roofs, siding, and other surfaces shall be clean of dirt and free of splashed or excess materials such
9 as sealants, mortar, paint, etc.
10 3. All exterior furnishings shall be clean, waste receptacles shall be empty.
11 4. Paved areas shall be clean, free of dirt, oily stains and other such blemishes
12 5. Exterior lights and diffusers are clean and free of dust.
13 G. Interior Cleaning shall include but not be limited to the following:
14 1. Remove all labels, stickers, tags, and other such items which are not required by code as permanent
15 labels.
16 2. All interior glazing surfaces, including mirrors, have been professionally cleaned and are free of dust and
17 streaking.
18 3. All interior surfaces have been cleaned of excess materials such as paint, sealants, etc and have been
19 wiped free of dust.
20 4. Interior metals, fixtures, and trim have been cleaned free of dust and oily residues
21 5. Carpet flooring has been thoroughly cleaned; vacuumed free of dust, excess glues and other stains
22 removed per manufacturers use and care instructions.
23 6. Resilient flooring has been thoroughly cleaned; vacuumed free of dust, excess glues and other stains
24 removed, mopped and buffed per manufacturers use and care instructions.
25 7. All Interior non-occupied floors, including the attic and all vertical and horizontal chases, shall be broom
26 cleaned, vacuumed free of dust, excess glues and other stains removed per manufacturers use and care
27 instructions.
28 8. Light fixtures, lamps, diffusers and other such items have been dusted and cleaned as necessary.
29
30 3.5. CALL BACK WORK
31 A. The GC shall be responsible for ensuring that any contractor returning to the project site for completion or
32 correction work has re-cleaned and restored the area to the levels described in section 3.4 above upon
33 completion of the work. This shall include but not be limited to the following:
34 1. The immediate area(s) where work was completed.
35 2. Adjacent areas where dust or debris may have traveled.
36 3. Other areas occupied during the completion of the call back work.
37 4. Path of entrance/exit, to/from the area(s) of work.
38
39
40
41 END OF SECTION

CITY OF MADISON
1 SECTION 01 74 19
2 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
3
4 PART 1 – GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
5 1.1. SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
7 1.3. CITY ORDINANCES ......................................................................................................................................................... 1
8 1.4. DEFINITIONS .................................................................................................................................................................. 1
10 1.6. SUBMITTALS AND DELIVERABLES.................................................................................................................................. 2
12 1.8. WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN ........................................................................................................................................ 3
14 PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................................................................... 4
15 3.1. PLAN IMPLEMENTATION ............................................................................................................................................... 4
16 3.2. HAZARDOUS AND TOXIC WASTE ................................................................................................................................... 4
17 3.3. GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR ALL WASTES ....................................................................................................................... 4
18 3.4. GUIDELINES FOR RECYCLABLE, RE-USABLE, AND SALVAGEABLE WASTE ...................................................................... 5
19 3.5. GUIDELINES FOR DISPOSAL OF WASTES ....................................................................................................................... 6
20
22
23 1.1. SUMMARY
24 A. This specification includes administrative and procedural requirements for the recycling, re-use, salvaging, and
25 disposal of non-hazardous construction and demolition waste.
26 B. The General Contractor (GC) shall be fully responsible for complying with all applicable ordinances and other
27 such regulatory requirements during the execution of this contract.
28
30 A. 01 29 76 Progress Payment Procedures
31 B. 01 31 23 Project Management Web site
32 C. 01 32 19 Submittals Schedule
33 D. 01 33 23 Submittals
34 E. 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures
35 F. Other Divisions and Specifications that may address the proper disposal of construction or demolition waste as it
36 pertains to work being conducted under that particular specification.
37
38 1.3. CITY ORDINANCES
39 A. There are two (2) Madison General Ordinances (MGO) that the City of Madison has regarding construction and
40 demolition waste.
41 1. MGO 10.185, Recycling and Reuse of Construction and Demolition Debris, describes the requirements
42 associated with this ordinance including definitions, documentation requirements, and penalties.
43 2. MGO 28.185, Approval of Demolition (Razing, Wrecking) and Removal, describes the requirements
44 associated with applying for and receiving a demolition permit.
45 B. All City of Madison, Board of Public Works, contracts being conducted by City Engineering, Facility Management,
46 for construction, remodeling, or demolition shall comply with the above ordinances regardless of project type or
47 size.
48
49 1.4. DEFINITIONS
50 A. Clean: Untreated and unpainted material, free of contamination caused by oils, solvents, caulks, and other
51 chemicals.
52 B. Construction and Demolition Debris: Materials resulting from the construction, remodeling, repair, and
53 demolition of utilities, structures, buildings, and roads.
54 C. Disposal: Off-site removal of construction and demolition debris and the subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or
55 deposit in authorized landfill or incinerator.
56 D. Hazardous: Exhibiting the characteristics of hazardous substance, i.e. ignitability, corrosiveness, toxicity, or
57 reactivity and including but not limited to asbestos containing materials, lead, mercury and PCBs.
58 E. Non-hazardous: Exhibiting none of the characteristics of a hazardous substance.
MADISON MUNICIPAL BUILDING RENOVATION CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 74 19 - 1 DISPOSAL
CITY OF MADISON
1 F. Nontoxic: Not immediately poisonous to humans or poisonous after a long period of exposure.
2 G. Recyclable: The ability of a product or material to be recovered at the end of its life cycle and remanufactured
3 into a new product.
4 H. Recycle: Any process by which construction or demolition debris is diverted from final disposal as solid waste at
5 a permitted landfill and instead is collected, separated, and/or processed into raw materials for new, reused, or
6 reconstituted products; or for the recovery of materials for energy production processes.
7 I. Recycler: Any recycling facility, transfer station, or other waste handling facility which accepts construction and
8 demolition debris for recycling, or for other transferring to a recycling facility.
9 J. Recycling: The process of sorting, cleaning, treating, or reconstituting solid waste and other discarded materials
10 for the purpose of preparing the material to be recyclable. Recycling does not include burning, incinerating or
11 thermally destroying waste.
12 K. Return: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit.
13 L. Reuse: Shall mean any of the following:
14 1. The on-site use of reprocessed construction and demolitions debris.
15 2. The off-site redistribution of a material, for use in the same manner or similar manner at another
16 location.
17 3. The use of non-toxic, clean wood as an alternative fuel source.
18 M. Salvage: To remove a waste material from the project site for resale or reuse by the Owner or others.
19 N. Toxic: Poisonous to humans either immediately or after a long period of exposure.
20 O. Trash: Any product or material unable to be re-used, returned, recycled, or salvaged.
21 P. Waste: Extra materials or products that have reached the end of its useful life or its intended use. Waste
22 includes salvageable, returnable, recyclable and re-useable construction and demolition materials, and trash.
23
25 A. The GC shall develop a Waste Management Plan that results in end-of-project rates for salvage/recycling/reuse
26 of 75 percent (minimum) by weight of the total waste generated by the Work. Percentages may be adjusted on
27 a project by project basis depending on selected LEED goals associated with the project.
28 B. The GC shall salvage or recycle 100 percent of all uncontaminated packaging materials including but not limited
29 to the following:
30 1. Paper
31 2. Cardboard
32 3. Beverage containers
33 4. Boxes
34 5. Plastic Sheet and film
35 6. Polystyrene packaging
36 7. Wood crates and pallets
37 8. Plastic pails and buckets
38 C. Promote a resourceful use of supplies and materials through proper planning and handling. Generate the least
39 amount of waste possible by minimizing errors, poor planning, breakage, mishandling, contamination or other
40 similar factors.
41 D. Use all reasonable means to divert construction waste from landfills and incinerators through recycling, reuse, or
42 salvage as appropriate.
43
44 1.6. SUBMITTALS AND DELIVERABLES
45 A. The GC shall provide his/her completed Waste Management Plan to the Project Management Web Site as a
46 submittal for review by the Project Architect and City Project Manager.
47 1. See item 1.8 below for Waste Management Plan submittal requirements.
48 2. The Waste Management Plan shall be completed, submitted, and approved as a pre-requisite for
49 Progress Payment number 1.
50 3. Copies of all documentation required by this specification shall be submitted to the appropriate Project
51 Management Web Site Library. Documentation shall be reviewed by the City Project Manager during all
52 Progress Payment reviews for compliance and accuracy.
53 B. The Waste Management Coordinator shall provide copies of items 1 through 5 below to the appropriate Project
54 Management Web Site Library and shall update the Waste Management Summary Log to reflect the records
55 being submitted.
56 1. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of itemized salvageable waste donated to
57 individuals or organizations. Indicate if the organization is tax exempt.

CITY OF MADISON
1 2. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of itemized salvageable waste sold to individuals or
2 organizations. Indicate if the organization is tax exempt.
3 3. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by
4 recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts and
5 invoices.
6 4. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and
7 incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts and invoices.
8 5. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: The Refrigerant Recovery Technician responsible for recovering
9 refrigerant shall provide the GC with a statement indicating all of the following:
10 a. All recovery was performed according to EPA Regulations.
11 b. All refrigerant present was recovered; indicate the total quantity recovered by unit.
12 c. Date of Recovery.
13 d. Name, address, company name, and phone number of technician performing the recovery.
14 e. Technician shall sign and date the statement.
15 C. LEED Submittal: The GC shall provide the following information using the appropriate LEED letter template upon
16 project completion: indicating that the requirements of the credit have been met. NOTE: This requirement shall
17 only apply to projects having a LEED certification goal.
18 1. Total waste material generated.
19 2. Total waste material diverted by diversion method; recycling, salvage, re-use, etc.
20 3. Statement that the credit requirements have been met.
21 4. GC shall sign the letter.
22
24 A. Waste Management Coordinator: The GC shall be responsible for designating a Waste Management
25 Coordinator. Coordinator may be the GC Supervisor, GC Project Manager or other member of the GC staff
26 having knowledge of proper waste management procedures and all applicable regulations.
27 B. Regulatory Requirements: comply with all hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
28 C. The Waste Management Coordinator shall comply with Specification 01 31 19 Project Meetings, Section 3.7.B.1
29 and conduct a Waste Management Conference at the job site. This conference shall be repeated as necessary as
30 additional trades are added to the Work. The conference shall include but not be limited to the following:
31 1. Identify the Waste Management Coordinator; provide trade contractors with name, phone, and email
32 information.
33 2. Review and discuss the Waste Management Plan and the roles of the Coordinator.
34 3. Review the requirements for documenting and reporting procedures of each type of waste and its
35 disposition.
36 4. Review procedures for material separation; indicate availability and locations of containers and bins.
37 5. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal facilities.
38 6. Review waste management procedures specific to each trade.
39 D. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved certification program.
40
41 1.8. WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
42 A. Develop a plan consisting of waste identification, a waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis.
43 Indicate quantities by weight or volume. Use the same units of measure throughout the waste management
44 plan.
45 1. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of site clearing, demolition waste, and
46 construction waste that will be generated during the execution of this contract. Include assumptions for
47 the estimates.
48 2. Waste Reduction Work Plan: The work plan shall consist of but not be limited to all of the following:
49 a. Identify methods for reducing construction waste. Re-using, framing and forming materials, re-
50 planning material cuts to minimize waste, etc.
51 b. Identify what types of materials will be recycled. Provide lists of local companies that receive
52 and/or process the materials. Include names, addresses, and phone numbers.
53 c. Identify what types of materials will be disposed of and whether it will be disposed of in a landfill
54 facility or by incineration facility. Provide lists of local companies that receive and/or process the
55 materials. Include names, addresses, and phone numbers.
56 d. Identify methods to be used on site for separating waste including all of the following:
57 i. Sizes of containers to be used.
58 ii. Labels to be used on the containers to identify the type of waste allowed in the container.

CITY OF MADISON
1 iii. Designated locations on the project site for waste material containers.
2 B. If project requires demolition incorporate the ordinance required (MGO 28.185) Recycling and Reuse Plan into
3 the Waste Management Plan.
4 C. Provide all of the following for the Waste Management Coordinator:
5 1. Name, employer, employer address, phone number, and email address of the designated coordinator.
6 a. The GC shall also provide this information with the required Project Directory Submittal at the
7 beginning of the project.
8 D. If at the option of the GC, he/she chooses to contract with a Waste Management Disposal Company that allows
9 comingled and unsorted waste materials, the GC shall include with his/her Waste Management Plan the
10 following:
11 1. Name, address, phone number, state permitting information, and other pertinent information about the
12 disposal company.
13 2. Documentation from the disposal company indicating company policies and procedures regarding
14 comingled and unsorted waste materials to include:
15 a. GC responsibilities on the project site.
16 b. Disposal company procedures for receiving, sorting, recycling, and disposing of comingled and
17 unsorted waste material.
18
20
22
23 3.1. PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
24 A. Implement the approved waste management plan. Provide adequate containers, storage space, signage,
25 transportation and other items required to implement the plan during the execution of this contract.
26 B. The GC and Waste Management Coordinator shall be responsible for monitoring and reporting the status of the
27 Waste Management Plan and shall monitor the waste management practices on site as frequently as needed.
28 C. Train all workers, sub-contractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures as appropriate for
29 the work being conducted on the project site.
30 1. Distribute the waste management plan to everyone concerned within seven (7) days of submittal
31 approval.
32 2. Distribute the waste management plan to new workers, sub-contractors, and suppliers when they first
33 appear on the project site.
34 3. Conduct additional training as needed during the execution of the contract to keep a positive focus on
35 the waste management plan.
36 D. Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways,
37 and other adjacent and used facilities.
38 1. Designate and label specific areas on the project site necessary for separating materials to be salvaged,
39 recycled, reused, donated, and sold.
40 2. Comply with any specification or regulatory requirements pertaining to dust, dirt, environmental
41 protection, and noise control.
42
43 3.2. HAZARDOUS AND TOXIC WASTE
44 A. The Owner shall be responsible under separate contract for the removal of any asbestos related materials. All
45 other materials shall be removed by the GC.
46 B. All hazardous and toxic waste shall be separated, stored, and disposed of according to all applicable regulations.
47 C. All hazardous and toxic materials on site shall have a Material Safety and Data Sheet (MSDS) available that
48 indicates storage requirements, emergency information, and disposal requirements as necessary.
49
50 3.3. GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR ALL WASTES
51 A. Recycle all paper and beverage containers used by workers, sub-contractors, suppliers and visitors to the project
52 site.
53 B. All revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other such incentives received from recycling, reusing, or
54 salvaging waste materials shall accrue to the GC unless specified otherwise in the contract documents.
55 C. Separate recyclable, reusable, and salvageable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris except where
56 Waste Management Disposal Company allows comingled waste materials, see section 1.8.D above.
57 1. Separate by type in appropriate containers or designated areas according to the approved waste
58 management plan away from the construction area. Do not store within the drip lines of existing trees.

CITY OF MADISON
1 2. Inspect containers and bins frequently for contamination and inappropriately sorted materials. Remove
2 contaminated materials and resort as necessary.
3 3. Stockpile bulk materials such as sand, topsoil, stone, etc., on site away from the construction area and
4 without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water, and
5 cover to prevent windblown dust. Do not store within the drip lines of existing trees.
6 4. Whenever possible store items off the ground and/or protect them from the weather.
7
8 3.4. GUIDELINES FOR RECYCLABLE, RE-USABLE, AND SALVAGEABLE WASTE
9 A. The following guidelines is not a complete or all inclusive list and shall be adjusted as needed by the methods
10 and procedures identified in the Waste Management Plan.
11 B. Asphalt Paving: Break-up into transportable pieces or grind, transport to an authorized recycling facility.
12 C. Carpet and Pad: Separate carpet and pad scraps, containerize and transport to an authorized recycling facility.
13 D. Ceiling System Components: Suspended ceiling system components shall be sorted by material type as follows:
14 1. Broken, cut, or damaged tiles shall be containerized, transport to an authorized recycling facility.
15 2. Damaged, or cut tracks, trim and other metal grid system components shall be sorted with other metals
16 of similar types, palletize, transport to an authorized recycling facility.
17 E. Clean Fill: When allowed by Division 31 Specifications; concrete, masonry, stone, asphalt pavement, sand and
18 other such materials may be used as clean fill on this project site. The GC shall verify with the Project Architect,
19 Structural Engineer, or Civil Engineer as necessary prior to using any materials as clean fill. Materials shall be
20 processed, placed, and compacted as specified. If not being re-used on site, transport to an authorized recycling
21 facility.
22 F. Clean Wood Materials: Including but not limited framing cutoffs, wood sheathing or paneling materials,
23 structural or engineered wood products, and pallets or crates. Clean Wood shall be free of paints, stains, oils,
24 preservatives and other such contaminates.
25 1. Useable pieces shall be sorted by type and dimension, bundled and transported off site by the GC or
26 returned to the supplier.
27 2. Non-useable pieces shall be palletized or containerized, transport to an authorized recycling facility.
28 3. Clean, uncontaminated sawdust and wood shavings shall be bagged, transport to an authorized recycling
29 facility.
30 G. Concrete: Break-up into transportable pieces, remove all reinforcing and other metals, transport to an
31 authorized recycling facility.
32 H. Glass Products: Shall be sorted by types, do not include light fixture lamps and bulbs. Products broken in
33 shipment shall be returned to the supplier. Broken or cracked items still in frames shall be taped to prevent
34 further breakage and injury to workers. Transport to an authorized recycling facility.
35 I. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wooden pallets or container, store in a dry location, transport to an
36 authorized recycling facility.
37 J. Light Fixture Lamps and Bulbs: Fluorescent tubes shall be containerized, transport to an authorized recycling
38 facility.
39 K. Masonry and CMU: Remove all metal reinforcing, anchors, and ties, clean undamaged pieces and neatly stack on
40 pallets, transport damaged pieces to an authorized recycling facility.
41 L. Metals: Sort metals by type as follows, this does not include piping:
42 1. Architectural metals including but not limited to siding, soffit, and roofing panels shall be sorted by
43 material, palletize or bundle as needed and transport to an authorized recycling facility.
44 2. Structural steel, sort by size and type; palletize and transport to an authorized recycling facility.
45 3. Miscellaneous metals such as aluminum, brass, bronze, etc shall be sorted by type, containerized or
46 palletized as necessary, transport to an authorized recycling facility.
47 M. Packaging and shipping materials
48 1. Cardboard boxes and containers: Breakdown all cardboard boxes and containers into flat sheets. Bundle
49 and store in a dry location until transported for recycling.
50 2. Pallets:
51 a. Whenever possible require deliveries using pallets to remove them from the project site.
52 b. Neatly stack pallets in preparation for reusing them or providing them to other companies for
53 salvage or re-use.
54 c. Break down pallets into component wood pieces that comply with the requirements for recycling
55 clean wood materials. Neatly stack or palletize pieces in preparation for transportation.
56 3. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces that comply with the requirements for recycling
57 clean wood materials. Neatly stack or palletize pieces in preparation for transportation.
58 4. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.

CITY OF MADISON
1 N. Piping and conduit: Reduce all piping and conduit to straight lengths, sort and store by size, material and type.
2 Remove supports, hangers, valves, boxes, sprinkler heads, and other such components, sort and store by size,
3 material and type. Transport to authorized recycling facilities according to material types.
4 O. Roofing: Roofing materials shall be sorted and containerized by type, transport to authorized recycling facilities
5 according to material types.
6 P. Site-Clearing Waste: Sort all site waste by type.
7 1. Only stockpile soils types and quantities required for re-use on the project site. All remaining quantities
8 shall be transported off site to an authorized facility that receives such materials.
9 2. Brush, branches, and trees with no marketable re-use shall be transported to facilities for chipping into
10 mulch.
11 3. Trees with a marketable re-use shall be salvaged and transported to facilities that specialize in processing
12 trees for future use as wood products.
13
14 3.5. GUIDELINES FOR DISPOSAL OF WASTES
15 A. The following guidelines shall be adjusted as needed by the methods and procedures identified in the Waste
16 Management Plan.
17 B. Any waste that is contaminated, organic, or cannot be recycled, re-used, or salvaged shall be legally disposed of
18 in an authorized landfill or incinerator. Disposal methods shall follow all applicable regulatory requirements.
19 C. No waste material of any kind, except those types designated as clean fill in section 3.4 above, shall be allowed
20 to be buried on the project site at any time.
21 D. No burning of any kind of waste material shall be permitted on this project site at any time.
22 E. Paint and Stain: Paints, stains, and their containers shall be disposed of as follows:
23 1. Whenever possible containers should be thoroughly cleaned immediately after emptying and sorted with
24 as appropriate (metal or plastic) for recycling
25 2. Empty containers, regardless of type or base material, may be disposed of with lids off with general
26 garbage.
27 3. Latex paint may be placed with general garbage if properly solidified as follows:
28 a. Small amounts (an inch or less in can): Remove lids and allow paint to dry out in the can and
29 harden. Protect cans from rain and freezing.
30 b. Large amounts (more than one inch): Mix paint with equal amounts of cat litter, stir and allow to
31 completely dry. Alternate method: mix with commercial paint hardener.
32 4. Oil-based or combustible paints and stains, regardless of liquid or solid, shall be transported to an
33 approved facility that takes such items such as Dane County Clean Sweep Sites.
34 F. Treated Wood Materials: Treated wood materials including but not limited to wood that has been painted,
35 stained, or chemically treated shall not be recycled or incinerated.
36
37
38
39 END OF SECTION

CITY OF MADISON
1 SECTION 01 76 00
2 PROTECTING INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
3
4 PART 1 – GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
5 1.1. SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
8 PART 2 - PRODUCTS .......................................................................................................................................................................... 2
9 2.1. FENCING MATERIALS AND BARRICADES ....................................................................................................................... 2
10 2.2. EROSION CONTROL PROTECTION ................................................................................................................................. 2
11 2.3. INTERIOR FINISH PROTECTION MATERIALS .................................................................................................................. 3
12 PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................................................................... 3
13 3.1. GENERAL EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................................................... 3
14 3.2. PROTECT ADJACENT PROPERTIES.................................................................................................................................. 3
15 3.3. PROTECT LANDSCAPING FEATURES .............................................................................................................................. 4
16 3.4. PROTECT UTILITIES ........................................................................................................................................................ 4
17 3.5. PROTECT PUBLIC RIGHT OF WAY .................................................................................................................................. 4
18 3.6. PROTECT STORED MATERIALS....................................................................................................................................... 5
19 3.7. PROTECT WORK - EXTERIOR .......................................................................................................................................... 5
20 3.8. PROTECT WORK - INTERIOR .......................................................................................................................................... 5
21
23
24 1.1. SUMMARY
25 A. The purpose of this specification is to provide clear responsibilities, guide lines, and requirements related to
26 providing protection to already installed construction.
27 B. Already installed construction shall include but not be limited to the following:
28 1. Any existing site feature such as pavement, curbs, drainage features, utilities, landscaping features (trees,
29 shrubbery, plantings, flagpoles, etc) and other such exterior items not associated with the building
30 whether on or adjacent to the project site.
31 2. Any existing structure on or adjacent to the project site.
32 3. Any existing interior work that may be adjacent to the new work including all paths of ingress/egress to
33 areas associated with accessing the Work.
34 4. Any existing feature of any kind within the public right-of-way that may be on the project site property,
35 adjacent to the project site or across the street from the project site.
36 C. All contractors shall be familiar with the specifications of their Division of Work for specific requirements on
37 protection of the Work.
38 D. The requirements noted within this specification do not relieve any contractor of the responsibility for
39 compliance with any code, statute, ordinance, or other such regulatory requirement having jurisdictional
40 authority over these contract documents.
41
43 A. It shall be the responsibility of every contractor and worker assigned to the project to be diligent in protecting all
44 existing work, and newly installed construction.
45 B. It shall be the General Contractors’ (GC) responsibility under the contract to provide all reasonable protection
46 methods, materials, or precautionary measures required to protect new or existing construction as described in
47 within this specification to the project as a whole.
48 1. The GC shall be responsible to ensure any damaged new or existing construction is repaired or replaced
49 at no additional cost to the Contract.
50 2. The GC at his/her discretion may direct other contractors to provide and maintain protection of
51 completed work associated with their Division of Work. I.E.: The carpet installer may be required by the
52 GC to provide carpet protection along traveled paths, ingress/egress, etc after installation.
53 C. It shall be the responsibility of the GC to ensure that all materials being used to protect installed construction are
54 compatible with, and/or adjacent to, the materials being protected. This shall include but not be limited to the
55 material used as covering, tapes used to fasten protective materials, etc.

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 76 00 - 1 PROTECTING INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
CITY OF MADISON
1
3 A. Parts of this specification will reference articles within “The City of Madison Standard Specifications for Public
9 PDF will open.
12 c. City Standard Detail Drawings (SDD) may be located from the index in Part VIII.
13 B. Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements
14 C. Section 01 74 13 Progress Cleaning
15
17
18 2.1. FENCING MATERIALS AND BARRICADES
19 A. Except where noted in other areas of the construction documents, the responsible contractor shall provide a six
20 foot galvanized chain link fence including full height mesh screen at the project lines as shown on the Civil
21 Drawings. For temporary barricade situations, the responsible contractor may provide one of the following that
22 sufficiently provide a sturdy physical barrier and/or visual barrier as necessary for the intended application.
23 1. Standard orange construction barrels each with a standard rubber base ring and reflective tape
24 a. Provide flashing amber lights as needed to increase night time visibility
25 2. Steel “T” style fence posts
26 3. 4’0” high standard orange construction fence
27 4. Traffic barricades
28 5. Jersey barriers
29 6. Other types of fencing or barricades typically used in the construction industry
30 B. The contractor responsible for providing the fencing materials and barricades shall also be responsible for
31 maintaining them. This shall include but not limited to fixing damaged fencing, standing up barrels that have
32 been knocked over, realigning barrels, and ensuring flashing lights are fully operational at all times.
33 C. The following fencing and barricade designations, and their use descriptions shall be used throughout this
34 specification to provide uniformity in describing protection requirements.
35 1. Type A, Jersey Barriers, to be used as permanent blocking devices to deny access to alternate project site
36 entrances or exits.
37 2. Type B, Traffic Barricades, to be used as temporary blocking devices to deny access to alternate project
38 site entrances or exits.
39 3. Type C, Construction Barrels without construction fencing shall be used for lane closures, temporary
40 blocking devices to deny access and the protection of single locations (I.E. identify the location of an
41 access structure) that do not require fencing.
42 4. Type D, Construction Barrels with construction fencing where it becomes necessary to surround an object
43 with a complete visual barricade and it is impractical or unacceptable to install fence posts. The surround
44 shall be constructed in such a manner as to provide a buffer zone around and access to the item being
45 protected.
46 5. Type E, Steel “T” Fence Posts shall be used at the project lines, as indicated on the Civil Drawings, with six
47 foot galvanized chain link fencing to surround an object with a complete visual barricade and it is
48 practical to install fence posts. The surround shall be constructed in such a manner as to provide a buffer
49 zone around and access to the item being protected. All posts shall be driven installed. Surface mounted
50 posts to only be used for temporary barricades.
51 6. Type X, Other fencing or barricade types that may be designated and detailed within the construction
52 documents shall use additional alpha numeric designations.
53
54 2.2. EROSION CONTROL PROTECTION
55 A. Refer to City of Madison Standard Specification 210.2 for authorized materials associated with erosion control
56 materials.
57

CITY OF MADISON
1 2.3. INTERIOR FINISH PROTECTION MATERIALS

2 A. Except where noted in other areas of the construction documents or this specification the responsible
3 contractor:
4 1. Shall not provide the cheapest or least effective method as an effort to meet any protection requirement.
5 2. Shall provide materials of sufficient quality, and durability to provide adequate protection based on the
6 seasonal conditions and the anticipated duration at the time the protection will be needed.
7 3. Shall provide sufficient quantity of protection material to protect the construction as needed.
8 B. Prior to installing protective measures the responsible contractor shall propose to the GC, Project Architect (PA)
9 and City Project Manager (CPM) the proposed plan for protection, materials to be used and samples as
10 necessary.
11 1. The PA and CPM reserve the right to disapprove any proposed method and/or material and/or make
12 alternate proposals.
13
15
16 3.1. GENERAL EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
17 A. The GC shall be responsible for ensuring all of the following procedures and requirements are implemented as
18 needed for the duration of the Work performed under this contract.
19 B. The GC shall also be responsible for the following:
20 1. Reporting any incident of damage to existing property, right-of-way, or utility to the CPM immediately
21 upon rendering the incident safe, and notifying emergency response teams, and emergency utility crews
22 as needed.
23 2. Conduct a site walk through prior to leaving at the end of each day to assess:
24 a. Protection measures are properly in place, provide correction actions as necessary.
25 b. Note damage to existing completed work and schedule repair/replacement as needed.
26 3. Ensure all contractors and workers are being diligent in protecting existing work, and newly installed
27 construction.
28
29 3.2. PROTECT ADJACENT PROPERTIES
30 A. Whenever possible through the design process the City of Madison shall have previously provided notice to
31 adjacent property owners that work will be occurring on or near their property. The City of Madison shall also
32 have obtained any permanent or temporary easements that may be necessary to complete any Work on
33 adjacent properties.
34 B. It shall be the responsibility of the GC to do the following for all Work under this contract being performed on or
35 adjacent to the property line:
36 1. Contact the adjacent property owner and provide him/her with information on the work to be done,
37 equipment to be used, and estimated duration of the work. Information to be updated and
38 communicated to property owner(s) as construction progresses and site conditions change.
39 a. If any adjacent property is a rented or leased space the GC shall also make contact and provide
40 the same information to the tenants.
41 b. Determine from the owner and/or tenants if there are any concerns for children, pets, special
42 plantings, or other concerns.
43 2. Discuss the following with all contractors performing work on or near the property line.
44 a. Work to be completed and timeline.
45 b. Concerns of adjacent property owners/tenants from item 1 above.
46 c. Which protective measures will be necessary to protect adjacent properties and address the
47 concerns of adjacent property owners/tenants.
48 3. Ensure all protective measures are placed and maintained during the execution of Work on or adjacent to
49 the property line. Interact with the adjacent property owners/tenants as needed.
50 C. Any contractor doing work on or adjacent to the property line shall install and maintain any protective measure
51 identified in the contract documents, this specification, or as directed by the GC.
52 D. The GC shall be responsible for restoring any damage to structure and property located on or adjacent to the
53 property line.
54 1. Restoration shall include but not be limited to repair or replacement using like materials and finishes to
55 its original condition or better.
56 2. Restoration of landscaping materials shall include watering of any seed, sod, or other planting of any kind
57 for a reasonable period of time to encourage germination and root development.
58 E. The GC shall keep the CPM informed directly to any issues pertaining to adjacent property owners and tenants.

CITY OF MADISON
1
2 3.3. PROTECT LANDSCAPING FEATURES
3 A. Except where specifically stated in other areas of the construction documents the following minimal protection
4 requirements shall apply under this section.
5 1. Whenever possible do not install new landscape features until exterior building construction has been
6 completed, equipment such as scaffolding and lifts are no longer needed and have been removed, and
7 heavy equipment operation is no longer required.
8 2. Whenever possible remove and temporarily store all existing landscape features such as benches, waste
9 receptacles, signage, and other such features that will be within the area of Work that can be removed.
10 3. Landscape features that cannot be removed such as flag poles, light poles, light bollards, etc. shall be
11 protected with Type D fencing for areas on pavement or Type E fencing for areas on soil.
12 4. Planting beds shall be protected using Type E fencing around the exposed perimeter of the planting bed
13 as needed.
14 5. The City of Madison Standard Specification 107.13 shall apply to all tree protection in and around the
15 project site at all times.
16
17 3.4. PROTECT UTILITIES
18 A. The contractor shall be responsible for notifying all utilities to determine emergency response procedures and
19 protection requirements prior to installing any construction protection.
20 1. This includes requesting utility marking through Diggers Hotline.
21 a. Call 811 or 1-800-242-8511 to request a public utility locate
22 b. For emergency locate call (262) 432-7910 or (877) 500-9592
23 2. Contact the Owner and CPM for any available private utility information on the property that may be
24 available prior to calling a private utility locating company.
25 B. Except where specifically stated in other areas of the construction documents the following minimal protection
27 1. Hydrants, lamp posts, electrical transformers, and other utility pedestals shall be protected with Type D
28 fencing for areas on pavement or Type E fencing for areas on soil. Fence posts shall be located so as to
29 not be directly over the utility main.
30 2. Storm sewer structures in pavement shall have proper inlet protection according to City of Madison
31 Standard Specification 210.1(g) and Type C Construction Barrels when necessary.
32 3. Storm sewer structures in turf and other landscaped areas shall have proper inlet protection according to
33 City of Madison Standard Specification 210.1(g) and Type E fencing for areas on soil.
34 4. Stormwater management features such as greenways, retention/detention ponds, bio-filtration ponds
35 and other such features shall be properly protected according to the appropriate erosion control
36 measure specified on the Erosion Control Plan. See multiple sections of City of Madison Standard
37 Specification 210.1
38 a. For the protection of hard to see items such as structures, castings, inlets, etc. in grassy areas
39 provide Type E fencing for areas on soil.
40 c. For the protection of storm water management features having special soils and plants such as
41 bio-filtration ponds provide Type E fencing for areas on soil.
42 5. Other structures and covers including but not limited to cleanouts, wiring hand holes, valve boxes, access
43 structures, grease trap structures, etc shall be protected as follows:
44 a. Provide Type E fencing for areas on soil.
45 b. When paving operations are complete provide a construction barrel or cone near structures as
46 necessary depending on required heavy construction traffic.
47
48 3.5. PROTECT PUBLIC RIGHT OF WAY
49 A. Except where specifically stated in other areas of the construction documents the following minimal protection
51 1. All public right-of-way (area from behind the sidewalk to the centerline of the street) shall remain open
52 and accessible except during periods of active work. At such times the public right of way shall be
53 properly closed and signed as referenced in City of Madison Standard Specification 107.9.
54 2. Bus stops and bus stop structures shall remain accessible at all times.
55 3. Traffic signage and traffic signals, traffic control boxes shall be protected with Type D fencing for areas on
56 pavement or Type E fencing for areas on soil.
57 a. Protection at traffic signage/signals shall not obstruct the viewing of the sign/signal for its
58 intended purpose at any time.

CITY OF MADISON
1 B. When additional protection for traffic control is required, the use of barricades, guardrails, lane closures and
2 other such procedures will be detailed within the construction documents.
3 C. When additional protection for overhead sidewalk cover is required the contract documents shall indicate the
4 specific location and structural requirements of the protective structure.
5
6 3.6. PROTECT STORED MATERIALS
7 A. All contractors shall refer to Specification 01 60 00 Product Requirements for all storage and protection
8 requirements of building materials and products delivered to the site.
9
10 3.7. PROTECT WORK - EXTERIOR
11 A. Provide all temporary services that may be required to protect the installed material from heat, cold, humidity,
12 etc, while materials such as concrete, mortar, sealants, paints, etc, are drying and/or curing.
13 B. Open trenches, pits, and other such excavations shall be properly covered, lined, or shored as needed during
14 periods of inclement weather to prevent the caving of soils onto existing work in progress. Refer to the
15 appropriate specifications and/or regulatory requirements governing this type of work as necessary.
16 C. Provide adequate protection at all openings with heavy duty tarps, plastic sheathing, or wood framing and
17 sheathing as needed to protect interior work in progress from inclement weather as needed.
18 D. Protect exterior finishes of all kinds with heavy duty tarps or plastic sheathing as needed while landscaping is
19 being installed through full germination of seeded areas or installation of filter fabric and mulches to keep dust,
20 dirt, and mud off of finished exterior surfaces.
21 E. Designate specific curb mounting points and provide wood blocking where small vehicles, skid loaders and other
22 such equipment may need access to areas being landscaped.
23 F. Provide plywood turning pads for skid loaders to turn on to prevent tire marking on new pavement.
24 G. Do not permit the parking of vehicles with any kind of fluid leaks to park on new pavement.
25 H. The contractor shall be responsible for cleaning, repairing, or replacing any completed work or work in progress
26 under this specification as deemed necessary by the CPM without additional cost to the contract.
27
28 3.8. PROTECT WORK - INTERIOR
29 A. The GC shall do all of the following:
30 1. Provide all temporary services that may be required to protect the installed material from heat, cold,
31 humidity, etc, while materials such as concrete, mortar, sealants, paints, etc, are drying and/or curing.
32 2. Provide adequate visual and/or physical protection as needed to protect newly completed interior work
33 such as paint, flooring material, sealants, grouts, etc that may be drying and/or curing.
34 3. Provide adequate space and materials for cleaning boots, tool boxes, supplies, and other items coming
35 into the project site once finish work has begun.
36 4. Clean dirtied areas and repair/replace damaged areas immediately.
37 B. The contractors responsible for interior work shall be responsible for protecting their work and finishes from dirt,
38 mud, snow, spills, splatters, and physical damage after installation as follows:
39 1. Protect vinyl composite, rubber composite, painted/stained concrete, and tiled flooring as follows:
40 a. Define foot traffic areas and protect with Ramboard Temporary Floor Protection products as a
41 minimum basis of design or other protection product(s) compatible with installed flooring product
42 if Ramboard is not compatible. Products to be used shall be new.
43 i. Tape all edges, seams, etc with a good quality tape that does not leave sticky residue. Do
44 not allow any debris or other material between the installed flooring and the protection
45 material.
46 ii. Repair tears immediately, replace worn areas with like material as necessary.
47 2. Protect carpeted areas as follows:
48 a. Define foot traffic areas and protect with a minimum of 6mil, clear, polyethylene sheeting 3 feet
49 wide. Products to be used shall be new.
52 material.
53 ii. Repair tears immediately, replace worn areas with like materials as necessary.
54 3. Protect all finished walls in high traffic areas with Ramboard Temporary Wall protection products or
55 approved equal.
58 material.

CITY OF MADISON
1 ii. Repair tears immediately, replace worn areas with like materials as necessary.
2 3. Protect counter tops, cabinets, and other finished surfaces with large sheets of thick cardboard or
3 Ramboard products. Do not allow toolboxes, finish materials, parts and other such items to be placed on
4 finished materials.
5 C. All protection shall stay in place until the CPM, PA, and GC mutually deem the project is ready for Final Cleaning.
6 The contractors responsible for protecting the work shall be responsible for removing the protection and
7 removing any adhesive residue at that time. Contractors shall only use manufacturer authorized cleaning
8 materials for removing adhesives, etc.
9 D. Contractors doing work in un-protected areas of finished work shall be required to provide drop cloths and other
10 protection as noted within this specification for the duration of their work.
11 1. Finished areas shall be sufficiently covered to accommodate all equipment, and materials being used to
12 complete the work being done.
13 2. Finished areas shall be sufficiently covered to prevent splatters, over spray, etc when doing touch-up
14 work.
15 3. Contractors who do not provide sufficient protection under this sub-section shall be responsible for any
16 costs associated with cleaning, repairing or replacing already finished construction at no additional cost
17 to the contract.
18
19
20
21 END OF SECTION

CITY OF MADISON
1 SECTION 01 77 00
2 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
3
4 PART 1 – GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
5 1.1. SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
7 1.3. DEFINITIONS .................................................................................................................................................................. 2
8 1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE – CONSTUCTION CLOSEOUT ...................................................................................................... 2
9 1.5. QUALITY ASSURANCE – CONTRACT CLOSEOUT............................................................................................................. 2
11 PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................................................................... 3
12 3.1. CONSTRUCTION CLOSEOUT CHECKLIST ........................................................................................................................ 3
13 3.2. CONSTRUCTION CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS................................................................................................................ 3
14 3.3. CONSTRUCTION CLOSEOUT PROCEDURE...................................................................................................................... 4
15 3.4. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................................................ 4
16 3.5. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURE .............................................................................................................................. 4
17
19
20 1.1. SUMMARY
21 A. The purpose of this specification is to clearly define and quantify the requirements associated with closing a City
22 of Madison Public Works Contract for facility related work.
23 B. All contracts have two distinct but related paths. Each path needs to be properly closed independently in order
24 to close the contract as a whole.
25 1. Construction closeout is related to closing out all of the Work associated with the construction
26 documents.
27 a. It shall be the responsibility of all contractors to be fully aware of the required Work and closeout
28 requirements involved in their individual trades.
29 2. Contract closeout is related to closing out all of the administrative aspects of the contract in general.
30 a. It shall be the responsibility of all contractors to be fully aware of the administrative requirements
31 required by the contract and to provide the supporting documentation required.
32 3. Construction Closeout must be completed before Contract Closeout can begin.
33 C. This specification will provide general knowledge associated with the following areas:
34 1. Construction Closeout Requirements
35 2. Construction Closeout Procedure
36 3. Contract Closeout Requirements
37 4. Contract Closeout Procedure
38 5. Final Payment and Certificate of Completion
39
41 A. Contractors shall review all references to other specifications including specifications relating to the execution of
42 the Work associated with their Division or Trade.
46 E. Section 01 45 16 Field Quality Control Procedures
47 F. Section 01 74 13 Progress Cleaning
48 G. Section 01 45 16 Construction Waste Management and Disposal
49 H. Section 01 76 00 Protecting Installed Construction
50 I. Section 01 78 13 Completion and Correction List
51 J Section 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data
52 K. Section 01 78 36 Warranties
53 L. Section 01 78 39 As-Built Drawings
54 M. Section 01 78 43 Spare Parts and Extra Materials
55 N. Section 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training
56 O. Other requirements as noted in the contract documents signed by the General Contractor
57

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 77 00 - 1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
CITY OF MADISON
1 1.3. DEFINITIONS
2 A. Substantial Compliance: A letter provided to the City of Madison Building Inspection and signed by the Project
3 Architect indicating that all Work has been completed to a level that would allow Owner Occupancy and that all
4 construction is in compliance with the construction documents. A copy of this letter is also provided to the
5 State of Wisconsin Department of Health and Safety as necessary to clear plan review requirements. This letter
6 does not represent construction closeout.
7 B. Certificate of Occupancy: The Regulatory letter from the City of Madison Building Inspection Department
8 indicating that all regulatory requirements and inspections have been completed and the building may now be
9 occupied for its intended use. This letter does not represent construction closeout.
10 C. Certificate of Substantial Completion: A letter provided by the Department of Public Works, signed by the City
11 Engineer indicating that Construction activities are substantially complete. This letter does represent
12 construction closeout and the date of this letter begins the date of the Warranty Period.
13 D. Construction Closeout: The point in the contract where all contractual requirements associated the execution of
14 the Work as described in the plans, specifications, and other documents have been successfully met and the
15 items described in 1.3.A, .B, and .C above have been completed.
16 E. Final Progress Payment: The progress payment associated with achieving Construction closeout as described in
17 1.3.D above. At this point the contractor may request all monies associated with the contract be paid with the
18 exception of held retainage.
19 F. Contract Closeout: The point in the contract where all contractual requirements associated with the City of
20 Madison, Board of Public Works contract has been successfully met.
21 G. Final Payment: The final contract payment submittal that may be approved by the City of Madison after all
22 contractual requirements of the Public Works Contract have been met and any remaining monies (retainage)
23 due to the contractor may be released for the Final Payment.
24
25 1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE – CONSTUCTION CLOSEOUT
26 A. All contractors shall be responsible for properly executing the construction closeout requirements associated
27 with their Work as described in the specifications governing their Work.
29 1. Ensuring that all contractors have met the construction closeout requirements associated with their
30 Work.
31 2. Coordinate the collection of all construction closeout deliverables from all contractors, provide the
32 deliverables to the Project Architect and City Project Manager for review as necessary, and ensure all
33 contractors correct deficiencies of deliverables and resubmit as needed for final acceptance.
34 3. Ensure all closeout requirements identified in the Construction Closeout Checklist below have been
35 completed as intended by the construction documents.
36
37 1.5. QUALITY ASSURANCE – CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
38 A. The City of Madison, Department of Civil Rights (DCR) monitors contract compliance for construction and
39 procurement contracts to ensure that local, state and federal regulations are followed by contractors working on
40 City of Madison Public Works (PW) projects. DCR will monitor all PW projects from contract award through the
41 final payment at the close of the project. Contractors will be required to submit reporting paperwork
42 throughout the PW project process.
43 1. Contractors are encouraged to visit the web site identified below for additional information, checklists,
44 forms, and other information provided by DCR as it relates to Contract Compliance.
45 http://www.cityofmadison.com/Business/PW/contractCompliance.cfm
46 2. Questions regarding the process should be directed to parties and offices as identified on the various
47 forms, documents, and instructions or contact:
48 City of Madison, Department of Civil Rights
49 210 Martin Luther King Jr. Blvd., Room 523
50 Madison, WI 53703
51 (608) 266-4910
52 B. All Sub-Contractors have submitted the applicable required documents described in item 1.5.D below to the
53 General Contractor (GC) for Contract Closeout.
54 C. The GC has submitted the required applicable documents described in item 1.5.D below for all contractors to the
55 appropriate City of Madison Agency per instructions associated with each submittal.
56 D. The documents required for submittal to the City of Madison for Contract Closeout may include any/all of the
57 items listed below depending on contract type. It is the sole responsibility of all contractors to know and submit
58 the required and complete documentation in a timely fashion.

CITY OF MADISON
1 1. Weekly Payroll Reports

2 2. Employee Utilization Reports
3 3. Agent or Subcontractor Affidavit of Compliance with Prevailing Wage Rate Determination
4 4. Prime Contractor Affidavit of Compliance with Prevailing Wage Rate Determination
5 5. Documentation required for Small Business Enterprise (SBE) goals
6 6. Other documents as maybe required or requested through the Finalization Review Process
7
9
11
12 3.1. CONSTRUCTION CLOSEOUT CHECKLIST
14 to provide a complete and comprehensive list of all Construction Closeout Requirements to the GC.
15 1. The checklist shall include all items identified within the construction documents that require any of the
16 following (and examples) prior to moving into Contract Closeout Procedures:
17 a. Documents indicating a specified level of performance has been achieved, such as:
18 i. Test reports of all types
19 ii. Startup reports
20 b. Required documentation, such as:
21 i. As-builts and record drawings
22 ii. Operation and maintenance data
23 c. Physical items to be turned over to the owner, such as:
24 i. Attic stock
25 ii. Keys
26 d. Required maintenance completed, such as:
27 i. Ducts cleaned
28 ii. Filters replaced
29 e. Commissioning and LEED related items and submittals
30 f. Owner and Maintenance Training
31 B. Each list shall indicate the title of the closeout requirement, the associated specification of the requirement, the
32 required result or deliverable, the responsible contractor(s), and a column to verify the item has been turned in
33 and completed.
34 C. The GC shall be responsible for all of the following:
35 1. Consolidating all the closeout lists into one master Construction Closeout Checklist.
36 a. The checklist shall be in a tabular data format similar to the sample below
37 2. Upload the completed checklist to the Contract Closeout-Miscellaneous Documents Library on the
38 Project Management Web Site for review.
39 3. Resubmit the checklist as needed after initial reviews have been completed.
40 D. The GC shall work with all contractors to amend the Construction Closeout Checklist throughout the execution of
41 the project based on changes and modifications as necessary.
42
Title Specification Description Responsibility Completed
Quality Management 01 45 16 All QMO reports have been properly All, GC
Observation Reports responded to, reviewed and closed by
the CPM.
As-Built Drawings 01 78 39 As-Built drawings have been reviewed All, GC
and accepted per the specification
Testing and Balancing 23 09 23 Provide final TnB reports indicating HVAC
of HVAC design performance has been achieved
43
44 3.2. CONSTRUCTION CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
45 A. The timely submittal or completion of closeout requirements shall go hand in hand with the Progress Payment
46 Milestone Schedule that can be found in Specification 01 29 76 Progress Payments. No payments shall be made
47 until all requirements for that payment have been met.
48 1. The GC and all major Subcontractors, PA, and CPM, shall review all requirements for
49 Construction/Contract Closeout during two (2) special meetings.

CITY OF MADISON
1 a. The first meeting shall be held at the 50% Contract Total Payment milestone. This meeting shall
2 discuss the requirements associated with various construction/contract closeout documentation
3 and events when they are due with respect to progress payments.
4 b. The second meeting shall be held at the 70% Contract Total Payment milestone. This meeting
5 shall review the contractors progress regarding the closeout checklist, begin making plans for
6 upcoming deadlines such as scheduling training, where to put attic stock, and when they are due
7 with respect to progress payments.
8 2. The GC, PA, and CPM, shall utilize the Construction Closeout checklist to ensure that all construction
9 closeout requirements have been met.
10
11 3.3. CONSTRUCTION CLOSEOUT PROCEDURE
12 A. Upon successful completion and final acceptance of all Construction Closeout Requirements the GC may submit
13 to the CPM and PA the request for Final Progress Payment (100% contract total, less retainage).
14 B. The PA will confirm with the design consultants, CPM, and other City of Madison staff that all requirements of
15 the Work have been completed and will do the following:
16 1. Approve the final progress payment application
17 2. Provide the required signed payment documents to the CPM
18 3. Provide the required Letter of Substantial Compliance to the following as required:
19 a. State Safety and Building Division
20 b. Local Building Inspection office
21 c. GC
22 d. CPM
23 C. The CPM shall draft the City Letter of Substantial Completion for signature by the City Engineer. This letter shall
24 state any of the following that may still be tied to the contract and/or warranty:
25 1. Indicate that the date of the letter shall also be the beginning of the Warranty period.
26 2. Indicate any allowed due outs, reasons for them, and anticipated dates of finalization.
27 a. QMO issues such as off season testing of equipment
28 b. Off season training of equipment
29 D. The GC and all subcontractors shall finalize all warranty letters associated with their Work using the date noted
30 on the City Letter of Substantial Completion, and provide the CPM with all warranties as described in
31 Specification 01 78 36 Warranties. Upon receipt and final approval of the Warranties the CPM may initiate final
32 processing of the Final Progress Payment (100% contract total, less retainage).
33
34 3.4. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
35 A. The GC and all sub-contractors shall follow all requirements associated with documenting contract compliance
36 and provide documentation as required or requested by DCR or PW staff. All contractors are encouraged to stay
37 current with submissions of the following documentation:
38 1. Weekly Payroll Reports no later than the Progress Payment equal to 50% of the contract total.
39 2. Employee Utilization Reports
40 3. Agent or Subcontractor Affidavit of Compliance with Prevailing Wage Rate Determination
41 4. Prime Contractor Affidavit of Compliance with Prevailing Wage Rate Determination
42 5. Documentation required for Small Business Enterprise (SBE) goals
43 6. Other documents as maybe required or requested through the Finalization Review Process
44 B. Near the Progress Payment equal to 80% of the contract total the GC shall request in writing a Finalization
45 Review. At that time DCR or PW staff shall prepare a report of all contract documentation submitted to date. A
46 list of missing items or outstanding issues will be emailed to the GC. No additional follow-up will be generated
47 by DCR or PW Staff.
48
49 3.5. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURE
50 A. The Contract Closeout Procedure will not begin until the Construction Closeout Procedure has been completed.
51 B. When the GC feels he/she has successfully met all of the Contract Closeout Requirements associated with
52 Section 3.3 above the GC may submit to the request for Final Payment to the CPM.
53 C. The CPM shall sign and submit the Final Payment request for processing.
54 D. DCR and PW staff shall do a complete review of all documentation associated with item 3.3.A above.
55 E. The GC shall be notified directly by DCR or PW Staff of any documentation that may still be missing, have
56 incomplete information, or other outstanding issues. It shall be the responsibility of the GC to continue follow-
57 up with DCR and PW staff until all documentation has been successfully submitted and accepted.

CITY OF MADISON
1 F. When all required documentation associated with Contract Closeout has been successfully submitted and
2 accepted by DCR and PW Staff the City of Madison shall process the Final Payment of any remaining monies
3 including retainage.
4
5
6 END OF SECTION
7

CITY OF MADISON
1 SECTION 01 78 13
2 COMPLETION AND CORRECTION LIST
3
4 PART 1 – GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
5 1.1. SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
9
11
12 1.1. SUMMARY
13 A. The City of Madison has developed a multi-faceted Quality Management Program that begins with contract
14 signing and runs through contract closeout to ensure the best quality materials, workmanship, and product are
15 delivered for the contracted Work.
16 1. The Progress Management Web Site is a Construction Management tool that provides contractors,
17 consultants, and staff a single on-line location for the daily operations and progression of the Work.
18 2. The Quality Management Observation (QMO) is an ongoing observation of the construction process as it
19 progresses. The City of Madison does not use a “Punch List” or “Corrections List” as it is typically known
20 throughout the construction industry. The QMO process acts as an “in progress punch list”. Work
21 identified as not in compliance with the contract documents by the Owner, Owner Representatives,
22 Owner Consultants, etc. shall be resolved immediately at the Contractor’s expense. Unresolved issues
23 will be subject to withholding of progress payment(s) until completed.
24 3. Very stringent expectations are tied to Construction Closeout and Contract Closeout procedures. Specific
25 milestones throughout the project need to be met and the milestones are tied to the Progress Payment
26 Schedule.
27 B. All contractors shall be required to review the specifications identified in Section 1.2 below, and other related
28 specifications identified therein to become familiar with the terminology and expectations of this City of
29 Madison Public Works contract.
30
34 C. Section 01 45 16 Field Quality Control Procedures
35 D. Section 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures
36
38
40
41
42
43 END OF SECTION

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 78 13 - 1 COMPLETION AND CORRECTION LISTTITLE
CITY OF MADISON
1 SECTION 01 78 23
2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
3
4 PART 1 – GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
5 1.1. SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
8 1.4. O&M DATA REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................................................................... 1
9 1.5. O&M DATA SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................................................. 2
11 PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2
12 3.1. O&M DATA PREPARATION - GENERAL .......................................................................................................................... 2
13 3.2. O&M DATA DRAFT SUBMITTAL ..................................................................................................................................... 3
14 3.3. O&M DATA FINAL SUBMITTAL ...................................................................................................................................... 3
15 3.4. CONSTRUCTION CLOSEOUT .......................................................................................................................................... 3
16
18
19 1.1. SUMMARY
20 A. The purpose of this specification is to provide clear responsibilities and guide lines related to providing well
21 documented and complete Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Data related to general facility use, equipment,
22 systems, finishes, and materials to City of Madison Staff (Owner, Owner Representatives, Maintenance, and
23 Custodial Personnel) as needed.
24 B. Operation and Maintenance Data shall apply to both of the following categories except where specific
25 requirements are noted under their separate titles as follows:
26 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Generally shall mean the owner manual that provides information on
27 start-up, shut-down, operation, troubleshooting, maintenance, parts, and other such documentation as it
28 pertains to all equipment and systems installed under the Work.
29 2. Use and Care instructions: Where applicable use and care instructions shall also be considered O&M for
30 such things as flooring, tile, partitions, and other such finishes and trim related items, installed under the
31 Work.
32
36 C. Section 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures
37 D. Section 01 78 13 Completion and Correction List
38 E. Section 01 78 19 Maintenance Contracts
39 F. Section 01 78 36 Warranties
40 G. Section 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training
41 H. Other Divisions and Specifications that may address more specifically the requirements for O&M Data.
42
44 A. All O&M Data shall meet the requirements identified in Section 1.4 below.
45 B. All contractors shall provide O&M Data for each piece of equipment, system, or finish installed during the
46 installation of the Work. O&M Data shall be provided to the General Contractor (GC) for verification and
47 submittal.
48 C. The GC shall be responsible for receiving all required O&M Data files from all contractors for verifying that all
49 files submitted meet the requirements in Section 1.4 below.
50
51 1.4. O&M DATA REQUIREMENTS
52 A. O&M Data shall be provided in digital PDF format as follows:
53 1. PDF files shall be complete first generation consumer useable editions of PDF documents as provided by
54 any of the following:
55 a. Product manufacturer
56 b. Supplier of product
57 c. Product manufacturer internet site
58 2. Acceptable PDF files shall have the following functionality:

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 78 23 - 1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
CITY OF MADISON
1 a. Word searchable
2 b. Key areas are bookmarked
3 c. Table of Contents and/or Index linked to content is preferred whenever possible.
4 3. Scanned printed material, with word searchable capabilities, saved as a PDF, is not acceptable and will be
5 rejected without further review.
6 B. O&M Data shall include but not be limited to the following manufacturers’ published information as appropriate
7 for the equipment, system, material, or finish:
8 1. Installation instructions
9 2. Parts lists, assembly diagrams, explosion diagrams
10 3. Wiring diagrams
11 4. Start-up, shut-down, troubleshooting and other related operation procedures
12 5. Lubrication, testing, parts replacement, and other such maintenance procedures
13 6. General use, care, and cleaning instructions
14 7. Special precautions and safety requirements
15 8. A list of certified equipment vendors, service companies, parts suppliers including company name,
16 address, and phone number
17 9. A list of the recommended spare parts to have on hand at all times
18 10. A list by type of all recommended lubes, oils, packing material, and other maintenance supplies
19 11. Copies of final test reports, balance reports, and other related documentation
20 12. Warranty information for equipment and systems
21
22 1.5. O&M DATA SUBMITTALS
23 A. O&M Data shall be prepared as identified in this specification and shall be submitted for review as per the
24 schedule identified in Specification Section 01 29 76, Progress Payment Procedures.
25 B. O&M Data Draft submittals will be reviewed for content, procedure, and compliance only. A general critique
26 with recommendations for improvement will be made but re-submittals will not be required.
27 C. O&M Data Final submittals will be reviewed for content, procedure, and compliance. Re-submittals will be
28 required until such time as each submittal is accepted.
29
30 NOTE: Acceptance of O&M Data Final submittals is required to be complete prior to scheduling and conducting owner
31 related training and construction closeout.
32
34
36
37 3.1. O&M DATA PREPARATION - GENERAL
38 A. All contractors shall prepare O&M Data for draft and final submission as follows:
39 1. Obtain digital PDF files for each piece of equipment, system, material or finish as described in Sections
40 1.4.A.1 and 1.4.A.2 above.
41 2. Verify that all information as described in Section 1.4.B above is included with the PDF file. Obtain
42 missing information as necessary for a complete submittal.
43 B. Rename each individual PDF file as follows.
44 1. Do not use special characters such as #, %, &, /, etc. These characters are reserved by the Project
45 Management Web Site software the City of Madison uses; however the under-score (or under-bar) ‘_’ is
46 an allowed character.
47 2. Use the following format and examples for renaming your file:
48 a. Format: Equipment name_What_Project name_Contract number_Year
49 i. Equipment Name represents the name of any equipment, system, material or finish as
50 designated in the Contract Documents.
51 ii. What represents what the file is about
52 iii. Project Name represents the title of the project or contract. A shortened version of the
53 title may be identified by the City Project Manager to be used by all contractors.
54 iv. Contract number is the specific identification number the Work was bid under and appears
55 on the plan set title sheet and in each sheet title block
56 v. Year represents the year the contract will be closed out
57 b. Examples of file names
58 i. AHU 2_Operation Manual_Fire Admin_1234_2015

CITY OF MADISON
1 ii. CPT 2_Use and Care_MPD West_9876_2011

2 C. All contractors shall submit the completed digital PDF files to the GC in sufficient time for the GC to meet the
3 O&M Data submission deadlines as described in Specification Section 01 29 76, Progress Payment Procedures.
4 D. O&M Data shall be submitted and reviewed as described in sections 3.2 and 3.3 below.
5
6 3.2. O&M DATA DRAFT SUBMITTAL
7 A. All contractors shall prepare and submit the following for an O&M Data Draft review submittal:
8 1. Prepare three (3) complete O&M Data file samples as described in section 3.1 above.
9 2. Review all specifications within his/her Division of Work and prepare a complete O&M Data checklist
10 listing all equipment, systems, materials, or finishes. Checklist shall be in tabular form similar to the
11 example below and shall indicate the title (and plan identifier when applicable) of the O&M Data, the
12 associated specification, and a column to verify the item has been turned in and completed.
13 B. The GC shall be required to review all contractors’ samples and checklists for compliance with this specification
14 and shall return any to the originating contractor that are insufficient for re-submittal.
15 1. When acceptable to the GC, he/she shall upload each O&M Data draft submittal file to the O&M Draft
16 library on the Project Management Web Site.
17 C. The Project Architect, City Project Manager, Consulting Staffs and Owner Representatives shall review the O&M
18 Data draft submittals and checklist within fifteen 15 working days as follows:
19 1. Provide general critique comments by Division on O&M Data samples submitted. Critique is intended to
20 provide all contractors with information on strengths and weaknesses of their submittals.
21 a. Re-submittal of the O&M Data samples will not be required.
22 2. Review in detail the O&M Data Checklist for completeness. Provide comments as needed.
23 a. Re-submittal of the O&M Checklist will be required until accepted.
24
Title Specification Completed
Overhead Door Operator 08 36 00
Air Handling Unit (AHU-3) 23 00 00
Water Heater (WH-1) 22 30 00
25
26 3.3. O&M DATA FINAL SUBMITTAL
27 A. All contractors shall prepare and submit the following for an O&M Data Final review submittal:
28 1. Prepare complete O&M Data files as described in Section 3.1 above according to their approved checklist
29 as described in Section 3.2 above.
30 2. Submit completed checklist and all final O&M Data files to the GC for final submittal review.
31 B. The GC shall be required to spot check all contractors’ submittals for completeness against their checklists and
32 for compliance with this specification and shall return any to the originating contractor that are insufficient for
33 re-submittal.
34 1. When acceptable to the GC, he/she shall upload each O&M Data final submittal file to the O&M Final
35 library on the Project Management Web Site.
36 C. The Project Architect, City Project Manager, Consulting Staffs and Owner Representatives shall review the O&M
37 Data final submittals and checklist within fifteen (15) working days as follows:
38 1. Review the files submitted against the checklist and request any missing files through the GC.
39 2. Review in detail all of the O&M Data files for completeness.
40 a. Submittals shall be accepted or rejected as individual PDF files.
41 b. Contractors shall re-submit entire O&M submittal if any portion is rejected or incomplete.
42
43 3.4. CONSTRUCTION CLOSEOUT
44 A. All contractors shall review Specification 01 77 00, Closeout Procedures and Specification 01 79 00
45 Demonstration and Training.
46 1. Acceptance of all final O&M Data submittals is required prior to scheduling Demonstration and Training
47 Sessions.
48 2. Completion of all Demonstration and Training Sessions is required to receive the Substantial Compliance
49 for Occupancy Certificate, and to begin Construction Closeout procedures.
50
51
52
53 END OF SECTION

CITY OF MADISON
1 SECTION 01 78 36
2 WARRANTIES
3
4 PART 1 – GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
5 1.1. SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
7 1.3. DEFINITIONS .................................................................................................................................................................. 1
8 1.4. GENERAL CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES ................................................................................................................. 2
10 PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................................................................... 3
11 3.1. WARRANTY CHECKLIST.................................................................................................................................................. 3
12 3.2. LETTERS OF WARRANTY ................................................................................................................................................ 3
13 3.3. STANDARD PRODUCT WARRANTY ................................................................................................................................ 4
14 3.4. FINAL WARRANTY SUBMITTAL ...................................................................................................................................... 4
15 3.5. WARRANTY NOTIFICATION, RESPONSE, EXECUTION AND FOLLOW-UP ....................................................................... 4
16
18
19 1.1. SUMMARY
20 A. The purpose of this specification is to provide clear responsibilities and guide lines related to providing all
21 Warranties and Guarantees related to the Work, workmanship, materials, equipment, and other such items
22 required by the Construction Documents.
23 B. Manufacturers’ disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve any contractor of the warranty
24 on the Work that includes the product.
25 C. Manufacturers’ disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve suppliers, manufacturers and
26 any contractor required to provide special warranties under the contract documents.
27
31 C. Section 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures
32 D. Section 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data
33 E. Other Divisions and Specifications that may address more specifically the requirements for Warranties related to
34 the installation of all items and equipment installed under the execution of the Work.
35
36 1.3. DEFINITIONS
37 A. See specification 01 77 00 for the definitions of the following terms that may also be used in this specification:
38 1. Substantial Compliance
39 2. Certificate of Occupancy
40 3. Certificate of Substantial Completion
41 4. Construction Closeout
42 5. Contract Closeout
43 B. Emergency Repair: The Owner or Owner Representative reserves the right to make emergency repairs as
44 required to keep equipment or materials in operation or to prevent damage to property and injury to persons
45 without voiding the contractors warranty or bond or relieving the contractor of his/her responsibilities during
46 the warranty period.
47 C. Installer: The company or contractor hired to install a finished product that was manufactured and supplied
48 specifically for the Work within this contract. The Installer may or may not be the same company that supplied
49 the product. See the definition for supplier.
50 D. Supplier: Any company that makes a specific finished product for the Work from information within the Contract
51 Documents. Examples of suppliers would include custom cabinets, steel stairs and railings, etc. A supplier would
52 not be a company that distributes items manufactured by others such as an electrical or plumbing supplier.
53 E. Warranty: A written guarantee from the manufacturer to the owner on the integrity of a product and its
54 installation, and the manufacturers’ responsibility to repair or replace the defective product or components
55 within a specified time from the date of ownership. Warranty may also be used interchangeably with
56 Guarantee. The following warranty types may be part of any specification within the Work associated with the
57 Construction Documents:

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 78 36 - 1 WARRANTIES
CITY OF MADISON
1 1. Expressed Warranty: A warranty that provides specific repair or replacement for covered components of
2 a product over a specified length of time.
3 2. Implied Warranty: A warranty that is not stated explicitly by a seller or manufacturer that the product is
4 merchantable and fit for the intended purpose.
5 3. Standard Product Warranty: Preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for
6 particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner. Standard warranties
7 may be for any amount of time but shall not be for anything less than one (1) year from the warranty
8 date.
9 4. Special Warranty: A written warranty required by the Contract Documents either to extend the time
10 limit provided under a standard warranty or to provide greater rights to the Owner.
11 F. Warranty Date: The effective date that begins all warranty periods required for products, installations, and
12 work-manship associated with the execution of the Work for this contract. The Warranty Date shall be set by
13 the CPM.
14 G. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged Warranted Work, remove and reinstall (or
15 replace if necessary) the construction that has been damaged as a result of the failure or the construction that
16 must be removed and replaced to obtain access for the correction of Warranted Work.
17 H. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected reinstate the
18 warranty by a new written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an
19 equitable adjustment for depreciation unless specifically noted otherwise in a specification.
20 I. Replacement Cost: All costs that may be associated with Work being replaced under warranty including but not
22 1. Related damages and losses
23 2. Labor, material and equipment
24 3. Permits and inspection fees
25 4. This shall be regardless of any benefit the Owner may have had from the Work through any portion of its
26 anticipated useful service life.
27 J. Replacement Work: All materials, products, required labor, and equipment necessary to replace failed or
28 damaged warranted to an acceptable condition that complies with the requirements of the original Construction
29 Documents.
30 K. Owners Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties and shall not
31 limit the duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise available under the law. Expressed warranty periods
32 shall not be interpreted as limitations on the time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations,
33 rights, and remedies.
34 1. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject any warranty and to limit the selection of
35 products with warranties not in conflict with the requirements of the contract documents.
36 2. Where the Contract Documents require a Special Warranty or similar commitment on the Work or
37 product, the Owner reserves the right to refuse acceptance of the Work until the Contractor presents
38 evidence the entities required to countersign such required commitments have done so.
39
40 1.4. GENERAL CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES
41 A. The General Contractor (GC) shall be responsible to remedy, at his/her expense, any defect in the Work and any
42 damage to City owned or controlled real or personal property when the damage is a result of:
43 1. The GC’s failure to conform to Contract Document requirements.
44 a. Any substitutions not properly approved and authorized may be considered defective.
45 2. Any defect in workmanship, materials, equipment, or design furnished by the GC or Sub-contractors.
46 B. All warranties as described in this specification and these Contract Documents shall take effect on the date
47 established by the CPM, as noted in Section 1.3F above.
48 1. All warranties shall remain in effect for one (1) year thereafter unless specifically stated otherwise in the
49 Contract Documents or where standard manufacturer warranties are greater.
50 C. The GC’s warranty with respect to Work repaired or replaced, including restored or replaced Work due to
51 damage, will run for one (1) year from the date of Owner Acceptance of said repair or replacement.
52 1. This shall be regardless of any benefit the Owner may have had from the Work through any portion of its
53 anticipated useful service life.
54 D. Warranty Response
55 1. See Section 3.5 of this specification.

CITY OF MADISON

2
4
5 3.1. WARRANTY CHECKLIST
7 to provide a complete and comprehensive list of all Warranty Requirements to the GC.
8 B. Each list shall indicate the title (and plan identifier when applicable) of the warranted item, the associated
9 specification of the warranted item, the terms of the warranty (years), and a column to verify the item has been
10 turned in and completed.
11 C. The GC shall be responsible for all of the following:
12 1. Consolidating all the warranty lists into one master Warranty Checklist.
13 a. The checklist shall be in a tabular data format similar to the sample below.
14 2. Upload the completed checklist to the Submittal Library on the Project Management Web Site for review.
15 See Specification 01 33 23 Submittals for more information on this procedure.
16 3. Resubmit the schedule as needed after initial reviews have been completed.
17 D. The GC shall work with all contractors to amend the Warranty Checklist throughout the execution of the project
18 based on changes and modifications as necessary.
19
Title Specification Terms Completed
Overhead Door Operator 08 36 00 MFR 2yr
Exterior Bench and Trash 12 93 00 MFR 3 year warranty on finish
Receptacles
Kitchen Sink (SK-1) 22 42 00 MFR 5 year
Disposal (D-1) 22 42 00 MFR 7 year parts and in-home service
Toilet (WC-1) 22 42 00 MFR 1 year limited
20
21 3.2. LETTERS OF WARRANTY
22 A. All letters of warranty shall be in a typed letter format and provide the following information:
23 1. The letter shall be on official company stationary including company name, address, and phone number.
24 2. Indicate project name, contract number, and contract address the warranty is for on the reference line.
25 3. Provide a description of the warranty(ies) being provided.
26 a. Include Division, Trade, or Specification information as necessary.
27 b. Only combine warranties of related Divisional Work together. Create new letters for additional
28 Divisions as necessary.
29 4. Indicate the effective Warranty Date. As noted in Section1.3.F above, the Warranty Date shall be the
30 date the Certificate of Substantial Completion was signed by the City Engineer.
31 5. Contractor Letters of Warranty shall only be signed by a principal officer of the company.
32 6. After signing the letter provide the GC with a high quality color scanned image in PDF format and the
33 original signed letter.
34 B. The GC shall be responsible for the Final Warranty submittal as identified in Section 3.4 below.
35 C. The GC shall obtain letters of warranty from all of the following:
36 1. The General Contractor shall provide warranty letters for all Work that was self performed under the
37 contract documents, identify all trades or Divisions of Work.
38 2. All Sub-contractors shall provide warranty letters for Work performed under the contract documents;
39 identify all trades or Divisions of Work.
40 3. Suppliers, as required by other specifications within the Construction Documents where the manufacture
41 of a specific product unique to the Work of this contract was required.
42 a. The terms and conditions of the Supplier Letter of Warranty shall be as defined by the
43 specifications associated with the Work but shall not be less than the industry standard of repair,
44 or replace defective materials and workmanship within one (1) year of the warranty date.
45 b. When the supplier is also the installer a single written letter may be submitted identifying both
46 the warranty for the manufacture of the product and the warranty for the installation of the
47 product.
48 4. Installers as required by other specifications within the Construction Documents where the installation of
49 a specific product unique to the Work of this contract was required.
50 1. The terms and conditions of the Installer Letter of Warranty shall be as defined by the
51 specifications associated with the Work but shall not be less than the industry standard of repair,

CITY OF MADISON
1 or replace defective materials and workmanship associated with the installation of the product
2 within one (1) year of the warranty date.
3 5. Special Letters of Warranty shall be required from any contractor, supplier, installer or manufacturer who
4 agrees to provide warranty services required by any Division Specification in excess of their Standard
5 Product Warranty.
6
7 3.3. STANDARD PRODUCT WARRANTY
8 A. All contractors shall be responsible for collecting and providing copies of all standard product warranties for
9 commercially available products purchased and installed under this contract.
10 B. Only one copy of the manufacturers’ standard warranty needs to be submitted as representative for all
11 quantities of the same model number used throughout the Work.
12 C. Provide the manufacturers certificate, letter, or other standard documentation for each Standard Product
13 Warranty submitted as follows:
14 1. Whenever possible a PDF version of the document shall be used.
15 a. If a PDF version is used all additional information shall be completed using simple PDF editing
16 tools such as text boxes, highlight, etc.
17 b. If a PDF version is not available and an original document is furnished the additional information
18 shall be neatly hand written and highlighted on the document in such a fashion so that it does not
19 obscure any part of the written warranty.
20 2. Provide the following additional information on each warranty document:
21 a. Contract warranty date.
22 b. Provide the manufacturer name and model number of the product if not specified within the
23 warranty.
24 i. Where the manufacturer name and model number is specified within the warranty it shall
25 be highlighted for visibility.
26 c. Provide the plan identifier (LAV-1, WC-2, etc) when applicable.
27 D. Each completed warranty shall be saved as a digital PDF. The file shall be named using the specification number
28 and item description. I.E. 22 42 00 Toilet (WC-1).pdf
29 a. Where an original certificate was furnished provide a high quality colored scan of the completed
30 document with the additional information. Save the scanned image in PDF format and use the
31 same naming convention as indicated above.
32 E. Provide all PDF files and any original documents to the GC for final consolidation to be provided to the Owner.
33
34 3.4. FINAL WARRANTY SUBMITTAL
35 A. The GC shall receive all required warranties (digital PDF and any original documents) from all contractors,
36 suppliers, installers and manufacturers.
37 B. The GC shall inventory all received warranties with the Warranty Submittal List to ensure all required warranties
38 have been received and all warranty periods are correct according to the specifications.
39 C. Provide with each Operation and Maintenance Manual a complete copy of any associated warranty.
40 D. Scan all warranties into a single organized electronic PDF file as follows:
41 1. Organize the PDF file into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Specifications.
42 2. Provide a typed Table of Contents for the entire file at the front of the document.
43 3. Provide bookmarks and links to each individual PDF to enable quick navigation through the PDF
44 document.
45 E. Upload the warranty submittal to the appropriate document library on the Project Management Web Site for
46 review by the PA and CPM.
47 F. Correct any deficiencies or omissions and resubmit as necessary.
48
49 3.5. WARRANTY NOTIFICATION, RESPONSE, EXECUTION AND FOLLOW-UP
50 A. Warranty Notification:
51 1. The City of Madison, Project Management Web Site, uses an email notification system for all warranty
52 related issues. The GC will be required to provide, and keep current during the warranty period, a
53 minimum of two (2) email addresses and phone numbers of current employees to receive email
54 notifications and provide response regarding Work associated with these construction documents.
55 a. In the event a Warranty Issue is deemed by the City of Madison to be an emergency, the GC shall
56 first receive a phone call with a follow-up email from the Project Management Web Site.
57 b. The Contract Closeout-Warranty Issue Library on the Project Management Web Site uses a form
58 for each warranty issue that is logged into the system.

CITY OF MADISON
1 i. The GC shall open each warranty issue form, review the issue description and any attached
2 documentation or photos.
3 ii. The GC shall also notify any other sub-contractor, supplier, or installer that may be
4 required to review the warranty issue.
5 B. Warranty Response:
6 1. The GC shall upon notification by the City of Madison provide warranty response as follows:
7 a. Critical Systems or equipment: Where damage to equipment and other building components, or
8 injury to personnel is probable provide immediate emergency shut-down information and an on-
9 site response team as soon as possible but in no case shall on-site response exceed 24 hours.
10 b. For non-critical responses where damage or injury is unlikely provide on-site response no later
11 than the next business day.
12 c. Where Technical Assistance support is part of the written warranty provide all assistance
13 necessary via phone, text, or internet systems as indicated by the warranty. If issues cannot be
14 resolved provide on-site response no later than the next business day.
15 d. If the request cannot be supported in sufficient time as outlined above the Owner (or Owner
16 Representative) reserves the right to contact other contractors or service companies having
17 similar capability to expedite the repair or replacement and shall invoice all associated costs to
18 the Owner back to the GC.
19 C. Warranty Execution:
20 1. The GC shall provide all repairs or replacements as necessary to restore broken or damaged Work to the
21 original level of acceptance as intended by the Contract Documents.
22 a. Provide all materials, equipment, products, and labor necessary to complete the repair or
23 replacement associated with the Warranty Issue.
24 b. Provide all cleaning services as may be required before, during, and after the repair or
25 replacement as per Specification 01 74 13 Progress Cleaning.
26 c. Provide any protection necessary for existing construction as per Specification 01 76 00 Protecting
27 Installed Construction
28 d. Provide new letters of warranty when required.
29 D. Warranty Follow-up:
30 1. Logged Warranty Issues:
31 a. The GC shall provide complete documented responses of all logged Warranty Issues. Responses
32 shall provide a description of work completed, by who, inclusive dates, and photos of completed
33 or repaired work.
34 i. Provide call back response if work is not acceptable.
35 b. The City Project Manager shall review the submitted response documentation and do a field
36 inspection if necessary.
37 i. If work is not acceptable, contact GC to review details and expectations of the repair as
38 needed.
39 ii. If work is acceptable close the Warranty Issue.
40 2. Quarterly Warranty Reviews:
41 a. The GC shall be responsible for scheduling quarterly on-site review with all of the following:
42 i. City Project Manager, and other City staff as needed
43 ii. Owner and Owner Tenant Representative
44 iii. Plumbing, Heating, Electrical Sub-contractors
45 iv. Other Sub-contractors that may be responsible for open Warranty issues
46 b. Quarterly reviews shall be scheduled at 3 months, 6 months, and 11 months after the effective
47 date of the warranty. The review meetings shall:
48 i. Review the status of all open Warranty Issues, determine course of action and estimated
49 date of completion.
50 ii. In the appropriate quarter, provide shut-down, start-up, testing, and training of off-season
51 equipment as required by the contract documents.
52 iii. The 11th month review shall review all open Warranty Issues, final plan for resolution, and
53 all Warranty Issues where a new letter of warranty may have been issued.
54
55
56
57 END OF SECTION

CITY OF MADISON
1 SECTION 01 78 39
2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
3
4 PART 1 – GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
5 1.1. SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
10 PART 2 – PRODUCTS.......................................................................................................................................................................... 2
11 2.1. OFFICE SUPPLIES ........................................................................................................................................................... 2
12 PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2
13 3.1. FIELD DOCUMENT AS-BUILTS ........................................................................................................................................ 2
14 3.2. SITE SURVEY AS-BUILT ................................................................................................................................................... 3
15 3.3. MASTER AS-BUILT DOCUMENT SET .............................................................................................................................. 3
16 3.4. AS-BUILT REVIEW AND ACCEPTANCE ............................................................................................................................ 4
17 3.5. CHANGES AFTER ACCEPTANCE...................................................................................................................................... 5
18
20
21 1.1. SUMMARY
22 A. This specification is intended to provide clear guidelines and identify the responsibilities of all contractors as they
23 pertain to City of Madison contract procedures regarding the accurate recording of the Work associated with the
24 execution of this contract. This shall include but not be limited to work that will be hidden, concealed, or buried.
25 B. Each contractor shall be responsible for maintaining an accurate record of all installations, locations, and
26 changes to the contract documents during the execution of this contract as it may relate to their specific division
27 or trade.
28 C. The General Contractor (GC) shall be responsible for ensuring all contractors provide as-built record information
29 to the Master As-Built Document Set as described in this specification.
30
32 A. 00 31 21 Survey Information
33 B. 01 26 13 Request for Information
34 C. 01 31 23 Construction Bulletin
35 D. 01 32 33 Photographic Documentation
36 E. 01 26 63 Change Orders
37 F. 01 29 76 Progress Payment Procedures
38 G. 01 31 23 Project Management Web Site
39 H. 01 33 23 Submittals
40 I. 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures
41 J. Other Divisions and Specifications that may address more specifically the requirements for field recording the
42 installation of all items associated with the execution of this contract by Division or Trade.
43
45 A. Other related documents shall include but not be limited to the following:
46 1. Bidding documents including drawings, specifications, and addenda.
47 2. Required regulatory documents of conditional approval.
48 3. Field orders, verbal or written by inspectors having regulatory jurisdiction.
49 4. Shop drawings and installation drawings.
50
52 A. The GC shall be responsible for maintaining the “Master As-Built Document Set” in the job trailer at all times
53 during the execution of this contract. This document set shall include all of the following:
54 1. Master As-Built Plan Set
55 2. Master As-Built Specification Set
56 3. Other Document Sets

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 78 39 - 1 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
CITY OF MADISON
1 B. The GC shall designate one person of the GC staff to be responsible for maintaining the Master As-Built
2 Document Set at the job trailer. This shall include, posting updates, revisions, deletions and the monitoring of all
3 contractors posting as-built information as described in this specification.
4 C. All contractors shall use this specification as a general guideline regarding the requirements for documenting
5 their completed Work. Contractors shall explicitly follow additional specification requirements within their own
6 Division of Trade as it may apply to this specification.
7
10 a. Spot checking all sub-contractors field documents to insure daily information is being recorded as
11 work progresses.
12 b. Discuss as-built recording to the plan set at weekly job meetings with all sub-contractors on site.
13 c. Schedule time with sub-contractors in the job trailer for recording as-built information to the plan
14 set.
15 d. Insure that all sub-contractors are providing clear and accurate information to the plan set in a
16 neat and organized manner.
17 e. Insure sub-contractors who have completed work have finalized recording all as-built information
18 to the plan set before releasing them from the project site.
19 B. The Project Architect, the City Project Manager, and other design team staff will perform random checks of the
20 Master As-Built Document Set during the execution of this contract to ensure as-built information is being
21 recorded in a timely fashion as the Work progresses. An updated and current Master As-Built Document Set is a
22 stipulation for approval of the progress payment.
23
25
26 2.1. OFFICE SUPPLIES
27 A. The GC shall provide a sufficient supply of office products in the job trailer at all times for all contractors to use in
28 recording as-built information into the plan set. This shall include but not be limited to the following:
29 a. Red ink pens, medium point. Pens that bleed through paper, markers, and felt tips will not be
30 accepted.
31 b. The use of highlighters is acceptable. Assign colors to various trades for consistency in recording
32 information.
33 c. Straight edges of various lengths for drawing dimension, extension and other lines.
34 d. Civil and Architectural scales
35 e. Clear transparent, non-yellowing, single sided tape.
36 f. Correction tape or correction fluid for correcting small errors.
37
39
40 3.1. FIELD DOCUMENT AS-BUILTS
41 A. The GC and all Sub-contractors shall be responsible for keeping their own field set of as-built documents
42 including plans, specifications and published changes.
43 B. Field sets shall be kept dry and in good condition at all times.
44 C. No Work shall be buried, covered, or hidden, by any additional Work, regardless of Contractor or Trade, until
45 locations of all materials and equipment has been properly documented as described below.
46 D. All contractors shall be required to record the following as-built information:
47 a. Notes on the daily installation of materials and equipment.
48 b. Sketches, corrections, and markups indicating final location, positioning, and arrangement of
49 materials and equipment such as pipes, conduits, valves, cleanouts, pull boxes and other such
50 items. Note all final locations on plan sheets, indicate dimension off identifiable building features.
51 Riser diagrams need only be corrected for significant changes in locations, routing or
52 configuration.
53 i. The use of photographs in lieu of hand drawn sketches is acceptable.
54 ii. Photos shall be taken according to Specification 01 32 33 Photographic Documentation
55 iii. Print photo and markup with dimensions or notes as necessary.
56 c. Identify by the use of existing plan symbology and notes the size, type, quantity, and use as
57 applicable of materials such as pipes, valves, conduits, etc.

CITY OF MADISON
1 d. Note whether horizontal runs are below slab or above ceiling, include dimensions above or below
2 finished floor elevation.
3 E. All contractors shall be responsible for transferring the information from their field set of documents to the
4 Master As-Built Plan Set kept in the GC job trailer. See Section 3.3.D. below for the proper procedure.
5 F. All contractors shall update the GC Master Plan Set as often as necessary, but not less than once per work week.
6
7 3.2. SITE SURVEY AS-BUILT
8 A. The Land Surveyor Sub-Contractor shall provide digital as-built information including but not be limited to the
9 following:
10 a. For underground buried utility laterals and services of all types locate all of the following that may
11 apply:
12 i. Connection points at all mains
13 ii. Storm discharge points to open air
14 iii. All corners and bends regardless of angle, large radius sweeps shall have multiple point
15 locations sufficient to define the sweep.
16 iv. All vertical drops
17 v. All wells
18 vi. Private buried utilities such as buried electrical cables, irrigation systems, etc.
19 v. Other information that may need to be located in the future by the owner prior to digging
20 b. Record all surface features including but not limited to the following:
21 i. Building corners, pavement edges, and other permanent structural features.
22 ii. All surface covers for inlets, catch basins, cleanouts, access structures, curb stops and
23 other such devices.
24 iii. Other permanent surface features such as hydrants, lamp posts, and other permanent site
25 amenities.
26 c. The following data shall be recorded while locating items in sub-sections 3.2.a and 3.2.b above:
27 i. Flow lines at both ends of pipes
28 ii. Pipe sizes and material types
29 iii. Rim elevations for all covers
30 iv. Sump elevations and invert elevations of all structures
31 v. Spot elevations for all pads, driveways, walks, stoops, and floors
32 B. The Surveyor shall provide the final digital as-built on a media and in a format specified in Specification 00 31 21
33 Survey Information to the GC for turn in to the Project Architect and the Civil Engineer.
34 C. The Surveyor shall provide two printed as-built site plans to the GC for inclusion in the Master As-Built Plan Set
35 as follows:
36 1. One sheet to show all features (but not contour information) with text neatly organized for each item
37 identified.
38 2. One sheet showing contours, contour labels, and features from item 1 above, but with no additional text.
39
40 3.3. MASTER AS-BUILT DOCUMENT SET
41 A. The GC shall be responsible for maintaining the Master As-Built Document Set in the job trailer at all times.
42 1. The Master As-Built Plan Set (Plan Set) shall begin with one complete bid set of drawings and any
43 additional sheets that were supplied by published addenda during the bidding process. The cover sheet
44 shall be titled as the “Master As-Built Plan Set” in large bold red letters approximately 2” in height and
45 shall not be used for any other purpose.
46 a. The Plan Set shall be kept dry, legible, and in good condition at all times.
47 b. The Plan Set shall be kept up to date with new revisions within two (2) working days of
48 supplemental drawings being issued. Revisions shall be posted as follows:
49 i. Insert new, revised sheets into the plan set. Void old sheets but do not remove them from
50 the plan set. Indicate date received and what document (RFI, CB, CO, etc) caused the
51 change.
52 ii. Insert new, revised individual details into the plan set. Void old details, tape new details
53 over the old details with a “tape hinge” to allow them to be viewed. Indicate date
54 received and what document (RFI, CB, CO, etc) caused the change.
55 iii. Add new details in appropriate white space on relevant sheets. If no space is available use
56 the back side of the previous sheet or insert a new sheet. Indicate date received and what
57 document (RFI, CB, CO, etc) caused the change.

CITY OF MADISON
1 c. The Plan Set shall be available at anytime for easy reference during progress meetings and for
2 emergency location information of new work already completed.
3 2. The Master As-Built Specification Set (Spec Set) shall begin with one complete bid set of specifications
4 and any additional specifications that were supplied by published addenda during the bidding process.
5 The Spec Set shall be provided in three “D” ring type binders of sufficient thickness to accommodate the
6 specification set. Multiple binders are allowed as necessary. Label the front cover and binding edge with
7 “Master As-Built Specifications” in bold red letters. Provide other information as necessary to distinguish
8 the contents of multi-volume sets.
9 a. The Spec Set shall be kept dry, legible, and in good condition at all times.
10 b. The Spec Set shall be kept up to date with new revisions within two (2) working days of
11 supplemental drawings being issued.
12 c. The Spec Set shall be available at anytime for easy reference during progress meetings.
13 3. Other Document Sets may be kept at the GCs option in three “D” ring type binders of sufficient thickness
14 to accommodate the documentation. Other documentation sets may include but not be limited to RFIs,
15 CBs, COs, etc.
16 C. The Land Surveyor Sub-Contractor shall be required to use digital surveying for all exterior site surveying, and
17 provide deliverable digital as-builts as specified in Specification 00 31 21 Survey Information. As soon as practical
18 the surveyor shall provide the GC with a preliminary copy of installed buried utilities for inclusion with the plan
19 set in the job trailer. The surveyor shall provide final digital as builts as per section 3.2 above.
20 D. All contractors shall be responsible for updating the Plan Set from their field sets at least once per work week.
21 Updates shall include but not be limited to the following procedures:
22 a. All updates shall be done only in red ink. Place a “cloud” around small areas of correction to call
23 attention to the change.
24 b. Whenever possible place general work notes, field sketches, supplemental details, photos, and
25 other such information on the reverse side of the preceding sheet. Installation notes including
26 dates shall be kept neatly organized in chronological order as necessary.
27 c. Accurately locate items on the plan set as follows:
28 i. For items that are located as dimensioned provide a check mark or circle indicating the
29 dimension was verified.
30 ii. For items that are within 5 feet of the location indicated on the plans leave as shown and:
31 • Provide correct dimensions to existing dimension strings or,
32 • Accurately locate with new dimension strings
33 iii. For items that are more than 5 feet from the location indicated on the plans
34 • Accurately draw the items in the new location as installed and,
35 • Accurately locate with new dimension strings and,
36 • Note that the existing location is void.
37 d. Include dimensioned locations for items that will be buried, concealed, or hidden in the ground,
38 under floors, in walls or above ceilings.
39 i. Dimensions shall be pulled from identifiable building features, not from centers of columns
40 or other buried features.
41 ii. When necessary pull more dimensions as needed from opposing directions to properly
42 locate single items.
43
44 3.4. AS-BUILT REVIEW AND ACCEPTANCE
45 A. The GC shall provide the Master As-Built Plan Set to the Project Architect (PA), the City Project Manager (CPM),
46 and other design team staff for content review prior to the Progress Payment Milestone indicated in
47 Specification 01 29 76 Progress Payment Procedures. The submitted plan set shall include the digital survey
48 information produced under Section 3.2 above.
49 1. If the plan set is not approved:
50 a. The PA and CPM shall only be required to generalize deficiencies by trade there shall be no
51 requirement or expectation to generate a “punch list” of required corrections.
52 b. The GC and Sub-contractors as necessary shall be responsible for inspecting the installation and
53 correcting the drawings as needed.
54 c. The GC shall re-submit the plan set for review.
55 2. If the plan set is approved the PA shall take possession of the plan set to be used in providing the owner
56 with digital CAD record drawings. Upon completion of transferring the information to CAD the PA shall
57 provide the Owner with CAD record drawings, record PDFs, and the Master As-Built Plan Set.
58

CITY OF MADISON
1 3.5. CHANGES AFTER ACCEPTANCE

2 A. No Contractor shall be responsible for making changes to the As-Built record documents after acceptance by the
3 PA and CPM except when necessitated by changes resulting from any Work made by the Contractor as part of
4 his/her guarantee.
5
6
7
8 END OF SECTION

CITY OF MADISON
1 SECTION 01 78 43
2 SPARE PARTS AND EXTRA MATERIALS
3
4 PART 1 – GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
5 1.1. SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
7 1.3. DEFINITIONS .................................................................................................................................................................. 1
11 PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2
12 3.1. PACKAGING ................................................................................................................................................................... 2
13 3.2. LABELING....................................................................................................................................................................... 2
14 3.3. INVENTORY ................................................................................................................................................................... 2
15 3.4. STORAGE ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3
16 3.5. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURE ................................................................................................................................................ 3
17
19
20 1.1. SUMMARY
21 A. This specification is intended to provide clear guidelines and identify the responsibilities of all contractors as they
22 pertain to City of Madison contract procedures regarding spare parts, special tools, special materials, and extra
23 materials.
24 B. Each contractor shall be responsible for knowing the specific requirements of their Division Specifications as they
25 may relate to the general information provided in this specification.
26 C. The General Contractor (GC) shall be responsible for ensuring all contractors provide spare parts and extra
27 materials as described in this specification.
28
30 A. 01 29 76 Progress Payment Procedures
31 B. 01 31 23 Project Management Web Site
32 C. 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures
33 D. Other Divisions and Specifications that may address more specifically how to proceed with spare parts, special
34 tools, special materials, and extra materials.
35
36 1.3. DEFINITIONS
37 A. Spare Parts: Any component of a product or assembly that comes pre-packaged or was specially ordered for the
38 explicit use of the product or assembly. This shall include but not be limited to fastening devices, mounting
39 brackets, replacement parts, wheels, pulleys, wiring, alternate assembly pieces, etc.
40 B. Special Tools: Any tool of any kind that was pre-packaged or specially ordered, and is required to be used for the
41 installation or maintenance of an installed product or assembly as part of this contract.
42 C. Special Materials: Any oil, lubricant, glue, touch-up paint, or other such material that comes pre-packaged or
43 was specially ordered and is required to be used for the installation or maintenance of an installed product or
44 assembly as part of this contract.
45 D. Extra Materials (Attic Stock): Any surplus materials in new and useable condition that was installed a part of this
46 contract. Attic Stock shall include but not be limited to the following: ceiling tiles, paint, stain, floor coverings,
47 ceramic tiles, light bulbs/lamps, filters, strainers, etc. Attic Stock shall include partially opened bulk items and
48 additional unopened quantities as directed by other specifications.
49
51 A. All contractors shall be responsible for consolidating spare parts, special tools, special materials, and attic stock
52 as it pertains to the specific Work within their Division or Trade.
53 B. All contractors shall use this specification as a general guideline regarding the requirements for turning spare
54 parts, special tools, special materials, and attic stock over to the owner. Contractors shall explicitly follow
55 specification requirements within their own Division of Trade.
56
58 A. The General Contractor (GC) shall be responsible for all of the following:

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 78 43 - 1 SPARE PARTS AND EXTRA MATERIALS
CITY OF MADISON
1 1. Coordinate the location for and the delivery of all spare parts, special tools, special materials, and attic
2 stock being provided by all contractors under this contract to one centralized location as designated by
3 the Owner.
4 2. Verify that all items being delivered are:
5 a. Clean, new, and in a usable condition.
6 b. Properly sealed, protected, and labeled
7 c. Properly documented
8
10
12
13 3.1. PACKAGING
14 A. Whenever possible all surplus items should remain in their original packaging such as parts envelopes.
15 B. Package small parts in re-sealable plastic bags (Ziploc) or envelopes with clasp fasteners. Do not use envelopes
16 that seal with glue or tape envelopes closed. Do not leave packaging unsealed.
17 C. Package like parts together for products or assemblies. I.E. keep all spare parts for flushometers together.
18 D. Many small packages may be grouped together into a larger container by trade.
19 E. Do not use unrelated boxes or containers for packaging spare items. I.E. do not use a light fixture box for spare
20 breakers, or flushometers parts.
21
22 3.2. LABELING
23 A. Whenever possible the original labeling indicating part numbers and other pertinent information shall remain on
24 the original packaging.
25 B. If original labeling is not available the contractor shall label all parts and packages using tape or labels and
26 permanent black markers. Tape or labels being used shall absorb the permanent marker without bleeding or
27 allowing ink to be smeared or rubbed off.
28 C. Labels shall include the name of the product or equipment the item belongs to, part number and/or name, and
29 any other information that would assist maintenance personnel in identifying the piece and related product.
30 D. Labels shall include plan or specification designations (WC-1, LAV-3, DF-2, CPT-1, etc) that identify the particular
31 product or finish material it represents.
32 E. Labels for parts stored in clear re-sealable plastic bags may be placed inside the bag. Label shall face out and be
33 able to be read from one side. Multiple bags shall be numbered individually for identification.
34 F. Label the outside of large containers with the trade name (Plumbing, Electrical, etc).
35
36 3.3. INVENTORY
37 A. All contractors shall provide the GC with complete inventories of all spare parts, special tools, special materials,
38 and attic stock that they are providing at the end of the contract. The inventories shall be organized as follows:
39 1. The cover sheet shall indicate the Contractors name, address, phone number, identify that the document
40 is the “Spare Parts and Extra Materials Inventory”, and identify the Division or Trade the inventory is for.
41 2. Provide an inventory in a tabular format of all items being provided under this and other specifications.
42 The minimum information to be provided for each item on the inventory shall be as follows:
43 a. Bag or container number, all items of one bag or container shall be grouped together on the
44 inventory
45 b. Item description
46 c. Item size (if applicable)
47 d. Total quantity provided
48 e. Identify if item is a spare part, tool, special material, or attic stock
49 B. The GC shall consolidate inventories from all sub-contractors into one tabular data sheet organized by Division or
50 Trade of Work.
51 1. Upon completing the consolidated list the GC shall upload the completed inventory to the Contract
52 Closeout-Attic Stock Library on the Project Management Web Site.
53 2. The GC shall notify the Project Architect and City Project Manager that the scans have been uploaded.
54 3. Consulting Staff and Owner Staff shall review the inventories prior to Final Review to verify that minimum
55 required quantities have been met. Deficiencies shall be noted and returned back to the GC for
56 corrective action.
57
58

CITY OF MADISON
1
2 3.4. STORAGE
3 A. Prior to the 80% Progress Payment milestone the GC shall coordinate with the City Project Manager and
4 Maintenance Personnel where spare parts, special tools, special materials, and attic stock shall be stored.
5 B. The GC shall instruct all contractors as to the location and proper storage procedures.
6 C. The GC shall be responsible for ensuring the storage area is kept neat and orderly as follows:
7 1. Like items are stored together by material, product, or trade as necessary.
8 2. Liquids are stored in sealable containers and the lids have been properly installed to prevent drying out,
9 spillage, etc.
10 3. All labels are clearly visible and provide the required information.
11 D. Large items shall be stored so as not to damage other items. Do not stack heavy items or items with distinct
12 shapes/outlines on softer items that may get crushed or imprinted.
13
14 3.5. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURE
15 A. Prior to the 90% Progress Payment milestone the GC shall review all attic stock already stored by the contractors
16 to ensure the following:
17 1. Materials are stored in the proper location(s).
18 2. All boxes, containers and items are properly labeled according to the submitted/approved inventory.
19 3. Quantities are correct according to the submitted/approved inventory.
20 B. The GC shall ensure that all deficiencies are corrected prior to conducting Demonstration and Training Sessions.
21 C. The GC shall review with Maintenance Staff all inventories and labeling during the scheduled Demonstration and
22 Training Sessions.
23 D. Any discrepancies associated with Attic Stock shall be resolved and verified prior to the CPM releasing the 90%
24 CT progress payment.
25
26
27 END OF SECTION

CITY OF MADISON
1 SECTION 01 79 00
2 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
3
4 PART 1 – GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
5 1.1. SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
9 PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2
11 3.2. COORDINATING AND SCHEDULING THE TRAINING....................................................................................................... 2
12 3.3. TRAINING OBJECTIVES................................................................................................................................................... 2
13 3.4. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PROGRAM PREPARATION ...................................................................................... 3
14 3.5. CONDUCTING A DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING SESSION ....................................................................................... 3
15 3.6. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURE ................................................................................................................................................ 4
16
18
19 1.1. SUMMARY
20 A. The purpose of this specification is to provide clear responsibilities and guidelines related to providing
21 Demonstration and Training (D&T) Sessions related to general facility use, equipment, systems, finishes, and
22 materials to City of Madison Staff (Owner, Owner Representatives, Maintenance, and Custodial Personnel) as
23 needed.
24 B. All D&T shall be coordinated through the General Contractor (GC), Project Architect (PA) and City Project
25 Manager (CPM), and will be based on or customized to the needs of City of Madison Staff being trained. New
26 equipment and systems may have complete D&T sessions as described in this specification while equipment or
27 systems staff is familiar with may have sessions more focused on maintenance only.
28
31 B. Section 01 78 13 Completion and Correction List
32 C. Section 01 78 19 Maintenance Contracts
33 D. Section 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data
34 E. Section 01 78 36 Warranties
35 F. Section 01 78 39 As-Built Drawings
36 G. Section 01 78 43 Spare Parts and Extra Materials
37 H. Other Divisions and Specifications that may address more specifically the requirements for D&T sessions related
38 to the installation of all items and equipment installed under the execution of the Work.
39
41 A. All contractors shall have the responsibility of preparing for and conducting D&T sessions as determined by this
42 and other Division or Trade related specifications, Owner Operation and Maintenance Manuals, and other such
43 documentation related to the Work.
44 B. The GC shall have responsibility for:
45 1. Ensuring that all contractors required to conduct a D&T session have successfully completed all of the
46 following:
47 a. Turned in all required documentation for review and documentation has been approved/accepted
48 prior to scheduling D&T sessions.
49 b. Other required documentation as needed is available and ready for use during the D&T session.
50 c. All systems have been started, tested, and running as per appropriate specification and/or
51 manufacturers recommendations prior to scheduling D&T sessions.
52 d. All contractors are sufficiently prepared for their D&T session
53 e. Documents the D&T session including date, time, contractor and company name, attendees and
54 other information regarding the session
55 2. Organizing the coordination and scheduling of all D&T sessions between all contractors and the
56 appropriate representatives of the Owner. These representatives may include any of the following
57 depending on the Work of the Contract:
58 a. Owner – end users

CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 79 00 - 1 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
CITY OF MADISON
1 b. Facility Maintenance personnel

2 i. Facility general operation procedures including custodial services
3 ii. Electrical
4 iii. Mechanical
5 iv. Plumbing
6 v. Site
7 c. Information Technology (IT) Department
8 d. Traffic Engineering – Radio Shop
9 e. Architects, Engineers and Facility Management staff as project completion overview
10
12
14
16 A. The GC shall develop a specific D&T plan to be scheduled and conducted as described below but no sooner than
17 the meeting discussed in 3.2.A.2 below.
18 C. The GC shall not schedule D&T sessions to preclude required personnel from attending multiple sessions.
19
20 3.2. COORDINATING AND SCHEDULING THE TRAINING
21 A. The GC, PA, and CPM, shall review all Training and Demonstration requirements during two (2) special meetings.
22 1. The first meeting shall be held at the 50% Contract Total Payment. During this meeting the following
23 shall be discussed:
24 a. Preliminary schedule of training dates to be completed prior to beginning construction closeout.
25 b. List of documentation and items that need to be completed and available before and during the
26 training session.
27 c. Who (Owner, Maintenance, etc) will be attending what training session(s).
28 2. The second meeting shall be held at the 80% Contract Total Payment. This meeting shall review due outs
29 that have not yet been completed for the 90% Contract Total Payment and the requirements necessary
30 for Construction Closeout. All Demonstration and Training sessions shall be completed prior to receiving
31 the 90% progress payment and beginning Construction Closeout Procedures (see Specification 01 77 00).
32 a. This does not include any requirement associated with off season equipment preparation and/or
33 demonstration and Training Sessions.
34 B. All of the Construction Work shall be operationally ready prior to conducting training as follows:
35 1. All contractors shall have their As-Built Drawing Records available for reviewing locations of system
36 components during training.
37 2. All final and approved Operations and Maintenance Data shall be completed no less than two (2) full
38 weeks prior to the scheduled training.
39 3. All systems shall have been started, functionally tested, balanced, and fully operational, and all piping
40 and equipment labeling complete at least two (2) days prior to the scheduled training.
41 a. Seasonal equipment shall not be trained out of season. Contractors having seasonal equipment
42 shall work with the GC and CPM for coordinating additional training sessions as appropriate for
43 seasonal equipment.
44 C. Correction list items that prevent a piece of equipment or system from being fully operational for training shall
45 be corrected prior to conducting the training.
46
47 3.3. TRAINING OBJECTIVES
48 A. For each piece of equipment or system installed train on the following objectives/topics as applicable:
49 1. System design, concept, and capabilities
50 2. Review of related contractor as-built drawings
51 3. Facility walkthrough to identify key components of the system
52 4. System operation and programming including weekly, monthly, annual test procedures
53 5. System maintenance requirements
54 6. System troubleshooting procedures
55 7. Testing, inspection, and reporting requirements associated with any regulatory requirements
56 8. Identification of any correction list items still outstanding
57 9. Review of system documentation including the following:
58 a. Operation and maintenance data

CITY OF MADISON
1 b. Warranties
2 c. Valve charts, tags, and pipe identification markers
3 B. For each piece of specialty equipment train on the following objectives/topics as applicable:
4 1. Manufacturers operations instructions
5 2. Manufacturers use and care instructions
6 3. Manufacturers maintenance and troubleshooting instructions
7 4. System operation and programming including weekly, monthly, annual test procedures
8 5. Identification of any correction list items still outstanding
9 6. Review of system documentation including the following:
10 a. Operation and maintenance data
11 b. Warranties
12 C. End User Orientation
13 1. Facility walkthrough
14 2. Security and emergency features
15 3. General facility operation procedures
16 D. Facility General Use and Custodial Services – if requested
17 1. Facility walkthrough
18 2. Security and emergency features
19 3. General facility operation procedures
20 4. Care and maintenance of specialty items, finishes, etc as requested
21 5. Attic stock inventory and material designations
22
23 3.4. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PROGRAM PREPARATION
24 A. Each contractor having a responsibility for providing D&T sessions shall meet with the GC, CPM, and other City
25 Staff as needed to review the extent of the Training Objectives in section 3.3 above needed for each piece of
26 equipment, system, finish, etc. This meeting shall occur no less than four (4) weeks prior to the anticipated
27 training session.
28 B. The contractor shall use the information from item 3.4.A above to prepare a formal training program for each
29 piece of equipment or system based on the Training Objectives in 3.3 above.
30 1. The formal training program shall include the following information:
31 a. Session title
32 b. List of systems, equipment, use, care, etc to be covered during the session
33 c. Provide the following for each systems, equipment, use, care, etc to be covered during the session
34 i. Name and affiliation of each instructor to be used. As needed and discretion of the Owner
35 the GC to require attendance by the installing technician, installing Contractor and the
36 appropriate trade or manufacturer’s representative.
37 ii. Qualifications of each instructor to be used. Practical building operation expertise as well
38 as in-depth knowledge of all modes of operation of the specific piece of equipment as
39 installed in this project is required by the training personnel. If Owner determines training
40 was not adequate, the training shall be repeated until acceptable to Owner.
41 iii. A checklist of all documentation and system/equipment requirements necessary to
42 complete a successful training session and the current status of each
43 iv. Any additional documents, training aids, video or other items to be used to complete the
44 training
45 v. Any special requirements or needs associated with item iv above to complete the training
46 d. The intended audience for the training
47 e. The approximate duration of each objective or topic to be covered
48 2. Submit the completed training program to the GC for review and approval by the PA and CPM.
49 C. The PA and CPM shall work with staff as necessary to ensure all points of anticipated training needs have been
50 met. The PA and CPM will approve the program as submitted or recommend changes for re-submittal as
51 necessary.
52
53 3.5. CONDUCTING A DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING SESSION
54 A. All contractors shall conduct their required D&T Sessions as follows:
55 1. Begin with a classroom session
56 a. Provide a sign in sheet indicating all training to be conducted, instructors, etc.
57 b. Provide an overview of the training to be conducted including the approximate schedule.
58 2. Conduct a general walk-through of the site.

CITY OF MADISON
1 a. Point out locations of various equipment, valves, charts, and other related items.
2 b. Use the Division or Trade As-Built record drawings to indicate locations of hidden or buried items.
3 3. Provide a demonstration of general equipment/system operation including using the O&M manual.
4 a. Startup and shutdown procedures.
5 b. Normal operational levels as depicted by any gauges, software, etc.
6 c. Indicate warning devices, signs etc. and demonstrate emergency shut-down procedures.
7 4. Provide a demonstration of all owner level maintenance using the O&M manual.
8 a. Indicate frequency of maintenance.
9 b. Provide and review all spare parts, special tools, and special materials.
10 5. Provide and review all spare parts, special tools, special materials, or attic stock as applicable.
11 6. While conducting D&T sessions:
12 a. Allow hands on training whenever practical.
13 b. Answer questions promptly
14 c. Repeat demonstrations and procedures as necessary.
15 B. Within two (2) working days of completing the D&T session the contractor responsible for the session shall turn-
16 in any documentation generated including the sign in roster to the GC.
17 C. The GC shall turn over all training documentation to the PA and CPM upon completion of D&T sessions.
18 D. Re-schedule any training that has been determined to be inadequate or inappropriate for any reason including
19 but not limited to any of the following;
20 1. Unqualified instructor
21 2. System installation incomplete or untested to the specifications
22 3. Equipment failure during demonstration
23 4. Un-expected cancellation
24
25 3.6. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURE
26 A. Prior to receiving the 90% Progress payment the GC shall:
27 1. Verify with the PA and CPM that each Demonstration and Training Session was conducted properly and
28 according to the submitted plan.
29 2. Any required “Off Season” equipment testing, balancing, and Demonstration and Training Sessions have
30 been tentatively scheduled with the GC, necessary sub-contractors, instructors and Owner/Owner
31 Representatives as necessary.
32
33
34 END OF SECTION

LEED-NC v3.0 Project Checklist
Madison Municipal Building (MMB) Friday, March 24, 2017
Madison, WI BID ISSUE
RESPONSIBILITY FOR UPLOAD TO USGBC
Yes ? No City MSR MEP Gallina KSD Other
21 2 3 Sustainable Sites 26 Points Notes
Y Prereq 1 Construction Activity Pollution Prevention Required GC Provide ESC Plan in drawings and specification. GC to implement.
1 Credit 1 Site Selection 1 Site selected prior to design process commencing.
5 Credit 2 Development Density & Community Connectivity 5 X Min. density of 60k SF per acre - MSR to measure surrounding density.
1 Credit 3 Brownfield Redevelopment 1 X X Site has asbestos requiring remediation. City to remediate per accepted standards.
6 Credit 4.1 Alternative Transportation, Public Transportation Access 6 X Site within 1/4 mile of at least two bus lines.
Provide secure bike racks for 5% occup. and shower-change for 0.5% occup. Peak FTE occup. =
1 Credit 4.2 Alternative Transportation, Bicycle Storage & Changing Rooms 1 X X 204#. New exterior bike racks = 28#. New staff bike racks = 30#. Total bike racks = 58 (Zoning
Code requires 1 per 2,000 gsf, so 74,340/2,000 = 37.17 bikes).
3 Credit 4.3 Alternative Transportation, Low-Emitting and Fuel-Efficient Vehicles 3 X Provide and implement a low-emitting and fuel-efficient vehicle-sharing program off-site.
2 Credit 4.4 Alternative Transportation, Parking Capacity 2 X Option 3: No new parking provided on site.
1 Credit 5.1 Site Development, Protect or Restore Habitat 1 Existing softscape (grass) is less than 20% of total (reduced) lot area.
1 Credit 5.2 Site Development, Maximize Open Space 1 Not possible on reduced lot size.
1 Credit 6.1 Stormwater Design, Quantity Control 1 X KSD to Confirm achievable with maximum amount sedum roof area possible on MMB at Bid.
The water being intercepted by the green roof will be relatively void of any TSS, this won't be
1 Credit 6.2 Stormwater Design, Quality Control 1
applicable oin this project.
1 Credit 7.1 Heat Island Effect, Non-Roof 1 X KSD to confirm potential based on full MMB site assessment.
1 Credit 7.2 Heat Island Effect, Roof 1 More than 50% of roof area will be covered with either sedum, PV arrays, or stone mulch.
Option 1: Reduce by 50% the input power to interior non-emergency luminaires with direct line-of-
sight to envelope openings. Option 2: Shield envelope openings that have direct line of sight to
1 Credit 8 Light Pollution Reduction 1 X X non-emergency luminaires. This is achievable provided the non-emergency interior lights are
switched OFF between 11PM and 5 AM. City confirmed acceptance of this.
7 3 Water Efficiency 10 Points Notes

Y Prereq 1 Water Use Reduction, 20% Reduction Required X Use 20% less than baseline for interior water use only. Use low flow lavs and WCs, etc.
4 Credit 1 Water Efficient Landscaping 2 to 4 X X No irrigation is included in project.
1 1 Credit 2 Innovative Wastewater Technologies 2 X Use of low-flush fixtures confirmed by City.

Fixtures with 30% reduction from baseline confirmed by MEP (40% reduction will achieve 4
2 2 Credit 3 Water Use Reduction 2 to 4 X points).
20 2 13 Energy & Atmosphere 35 Points Notes

Y Prereq 1 Fundamental Commissioning of the Building Energy Systems Required X
Y Prereq 2 Minimum Energy Performance Required X X 5% better than ASHRAE 90.1-2007 required for Extg Buildings
Y Prereq 3 Fundamental Refrigerant Management Required X X
Per SEG Energy Model Results calculated at end of DD, dated 06-21-2016. Taking into account
PV array utility cost savings, this improves performance from 17% better than baseline to 24%
9 1 9 Credit 1 Optimize Energy Performance 1 to 19 X X SEG better than baseline design based on total utility cost of the design building of $95,800 - $8,520 =
$87,280. (baseline design energy costs = $116,000.)
Based on overall electrical energy use on 477,500 kWh, and PV Array electrical energy
4 1 2 Credit 2 On-Site Renewable Energy 1 to 7 X X generation of 61,200 kWh (8% of annual energy utility cost based on $0.15/kWh = $9,180 savings
per year from total energy cost per EA1 above).
2 Credit 3 Enhanced Commissioning 2 X SEG SEG confirmed Nov 2015.

2 Credit 4 Enhanced Refrigerant Management 2 X MEP confirmed: ODP, BWP, ratio of coolant charge to coolant capacity, leakage rate.
3 Credit 5 Measurement & Verification 3 SEG SEG confirmed Nov 2015.
2 Credit 6 Green Power 2 City will not pursue "green power.
9 2 3 Materials & Resources 14 Points Notes

Y Prereq 1 Storage & Collection of Recyclables Required GC
3 Credit 1.1 Building Reuse, Maintain Existing Walls, Floors & Roof 1 to 3 X X 95% of existing structure and envelope maintained.
Unlikely achievable - most non-loadbearing partitions and extg, non-historic finishes will be
1 Credit 1.2 Building Reuse, Maintain 50% of Interior Non-Structural Elements 1 X removed.
2 Credit 2 Construction Waste Management 1 to 2 GC City/MSR to include requirements in Project Manual and monitor during CA.
2 Credit 3 Materials Reuse 1 to 2 X Not possible: salvaged material quantity will not meet the LEED cost threshold.
1 1 Credit 4 Recycled Content 1 to 2 GC MSR to include in Project Manual, and confirm via submittal approval process
1 1 Credit 5 Regional Materials 1 to 2 GC MSR to include in Project Manual, and confirm via submittal approval process
1 Credit 6 Rapidly Renewable Materials 1 GC MSR to include in Project Manual, and confirm via submittal approval process
1 Credit 7 Certified Wood 1 GC MSR to include in Project Manual, and confirm via submittal approval process
MMB_LEED-NCv3 Checklist_Bid-Issue_2017-03-24
CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 018113.13 Page 1 of 2
LEED-NC v3.0 Project Checklist
Madison Municipal Building (MMB) Friday, March 24, 2017
Madison, WI BID ISSUE
RESPONSIBILITY FOR UPLOAD TO USGBC
Yes ? No City MSR MEP Gallina KSD Other
10 1 4 Indoor Environmental Quality 15 Points Notes
Y Prereq 1 Minimum IAQ Performance Required X
Y Prereq 2 Environmental Tobacco Smoke (ETS) Control Required X City to confirm: no smoking inside and within 25ft of building openings.
1 Credit 1 Outdoor Air Delivery Monitoring 1 X
1 Credit 2 Increased Ventilation 1 Not preferred by the City due to HVAC system impacts.
1 Credit 3.1 Construction IAQ Management Plan, During Construction 1 GC Included in Project Manual
1 Credit 3.2 Construction IAQ Management Plan, Before Occupancy 1 GC Both options included in Project Manual
1 Credit 4.1 Low-Emitting Materials, Adhesives & Sealants 1 GC Included in Project Manual, and confirm via submittal approval process
1 Credit 4.2 Low-Emitting Materials, Paints & Coatings 1 GC Included in Project Manual, and confirm via submittal approval process
1 Credit 4.3 Low-Emitting Materials, Flooring Systems 1 GC Included in Project Manual, and confirm via submittal approval process
1 Credit 4.4 Low-Emitting Materials, Composite Wood & Agrifiber Products 1 GC Included in Project Manual, and confirm via submittal approval process
Provide MERV 13 filtration, entry walkoff systems 10ft deep min., self-closing doors on janitor
1 Credit 5 Indoor Chemical & Pollutant Source Control 1 closets. May lose this poit due to shrinking of MLK Blvd vestibule during DD.
1 Credit 6.1 Controllability of Systems, Lighting 1 GC Provide individual lighting control for 90% of occupants and in all shared spaces.
1 Credit 6.2 Controllability of Systems, Thermal Comfort 1 Provide individual access to control air and temp for 50% of occupants, and all shared rooms
1 Credit 7.1 Thermal Comfort, Design 1 X Design HVAC system to meet ASHRAE-55-2004 requirements.
1 Credit 7.2 Thermal Comfort, Verification 1 X City confirmed willingness to survey occupants 6-18 months post-occupancy.
Perform early daylight simulation modeling. Occupied spaces to achieve daylight illuminance
levels of a minimum of 10 footcandles (fc) (110 lux) and a maximum of 500 fc (5,400 lux) in a
1 Credit 8.1 Daylight & Views, Daylight 75% of Spaces 1 X clear sky condition on September 21 at 9 a.m. and 3 p.m. Provide glare control devices. Daylight
simulation currently being modeled by MSR.
1 Credit 8.2 Daylight & Views, Views for 90% of Spaces 1 Not achievable given Level 0 and existing building conditions.
1 1 4 Innovation & Design Process 6 Points Notes

MSR to apply to FF&E design process.
Standard to achieve this point is either Greenguard IAQ Certified (Option 1), or testing protocols
1 Credit 1.1 Innovation in Design: Pursue low-emitting furnishings per LEED-CI 1 X X based on ANSI/BIFMA standards by 3rd party lab (Option 2). Option 1 recommended. The City
furniture standards (HM) comply with Option 1 except for HM Meridian Storage products - use HM
"Tu" product range instead. City to review/approve.
Requires 70% improvement over regional baseline building of this type based on Energy Star
1 Credit 1.2 Innovation in Design: Pursue Architecture 2030 energy performance 1 X X X SEG (107kbtu/sf/yr), which may not be possible. 32.1 kbtu/sf/yr is target to achieve this.
1 Credit 1.3 Innovation in Design: On-site energy generation 1
1 Credit 1.4 Innovation in Design: Provide Specific Title 1

1 Credit 1.5 Innovation in Design: Provide Specific Title 1
1 Credit 2 LEED® Accredited Professional 1 Chris Wingate, Stephen Bellairs
4 Regional Priority 4 Points Notes

1 Credit 1.1 Regional Priority: Development density and community connectivity 1 X
City is committed to exterior, bike parking, preferably covered, and to providing changing rooms.
There is also share bike parking on site (Trek B-Cycle). The city also has its own staff bike share
1 Credit 1.2 Regional Priority: Bicycle storage and change rooms 1 X X X program which is available. Bicycles to be within 200 yards of entry point. City zoning requirement
for bicycle quantity exceeds LEED required number, and the higher number is provided.
1 Credit 1.3 Regional Priority: Water use reduction 1 X X Based on achieving WE3.
Based on achieving SS4.4.
1 Credit 1.4 Regional Priority: Parking capacity 1 X
72 8 30 Project Totals (pre-certification estimates) 110 Points

Yes ? No Certified 40-49 points Silver 50-59 points Gold 60-79 points Platinum 80-110 points
MMB_LEED-NCv3 Checklist_Bid-Issue_2017-03-24
CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 018113.13 Page 2 of 2
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
SECTION 01 81 13.13
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
2.2 RECYCLED CONTENT OF MATERIALS
2.3 REGIONAL MATERIALS
2.4 LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS
3.1 NONSMOKING BUILDING
3.2 CONSTRUCTION INDOOR-AIR-QUALITY MANAGEMENT
3.3 INDOOR-AIR-QUALITY ASSESSMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general requirements and procedures for compliance with certain USGBC LEED
prerequisites and credits needed for Project to obtain LEED- Silver certification based on USGBC's "LEED
2009 for New Construction & Major Renovations."
1. Other LEED prerequisites and credits needed to obtain LEED certification depend on product
selections and may not be specifically identified as LEED requirements. Compliance with
requirements needed to obtain LEED prerequisites and credits may be used as one criterion to
evaluate substitution requests and comparable product requests.
2. A copy of LEED Project checklist is attached at the end of this Section for information only.
a. Some LEED prerequisites and credits needed to obtain the indicated LEED certification
depend on Architect's design and other aspects of Project that are not part of the Work of
the Contract.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. LEED: USGBC's "LEED 2009 for New Construction & Major Renovations."
1. Definitions that are a part of "LEED 2009 for New Construction & Major Renovations" apply to this
Section.

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Respond to questions and requests from Architect and USGBC about LEED prerequisites and credits that
are the responsibility of the Contractor, that depend on product selection or product qualities, or that
depend on Contractor's procedures until USGBC has made its determination on Project's LEED
certification application. Document responses as informational submittals.
B. Submit documentation to USGBC in a “ready for review” condition / format, and respond to questions and
requests from USGBC about LEED prerequisites and credits that are the responsibility of the Contractor,
that depend on product selection or product qualities, or that depend on Contractor's procedures until
USGBC has made its determination on Project's LEED certification application.
1. Document correspondence with USGBC as informational submittals.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 01811313 - 1 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

A. Sustainable Design Documentation Submittals:
1. Credit EA 5: Product Data and wiring diagrams for sensors and data collection system used to
provide continuous metering of building energy-consumption performance over time.
2. Credit MR 4: Product Data for recycled content indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled
content and cost.
3. Credit MR 5: Product Data for regional materials indicating location of material manufacturer and
point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost
for each regional material.
4. Credit IEQ 3.1:
a. Construction indoor-air-quality management plan.
b. Product Data for temporary filtration media.
c. Product Data for filtration media used during occupancy.
d. Construction Documentation: Six photographs at each of three different times during the
construction period, along with a brief description of the SMACNA approach employed,
documenting implementation of the indoor-air-quality management measures, such as
protection of ducts and on-site stored or installed absorptive materials.
5. Credit IEQ 3.2:
a. Signed statement describing the building air flush-out procedures including the dates when
flush-out was begun and completed and statement that filtration media was replaced after
flush-out.
b. Product Data for filtration media used during flush-out and during occupancy.
c. Report from testing and inspecting agency indicating results of indoor-air-quality testing and
documentation showing compliance with indoor-air-quality testing procedures and
requirements.
6. Credit IEQ 4.1: Product Data for adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofing system
indicating VOC content of each product used.
7. Credit IEQ 4.2: Product Data for paints and coatings used inside the weatherproofing system
indicating VOC content of each product used.
8. Credit IEQ 4.4: Product Data for products containing composite wood or agrifiber products or wood
glues indicating that they do not contain urea-formaldehyde resin.

A. Project Materials Cost Data: Provide statement indicating total cost for materials used for Project. Costs
exclude labor, overhead, and profit. Include breakout of costs for the following categories of items:
1. Furniture.
2. Plumbing.
3. Mechanical.
4. Electrical.
5. Specialty items such as elevators and equipment.
6. Wood-based construction materials.
B. Sustainable Design Action Plans: Provide preliminary submittals within 14 days of date established for the
Notice to Proceed indicating how the following requirements will be met:
1. Credit MR 4: List of proposed materials with recycled content. Indicate cost, postconsumer recycled
content, and preconsumer recycled content for each product having recycled content.
2. Credit MR 5: List of proposed regional materials. Identify each regional material, including its
source, cost, and the fraction by weight that is considered regional.
3. Credit IEQ 3.1: Construction indoor-air-quality management plan.
C. Sustainable Design Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit reports
comparing actual construction and purchasing activities with sustainable design action plans.

A. LEED Coordinator: Engage an experienced LEED-Accredited Professional to coordinate LEED
requirements. LEED coordinator may also serve as waste management coordinator.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Provide products and procedures necessary to obtain LEED credits required in this Section. Although
other Sections may specify some requirements that contribute to these LEED credits, Contractor shall
provide additional materials and procedures necessary to obtain LEED credits indicated.
2.2 RECYCLED CONTENT OF MATERIALS

A. Credit MR 4: Building materials shall have recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus
one-half of preconsumer recycled content for Project constitutes a minimum of 10 percent of cost of
materials used for Project.
1. Cost of postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content of an item
shall be determined by dividing weight of postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content in the item by total weight of the item and multiplying by cost of the
item.
2. Do not include furniture, plumbing, mechanical and electrical components, and specialty items
such as elevators and equipment in the calculation.
2.3 REGIONAL MATERIALS

A. Credit MR 5: Not less than 10 percent of building materials (by cost) shall be regional materials.
2.4 LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS

A. Credit IEQ 4.1: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, adhesives and sealants
shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the following VOC content limits:
1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L.
2. Metal-to-Metal Adhesives: 30 g/L.
3. Adhesives for Porous Materials (except Wood): 50 g/L.
4. Subfloor Adhesives: 50 g/L.
5. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L.
6. Carpet Adhesives: 50 g/L.
7. Carpet Pad Adhesives: 50 g/L.
8. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L.
9. Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L.
10. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.
11. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L.
12. Ceramic Tile Adhesives: 65 g/L.
13. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.
14. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L.
15. Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L.
16. Structural Glazing Adhesives: 100 g/L.
17. Wood Flooring Adhesive: 100 g/L.
18. Structural Wood Member Adhesive: 140 g/L.
19. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Adhesive: 250 g/L.
20. Special-Purpose Contact Adhesive (Contact Adhesive That Is Used to Bond Melamine-Covered
Board, Metal, Unsupported Vinyl, Rubber, or Wood Veneer 1/16 Inch or Less in Thickness to Any
Surface): 250 g/L.
21. Top and Trim Adhesive: 250 g/L.
22. Plastic Cement Welding Compounds: 250 g/L.
23. ABS Welding Compounds: 325 g/L.
24. CPVC Welding Compounds: 490 g/L.
25. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L.
26. Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 550 g/L.
27. Sheet-Applied Rubber Lining Adhesive: 850 g/L.
28. Aerosol Adhesive, General-Purpose Mist Spray: 65 percent by weight.
29. Aerosol Adhesive, General-Purpose Web Spray: 55 percent by weight.
30. Special-Purpose Aerosol Adhesive (All Types): 70 percent by weight.
31. Other Adhesives: 250 g/L.
32. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
33. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
34. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L.

35. Other Sealants: 420 g/L.
36. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
37. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
38. Modified Bituminous Sealant Primers: 500 g/L.
39. Other Sealant Primers: 750 g/L.
B. Credit IEQ 4.2: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, paints and coatings shall
comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the following VOC content limits:
1. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 50 g/L.
2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 150 g/L.
3. Dry-Fog Coatings: VOC not more than 400 g/L.
4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC not more than 200 g/L.
5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 g/L.
6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: VOC not more than 340 g/L.
7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: VOC not more than 420 g/L.
8. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L.
9. Clear Wood Finishes, Lacquers: VOC not more than 550 g/L.
10. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L.
11. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L.
12. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L.
13. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L.
C. Credit IEQ 4.4: Composite wood, agrifiber products, and adhesives shall not contain urea-formaldehyde
resin.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 NONSMOKING BUILDING

A. Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-
air intakes.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION INDOOR-AIR-QUALITY MANAGEMENT

A. Credit IEQ 3.1: Comply with SMACNA's "SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings under
Construction."
1. If Owner authorizes use of permanent heating, cooling, and ventilating systems during construction
period as specified in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls," install filter media
having a MERV 8 according to ASHRAE 52.2 at each return-air inlet for the air-handling system
used during construction.
2. Replace air filters immediately prior to occupancy.
3.3 INDOOR-AIR-QUALITY ASSESSMENT: General Contractor can choose to carry out either 3.3A
(Flush-Out) or 3.3B (Air-Quality Testing)
A. Flush-Out:
1. After construction ends, prior to occupancy and with all interior finishes installed, perform a building
flush-out by supplying a total volume of 14,000 cu. ft. (4 300 000 L) of outdoor air per sq. ft. (sq. m)
of floor area while maintaining an internal temperature of at least 60 deg F (16 deg C) and a
relative humidity no higher than 60 percent. Per the Mechanical Engineer, time required for this
flush out is 18 days at 24 hours a day.
2. If occupancy is desired prior to flush-out completion, the space may be occupied following delivery
of a minimum of 3500 cu. ft. of outdoor air per sq. ft. of floor area to the space. Once a space is
occupied, it shall be ventilated at a minimum rate of 0.30 cfm per sq. ft. of outside air or the design
minimum outside air rate determined in Prerequisite IEQ 1, whichever is greater. During each day
of the flush-out period, ventilation shall begin a minimum of three hours prior to occupancy and
continue during occupancy. These conditions shall be maintained until a total of 14,000 cu. ft./sq. ft.
of outside air has been delivered to the space. Per the Mechanical Engineer, time required for this
flush out is dependent on the size of the space to be occupied (assuming the entire building is not
occupied).
a. For IAQ requirements refer to Mechanical Specification 230593.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
B. Air-Quality Testing: General Contractor will engage and pay for testing agency to perform the following:
1. Conduct baseline indoor-air-quality testing, after construction ends and prior to occupancy, using
testing protocols consistent with the EPA's "Compendium of Methods for the Determination of Air
Pollutants in Indoor Air," and as additionally detailed in USGBC's "Green Building Design and
Construction Reference Guide."
2. Demonstrate that the contaminant maximum concentrations listed below are not exceeded:
a. Formaldehyde: 27 ppb.
b. Particulates (PM10): 50 mcg/cu. m.
c. Total Volatile Organic Compounds (TVOC): 500 mcg/cu. m.
d. 4-Phenylcyclohexene (4-PH): 6.5 mcg/cu. m.
e. Carbon Monoxide: 9 ppm and no greater than 2 ppm above outdoor levels.
3. For each sampling point where the maximum concentration limits are exceeded, conduct additional
flush-out with outside air and retest the specific parameter(s) exceeded to indicate the
requirements are achieved. Repeat procedure until all requirements have been met. When
retesting noncomplying building areas, take samples from same locations as in the first test.
4. Air-sample testing shall be conducted as follows:
a. All measurements shall be conducted prior to occupancy but during normal occupied hours,
and with building ventilation system starting at the normal daily start time and operated at
the minimum outside airflow rate for the occupied mode throughout the duration of the air
testing.
b. Building shall have all interior finishes installed including, but not limited to, millwork, doors,
paint, carpet, and acoustic tiles. Nonfixed furnishings such as workstations and partitions
are encouraged, but not required, to be in place for the testing.
c. Number of sampling locations varies depending on the size of building and number of
ventilation systems. For each portion of building served by a separate ventilation system,
the number of sampling points shall not be less than one per 25,000 sq. ft. or for each
contiguous floor area, whichever is larger, and shall include areas with the least ventilation
and greatest presumed source strength.
d. Air samples shall be collected between 3 and 6 feet from the floor to represent the breathing
zone of occupants, and over a minimum four-hour period.
END OF SECTION

SUSTAINABLE ENGINEERING GROUP LLC
REVISED October 7, 2016
1 SECTION 01 91 00
2 COMMISSIONING
3 PART 1 - GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................... 1
4 1.1 SUMMARY ......................................................................................................................................................................... 1
5 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS ........................................................................................................................................................... 1
6 1.3 REFERENCES ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1
7 1.4 DEFINITIONS...................................................................................................................................................................... 1
8 1.5 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................................................................................... 2
9 1.6 RESPONSIBILITIES .............................................................................................................................................................. 3
10 1.7 SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED ...................................................................................................................................... 4
11 PART 2 - PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................................................................. 4
12 2.1 TEST INFORMATION .......................................................................................................................................................... 4
13 PART 3 - EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................ 4
14 3.1 COMMISSIONING TEAM .................................................................................................................................................... 4
15 3.2 SCHEDULING AND MEETINGS............................................................................................................................................ 4
16 3.3 REPORTING ....................................................................................................................................................................... 4
17 3.4 RECORD DRAWINGS .......................................................................................................................................................... 5
18 3.5 CONSTRUCTION COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES ............................................................................................................. 5
19 3.6 SENSOR AND ACTUATOR CALIBRATION ............................................................................................................................ 6
20 3.7 NON-CONFORMANCE ....................................................................................................................................................... 7
21
22 PART 1 - GENERAL
23
24 1.1 SUMMARY
25 A. Purpose: Define the responsibilities of the parties involved and the procedures related to the commissioning
26 process.
27
28 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
29 A. 01 31 13 Project Management and Coordination
30 B. 01 31 19 Project Meetings
31 C. 01 31 23 Project Management
32 D. 01 32 26 Construction Progress Reporting
33 E. 01 33 23 Submittals
34 F. 01 45 16 Field Quality Control
35 G. 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures
36 H. 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data
37 I. 01 78 39 As-Built Drawings
38 J. 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training
39 K. 01 81 13.13 Sustainable Design Requirements
40 L. 01 95 00 Measurement & Verification
41 M. 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC
42 N. 23 09 00 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC
43 O. 23 09 23 Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC
44 P. 23 09 93.11 Sequence of Operations for HVAC DDC
45
46 1.3 REFERENCES
47 A. ASHRAE Guideline 1.1-2007, “HVAC&R Technical Requirements for The Commissioning Process”.
48 B. ASHRAE Guideline 0-2005, “The Commissioning Process”.
49 C. NEBB – Procedural Standards for Building Systems Commissioning.
50
51 1.4 DEFINITIONS
52 A. Acceptance Phase - phase of construction after startup and initial checkout when functional performance tests
53 are performed.
54 B. Commissioning Authority (CxA) - an independent entity, not otherwise associated with the A/E team members or
55 the Contractor and reporting directly to the Owner. The CxA directs and coordinates the commissioning
56 activities.
57 C. Commissioning Plan (Cx Plan) - an overall plan, developed before or after bidding, that provides the structure,
58 schedule and coordination planning for the commissioning process. The Cx Plan is included in the bid documents
59 and is to be reviewed by all contractors before submitting their bid.
CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 91 00 - 1 COMMISSIONING
1 D. Contract Documents - the documents binding on parties involved in the construction of this project (drawings,
2 specifications, change orders, amendments, contracts, Cx Plan, etc.).
3 E. Construction Checklist (CC) - a list of items to inspect and test equipment and components to verify proper
4 installation of equipment. The CCs are provided by the CxA to the Sub.
5 F. Datalogging - monitoring flows, currents, status, pressures, etc. of equipment using stand-alone dataloggers
6 separate from the control system.
7 G. Deferred System Performance Tests – SPT’s that are performed later, after substantial completion, due to partial
8 occupancy, equipment, seasonal requirements, design or other site conditions that prevent the tests from being
9 performed earlier.
10 H. Deficiency - a condition in the installation or function of a component, piece of equipment or system that is not
11 in compliance with the Contract Documents (that is, does not perform properly or is not complying with the
12 Owner’s Project Requirements).
13 I. Factory Testing - testing of equipment on-site or at the factory by factory personnel with an Owner’s
14 representative present.
15 J. Indirect Indicators - indicators of a response or condition, such as a reading from a control system screen
16 reporting a damper to be 100% closed.
17 K. Manual Test - using hand-held instruments, immediate control system readouts or direct observation to verify
18 performance (contrasted to analyzing monitored data taken over time to make the “observation”).
19 L. Monitoring - the recording of parameters (flow, current, status, pressure, etc.) of equipment operation using
20 dataloggers or the trending capabilities of control systems.
21 M. Over-written Value - writing over a sensor value in the control system to see the response of a system (e.g.,
22 changing the outside air temperature value from 75F to 50F to verify economizer operation). See also
23 “Simulated Signal.”
24 N. Owner’s Project Requirements (OPR) – A document that describes what the Owner and stakeholders want to
25 achieve with this project and what expectations they have of the completed project.
26 O. Sampling. - reviewing or testing only a fraction of the total number of identical or near identical pieces of
27 equipment.
28 P. Seasonal Performance Tests – SPT’s that are deferred until the system(s) will experience conditions closer to
29 their design conditions.
30 Q. Simulated Condition - condition that is created for the purpose of testing the response of a system (e.g., applying
31 a hair blower to a space sensor to see the response in a VAV box).
32 R. Simulated Signal - disconnecting a sensor and using a signal generator to send an amperage, resistance or
33 pressure to the transducer and DDC system to simulate a sensor value.
34 S. System Performance Test (SPT) - Dynamic testing of entire systems (rather than just components of the system)
35 under full operation.
36 T. Trending - monitoring using the building automation system.
37
38 1.5 DESCRIPTION
39 A. General: Commissioning (Cx) is a systematic process of verifying that all building systems perform interactively
40 to meet the Owner’s Project Requirements (OPR). This is achieved by beginning in the planning phase with
41 documenting the OPR and continuing through design, construction, acceptance, and the warranty period with
42 verification of performance. The Cx process shall encompass and coordinate the traditionally separate functions
43 of system documentation, equipment startup, control system calibration, testing and balancing, performance
44 testing and training. Cx during the construction phase is intended to achieve the following specific objectives
45 according to the Contract Documents:
46 1. Verify that applicable equipment and systems are installed according to the manufacturer’s
47 recommendations and to industry accepted minimum standards and that they receive adequate
48 operational checkout by installing contractors.
49 2. Verify and document proper performance of equipment and systems.
50 3. Verify that O&M documentation is complete.
51 4. Verify that the Owner’s operating personnel are adequately trained.
52 B. The Cx process does not take away from or reduce the responsibility of the system designers or installing
53 contractors to provide a finished and fully functioning product.
54 C. The commissioning authority (CxA) has no authority to change, modify or direct any work. The CxA can only
55 provide comments and suggestions.
56 D. Commissioning Plan. The Cx Plan provides guidance in the execution of the Cx process. The CxA will update the
57 Cx Plan regularly as the project progresses. The Drawings and Specifications will take precedence over the Cx
58 Plan.
59
1 1.6 RESPONSIBILITIES
2 A. General Contractor (GC) and Subcontractors (Subs)
3 1. Construction and Acceptance Phase
4 a. Provide assistance to the Construction Manager CM in the coordination of the Cx work by the CxA,
5 and with the CM and CxA ensure that Cx activities are being scheduled into the master schedule.
6 b. Provide an updated construction schedule to the CxA any time the schedule changes.
7 c. Include the Cx activities in the contract.
8 d. Furnish a copy of all submittals and shop drawings pertaining to the commissioned systems for
9 review concurrently with the Architect and Engineers.
10 e. Furnish a copy of all construction meeting agendas and minutes to the CxA.
11 f. In each purchase order or subcontract written, include requirements for submittal data, O&M
12 data, Cx tasks and training.
13 g. GC will ensure that all Subs execute their Cx responsibilities according to the Contract Documents
14 and schedule.
15 h. A representative from the GC and each sub associated with the Cx process shall attend the Cx pre-
16 construction meeting and the regular Cx meetings scheduled by the CxA to facilitate the Cx
17 process.
18 i. Coordinate and execute the training of Owner personnel.
19 j. Prepare O&M manuals, according to the Contract Documents, including clarifying and updating
20 the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions.
21 k. Prepare and submit draft forms, including but not limited to start-up procedures, Testing and
22 Balancing (TAB) forms, calibration forms, etc. for review by the CxA before execution.
23 l. Submit test reports to the CxA of all tests performed on components and equipment to be
24 commissioned that are not included as part of the Construction Checklist and SPT procedures.
25 m. Complete all construction checklist and functional performance test forms as required by the Cx
26 process.
27 n. Support the CxA with verification of the completion of construction checklist and functional
28 performance tests as outlined in Part3.
29 o. Complete and inspect all installations. Certify that all components and systems are operating as
30 intended per Contract Documents.
31 p. Remedy all deficiencies immediately as they are identified throughout construction.
32 q. Demonstrate functionality of all systems and equipment.
33 r. Maintain an updated set of record drawings (on a daily basis) on the construction site.
34 s. Provide support and instrumentation to verify TAB reports, start-up reports, calibration reports,
35 and any other report pertinent to the commissioned equipment and systems.
36 t. Notify the CxA no less than 21 days before all testing, start-up, and training.
37 u. Update the CxA on a weekly basis on the progress of the Cx activities.
38 v. Submit trend data in electronic format or allow access to trending data by internet connection as
39 requested by the CxA.
40 w. Install access points by every sensor such that the sensor can be calibrated without removal (P/T
41 plugs, plugged holes in ducts etc.).
42 2. Warranty Period
43 a. Execute seasonal or deferred functional performance testing, witnessed by the CxA, according to
44 the specifications.
45 b. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M manuals and record drawings for
46 applicable issues identified in any seasonal testing.
47 B. Equipment Suppliers
48 1. Provide all requested submittal data, including detailed start-up procedures and specific responsibilities
49 of the Owner to keep warranties in force.
50 2. Assist in equipment testing per agreements with Subs.
51 3. Include all special tools and instruments (only available from vendor, specific to a piece of equipment)
52 required for testing equipment according to these Contract Documents in the base bid price to the
53 Contractor, except for stand-alone data logging equipment that may be used by the CxA.
54 4. Provide information requested by CxA regarding equipment sequence of operation and testing
55 procedures.
56 5. Review test procedures for equipment installed by factory representatives.
57
58
59
1 1.7 SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED

2 A. The entire Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) system (boilers, chillers, pumps, piping and air
3 distribution systems)
4 B. Building Automation System (BAS) for the HVAC system
5 C. Domestic Hot Water
6 D. Building envelope and roofing system as it pertains to HVAC
7 E. Lighting and Lighting Controls
8 F. Solar electric (PV) System
9
11
12 2.1 TEST INFORMATION
13 A. All instruments needed to verify sensor readings, component performance, and system performance will be
14 provided by GC and Subs and be available to the CxA. These instruments will not be beyond what the
15 contractors need to complete the work specified in these construction documents. Any data logging equipment
16 required in addition to the BAS will be provided by the CxA.
17 B. All instruments shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure system performance with the
18 tolerances specified in the Contract Documents. Refer to specification section 23 05 93- Testing, Adjusting, and
19 Balancing for required instrument tolerances.
20
22
23 3.1 COMMISSIONING TEAM
24 A. The members of the commissioning team consist of the Commissioning Authority (CxA), the Owner’s Project
25 Manager (PM), the designated representative of the Owner’s Construction Management firm (CM), the General
26 Contractor (GC or Contractor), the architect and design engineers, the Mechanical Contractor, the Electrical
27 Contractor, the TAB Contractor, the Controls Contractor, any other installing subcontractors or suppliers of
28 equipment.
29 B. Each Cx Team member shall designate one person who is responsible for coordinating the commissioning efforts
30 with the CxA.
31
32 3.2 SCHEDULING AND MEETINGS
33 A. Scheduling: The CxA will work with the other members of the Cx Team according to established protocols to
34 schedule the Cx activities. The CxA will provide sufficient notice to the Cx Team for scheduling Cx activities. The
35 GC will integrate all Cx activities into the master schedule. All parties will address scheduling problems and make
36 necessary notifications in a timely manner in order to expedite the Cx process.
37 B. The CxA will provide the initial schedule of primary Cx events at the Cx pre-construction meeting. The Cx Plan
38 provides a format for this schedule. As construction progresses more detailed schedules are developed by the
39 CxA. The Cx Plan also provides a format for detailed schedules.
40 C. Pre-Construction Meeting. Within 60 days of selection of the GC, the CxA will schedule, plan, and conduct a Cx
41 pre-construction meeting with the entire Cx team in attendance. Meeting minutes will be distributed to all
42 parties by the CxA. Information gathered from this meeting will allow the CxA to revise the Cx Plan which will
43 also be distributed to all parties.
44 D. Meetings: The Cx meetings will be scheduled approximately once a month during construction. These meetings
45 will be scheduled directly before or after the regular construction meetings if practical. These meetings will
46 cover coordination, deficiency resolution and planning issues with particular Subs. The CxA will plan these
47 meetings and will minimize unnecessary time being spent by Subs
48
49 3.3 REPORTING
50 A. The CxA will provide regular reports to the Owner as construction and Cx progresses. Standard forms are
51 provided and referenced in the Cx Plan.
52 B. The CxA will regularly communicate with all members of the Cx team, keeping them apprised of Cx progress and
53 scheduling changes through memos, progress reports, etc.
54 C. Testing or review approvals and non-conformance and deficiency reports are made regularly with the review and
55 testing as described in later sections.
56
57
58
1 3.4 RECORD DRAWINGS

2 A. The CxA will verify that the record drawings are updated throughout the construction. If a discrepancy is found
3 between the record drawings and the installations, the CxA will notify the GC immediately. It is the GC and
4 subcontractors responsibility to then inspect the installations and immediately and completely update the record
5 drawings such that they accurately reflect the installation.
6
7 3.5 CONSTRUCTION COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES
8 A. The following procedures apply to all equipment to be commissioned.
9
10 B. General. Construction checklists are important to ensure that the equipment and systems are hooked up and
11 operational. It ensures that system performance testing (in-depth system checkout) may proceed without
12 unnecessary delays. Each piece of equipment receives full checkout. No sampling strategies are used. All
13 construction checklists for a given system must be successfully completed prior to formal system performance
14 testing of equipment or subsystems of the given system.
15 C. Construction Checklists.
16 1. The primary purpose of the construction checklists is to provide the individual workers with the key criteria
17 for a successful installation. The secondary purpose is to track the progress of the delivery and installation.
18 2. The CxA will develop construction checklists for all commissioned equipment and distribute these to the
19 responsible contractor. The GC and Subs will review the construction checklists for each equipment type
20 and provide comments to the CxA. The CxA will then print and distribute the construction checklist for
21 each individual component.
22 3. The GC and Subs are responsible for all requirements in the specification, not only the requirements listed
23 on the checklists.
24 4. The checklists answer format will be to circle yes /no or provide a brief answer such as providing the
25 model or serial numbers.
26 5. These checklists are provided by the CxA to the GC. The GC determines which trade is responsible for
27 executing and documenting each of the line item tasks and notes that trade on the form. Each form may
28 have more than one trade responsible for its execution. A sample checklist for a VAV box is provided at
29 the end of this specification section.
30 6. The construction checklists shall be completed as delivery is completed and the installation progresses.
31 7. Only individuals who have direct knowledge and witnessed that a line item task on the construction
32 checklist was actually performed shall initial or check that item off. It is not acceptable for supervisors
33 without direct knowledge or who have not witnessed the line item task on the construction checklist to fill
34 out these forms.
35 8. Any negative response shall immediately be brought to the attention of the CxA. All negative replies shall
36 be explained in detail on the construction checklist.
37 9. The GC and Subs are responsible for recording the completion of the checklists. Checklists shall be
38 submitted electronically to SharePoint in .pdf format in separate files by Division. Each file shall be
39 bookmarked by checklist tag.
40 10. Non-itemized installations such as wiring, ductwork, piping etc. will not have checklists to be completed,
41 but the GC and Subs will be provided the key criteria for successful installation.
42 11. The CxA will verify the construction checklist completion by a sampling of the delivered and installed
43 equipment. The sampling process will be described in the Cx Plan.
44 D. Sensor Calibration. Calibration of all sensors shall be included as part of the construction checklists performed
45 by the Contractors. Calibration information is provided in specification Section 23 09 23 - Direct Digital Control
46 System for HVAC
47 E. Deficiencies, Non-Conformance and Approval in Checklists and Startup.
48 1. The Subs shall clearly list any outstanding items of the construction checklist that were not completed
49 successfully, at the bottom of the procedures form or on an attached sheet. The procedures form and any
50 outstanding deficiencies are provided to the CxA within two days of task completion.
51 2. The CxA reviews the report and submits either a non-compliance report or an approval form to the Sub or
52 CM. The CxA shall work with the Subs and vendors to correct deficiencies or uncompleted items. The CxA
53 will involve the CM and others as necessary. The installing Subs or vendors shall correct all areas that are
54 deficient or incomplete in the checklists and tests in a timely manner, and shall notify the CxA as soon as
55 outstanding items have been corrected and include a Statement of Correction on the original non-
56 compliance report. When satisfactorily completed, the CxA recommends approval of the completion of
57 the checklists to the CM using a standard form.
58 3. Items left incomplete, which later cause deficiencies or delays during functional testing may result in back
59 charges to the responsible party.
1 F. System Performance Tests (SPT). SPTs shall be performed to demonstrate that each system is operating
2 according to the documented OPR and Contract Documents. System testing differs to the tests required in the
3 Construction Checklist in that they facilitate bringing all the individual components together to verify that they
4 operate collectively on a system level to provide the required design conditions.
5 1. Development of Test Procedures. The CxA shall prepare the SPT forms and procedures in accordance with
6 the criteria defined in the Cx Plan. The GC and Subs shall assist the CxA in the preparation of these
7 procedures by answering queries and forwarding site-specific information. A sample System Performance
8 Test form is provided at the end of this specification section.
9 2. Participation: The GC and the Subs are responsible for testing all systems to be commissioned such that
10 they function as described in the contract documents. The CxA will verify the performance of the systems.
11 The CxA will direct, witness and document the SPT verification and GC and Subs will execute the
12 verification tests.
13 G. Problem Solving. The CxA will recommend solutions to problems found, however the burden of responsibility to
14 solve, correct and retest problems is with the GC, Subs and A/E.
15 H. Seasonal Testing. During the warranty period, seasonal testing (tests delayed until weather conditions are closer
16 to the system’s design) shall be completed as part of this contract. The CxA shall coordinate this activity. Tests
17 will be executed, documented and deficiencies corrected by the appropriate Subs, with facilities staff and the
18 CxA witnessing. Any final adjustments to the O&M manuals and record documents due to the testing will be
19 made.
20 I. Unforeseen Deferred Tests. If any check or test cannot be completed due to the building structure, required
21 occupancy condition or other deficiency, execution of checklists and functional testing may be delayed upon
22 approval of the PM. These tests will be conducted in the same manner as the seasonal tests.
23
24 3.6 SENSOR AND ACTUATOR CALIBRATION
25 A. Calibrate all field-installed temperature, relative humidity, carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, and pressure
26 sensors and gages, and all actuators (dampers and valves) on this piece of equipment shall be calibrated. Sensors
27 installed in the unit at the factory with calibration certification provided need not be field calibrated.
28 B. Calibrate using the methods described below; alternate methods may be used, if approved by Owner
29 beforehand. See PART 2 for test instrument requirements. Record methods used on the relevant Construction
30 Checklist or other suitable forms, documenting initial, intermediate and final results.
31 C. All Sensors:
32 1. Verify that sensor location is appropriate and away from potential causes of erratic operation.
33 2. Verify that sensors with shielded cable are grounded only at one end.
34 3. For sensor pairs that are used to determine a temperature or pressure difference, for temperature make
35 sure they are reading within 0.2 degree F (0.1 degree C) of each other, and for pressure, within tolerance
36 equal to 2 percent of the reading, of each other.
37 4. Tolerances for critical applications may be tighter.
38 D. Sensors without Transmitters - Standard Application:
39 1. Make a reading with a calibrated test instrument within 6 inches (150 mm) of the site sensor.
40 2. Verify that the sensor reading, via the permanent thermostat, gage or building automation system, is
41 within the tolerances in the table below of the instrument-measured value.
42 3. If not, install offset, calibrate or replace sensor.
43 E. Sensors with Transmitters - Standard Application.
44 1. Disconnect sensor.
45 2. Connect a signal generator in place of sensor.
46 3. Connect ammeter in series between transmitter and building automation system control panel.
47 4. Using manufacturer’s resistance-temperature data, simulate minimum desired temperature.
48 5. Adjust transmitter potentiometer zero until 4 mA is read by the ammeter.
49 6. Repeat for the maximum temperature matching 20 mA to the potentiometer span or maximum and verify
50 at the building automation system.
51 7. Record all values and recalibrate controller as necessary to conform with specified control ramps, reset
52 schedules, proportional relationship, reset relationship and P/I reaction.
53 8. Reconnect sensor.
54 9. Make a reading with a calibrated test instrument within 6 inches (150 mm) of the site sensor.
55 10. Verify that the sensor reading, via the permanent thermostat, gage or building automation system, is
56 within the tolerances in the table below of the instrument-measured value.
57 11. If not, replace sensor and repeat.
58 12. For pressure sensors, perform a similar process with a suitable signal generator.
59 F. Sensor Tolerances for Standard Applications: Plus/minus the following maximums:
1 1. Watthour, Voltage, Amperage: 1 percent of design.

2 2. Pressure, Air, Water, Gas: 3 percent of design.
3 3. Air Temperatures (Outside Air, Space Air, Duct Air): 0.4 degrees F (0.2 degree C).
4 4. Relative Humidity: 4 percent of design.
5 5. Barometric Pressure: 0.1 inch of Hg ( 340 Pa).
6 6. Flow Rate, Air: 10 percent of design.
7 7. Flow Rate, Water: 4 percent of design.
8 8. Flow Rate, Steam: 3 percent of design.
9 9. AHU Wet Bulb and Dew Point: 2.0 degrees F (1.1 degrees C).
10 10. Hot Water Coil and Boiler Water Temperature: 1.5 degrees F (0.8 degrees C).
11 11. Cooling Coil, Chilled and Condenser Water Temperatures: 0.4 degrees F (0.2 degree C).
12 12. Combustion Flue Temperature: 5.0 degrees F (2.8 degrees C).
13 13. Oxygen and CO2 Monitors: 0.1 percentage points.
14 14. CO Monitor: 0.01 percentage points.
15 15. Natural Gas and Oil Flow Rate: 1 percent of design.
16 G. Critical Applications: For some applications more rigorous calibration techniques may be required for selected
17 sensors. Describe any such methods used on an attached sheet.
18 H. Valve/Damper Stroke Setup and Check:
19 1. For all valve/damper actuator positions checked, verify the actual position against the control system
20 readout.
21 2. Set pump/fan to normal operating mode.
22 3. Command valve/damper closed; visually verify that valve/damper is closed and adjust output zero signal as
23 required.
24 4. Command valve/damper to open; verify position is full open and adjust output signal as required.
25 5. Command valve/damper to a few intermediate positions.
26 6. If actual valve/damper position does not reasonably correspond, replace actuator
27 I. Isolation Valve or System Valve Leak Check: For valves not associated with coils.
28 1. With full pressure in the system, command valve closed.
29 2. Use an ultra-sonic flow meter to detect flow or leakage.
30
31 3.7 NON-CONFORMANCE
32 A. All deficiencies or non-conformance issues shall be noted and reported by the GC to the CM on a standard non-
33 compliance form.
34 B. Corrections of minor deficiencies identified may be made during the tests at the discretion of the CxA. In such
35 cases the deficiency and resolution will be documented on the procedure form.
36 C. Every effort will be made to expedite the testing process and minimize unnecessary delays, while not
37 compromising the integrity of the procedures. However, the CxA will not be pressured into overlooking deficient
38 work or loosening acceptance criteria to satisfy scheduling or cost issues, unless there is an overriding reason to
39 do so at the request of the CM and the Owner.
40 D. As tests progress and a deficiency is identified, the CxA discusses the issue with the executing contractor.
41 1. When there is no dispute on the deficiency and the Sub accepts responsibility to correct it:
42 a. The CxA documents the deficiency and the Sub’s response and intentions and they go on to another
43 test or sequence. After the day’s work, the CxA submits the non-compliance reports to the CM for
44 signature, if required. A copy is provided to the Sub and CxA. The Sub corrects the deficiency, signs
45 the statement of correction at the bottom of the non-compliance form certifying that the equipment
46 is ready to be retested and sends it back to the CxA.
47 b. The CxA reschedules the test and the test is repeated.
48 2. If there is a dispute about a deficiency, regarding whether it is a deficiency or who is responsible:
49 a. The deficiency shall be documented on the non-compliance form with the Sub’s response and a copy
50 given to the CM and to the Sub representative assumed to be responsible.
51 b. Resolutions are made at the lowest management level possible. Other parties are brought into the
52 discussions as needed. Final interpretive authority is with the A/E. Final acceptance authority is
53 with the Project Manager.
54 c. The CxA documents the resolution process.
55 d. Once the interpretation and resolution have been decided, the appropriate party corrects the
56 deficiency, signs the statement of correction on the non-compliance form and provides it to the CxA.
57 The CxA reschedules the test and the test is repeated until satisfactory performance is achieved.
58 3. Cost of Retesting.

1 a. The cost incurred by the Subs to retest a construction checklist item or functional test, if they are
2 responsible for the deficiency, shall be theirs. If they are not responsible, any cost recovery for
3 retesting costs shall be negotiated with the GC.
4 b. For a deficiency identified, not related to any construction checklist or start-up fault, the following
5 shall apply: The CxA and CM will direct the retesting of the equipment once at no “charge” to the
6 GC for their time. However, the CxA’s and CM’s time for a second retest will be charged to the GC,
7 who may choose to recover costs from the responsible Sub.
8 c. The time for the CxA and CM to direct any retesting required because a specific construction
9 checklist or start-up test item, reported to have been successfully completed, but determined during
10 functional testing to be faulty, will be backcharged to the GC, who may choose to recover costs from
11 the party responsible for executing the faulty installation or test.
12 d. The Contractor shall respond in writing to the CxA and CM at least as often as Cx meetings are being
13 scheduled concerning the status of each apparent outstanding discrepancy identified during Cx.
14 Discussion shall cover explanations of any disagreements and proposals for their resolution.
15 e. The CxA retains the original non-conformance forms until the end of the project.
16 f. Failure Due to Manufacturer Defect. If 10%, or three, whichever is greater, of identical pieces (size
17 alone does not constitute a difference) of equipment fail to perform to the Contract Documents
18 (mechanically or substantively) due to manufacturing defect, not allowing it to meet its submitted
19 performance spec, all identical units may be considered unacceptable by the CM or PM. In such
20 case, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with the following:
21 g. Within one week of notification from the CM or PM, the Contractor or manufacturer’s
22 representative shall examine all other identical units making a record of the findings. The findings
23 shall be provided to the CM or PM within two weeks of the original notice.
24 h. Within two weeks of the original notification, the Contractor or manufacturer shall provide a signed
25 and dated, written explanation of the problem, cause of failures, etc. and all proposed solutions
26 which shall include full equipment submittals. The proposed solutions shall not significantly exceed
27 the specification requirements of the original installation. The CM or PM will determine whether a
28 replacement of all identical units or a repair is acceptable.
29 i. Two examples of the proposed solution will be installed by the Contractor and the CM will be
30 allowed to test the installations for up to one week, upon which the CM or PM will decide whether
31 to accept the solution.
32 j. Upon acceptance, the Contractor and/or manufacturer shall replace or repair all identical items, at
33 their expense and extend the warranty accordingly, if the original equipment warranty had begun.
34 The replacement/repair work shall proceed with reasonable speed beginning within one week from
35 when parts can be obtained.
36 E. Approval. The CxA notes each satisfactorily demonstrated function on the test form. Formal approval of the
37 functional test is made later after review by the CxA and by the CM, if necessary. The CxA recommends
38 acceptance of each test to the CM using a standard form. The CM gives final approval on each test using the
39 same form, providing a signed copy to the CxA and the Contractor.
40
41 3.8 SAMPLE DOCUMENTS
42 A. The two documents after this section (Sample Construction Checklist and Sample System Performance Test) are
43 included to demonstrate the level of effort and quality expected of the contractors. These documents will be
44 revised as necessary as the project progresses.
45
46 END OF SECTION

Sample Variable Air Volume Box

Construction Checklist
TAG ID: VAV 1-1

Instructions:
1. Lead contractor to assure that subcontractors are aware of the checklists while installing the
equipment and systems.
2. Subcontractors are to be given these checklists to complete.
a. Check Yes or No for each checklist item.
b. Explain all discrepancies or negative responses.
c. Sign and date the completed checklists.
Checklist items are to be completed as part of startup & initial checkout, prior to performing functional
testing.
• The checklist items have been checked off only by parties having direct knowledge of the event, as
marked below, respective to each responsible contractor.
• This checklist does not take the place of the manufacturer’s recommended checkout and startup
procedures or report.
• Contractors who are assigned responsibility for sections of the checklist shall be responsible to see
that checklist items by their subcontractors are completed and checked off.
DELIVERY CHECK
Performed by: Mechanical Contractor
Fill in the “DELIVERED” product information. Provide information on any discrepancies in “Comments” section.
SUBMITTAL DELIVERED COMMENTS
Manufacturer
Model #
Min. / Max. Airflow (CFM) / /
Total static pressure (in.
W.C.)
(including reheat coil)
Inlet size (inches)
Re-heat Coil Rating /
/
(MBH/GPM)
Re-heat Coil # rows
DELIVERY CHECK
Performed by: Mechanical Contractor Date
Print Name:
Signature:

PHYSICAL CHECK
Check the following items prior to installing the unit. Check YES or NO for each item. Each NO response MUST be
explained in the “Comments” section below.
Check ”YES” if Acceptable; Provide comment if unacceptable YES NO Comments
All unit and location identifiers are correct
Unit nameplate clearly visible and easy to read
No physical damage to the unit
No signs of water damage
Duct openings are tightly sealed and not breached
Pipe connections are sealed and not breached
Airflow station is secure and ends of sampling tubes are
properly covered
Re-heat coil is secure and fins are not damaged
Electrical control panel labeling is clear and appropriate
for rated voltage
The DDC control enclosure is secure and accessible
Installation and startup instructions included with unit
PHYSICAL CHECK
Print Name:
Signature:
INSTALLATION CHECK
Check the following items after mounting the unit in place and before pipe and electrical connections are made.
Check YES or NO for each item. Each NO response MUST be explained in the “Comments” section below.
Unit identifier is correct and clearly visible from below
Unit nameplate is clearly visible and easy to read
Unit is properly mounted and supported according to the
specifications and Detail X
Service and maintenance clearances are according to the
specifications and Detail X
Covering over duct and pipe openings are secure and not
breached
INSTALLATION CHECK
Print Name:
Signature:

HOT WATER PIPING CHECK

Performed by: Mechanical Piping Contractor
Check the following items after piping has been connected to the unit but before TAB tests are performed. Check
YES or NO for each item. Each NO response MUST be explained in the “Comments” section below.
Hot water return piped to top and hot water supply piped
to bottom of coil
Piping installation allows for easy reheat coil removal.
Control valve, balancing valve, isolating valve, strainers
and all other piping components are installed per Detail
X
Piping does not obstruct access and maintenance
clearances
Manual air vent provided at top of coil per Detail X
Valves are tagged
Piping is insulated per contract documents
HOT WATER PIPING CHECK
Print Name:
Signature:
DUCTWORK CHECK
Check the following items after ducts have been connected to the unit but before TAB tests are performed. Check
Straight duct length at inlet to VAV box minimum 1.5-
duct diameters
Minimum of 48” straight duct is provided from the
discharge of the unit prior to any take-offs or transitions
Duct does not obstruct access and maintenance
clearances
Access panel to reheat coil is provided per submittals
DUCTWORK CHECK
Print Name:
Signature:
ELECTRICAL CHECK
Performed by: Electrical Contractor
Check the following items after ducts and piping have been connected and electrical wiring is completed. Check
Electrical and control wiring is properly installed

All wire sizes are correct per the Specifications
All electrical connections are properly grounded
Control transformer is properly installed and wired
ELECTRICAL CHECK
Performed by: Electrical Contractor Date
Print Name:
Signature:
CONTROLS CHECK
Performed by: Controls Contractor
Check the following items after ducts and piping have been connected and control and electrical wiring is
completed. Check YES or NO for each item. Each NO response MUST be explained in the “Comments” section.
VAV box points are successfully linked to Building
Automation System (BAS)
Graphical display representative of system configuration
Space temperature sensor calibrated and interfaced with
the BAS
Airflow sensor calibrated and interfaced with the BAS
Confirm at both operator workstation and physically at
unit that heating control valve operates through its full
range of motion – fully open to fully closed
Confirm at both operator workstation and physically at
unit that air valve operates through its full range of
motion – fully open to fully closed
CONTROLS CHECK
Performed by: Controls Contractor Date
Print Name:
Signature:

MECHANICAL STARTUP CHECK

Performed by: Controls Contractor
Check the following items before TAB tests are performed. Check YES or NO for each item. Each NO response MUST
be explained in the “Comments” section below.
Coils are clean and undamaged
VAV box airflow (CFM) as per submittal
Heating coil water flow (GPM) as per submittal
Heating coil entering and leaving water temperatures (°F)
as per submittal
Heating coil entering and leaving air temperatures (°F) as
per submittal
Heating coil air and water pressure drops as per submittal
MECHANICAL STARTUP CHECK
Performed by: Controls Contractor Date
Print Name:
Signature:
Approvals: This completed checklist has been reviewed. Its completion is approved with the exceptions
noted below.
Commissioning Authority Date Owner’s Representative Date
Notes:

SAMPLE SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST COM MMB

Air Distribution Served by AHU-1
DATE___________
COMMISSIONING PARTICIPANTS:
Test Duty Name Company

Commissioning Authority Direct __________________ SEG
Control Contractor Perform __________________ X
Mechanical Contractor Standby __________________ X
Plumbing Contractor Standby __________________ X
Electrical Contractor Standby __________________ X
TAB Contractor Standby __________________ X
Direct means that the Commissioning Authority will witness the tests and show the controls contractor
which tests to execute.
Perform means that the contractor will be the one actually executing the test under the CxA directions
Standby means that the contractor is available to assist with operating equipment during the test if
required.
The following system performance tests relate to air distribution system served by air handling units at
Standing Rock High School. The equipment to be tested includes the air handling units, exhaust fans, the
building fire alarm system, and all related dampers, valves, and assemblies.
The contractors need to complete these tests on all equipment prior to verification by the CxA to ensure
that the systems are functioning as required, and to ensure that the contractor is able to demonstrate the
functionality of the systems as described in this document under the direction of the CxA without
excessive time spent on determining how to perform the test procedures. The CxA will verify the
performance on selected system(s) and modes. If the systems are not able to perform as required, retest
will be required on the contractors’ expense. Verification of performance should not be considered a
“troubleshooting” session, only a few minor corrections (implementation less than 15 mins each
occurrence, 1 hr accumulated) will be allowed during testing.
1. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST RESULTS:

After performing all the system performance tests included in this document the test results are rated as:
Successful, No Comments
Successful, Comments as Noted
Deferred Seasonal Test Recommended
Complete Retest Recommended
Retest Recommended only on Noted Sections
Notes:

2. COMPLETED CONSTRUCTION CHECKLISTS
Confirm that the following construction checklists have been submitted and reviewed and that
the equipment has been approved for system performance testing by checking the appropriate
box.
Piping & Valve Check
Mech. Start-up Check

Installation Check
Gas Piping Check

Ductwork Check
Electrical Check
Controls Check
Delivery Check
Physical Check
Equipment Tag ID
Air Handling Unit AHU-1
VAV Boxes VAV 1-X
Exhaust Fan EF-X
Notes:

3. INSTRUMENT LIST
The following is a list of required instrumentation to perform measurements and verification
during this system performance test. It is the contractor’s responsibility to provide this
instrumentation. Included are measurement units and degree of accuracy; e.g. GPM, Amps,
°F, “H2O, etc, and the acceptable calibration date range.
DATE OF
REF INSTRUMENT RANGE ACCURACY
CALIBRATION
A Thermometer 0-150 °F ±0.5 °F
B Humidity meter 10-90% RH ± 2.5%
C CO meter 0-1000 ppm ±3% or ± 30 ppm
D Air Pressure meter 0-5 inches H2O ± 0.05 inches H2O
E Air flow meter 50-500 cfm ± 5%
F Air flow sensor 30-1000 fpm ± 5%
G Noise meter, 125-8000 Hz bands 25-120 dB ± 2 dB
4. VISUAL INSPECTION OF SYSTEM

Before starting the system performance test, perform a visual inspection of the building and major equipment
related to the air distribution system. Note any items that may be of importance when reviewing the test data.
Notes:

5. CURRENT CONDITIONS
Record the following set-point and scheduling information as provided by the BAS for the air handling unit.
All of these values will be returned to their pre-test value unless noted otherwise.
PRE-TEST END TEST
ITEM NOTES
VALUE VALUE
Space temperature setpoint
(heating, occupied)
(cooling, occupied)
(heating, unoccupied)
(cooling unoccupied)
Minimum outside air damper
setpoint. Ensure this value was
obtained by the TAB Contractor
Economizer enable setpoint
CO level alarm setpoint
Schedule:
Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday
Occupied
Unoccupied
Holidays: _____________________________________________________________________
Notes:

6. DEVICE CALIBRATION CHECK

Check calibration of devices such as valves, dampers, actuators, etc. Verify that the reading at the BAS
matches actual physical condition.
Control Site Pass
Device or Actuator & Location Procedure / State BAS Value
Reading Observation Y/N
Command damper to
fully open position and 100%
observe
Outside air damper
Command damper to
fully closed position and 0%
observe
Command damper to
observe
Return air damper
Command damper to
observe
Command damper to
observe
Relief air damper (RH-1)
Command damper to
observe
Command valve to fully
open position and 100%
Heating Coil Control Valve observe
Command valve to fully
closed position and 0%
observe
Compare measured value
Supply air temperature sensor
to reading
Return air temperature sensor
to reading
Mixed air temperature sensor
to reading
Zone CO Sensor Compare measured value
Serving AHU-1 to reading
Zone temperature sensor serving Compare measured value

AHU-1 to reading

7. BAS DATA TRENDING

Prior to starting the system performance tests begin the collection of data as shown below using trend logs on
the BAS. The purpose of collecting this data is to record the results of the tests and to verify the BAS
performance, i.e. speed of response to step changes, no oscillations, etc. To do this we need a short sampling
interval on all points that can change rapidly. A longer interval is acceptable for points that will not change
quickly. For simplicity it may be easier to select the same sampling interval for all points (i.e. 1 min.).
Controls contractor must set up these trends before test and provide the data electronically no later than
1 week after test. The trends should be set up for the following points:
Start Date: _______________________ Start Time: __________________
BAS TRENDING
MINIMUM
POINT
DESCRIPTION SAMPLING Y/N
ID
INTERVAL
Outside air temperature 10 min
Supply Fan Status COV
Relief air damper position 1 min
Heating coil control valve position 1 min
HW Circulating Pump Status COV
Return air damper position 1 min
Outside air damper position 1 min
Filter status 30 min
Supply air temperature 1 min
Return air temperature 1 min
Mixed air temperature 1 min
Zone temperature 1 min
Zone CO level 1 min
Exhaust fan status (EF-1, 2, 29, & 34) COV
Notes:

8. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF TEST
The testing of the air distribution system served by the air handling unit shall verify that the
system operates as per the control sequences detailed in Specification Section 23 0993. The tests
shall demonstrate that the following functions are working correctly:
• Emergency conditions (smoke alarm, power failure)

• Failure and alarm conditions (freezestat control alarm, CO concentration alarm)
• Off / On modes
• Unoccupied mode
• Occupied mode (heating)
• Economizer mode
• Optimum start with morning warm-up or cool-down mode
• Room conditions
Make sure that the fire department is notified and/or that the no false alarms will be sent to the
fire department when doing any of the failure and alarm tests.
9. ALARM AND FAILURE TESTING PROCEDURES AND RECORD
9a. SMOKE ALARM

Make sure that the fire department is notified and/or that the no false alarms will be sent to
the fire department when performing the smoke alarm test.
SUCCESS
STEP ACTION VERIFICATION COMMENT
Yes No
1. Verify that the AHU is AHU supply fan turns off
on. Then initiate a EF-34 turns off (interlocked
smoke alarm with AHU-1)
Alarm is present at BAS
Outside air damper closes
Relief air damper closes (RH-1)
Return air damper opens
Heating control valve is open
Reset alarm Systems return to normal
operation
2. Clear alarm at BAS Verify alarm clears at fire alarm
panel and BAS

9b. POWER FAILURE
SUCCESS
Yes No
1. Cut power to AHU AHU outside air damper closes
and control panel AHU return air damper opens
AHU relief air damper closes
(RH-1)
Supply fan is off
EF-34 is off (interlocked with
AHU-1)
Heating coil control valve
opens
2. Return power to AHU AHU starts up and returns to
and control panel correct mode.
9c. ZONE CO CONCENTRATION ALARM
SUCCESS
Yes No
1. Record current zone The CO level recorded by the
CO level BAS matches the measured CO
level in the zone
2. Use the BAS to Alarm is present at BAS
change the CO EF-2 damper opens
setpoint to 2 ppm less EF-2 energizes and runs for a
than the current minimum of 5 minutes or until
reading the CO level is 5 ppm or less
OR Zone temperatures remain
Use the BAS to unchanged
change the CO level to
11 ppm
3. Reset the CO setpoint Alarm clears at BAS
to specified value.

9d. FREEZE CONTROL ALARM
SUCCESS
Yes No
1. Put the AHU into AHU supply fan turns off
occupied mode. EF-34 turns off (interlocked
Trip the freezestat with AHU-1)
physically at the unit AHU outside air damper closes
OR AHU return air damper opens
AHU relief air damper closes
Use ice to freeze a 1 (RH-1)
foot section of the
AHU heating valve opens
low-temperature limit
sensor located HW coil pump is energized
downstream of the
heating coil Alarm is present at BAS
2. If necessary, reset low Alarm clears at BAS
limit discharge air Manual reset
temperature setpoint to device
specified value. System starts up and returns to
correct mode
Manually reset
freezestat
9e. FILTER ALARM
SUCCESS
Yes No
1. Initiate a dirty filter Dirty filter alarm message is
alarm by changing the generated by BAS
setpoints or manually
tripping the
differential pressure
sensor.
2. Return settings to Alarm clears and system returns
original values. to normal operation.

10. SYSTEM TESTING PROCEDURES AND RECORD
10a. SYSTEM OFF / ON MODES
SUCCESS
Yes No
1. Verify that AHU is Supply fan is off
in occupied mode. Outside air damper is closed
Use the BAS to send Return air damper is open
an OFF command to Relief air damper is closed (RH-
AHU 1)
Heating coil control valve is open
EF-34 is off (interlocked with
AHU-1)
2. Use the BAS to send Supply fan is on
an ON command to Outside air damper opens to its
AHU minimum position if unit is not in
economizer mode.
Return air damper closes
proportionally as the outside air
damper opens
Relief air damper opens
proportionally as the outside air
damper opens
EF-34 is on (interlocked with
AHU-1)
Unit maintains discharge air
temperature setpoint

10b. UNOCCUPIED MODE
SUCCESS
Yes No
1. Use the BAS to put Outside air and relief air
the unit into dampers remain closed
Unoccupied Mode AHU supply fan is off (unless
space temperatures are outside
the unoccupied temperature
setpoint)
EF-34 is off during AHU-1
unoccupied mode
If the outside air temperature is
below the low temperature
protection setpoint (20°F) the
coil pump is energized.
Otherwise the coil pump is off.
2. Use the BAS to Outside air and relief air
change the unoccupied dampers remain closed if unit is
heating space not in economizer mode
temperature setpoint AHU supply fan energizes
3-5 °F higher than the when the lowest space
lowest space sensor temperature drops below the
reading. unoccupied heating space
temperature setpoint
EF-34 remains off
AHU control valve modulates
as necessary to maintain the
unoccupied supply air
temperature setpoint (95°F).
AHU supply fan turns off when
the space temperature is above
the unoccupied setpoint plus
differential. Differential =
______
3. Reset the unoccupied System returns to normal
setback temperature to operation
initial value and if
necessary, put system
back into occupied
mode

10c. OCCUPIED MODE - HEATING

This test procedure is written for ambient conditions being such that heating mode can be achieved.
This test may need to be completed at a later date when the ambient conditions are fit for the heating
mode.
This test requires that the outside air temperature is about 40°F or lower to make sure the
economizer cycle is disabled.
SUCCESS
Yes No
1. Verify that the system AHU supply fan is on
is in occupied mode. EF-34 is on (interlocked with
Set room setpoint
temp associated with AHU-1)
this AHU to 3-5°F Return air damper modulates
above current space AHU outside air damper opens to
temperature. minimum position.
Relief air damper opens to
minimum position (RH-1)
AHU supply air temperature
reaches setpoint
Coil pump is off in occupied
mode regardless of OA
temperature
2. Reset room System returns to normal
temperatures back to operation
original values

10d. OCCUPIED MODE - ECONOMIZER

This test procedure is written for ambient conditions being such that economizer mode can be achieved
which require the Outside Air Temp 40-75F. This test may need to be completed at a later date when
the ambient conditions are fit for the economizer mode.
SUCCESS
Yes No
1. Verify that there is a Return air temperature is greater
call for cooling and the than outside air temperature
OA temperature is
less than the return air AHU fan is on
temperature EF-34 is on (interlocked with
AHU-1)
AHU outside air damper
modulates
Relief air damper modulates (RH-
1)
Return air damper modulates
Zone temperature setpoint is
maintained without mechanical
cooling.
Unit heaters located in the same
area are off when this AHU is in
economizer mode.
10e. COOLING / HEATING OPTIMUM START WITH WARM-UP & COOL-DOWN

MODES
This test may need to be completed at a later date when the air handling unit has been in operation long enough to
have sufficient startup trend data available for both the warm-up and cool-down modes.
SUCCESS
Yes No
1. Access AHU startup Trends show the AHU achieves
trends and outside air occupied zone temperature
damper position setpoint within ±1°F no more
trends than 30 minutes prior to
scheduled start of occupied
period.
Trends show that outside air
damper remains closed during
warm-up and cool-down modes.

10f. VERIFICATION OF ROOM CONDITIONS

This test procedure should be done at different ambient conditions when the system is in different modes, i.e. heating (winter),
economizer (spring/fall), cooling (summer) Up to three sample spaces will be evaluated:
Space 1:__________________ Space 2: _____________________ Space 3: ______________________
SUCCESS
Yes No
1. Current The room temperature at the thermostat is
condition within ± 1.0 °F of the setpoint temperature
in less than 0.5 hr without oscillations or
offsets outside 1.0°F of the setpoint.
So as to avoid “too hot” or “too cold” spots
the temperature distribution within the
occupied zone does not exceed -3 and +2 °F
from the setpoint temperature
2. Set the room The room temperature at the thermostat is
temperature within ± 1.0 °F of the setpoint temperature
setpoint to 5 °F in less than 0.5 hr without oscillations or
higher than the offsets outside 1.0°F of the setpoint.
initial setpoint So as to avoid “too hot” or “too cold” spots
temperature. the temperature distribution within the
3. Set the room There is no noticeable drafts in the occupied
temperature zone while the system is cooling to reach
back to the the setpoint temperature
initial setpoint The noise level in the room is within the
temperature requirement for that particular space during
cooling.
The room temperature at the thermostat is
within ± 1.0 °F of the setpoint temperature
in less than 0.5 hr without oscillations or
offsets outside 1.0°F of the setpoint.
So as to avoid “too hot” or “too cold” spots
the temperature distribution within the
Return all changed control parameters and conditions to their pre-test values
Record permanently changed parameter values and submit changes to Owner.
- END OF TESTING -

1 SECTION 01 95 00
2 MEASUREMENT & VERIFICATION
3 PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
4 1.1 SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
5 1.2 DEFINITIONS .................................................................................................................................................................. 1
6 1.3 MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................................................................................ 1
7 1.4 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................................................................................... 1
8 1.5 CONTROLS CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES................................................................................................................. 2
9 1.6 M&V PROVIDERS RESPONSIBILITIES .............................................................................................................................. 2
10 PART 2 - PRODUCTS ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2
11 2.1 Meters and Sub-Meters................................................................................................................................................. 2
12 PART 3 - EXECUTION ........................................................................................................................................................................ 2
13 3.1 Meter ............................................................................................................................................................................. 2
14 3.2 Sub-Meters .................................................................................................................................................................... 2
15 3.3 Natural Gas .................................................................................................................................................................... 2
16 3.4 Domestic Hot Water ...................................................................................................................................................... 2
17 3.5 Temporary Monitoring .................................................................................................................................................. 3
18 3.6 DDC Trends .................................................................................................................................................................... 3
19
20 PART 1 - GENERAL
21
22 1.1 SUMMARY
23 A. Purpose: This section includes general requirements that apply to implementation of measurement and
24 verification.
25 B. RELATED WORK AND REQUIREMENTS
26 1. 01 31 13 Project Coordination
27 2. 01 31 19 Project Meetings
28 3. 01 31 23 Project Management Web Site
29 4. 01 91 00 Commissioning
30 5. 23 09 00 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC
31 6. 23 09 23 Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC
32 7. 23 09 93.11 Sequence of Operations for HVAC DDC
33 8. 26 24 13 Switchboards
34 9. 26 24 16 Panelboards
35
36 1.2 DEFINITIONS
37 A. BAS - Building Automation System
38 B. DHW - Domestic Hot Water
39 C. M&V - Measurement and Verification
40 D. kW - Electric power read from utility meter
41 E. KWh - Electric energy consumption read from utility meter
42 F. Plug Loads – Electric power and consumption from wall receptacles
43
44 1.3 MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
45 A. Contractor shall assign representatives with expertise and authority to act on its behalf and shall schedule them
46 to participate in and perform M&V activities including, but not limited to, the following:
47 1. Follow activities identified in the M&V Plan.
48 2. Coordinate connection of gas and DHW monitoring equipment with BAS.
49 3. Cooperate with the M&V Provider and Controls Contractor for resolution of issues related to data
50 collection.
51 4. Attend team meetings during construction and post-construction M&V period (1 year).
52
53 1.4 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
57 2. Coordinate connection of electrical monitoring equipment with BAS
58 3. Cooperate with the M&V Provider and Controls Contractor for resolution of issues related to data
59 collection.
CONTRACT 7939 MUNIS 10129 01 95 00 - 1 MEASUREMENT & VERIFICATION
2
3 1.5 CONTROLS CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
7 2. Coordinate connection of electrical, gas, and DHW monitoring equipment with BAS
8 3. Cooperate with the M&V Provider Mechanical Contractor and Electrical Contractor for resolution of
9 issues related to establishing connection between BAS and monitoring meters and equipment.
11
12 1.6 M&V PROVIDERS RESPONSIBILITIES
13 A. Providers responsibilities include:
14 1. Organize and lead the M&V team.
15 2. Provide M&V plan.
16 3. Convene M&V meetings as needed.
17 4. Cooperate with the Mechanical Contractor, Electrical Contractor, and Controls Contractor for resolution
18 of issues related to establishing connection between BAS and monitoring meters and equipment.
19 5. Provide an M&V report at 1 year post construction.
20
22 2.1 Meters and Sub-Meters
23 A. Monitoring meters and sub-meters, both gas and electric, to have the ability to connect to the BAS and provide
24 data to BAS at a minimum of 15 minute intervals. It is acceptable to use the utility for this purpose if allowable
25 by utility company.
26
28 3.1 Meter
29 A. Provide real-time monitoring of the whole building electricity kW and kWh use by using a signal from the
30 building utility meter serving the HVAC, lighting, and plug loads and provide the data input to the Building
31 Automation System (BAS). The BAS must be capable of trending this kW and kWh data. Data is to be collected
32 in 15 minute intervals. Storage of at least 3 months of 15 minute data is required on the BAS. Data older than 3
33 months is to be automatically saved and archived on the BAS computer without being overwritten. Data older
34 than 5 years can be overwritten. It is the responsibility of the electrical contractor to coordinate this work.
35
36 3.2 Sub-Meters
37 A. Provide real-time monitoring of the building electricity kW and kWh use by using a signal from the building
38 panel sub-meters at each floor and provide the data input to the BAS. The BAS must be capable of trending this
39 kW and kWh data. Data is to be collected in 15 minute intervals. Storage of at least 3 months of 15 minute data
40 is required on the BAS. Data older than 3 months is to be automatically saved and archived on the BAS
41 computer without being overwritten. Data older than 5 years can be overwritten. It is the responsibility of the
42 electrical contractor to coordinate this work.
43
44 3.3 Natural Gas
45 A. Provide real-time monitoring of whole building natural gas consumption by using a signal from the building
46 utility meter to provide the data input to the BAS. The BAS must be capable of trending gas consumption. Data
47 is to be collected in 15 minute intervals. Storage of at least 3 months of 15 minute data is required on the BAS.
48 Data older than 3 months is to be automatically saved and archived on the BAS computer without being
49 overwritten. Data older than 5 years can be overwritten. It is the responsibility of the mechanical contractor to
50 coordinate this work.
51
52 3.4 Domestic Hot Water
53 A. Provide real-time monitoring of the domestic hot water (DHW) system by measuring water flow to DHW heater
54 and DHW supply and return temperatures and providing data input to the BAS. The BAS must be capable of
55 trending gas consumption. Data is to be collected in 15 minute intervals. Storage of at least 3 months of 15
56 minute data is required on the BAS. Data older than 3 months is to be automatically saved and archived on the
57 BAS computer without being overwritten. Data older than 5 years can be overwritten. It is the responsibility of
58 the mechanical contractor to coordinate this work.
59
1 3.5 Temporary Monitoring

2 A. Provide easy access to allow for the temporary installation of split-core current sensors and voltage sensors for
3 the electrical measurement and datalogging on the following systems:
4 1. Lighting
5 2. Plug loads
6 3. HVAC equipment including chillers, fans, circulation pumps, and air handling units
7 4. DHW equipment
8
9 3.6 DDC Trends
10 A. The Controls Contractor is to provide provision for remote access to BAS to view status of building and the
11 ability to download trendable points.
12
13 End of Section

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 02 41 19
2 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
4 1.1 SUMMARY
5 1.2 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
6 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
7 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
9 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
10 1.7 WARRANTY
12 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
13 2.2 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
14 2.3 ROOF DECK
16 3.1 EXAMINATION
17 3.2 PREPARATION
18 3.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
19 3.4 PROTECTION
21 3.6 CLEANING
22 PART 1 - GENERAL
23 1.1 SUMMARY
24 A. Section Includes:
25 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
26 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
27 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
28 B. Related Work:
29 1. Owner will remove “Annex” structure. Refer to Section 02 41 50 – Historic Selective Demolition
30 /Deconstruction for removal and patching of exposed wall surfaces.
31 1.2 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

32 A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.
33 B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their
34 contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be
35 uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.
36 1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.

38 A. Pre-demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

40 A. Engineering Survey: Submit engineering survey of condition of building.
41 B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed
42 for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control and for noise control.
43 Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.
44 C. Protection of indicated and identified historic materials. Submit proposed protection measures and
45 procedures to protect historic materials during construction.
46 D. Schedule of selective demolition activities with starting and ending dates for each activity.
47 E. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery:

49 A. Inventory of items that have been removed and salvaged.

51 A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program.
52

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 024119 - 1 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.
3 1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items:
4 a. All loose interior furnishings and office equipment, art work, maintenance equipment, tools
5 and parts.
6 b. Fire extinguishers, AED, air compressors and glass display cases.
7 B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective
8 demolition.
9 C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.
10 1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner.
11 2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and
12 Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.
13 D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
14 E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage
15 during selective demolition operations.
16 F. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations.
17 1.8 WARRANTY
18 A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during
19 selective demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved contractors so as not to void existing
20 warranties.

23 A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective
24 demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
25 B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
26 C. Sustainable Design Requirements for Building Reuse:
27 1. Maintain existing building structure (including structural floor and roof decking) and envelope (exterior
28 skin and framing, excluding window assemblies and nonstructural roofing material) not indicated to
29 be demolished; do not demolish such existing construction beyond indicated limits.
30 2. Maintain existing interior nonstructural elements (interior walls, doors, floor coverings, and ceiling
31 systems) not indicated to be demolished; do not demolish such existing construction beyond
32 indicated limits.
33 3. Maintain existing nonshell, nonstructural components (walls, flooring, and ceilings) not indicated to
34 be demolished; do not demolish such existing construction beyond indicated limits.

36 A. Scope of selective demolition, salvage and building elements to remain protected are indicated by demolition
37 tags with definitions on the Material Tag List. Refer to Demolition Drawings.
38 B. Refer to Material Tag Index for list of Drawing Tags for selective demolition.
39 2.3 ROOF DECK

40 A. Roof Deck Boards: Salvage roof deck boards from lower roof demolition (roof of second floor) for re-use at
41 deck repair and infill at upper roof.
42 1. Clean and stack for re-use.
44 3.1 EXAMINATION
45 A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.
46 B. Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might
47 result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during
48 selective building demolition operations.
49 C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3.2 PREPARATION
2 A. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to
3 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
4 3.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

5 A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them
6 against damage.
7 1. City will maintain the wireless access points and service in the existing building.
8 B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal
9 or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.
10 1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor.
11 2. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies.
12 3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary
13 services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of
14 services/systems to other parts of building.
15 4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems,
16 equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed.
17 a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove piping indicated. Remove abandoned conduit and ductwork,
18 including above ceilings. Remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap
19 stub and tag with identification.
20 b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Abandon piping, conduit and ductwork in place only if
21 removal would disturb existing material and construction to remain. Drain piping and cap or
22 plug piping with same or compatible piping material and leave in place.
23 c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
24 d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean,
25 and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment
26 operational.
27 e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove
28 equipment and deliver to Owner.
29 f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining
30 ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
31 g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork
32 material and leave in place.
33 3.4 PROTECTION
34 A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to
35 people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
36 B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to
37 preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and
38 to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.
39 C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist.
40

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as
3 indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as
4 follows:
5 1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods
6 least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power
7 tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to
8 remain.
9 2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing
10 finished surfaces.
11 3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces,
12 such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-
13 cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
14 4. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 2 hours after flame-cutting operations.
15 5. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose
16 excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
17 6. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Section 01 74 19
18 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
19 7. Existing elevator shall not be used for construction activities.
20 B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure
21 minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
22 C. Removed and Salvaged Items:
23 1. Clean salvaged items.
24 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
25 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
26 4. Prepare items for Owner's storage area.
27 D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:
28 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.
29 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
30 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
31 E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during
32 selective demolition.
33 3.6 CLEANING
34 A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and recycle or dispose of them according to
35 Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
36 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
37 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.
38 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey
39 debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
40 4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and
41 Disposal."
42 B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
43 C. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition
44 operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.
45 END OF SECTION

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 02 41 50
2 HISTORIC SELECTIVE DEMOLITION/DECONSTRUCTION
4 1.1 WORK INCLUDED
6 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
7 1.4 PROTECTION
8 1.5 OCCUPANCY
9 1.6 DUST CONTROL
11 2.1 NOT USED
13 3.1 LIMESTONE, MASONRY, STRUCTURAL STEEL, CONCRETE AND ASSOCIATED DEMOLITION
14 3.2 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS
15
17
18 1.1 WORK INCLUDED
19 A. Provide all labor, materials, services and incidentals necessary to perform the following work:
20 1. Carefully remove and store existing limestone slated for future reinstallation.
21 2. Remove and dispose of existing limestone, masonry, and structural steel to the extent
22 shown on the Drawings.
23 3. Remove and dispose of existing collateral material associated with the above.
24 B. It is the intent of this project to preserve as much of the existing building material as possible. All
25 demolition of existing masonry materials shall not be executed without the consent of the Architect
26 and/or Owner.
27
29 A. Refer to Section 04 01 40 Historic Limestone Preservation/Restoration for all partial demolition
30 information.
31 B. Refer to Section 04 01 20.63 Historic Brick Masonry Preservation/Restoration.
32
34 A. The following regulatory requirements shall be followed:
35 1. Local, State and Regional Building Codes
36 2. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
37 3. United States Department of Transportation (US DOT).
38 4. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).
39 5. National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP).
40 B. The Architect is not an advisor of asbestos-related issues. The Contractor shall consult the
41 Owner’s Asbestos Personnel for clarifications.
42
43 1.4 PROTECTION
44 A. When Work involves removal of masonry materials; the following minimum requirements shall be
45 enforced:
46 1. The Contractor shall exercise extreme caution and take all necessary precautions to limit
47 exposing his workmen or bystanders to any dangerous conditions.
48 2. Protect all existing utilities against damage. Maintain existing utilities during demolition
49 operations.
50 3. Protect passageways and maintain all exit ways to facilitate the safe passage of persons
51 around the area of demolition. Do not modify the facilities code compliant status in any
52 way that is not specifically addressed in this Project Manual.
53 4. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support as required to prevent movement,
54 settlement, or collapse of adjacent construction scheduled to remain.
55 5. Protect all remaining portions of the building, landscaping and other property not
56 scheduled for demolition. These areas shall be completely protected during demolition
57 and removal of debris. Any resulting damage shall be repaired or replaced to like-
58 new condition by the Contractor responsible under the direction and approval of
59 the Owner and Architect.
MADISON MUNICIPAL BUILDING RENOVATION BID SET

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 024150 - 1 HISTORIC SELECTIVE
DEMOLITION/DECONSTRUCTION
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 6. Protect area designated by the Owner and the Architect with necessary framing, plastic
2 sheet, or similar materials to prevent visible dust and debris from entering the building.
3 Remove dust and debris protection materials upon job completion.
4 7. When the Work involves removal of building materials containing asbestos, notify the
5 Owner’s Asbestos Consultant immediately.
6
7 1.5 OCCUPANCY
8 A. The Owner will not occupy the building during demolition and construction and the facility will not
9 remain operational.
10 B. Coordinate all Work in advance with the Owner, the Owner’s on site personnel and the Architect.
11
12 1.6 DUST CONTROL
13 A. The following minimum requirements will be enforced:
14 1. It is imperative that construction related dust be kept to a minimum during removal of the
15 limestone, masonry, structural steel, or any other building material identified herein.
16
18
19 2.1 NOT USED
20
22
23 3.1 LIMESTONE, MASONRY, STRUCTURAL STEEL, CONCRETE AND ASSOCIATED DEMOLITION
24 A. Remove existing construction as required to complete the preservation and restoration Work as
25 shown or specified. Refer to the Drawings for the extent of the existing construction that is to be
26 removed.
27 B. Salvage: No masonry materials may be demolished and disposed of without the Owner’s written
28 acceptance. It is the intent of this Project to salvage all existing masonry for reuse. Refer to
29 subsequent specifications for historic limestone and brick masonry.
30 C. Do not start demolition of existing materials when inclement weather is expected.
31 D. Refer to this section for requirements relating to protection of existing structure and property.
32 E. If, during the course of the demolition Work, portions of the existing structure are opened to the
33 weather, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to close such openings as required in a
34 weathertight manner at the end of each workday.
35
36 3.2 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS
37 A. The Contractor shall remove all demolition material (that is not scheduled for reuse) from the
38 Owner’s site.
39 1. Limestone and brick materials removed and not scheduled for reinstallation shall be
40 reserved and stored for use during this Project for the creation of replacement pieces.
41 2. No prolonged accumulation of debris will be allowed. Debris shall be removed as it
42 accumulates.
43 3. Sale of removed items on the site will not be allowed.
44 4. Debris shall be transported on covered dumpsters or trucks.
45 5. The site is to be broomed clean at the end of each working day.
46 B. No burning on site will be permitted.
47
48 END OF SECTION

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 024150 - 2 HISTORIC SELECTIVE
DEMOLITION/DECONSTRUCTION
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 03 10 00
2 CONCRETE FORMWORK
3
5 1.1 DESCRIPTION
7 1.3 TESTING AND INSPECTION
8 1.4 SUBMITTALS
9 1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
11 2.1 MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES
12 2.2 FORM FINISHES
13 2.3 FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURE
15 3.1 CONSTRUCTION OF TEMPORARY FORMWORK
16 3.2 COORDINATION
17 3.3 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
18 3.4 REMOVAL OF FORMS
19 3.5 FASTENER REMOVAL
20 3.6 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
21 PART 1 - GENERAL
22 1.1 DESCRIPTION
23 A. The General and Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract and Division 1 - General
24 Requirements apply to the work specified in this section.
25 B. This section includes the design, construction and treatment of formwork and related accessories to
26 confine and shape concrete to the required dimensions.
27 C. This section also includes the installation of embedded items such as waterstops, dovetail anchors,
28 flashing reglets, shelf angles, and PVC weeps.
29 D. Structural notes indicated on the drawings regarding concrete formwork shall be considered a part
30 of this specification.
32 A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications, and
33 standards except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified.
34 1. ACI 117 – Standard Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.
35 2. ACI 301 – Standard Specification for Structural Concrete.
36 3. ACI 318 – Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
37 4. ASTM C31 – Standard Specification for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in
38 the Field.
39 5. ASTM C39 – Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Test
40 Specimens.
41 B. Where provisions of the pertinent Codes and Standards conflict with this specification, the more
42 stringent provision shall govern.

CONTRACT #7939 MUNIS #10129 03 10 00 - 1 CONCRETE FORMWORK
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 C. Forest Certification: For the following wood products, provide materials produced from wood
2 obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-
3 001, “FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship.”
4 1. Non-rented temporary concrete formwork
6 A. Inspection and Testing:
7 1. The Owner shall employ an Inspection Agency to perform the duties and responsibilities
8 specified below.
9 2. Refer to architectural, civil, mechanical, and electrical specifications for testing and
10 inspection requirements of non-structural components.
11 3. Work performed on the premises of a fabricator approved by the building official need not
12 be tested and inspected per the table below. The fabricator shall submit a certificate of
13 compliance that the work has been performed in accordance with the approved plans and
14 specification to the building official and the Architect and Engineer of Record.
15 4. Duties of the Inspection Agency:
16 a. Perform all testing and inspection required per the Testing and Inspection
17 Schedule indicated below.
18 b. Furnish inspection reports to the building official, the Owner, the Architect, the
19 Engineer of Record, and the General Contractor. The reports shall be completed
20 and furnished within 48 hours of inspected work.
21 c. Submit a final signed report stating whether the work requiring special inspection
22 was, to the best of the Special Inspection Agency’s knowledge in conformance
23 with the approved plans and specifications.
24 5. Structural Component Testing and Inspection Schedule for Section 03 10 00 is as follows:

Continuous
Periodic
Concrete and Concrete Placement Referenced Standard

Inspect formwork for shape, location and dimensions of X ACI 318: 6.1.1
the concrete member being formed.
25 1.4 SUBMITTALS
26 A. Formwork Release Agent: Submit data on the formwork release agent proposed for use with each
27 form surface to be used for acceptance unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents.
28 Include certification that agent is compatible with finish.
29 B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data for all waterstop profiles supplied for the concrete
30 construction.
31 C. Testing for Formwork Removal: When methods other than cylinder tests are proposed for
32 determining time for formwork removal, submit data on methods for approval.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 D. Pour Sequence: Submit sequence of concrete operations for supported structural slab.
2 E. Shoring: Submit proposed schedule and sequence of stripping formwork and shoring removal.
3 F. Construction Joints: Submit layout of construction joints and details of construction joints.
4 G. LEED Certification: Submit manufacturer’s certification for formwork including the following:
5 1. LEED Credit MRc 4.1/4.2 – Recycled content including percentage of pre-consumer (post-
6 industrial) and post-consumer recycled content. Also provide manufacturer’s name and
7 product cost.
8 2. LEED Credit MRc 5.1/5.2 – Location of manufacturing plant, manufacturer’s name, product
9 cost and location of extraction or harvest of raw materials.
10 3. LEED Credit MRc 7 – Chain-of-custody certificates certifying that wood used for formwork
11 complies with forest certification requirements. Include evidence that manufacturer is
12 certified for chain-of-custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.
13 a. Include statement indicating costs for each certified wood product.
14 1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
15 A. Design and Engineering of formwork is the responsibility of the Contractor. Design and construct
16 formwork, shoring and bracing to conform to Contract Documents and building code requirements.
17 Design for construction loads, lateral pressure, and requirements of the applicable building code.
18 Contractor is responsible for formwork camber calculations.
19 B. Drawings show the design requirements and dimensions for structural strength, but structural
20 drawings do not show all detail dimensions to fit intricate Architectural and mechanical detail.
21 Contractor shall so construct the concrete work that it will conform to the clearance required by the
22 Architectural, Mechanical and Electrical design.
23 C. Maximum deflection of facing materials forming concrete surfaces exposed to view shall be 1/240 of
24 the center-to-center span between structural members of the formwork.
26 2.1 MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES
27 A. Formwork Accessories: Use commercially manufactured accessories for formwork accessories that
28 are partially or completely embedded in concrete, including ties and hangers.
29 B. Formwork Release Agent: Use commercially manufactured form release agents that will prevent
30 formwork absorption of moisture, prevent bond with concrete, and will not stain the concrete surface.
31 Formwork release agent shall be compatible with paint or any other finish applied to the concrete;
32 submit data indicating compatibility.
33 C. Waterstops: Waterstops shall be a flexible butyl rubber and bentonite clay compound that swells
34 upon contact with water. Acceptable manufacturer’s and products:
35 1. CETCO – Waterstop RX
36 2. Greenstreak – Swellstop
37 3. J.P. Specialties – Earth Shield (Type 20 & 23) Waterstop
38 D. Form Material:
39 1. No aluminum shall be allowed in the concrete work unless coated to prevent aluminum-
40 concrete reaction.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2. Concrete form materials must be used in a manner so as to provide the surface finish
2 specified.
3 3. Design formwork in accordance with the provisions of the building code or the following
4 standards if not covered in the building code:
5 a. Wood - AF & PA “National Design Specification”.

6 b. Plywood - American Plywood Association “Plywood Design Specification”.
7 c. Steel - AISC “Manual of Steel Construction - Allowable Stress Design”.
8 d. Cold-formed Steel - AISI “Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual”.
9 e. Aluminum - Aluminum Association “Aluminum Construction Manual”.
10 f. Concrete - ACI 318.
11 g. Other materials - as directed by manufacturer.
12 E. Chamfer Strips:
13 1. Chamfer strips shall be 3/4 inch by 3/4 inch strips. Verify material finish with Architect.
14 2.2 FORM FINISHES
15 A. Rough Form Finish:
16 1. Concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finished work shall have a rough-form finish.
17 No form-facing material is specified for rough-form finish.
18 2. Set and maintain forms so finished concrete dimensions shall conform to the tolerances.
19 Rough form finish is Designated Surface Finish-1.0 from ACI 301, except that surface
20 tolerance Class C is required as specified in ACI 117.
21 B. Smooth Form Finish:
22 1. Concrete surfaces exposed to view in the finished work or surfaces to receive finishes of
23 any type (paint, textured paint, etc.) shall have a smooth form finish. Form-facing material
24 shall be plywood, tempered concrete-form-grade hardboard, metal, plastic, paper, or other
25 acceptable material capable of producing the desired finish. Form-facing material shall
26 produce a smooth, uniform texture on the concrete. Do not use form facing material with
27 raised grain, torn surfaces, worn edges, patches, dents, or other defects that might impair
28 the texture of the concrete surfaces.
29 2. Set and maintain forms so finished concrete dimensions shall conform to the tolerances.
30 Smooth form finish is Designated Surface Finish-3.0 from ACI 301, including surface
31 tolerance Class A as specified in ACI 117.
32 C. Patching and repairing concrete finishes are specified under Section 03 30 00.
34 A. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties
35 designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on
36 removal.
37 1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of the
38 exposed concrete surface.
39 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch in diameter in
40 concrete surface.
41 3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or
42 waterproofing.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 B. Waterstops: Fabricate pieces of premolded waterstop with a maximum practicable length to hold the
2 number of end joints to a minimum. Fabricate joints in waterstops in accordance with manufacturer’s
3 recommendations.
5 3.1 CONSTRUCTION OF TEMPORARY FORMWORK
6 A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic
7 loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure can support such loads.
8 B. At construction joints, lap contact surface of the form sheathing for flush surfaces exposed to view
9 over the hardened concrete in the previous placement by not more than 1 inch. Ensure formwork is
10 held firmly against hardened concrete to prevent offsets or loss of mortar at construction joints and
11 to maintain a true surface.
12 C. Provide watertight formwork when Architectural exposed concrete is specified.
13 D. Unless specified in the Contract Documents, construct formwork so concrete surfaces conform to
14 tolerance limits. The class of surface for offset between adjacent pieces of formwork facing material
15 shall be Class C, unless specified otherwise.
16 E. Provide positive means of adjustment (wedges or jacks) of shores and struts. Do not make
17 adjustments in the formwork after concrete has taken its initial set. Brace formwork securely against
18 lateral deflection and lateral instability.
19 F. To maintain specified tolerances, camber formwork to compensate for anticipated deflections in

20 formwork prior to hardening of concrete. Formwork camber calculations are the responsibility of the
21 formwork designer. Set formwork and intermediate screed strips for slabs accurately to produce
22 designated elevations and contours of the finished surface prior to removal of formwork. Ensure that
23 edge forms and screed strips are sufficiently strong to support vibrating screeds or roller pipe screeds
24 when the finish specified requires the use of such equipment.
25 G. When formwork is cambered, set screeds to a like camber to maintain required concrete thickness.
26 H. Fasten form wedges in place after final adjustment of forms and prior to concrete placement.
27 I. Anchor formwork to shores, supporting surfaces, or members to prevent upward or lateral movement
28 of the formwork system during concrete placement.
29 J. Securely brace and shore forms to prevent displacement and to safely support construction loads.
30 K. Construct formwork for wall openings to facilitate removal and to counteract swelling of wood
31 formwork. Keep wood forms wet as necessary to prevent shrinkage.
32 L. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide
33 crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for
34 inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Chamfer wood inserts for forming keyways,
35 reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
36 M. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
37 N. Provide temporary openings at the base of column and wall formwork and at other points where
38 necessary to facilitate cleaning and inspection.
39 O. Unless noted otherwise, all footings shall be centered under walls, piers or columns.
40 P. Provide runways for moving equipment and support runways directly on formwork or structural
41 member without resting on the reinforcing steel.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 Q. Place sleeves, inserts, anchors, and embedded items required for adjoining work or for support of
2 adjoining work prior to concrete placement.
3 R. Position and support expansion joint material and other embedded items to prevent displacement.
4 Fill voids in sleeves, inserts, and anchor slots temporarily with readily removable material to prevent
5 entry of concrete into voids.
6 S. Projecting corners of beams, walls and columns shall be formed with a 3/4 inch chamfer. Unless
7 noted otherwise on Architectural drawings.
8 T. Clean surfaces of formwork and embedded materials of mortar, grout, and foreign material before
9 concrete is placed.
10 U. Cover surfaces of formwork with acceptable formwork release agent. Apply form release agent
11 before placing reinforcing steel and concrete according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Do
12 not allow formwork release agent to puddle in forms. Do not allow formwork release agent to contact
13 reinforcing steel or hardened concrete against which fresh concrete is to be placed
14 V. Clean and inspect formwork immediately before concrete is placed.
15 W. Provide forms for concrete work adjacent to earth banks including sides of footings, except where
16 footing excavation is vertical rock cut.
17 X. Construct forms plumb and straight to conform to slopes, lines and dimensions shown.
18 Y. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations
19 and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use
20 strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
21 3.2 COORDINATION
22 A. Install all required pipe sleeves, cavities or slots. Notify appropriate trades in due time so that they
23 may furnish information and make necessary installations. Check sizes, location and alignment of
24 all openings, frames and other work, which are to be built-in including electrical boxes and conduit.
25 B. Layout the run of partitions and establish location of openings so that other trades may properly
26 locate their work.
27 C. Core drilling concrete is not permitted unless noted otherwise or approved in writing by the Architect.
28 Notify the Architect in advance of conditions not shown on the drawings.
29 3.3 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
30 A. Built-In Items:
31 1. Confirm with Architect that all materials to be embedded are suitable for embedment in
32 concrete.
33 2. Build in anchors, inserts, and other devices indicated or required for various portions of
34 work.
35 3. Build in sleeves, thimbles, and other items furnished or set in place by other trades.
36 4. Accurately position and support all embedded items prior to concrete placement. Secure
37 embedded items against displacement during concrete placement operations.
38 5. Fill voids with readily removable material to prevent entry of concrete into voids.
39 6. Mechanical and electrical shall provide and set required sleeves.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 7. Coordinate setting of all embedded items.
2 B. Waterstops:
3 1. Locate waterstops in joints where indicated on the Drawings.
4 2. Build in waterstops using longest unbroken lengths possible to hold the number of end
5 splices to a minimum.
6 3. Form splices and intersections strictly according to the manufacturer’s instructions so that
7 waterstops are continuous and develop effective watertight joint.
8 4. Locate waterstops as shown on the Drawings. In general, waterstops should be located

9 just behind outermost layer of reinforcing. Do not place waterstops closer than 2" from face
10 of concrete.
11 3.4 REMOVAL OF FORMS
12 A. When removal of formwork is based on concrete reaching a specified compressive strength, concrete
13 will be presumed to have reached this strength when either of the following requirements has been
14 met:
15 1. Test cylinders, molded and cured under the same conditions for moisture and temperature
16 as used for the concrete they represent, have reached the specified compressive strength.
17 2. Concrete has been cured in accordance with the specifications for the same length of time
18 as laboratory-cured cylinders, which have reached the specified strength. Determine the
19 length of time concrete has been cured in the structure by the cumulative number of days
20 or fractions thereof, not necessarily consecutive, during which the temperature of the air in
21 contact with the concrete is above 50 degrees and the concrete has been damp or
22 thoroughly sealed from evaporation and loss of moisture.
23 B. Forms shall remain in place for the following periods of time. These periods represent cumulative
24 number days or hours, not necessarily consecutive, during which the temperature of the air
25 surrounding the concrete is above 50 F:
26 1. Walls and footings: 50% specified compressive strength or minimum 24 hours.
27 2. One-way floor slabs: 75% specified compressive strength.
28 C. When finishing is required, remove forms as soon as removal operations will not damage concrete.
29 D. Remove top forms on sloping surfaces of concrete as soon as removal will not allow concrete to sag.
30 Perform needed repairs or treatment required at once and follows immediately with specified curing.
31 E. Loosen wood formwork for wall openings when this can be accomplished without causing damage
32 to concrete.
33 F. Do not allow removal of formwork to damage the fresh concrete for columns, walls, sides of beams,
34 and other parts supporting the weight of the concrete. Perform needed repair and treatment required
35 on vertical surfaces at once and follow immediately with specified curing.
36 3.5 FASTENER REMOVAL
37 A. Remove all protruding fasteners left as a result of securing inserts to forms by Contractor responsible
38 for insert.
39 B. Cutting flush with surface is not acceptable.
40 C. Patch exposed concrete surfaces if damaged during fastener removal process.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3.6 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
2 A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise
3 damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release
4 agent.
5 B. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align
6 and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless
7 approved by Architect
8 END OF SECTION

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 03 20 00
2 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
3
5 1.1 DESCRIPTION
8 1.4 SUBMITTALS
9 1.5 COORDINATION
10 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
12 2.1 MATERIALS
13 2.2 FABRICATION
14 2.3 LEED CREDIT
16 3.1 PLACING
17 PART 1 - GENERAL
18 1.1 DESCRIPTION
21 B. This section includes the fabrication and placement of reinforcing steel for concrete, and all related
22 accessories.
23 C. Reinforcing steel for use in bond beams, masonry columns, and lintels is specified in Division 4 and
24 is not a part of the work in this section.
25 D. Structural notes indicated on the drawings regarding concrete reinforcement shall be considered a
26 part of this specification.
28 A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications and
29 standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified.
30 1. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.
31 2. ACI 301 - Standard Specification for Structural Concrete.
32 3. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
33 4. ACI 315 - Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.
34 5. ASTM A82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.
35 6. ASTM A185 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for
36 Concrete.
37 7. ASTM A615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for
38 Concrete Reinforcement.
39 8. AWS D1.4 - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel.
40 9. CRSI - Manual of Standard Practice.
41 B. Where provisions of other pertinent codes and standards conflict with this specification, the more

CONTRACT #7939 MUNIS #10129 03 20 00 - 1 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
4 specified below.
17 c. Submit a final signed report stating whether the work requiring special inspection
18 was, to the best of the Inspection Agency’s knowledge in conformance with the
19 approved plans and specifications.

Continuous
Periodic

Inspection of fabricators and during fabrication. X
Inspection of reinforcing steel and placement. X ACI 318: 3.5, 7.1-7.7
21 1.4 SUBMITTALS
22 A. Placing Drawings: Submit placing drawings showing fabrication dimensions and locations for
23 placement of reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. Indicate bar sizes, spacing, locations,
24 and quantities of reinforcing steel, bending and cutting diagrams, and supporting and spacing
25 devices. Dowels shall be shown in placing drawings for the element that is to be placed first.
26 Reinforcing steel descriptions or shop drawings shall be inch-pound sizes.
27 B. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Submit mill certifications at time of delivery.
28 C. Splices: Submit request for splices not indicated in the Contract Documents. Request shall indicate
29 locations, types, and lengths of splices for approval.
30 D. Field Bending: Submit requests and procedure for field bending or straightening of reinforcement
31 partially embedded in concrete not described in the Contract Documents.
32 E. Reinforcement Relocation: Submit requests to adjust reinforcement spacing necessitated by conflicts

33 with other reinforcement, conduits, etc. for approval.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 F. LEED Certification: Submit manufacturer’s certification for reinforcement including the following:
2 1. LEED Credit MRc 4.1/4.2 – Recycled content, including percentage of pre-consumer (post-
3 industrial) and post-consumer recycled content. Also provide manufacturer’s name, product
4 cost, and steel processing furnace type.
7 1.5 COORDINATION
8 A. Coordinate reinforcement installation with the placement of formwork and other embedded items
9 such as inserts, conduit, pipe sleeves, drains, metal supports, anchor rods, etc.
10 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
11 A. Deliver reinforcement to the jobsite in bundles sorted and labeled with durable tags indicating bar
12 size, length, and shop drawing mark.
13 B. Store elevated clear of ground and protect at all times from contamination and deterioration.
14 C. Prevent bending, coating with earth, oil, or other material, or otherwise damaging the reinforcement.
16 2.1 MATERIALS
17 A. Bar Deformations: Bars used for reinforcement shall be deformed except column spirals and welded
18 wire reinforcement, which may be plain.
19 B. Reinforcing Steel: Reinforcing steel shall conform to the ASTM standard and grade indicated in the
20 General Notes on the Drawings.
21 C. Welded Wire Reinforcement: Welded wire reinforcement shall conform to the ASTM standard
22 indicated in the General Notes on the Drawings.
23 D. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain-steel bars. Cut bars true to length with square ends and free of burrs.
24 E. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
25 reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports according to
26 CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced
27 concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows:
28 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use
29 CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.
30 2. Concrete cast against earth: Bars may be supported by precast concrete bricks or approved
31 prefabricated wire bar supports with footpads large enough to support the weight of the bars
32 and construction traffic without being pushed into underlying grade. Precast concrete blocks
33 shall have a minimum compressive strength of 6,000 psi.
34 F. Epoxy Anchoring System: Epoxy anchoring shall consist of a reinforcing dowel and the epoxy
35 adhesive cartridge.
36 1. Reinforcing shall be as specified earlier in this Section.
37 2. Epoxy injection gel shall consist of a two-component structural epoxy adhesive applied in a
38 dual cartridge dispensing system, which properly mixes the components at the point of
39 application. Refer to General Notes for acceptable epoxy anchoring systems.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2.2 FABRICATION
2 A. Fabrication Tolerances: Reinforcing steel shall be shop fabricated within tolerances to conform in
3 size, shape, quantity, dimensions, etc. to the Construction Drawings and approved Shop Drawings.
4 B. Bar Condition: Bars shall be free from mill scale, excessive rust and other coatings, which would
5 reduce or destroy the bond with the concrete.
6 C. Bars Bending: Bars shall be bent cold, and no method of fabrication shall be used which would be
7 injurious to the material. Heating of bars for bending is not permitted.
8 D. Identification: After fabrication, bars shall be sorted, bundled and tagged with metal tags bearing the
9 bar mark before delivery to the jobsite.
10 E. Corner Bars: Provide corner bars to make reinforcing continuous at all times, including intersections
11 at footings, walls, beams or caps. Such bars shall be the same size and spacing as the horizontal
12 reinforcing and each leg shall have a length of at least 30 inches.
13 F. Continuous reinforcing in slabs shall be lapped as follows unless noted otherwise:
14 1. Top bars Midspan
15 2. Bottom bars Directly over support
16 G. Where slabs are simple span, top bars shall be continuous for full length and hooked down at each
17 end.
18 H. Reinforcing for continuous footings shall extend into spread footings a minimum of 2'-0".
19 I. Dowels between footings and walls or columns shall be the same grade, size and spacing or number
20 as the vertical reinforcing respectively, unless noted otherwise.
21 2.3 LEED CREDIT
22 A. LEED Credit MRc 4.1/4.2:
23 1. Provide steel products made using an Electric Arc Furnace having a minimum recycled
24 content of 80%, including at least 40% post-consumer recycled content and 30% post-
25 industrial recycled content.
26 2. Provide steel products made using a Basic Oxygen Furnace having a minimum recycled
27 content of 25%, including at least 20% post-consumer recycled content and 5% post-
28 industrial recycled content.
29 B. LEED Credit MRc 5.1/5.2:
30 1. Steel products shall be manufactured within 500 miles of project site. Recycled steel
31 products shall be procured from within 500 miles of the project site.
33 3.1 PLACING
34 A. Reinforcement Relocation: When necessary to move reinforcement beyond the specified spacing to
35 avoid interference with other reinforcement, or embedded items, submit resulting arrangement of
36 reinforcement to Engineer for approval.
37 B. Reinforcement Cutting: Cutting of reinforcement which conflicts with embedded objects is not
38 acceptable.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 C. Welded Wire Reinforcement: Extend welded wire reinforcement to within 1 inch of the concrete edge.
2 Lap edges and ends of fabric sheets a minimum of one full mesh square plus 2”. Support welded
3 wire reinforcement during placing of concrete to assure required positioning in the slab. Do not place
4 wire reinforcement on grade or metal deck and raise into position in freshly-placed concrete.
5 D. Wire Tie Orientation: Set wire ties so that ends are directed away from concrete surface.
6 E. Slab on Grade Reinforcement Placement: Place shrinkage and temperature reinforcement 2 inches
7 from the top surface of the slabs on grade unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.
8 F. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing
9 concrete.
10 G. Support for Reinforcement: Unless noted otherwise, supports for reinforcement shall have Class 2
11 protection as defined in the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. Submit data on supports indicating
12 class of protection at all different locations for approval.
13 H. Support for Bars in Concrete Cast on Ground: Bar supports for slabs on grade, grade beams,
14 footings, and all other concrete cast directly onto grade shall be supported at an average spacing of
15 4 feet or less in each direction.
16 I. Securing Reinforcing Bars: All bars must be placed, spaced, secured and supported prior to casting
17 concrete. Bars embedded in hardened or partially hardened concrete shall not be bent unless
18 approved in writing prior to placement by the Engineer of Record.
19 J. Foot Traffic: Restrict foot traffic over the slab on grade reinforcing after it has been properly
20 positioned.
21 K. Reinforcement at Expansion Joints: Do not continue reinforcement or other embedded metal items
22 bonded to concrete through expansion joints. Dowels bonded on only one side of a joint and
23 waterstops may extend through joint.
24 L. Pumping Concrete: When using a pump to place concrete, pump hose shall be supported directly on
25 forms. Do not allow hose to rest on reinforcing bars if doing so could cause displacement of bars.
26 END OF SECTION

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 03 30 00
2 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
3
5 1.1 DESCRIPTION
8 1.4 SUBMITTALS
9 1.5 MATERIAL DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
11 2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS
12 2.2 ADMIXTURES
13 2.3 CURING PRODUCTS
14 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
15 2.5 STRENGTH AND PROPERTIES
16 2.6 LEED CREDITS
18 3.1 PREPARATION
19 3.2 SLABS
20 3.3 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
21 3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
22 3.5 CONCRETE FINISHES AND TOLERANCES
23 3.6 CONCRETE SLAB FINISHES AND TOLERANCES
24 3.7 CONCRETE CURING
25 3.8 SLAB CURING
26 3.9 PENETRATING LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS
27 3.10 JOINT FILLING
28 3.11 APPLICATION OF FLOOR SEALER – FINISH COAT
29 3.12 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING
30 3.13 HOT WEATHER PROTECTION
31 3.14 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE
32 3.15 REPAIR OF DEFECTIVE AREAS
33 3.16 CLEANING
34 PART 1 - GENERAL
35 1.1 DESCRIPTION
38 B. The work includes all items required for executing and completing the cast-in-place concrete work
39 and related work shown on the drawings or specified herein. Work shall include installation of items
40 furnished in other sections of these specifications.
41 C. Concrete paving, walks and curbs are specified in Division 3 or 32.
42 D. Structural notes indicated on the drawings regarding Cast-In-Place concrete shall be considered a
46 standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified herein:
47 1. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.
48 2. ACI 301 - Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete
49 3. ACI 303.1 - Standard Specification for Cast-in-Place Architectural Concrete

CONTRACT #7939 MUNIS #10129 03 30 00 - 1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 4. ACI 305.1 - Specification for Hot Weather Concreting
2 5. ACI 306.1 - Standard Specification for Cold-Weather Concrete
3 6. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
4 7. ASTM C31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
5 Field.
6 8. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
7 9. ASTM C39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
8 Specimens.
9 10. ASTM C42 - Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed
10 Beams of Concrete.
11 11. ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.
12 12. ASTM C143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete.
13 13. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
14 14. ASTM C157 - Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic-Cement
15 Mortar and Concrete
16 15. ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.
17 16. ASTM C172 - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.
18 17. ASTM C173 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
19 Volumetric Method.
20 18. ASTM C231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
21 Pressure Method.
22 19. ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
23 20. ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
24 Concrete.
25 21. ASTM C494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
26 22. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural
27 Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete.
28 23. ASTM C1017 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing
29 Flowing Concrete.
30 24. ASTM C1064 - Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Portland Cement
31 Concrete.
32 25. ASTM C1077 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete
33 Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation.
34 26. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete
35 Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).
36 27. ASTM E154 - Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth
37 Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 28. ASTM E329 –Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of
2 Material Used in Construction
3 29. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) - Manual of Standard Practice.
4 B. Comply with all local building code requirements which are more stringent than those listed above.
5 All referenced codes or standards shall be the most currently adopted as of the date for Receipt of
6 Proposal.
7 C. Where any provision of other pertinent codes and standards conflict with this specification, the more
9 D. Maintain records verifying materials used are of the specified and accepted types and sizes and are
10 in conformance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
11 E. Use of testing services will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to furnish materials and
12 construction in full compliance with the Contract Documents.
16 specified below.
29 c. Submit a final signed report stating whether the work requiring Inspection was, to
30 the best of the Inspection Agency’s knowledge in conformance with the approved
31 plans and specifications.

Continuous
Periodic

Review of proposed mix design and supporting test results X
Inspect bolts to be installed in concrete prior to and during
placement of concrete where allowable loads have been increased X ACI 318: 8.1.3, 21.2.8
or where strength design is used.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
Continuous
Periodic
Inspection of anchors installed in hardened concrete. X ACI 318: 3.8.6, 8.1.3, 21.1.8
Verifying use of required design mix X ACI 318: Ch. 4, 5.2-5.4
At the time fresh concrete is sampled to fabricate specimens for

ASTM C172, ASTM C31, ACI
strength tests, perform slump and air content tests, and determine X
318: 5.6, 5.8
the temperature of the concrete.
Inspection of concrete placement for proper application techniques X ACI 318: 5.9, 5.10
Inspection for maintenance of specified curing temperature and

X ACI 318: 5.11 - 5.13
techniques.
Verification of in-situ concrete strength, prior to removal of shores

X ACI 318: 6.2
and forms from beams and structural slabs
1 B. Sampling and testing requirements:
2 1. Take samples of fresh concrete at the job site for each mix design placed each day.
3 Sampling and testing shall be done after the final addition and proper mixing of any water
4 or admixtures that are added on site.
5 a. Personnel and testing equipment shall meet the requirements of ASTM E329.
6 b. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 150 cu. yd. or
7 5,000 sq ft. of surface area, whichever is less or fraction thereof of each concrete
8 mixture placed each day.
9 1) On a given project, if the total volume of concrete is such that the

10 frequency of testing required above would provide less than five strength
11 tests for a given class of concrete, tests shall be made from at least five
12 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five batches
13 are used.
14 c. A strength test shall be the average of the strengths of two cylinders made from
15 the same sample of concrete and tested at 28 days.
16 2. For each sample of fresh concrete, perform the following duties:
17 a. Measure and record slump in accordance with ASTM C143.
18 b. Measure and record temperature in accordance with ASTM C1064.
19 1) Provide one test hourly when air temperature is 40F (4.4C) and below
20 and when 80F (27C) and above, and one test for each composite
21 sample.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 c. Measure and record air content by volume in accordance with either ASTM C231
2 or ASTM C173.
3 d. Mold three cylinders (laboratory cylinders) in accordance with ASTM C31 to be

4 laboratory-cured. Protect from moisture loss and maintain at 60F to 80F for 24
5 to 48 hours before moving. Deliver cylinders to testing laboratory for curing and
6 testing.
7 e. Mold one cylinder (field cylinder) in accordance with ASTM C31 to be field-cured.
8 Field cylinder shall be placed as near as possible to the in-place concrete from
9 which it was taken, protected, and cured in the same manner. Deliver field-cured
10 cylinder to testing laboratory, and measure and record compressive strength in
11 accordance with ASTM C39. Field cylinder shall be used to determine if concrete
12 footings, walls, or piers have reached the required compressive strength for steel
13 erection to begin.
14 3. Measure and record compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C39 for laboratory
15 cylinders. Test one laboratory cylinder at 7 days and all other cylinders at 28 days.
16 Acceptance is based on the average of the two laboratory cured 28-day tests. Notify
17 Architect in the event strength levels do not meet the acceptance requirements of ACI 318.
18 a. Any additional cylinders molded for Contractor to have a compressive strength test
19 done before seven days shall be at the Contractor's expense.
20 4. Prepare and submit test reports to the Architect, Engineer, Contractor, and Supplier.
21 Reports shall be completed and furnished within 48 hours of testing. Refer to description in
22 Submittals.
23 5. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-

24 cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for
25 protecting and curing in-place concrete.
26 1.4 SUBMITTALS
27 A. Concrete Materials: Submit information on concrete materials as listed below.
28 1. Cementitious materials: Submit type, class, producer name, and certification not more than
29 90 days old of compliance with applicable ASTM standard.
30 2. Aggregates: Submit type, pit or quarry location, producer name, gradations, specific gravity,
31 water content, and certification not more than 90 days old.
32 3. Admixtures: Submit product data sheet. Product data shall include: dosages and
33 performance data, brand names, producers, chloride ion concentrations, and certifications
34 of compliance with applicable ASTM standard. Certifications shall not be more than 90 days
35 old.
36 4. Water: Submit name of source.
37 B. Product Data: Prepare and submit product and performance data for materials and accessories,
38 including patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, finish materials and
39 other concrete related items.
40 C. Testing Agency Qualifications: When requested, the proposed testing agencies shall submit data on
41 qualifications for acceptance.
42 D. Concrete Mix Design:
43 1. Concrete mix design submittals shall be submitted at least 14 days prior to placing concrete.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2. Submit concrete mixture proportions and characteristics for each concrete mix. Include
2 standard deviation analysis or trial batch data with mix design. Submit historical field test
3 data to demonstrate the average compressive strength for approval. Concrete mix
4 proportions, materials, and handling methods for field test data or trial batches shall be the
5 same as used for the work. Include the following information for each mix design:
6 a. Water/cementitious materials ratio.

7 b. Slump per ASTM C143
8 c. Air content per ASTM C231 or ASTM C173
9 d. Unit weight of concrete per ASTM C138
10 e. Compressive strength at 28 days per ASTM C39
11 3. If trial batches are used, submit representative samples of each proposed ingredient to
12 independent testing laboratory for use in preparation of mix design.
13 4. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather,
14 test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. Indicate amounts of mix water to
15 be withheld for later addition at Project site.
16 5. Provide a record copy of the final mix designs and test results to the testing agency prior to
17 commencement of the concrete work.
18 E. LEED Certification: Submit manufacturer’s certification for each concrete product including the
19 following:
20 1. LEED Credit MRc 4.1/4.2 – Recycled content, including percentage by weight of

21 pre-consumer (post-industrial) and post-consumer recycled content. Also provide
22 manufacturer’s name and product cost.
25 F. Concrete Finish Shop Drawings: Submit drawings indicating type of finish to be used at each location.
26 G. Slab-on-Grade Joint Layout: Submit drawings for proposed slab-on-grade control joint and
27 construction joint layout for approval.
28 H. Test Reports: Submit laboratory test reports for concrete materials, mix design, compressive
29 strength, slump, air content, and temperature. Each report shall indicate date of sampling, date of
30 test, mix design, and location of concrete in structure.
31 I. Repair Methods: When stains, rust, efflorescence, and surface deposits must be removed, submit
32 the proposed method of removal.
33 J. Certificates: Submit written certification regarding the design mix from the ready-mix supplier and
34 the admixture manufacturer stating all concrete and admixtures do not contain chloride ions in excess
35 of concentrations specified herein.
36 K. Placement Notification: Notify the Architect at least 24 hours in advance of concrete placement.
37 L. Adjustments: Submit any adjustments to mixture proportions or changes in materials, suppliers, or

38 sources along with supporting documentation during the course of the work.
39 M. Cold Weather Procedure Submittal: Refer to Cold Weather Concreting article in Part 3 for more
40 information.
41 1.5 MATERIAL DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
42 A. Cementitious materials: Store cementitious materials in dry weather tight buildings, bins, or silos that
43 exclude contaminants.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 B. Aggregates: Store and handle aggregate in a manner that will avoid segregation and prevent
2 contamination with other materials or other sizes of aggregates. Store aggregates so as to drain
3 freely.
4 C. Admixtures: Protect stored admixtures against contamination, evaporation, or damage. Protect liquid
5 admixtures from freezing and temperature changes, which would adversely affect their performance.
6 Handle chemical admixtures in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
7 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
8 2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS
9 A. Portland Cement: Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C150, Type I Normal, and be a standard
10 brand of Portland cement. Use one brand of cement throughout project, unless approved in writing
11 by the Engineer. Cement, which conforms to ASTM C150 Type II, may be used if it also meets the
12 requirements of ASTM C150 Type I. Cement used in concrete shall be of the same brand and type
13 as the cement used in the concrete represented by the submitted field test data or used in the trial
14 mixtures. Maintain consistent cement color throughout project unless directed otherwise by
15 architectural requirements.
16 1. Total replacement of Portland cement by supplementary cementitious materials in design

17 mixture shall not exceed 50% (by weight).
18 B. Supplementary Cementitious Materials
19 1. Fly Ash: Fly ash shall conform to ASTM C618, Class C or Class F. Replacement of Portland
20 cement by fly ash shall not exceed the following (percentages are by weight):
21 a. Concrete Flatwork: 15 percent.

22 b. Mass Concrete (more than two feet thick): 50 percent.
23 c. All other concrete: 25 percent.
24 d. Concrete to be placed in cold weather as defined herein: No fly ash allowed unless
25 the cold weather procedure submitted has compensated for the increased setting
26 time and decreased rate of strength gain due to cold weather and fly ash.
27 2. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.
28 a. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slab Limit: 50% by weight of total cementitious

29 materials.
30 b. In mass concrete more than 2 feet thick, the usage rate may be 80% by weight of
31 total cementitious materials.
32 3. Combined Fly Ash and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag:
33 a. Supplementary Cementitious Materials Limit: 50% with fly ash not exceeding 25%
34 by weight of total cementitious materials.
35 b. In mass concrete more than 2 feet thick: 80% with fly ash not exceeding 50% by
36 weight of total cementitious materials.
37 C. Blended Hydraulic Cements
38 1. Portland Blast-Furnace Slag Cement: ASTM C 595, Type IS.
39 a. Blast-Furnace Slag Content: 25% to 50% by weight of total cementitious materials.
40 2. Portland-Pozzolan Cement: ASTM C 595, Type IP.
41 a. Pozzolan Content: 15% to 40% by weight of Pozzolan total cementitious materials.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3. Pozzolan-Modified Portland Cement: ASTM C 595, Type I (PM).
2 a. Pozzolan Content: 0% to 15% by weight of total cementitious materials.
3 4. Slag-Modified Portland Cement: ASTM C 595, Type I (SM.
4 a. Blast-Furnace Slag Content: 0% to 25% by weight of total cementitious materials.
5 D. Coarse Aggregate for Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ASTM C33. Provide coarse aggregate
6 from a single source for exposed concrete. Gradations shall be similar to that described in the
7 following table:
COARSE AGGREGATE GRADATIONS
SIEVE SIZE - PERCENT PASSING
Grade No. 1-1/2" 1" 3/4" 1/2" 3/8" No. 4 No. 16

90-100
4 20-55 0-15 --- 0-5 ---
Note 1
57 100 95-100 --- 25-60 0-10 0-10 ---
67 100 90-100 --- 20-55 0-10 ---
89 --- --- --- 100 90-100 20-55 0-10
8 1. Shall be 100 percent passing the 2" sieve.
9 2. A maximum of 30% of coarse aggregate may be recycled aggregate for footing and grade
10 beam concrete.
11 E. Fine Aggregate for Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ASTM C33. Provide fine aggregate from
12 a single source for exposed concrete. Fine aggregate shall consist of washed sand. Gradations shall
13 be similar to that described in the following table:
FINE AGGREGATE GRADATIONS
SIEVE SIZE - PERCENT PASSING
Grade No. 3/8 No. 4 No. 8 No. 16 No. 50 No. 80 No. 100
FA 100 95-100 80-100 50-85 5-30 --- 0-10
14 1. A maximum of 10% of fine aggregate may be recycled aggregate for footing and grade
15 beam concrete.
16 F. Do not use aggregates containing deleterious substances that could cause spalling on any exterior
17 exposed surface. These include, but are not limited to the following:
18 1. Organic impurities.
19 2. Ferrous metals.
20 3. Soluble salts.
21 4. Coal, lignite, or other lightweight materials.
22 5. Soft particles.
23 6. Clay lumps and friable particles.
24 7. Cherts of less than 2.40 specific gravity.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 G. Water: Mixing water for concrete shall meet the requirements of ASTM C94. Water shall be clean
2 and free from injurious amounts of acids, alkalies, organic materials, chloride ions and oils deleterious
3 to concrete or reinforcing steel.
4 H. Testing agency shall be given access to plants and stockpiles to obtain samples for testing for
5 compliance with the Contract Documents.
6 2.2 ADMIXTURES
7 A. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other

8 admixtures. Calcium chloride thiocyanates or admixtures containing more than 0.05 percent chloride
9 ions by weight are not permitted.
10 B. Water Reducing Admixture: Material shall comply with ASTM C494, Type A. Acceptable
11 manufacturers and products include:
12 1. Euclid Chemical Company - Eucon WR Series.

13 2. Sika Chemical Corp. - Plastocrete 161.
14 3. GRT – Polychem 400 NC.
15 4. Grace Construction Products - WRDA 82.
16 C. High Range Water Reducing Admixture (superplasticizer): Material shall comply with ASTM C494,
17 Type F or Type G. Acceptable manufacturers and products include:
18 1. Euclid Chemical Company - Eucon 37 or Plastol Series.

19 2. Sika – ViscoCrete 2100.
20 3. GRT – Melchem.
21 4. Grace Construction Products - Mira 110.
22 D. High Range Water Reducing, Slump Retaining Admixture: Material shall comply with ASTM C494,
23 Type F or Type G. Acceptable manufacturers and products include:
24 1. Euclid Chemical Company - Eucon 537, Eucon 1037, or Plastol Series.

25 2. Sika – Sikament 686.
26 3. GRT – Melchem – M.
27 4. Grace Construction Products – ADVA FLEX.
28 E. Non-Chloride Accelerator: Material shall comply with ASTM C494, Type C or Type E, and not contain
29 a higher chloride ion concentration than municipal drinking water. Acceptable manufacturers and
30 products include:
31 1. Euclid Chemical Company - Accelguard Series.

32 2. Sika Chemical Corp. - Sika Rapid-1.
33 3. GRT – Polychem HE.
34 4. Grace Construction Products – Lubricon NCA.
35 F. Air Entraining Admixture: Air entraining admixture shall comply with ASTM C260, and be certified by
36 the manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures to be used. Acceptable manufacturers and
37 products include:
38 1. Euclid Chemical Company - Air-Mix or AEA Series.

39 2. Sika Chemical Corporation - Sika-Aer.
40 3. GRT – Polychem VR.
41 4. Grace Construction Products - Darex II or Daravair 1000.
42 G. Set Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Admixture shall contain at least 30% calcium nitrite,
43 while meeting the requirements of ASTM C494 as a Type C admixture. Acceptable manufacturers
44 and products include:
45 1. Euclid Chemical Company - Eucon CIA.

46 2. Grace Construction Products - DCI.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 H. Admixtures used in concrete shall be the same brand, type, and dosage used in concrete represented
2 by field test data or used in trial mixes.
3 2.3 CURING PRODUCTS
4 A. Moisture Retaining Cover
5 1. Plastic Film: Use 6 mil polyethylene film sheet materials that meet the requirements of
6 ASTM C171.
7 2. White burlap-polyethylene sheet meeting ASTM C171.
8 3. Reinforced Curing Paper complying with ASTM C171.
9 4. Moisture Retaining Fabric: A naturally colored, non-woven, polypropylene fabric with a 4-

10 mil, non-perforated reflective (white) polyethylene coating containing stabilizers to resist
11 degradation from ultraviolet light. Fabric shall exhibit low permeability and high moisture
12 retention. Acceptable manufacturers and products include:
13 a. PNA Construction Technologies, Inc: Hydracure M15.

14 b. Reef Industries Incorporated: Transguard 4000.
15 B. Dissipating Resin Curing Compound: Clear, waterborne, membrane-forming curing compound

16 complying with ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B shall be composed of hydrocarbon resins and
17 dissipating agents that begin to break down upon exposure to ultraviolet light and traffic
18 approximately 4 to 6 weeks after application, providing a film that is removable with standard
19 degreasing agents, and mechanized scrubbing actions so as to not impair the later addition of applied
20 finishes.
21 1. Curing compounds used on interior enclosed environments shall be a water-borne product

22 and VOC compliant as required by the U.S. EPA Architectural Coating Rule.
23 C. Non-dissipating Curing Compound: Clear, membrane-forming curing compound complying with

24 ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B.
25 1. Curing compounds used on interior enclosed environments shall be a water-borne product

26 and VOC compliant as required by the U.S. EPA Architectural Coating Rule.
27 D. Curing and Sealing Compound: Clear, membrane-forming curing and sealing compound complying
28 with ASTM C309, Type 1, and ASTM C1315, Type 1, Class A. Compound shall dry to a clear finish,
29 resist yellowing due to ultraviolet degradation and provide a long lasting finish that has high
30 resistance to chemicals, oil, grease, deicing salts, and abrasion.
31 1. Curing and sealing compounds used on interior enclosed environments shall be a water-
32 borne product and VOC compliant as required by the U.S. EPA Architectural Coating Rule.
34 A. Patching Mortar: Non-shrink, non-slump, non-metallic, quick setting. Acceptable manufacturers and
35 products:
36 1. Euclid Chemical Company - Eucospeed.

37 2. BASF - Thorite.
38 3. Adhesive Technologies. - Hard Rok Vertipatch.
39 4. W.R. Meadows - Speed Crete (Red Line).
40 5. Dayton Superior – Re-Crete 20 minute.
41 6. SpecChem - Precast Patch.
42 B. Expansion Joint Material: Preformed, resilient, non-extruding asphalt impregnated resilient fiber
43 conforming to ASTM D1751. Thickness of expansion joint material shall be 1/2” unless noted
44 otherwise on the drawings.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 C. Magnesium phosphate patching cement specially designed for cold weather grouting and anchoring.
2 Acceptable Manufacturer:
3 1. BASF - Set-45.
4 2. Euclid Chemical Company - Eucospeed MP.
5 D. Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A, not less than 10 mils (0.25 mm) thick. Acceptable
6 manufacturers and products:
7 1. Stego Industries, LLC - Stego Wrap.

8 2. W.R. Meadows, Inc. - Perminator.
9 3. Raven Industries - Vapor Block
10 4. Insulation Solutions - Viper VaporCheck II.
11 E. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or
12 siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; colorless; that penetrates, hardens, and
13 densifies concrete surfaces. Acceptable manufacturers and products:
14 1. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc. - Intraseal

15 2. Curecrete Chemical Co., Inc. - Ashford Formula
16 3. Dayton Superior Corporation - Day-Chem Sure Hard (J-17)
17 4. Euclid Chemical Company - Eucosil
18 5. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. - Seal Hard
19 6. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc - Vexcon Starseal PS
20 7. SpecChem - SpecHard
21 F. Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and

22 anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel
23 reinforcement in concrete. Acceptable manufacturers and products:
24 1. Axim Concrete Technologies - Catexol 1000CL

25 2. Cortec Corporation - MCI 2000 or MCI 2005
26 3. W. R. Grace & Co - DCI or DCI-S
27 4. Master Builders, Inc. - Rheocrete 222
28 5. Sika Corporation - FerroGard-901
29 6. Euclid Chemical Company - Eucon CIA
30 G. Control Joint Filler: Flexible, single-component polyurethane sealant with backer rod compliant with
31 ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25. Apply sealant per manufacturers written
32 recommendations. Acceptable manufacturers and products:
33 1. Dayton Superior – Perma 230 SL.

34 2. Euclid Chemical Company – Eucolastic I.
35 3. Sonneborn – Sonolastic SL 1.
36 H. Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, abrasive

37 aggregate of fused aluminum-oxide granules or crushed emery with emery aggregate containing not
38 less than 50 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 25 percent ferric oxide; unaffected by freezing,
39 moisture, and cleaning materials.
40 2.5 STRENGTH AND PROPERTIES
41 A. Concrete Mix Designs: Refer to Drawings for specified compressive strength. Proportion concrete
42 mixes according to the properties in the following tables. The concrete supplier may produce a mix
43 at a lower water-cement ratio to allow for adjustment of slump at the site by adding water. The addition
44 of site water shall be in accordance with ASTM C94, and the total water-cement ratio shall not exceed
45 the value specified below.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
Coarse Fine
Aggregate Aggregate Range of Max.
Class Gradation Gradation Slump w/c Air Content Other Requirements
A 57 or 67 FA 1" to 4" 0.40 5% to 8%
B 57 or 67 FA 1" to 4" 0.45 5% to 8%
C 57 or 67 FA 1" to 4" 0.50 —

Use water reducing
D 57 or 67 FA 4" to 6" 0.50 — admixture to achieve
slump specified
E 4 or 57 FA 1" to 4" 0.50 —
F 4 or 57 FA 5" to 8" 0.50 — Use retarder
H 89 FA 5" to 8" 0.50 —

Maximum 107-116
J Lightweight FA 5” max 0.5 4% to 7%
pcf dry density
1 Note: w/c = water-cementitious materials ratio.
2 B. Schedule of Concrete Classes: Provide concrete of the specified class according to the following
3 schedule.
4 1. Footings: Class E
5 2. Exterior foundation walls and piers: Class B
6 3. Interior piers: Class C
7 4. Retaining walls: Class B
8 5. Interior slabs on grade: Class D
9 6. Interior slab on metal decks: Class D
10 7. Floor topping: Class H
11 8. Unless noted otherwise: Class B
12 C. Slump of Superplasticized Concrete: Concrete containing high-range water reducing admixtures

13 (superplasticizer) shall have 8" maximum slump, unless otherwise approved by Structural Engineer.
14 Concrete shall arrive at job site with 2" to 3" slump, be verified, then high range water reducing
15 admixture added to increase slump to approved level.
16 D. Accelerators: Add non-chloride accelerator to all concrete slabs placed at air temperatures below
17 50F.
18 E. Water Reducer: Add water reducing admixture or high range water reducing admixtures
19 (superplasticizers) as follows:
20 1. All pumped concrete.

21 2. Fiber reinforced concrete.
22 3. As required for placement or workability.
23 4. As required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
24 5. Concrete with water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.
25 F. No other admixtures shall be used unless approved by Structural Engineer of record.
26 G. Chlorides: Admixtures or other ingredients including aggregates containing calcium chloride or more
27 than 0.05% chloride ions by weight shall not be used.
28 H. Workability: Concrete shall have a workability such that it will fill the forms without voids,
29 honeycombs, or rock pockets with proper vibration without permitting materials to separate or excess
30 water to collect on the surface.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 I. Concrete Temperatures: Minimum concrete temperature of fresh concrete varies in relation to

2 average air temperature over a 24-hour period as follows:
3 1. Air temperature below 0F Concrete temperature 70F min.

4 2. Air temperature 0F to 30F Concrete temperature 65F min.
5 3. Air temperature 30F to 50F Concrete temperature 50F min.
6 4. Air temperature above 50F No minimum temperature
7 The maximum temperature of concrete at the time of delivery shall be 90F. When concrete
8 temperature exceeds 90F, concrete supplier shall attempt to reduce temperature by shading
9 aggregates and cement and cooling mix water. When these methods fail to reduce concrete
10 temperature below 90F, supplier shall use ice in the water to reduce the concrete temperature.
11 2.6 LEED CREDITS
12 A. LEED Credit MRc 4.1/4.2 –Concrete flatwork shall contain at least 15% recycled cement (slag
13 cement and fly ash). Concrete footings and drilled piers shall contain at least 50% recycled content.
14 All other concrete shall contain at least 25% recycled cement.
15 B. LEED Credit MRc 5.1/5.2 – Concrete shall be manufactured within 500 miles of the project site.
16 Aggregate, sand and water shall be procured form within 500 miles of the project site.
18 3.1 PREPARATION
19 A. Do not place concrete until data on materials and mix designs have been approved, Architect has
20 been notified, and all other affected trades have coordinated their work.
21 B. Remove snow, ice, frost, water, mud, and other foreign material from surfaces, reinforcing bars and
22 embedded items against which concrete will be placed.
23 C. Do not allow form release agent to contact reinforcing bars.
24 3.2 SLABS
25 A. Slab on Grade:
26 1. All interior slabs on grades shall have a polyethylene vapor retarder conforming to ASTM
27 E1745. Lap all joints minimum 6” and seal edges with adhesive tape. Fit vapor retarder
28 around utilities and seal with adhesive tape as required. Place, protect, and repair vapor-
29 retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.
30 2. Refer to Drawings and Section 31 23 00 for required sub-grade preparation beneath slabs
31 on grade.
32 3. Where vapor retarder is not used below slab on grade, wet sub-grade below slab prior to
33 placing concrete. Subgrade shall be moist with no free water and no muddy or soft spots.
34 4. Saw cut control joints: Cut with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or
35 diamond-rimmed blades. Cut joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade,
36 or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.
37 Control joints shall be located along column lines, with intermediate joints spaced at a
38 maximum distance of 36 times the slab thickness, unless noted otherwise. Control Joints
39 shall be continuous, not staggered or offset. Slab panels shall have a maximum length to
40 width ratio of 1.5 to 1. Provide additional control joints at all reentrant or isolated corners
41 formed in the slab on grade. Refer to Drawings for typical control joint detail.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 5. Provide isolation joints around each column, against grade beams and along foundation
2 walls. Form isolation joints with 1/2" expansion joint material. Extend isolation joint
3 material full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless
4 otherwise indicated.
5 6. Depress slabs as required for mats architectural finishes, pits and kitchen equipment.
6 Obtain layout and locations from Architect.
7 7. Verify completion of all under slab work with mechanical and electrical trades before placing
8 slabs.
9 8. Slope slabs as indicated on Drawings and to provide positive drainage. Slope slab keeping
10 bottom level and varying top. Maintain minimum thickness of concrete as indicated on
11 Drawings. Refer to floor finishes for tolerances.
12 B. All slabs not on grade (all supported slabs), including slabs-on-steel decking and cast-in-place
13 concrete slabs:
14 1. Supported slabs have deflections that may cause areas of concrete to have thicknesses
15 greater than indicated on the Drawings. Contractor is expected to provide that volume as
16 needed to finish the floor at the specified elevation. If specified floor finish tolerances are
17 not achieved during the concrete floor construction, after formwork removal, the Contractor
18 shall install, at no cost to the project, a self-leveling cementitious underlayment (Master
19 Builders Mastertop 110 Underlayment or approved equal) to correct the floor flatness and
20 levelness.
21 C. Embedded Items:
22 1. The outside diameter of embedded conduit or pipe shall not exceed one-third of the slab
23 thickness in structural slabs, including at crossovers, and shall be placed between the top
24 and bottom reinforcing with a minimum 3” clear cover. Conduit or pipe running parallel to
25 each other shall be spaced at least 8” apart and no more than 2 runs stacked vertically in
26 the slab. Conduit or pipe shall not be embedded in any supported slab less than 6” thick.
27 No embedded conduit or pipe is allowed in any concrete slab-on-steel deck.
28 3.3 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
29 A. Construction Sequence Submittal: Contractor shall submit a construction sequence indicating

30 construction joints and the pour sequence.
31 B. Vertical: Locate vertical construction joints in walls not farther than a maximum of 100 feet on center.
32 Coordinate joint locations with architectural design.
33 C. Horizontal: Locate horizontal joints in walls, piers and columns at underside of slabs, beams and
34 girders and at the top of slabs and footings unless otherwise indicated. At least 24 hours shall elapse
35 between placing concrete in a wall, beam or column and placing concrete in an area supported by
36 the walls, beams or columns, unless approved in writing by Structural Engineer.
37 D. Reinforcing: Stop all welded wire reinforcement and/or reinforcing at construction joint in slabs on
38 grade and provide dowel bars as detailed. Provide reinforcement at other construction joints as
39 detailed. Roughen and thoroughly clean the surface of the concrete, remove all laitance, and wet the
40 surface before placing new concrete against the joint. Slush vertical joints with a neat cement grout
41 before placing new concrete.
42 E. Wall Control Joints: Locate vertical control joints in exposed walls at a minimum uniform spacing not
43 to exceed 25 feet-0 inches. Coordinate joint locations with Architectural Drawings.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
2 A. Place concrete as continuously as possible until placement is complete. Do not place against
3 concrete that has attained initial set, except at authorized joints. If, for any reason, concrete pour is
4 delayed for more than 45 minutes, bulkhead off pour at last acceptable construction joint.
5 Immediately remove excess concrete and clean forms.
6 B. Do not begin to place concrete during periods of rain, sleet or snow unless adequate protection is
7 provided.
8 C. No concrete shall be cast onto or against sub-grades containing free water, frost, ice or snow.
9 D. Notify the architect in advance if concrete is to be pumped.
10 E. Do not place concrete until all reinforcement is in place, forms have been thoroughly cleaned and
11 approval has been given.
12 F. Do not accept concrete delivered to the job site more than 90 minutes after initial mixing.
13 G. Concrete from its point of release to mixers, hoppers, or conveyances, shall not be permitted to drop
14 more than 5 feet (10 feet for concrete containing high range water reducers). Deposit concrete
15 directly into conveyances and directly from conveyances to final points of deposit. Sufficient
16 transportation equipment in good working order shall be on hand before work begins. All conveying
17 equipment must be clean and kept clean during concreting operations. Take every possible
18 precaution to prevent segregation or loss of ingredients.
19 H. Deposit concrete in wall forms in layers not greater than 12 inches in depth, each layer being
20 compacted by internal vibration before succeeding layer is placed.
21 I. Place concrete as near as possible to its final position to prevent segregation. Do not use vibrators
22 to transport concrete within forms. Consolidate concrete in walls, columns, beams and slabs or joist
23 construction thicker than 8" with internal vibrators (8,000 to 12,000 V.P.M.). Slabs less than 8" thick
24 may be consolidated with internal vibrators (9,000 to 13,500 V.P.M.) or vibrating screeds supported
25 on forms, boards or rails, approved by Structural Engineer, supplement vibration by forking or
26 spading by hand along surfaces adjacent to forms and construction joints.
27 J. Re-tempering of concrete will not be permitted. Concrete that has obtained its initial set shall be
28 discarded.
29 K. Exercise care in placing concrete over waterproof membranes, rigid insulation and/or protection
30 boards to avoid damaging those materials. Report damage immediately, and do not proceed until
31 damage is repaired.
32 L. Remove loose debris from surfaces, thoroughly wet and slush with a neat cement grout immediately
33 before placing new concrete, or apply bonding compound to surface and let dry before placing new
34 concrete.
35 M. Protect existing concrete work to be exposed to view and other finished materials from damage and
36 staining resulting from concreting operations. Handle concrete carefully to avoid dripping and
37 spillage. Remove spilled concrete from existing surfaces immediately. Covering sills, ledges, and
38 other surfaces with protective coverings may be necessary to protect the work.
39 N. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work
40 of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place
41 construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete Work.
42 O. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items.
43 Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel-finish concrete
44 surfaces.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3.5 CONCRETE FINISHES AND TOLERANCES
2 A. Exposed Smooth Formed Surfaces: Remove forms and perform necessary repairs and patch to
3 produce surface finish-3.0 as specified in ACI 301. Apply the following to smooth-formed finished
4 concrete exposed to view in the finished work. Confirm finishes with architect prior to concrete
5 placement by submitting shop drawings indicating locations of all types of finishes.
6 1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete
7 surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color
8 and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.
9 B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
10 adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed
11 surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed
12 surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
13 3.6 CONCRETE SLAB FINISHES AND TOLERANCES
14 A. Trowel Finish:
15 1. Screed concrete to an even plane, float, then power trowel the surface.
16 2. Hand trowel the surface smooth and free of trowel marks. Continue hand troweling until a
17 ringing sound is produced as the floor is troweled.
18 3. Provide trowel finish as indicated on the Drawings and at the following locations:
19 a. Concrete floors exposed in finished work unless otherwise indicated.

20 b. Slabs to receive curing compounds and sealers.
21 c. Slabs to receive resilient flooring or carpet.
22 d. Slabs to receive waterproof membranes.
23 B. Fine Broom Finish:
24 1. Screed concrete to an even plane, float, then power trowel the surface. Provide fine hair
25 broom finish perpendicular to slope, free of loose particles, ridges, projections, voids and
26 concrete droppings.
27 2. Provide fine broom finish as indicated on the Drawings and at the following locations:
28 a. Stoop slabs.
29 b. Raised curbs and walkway areas.
30 c. Slabs to receive thin set ceramic tile.
31 C. Broom Finish:
32 1. Screed concrete to an even plane and then float. Immediately after concrete has received
33 a floated finish, give the concrete surface a coarse transverse scored texture by drawing a
34 coarse broom across the surface.
35 2. Provide as indicated on the Drawings and at the following locations:
36 a. ADA ramp slabs.

37 b. Exterior walkway slabs.
38 D. Float Finish:
39 1. Screed concrete to an even plane then float.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2. Provide as indicated on the Drawings and at the following locations:
2 a. Slabs to directly receive concrete topping.
3 b. Roof slabs to receive loose laid roof insulation.
4 E. Floor Finish Tolerances: Floor finish tolerances shall be measured by placing a freestanding
5 (unleveled) 10 foot straightedge anywhere on the slab and allowing it to rest upon two high spots
6 within 72 hours after placement of slab and removal of shoring (if present). The gap at any point
7 between the straightedge and the floor (and between the high spots) shall not exceed:
8 1. Slab on Grade: 1/4”
9 2. Suspended Slabs: 1/4”
10 F. Slab Drainage: Finish all concrete slabs to proper elevations to insure that all surface moisture will
11 drain freely to floor drains, and that no puddle areas exist. Contractor shall bear the cost of
12 corrections to provide positive drainage.
13 G. Special Tolerances for Concrete Slabs: No abrupt change in vertical elevation of 1/4" or more is
14 acceptable at the interface between slabs and within areas where pedestrian traffic is expected:
15 3.7 CONCRETE CURING
16 A. Freshly placed concrete shall be protected from premature drying and excessively hot temperatures.
17 B. Concrete other than high-early strength shall be maintained above 50F and in a moist condition for
18 at least the first 7 days after placement, except when special curing is used. Special curing
19 procedures shall not be used without written permission from the Structural Engineer of Record.
20 C. Formed surfaces shall be cured by leaving the formwork in place during the curing period.
21 D. Protect concrete from excessive changes in temperature during the curing period and at the
22 termination of the curing process. Changes in the temperature of the concrete shall be as uniform
23 as possible and shall not exceed 5F in any one hour or 50F in any 24 hour period.
24 E. Protect concrete from injury from the elements until full strength is developed. Protect from
25 mechanical injury.
26 F. During cold weather construction, all footings shall be protected from frost penetration until the
27 building is enclosed and temporary heat is provided.
28 3.8 SLAB CURING
29 A. Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from concrete
30 surface. Use one of the methods described below.
31 B. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing for Concrete Floors not Exposed in Final Condition: Cover concrete
32 surface with waterproof sheet material as soon as finishing operations are complete and the concrete
33 is sufficiently hard to be undamaged by covering. The cover shall be placed flat on the concrete
34 surface, avoiding wrinkles. Sprinkle concrete with water as necessary during application of covering.
35 Place in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and seal with
36 waterproof tape or adhesive. Verify that the concrete is continuously wet under the sheets; otherwise,
37 add water through soaker hoses under the sheets. Weight down covering to prevent displacement.
38 Immediately repair any holes or tears during the curing period using polyethylene sheet and
39 waterproof tape. Curing process shall be maintained for a minimum of 7 days.
40 C. Moisture-Retaining-Fabric Curing for Concrete Floors to Remain Exposed: Cover concrete surface
41 with moisture retaining fabric as soon as finishing operations are complete and the concrete is
42 sufficiently hard to be undamaged by covering. The cover shall be installed in accordance with
43 manufacturer’s written recommendations, in largest practical widths. Wet the slab to rejection, then

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 thoroughly wet fabric side of cover and install with poly side up. Lap over adjacent covers a minimum
2 of 18”. Wet all laps and outside edges to prevent displacement and to ensure intimate contact with
3 concrete and adjacent covers. Rewet as necessary and protect covers from damage during curing
4 process.
5 1. After minimum 7-day cure, remove moisture retaining fabric in sections.
6 2. A maximum of 3,500 square feet of concrete curing cover may be removed at any one time.
7 At no time shall the exposed area be permitted to dry prior to completion of the floor
8 scrubbing process.
9 3. Using a high powered floor scrubber capable of a minimum 80 pounds head pressure, and
10 a mild citrus-based detergent that does not damage or mar the surface in any way, scrub
11 the floor to remove any minerals or soluble salts that may have accumulated at the floor
12 surface. Rinse area thoroughly with clean fresh water. Remove water and allow floor to
13 dry. If whitening occurs during drying, repeat scrubbing process before floor dries until no
14 whitening occurs during drying.
15 4. All areas of the floor shall remain wet during floor scrubbing process. Expose only the
16 amount of floor surface that can be cleaned before any drying occurs without exceeding the
17 maximum allowable exposed area.
18 D. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by low pressure spray equipment or
19 roller as soon as finishing operations are complete, free water on the surface has disappeared and
20 no water sheen can be seen. Follow the manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected
21 to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair
22 damage during curing period. Verify compatibility of the curing compound with paint, finishes, or
23 toppings that require positive bond to the concrete. If curing compound is not compatible with paint
24 finishes or toppings, utilize a dissipating curing compound and remove in accordance with the
25 manufacturer’s recommendations.
26 3.9 PENETRATING LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS
27 A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment
28 according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
29 B. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and complete surface
30 repairs in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
31 C. Do not apply to concrete that is less than seven days old.
32 D. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet; and repeat
33 brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry. Apply a
34 second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous.
36 A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.
37 B. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.
38 C. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of
39 joint clean and dry.
40 D. Install semi-rigid joint filler in saw-cut joints and in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush
41 with top of joint after hardening.
42 3.11 APPLICATION OF FLOOR SEALER - FINISH COAT
43 A. Give concrete floors as indicated in Room Finish Schedule and where exposed in finished Work,
44 second coat of curing and sealing compound immediately prior to Substantial Completion.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 B. Clean floors and apply sealer strictly according to manufacturer's instructions. Dilution and coverage
2 shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Apply sealer evenly.
3 3.12 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING
4 A. Definition: Cold weather shall be defined as a period when for more than three successive days the
5 average daily outdoor temperature drops below 40F. The average daily temperature is the average
6 of the highest and lowest temperature during the period from midnight to midnight. When
7 temperatures above 50F occur during more than half of any 24 hour duration, the period shall not
8 be regarded as cold weather.
9 B. All cast-in-place concrete work occurring during cold weather shall conform to all requirements of
10 ACI 306.1, “Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting”, published by the American
11 Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, except as modified by the contract documents or this
12 specification.
13 C. Planning: The General Contractor, concrete contractor, concrete supplier and the architect shall have
14 a pre-construction conference to outline the cold weather concreting operations concerning the
15 placing, finishing, curing and protection of the concrete during cold weather. Pre-construction
16 conference shall occur before cold weather is expected to occur.
17 D. Detailed procedure submittal: Concrete contractor shall prepare and submit for review detailed
18 procedures for the production, transportation placement, protection, curing and temperature
19 monitoring of concrete during cold weather. Include procedures to be implemented upon abrupt
20 changes in weather conditions. Do not begin cold weather concreting until these procedures have
21 been reviewed and approved.
22 E. Mixing: Concrete flatwork poured in cold weather shall be proportioned to obtain a lower slump to
23 minimize the amount of bleed water during finishing. All bleed water should be skimmed off flatwork
24 prior to troweling. Concrete that will be exposed to cycles of freezing and thawing while saturated
25 should be properly air entrained as outlined in this specification.
26 F. Protection of Concrete: Cure and protect concrete against damage from freezing for a minimum
27 period of 72 hours, unless approved by the structural engineer. The protection period may be reduced
28 according to ACI 306.1 requirements. Concrete contractor shall submit a letter of request to reduce
29 the protection period, by outlining the method used to achieve the reduction per ACI 306.1.
30 1. When practical for the construction schedule, formwork shall be insulated and remain in
31 place for at least the required protection period.
32 G. Concrete Temperatures: The minimum temperature of concrete immediately after placement shall
33 be as specified in the following table.
Mixing Temperatures
Section Minimum temperature Maximum gradual
Size of concrete as placed decrease in surface Above 0 to 30F Below
and maintained temperature during 30F 0F
during the protection any 24 hours after the
period end of the protection.
< 12 in 55F 50F 60F 65F 70F
12-36 in 50F 40F 55F 60F 65F
36-72 in 50F 30F 50F 55F 60F
> 72 in 50F 20F 45F 50F 55F
34 H. Mixing Temperatures: As the ambient air temperature decreases the concrete mixing temperature
35 shall be increased to compensate for the heat lost in the period between mixing and placement. The
36 concrete supplier shall use one or both of the following methods for increasing the concrete
37 temperature.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 1. Heating the mixing water to a temperature necessary to offset the temperature losses during
2 transport. Supplier shall not heat water to temperatures in excess of 140F, without taking
3 special precautions as outlined in ACI 306.
4 2. Heating the aggregate with a circulated steam piping system.
5 I. Temperature measurements: The Contractor shall be responsible for monitoring and recording the
6 concrete temperatures during placement and throughout the protection period.
7 1. Inspection personnel shall keep a record of the date, time, outside air temperature,
8 temperature of concrete as placed, and weather conditions.
9 2. Temperature of the concrete and the outside air shall be recorded at regular intervals but
10 not less than twice in a 24 hour period. The record shall include temperatures at several
11 points within the enclosure and on the concrete surface of sufficient frequency to determine
12 a range of temperatures.
13 3. Inspection agency shall submit the temperature logs to the Architect for permanent job
14 records.
15 3.13 HOT WEATHER PROTECTION
16 A. Definition: Hot weather shall be defined as any combination of high ambient temperature, low relative
17 humidity, high winds and intense solar radiation that leads to higher than usual evaporation. The
18 table below defines low relative humidity based on air temperature. For a given air temperature, if
19 the relative humidity is equal to or less than the specified minimum, provisions for hot weather
20 concreting shall be as follows:
Air Temperature Minimum Relative Humidity

105F 90%
100F 80%
95F 70%
90F 60%
85F 50%
80F 40%
75F 30%
21 B. Scheduling: When hot weather is expected, adjust concrete placement schedules to avoid placing or
22 finishing during the period from noon until 3:00 pm. When possible, slab pours should be delayed
23 until the building is enclosed to protect the concrete from wind and direct sunlight, Construction
24 schedule shall account for 7 day moist curing period.
25 C. Mixing: Concrete supplier shall adjust mix designs and admixtures to minimize slump loss. Concrete
26 shall be mixed at a water-cement, which is lower than the specified maximum to allow for the
27 adjustment of slump by addition of water in the field. Water reduction shall be accomplished without
28 reducing initial slump by increasing dosage of water reducing admixture.
29 D. Preparation: Do not order concrete earlier than is required to avoid delays. Cool forms, subgrades
30 and reinforcing bars with water spray from fog nozzle prior to concrete placement.
31 E. Delivery: Site traffic shall be coordinated and delivery times scheduled to minimize waiting times for
32 concrete trucks.
33 F. Placement: Preparations shall be made to place and consolidate the concrete at the fastest possible
34 rate. Maintain a continuous flow of concrete to the job site to avoid development of cold joints, during
35 placement of slabs, apply fog spray to prevent moisture loss without causing surplus water to stand
36 on concrete surface.
37 G. Finishing: Finish concrete as fast as practical. Continue fogging concrete during finishing. Where
38 fogging is not possible, apply sprayable moisture-retaining film between finishing passes.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 H. Curing: Formed concrete shall be covered with a waterproof material to retain moisture. Flat work
2 shall be moisture cured as described in this specification. Moist curing shall continue for at least 7
3 days.
4 3.14 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE
5 A. Independent Testing Agency and Inspector shall each perform their prescribed inspection, sampling,
6 and testing services as described in Part 1 of this specification section.
7 B. In cases where samples have not been taken or tests conducted as specified or strength of laboratory
8 test cylinders for a particular portion of the structure fails to meet requirements of ACI 301, for
9 evaluation of concrete strength, Structural Engineer shall have the right to order compressive or
10 flexural test specimens or both be taken from the hardened concrete according to ASTM C42, load
11 tests according to ACI 318, or such other tests as may be necessary to clearly establish the strength
12 of the in situ concrete, and such tests shall be paid for by the Contractor.
13 3.15 REPAIR OF DEFECTIVE AREAS
14 A. All repair of defective areas shall be made, with prior approval of Architect, as to method and
15 procedure, in accordance with Section 5 of ACI 301, except specified bonding compound must be
16 used.
17 B. Patch form tie holes at the following locations:
18 1. Unfinished exposed concrete (not scheduled for painting, plus at board formed concrete
19 finish).
20 2. All other areas: Prime voids with bonding compound and fill with patching mortar. Strike
21 flush without overlap, float to uniform texture to match adjacent surfaces.
22 3. Exposed areas scheduled for spray texture:
23 a. Remove projections and protrusions: 1/16" or larger.

24 b. Remove continuous ridges 1/32" or larger.
25 c. Fill voids and pin holes.
26 4. Exposed areas scheduled for paint or epoxy:
27 a. Remove projections, ridges, and other protrusions 1/32" or larger.

28 b. Fill voids and pin holes 1/16" or larger.
29 5. Exposed areas not scheduled for paint or other finishes:
30 a. Remove projections, ridges and other protrusions not conforming to requirements

31 specified under Section 03 10 00.
32 b. Fill voids and pin holes not conforming to requirements specified under Section
33 03 10 00.
34 C. All structural repairs shall be made, with prior approval of the Architect/Engineer, as to method and
35 procedure, using the specified epoxy adhesive and/or epoxy mortar.
36 D. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls,
37 air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and
38 other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
39 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than
40 1/2 inch in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 1 inch in depth. Make edges
41 of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes
42 and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent
43 has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with
44 bonding agent.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white Portland cement and
2 standard Portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color.
3 Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before
4 proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than
5 surrounding surface.
6 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural
7 performance as determined by Architect.
8 E. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify
9 surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to
10 drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.
11 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,
12 honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate
13 to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other
14 objectionable conditions.
15 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
16 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing
17 operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired
18 areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
19 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment.
20 Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written
21 instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match
22 adjacent floor elevations.
23 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low
24 areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor
25 elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's
26 written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.
27 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter,
28 by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square
29 cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch clearance all around. Dampen
30 concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching
31 concrete of same materials and mix as original concrete except without coarse aggregate.
32 Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner
33 as adjacent concrete.
34 7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar.
35 Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose
36 particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching
37 mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match
38 adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
39 3.16 CLEANING
40 A. Clean exposed concrete to remove laitance, efflorescence and stains.
41 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 03 35 43
2 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING
5 1.2 SUMMARY
6 1.3 DEFINITIONS
11 2.1 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS
13 3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
14 3.3 SEALED CONCRETE INSTALLATION
15 PART 1 - GENERAL

18 Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
19 1.2 SUMMARY
20 A. Section includes sealed concrete finishing for existing and new concrete floors.
21 1.3 DEFINITIONS
22 A. Design Reference Sample: Sample designated by Architect in the Contract Documents that reflects
23 acceptable surface quality and appearance of sealed concrete.

25 A. Product Data: For each type of product.
26 B. LEED Submittals:
27 1. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4.3: For cleaning solvents and liquid floor treatments,
28 documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the
29 California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile
30 Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

32 A. Mockup: Refer to Section 01 43 39 – Mockups for description of construction required to complete a mockup
33 submittal for review.

35 A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction
36 activities.
38 2.1 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

39 A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatments for Sealed Concrete Finish (SEAL-1): Clear, waterborne solution of
40 inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates, hardens,
41 and is suitable for sealed concrete surfaces.
42 1. Liquid floor treatments shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
43 Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic
44 Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
45 B. Solvent Cleaning Liquids:
46 1. Flooring Adhesive Remover:
47 a. Contains no Methylene Chloride.
48 b. Biodegradable and water clean-up.
49 2. Basis of Design: BEHR® NO. 995 Flooring Adhesive Remover

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 033543 - 1 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
2 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

3 A. Sealed Concrete (CFF-1): Level 1 – Flat (Ground), 100 grit.
4 B. Apply sealed concrete finish system to cured and prepared slabs to match accepted mockup.
5 1. Machine grind floor surfaces to receive sealed finishes level and smooth.
6 2. Apply penetrating liquid floor treatment for sealed concrete in polishing sequence and according to
7 manufacturer's written instructions, allowing recommended drying time between successive coats.
8 3. Continue polishing with progressively finer-grit diamond polishing pads to gloss level, to match
9 approved mockup.
10 4. Control and dispose of waste products produced by grinding and polishing operations.
11 5. Neutralize and clean sealed floor surfaces.
12 3.2 SEALED CONCRETE INSTALLATION

13 A. Prepare surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
14 1. Clean concrete thoroughly by scraping, applying solvents or stripping agents, sweeping and pressure
15 washing, or scrubbing with a rotary floor machine and detergents. Rinse until water is clear and allow
16 surface to dry.
17 2. Test surfaces with droplets of water. If water beads and does not penetrate surface, or penetrates
18 only in some areas, profile surfaces by grinding, sanding, or abrasive blasting. Retest and continue
19 profiling surface until water droplets immediately darken and uniformly penetrate concrete surfaces.
20 B. Penetrating Sealer: Apply penetrating sealer to concrete surfaces according to manufacturer's written
21 instructions and as follows:
22 END OF SECTION

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 033543 - 2 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 03 53 00
2 CONCRETE TOPPING
5 1.2 SUMMARY
9 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
12 2.1 CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPINGS (TPNG-1)
14 3.1 PREPARATION
15 3.2 FLOOR TOPPING APPLICATION
16 3.3 PROTECTING AND CURING
18 3.5 REPAIR
19 PART 1 - GENERAL

23 1.2 SUMMARY
25 1. Self-Leveling Portland Cement and Underlayment for placement over existing concrete substrate.

27 A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


31 A. Product Test Reports: For each concrete floor topping, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

33 A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's labels
34 indicating brand name and directions for storage, mixing with other components, and application.
35 B. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration from moisture or
36 other detrimental effects.

38 A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature and
39 moisture content, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting concrete
40 floor topping performance.
41 B. Close areas to traffic during topping application and, after application, for time period recommended in
42 writing by manufacturer.
43

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 035300 - 1 CONCRETE TOPPING
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 2.1 CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPINGS (TPNG-1)

3 A. For topping applications that receive floor finish.
4 1. Basis of Design: Self-Leveling Floor Resurfacer – Fast-Setting (No. 1249-51) as manufactured by
5 the QUIKRETE® Companies, One Securities Centre, 3490 Piedmont Road, NE, Suite 1300,
6 Atlanta, GA 30305; telephone (404) 634-9100.
7 a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
8 products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
9 1) Ardex.
10 2) Meadows.
11 2. Self-leveling, Portland Cement Based, Self-Finishing, One Component Underlayment. Comply with
12 the following:
13 a. Performance and Physical Properties at 73 degrees F and 50 percent relative humidity:
14 1) Working time, ASTM C 191: 20-40 minutes.
15 2) Compressive Strength, ASTM C 109 Modified: 1800 psi (12.4 MPa) @ 24 hours,
16 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) @ 7 days, 5500 psi (37.9 MPa) @ 28 days.
17 3) Slant Shear Bond Strength, ASTM C 1059: Exceeds 1250 psi (8.6 MPa) @ 28 days.
18 4) Walk On Time: 2-4 hours maximum.
19 5) Tensile Bond Strength, ASTM C 1059: 300 psi (2.1 MPa) @ 7 days, 400 psi (2.8
20 MPa) @ 28 days.
21 b. Bonding Agent: QUIKRETE® Bonding Adhesive (No. 9902).
22 B. For topping applications that polished concrete finish (CCF-1).
23 1. Basis of Design:
24 2. New concrete for polished concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture
25 design, placement procedures, initial finishing, and curing is specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-
26 Place Concrete."
27 3. Mix Design:
28 a. Compressive Strength: 5,000 PSI.
29 b. No accelerators or water reducing agents.
30 c. Gap Graded Aggregate Mix Design: Match mix design of approved mock-up.
31 4. Bonding Agent: Sakcrete Concrete Bonder & Fortifier
33 3.1 PREPARATION
34 A. Existing Concrete: Remove existing surface treatments and deteriorated and unsound concrete.
35 Mechanically abrade base slabs to produce a heavily scarified surface profile with an amplitude of 1/4
36 inch.
37 1. Prepare and clean existing base slabs according to concrete floor topping manufacturer's written
38 instructions. Fill voids, cracks, and cavities in base slabs.
39 B. Install joint-filler strips where topping abuts vertical surfaces.
40 3.2 FLOOR TOPPING APPLICATION

41 A. Existing Concrete Bonding Agent:
42 1. For use as a paint-on bonder:
43 2. Mix a slurry consisting of 2 parts bonding agent with one part Portland cement.
44 3. Apply slurry with a paintbrush. Cover the area completely to insure proper bond.
45 B. Place concrete floor topping continuously in a single layer.
46 3.3 PROTECTING AND CURING

47 A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete floor topping from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
48 temperatures.
49

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3.4 JOINT FILLING

2 A. Prepare and clean contraction joints and install semirigid joint filler, according to manufacturer's written
3 instructions, once topping has fully cured.
4 B. Install semirigid joint filler full depth of contraction joints. Overfill joint and trim semirigid joint filler flush with
5 top of joint after hardening.
6 3.5 REPAIR
7 A. Defective Topping: Repair and patch defective concrete floor topping areas, including areas that have not
8 bonded to concrete substrate.
9 END OF SECTION

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 04 01 20.63
2 HISTORIC BRICK MASONRY PRESERVATION/RESTORATION
3
5 1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
6 1.2 WORK INCLUDED
9 1.5 REFERENCES
10 1.6 SUBMITTALS
12 1.8 JOB CONDITIONS
13 1.9 GUARANTEES, WARRANTIES, CERTIFICATES
14 1.10 ATTIC STOCK
16 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
17 2.2 BRICK REPAIR MATERIAL
18 2.3 BRICK REPLACEMENT MATERIAL
19 2.4 ALL MORTAR MATERIALS
20 2.5 OTHER MATERIALS
22 3.1 EXAMINATION
23 3.2 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING
24 3.3 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION
25 3.4 GENERAL ERECTION REQUIREMENTS
26 3.5 MORTAR MIXES
27 3.6 REPOINTING
28 3.7 REPAIR OF FRACTURED LOOSE BRICK (MASONRY ADHESIVE)
29 3.8 REPAIR OF BRICK SPALL (SUBSTITUTE BRICK PATCH)
30 3.9 ANCHOR REMOVAL
31 3.10 BRICK REPLACEMENT
32 3.11 BRICK-MATCH STAINING
33 3.12 CLEANING
34
36
37 1.1 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
38 A. The conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary, and Other Conditions) and the
39 requirements of Division 1 are hereby made a part of this Section. Applicable provisions of Division
40 1 shall govern Work under this Section.
41
43 A. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall furnish all materials, tools, equipment, apparatus,
44 transportation, labor and supervision required to furnish and install all the masonry as shown on the
45 Drawings and specified.
46 B. Limited repointing of brick masonry façade areas.
47 C. Limited repair of fractured brick.
48 D. Limited repair of brick spall.
49 E. Limited anchor removal.
50 F. Removal of brick in limited locations to access underlying conditions, see drawings.
51 G. Retain historic brick removed for reuse as directed by the Architect and Owner.
52 H. Cleaning. Refer to Section 04 01 40 – Historic Stone Preservation/Restoration.
53
55 A. Section 02 41 50 – Historic Selective Demolition/Deconstruction
56 B. Section 04 01 40 – Historic Stone Preservation/Restoration
57
59 A. There shall be no deviation made from this Specification, the Drawings and on all approved Shop
60 Drawings without prior written approval by the Architect.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 040120.63 - 1 HISTORIC BRICK MASONRY
PRESERVATION/RESTORATION
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 1. Prior to covering newly installed Work with permanent materials, the Contractor shall
2 coordinate with the Architect to review all installed components for compliance with the
3 intent of the design as outlined in the drawings and specification of the Project Manual. In
4 addition, the Contractor shall certify that all work was completed in accordance with the
5 Project Manual. Should underlying work be covered prior to Architect’s review, the
6 contractor may be required to uncover the work at his own expense.
7 B. All Work shall be performed by skilled journeyman masons and laborers who are considered
8 specialists in the field of masonry preservation/restoration work similar to that required under this
9 Contract.
10 C. Masons shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience in this type of work.
11 D. Samples (mock-ups) of typical masonry restoration work required by this Specification shall be
12 installed in unobtrusive areas using materials (including salvaged brick) and methods specified,
13 and made available for viewing by the Architect and Owner. No related work shall proceed until
14 after mock-ups have been inspected and approved by the Architect.
15 E. Furnish sample (mock-up) panel 6’ long by 3’ high of the proposed masonry restoration work (new,
16 replaced masonry units and finished repointing) including color range, texture, bond, mortar and
17 workmanship. Erect mock-up panel in the presence of the Architect. Provide separate mock-up
18 panels for each type of brick and mortar and include limestone veneer and cap. Do not start the
19 Work until the Architect has accepted sample mock-up panel. Use mock-up panel(s) as standard
20 of comparison for all masonry work built of same material. Do not destroy or move the mock-up
21 panel(s) until the Work is completed and accepted by the Owner.
22 F. During the workday, should the weather conditions appear to be changing adversely, the Foreman
23 and crew shall take preventive measures to allow the work area to be closed to a weathertight
24 condition to avoid exposure to building, equipment, and materials.
25 G. Repair any Work, damaged by failure to provide proper and adequate protection, to its original
26 state to the satisfaction of the Owner, or remove and replace with new Work at the Contractor’s
27 expense.
28 H. Use of air entraining admixtures, chlorides, or nitrates, are not allowed and will be sufficient cause
29 to require removal and replacement of all masonry restoration work containing or treated with these
30 materials.
31 I. It will be the Architect’s prerogative to forbid the use of tools or methods that do not produce the
32 quality of work that is expected and to insist on the use of methods and tools, which will do the
33 Work properly. Refer to the drawings and specifications for reference to areas where “handwork
34 only” is allowed.
35 J. Construct minimum 12 inch by 12-inch prisms for testing purposes as required by the Architect.
36
37 1.5 REFERENCES
38 A. References shall refer to the most recent standard.
39 1. Brick Institute of America (BIA).
40 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
41 3. Masonry Advisory Council (MAC).
42 4. Federal Specifications (FS).
43
44 1.6 SUBMITTALS
45 A. Submit product data and certificates for all replacement masonry units and mortar type.
46 B. A total of three (3) copies of each hard copy or physical submittal are required.
47 C. Submit not less than twelve (12) individual samples of proposed replacement face bricks, showing
48 extreme variations in color and texture.
49 D. Provide sample of stained brick for use in wall as described herein.
50 E. Mock-up of a minimum 4’ x 4’ repointing using new mortar to match existing for approval by
51 Owner and Architect. Mock-up area shall be adjacent to new repointing work.
52 F. Prism Test Reports (as required)
53 1. Test reports are to be submitted to the Architect for approval.
54 2. Testing and reports are to be completed by an independent laboratory.
55 3. Test reports shall show:
56 a. Age at test.
57 b. Storage conditions.
58 c. Dimensions of prism.
59 d. Compressive strength of individual prisms.
60 e. Coefficient of variation (v).
61 f. Ultimate compressive strength of masonry (F’m) that has been corrected for the

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 coefficient of variation (v) and the h/t of the prisms tested.

2
4 A. Deliver all materials in their original unopened containers with all markings intact.
5 B. Store replacement masonry units off ground to prevent contamination by mud, dust or materials
6 likely to cause staining or other defects.
7 C. Cover materials when necessary to protect from the elements.
8 D. Protect masonry reinforcing from the elements.
9
11 A. Protection of Work
12 1. Wall covering:
13 a. During erection, cover top of wall with strong waterproof protective covering at end
14 of each day or shutdown.
15 b. Cover partially completed walls when Work is not in progress.
16 c. Extend protective coverings a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) down both sides.
17 d. Hold protective coverings securely in place.
18 2. Load application:
19 a. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loading for at least 12 hours after building
20 masonry columns or walls.
21 b. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least three (3) days after building masonry
22 columns or walls.
23 3. Staining
24 a. Prevent grout or mortar from staining the face of the masonry to be left exposed.
25 i. Immediately remove grout or mortar in contact with the face of such masonry.
26 ii. Protect all sills, ledges, and projections from droppings of mortar.
27 iii. Protect door and window jambs and heads from staining or damage.
28 4. Cold Weather Protection
29 a. Preparation:
30 i. If ice or snow has formed on replacement masonry bed, remove by carefully
31 applying heat until the top surface is dry to the touch.
32 ii. Remove all replacement masonry that is frozen or damaged.
33 b. Products:
34 i. When brick suction exceeds the initial rate of absorption, sprinkle with heated
35 water.
36 1. When units are 32°F (0°C) heat water above 70°F (21°C).
37 2. When units are below 32°F (0°C) heat water above 130°F (54°C).
38 ii. Use only dry replacement masonry units.
39 iii. Do not use wet or frozen replacement masonry units.
40 5. Construction requirements while Work is progressing:
41 a. Air temperature 40°F (4°C) to 32°F (0°C):
42 i. Heat mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40°F (4°C) and
43 120°F (49°C).
44 b. Air temperature 32°F (0°C) to 20°F (-7°C):
45 i. Heat sand or mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40°F (4°C)
46 and 120°F (49°C).
47 ii. Maintain temperatures of mortar on board above freezing.
48 iii. Use salamanders or other heat sources on both sides of walls under construction
49 as required to properly protect replacement masonry from freezing.
50 iv. Use windbreaks when wind is in excess of 14 MPH.
51 v. Air temperatures 20°F (-7°C) and below:
52 1. Heat mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40°F (4°C) and
53 120°F (49°C).
54 2. Provide enclosures and auxiliary heat to maintain temperature above 32°F
55 (0°C).
56 3. Minimum temperature of new masonry units is to be 20°F (-7°C).
57 c. Protection requirements for completed replacement masonry and replacement
58 masonry not being worked on.
59 i. Mean daily air temperature 40°F (4°C) to 32°F (0°C):
60 1. Protect replacement masonry from rain or snow for 24 hours with
61 weatherproof covering.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 ii. Mean daily air temperature 32°F (0°C) to 25°F (-4°C):

2 1. Completely cover replacement masonry with weatherproof covering for
3 24 hours.
4 iii. Mean daily air temperature 25°F (-4°C) to 20°F (-7°C):
5 1. Completely cover replacement masonry with insulating blankets or equal
6 protection for 24 hours.
7 iv. Mean daily air temperature 20°F (-7°C) and below:
8 1. Maintain replacement masonry temperature above 32°F (0°C) for 24 hours
9 by constructing a sufficient enclosure with supplementary heat, electric
10 heating blankets, infrared lamps or approved equal.
11
13 A. Materials and/or workmanship shall be guaranteed against defects for a period of two (2) years
14 from the date of Substantial Completion as established by the Architect.
15
16 1.10 ATTIC STOCK
17 A. Provide the following products and amounts for Owner attic stock:
18 1. Rehabilitation Mortars - At least 6 bags of unopened NHL 3.5 with bagged sand in
19 appropriate proportions.
20 2. Substitute Brick Repair Materials - At least 1 gallon unopened containers for each type of
21 brick patching material used. There will be up to 6 patch colors required.
22 3. Replacement Brick – Provide 100 units of each type. Brick face #1 to be stained to match
23 existing variation pattern of existing brick.
24
26
28 A. Provide products by Manufacturers specified herein which meet or exceed standards as set forth in
29 this Section. No products specified or approved shall contain asbestos.
30 B. All materials shall be new unless noted otherwise.
31
32 2.2 BRICK REPAIR MATERIAL
33 A. Substitute Brick Repair Material: Must use only mineral-based, single component products that
34 contain natural binders; no synthetic polymers or additives are permitted. Substitute brick material
35 must be pre-mixed in a quality controlled factory, with only the addition of water required at the site
36 prior to installation.
37 B. Acceptable material:
38 1. Jahn M100 Terra Cotta and Brick Repair Mortar, Cathedral Stone Products, Jessup,
39 Maryland
40 C. Brick Repair Material shall be custom colored to match the existing brick and produced in a quality
41 controlled factory environment. The contractor will be expected to keep a stock of a range of
42 custom colors that is equal in number to the number of colors in the custom brick blend (up to 6).
43 D. No field mixing of color pigments into the repair materials is permitted on-site.
44 E. No color staining of existing brick requiring repairs or newly applied repair materials is permitted.
45 F. Apply substitute brick materials to areas no more than 2 inches in depth and 3 inches wide or as
46 specifically allowed by the manufacturer.
47
48 2.3 BRICK REPLACEMENT MATERIAL
49 A. Replacement Brick (Interior Wythes): New, solid, severe weathering (SW) brick units to match size
50 and mass of existing masonry. Final size and color selection shall be confirmed by a custom brick
51 sample approval process. Replacement brick shall be manufactured by Belden Brick Company,
52 Canton, Ohio or approved equal.
53 B. Replacement Brick (Face Brick #1): Salvaged brick actual size 8” x 2 ¼” x 3 ¾” such as Antique
54 Buff with iron spots by Gavin Historical Brick, Iowa City, contact John Gavin at (888) 559-5828,
55 [email protected]. This will be a salvaged brick that must match the existing historic brick
56 in color. No substitutions will be considered or allowed.
57 C. Brick Stain: For use on Face Brick #1 only. Pigmented mineral silicate stain utilizing a dilution
58 method of color matching such as Restauro Lasur by KEIM. Contractor shall provide color sample
59 mock-ups for approval by the City of Madison Preservation Planner and the architect. Substitutions
60 may be requested prior to the submission of bids. Allow 5 days for architect’s review and approval.
61

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 D. Replacement Brick (Face Brick #2): Salvaged brick actual size 8” x 2 ¼” x 3 ¾” such as Antique
2 Red scratch face by Gavin Historical Brick, Iowa City, contact John Gavin at (888) 559-5828,
3 [email protected]. This will be a salvaged brick that must match the existing historic brick
4 in color. No substitutions will be considered or allowed.
5
7 A. The basis of the mortar for this project shall be:
8 1. St. Astier Natural Hydraulic Lime NHL 3.5, distributed by TransMineral USA.
9 2. Pigment – None.
10 3. Sand – Sand shall be clean and uncontaminated by clay/silt. Janesville #1 by Janesville
11 Sand and Gravel, 1110 Harding Street, P.O. Box 427 Janesville, WI 53547, 800-955-
12 7702.
13 4. Final mortar mix shall be determined in the field under the direction of the Architect. For
14 the purposes of this bid use the following lime/sand ratio (1:2.5) by volume.
15 B. All mortar shall be prepared and placed in accordance with the Department of the Interior National
16 Park Service Cultural Resources Preservation Briefs 2, “Repointing Mortar Joints in Historic
17 Masonry Buildings” (Revised Edition October 1998), and in compliance with the guidelines set forth
18 by the Secretary of the Interior’s Standards.
19 C. The mortar shall match the original in color, grain size and texture. The compressive strength of the
20 repointing mortar shall be equal or less than the compressive strength of the original mortar and
21 surrounding brick. The replacement mortar shall contain approximately the same ingredient
22 proportions of the original mortar and shall have a water vapor transmission rate greater than all
23 adjacent masonry.
24 D. All replacement mortar ingredients and mortar formulations have been established from test data
25 gathered from the original materials sampled from site, and from performance data observed in the
26 field.
27 E. Mixing of individual mortar ingredients at the construction site will be permitted.
28 F. Repointing mortars may be pre-blended (not including water) in single containers in a factory-
29 controlled environment, however the architect shall have FULL authority to reject any process that
30 in his sole discretion will not meet the intent of this specification.
31 G. All ingredients will be converted from volume measurements to weight measurements to ensure
32 quality production of the mortar. This must be accomplished prior to any mix manufacture with the
33 Natural Hydraulic Lime manufacturer.
34 H. All mortar materials delivered to the site shall be tested to confirm specification compliance before
35 mortar is installed in the wall.
36
38 A. Structural Angle Steel Lintels: hot dipped galvanized ASTM A36 steel – all steel shall be galvanized
39 post fabrication. No additional openings or cuts to previously galvanized steel will be accepted
40 without prior approval from the architect.
41 B. Self-adhering Membrane Flashing: “Polyguard 400 Thru Wall Flashing,” a 40 mil, self-adhering,
42 self-healing membrane consisting of a rubberized asphalt waterproofing element, bonded to a
43 strong polyethylene film top surface, as manufactured by Polyguard Products Inc, Ennis, Texas, or
44 “Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing,” 40-mil, self-adhering membrane wall flashing as manufactured by
45 W.R. Grace & Co., Columbia, Maryland, or approved equal.
46 C. Through-wall Flashing Drip Edge: “Preformed Stainless Steel Drip Edge.” 28 gauge (15 mils thick),
47 1-5/8” wide with a 3/8” bend at one end made of Type 304 grade, dull finish stainless steel in
48 conformance with ASTM A 167, as manufactured by Polyguard Products inc, Ennis, Texas, or
49 approved equal.
50 D. Portland Cement: Not Used.
51 E. Lime: No non-NHL lime may be used without Architect’s and NHL manufacturer’s review and
52 approval.
53 F. Water: Potable, fresh, clean, clear and free from injurious amounts of sewage, oil, acid, alkali,
54 salts, organic matter or other detrimental substances.
55 G. Weep Vent: "Mortar Net Weep", 90% open polyester mesh, color to match mortar, as manufactured
56 by Mortar Net USA. (limited use only – consult Architect)
57 H. Weeps: “# 341 Series Round Plastic Weep Holes,” medium density polyethylene, 3/8” outside
58 diameter (O.D.) by 4” long with stainless steel screen insert and double cotton wick, as
59 manufactured by H & B Illinois, Chicago, Illinois.
60
61

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 I. Other Materials: All other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and
2 proper installation of the Work in this Section, shall be selected by the Contractor subject to the
3 approval of the Architect.
4
6
7 3.1 EXAMINATION
8 A. The Masonry Contractor shall have the sole responsibility for the accuracy of all measurements
9 and for the estimate of material quantities required and necessary to satisfy the requirements of the
10 Drawings and these Specifications.
11
13 A. Perform only as much Work as can be restored to a weathertight condition each day or before
14 showers commence.
15 B. All related flashing work shall be completed each day.
16 C. All other work required for a complete and proper installation per the Drawings and these
17 Specifications that constitute a complete and proper installation shall be completed each day.
18
20 A. Remove all existing materials as specified to perform the Work.
21 B. Exterior masonry surfaces to remain in place shall be meticulously inspected for cracks or defects.
22 C. Any mortar joint that is loose, porous, crumbled, cracked, badly weathered (deeper than 1/8”
23 behind masonry surface), un-bonded to adjacent masonry units, or a potential source of leakage
24 shall be deemed defective. All spalled, cracked, broken, or otherwise defective brick shall be
25 removed and replaced using brick and mortar as specified herein.
26 D. Included in the definition of defective shall be cracked joints that have been sealed.
27 E. Any missing brick and/or mortar joints that lack mortar or has lost bond, is spalled, or broken, which
28 can be detected from a maximum distance of ten (10) feet under clear skies during daylight times
29 by an observer with normal vision, shall be deemed profusely defective for this Project.
30 F. All cracks, defective, or profusely defective mortar joints shall be cut out or ground out the full width
31 of the joint to a minimum depth of 3/4”.
32 G. Where mortar is broken or loose beyond a depth of 3/4”, remove unsound mortar to where firm
33 solid mortar is encountered prior to pointing. All joints must be cut clean of unsound mortar
34 material in a square manner full depth of cut. Furrow shaped joints will not be acceptable.
35 H. The cutting out of joints shall be done with suitable tools, either hand tools or mechanical
36 equipment, in such a manner as will not loosen adjacent joints or injure the edges or corners of the
37 replacement masonry units. Where the mortar is tightly bonded at one side of the joint, and if the
38 contour permits, the cutting shall be done with portable electric grinders with abrasive wheels to
39 minimize spalling at the edges of the replacement masonry units.
40 I. After the joint has been cut out, all loose material shall be removed by chisel, brush, air jet, or water
41 stream. Following this cleaning, the joint shall be thoroughly moistened. The joint shall be damp,
42 but without free water on the surface at the time of pointing.
43 J. Isolated bricks with cracks larger than 1/32” shall be deemed defective and shall be replaced. Prior
44 to removal consult Architect for approval.
45 K. Facing brick, which are spalled 1/16” or greater in depth over 10 percent or more of the face area
46 shall be removed and replaced. Prior to removal consult Architect for approval.
47 L. Wetting Brick: Wet brick with absorption rates in excess of 30 gal. / 30 in 2 / minute (30 gal. / 194
48 cm2 / minute) determined by ASTM C67, so that the rate of absorption when laid does not exceed
49 this amount. Recommended procedure to insure that bricks are nearly saturated when laid is to
50 place a hose on the pile of brick until the water runs from the pile. This should be done one day
51 before the brick are to be used. In extremely warm weather, place the hose on the pile several
52 hours before the bricks are to be used.
53
54 3.4 GENERAL ERECTION REQUIREMENTS
55 A. Pattern Bond
56 1. Lay new replacement masonry to match existing brick patterns.
57 2. Match existing header courses, refer to brick patterns in the field.
58 3. Bond unexposed replacement masonry units wythe-to-wythe by lapping at least 2” (51
59 mm).
60 B. Joining of Work
61 1. Where fresh replacement masonry joins partially set masonry:

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 a. Remove loose brick and mortar.

2 b. Clean and lightly wet exposed surface of set masonry.
3 2. Stop off horizontal run of masonry by racking back 1/2 length of unit in each course.
4 3. Toothing is not permitted except upon written acceptance of the Architect.
5 C. Tooling
6 1. Tool exposed joints when “thumb-print” hard with a round jointer, slightly larger than width
7 of joint.
8 2. Trowel-point or concave-tool exterior joints below grade.
9 3. Following at the proper interval, all new mortar joints shall be compressed and tooled with
10 a smooth rounded iron of selected width to produce a smooth, dense surface, very slightly
11 concave, or similar depth as typically existing, and tightly pressed against the edges of the
12 masonry units. Complete by gently brushing the face of the joint to match existing.
13 D. Flashing
14 1. Clean surface of masonry smooth and free from projections that might puncture flashing
15 material.
16 a. Install new thru-wall flashings as shown on the Drawings.
17 b. Install thru-wall flashings per the Manufacturers recommendations.
18 c. Place thru-wall flashings on bed of mortar.
19 d. Cover flashing with mortar.
20 E. Weep Holes
21 1. Provide weep holes in head joints in first course immediately above all flashings.
22 2. Maximum spacing: 24 in. (610 mm) on-center.
23 3. Keep weep holes and area above through-wall flashing free of mortar drippings.
24 F. Sealant Recesses
25 1. Leave joints around outside perimeters of exterior doors, window frames and other wall
26 openings.
27 a. Depth: Uniform 3/4” (19 mm).
28 b. Width: 1/4” (6.4 mm) to 3/8” (9.5 mm).
29 G. Movement Joints
30 1. Locate as shown on the Drawings.
31 2. Keep clean from all mortar and debris.
32 H. Cutting Brick
33 1. Cut bricks with motor driven saw or other methods that provide cuts that are straight and
34 true.
35 I. Mortar Joint Thickness
36 1. Lay brick with joints to match existing but not to exceed 1/2” (12.7 mm) without prior
37 approval from Architect.
38 J. Construction Tolerances
39 1. Maximum variation from plumb in vertical lines and surfaces of wall arises:
40 a. 1/4” (6.4 mm) in 10 ft. (3 m).
41 b. 3/8” (9.6 mm) in a story height not to exceed 20 ft. (6 m).
42 c. 1/2” (12.7 mm) in 40 ft. (12 m) or more.
43 2. Maximum variation from plumb for external corners, expansion joints and other
44 conspicuous lines:
45 a. 1/4” (6.4 mm) in any story or 20 ft. (6 m) maximum.
46 b. 1/2” (12.7 mm) in 40 ft. (12 m) or more.
47 3. Maximum variation from level of grades for exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal
48 grooves and other conspicuous lines:
49 a. 1/4” (6.4 mm) in any bay or 20 ft. (6 m).
50 b. 1/2” (12.7 mm) in 40 ft. (12 m) or more.
51 4. Maximum variation from plan location or related portion of walls:
52 a. 1/2” (12.7 mm) in any bay or 20 ft. (6 m).
53 b. 3/4” (19 mm) in 40 ft. (12 m) or more.
54 5. Maximum variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns and thickness of walls from
55 dimensions shown on the Drawings:
56 a. Minus 1/4” (6.4 mm).
57 b. Plus 1/2” (12.7 mm).
58
59 3.5 MORTAR MIXES
60 A. All equipment for mixing, transporting and applying mortar shall be clean and free from hardened
61 mortar, dirt, ice, or other foreign matter.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 B. Follow printed manufacturer’s instructions for mixing preblended mortar.

2 C. Refer to Section 04 01 40 - Historic Stone Preservation/Restoration for all mortar.
3
4 3.6 REPOINTING
5 A. See “3.3 Substrate Preparation” for repointing general preparation requirements.
6 B. With joint damp, completely fill with mortar.
7 C. Following at the proper interval, the joint shall be compressed and tooled with a smooth rounded
8 iron of selected width to produce a smooth, dense surface, very slightly concave, or similar depth
9 as typically existing, and tightly pressed against the edges of the masonry units. Complete by
10 gently brushing the face of the joint to match existing adjacent rough texture.
11 D. All necessary protection shall be provided to prevent damage to the existing roofs.
12
13 3.7 REPAIR OF FRACTURED LOOSE BRICK (MASONRY ADHESIVE)
14 A. Retain salvageable brick masonry pieces and prepare all surfaces to receive adhesive.
15 B. Install masonry adhesive in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
16 C. Bond masonry pieces as specified in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
17
18 3.8 REPAIR OF BRICK SPALL (SUBSTITUTE BRICK PATCH)
19 A. Substitute brick repairs require a moldable, plastic filled material applied directly to the loss area
20 and set into place by its own adhesion to the brick substrate. Such brick repair mortars and putties
21 are typically offered by manufacturing companies that do not sell brick.
22 B. Substitute brick material may not be installed in thicknesses exceeding 2 inches. Brick repairs in
23 excess of 2 inches thick will require reconfiguring the brick in lieu of performing other repairs.
24 C. Remove all loose mortar and masonry prior to installation of the substitute brick material. “Sound”
25 the masonry with a hammer to verify its integrity. If necessary, cut away an additional 1/2” of the
26 brick substrate to ensure the surface to be repaired is solid and stable. Remove any sealant
27 residue.
28 D. Cut out all cramp anchors, threaded rod anchors and/or dowels within the damaged masonry area.
29 Any anchors that are free of rust, solidly embedded, and do not project beyond the solid masonry
30 surface may remain. All others should be removed.
31 E. Using clean water and a scrub brush, clean all dust from surface and pores of the substrate.
32 F. For very dry or porous surfaces, pre-wet the substrate ahead of time to prevent the substrate from
33 drawing moisture out of the repair too quickly. Re-wet the surface immediately before applying the
34 repair material.
35 G. Use methods established in project training program to deliver the substitute brick repair work as
36 demonstrated and approved by the Architect and Owner.
37 H. Only rehabilitation technicians that hold a Project Training “Substitute Brick Certificate” will be
38 permitted to work on the scope of this brick repair treatment as defined.
39 I. Curing methods vary in different parts of the country and at different times of the year, calling for
40 different amounts of water to be used in the first 36 hours after application. Adjustments also have
41 to take into account how much time is remaining before freezing weather occurs.
42 J. Follow all manufacturers’ instructions pertaining to the placement of materials. If the manufacturer
43 requires that installers of a specified product be trained, provide this documentation to the Architect
44 and supporting documentation. Training certificates previously issued by product companies for the
45 application of specified products may not be substituted for the Project Training “Substitute Brick
46 Certificate” on this project. Applicators previously trained by product companies are encouraged to
47 work on this specific scope, but it is not a mandatory requirement of this specification, only that of
48 the product company to ensure the proper placement of the materials.
49
50 3.9 ANCHOR REMOVAL
51 A. Remove masonry anchors, brackets, wood nailers, and other extraneous items no longer in use
52 unless identified as historically significant or indicated to remain.
53 B. Remove items carefully to avoid spalling or cracking masonry.
54 C. If item cannot be removed without damaging surrounding masonry, cut off item flush with surface
55 and core drill surrounding masonry and item as close around item as practical.
56
57 3.10 BRICK REPLACEMENT
58 A. When directed, remove brick that has deteriorated or is damaged beyond repair. Carefully demolish
59 or remove entire units from joint to joint, without damaging surrounding brick, in a manner that
60 permits replacement with full size units.
61 B. Sort brick by size and zone for future use.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 C. Support and protect remaining brickwork that surrounds removal area and adjoining construction in
2 an undamaged condition.
3 D. Remove in an undamaged condition as many whole brick units as possible.
4 E. Remove mortar, loose particles, and soil from brick by cleaning with hand chisels, needle scalers,
5 brushes, and water.
6 F. Remove sealants by cutting close to brick with utility knife and cleaning with solvents.
7 G. Reuse salvaged brick to the fullest extent possible. Integrate new replacement brick in concealed
8 areas or shielded from public view.
9 H. Deliver cleaned brick not required for reuse to Owner.
10 I. Clean brick surrounding removal areas by removing mortar, dust, and loose particles in preparation
11 for replacement.
12 J. Only rehabilitation technicians that hold a Project Training “Brick Removal and Replacement
13 Certificate” will be permitted to work on the scope of this brick repair treatment as defined.
14 K. Replace removed brick with other removed brick, where possible, or with new brick matching
15 existing brick, including size. Butter vertical joints for full width before setting and set units in full
16 bed of mortar, unless otherwise indicated.
17 L. Rake out mortar used for laying brick before mortar sets and point new mortar joints in repaired
18 area to comply with requirements for repointing existing brick, and at same time as repointing of
19 surrounding area.
20
21 3.11 BRICK-MATCH STAINING
22 A. Follow the manufacturer’s installation requirements without exception
23 B. Using dilution ratios ranging from 1:14 to No Dilution, provide six dilution samples on the specified
24 replacement brick for the architect and owner’s approval.
25 C. Using the accepted dilution ratios, create a color blend that matches the existing adjacent brick.
26 D. Create a 4’ X 4’ portable sample panel for the architect and owner’s approval.
27 E. Install one area of brick replacement in-situ for the architect and owner’s approval prior to
28 commencing with the remainder of the work
29
30 3.12 CLEANING
31 A. Refer to Section 04 01 40 – Historic Stone Preservation/Restoration for final cleaning.
32 B. Cut out any defective joints and holes in exposed masonry and re-point with mortar.
33 C. Clean all exposed unglazed masonry.
34 1. Apply cleaning agent to sample wall area of 20 sq. ft. (2 sq. m) in location acceptable to
35 the Architect.
36 2. Do not proceed with cleaning until the Architect approves sample area.
37 3. Clean initially with stiff brushes and water.
38 4. When cleaning agent is required:
39 a. Follow brick Manufacturer’s recommendations
40 b. Do not use acid solutions to clean light colored brick.
41 c. Thoroughly wet surface of masonry on which no green efflorescence (staining)
42 appears.
43 d. Scrub with acceptable cleaning agent.
44 e. Immediately rinse with clean water.
45 f. Do small sections at a time.
46 g. Work from top to bottom.
47 h. Protect all sash, metal lintels and other corrodible parts when masonry is cleaned
48 with an acid solution.
49 i. Remove green efflorescence (staining) in accordance with brick manufacturer’s
50 recommendations and BIA “Technical Notes 23 Series.”
51
52 END OF SECTION
53

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 04 01 40
2 HISTORIC STONE PRESERVATION/RESTORATION
3
5 1.1 SCOPE
6 1.2 RELATED WORK
7 1.3 DESCRIPTION
9 1.5 SUBMITTALS
10 1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS
12 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
13 1.9 ATTIC STOCK
15 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
16 2.2 SUBSTITUTE STONE REPAIR MATERIALS
17 2.3 STONE REPLACEMENT MORTAR
21 3.1 EXAMINATION
22 3.2 SUBSTITUTE STONE PATCH (SSP)
23 3.3 FERROUS ANCHOR BOLT/REMOVAL
24 3.4 STONE PLUG REPAIR
25 3.5 REMOVE, REDRESS AND RESET
26 3.6 STONE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
27 3.7 DUTCHMAN
28 3.8 CRACK INJECTION AND STAIN
29 3.9 MASONRY ADHESIVE
30 3.10 DRESS STONE IN-SITU
31 3.11 BALUSTER REPAIR
32 3.12 POINTING OF MORTAR JOINTS IN STONE
33 3.13 CONSOLIDATION
34 3.14 FINISHING TECHNIQUES
35 3.15 LEAD CAP FLASHING INSTALLATION
36 3.16 CLEANING
37
39
40 1.1 SCOPE
41 A. The work under this section shall consist of providing all materials, labor, equipment, tools,
42 protection and supervision necessary for the mobilization; select removal of entire stone units;
43 deconstruction; stone harvesting, redressing and cleaning for reuse; cleaning; wall reconstruction;
44 rebuilding of missing features with substitute stone material; stone surface redressing in situ; stone
45 crack injection; stone crack mortar repair; stone removal and replacement with new stone; stone
46 removal and replacement with reclaimed stone; and stone removal and replacement with harvested
47 stone.
48
49 1.2 RELATED WORK
50 A. Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work under this Section.
51
52 1.3 DESCRIPTION
53 A. In addition to all other requirements, all work of this Section shall be performed under the
54 guidelines of the Secretary of the Interior’s Standards for the Treatment of Historic Properties and
55 must comply with the Secretary of the Interior’s Standards for Rehabilitation.
56 B. The intent of this Section is:
57 1. To carefully deconstruct the existing wall in successive segments as shown on the
58 drawings.
59 2. To save as much of the historic material as possible.
60 3. To repair all deteriorated stone that is deemed to be suitable for reuse.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 040140 - 1 HISTORIC STONE
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 4. That all repair and replacement materials will match historic construction in all physical
2 and visual aspects, including material, form, color, texture, and workmanship.
3 5. That all work will be done using the gentlest methods available.
4 6. That sound historical materials will not be put at risk due to the work of this Section.
5 C. Work includes, but is not limited to, the following (Refer to Exhibit G for further information):
6 1. Limited repointing of all stone masonry as shown on the drawings.
7 2. Removal of cement-based mortar smears from the stone surfaces at areas that require
8 100% rebuild or as otherwise shown on the drawings.
9 3. Removal of previous cement-based repairs and mismatching substitute stone repair
10 materials as determined by Architect at areas that require 100% rebuild or as otherwise
11 shown on the drawings.
12 4. Replacement or repair – exfoliated, scaled, disaggregated, chipped, cracked, spalled and
13 broken – limestone as identified in Exhibits F and G.
14 5. Removal of existing sealant debris and oils from stone surfaces at areas that require
15 100% rebuild or as otherwise shown on the drawings.
16 6. Cleaning of all masonry surfaces upon completion of the repair work. 100% cleaning of
17 the stone is not a requirement of this bid.
18
20 A. Pre-Construction Conference: Prior to beginning the work of this Section, the General Contractor
21 and all Masonry Sub-contractors shall convene a meeting with the Architect and Owner’s
22 Representative(s) to review the requirements of the Quality Assurance Plan, Project Training
23 Program, installation procedures, location of required test areas, and all job conditions and
24 processes.
25 B. Quality Assurance Plan: Prior to beginning Work, submit a written Quality Assurance Plan to
26 Architect and Owner for review and approval. Allow 2 weeks for review and approval process. Do
27 not proceed without written approval of plan. The Owner’s Quality Control Representative and the
28 Architect shall review work on a regular basis for conformance with the approved Quality
29 Assurance Plan. Quality Assurance Plan shall, at a minimum, include the following items:
30 1. Describe on-site project training program.
31 a. Include certificate issuer name and qualifications with the specific requisites
32 established to meet the Historic Material Restoration Requirements (HMRR)
33 identified in the project documents.
34 b. Identify the classroom curriculum and/or outline for the Architect’s review
35 and approval.
36 c. Provide a sample classroom examination
37 d. Identify the field work verification process and confirm location and scope of
38 all mock-ups for Architect’s review and approval.
39 e. Provide a list of all sub-contractor and/or other employees that will submit to
40 the training and certification process.
41 2. Describe all methods of mobilization and access to work areas.
42 3. Describe methods of dust containment during the work of this section.
43 4. Describe the methods of protecting surrounding stone and landscape. Submit
44 drawings of protection when requested by Architect.
45 5. Describe the Work procedures, materials, and tools the contractor proposes to use for
46 each historic material restoration requirement specified.
47 6. Describe the sequence of historic material restoration requirements.
48 7. Describe how the sequence of historic material restoration requirements and the
49 construction schedule changes as it relates to climate fluctuations and protection of
50 completed work.
51 8. Describe the methods for surveying original layout and collecting datum points and
52 plumb lines for rebuilding stone masonry.
53 9. Describe the methods for shoring and providing a safe working environment.
54 10. Describe the methods for deconstruction of the masonry parapets (stone and brick)
55 and tools for cleaning the stone for reuse.
56 11. Describe the methods for deconstruction of individual stone and tools for cleaning the
57 stone for reuse.
58 12. Describe the method and approach to cleaning cement-based mortar and old
59 patching materials from the stone face.
60 13. Describe, in detail, the matching procedures relating to techniques and tools
61 proposed for stone redressing.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 14. Describe the complete stone removal procedures; include equipment, approach and
2 where (on-site or in shop) the stone will be redressed.
3 15. Describe the complete stone redressing procedures; include equipment, approach
4 and where (on-site or in shop) the stone will be redressed.
5 16. Describe the procedure for mixing and matching of substitute stone materials.
6 17. Describe the methods and system by which the use of reclaimed stone can be
7 utilized.
8 18. Describe the methods for setting stone back into wall for rebuilding the wall and
9 maintaining the original bonding and course layout concept.
10 19. Describe the methods of transition points where rehabilitation work will meet the
11 original historic work.
12 C. Historic Masonry Consultant – Training Program Instructor:
13 1. The contractor shall secure and pay for the services of an independent historic
14 masonry consultant to provide the on-site project training certificate program.
15 a. The independent historic masonry consultant shall have 10 years’
16 experience in historic masonry work and be well-versed in the requirements
17 of the Secretary of the Interior's Standards for Rehabilitation as they relate to
18 the work of this Section.
19 b. The instructor responsible for issuing certificates shall provide evidence of
20 training experience on 5 other projects of similar scope and scale.
21 c. Product manufacturers, vendors, distributors, or suppliers of materials
22 specified in this Section shall not be permitted to offer on-site project training
23 certificates.
24 D. Project Training Program Definition and Use (Refer to Section 04 01 40 1.4.K):
25 1. All workers must obtain project training certificate(s) in order to work on the project.
26 Project training certificates are earned by individual workers and issued with the
27 understanding that they are for limited time use, enforceable only to this specific
28 project and for a specific historic masonry repair requirement.
29 a. The certificates cannot be earned by a company.
30 b. They are non-transferable and only valid for the specific rehabilitation
31 treatment specified. For example: this project has defined several
32 rehabilitation treatments in the scope that will require separate on-site
33 training sessions for issuance of the required project training certificates.
34 c. The contractor has the flexibility to assign workers that are most proficient in
35 the skills required for the specified rehabilitation treatment. It is not
36 necessary, nor a requirement of this specification, that all workers obtain all
37 project training certificates offered. A laborer, for example, may need to
38 become proficient at historic material removal, documentation, and inventory
39 control, as well as mortar mixing, but not need to be qualified to set stone or
40 prepare stone surfaces for repair.
41 d. The contractor must assign workers to tasks that the workers are assigned
42 to only. None certified tasks may be undertaken by any personnel.
43 e. The contractor and/or the Historic Masonry Consultant shall develop a
44 method for identifying workers and their certifications to aid in the review of
45 workers and their work.
46 2. Owner reserves the right to remove any workers from the project site who does not
47 meet the standards and performance criteria as described in this section.
48 E. Stone Rehabilitation Firm Qualifications:
49 1. The General Contractor shall engage an experienced masonry rehabilitation firm to
50 perform work in this section. The firm shall have completed work similar in material,
51 design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and shall demonstrate a record of
52 successful in-service performance. Proven implementation of the Secretary of the
53 Interior’s Standards for Rehabilitation: Preservation Briefs #1 and #2 and compliance
54 with TMS 402-08/ACI 530-08/ASCE 5-08 are required.
55 F. Field Supervision:
56 1. Masonry rehabilitation firms shall maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on the
57 Project site at all times when stone masonry rehabilitation is in progress. A single
58 individual shall be responsible for supervising the stone masonry rehabilitation work
59 throughout the duration of the Project.
60 G. Rehabilitation Worker Qualifications:

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 1. Rehabilitation specialist firms must employ craftspersons who are experienced with
2 and specialize in rehabilitation work of the types they will be performing.
3 2. All rehabilitation treatments must be performed by a project - certified craftsperson
4 who is familiar with historic stone construction. The Contractor shall provide proof of
5 such knowledge to the Architect by submitting a project training certificate for each
6 worker for each rehabilitation treatment to be assigned.
7 3. Only skilled journeyman masons who are familiar with and experienced with the
8 materials and methods specified, and who have successfully obtained a Project
9 Training Certificate as defined herein and are familiar with the design requirements
10 shall be used for the scope of this Section.
11 H. Source Limitations:
12 1. Each type of material for stone rehabilitation shall be obtained from a single source
13 with resources sufficient to provide materials of consistent quality in color, texture,
14 detailing, appearance and physical properties.
15 I. Mortar Analysis and Testing (By Owner):
16 1. Applicable ASTM Testing and analysis shall be performed on both the existing
17 historic mortar and any new mortar proposed for the setting and repointing of existing
18 and new stone. All testing shall meet industry standards and be carried out by an
19 independent laboratory with experience in historic masonry materials. The Contractor
20 shall be responsible for providing the Architect with technical test data documenting,
21 at a minimum, the compressive strength ASTM Test C170, rate of absorption ASTM
22 Test C97 and vapor transmission characteristics ASTM Test E96-Water Method-
23 Modified, in comparison to the original historic mortar.
24 2. Note ASTM Test E96-Water Method-Modified testing shall be completed by:
25 a. AMT Laboratories • 3741 Greenway Circle • Lawrence, Kansas 66046 •
26 (888) 376-3600
27 b. Contact: Courtney Murdock
28 J. Stone Analysis and Testing (By Owner):
29 1. Applicable ASTM Testing and analysis shall be performed on both the existing
30 historic stone and any new stone or reclaimed stone proposed for replacement. All
31 testing shall meet industry standards and be carried out by an independent laboratory
32 with experience in historic masonry materials. The Contractor shall be responsible for
33 providing the Architect with technical test data documenting, at a minimum, the
34 compressive strength ASTM Test C170, rate of absorption ASTM Test C97 and vapor
35 transmission characteristics ASTM Test E96-Water Method-Modified, in comparison
36 to the original historic stone.
37 2. Note ASTM Test E96-Water Method-Modified testing shall be completed by:
38 a. AMT Laboratories • 3741 Greenway Circle • Lawrence, Kansas 66046 •
39 (888) 376-3600
40 b. Contact Courtney Murdock
41 K. Stone Treatment Mock-ups:
42 1. All submittals as noted herein shall be submitted and approved prior to the creation of
43 mock-ups.
44 2. Consult the Architect for placement, size, and location of mock-ups. Mock-ups shall
45 demonstrate to the Architect and Owner the methods and quality of workmanship to
46 be performed in all stone treatments.
47 3. The mock-ups shall be installed and approved as part of the certification process
48 required under this contract; and shall be required only for those treatments that are
49 included in this scope of work.
50 4. Prepare mock-ups directly on the existing historic wall under the same weather
51 conditions expected during the remainder of the work.
52 5. Throughout rehabilitation, retain approved mock-up panels in undisturbed condition,
53 suitably marked, as a standard for judging completed work.
54 1. There shall be one approved mock-up for every worker and every treatment
55 for which they are certified.
56 6. Mock-ups shall include separate treatments, as called out on the drawings and
57 related specification Sections, see Part 3 – Execution herein. These are as follows:
58 a. Repointing Mortar Installation - Repoint mortar joints, 12 feet in length and
59 three (3) courses high. (Training and Certification for this task is required)
60 b. Substitute Stone Patch – Substitute stone patch material repair on at least
61 two (2) stones. Include one stone on which to demonstrate proficiency in

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 removing previous patching material and repairing with new substitute stone
2 patch material. (Training and Certification for this task is required)
3 c. Crack Repair – Repair one (1) crack, 18 inches in length, using dispersed
4 hydrated lime injection technique with spachal surface treatment. (Training
5 and Certification for this task is required)
6 d. Dutchman - Undertake Dutchman repairs in two (2) locations, including one
7 that is only cut and prepared for application. (Training and Certification for
8 this task is required)
9 e. Masonry Adhesive – Perform one (1) masonry adhesive process that fully
10 meets the requirements of this specification.
11 f. Stain – Perform one (1) area of stone stain to match adjacent original stone
12 (post-cleaning).
13 g. Redress Stone in-situ – Perform one (1) area of stone resurfacing/redress.
14 h. Baluster Repair – Complete baluster repair in one (1) location/one (1)
15 baluster. The work will include the binding, removal, core-drill, helical
16 anchor installation, lime injection/adhesive installation and stain.
17 i. Cleaning - restoration cleaning will not be required.
18 j. Note: Review all masonry restoration exhibits to confirm all work required
19 under this section.
20
21 1.5 SUBMITTALS
22 A. Submit the following items in time to prevent delay of the work and to allow adequate time for
23 review. Do not order materials or start work before receiving written approval.
24 B. Submit samples of all specified materials and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) as appropriate.
25 C. Submit test results from all ASTM testing analyses as described in Quality Assurance.
26 1. All testing shall be coordinated by: John Lambert, 681 South 4050 West, Salt Lake
27 City, UT 84104; (801) 509-5099 email: [email protected]
28 2. Preferred Laboratory Vendor: AMT Laboratories • 3741 Greenway Circle • Lawrence,
29 Kansas 66046 • (888) 376-3600
30 D. Quality Assurance Plan
31 1. Submit written plan as outlined in the Quality Assurance Section for the work of this
32 Section.
33 E. Historic Masonry Consultant – Training Program Instructor
34 1. Preferred Vendor: John Lambert, Historic Masonry Trainer/Abstract Masonry
35 Restoration, Inc., 681 South 4050 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84104; (801) 509-5099
36 email: [email protected]
37 2. Other vendors may be considered but must be vetted and approved by the Architect
38 PRIOR to submitting bid. No substitutions will be allowed after the Bid due date.
39 F. Project Training Program Plan
40 1. Submit written documentation of a training certificate program which complies with
41 ASTM E2659-09 Standard Practice for Certificate Programs specific to the
42 rehabilitation treatment requirements of this project. At a minimum the training
43 program shall include all stone treatment requirements listed on the drawings and the
44 removal of both cement based mortars and lime mortar and installation of lime mortar.
45 The documentation shall include: the number of learning events; a defined scope of
46 training; a list of learning objectives, outcomes, assessment, and evaluation; samples
47 of written tests; description of skills testing methodology; and requisites to obtain a
48 certificate.
49 G. Project Training Certificates
50 1. Submit written project training certificates from an independent Historic Masonry
51 Consultant – Training Program Instructor verifying that all workers, installers,
52 supervisors, project managers, and foremen have successfully completed the
53 requisites from the on-site training program specific to the rehabilitation treatments
54 assigned to them individually and as specified for this project.
55 H. Stone Samples for Verification
56 1. Before erecting mockup, submit samples of the following:
57 a. Stone Replacement – Full Reclaimed Stones – Owner has a supply of
58 reclaimed stone for use on this project. Contractor shall verify whether stone
59 meets specification requirements. Owner makes no assurance that the
60 reclaimed stone will meet project specification requirements.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 b. Stone Replacement – Full New Stones – Full new stones shall meet
2 specification requirements for color texture, density, technical performance,
3 and stone type.
4 c. Stone Replacement – Cut Stones – Create each profile for review and
5 approval.
6 2. Substitute Stone Repair Material – Provide at least two samples for patching material
7 that will match the existing stone. Patching shall match existing stone; therefore,
8 multiple submittals are expected. Substitute stone repair material will not be
9 permitted to be applied in missing areas of more than 2 inches deep.
10 3. Qualification Data for Stone Rehabilitation Firm – The firm must submit written
11 documentation of at least 10 individual projects completed in the last 15 years for
12 which they have been the primary masonry specialist. Work must be performed by a
13 contractor with 15 years’ documented successful experience in comparable historic
14 stone masonry rehabilitation projects in size, age and material and who employs
15 personnel skilled in the rehabilitation treatments and rehabilitation process and
16 operations indicated.
17 a. The written submission must include the following:
18 i. Name and address of project
19 ii. Name, address and phone numbers of Client
20 iii. Date of project completion
21 iv. Age of structure and whether it was listed on the National Register of
22 Historic Places or is designated as a Historic Landmark
23 v. How the work scope was specifically delivered to comply with the
24 Secretary of the Interior’s Standards for Rehabilitation.
25 vi. Size of the project, in terms of square feet of stone masonry restored
26 vii. List of materials (including names and manufacturers) used on project
27 4. Qualification Data for Field Supervisor –The firm must submit written documentation
28 of at least 10 projects that the Field Supervisor has supervised. The projects may
29 include those that were completed under the employment of a different firm. The list
30 must include projects that are similar in size, age and material to the current project.
31 All stone treatments must be performed and supervised by craftspersons whom are
32 familiar with historic stone masonry construction.
33 a. The written submission must include the following:
34 i. Name and address of project
35 ii. Name, address and phone numbers of Client
36 iii. Date of project completion
37 iv. Size of the project, in terms of square feet of stone masonry required
38 v. List of materials (including names and manufacturers) used on project
39 vi. Name(s) of firm(s) the work was performed under, if different from
40 submitting firm
41 vii. Proof of expertise in historic stone masonry, as indicated by a
42 rehabilitation treatment certificate from the training program defined in
43 this specification
44 5. Qualification Data for Workers – The firm must submit the name of each craftsperson
45 who will be assigned to this project. Only skilled journeyman masons, trained and
46 certified by the historic masonry consultant, shall be used for masonry rehabilitation.
47 All stone treatments must be performed and supervised by craftspersons who are
48 familiar with historic stone masonry construction.
49 a. Include the following:
50 i. Name of craftsperson
51 ii. Position craftsperson will hold on this project
52 iii. Number of years working as a masonry rehabilitation specialist
53 iv. Proof of expertise in historic stone masonry, as indicated by a project
54 certificate from the training program defined in this specification
55 v. Submit digital photographic documentation proposed procedures
56
57 1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS
58 A. If alternatives to the methods and materials indicated are proposed for any phase of
59 rehabilitation work, the Contractor shall provide written descriptions and programs of testing
60 and install all test panel samples and mock-ups to demonstrate the effectiveness of the
61 alternatives for use on this project.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 B. The Contractor must provide documentation showing compliance with the requirements for
2 substitutions and the following information:
3 1. Coordination information, including a list of changes to other work that will be
4 necessary to accommodate the substitution
5 2. A comparison of the substituted products and materials with the specified products
6 and methods, including performance, weight, size, durability, and visual effect.
7 3. Certification that the substitution conforms to the contract documents and is
8 appropriate for the applications indicated. Material substitution requests must be
9 accompanied by independent laboratory test reports from a lab designated by the
10 Architect to establish equivalent performance levels and specification compliance.
11 The Architect shall designate the testing lab, and the party requesting the substitution
12 shall pay for testing.
13
15 A. Deliver and store materials in manufacturer’s original unopened containers bearing labels
16 indicating the grade, batch, production data, type, and names of products and manufacturers.
17 B. During storage and construction, protect rehabilitation materials from wetting by rain, snow or
18 ground water, and from staining or intermixture with earth or other types of materials.
19 C. Protect stone and other materials from deterioration by moisture and temperature. Store stone
20 in a dry location or in waterproof containers. Keep stone on pallets. Do not shrink wrap stone
21 on pallets.
22 D. Comply with product manufacturer's recommendations for minimum and maximum
23 temperature requirements for storage.
24 E. Comply with the manufacturer’s written specifications and recommendations for application
25 and installation.
26 F. Store all materials in a location that will not impede the progress of the work.
27
29 A. Do not perform any masonry work unless air temperatures are between 40 degrees Fahrenheit
30 (10 degrees Celsius) and 95 degrees Fahrenheit (32 degrees Celsius) and will remain so for at
31 least 120 hours after completion of the work. To prevent premature evaporation of the mortar,
32 phase masonry work during hot weather by completing the process on the shady side of the
33 wall or by scheduling installation of materials during cooler evening hours.
34 B. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not lower the
35 freezing point of mortar by the use of admixtures or anti-freeze agents, and do not use
36 chlorides in the mortar.
37 C. Prevent mortar from staining the face of the masonry or other surfaces to be left exposed.
38 Immediately remove all mortar that comes in contact with any surface.
39 D. Cover partially completed work when work is not in progress.
40 E. Protect projections from droppings.
41 F. Damage occurring to the structure as a result of the Contractor’s failure to protect against such
42 damage shall be the Contractor’s responsibility. The contractor shall restore damaged areas to
43 the complete satisfaction of the Architect at no expense to the Owner.
44 G. Cold-Weather Requirement for masonry repair and mortar:
45 1. Follow ACSI 530 and manufacturers written installation requirements.
46 H. Hot-Weather Requirements:
47 1. Protect masonry repair and mortar-joint pointing when temperature and humidity
48 conditions produce excessive evaporation of water. Provide artificial shade and wind
49 breaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with
50 temperatures of 90 degrees Fahrenheit and above.
51
52 1.9 ATTIC STOCK
53 A. Provide the following products and amounts for Owner attic stock:
54 1. Rehabilitation Mortars - At least 6 bags of unopened NHL 3.5.
55 2. Substitute Stone Repair Materials - At least 1 gallon unopened containers for each
56 type of stone patching material used. There will be up to 6 patch colors required.
57 3. Any unused, reclaimed stone from stone replacement such as the rebuild of the
58 Wilson Stairs at the end of the Project. Palletize the stones and transport to an offsite
59 location as designated by the City.
60
61

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
2
3 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
4 A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for
5 product selection:
6 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
7 specified.
8 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
9 manufacturers specified.
10
11 2.2 SUBSTITUTE STONE PATCH MATERIAL
12 A. Substitute Stone Patch Material: Must use only mineral-based, single component products that
13 contain natural binders; no synthetic polymers or additives are permitted. Substitute stone material
14 must be pre-mixed in a quality controlled factory, with only the addition of water required at the site
15 prior to installation.
16 B. Acceptable material:
17 1. Jahn M70 Repair Mortar, Cathedral Stone Products, Jessup, Maryland
18 C. Substitute Stone Patch Material shall be custom colored to match the existing stone and produced
19 in a quality controlled factory environment. The contractor will be expected to keep a stock of a
20 range of six (6) custom colors.
21 D. No field mixing of color pigments into the repair materials is permitted on-site.
22 E. No color staining of existing stone or newly applied repair materials is permitted.
23 F. Apply substitute stone materials to areas no more than 2 inches in depth and 3 inches wide or as
24 specifically allowed by the manufacturer.
25
26 2.3 STONE REPLACEMENT MATERIAL
27 A. Oolitic Indiana Limestone shall be by the Indiana Limestone Company; no substitutes will be
28 allowed. The Contractor shall use replacement stone that is compatible to the existing stone in
29 appearance, color and texture, as well as in the physical properties identified in section 1.4.j
30 (above) the following manufacturers/distributed may be contacted for samples:
31 1. Quarra Stone Company, LLC, Madison, Wisconsin, Contact: Steve Ensor, (608) 246-8803
32 2. Galloy & Van Etten, Chicago, Illinois, Contact: Tom Van Etten, (773) 928-4800
33 3. Gary Galassi Stone & Steel, Romeoville, Illinois, Contact: (815) 886-3906
34 4. Madison Block and Stone, Madison, Wisconsin, Contact: Wayne Welzien, (608) 429-5633
35 5. Halquist Stone Co. Inc., Sussex, WI, Contact: (262) 246-9000
36 6. Approved equal (approval required prior to Bid)
37 B. Mortar for laying replacement stone: Mortar shall be the same as the pointing mortar, as defined in
38 this Section.
39
41 A. The basis of the mortar for this project shall be:
42 1. St. Astier Natural Hydraulic Lime NHL 3.5, distributed by TransMineral USA.
43 2. Pigment – None.
44 3. Sand – Sand shall be clean and uncontaminated by clay/silt. Janesville #1 by Janesville
45 Sand and Gravel, 1110 Harding Street, P.O. Box 427 Janesville, WI 53547, 800-955-
46 7702.
47 4. Final mortar mix shall be determined in the field under the direction of the Architect. For
48 the purposes of this bid use the following lime/sand ratio (1:2.5) by volume.
49 B. All mortar shall be prepared and placed in accordance with the Department of the Interior National
50 Park Service Cultural Resources Preservation Briefs 2, “Repointing Mortar Joints in Historic
51 Masonry Buildings” (Revised Edition October 1998), and in compliance with the guidelines set forth
52 by the Secretary of the Interior’s Standards.
53 C. The mortar shall match the original in color, grain size and texture. The compressive strength of the
54 repointing mortar shall be equal or less than the compressive strength of the original mortar and
55 surrounding brick. The replacement mortar shall contain approximately the same ingredient
56 proportions of the original mortar and shall have a water vapor transmission rate greater than all
57 adjacent masonry.
58 D. All replacement mortar ingredients and mortar formulations have been established from test data
59 gathered from the original materials sampled from site, and from performance data observed in the
60 field.
61 E. Mixing of individual mortar ingredients at the construction site will be permitted.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 F. Repointing mortars may be pre-blended (not including water) in single containers in a factory-
2 controlled environment, however the architect shall have FULL authority to reject any process that
3 in his sole discretion will not meet the intent of this specification.
4 G. All ingredients will be converted from volume measurements to weight measurements to ensure
5 quality production of the mortar. This must be accomplished prior to any mix manufacture with the
6 Natural Hydraulic Lime manufacturer.
7 H. All mortar materials delivered to the site shall be tested to confirm specification compliance before
8 mortar is installed in the wall.
9
11 A. Expansion Anchor: HY 150 Max with stainless steel bolt washer and nut, manufactured by Hilti,
12 Inc., 1132 Miller Park Way, Milwaukee, Wisconsin, 53214, [email protected].
13 B. Shims: 2 inch by 4 inch by 1/16 inch, 1/8 inch, and 1/4 inch, plastic shims as manufactured by
14 Racknow Polymers and distributed by Lance Construction Supplies, Inc., Chicago, Illinois, or
15 approved equal.
16 C. Strap Anchors: “No. 141 U-Type Stone Anchor,” 8 inches long by 1-1/4 inch wide with a 7/8 inch
17 bend (Interior dimension). 16 gauge or 0.625 inch (1/16 inch) thickness, stainless steel conforming
18 to ASTM A 167, AISI Type 304, as manufactured by Heckmann Building Products, Inc., Melrose
19 Park, Illinois.
20 D. Dowels (Pins): 3/8 inch diameter by 4 inch long, smooth finish, stainless steel, conforming to ASTM
21 267, AISI Type 304 or 316.
22 E. Lead Cap Flashing: Such as Weathercap lead flashing (Type A and Type B), by Weathercap, Inc.,
23 P.O. Box 1776 Slidell, LA 70459 (985) 649-4000.
24 F. Water: Potable (this means that you should be able to drink it), fresh, clean, clear and free from
25 injurious amounts of sewage, oil, acid, alkali, salts, organic matter or other detrimental substances.
26 G. Structural Angle Steel Lintels: hot dipped galvanized ASTM A36 steel – galvanized post
27 modification.
28 H. Self-adhering Membrane Flashing: “Polyguard 400 Thru Wall Flashing,” a 40 mil, self-adhering,
29 self-healing membrane consisting of a rubberized asphalt waterproofing element, bonded to a
30 strong polyethylene film top surface, as manufactured by Polyguard Products Inc, Ennis, Texas, or
31 “Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing,” 40-mil, self-adhering membrane wall flashing as manufactured by
32 W.R. Grace & Co., Columbia, Maryland, or approved equal.
33 I. Through-wall Flashing Drip Edge: “Preformed Stainless Steel Drip Edge.” 28 gauge (15 mils thick),
34 1-5/8” wide with a 3/8” bend at one end made of Type 304 grade, dull finish stainless steel in
35 conformance with ASTM A 167, as manufactured by Polyguard Products inc, Ennis, Texas, or
36 approved equal.
37 J. Helical Anchors: Such as Spira-Lok helical wall tie system by Blok-Lok. Confirm size and confirm
38 with Architect prior to use.
39 K. Masonry Adhesive: Such as Ultimate Modified Polyurethane Hybrid (MPH), color: Buff, by
40 Bonstone Materials Corp.
41 L. Crack Injection Material: Depending upon condition in field (characteristics of crack) the following
42 materials may be used:
43 i. Dispersed Hydrated Lime Injection Mortar such as DHL-IM by US Heritage Group or
44 approved equal.
45 ii. Last Patch Gel by Bonstone Materials Corp.
46 iii. Crack Repair 31, Low Viscosity Crack Injection Resin by Bonstone Materials Corp.
47 M. Consolidation Treatment: Such as HCT (Pretreatment) and OH100 Consolidation Treatment by
48 Prosoco.
49 N. Cleaner for Asphalt Tar and Non-Silicone Sealant: Thixotropic stripping compound such as Sure
50 Klean Fast Acting Stripper by Prosoco or approved equal.
51 O. Cleaner for Silicone Sealants: Such as Sure Klean Dicone NC9 by Prosoco or approved equal.
52 P. Other Items: All other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
53 installation of the Work in this Section, shall be selected by the Contractor subject to approval by
54 the Architect.
55
57
58 3.1 EXAMINATION
59 A. The Contractor shall have the sole responsibility for the accuracy of all measurements and for the
60 estimate of material quantities required and necessary to satisfy the requirements of these

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 Specifications. It is the intent of this project to salvage, preserve and reuse existing stone to the
2 greatest extent possible.
3 B. Whenever possible, where full stone replacement is deemed necessary, use approved original
4 material salvaged and stored by the Owner.
5 C. Should replacement stone be required due to irreparable damage; match all physical properties
6 including color, texture and size of existing stone.
7 D. Verify that installation conditions are satisfactory to receive work of this Section.
8 E. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
9 F. Beginning work constitutes the Contractor’s acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.
10 G. During deconstruction, as well as rehabilitation operations, restore all areas to a weathertight
11 condition each day and/or before inclement weather commences.
12
13 3.2 SUBSTITUTE STONE PATCH (SSP)
14 A. Substitute stone repairs require a moldable, plastic filled material applied directly to the loss area
15 and set into place by its own adhesion to the stone substrate. Such stone repair mortars and
16 putties are typically offered by manufacturing companies that do not sell stone. Estimates for the
17 volume of material removed and needed for this repair are provided in Exhibit G; final scope may
18 vary depending on conditions encountered in the field.
19 B. Substitute stone material may not be installed in thicknesses exceeding 2 inches. Stone repairs in
20 excess of 2 inches thick will require reconfiguring the stone in lieu of performing other repairs.
21 C. Remove all loose mortar and masonry prior to installation of the substitute stone material. “Sound”
22 the masonry with a hammer to verify its integrity. If necessary, cut away an additional 1/2” of the
23 stone substrate to ensure the surface to be repaired is solid and stable. Remove any sealant
24 residue.
25 D. Cut out all cramp anchors, threaded rod anchors and/or dowels within the damaged masonry area.
26 Any anchors that are free of rust, solidly embedded, and do not project beyond the solid masonry
27 surface may remain. All others should be removed.
28 E. Using clean water and a scrub brush, clean all dust from surface and pores of the substrate.
29 F. For very dry or porous surfaces, pre-wet the substrate ahead of time to prevent the substrate from
30 drawing moisture out of the repair too quickly. Re-wet the surface immediately before applying the
31 repair material.
32 G. Use methods established in project training program to deliver the substitute stone repair work as
34 H. Curing methods vary in different parts of the country and at different times of the year, calling for
35 different amounts of water to be used in the first 36 hours after application. Adjustments also have
36 to take into account how much time is remaining before freezing weather occurs.
37 I. Follow all manufacturers’ instructions pertaining to the placement of materials. If the manufacturer
38 requires that installers of a specified product be trained, provide this documentation to the Architect
39 and supporting documentation. Training certificates previously issued by product companies for the
40 application of specified products may not be substituted for the Project Training “Substitute Stone
41 Certificate” on this project. Applicators previously trained by product companies are encouraged to
42 work on this specific scope, but it is not a mandatory requirement of this specification, only that of
43 the product company to ensure the proper placement of the materials.
44 J. Only rehabilitation technicians that hold a Project Training “Substitute Stone Repair Certificate” will
45 be permitted to work on the scope of this stone repair treatment as defined.
46
47 3.3 FERROUS ANCHOR/BOLT REMOVAL
48 A. Remove masonry anchors, brackets, wood nailers, and other extraneous items no longer in use
49 unless identified as historically significant or indicated to remain. Estimates for the number of
50 fastener repairs needed for this work are provided in Exhibit G; final scope may vary depending on
51 conditions encountered in the field.
52 B. Remove items carefully to avoid spalling or cracking masonry.
53 C. If item cannot be removed without damaging surrounding masonry, cut off item flush with surface
54 and core drill surrounding masonry and item as close around item as practical.
55 D. Only rehabilitation technicians that hold a Project Training “Ferrous Anchor/Bolt Removal
56 Certificate” will be permitted to work on the scope of this stone repair treatment as defined.
57
58 3.4 STONE PLUG REPAIR
59 A. At locations where ferrous anchor bolts and the like are removed prepare a replacement plug by
60 core-drilling replacement stone. Use a drill sized to produce a core that will fit into hole drilled in
61 damaged stone with tolerances of no more than +/- 1/16 inch. Estimates for the number of stone

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 plugs needed for this repair are provided in Exhibit G; final scope may vary depending on
3 B. Adhere the repair piece with substitute stone patch material and clamp so the seam may cure. Prior
4 to adhering with lime putty, the new piece of stone shall be carved and refined to match the surface
5 of the adjacent original stone in both profile and finish. This step is necessary to allow a virtually
6 invisible replacement repair.
7 C. Use methods established in project training program to deliver acceptable repair work as
9 D. Prior to installing the new piece, the stone shall be carved and refined to match the surface of the
10 adjacent original stone in both profile and finish. This step is necessary to allow a virtually invisible
11 replacement repair. Adhere the repair piece with mortar that has a high content of lime (hydrated
12 or putty) and clamp so the seam may cure.
13 E. Only rehabilitation technicians that hold a Project Training “Stone Plug Repair Certificate” will be
14 permitted to work on the scope of this stone repair treatment as defined.
15
16 3.5 REMOVE, REDRESS AND RESET
17 A. Before removing any deteriorated masonry units establish bonding patterns, levels and coursings.
18 Label each unit, numbered on drawings, for this treatment to correspond. Intent of label is to
19 ensure return of stone to same location and bond pattern. Label the stones on a surface which will
20 be completely hidden once the stones are reinstalled. The method of labeling should be
21 compatible with specified mortars (and not result in non-adhesion or an adverse reaction to the
22 mortar, etc.) Numbered stones should be oriented the same (up/down, north, south, east, west)
23 when reinstalled as when they were removed. Estimates for the amount of each technique/scope
24 needed for this repair are provided in Exhibit G; final scope may vary depending on conditions
25 encountered in the field.
26 B. Carefully remove units in gentlest means necessary for reinstallation at the same location.
27 C. Scale off all loose pieces of original stone from masonry intended to be removed, redressed and
28 returned, including surface material in powder or granular form and detachments of planer
29 elements, spalls and chips. Contractor shall sound all stone on building by using the “ring test
30 method” in order to distinguish fully intact stone from those in which delamination may be hidden or
31 pieces of unstable material may not be immediately visible.
32 D. Remove mortar, loose particles, and soil from stone by cleaning with hand chisels, needle scalers,
34 E. Remove sealants, asphalt and other asphaltic materials by cutting close to stone with utility knife
35 and cleaning with solvents.
36 F. Use methods established in project training program to redress the stone surface to match the
37 original surface textures and profiles as approved by the Architect and Owner and as required.
38 G. It is the intention of this treatment to avoid introducing products to the face of the stone merely to
39 enhance the look and color of the surface.
40 H. Reset unit plane or plumb with the surrounding stone masonry surfaces. The maximum open space
41 behind the returned stone unit is equal half of the stone’s depth. Notify Architect for alternate stone
42 treatment repair if open space exceeds permissible depth. No infill will be permitted behind stone.
43 I. Butter vertical joints for full width before setting and set units in full bed of mortar, unless otherwise
44 indicated.
45 J. Rake out mortar used for laying stone before mortar sets and point new mortar joints in repaired
46 area to comply with requirements for repointing existing stone, and at same time as repointing of
48 K. Only rehabilitation technicians that hold a Project Training “Remove, Redress and Return
50
51 3.6 STONE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
52 A. When directed, remove stone that has deteriorated or is damaged beyond repair. Carefully
53 demolish or remove entire units from joint to joint, without damaging surrounding stone, in a
54 manner that permits replacement with full size units. Estimates for the volume of material removed
55 and needed for this repair are provided in Exhibit G; final scope may vary depending on conditions
57 B. Sort stone by size and zone for future use.
58 C. Support and protect remaining stonework that surrounds removal area and adjoining construction
59 in an undamaged condition.
60 D. Remove in an undamaged condition as many whole stone units as possible.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 E. Remove mortar, loose particles, and soil from stone by cleaning with hand chisels, needle scalers,
3 F. Remove sealants, asphalt and other asphaltic materials by cutting close to stone with utility knife
4 and cleaning with solvents.
5 G. Reuse salvaged stone to the fullest extent possible. Integrate new replacement stone in concealed
6 areas or shielded from public view.
7 H. Deliver cleaned stone not required for reuse to Owner per subsection 1.9 of this document.
8 I. Clean stone surrounding removal areas by removing mortar, dust, and loose particles in
9 preparation for replacement.
10 J. Only rehabilitation technicians that hold a Project Training “Stone Removal and Replacement
12 K. Replace removed stone with other removed stone, where possible, or with new stone matching
13 existing stone, including size. Butter vertical joints for full width before setting and set units in full
14 bed of mortar, unless otherwise indicated.
15 L. Rake out mortar used for laying stone before mortar sets and point new mortar joints in repaired
16 area to comply with requirements for repointing existing stone, and at same time as repointing of
18 M. Only rehabilitation technicians that hold a Project Training “Stone Removal and Replacement
20
21 3.7 DUTCHMAN
22 A. Remove damaged stone to a specified depth and insert a new piece of stone to fit in the opening to
23 create the appearance of a seamless patch. Estimates for the volume of each technique/scope
26 B. Carefully remove the deteriorated stone material in a larger stone. The Dutchman repair will be
27 required on stones with surface face loss which exceeds 2 inches minimum in depth.
28 C. At locations indicated, remove regular geometric portions of stone units. Carefully remove stone by
29 making vertical and horizontal saw cuts at face of stone and demolishing corner portion of stone
30 unit to depth required for fitting partial replacement. Make edges of stone at cuts smooth and
31 square to each other and to finished surface.
32 D. Remove loose mortar particles and other debris from surfaces to be bonded and surfaces of
33 adjacent stone units that will receive mortar by cleaning with stiff-fiber brush.
34 E. The new piece must precisely fit into place with tolerances of no more than +/-1/16-inch. Supporting
35 rods of stainless steel may be necessary for some Dutchman repairs, depending on the extent of
36 the repair and the location.
37 F. Prior to installing the new piece, the stone shall be carved and refined to match the surface of the
38 adjacent original stone in both profile and finish. This step is necessary to allow a virtually invisible
39 replacement repair. Adhere the repair piece with specified adhesive.
40
41 3.8 CRACK INJECTION AND STAIN
42 A. General: Comply with cementitious crack filler manufacturer's written instructions. Estimates for the
43 amount of crack injection needed for this repair are provided in Exhibit G; alternative methods may
44 be proposed to reduce impact on existing material. Final scope may vary depending on conditions
46 B. Drill 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter, downward-sloping injection holes as follows:
47 1. Transverse Cracks Less Than 3/8 inch (10 mm) Wide: Drill holes through center of crack
48 at 12 to 18 inches (300 to 500 mm) o.c.
49 2. Transverse Cracks More Than 3/8 inch (10 mm) Wide: Drill holes through center of crack
50 at 18 to 36 inches (500 to 1000 mm) o.c.
51 C. Clean out drill holes and cracks with compressed air and water. Remove dirt and organic matter,
52 loose material, sealants, and failed crack repair materials.
53 D. Place plastic injection ports in drilled holes and seal face of cracks between injection ports with clay
54 or other non-staining, removable plugging material. Leave openings at upper ends of cracks for air
55 release.
56 E. Inject cementitious crack filler through ports sequentially, beginning at one end of area and working
57 to opposite end; where possible begin at lower end of injection area and work upward.
58 F. Inject filler until it extrudes from adjacent ports. After port has been injected, plug with clay or other
59 suitable material and begin injecting filler at adjacent port, repeating process until all ports have
60 been injected.
61 G. Clean cementitious crack filler from face of stone before it sets by scrubbing with water.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 H. After cementitious crack filler has set, remove injection ports, plugging material, and excess filler.
2 Patch injection holes and surface of cracks as specified.
3 I. For all areas of exposed crack filler material, apply new stain/pigment to offset the color to best
4 match the adjacent stone.
5 J. Only rehabilitation technicians that hold a Project Training “Crack Lime Injection and Stain
7
8 3.9 MASONRY ADHESIVE
9 A. General: Comply with masonry adhesive manufacturer's written instructions. Estimates for the
10 amount of masonry adhesive needed for this repair are provided in Exhibit G; final scope may vary
11 depending on conditions encountered in the field.
12 B. Carefully remove stone fragments as required and reserve for adhesion to existing stone substrate.
13 C. Prepare all surfaces for adhesion as directed by the adhesive manufacturer.
14 D. Apply masonry adhesive in strict accordance with the requirements of the adhesive manufacturer.
15 E. Reinstall reserved stone fragments, clamping or securing as required to promote a permanent bond
16 F. Avoid excessive adhesive and immediately clean all adhesive smears
17 G. Fill all voids remaining after the stone material has been adhered with compatible stone patch
18 material as specified herein
19 H. Only rehabilitation technicians that hold a Project Training “Masonry Adhesive Certificate” will be
20 permitted to work on the scope of this stone repair treatment as defined.
21
22 3.10 DRESS STONE IN-SITU
23 A. Carefully remove loose stone fragments from face of stone. Estimates for the area of redress in-situ
26 B. Finish face of stone to match existing texture.
27
28 3.11 BALUSTER REPAIR
29 A. It is the intent of this project to preserve all balusters for reinstallation.
30 B. Bidders note: this process has been developed and executed on one baluster. The actual process
31 can be made available at your request.
32 C. Bind the balusters. While the balusters are still in place, bind and fully support each individual
33 baluster through the use of non-penetrating and/or destructive means.
34 D. Remove and preserve the balusters for reuse. Number each baluster and document its location in
35 the wall so that it can be returned during the parapet rebuild.
36 E. Prepare the baluster for helifix installation. This has been done during our mock-up process by
37 creating a simple jig.
38 F. Drill helifix port vertically into baluster.
39 G. Install helifix anchor in strict accordance with manufacturer’s requirements.
40 H. Repair cracks utilizing methods described herein including lime injection, staining, stone substitute
41 material patch, etc.
42 I. Reinstall balusters.
43 J. Touch up as required.
44
45 3.12 POINTING OF MORTAR JOINTS IN STONE
46 A. Center Cut Method: Existing horizontal mortar joints (bed joints) may be raked out using a rotary
47 grinder with diamond blade that is narrower than the joint width but not more than 50%.
48 B. The vertical mortar joints (head joints) shall be removed by hand using masonry chisels or
49 pneumatic carving tools powered by air; they SHALL NOT be raked out using rotary power saws.
50 This work should be included in the overall cost for repointing; final scope may vary depending on
52 C. All joints (unless otherwise noted) shall be raked back to sound, solid, back up material. All raking
53 out should leave a clean, square face at the back of the joint to provide for maximum contact of
54 pointing mortar with the masonry back up mortar. Shallow or feather edging shall not be permitted.
55 D. If, after mortar is raked back voids are encountered in the historic mortar, then prepare the joint to
56 provide a proper substrate for pointing mortar installation (tamp pointing).
57 E. Existing mortar joints shall be raked out a minimum depth of 2 1/2 times the width of the existing
58 mortar joints or as indicated on the drawings.
59 F. Contractor shall not widen the existing masonry joints.
60 G. The surrounding masonry edges shall not be spalled or chipped in the process of mortar removal.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 H. Damage to surrounding stone resulting from rotary blade over running shall not be permitted.
2 Contractor shall replace all stone damaged during mortar removal with replacement units that
3 match the original exactly. This work shall be done at the Contractor’s sole expense.
4 I. Remove all friable material. Brush, vacuum, blow out or flush joints with water to remove dirt and
5 loose debris, working from top to bottom of wall.
6 J. Exposed surface of stone adjacent to joint shall be thoroughly saturated prior to re-pointing.
7 Maintain a water sprayer on site at all times during the re-pointing process.
8 K. The mortar material shall resemble the consistency of brown sugar during installation. This drier
9 consistency enables the material to be tightly packed into the joint and allows for cleaner work and
10 helps to prevent shrinkage cracks as the mortar cures.
11 L. Walls should be presoaked with water 10 minutes prior to pointing or as weather conditions dictate.
12 Walls should be misted with water for duration of at least 3 minutes at the end of the day after initial
13 installation. Keep newly pointed wall moist for a minimum of 3-days after installation, including
14 weekends and holidays. 3 times per day minimum – morning, noon and night.
15 M. Rinse stone joint with water to remove dust and mortar particles. Time the rinsing application so
16 that at the time of pointing excess water has evaporated or run off. Joint surfaces should be damp
17 but free from standing water.
18 N. Mortar may be pre-mixed by approved manufacturer.
19 O. Joints should be pointed in layers or "lifts" where the joints are deeper than 1-1/4 inch. Apply in
20 layers not greater than 1/2 the depth but not more than 1-1/4 inch or until a uniform depth is
21 formed. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying the
22 next layer.
23 P. Lift examples:
24 1. 3/16" joint depth (1/16" joint existing) point in one lift
28 5. 1-1/4" joint depth (1/2" joint existing) point in one lift
29 6. 1-7/8" joint depth (3/4" joint existing) point in one lift
30 7. 2-1/2" joint depth (1" joint existing) point in one lift
31 Q. Point all mortar joints to a weather struck/stipple finish profile.
32 R. When mortar is thumbprint hard the joints shall be finished to match the original historic joint profile.
33 S. Keep mortar from drying out too quickly. Protection from direct sun and high winds for the first 72
34 hours after installation. Thoroughly soak the wall a minimum of three times per day for the first 3
35 days. Protect freshly pointed areas with vapor permeable sheeting such as burlap for the first 24
36 hours after installation.
37 T. Install permanent protection from direct sun and high winds. If a scaffold is used, 100% sun screen
38 mesh should be utilized.
39 U. Thoroughly soak the wall a minimum of three times per day for the first 3 days. Protect freshly
40 pointed areas with damp breathable sheeting (burlap or for the first 24 hours after installation.
41 V. Allow mortar to harden at least 30 days before beginning cleaning work.
42
43 3.13 CONSOLIDATION
44 A. Install consolidation material as specified in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s
45 requirements. Estimates for scope of this treatment are included in the notes. No works is to
46 commence on a sacred stone without first receiving approval for the final scope from the Architect.
47
48 3.14 FINISHING TECHNIQUES
49 A. Acceptable finishing techniques for redressing, substitute stone and crack repair will be defined
50 during the demonstration and test panel work which is part of the training program as approved by
51 the Architect and Owner.
52 B. Do not create vibrations in the wall to dislodge or separate bond from previously completed work.
53
54 3.15 LEAD CAP FLASHING INSTALLATION
55 A. Install new lead cap flashings in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements.
56
57 3.16 CLEANING
58 A. Use care when installing mortar, use appropriate methods and workers who are capable of
59 executing work without excessive mess.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 B. After mortar has fully hardened, thoroughly clean exposed masonry surfaces of excess mortar and
2 foreign matter; use wood scrapers, stiff-nylon or fiber brushes, and clean water, spray applied at
3 low pressure.
4 1. Do not use metal scrapers or brushes.
5 2. Do not use acidic or alkaline cleaners.
6 C. Wash adjacent non-masonry surfaces, if applicable. Use detergent and soft brushes or cloths.
7 D. Sweep and rake adjacent pavement and grounds to remove masonry debris. Where necessary,
8 pressure wash surfaces to remove mortar, dust, dirt, and stains.
9 E. Preliminary Cleaning: Before beginning general cleaning, remove extraneous substances that are
10 resistant to cleaning methods being used. Extraneous substances include paint, caulking, sealant,
11 asphalt, and tar.
12 F. Remove paint and caulking with a non-damaging/staining paint remover.
13 G. Repeat application up to two times if needed.
14 H. Remove asphalt and tar with solvent-type paint remover.
15 I. Apply only to asphalt and tar by brush without pre-wetting.
16 J. Allow paint remover to remain on surface for 10 to 30 minutes.
17 K. Rinse off with water following manufacturer’s instructions.
18 L. Repeat application if needed.
19 M. Chemical Cleaner Application Methods: NO CHEMICAL CLEANERS WILL BE PERMITTED FOR
20 USE ON THIS PROJECT EXCEPT THOSE SPECIFICALLY SPECIFIED. Prior to commencement
21 of any cleaning the contractor shall test the areas as recommended by the manufacturer pending
22 the Architect’s review and approval. Final cleaning process must be approved by the Owner and
23 Architect.
24 N. Removing Plant Growth: Completely remove plant, moss, and shrub growth from masonry
25 surfaces. Carefully remove plants, creepers, and vegetation by cutting at roots and allowing to dry
26 as long as possible before removal. Remove loose soil and debris from open masonry joints to
27 whatever depth they occur.
28 O. Proceed with cleaning in an orderly manner with material selected from mock up testing; work from
29 top to bottom of each scaffold width and from one end of each elevation to the other.
30 P. Perform each cleaning method indicated in a manner that results in uniform coverage of all
31 surfaces, including corners, moldings, and interstices, and that produces an even effect without
32 streaking or damaging masonry surfaces. Keep area of wall below area of wall being cleaned wet
33 at all times by rinsing with clean water.
34 Q. Use only those cleaning methods approved for each foreign material to be removed.
35 1. Do not use wire brushes or brushes that are not resistant to the cleaner being used.
36 2. Do not use plastic-bristle brushes if natural-fiber brushes will resist cleaner being used.
37 3. Use spray equipment that provides controlled application at volume and pressure
38 indicated, measured at spray tip. Adjust pressure and volume to ensure that cleaning
39 methods do not damage masonry.
40 4. Equip units with pressure gages.
41 5. For water spray application, use fan-shaped spray tip that disperses water at an angle of
42 25 to 50 degrees.
43 6. For high-pressure water spray application, use fan-shaped spray tip that disperses water
44 at an angle of at least 40 degrees. Do not exceed 800 psi. Keep the tip a minimum of 20
45 inches from masonry.
46 7. For heated water spray application, use equipment capable of maintaining temperature
47 between 140 and 160 deg F, 185 to 190 deg F in warm weather, at flow rates indicated.
48 R. After mortar has fully hardened, thoroughly clean exposed masonry surfaces of excess mortar and
49 foreign matter; use wood scrapers, stiff-nylon or -fiber brushes, and clean water, spray applied at
50 low pressure. Do not use metal scrapers or brushes. Do not use acidic or alkaline cleaners to
51 remove excess mortar.
52 S. Wash adjacent materials and other non-masonry surfaces. Use detergent and soft brushes or
53 cloths.
54 T. Clean masonry debris from roof; rinse off roof and flush scuppers.
55 U. Sweep and rake adjacent pavement and grounds to remove masonry debris. Where necessary,
56 pressure wash surfaces to remove mortar, dust, dirt, and stains.
57
58 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 04 22 00
2 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
4 1.1 SUMMARY
5 1.2 DEFINITIONS
11 2.1 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL
12 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
13 2.3 CONCRETE LINTELS
14 2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
15 2.5 REINFORCEMENT
16 2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS
17 2.7 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
18 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
19 2.9 MASONRY-CELL FILL
20 2.10 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
22 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
23 3.2 TOLERANCES
24 3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
25 3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
27 3.6 MASONRY-JOINT REINFORCEMENT
28 3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE
29 3.8 FLASHING
30 3.9 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
31 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
32 3.11 PARGING
33 3.12 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
34 3.13 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
35 PART 1 - GENERAL
36 1.1 SUMMARY
38 1. Concrete masonry units.
39 2. Steel reinforcing bars.
40 1.2 DEFINITIONS
41 A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).
42 B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.

45 B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
46 1. Product Certificates: For regional materials, indicating location of material manufacturer and point
47 of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for
48 each regional material.
49 C. Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. Detail bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit masonry
50 reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315.
51 D. Samples: For each type and color of the following:
52 1. Exposed CMUs.
53 2. Pigmented and colored-aggregate mortar.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 042200 - 1 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 A. Material Certificates: For each type and size of product. For masonry units, include data on material
3 properties and material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.
4 B. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar, Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
5 1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according
6 to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and
7 ASTM C 91/C 91M for air content.
8 2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with
9 compressive strength requirement.

11 A. Mockup: Refer to Section 01 43 39 – Mockups for description of construction required to complete a
12 mockup submittal for review.
13 B. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
14 demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements" for
15 mockups.
16 1. Build sample panels for typical exterior and interior walls in sizes approximately 48 inches long by
17 48 inches by full thickness.

19 A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do
20 not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing
21 conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
22 B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in
23 TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
25 2.1 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL

26 A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, except as modified by requirements in the
27 Contract Documents.
28 B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain
29 chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units where such defects are exposed in
30 the completed Work.
31 C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with requirements for fire-resistance-rated assembly designs indicated.
32 1. Where fire-resistance-rated construction is indicated, units shall be listed and labeled by a qualified
33 testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
34 2. Tests shall comply with UL 618 “Standards of Concrete Masonry Units”.
35 3. Each unit shall be stamped "Classified UL--See Certificate".
36 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

37 1. 6” Nominal width: CMU-1
38 2. 8” Nominal width: CMU-2, Class C-3 (for 3hr rated barrier at north side of addition)
39 B. Regional Materials: CMUs shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project site.
40 C. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of
41 adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.
42 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and
43 other special conditions.
44 D. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent for exposed units and where
45 indicated.
46 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products
47 that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
48 a. ACM Chemistries.
49 b. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems.
50 c. GCP Applied Technologies (formerly Grace Construction Products).
51 E. CMUs: ASTM C 90.
52 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of
53 2150 psi.
54 2. Density Classification: Medium weight.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2.3 CONCRETE LINTELS

2 A. Concrete Lintels: ASTM C 1623, matching CMUs in color, texture, and density classification; and with
3 reinforcing bars indicated. Provide lintels with net-area compressive strength not less than that of CMUs.

5 A. Regional Materials: Aggregate for mortar and grout, cement, and lime shall be manufactured within 500
6 miles of Project site.
7 B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather
8 construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.
9 C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
10 D. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other
11 ingredients.
12 E. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91/C 91M.
13 F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
14 1. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.
15 2. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required
16 mortar color.
17 G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
18 H. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with
19 ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of
20 composition indicated.
21 I. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs
22 containing integral water repellent from same manufacturer.
23 J. Water: Potable.
24 2.5 REINFORCEMENT
25 A. Uncoated-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60.
26 B. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells
27 and to hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch steel wire, hot-dip
28 galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated.
29 C. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.
30 1. Interior Walls: Mill- galvanized, carbon steel.
31 2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel.
32 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: [0.148-inch] [0.187-inch] diameter.
33 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: [0.148-inch] [0.187-inch] diameter.
34 5. Spacing of Cross Rods: Not more than 16 inches o.c.
35 6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet [, with prefabricated corner and tee units].
36 2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS

37 A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with
38 the following unless otherwise indicated:
39 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2
40 coating.
41 2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, with
42 ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.
43 3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
44 B. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors that allow vertical or
45 horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.
46 1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch-diameter, hot-dip galvanized-steel
47 wire.
48 2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie made from [0.187-inch-] [0.25-inch-] diameter, hot-dip
49 galvanized-steel wire.
50

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 C. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal
2 adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.
3 1. Connector Section: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and attached to tie
4 section; formed from [0.060-inch-thick steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication] [0.105-inch-thick
5 steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication].
6 2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie made from [0.187-inch-] [0.25-inch-] diameter, hot-dip
7 galvanized-steel wire.
8 3. Corrugated-Metal Ties: Metal strips not less than 7/8 inch wide with corrugations having a
9 wavelength of 0.3 to 0.5 inch and an amplitude of 0.06 to 0.10 inch made from [0.060-inch-thick
10 steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication] [0.075-inch-thick steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication]
11 [0.105-inch-thick steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication] with dovetail tabs for inserting into
12 dovetail slots in concrete.
13 D. Partition Top Anchors: 0.105-inch-thick metal plate with a 3/8-inch-diameter metal rod 6 inches long
14 welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube.
15 Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
16 E. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 24 inches long, with ends
17 turned up 2 inches or with cross pins unless otherwise indicated.
18 1. Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
19 2.7 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

20 A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim"
21 and as follows:
22 1. Fabricate metal drip edges from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and 1/2 inch out
23 from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed.
24 2. Fabricate metal sealant stops from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and out to
25 exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself for 3/4 inch and down into
26 joint 1/4 inch to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.
27 3. Fabricate metal expansion-joint strips from stainless steel to shapes indicated.
28 B. Flexible Flashing: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:
29 1. Butyl Rubber Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl
30 rubber compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded
31 polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch.
32 a. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
33 2. EPDM Flashing: Sheet flashing product made from ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer,
34 complying with ASTM D 4637/D 4637M, 0.090 inch thick.
35 C. Single-Wythe CMU Flashing System: System of CMU cell flashing pans and interlocking CMU web covers
36 made from UV-resistant, high-density polyethylene. Cell flashing pans have integral weep spouts designed
37 to be built into mortar bed joints and that extend into the cell to prevent clogging with mortar.
38 D. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing
39 and Trim."
40 E. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or
41 products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to
42 substrates.
43 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

44 A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to
45 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene.
46 B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with
47 ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral
48 stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
49 C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated felt complying with ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type I (No. 15 asphalt
50 felt).

52 A. Loose-Fill Insulation: Perlite complying with ASTM C 549, Type II (surface treated for water repellency and
53 limited moisture absorption) or Type IV (surface treated for water repellency and to limit dust generation).
54 B. Lightweight-Aggregate Fill: ASTM C 331/C 331M.
55

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2.10 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

2 A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-
3 repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated.
4 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
5 2. Use masonry cement mortar unless otherwise indicated.
6 3. For exterior masonry, use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar.
7 4. For reinforced masonry, useportland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar.
8 5. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view,
9 regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
10 B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure
11 quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to
12 Project site.
13 C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide the following types of
14 mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.
15 1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S.
16 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type N.
17 3. For mortar parge coats, use Type S or Type N.
18 4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and nonload-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior
19 load-bearing walls; for interior nonload-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another
20 type is not indicated, use Type N.
21 5. For interior nonload-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N.
22 D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
23 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply
24 with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.
25 2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day
26 compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi.
27 3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

30 A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit
31 adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow
32 units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where
33 possible, cut edges concealed.
34 3.2 TOLERANCES
35 A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:
36 1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4
37 inch.
38 2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2
39 inch.
40 3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus
41 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.
42 B. Lines and Levels:
43 1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10
44 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
45 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level
46 by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
47 3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in
48 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
49 4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and
50 control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-
51 inch maximum.
52 5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20
53 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
54

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 C. Joints:
2 1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a
3 maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.
4 2. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus
5 1/4 inch.
6 3. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch.
7 3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

8 A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and
9 for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-
10 size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.
11 B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do
12 not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
13 C. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly
14 with masonry around built-in items.
15 D. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.
16 E. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire
17 mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod mortar or grout into core.
18 F. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar
19 items unless otherwise indicated.
20 3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

21 A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows:
22 1. Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints.
23 2. Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
24 3. Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings.
25 4. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings where cells are not
26 grouted.
27 B. Lay solid CMUs with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head
28 joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.
29 C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness
30 unless otherwise indicated.
31 D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint)

34 A. Pour lightweight-aggregate fill into cavities to fill void spaces. Maintain inspection ports to show presence
35 of fill at extremities of each pour area. Close the ports after filling has been confirmed. Limit the fall of fill to
36 one story high, but not more than 20 feet.
37 B. Install molded-polystyrene insulation units into masonry unit cells before laying units.
38 3.6 MASONRY-JOINT REINFORCEMENT

39 A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on
40 exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches.
41 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c.
42 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls.
43 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and extending 12
44 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.
45 B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.
46 C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
47 D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
48 3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE

49 A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete, where masonry abuts or faces structural steel or
50 concrete, to comply with the following:
51 1. Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch wide between masonry and structural steel or
52 concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials.
53 2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure.
54 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches o.c.
55 horizontally.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3.8 FLASHING
2 A. General: Install embedded flashing at ledges and other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall
3 where indicated.
4 B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:
5 1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture
6 flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar
7 and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive,
8 sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.
9 2. At lintels, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills,
10 extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams.
11 3. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2
12 inch back from outside face of wall, and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge.
13 4. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible
14 flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall, and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing
15 termination.
16 C. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to comply with
17 manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans with upturned edges located below face shells
18 and webs of CMUs above and with weep spouts aligned with face of wall. Install CMU web covers so that
19 they cover upturned edges of CMU cell pans at CMU webs and extend from face shell to face shell.
20 3.9 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

21 A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced
22 masonry elements during construction.
23 1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated.
24 Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms
25 to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.
26 2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to
27 carry their own weight and that of other loads that may be placed on them during construction.
28 B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
29 C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to
30 resist grout pressure.
31 1. Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for cleanouts and for grout placement,
32 including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
33 2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches.

35 A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare
36 reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas as needed to perform tests and
37 inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at
38 Contractor's expense.
39 B. Inspections: Special inspections according to Level B in TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5.
40 1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared mortar.
41 2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes,
42 and locations of reinforcement.
43 3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.
44 C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.
45 D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof.
46 E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive
47 strength.
48 F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780.
49 G. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test mortar for
50 compressive strength.
51 H. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.
52 3.11 PARGING
53 A. Parge exterior faces of below-grade masonry walls, where indicated, in two uniform coats to a total
54 thickness of 3/4 inch. Dampen wall before applying first coat, and scarify first coat to ensure full bond to
55 subsequent coat.
56 B. Use a steel-trowel finish to produce a smooth, flat, dense surface with a maximum surface variation of 1/8
57 inch per foot. Form a wash at top of parging and a cove at bottom.
58 C. Damp-cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect parging until cured.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3.12 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

2 A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and
3 smears before tooling joints.
4 B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
5 1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison
6 purposes.
7 2. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA TEK 8-4A.
8 3.13 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

9 A. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated
10 sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed.
11 1. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.
12 B. Masonry Waste Recycling: Return broken CMUs not used as fill to manufacturer for recycling.
13 C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described
14 above or recycled, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
15 END OF SECTION

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 04 45 50
2 EXISTING MARBLE REFURBISHMENT
5 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
7 1.4 SUBMITTALS
8 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
10 2.6 MATERIALS - MARBLE
11 2.7 ANCHORING DEVICES
13 2.9 MIXES
14 2.10 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
15 2.11 FABRICATION
17 3.12 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLING MARBLE
18 3.2 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
19 3.3 INSTALLATION
20 3.4 REPOINTING EXISTING MARBLE
21 3.5 PREPARATION CLEANING
22 3.6 FINAL CLEANING AND CLEAN-UP
23
24 PART 1: GENERAL
25
27 A. Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work under this section.
28 1.14 SCOPE OF WORK
29 A. Work of this Section includes:
30 1. Prepare and install all marble including; marble removed by this Section, salvaged marble
31 provided by owner or new marble.
32 2. Provide new marble
33 3. Cleaning, grouting and tuckpointing of existing, in-place, marble.
34 4. Cleaning of marble installed by this Section.
35
37 A. All marble materials, fabrication, finish and installation shall comply with Marble Institute of
38 America Design Manual IV (MIA) and Tile Council of America (TCA) "Handbook for Ceramic
39 Tile Installation" specifications, except as otherwise shown on drawings and specified herein.
40 B. Marble workers for all work of this Section must be skilled craftsmen who are experienced and
41 specialize in work of the types they will be performing. Workers shall have a minimum of 10
42 years documented experience in this trade installing, cleaning and grouting marble. Submit
43 documentation of firm experience, qualifications and worker experience.
44 C. Mockups: R e f e r t o S e c t i o n 0 1 4 3 3 9 . Prepare mockups of historic treatment
45 repair processes to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materi-
46 als and execution, and for fabrication and installation. Prepare mockups so they are as in-
47 conspicuous as practicable. Mock-ups shall be full sections.
48
49 1. Locate mockups (3) on existing surfaces where directed by Architect in locations
50 that enable viewing under same conditions as the completed Work.
51 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Con-
52 tract
53 Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such de-
54 viations in writing.
55 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of
56 the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
57
58 1.16 SUBMITTALS
59 A. Submit shop drawings for all marble work, showing cutting and setting diagrams, as well as
60 joining, finish, sizes of pieces, anchors, and all other pertinent information.
61 B. Submit samples of finished work for approval of Architect where patching is required.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS #10129 044550 EXISTING MARBLE REFURBISHMENT
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 A. Carefully transport marble from storage where it is presently stored, to specific room where it is
3 to be installed.
4 B. Protect marble against staining and physical damage, such as chipping scratching and
5 breaking.
6 C. Store and protect marble on wood pallets, covered with non-staining paper until ready to be
7 used. If transported outside, protect from adverse weather. Do not store outside or in any
8 location where marble might be exposed to freezing conditions. Allow air to circulate around
9 marble.
10
12
13 2.1 MATERIALS - MARBLE
14 A. Salvaged Marble.
15 1. Existing Stored Marble. Owner has several sections of original marble base in storage.
16 Contractor shall choose from this existing marble for appropriate pieces that may be used
17 in this project.
18 2. All re-used marble must be whole pieces that will fit compatibly within the existing
19 patterns. Salvaged pieces must conform dimensionally to original dimensions of marble in
20 intended spaces. Partials size pieces may not be used to make up a whole panel.
21 B. New Marble.
22 1. Contractor shall provide and install new marble were required or necessary.
23 2. Selection of new marble shall be per approval of the Preservation Architect and Owner.
24 Marble for first floor
25 XTILE-2C White Carrara Floor Tile, Diamond Shape and Perimeter Margins to match
26 existing.
27 XTILE-2D Verde Antique Green Tile, Feature Triangle tile, to match existing
28 C. Marble to be repaired.
29 1. Where noted on drawings, repair damaged marble items.
30 2. Marble Repair Products (do NOT apply to wall base external corners or wall panel
31 external corners): Cathedral Stone Products, Inc. www.cathedralstone.com. Product
32 reference: Jahn M120 Marble Repair Mortar.
33 2.2 ANCHORING DEVICES
34 A. Dowels and Pins: Brass, 1/4 inch x 2 inches or size as required.
35 B. Exposed Anchoring Devices: Not allowed.
36 C. Other Anchoring Devices: Brass. Wire anchors shall be #12 gauge, half hard yellow brass
37 grouted into marble.
39 A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150.
40 B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.
41 C. Plaster of Paris: Conform to applicable standards for top grade materials. specify
42 D. Sand: Clean, sharp and free of soluble salts and organic materials, screened as required for
43 desired results.
44 E. Water: Clean, free from deleterious amounts of acids, alkalies, organic materials and other
45 impurities, and potable.
46 F. Cushions: Aluminum or plastic.
47 G. Marble Dust: Type recommended by the industry for use intended and matching existing
48 marble as approved by Architect.
49 H. Epoxy Mortar: Epoxy resin and epoxy hardener two-part, 100% solids mixture.
50 2.4 MIXES
51 A. Mortar Setting Bed for Marble: MIA 101.10.2 Dry-Set Mortar; One part (nonstaining) Portland
52 cement to one half part lime to four and one half parts of sand. Add enough water to make
53 mortars plastic.
54 B. Grout: MIA 101.6.2; Sand-portland cement mixture, mixed on-the-job in following proportions of
55 portland cement to fine graded clean sand in accordance with ASTM C144: 1:1 for joints up to
56 1/8 inch; 1: for joints 1/8 - 1/2 inch; 1:3 for joints over 1/2 inch wide. Up to 1/5 part lime
57 acceptable.
59 A. Marble Cleaners.
60 1. Walls: Spic-N-Span brand water soluble cleaner. Substitute only as approved in writing
61 by Architect.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2. Floors: Marbleous as manufactured by Masury/Columbia, Melrose Park, Ill. Use with floor
2 cleaning machine in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3 3. Clean, soft cotton cloths.
4 4. Natural sponges.
5 5. Water: potable.
6 6. Materials containing acid or wax are not allowed.
7
8 2.6 FABRICATION
9 A. Contractor shall do all cutting and fitting of marble (new or salvaged) to fit required patterns and
10 profiles or to match new work to existing.
11 B. Do all cutting and drilling for hardware and anchorage in a true and neat manner to ensure
12 acceptable, correct installation and to accommodate all items by other trades to be set into or
13 pass through marble. Use special care in making cutouts in marble. Curves shall be uniform
14 and true and shall match existing where required. Contractor shall take all measurements at
15 job site as required for proper fit.
16 C. All edges shall be cut true and square or as existing conditions require; plane surfaces shall be
17 true and flat, without elevations or depressions. Ease edges if necessary to match original,
18 similar work.
19 D. All newly cut, exposed marble edges shall be finely honed and/or polished to match existing
20 marble.
21 E. Where required, provide pear-shaped cutouts in substrate to receive wire anchors. If existing
22 cutouts in existing pieces are in proper location, they may be cleaned out and reused.
23 F. Plinths may vary in size and may have to be modified by contractor to match width of door
24 casings.
25
27
28 3.1 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLING MARBLE
29 A. Use extreme care in moving marble. Marble damaged by Contractor shall be replaced with
30 approved matching marble at no additional cost to Owner.
31 B. Use care so as not to scratch or damage finished surfaces of marble.
32 C. Patch existing in-place marble where shown on drawings or where approved by Architect. Do
33 not use new or salvaged marble with holes requiring patches unless specifically approved by
34 Architect. Mix epoxy grout and approved matching marble dust to proper consistency. Fill holes
35 flush with adjoining surfaces. Leave marble surfaces in finished condition. Samples of finished
36 patching shall be submitted to Architect and approved prior to starting patching.
37 3.2 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
38 A. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary from average joint width more than plus or minus 1/16 inch
39 or one-fourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less.
40 B. Variation in Surface Plane: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 3/8 inch
41 maximum from level or slope indicated.
42 C. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/32-inch difference between
43 planes of adjacent units.
44 3.3 INSTALLATION
45 C. General:
46 1. Follow cleaning procedures before, during and after installation of marble.
47 2. Install marble tile and grout in accordance with the Tile Council of America Installation
48 Handbook.
49 3. New and/or modified marble tile floors shall be laid up with carefully selected marble to
50 match existing patterns, colors and borders on all sides.
51 4. New Door openings: New marble for jambs, heads and sills shall be profiled and
52 segmented to match appearance of designated existing, original door opening.
53 5. Base shall be installed in as long a length as possible and as approved by Architect.
54 Adjacent pieces of wall and toilet compartment marble shall be carefully matched for
55 color and veining and as approved by the Preservation Architect.
56 6. When ready for setting, units shall be brushed free of dust or other foreign matter and
57 shall be thoroughly washed and wetted with clean water immediately before being laid.
58 7. Each unit shall be placed accurately, true to line and level, in full bed of mortar with joints
59 solidly filled.
60 8. Backs of marble shall be back plastered completely with same non-staining mortar used
61 for setting to thickness as required to match existing.
62 9. Wet substrate before apply mortar.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 10. Set marble square and true with edges of face joints plumb.
2 11. Use care in blending color and veining of marble to produce homogeneous effect.
3 12. Grout joints per applicable standards.
4 13. After setting and grouting, immediately remove all surplus material from face of marble.
5 14. Joints shall match existing. Grout shall be carefully colored to match joints.
6 15. Do not install marble on new concrete surfaces until concrete has cured for a minimum of
7 90 days.
8 16. Protect all finished marble.
9
10 D. Anchors and Dowels:
11 1. A minimum of two (2) anchors are required on all wall panels up to two (2) square feet in
12 area; and a minimum of four (4) anchors required on all pieces over two (2) square feet in
13 area.
14 2. Where shown or required, anchor adjoining pieces with pins or dowels. Set with equal
15 penetration into each connecting piece.
16 3. Jambs and Heads: A minimum of three anchors are required on each jamb and two in
17 each head.
18
19 E. Marble Wall Panels
20 1. Set by spotting with Plaster of Paris mortar and by attaching with concealed anchors
21 secured into wall backing.
22 2. Butter joints fully with grout as each piece is set.
23 F. Marble Bases, Thresholds, Plinths and Where Required to Match Existing.
24 1. Clean substrate thoroughly.
25 2. Wet substrate and install stiff mortar bed; tamp marble to proper level. Lift marble and
26 apply paste of Portland cement to back of marble. Reset and tamp lightly to insure good
27 bond.
28 3. Grout joints with previously specified grout to match existing joints.
29 4. Carefully patch all holes in marble. Grout shall match existing in color as approved by
30 Architect.
31 3.4 REPOINTING EXISTING MARBLE
32 A. All cracked and loose grout shall be removed.
33 B. Any tool or technique for removing grout which may scratch or mar the surface of the marble
34 shall not be used. Any damage caused to marble by this work shall be repaired or replaced at
35 the Owner's discretion by this contractor with no expense to Owner.
36 C. Strike joints to be pointed with approved bladed tool. Drag along center of joint with leverage to
37 score joint and loosen and remove grout to a minimum depth of 1/4 inch.
38 D. Remove grout from sides of marble by cutting and grinding with a burred bladed tool.
39 E. Grout tooled joints in accordance with TCA standards using approved mortar.
40 3.5 PREPARATION CLEANING
41 A. Existing, in-place marble.
42 1. Remove loose dirt and particulate matter from marble surface and natural voids with
43 vacuuming device equipped with soft brush type attachments.
44 2. Wash marble with approved cleaner and water using soft cotton cloths and natural
45 sponges.
46 3.6 FINAL CLEANING AND CLEAN-UP
47 A. At completion of new marble work, clean all newly installed marble and existing marble where
48 repointing has been done. Point up any open joints and replace defective marble. Cleaner
49 must be approved by Architect. Buff all surfaces to produce an appearance that matches
50 existing.
51 1. All marble surfaces shall be cleaned, including removal of all spots and stains. Clean
52 existing marble being reused after installation.
53 2. Protect adjoining surfaces from water and cleaning materials.
54 3. Clean with approved cleaning material, natural sponges and water. Rinse well afterwards
55 with clean water, removing all residue.
56 4. Removing Spots and Stains: Use small amount of approved cleaning material to
57 determine type and amount of material to be used, as well as length of time for cleaning
58 material(s) to be left in place before removing. Thoroughly remove all cleaning material
59 and residue as recommended by manufacturer of material and best practices of trade.
60 5. At completion of work, carefully transport unused marble pieces to Owner’s off-site
61 storage.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 D. Protect all finished marble. Prohibit traffic from installed stone for a minimum of 72 hours. Protect
2 installed stonework during construction with nonstaining kraft paper. Where adjoining areas
3 require construction work access, cover stonework with a minimum of 3/4-inch untreated plywood
4 over nonstaining kraft paper.
5
6 END OF SECTION

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 05 12 23
2 STRUCTURAL STEEL
3
5 1.1 DESCRIPTION
8 1.4 SUBMITTALS
11 2.1 MATERIALS
13 2.3 LEED CREDIT
15 3.1 ERECTION
16 3.2 FIELD WELDING
17 3.3 REPAIRS, PROTECTION, AND TOUCH UP
18 3.4 GROUTING
19 3.5 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL AND STEEL LINTELS
20 PART 1 - GENERAL
21 1.1 DESCRIPTION
24 B. This section includes fabrication and erection of structural steel work, as shown on the Drawings and
25 specified herein. Work shall include, but not be limited to the following items:
26 1. Structural steel
27 2. Base and bearing plates.
28 3. Deck support angles and framing for roof openings.
29 4. Steel lintel members for masonry openings.
30 5. Edge angles and bent plates.
31 6. Connection plates.
32 7. Shear stud connectors.
33 8. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel (AESS).
34 9. All other steel items as listed in AISC – “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
35 Bridges” as shown on structural and architectural drawings.
36 C. Work shall also include grouting of all structural steel members where indicated.
37 D. Structural notes indicated on the drawings regarding structural steel framing should be considered a
39 E. No substitutions will be allowed without the Engineer’s approval.
42 standards except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified.
43 1. AISC - Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.
44 2. AISC - Code of Standard Practice for Buildings and Bridges.
45 3. AISC - Specification for the Design of Steel Hollow Structural Sections.

CONTRACT #7939 MUNIS #10129 05 12 23 - 1 STRUCTURAL STEEL
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 4. AISC - Specification for Allowable Stress Design of Single-Angle Members or Specification

2 for Load and Resistance Factor Design of Single-Angle Members.
3 5. AISC 360-05 – Specification for Structural Steel Buildings – Allowable Strength Design, 13th
4 Edition.
5 6. ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
6 7. ASTM A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated
7 Welded and Seamless
8 8. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard
9 Quality.
10 9. ASTM A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
11 Steel Products.
12 10. ASTM A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip), on Iron and Steel Hardware.
13 11. ASTM A193 - Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials
14 for High-Temperature Service.
15 12. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile
16 Strength.
17 13. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi
18 Minimum Tensile Strength.
19 14. ASTM A500 - Standard Specification for Cold Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
20 Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
21 15. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.
22 16. ASTM A572 - Standard Specification for High Strength, Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium
23 Structural Steel.
24 17. ASTM A992 - Standard Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes for use in Building
25 Framing.
26 18. ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and
27 Steel.
28 19. ASTM F436 - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers.
29 20. ASTM F1554 - Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel 36, 55 and 105 ksi Yield
30 Strength
31 21. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
32 22. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council.
33 B. Where any provisions of other pertinent codes and standards conflict with this specification, the more
35 C. Fabrication, Erection, and Welding Qualifications:
36 1. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC Specification for the design,
37 fabrication and erection of structural steel for buildings.
38 2. Steel fabricator shall not have less than five (5) years of continuous experience in fabrication
39 of structural steel framing.
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3. Steel erector shall not have less than five (5) years of continuous experience in the erection
2 of structural steel framing.
3 4. All welding of structural steel shall be performed by operators who have been recently
4 qualified as prescribed in “Qualification Procedures” of the American Welding Society
5 (AWS).
6 D. Tolerances: Tolerances shall be as indicated by the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Buildings
7 and Bridges except that tolerances for fabricating, rolling, cambering and erection shall not be
8 cumulative.
9 E. Mockup: Refer to Section 01 43 39 - Mockups for description of construction required to complete a

14 specified below.
22 a. Perform all testing and inspection required per approved testing and inspection
23 program.
27 c. Submit a final signed report stating whether the work requiring Inspection was, to
28 the best of the Inspection Agency’s knowledge in conformance with the approved
29 plans and specifications.

Continuous
Periodic
Structural Steel Referenced Standard

1. Material verification of high-strength bolts, nuts, and washers:
A. Identification markings to conform to ASTM standards specified X Applicable ASTM material
in the approved construction documents. standards: AISC 360,
Section A3.3
B. Manufacturer’s certificate of compliance required. X
2. Inspection of high-strength bolting:
A. Snug-tight joints. X
B. Pretensioned and slip-critical joints using turn-of-nut with X AISC 360, Section M2.5
matchmarking or direct tension indicator methods of installation.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
Continuous
Periodic
Structural Steel Referenced Standard
C. Pretensioned and slip-critical joints using turn-of-nut without X
matchmarking or calibrated wrench methods of installation.
3. Material verification of structural steel:
A. Identification markings to conform to AISC 360. X AISC 360, Section M5.5

B. Manufacturer’s certified test reports. X
4. Material verification of weld filler materials:
A. Identification markings to conform to AWS specification in the X AISC 360, Section A3.5 and
approved construction documents. applicable AWS A5
documents
B. Manufacturer’s certificate of compliance required X
5. Inspection of welding:
A. Complete and partial joint penetration groove welds X AWS D1.1
B. Multi-pass fillet welds X AWS D1.1
C. Single-pass fillet welds > 5/16” (7.9 mm) X AWS D1.1
D. Plug and slot welds. X AWS D1.1
E. Single-pass fillet welds  5/16” (7.9 mm) X AWS D1.1
F. Composite stud testing X AWS D1.1
6. Inspection of steel frame joint details for compliance:
A. Details such as bracing and stiffening. X
B. Member locations. X
C. Application of joint details at each connection. X
1 1.4 SUBMITTALS
2 A. Shop Drawings:
3 1. Prepare and submit complete erection and detailed shop drawings for Engineer’s approval,
4 including framing plans indicating size, weight and location of all structural members. Shop
5 drawings shall indicate methods of connecting, anchoring, fastening, bracing and attaching
6 work of other trades.
7 a. Where contract documents indicate verify in field (VIF) dimensions, shop drawings
8 shall indicate these dimensions and Contractor shall note that the dimensions have
9 been verified.
10 b. This specification modifies AISC Code of Standard Practice by deleting the

11 following sentence from 4.4.1(c): “Release by the Owner’s Designated
12 Representatives for Design and Construction for the Fabricator to begin fabrication
13 using the approved submittals.” Review of the shop drawings by the Engineer shall
14 not relieve the fabricator of this responsibility.
15 2. Furnish both the Engineer and Architect with one copy of the following:
16 a. Final shop drawings containing all review notations.

17 b. Field Use/For Construction Drawings.
18 3. The steel fabricator shall submit a setting plan for all embedded items for Engineer’s
19 approval.
20 4. Shop drawings shall identify and mark AESS members and items. Specific project
21 requirements for AESS (required blast cleaning, SSPC designation, special handling etc.)
22 relating to shop fabrication and field erection practices shall be indicated on the shop
23 drawings.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 5. Welder’s Certification: Submit certification for all welders employed on the project
2 demonstrating they have been AWS qualified to perform the welding procedures required
3 for this project.
4 6. General Contractor/Construction Manager to provide copies of field concrete cylinder

5 breaks indicating the concrete meets 75% of the design compressive strength to the steel
6 erector.
7 B. The General Contractor shall conduct a field survey of as-built anchors and bearing plate locations
8 and elevations prior to steel erection. Survey shall be furnished to the steel fabricator. Contractor
9 shall identify deviations from approved shop drawings and submit proposed repairs and modifications
10 to the Engineer and steel fabricator for approval.
11 C. Product Data:
12 1. Prepare and submit product data for Engineer’s approval for shop applied primers, finished
13 paint system, expansion and/or adhesive anchors, non-shrink grout and other
14 miscellaneous materials.
15 D. LEED Certification: Submit manufacturer’s certification for each steel product including the following:
18 cost and steel processing furnace type.
22 A. Steel members shall be transported, stored and erected in a manner that will avoid any damage or
23 deformation. Materials should be stored to allow easy access for inspection and identification. Bent
24 or deformed members will be rejected and shall be replaced or repaired at the expense of the
25 responsible party. Store clear of the ground and in such a manner as to eliminate excessive handling.
26 B. Store fasteners in a protected location. Clean and re-lubricate bolts and nuts before use.
28 2.1 MATERIALS
29 A. Structural Steel:
30 1. All structural steel shall be free from defects impairing strength, durability or appearance.
31 All structural steel shall meet the latest minimum requirements as follows:
32 a. Structural steel shapes, bars and plates shall conform to the ASTM designations
33 listed in the General Notes of the Drawings.
34 b. Square and rectangular structural tubing shall be cold formed conforming to the
35 ASTM designations listed in the General Notes of the Drawings.
36 c. Steel pipe shall conform to the ASTM designations listed in the General Notes of
37 the Drawings.
38 B. High Strength Structural Bolts:
39 1. High strength structural bolts shall conform to the ASTM designations listed in the General
40 Notes of the Drawings.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2. High strength bolts shall be detailed and installed in accordance with AISC - “Specification
2 for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.”
3 3. Manufacturer’s symbol and grade markings shall appear on all bolts and nuts.
4 C. Anchoring Devices:
5 1. Anchor Rods: Anchor rods used with structural steel members shall be plain threaded rods
6 conforming to the ASTM designations listed in the General Notes of the Drawings.
7 2. Expansion Anchors: Expansion anchors shall consist of one-piece wedge type carbon steel
8 anchors with heavy-duty nuts and washers. All components shall be zinc plated in
9 accordance with ASTM B633. Refer to the drawing details and General Notes for the
10 expansion anchors used as the basis of design and the acceptable alternates.
11 3. Adhesive Anchoring System: Adhesive anchoring system shall consist of a threaded anchor
12 rod complete with nut and washer and the adhesive cartridge. Refer to the drawing details
13 and General Notes for the adhesive anchoring systems used as the basis of design and the
14 acceptable alternates.
15 a. Nuts shall meet ASTM A563, Grade DH, and washers shall meet ASTM F436.
16 b. All components shall be zinc plated in accordance with ASTM B633 SC1.
17 c. Adhesive shall consist of a two-part acrylic based adhesive applied in a dual

18 cartridge dispensing system that properly mixes the components at the point of
19 application.
20 D. Welding Materials:
21 1. Type required for material being welded in conformance with AWS D1.1.
22 E. Stud Connectors:
23 1. For threaded studs that are being used to connect steel beams to embed plates, use ASTM
24 A108, Type A, Grades 1010 through 1020 forged steel, headed uncoated with a minimum
25 tensile strength of 61,000 psi. Fabricated within the tolerances set forth in AWS D1.1.
26 2. Studs applied by means of the electric arc welding process and shall use an arc shield
27 ferrules of heat resistant ceramic.
28 F. Paints and Primers:
29 1. Fabricator’s standard lead- and chromate-free, non-asphalitic, rust-inhibiting primer.
30 2. Galvanizing repair paint: SSPC Paint 20.
31 3. Refer to Specification Section 09 90 00 for additional paint requirements.
32 G. Non-Shrink Grout for Base and Bearing Plates: Non-shrink grout, conforming to ASTM C1107, shall
33 be pre-mixed, non-metallic, non-corrosive, non-staining product containing selected silica sand,
34 Portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water reducing agents. All
35 constituents shall meet the requirements of these specifications. Minimum compressive strength at
36 28-days shall be 7,000 psi as determined by ASTM C109. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for
37 handling, mixing, placing and curing. Acceptable products are:
38 1. Euclid Chemical Company - Euco N.S. Grout

39 2. L&M Construction Chemical - Crystex.
40 3. Master Builders - Masterflow 713.
41 4. Sonneborn - Sonnogrout.
42 5. Five Star Products Inc. – Five Star Grout.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 6. Dayton Superior - Sure-Grip High Performance Grout.

2 7. Dayton Superior – 1107 Advantage Grout.
4 A. Fabrication Procedures:
5 1. Fabricate all structural steel items in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated
6 on the drawings.
7 2. Properly mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence that will expedite
8 erection and minimize handling of materials.
9 3. Complete structural steel assemblies before shop priming or galvanizing.
10 B. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel (AESS):
11 1. Fabricate and erect all structural steel items identified on the drawings as AESS in
12 accordance with the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Buildings and Bridges.
13 a. Fabricate with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of surface blemishes
14 including pitting, rust, scale, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and
15 roughness.
16 b. Remove blemishes by filling or grinding or by welding and grinding, before

17 cleaning, treating, and shop priming.
18 2. Prepare AESS surfaces according to the following specifications and standards:
19 a. SSPC-SP6 “Commercial Blast Cleaning”
20 C. Shop Connections:
21 1. All shop connections shall be welded, unless noted otherwise on drawings. Connections
22 shall develop the full strength of the adjoining members unless detailed otherwise.
23 2. All holes shall be either drilled or punched, as no burning of holes will be permitted, including
24 the enlargement of holes. Provide all holes required for connections and for attaching the
25 work of other trades where such holes are shown if furnished prior to fabrication.
26 3. Connections shall be detailed as standard framed beam connections (bearing type) in

27 accordance with the AISC Manual of Steel Construction - Allowable Stress Design.
28 Connections which require oversized holes or slotted holes in which the force is other than
29 normal to the axis of the slot shall be detailed as “Slip-Critical Connections” and noted as
30 such on the erection drawings. Provide bearing plates and end anchorage for beams resting
31 on masonry.
32 4. All full and partial penetration welds shall be fully detailed on the shop drawings. Use
33 backing for all full penetration welds.
34 5. Weld access holes shall be fabricated in accordance with the recommendations of AWS
35 D1.1 and AISC Specification.
36 D. Shear Connectors:
37 1. Shear stud connector for embedded plates and angles shall be welded in the fabrication
38 shop in accordance with AWS D1.1.
39 E. Deck support framing and seats: Furnish all miscellaneous framing necessary to fully support the
40 roof and floor steel decking.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 F. Shop Priming:
2 1. Unless noted otherwise below, structural steel shall not be shop primed.
3 2. The following are steel surfaces to receive shop priming:
4 a. Surfaces outside the building envelope that are not galvanized.
5 b. Surfaces to be painted per Architect’s drawings.
6 3. If the steel pieces are to be shop primed, the following surfaces are exceptions to shop
7 priming:
8 a. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded

9 members to a depth of 2 inches.
10 b. Surfaces to be field welded.
11 c. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections.
12 d. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.
13 e. Galvanized surfaces.
14 4. Surface Preparation: Clean Surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and
15 spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications
16 and standards:
17 a. SSPC-SP3, “Power Tool Cleaning.”
18 5. Priming: Apply primer in accordance with paint manufacturer’s recommendations, and at a

19 rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Use
20 priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.
21 G. Finished Paint System:
22 1. Finished paint coats shall be in accordance with paint manufacturer’s recommendations,

23 and specification Division 9.
24 2. Paint shall be free of sags, runs, drips or other defects. Allow ample drying time before
25 handling to prevent damage to coatings.
26 3. Strip paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
27 4. Apply one coat of shop paint to surfaces that will be inaccessible after assembly or erection.
28 H. Finished Paint System for Exposed Structural Steel: Structural steel exposed to the elements of
29 weather shall be painted as follows:
30 1. Apply one coat of steel primer in shop as specified above.
31 2. Apply two coats of alkyd enamel paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils for each
32 coat. Paint shall be applied according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.
33 3. Paint shall be free of sags, runs, drips or other defects. Allow ample drying time before
34 handling to prevent damage to coatings.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 I. Galvanizing:
2 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply Zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel
3 according to ASTM A 123.
4 a. Fill vent holes and grind smooth after galvanizing.
5 b. Unless otherwise noted on drawings or in Division 9, all exterior steel components

6 exposed to the elements shall be galvanized, including, but not limited to, lintels.
7 2.3 LEED CREDIT
9 1. Steel products shall be made using an Electric Arc Furnace and shall have a minimum
10 recycled content of 80%, including at least 65% post-consumer recycled content and 15%
11 post-industrial recycled content.
12 2. Steel products made using a Basic Oxygen Furnace shall have a minimum recycled content
13 of 25%, including at least 20% post-consumer recycled content and 5% post-industrial
14 recycled content.
16 1. Steel products shall be manufactured within 500 miles of project site. Recycled scrap
19 3.1 ERECTION
20 A. Erection Procedures:
21 1. The erector and not the structural engineer of record shall be responsible for the means,
22 methods and safety of erection of the structural steel framing.
23 2. Erection of all structural steel items shall meet the requirements of AISC “Specification and
24 Code of Standard Practice.”
25 3. All work shall be erected square, plumb, straight and true, accurately fitted and with tight
26 joints and intersections, by mechanics experienced in the erection of structural steel. Make
27 allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature
28 when structure is completed and in service.
29 4. All base plates shall be supported on steel wedges, steel shims or heavy duty leveling nuts
30 until the supported members have been leveled and plumbed.
31 a. Snug tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and
32 plumb. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge
33 of base plate before packing with grout.
34 b. Promptly place non-shrink grout between bearing surfaces and base plates so no
35 voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure.
36 Comply with manufacturers written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant
37 grouts.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 5. Field connections of structural work shall be made with either high strength bolts (bearing
2 type) or by welding. Proper precaution shall be taken to ensure that anchored items will not
3 be distorted or overstressed due to improperly fabricated items.
4 6. Splice members only where indicated.
5 7. Remove erection bolts on welded, Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel; fill holes with
6 plug welds; and grind smooth at exposed surfaces.
7 8. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by the Engineer/Architect in
8 writing.
9 9. Steel erection shall not proceed without concrete in footings, piers, and walls attaining 75%
10 of the intended minimum compressive design strength. Documentation must be provided
11 indicating compliance with this requirement.
12 B. Bracing and Protection:
13 1. Steel shall be well plumbed, leveled and braced to prevent any movement.
14 a. Contractor shall provide and maintain all necessary temporary guying of steel
15 frame to resist safely all wind and construction loads during erection and to assure
16 proper alignment of all parts of the steel frame.
17 2. Provide all temporary flooring, bracing, shoring and guards necessary to prevent damage
18 or injury. All partially erected steel shall be secured in an approved manner during
19 interruptions of work.
20 C. Anchor and Foundation Rods:
21 1. All anchor or foundation rods and similar steel items to be built into concrete or masonry are
22 to be set by the concrete or masonry contractors and shall be furnished promptly so that
23 they may be built in as the work progresses because cutting of structural steel members to
24 accommodate errors pertaining to embedded items will not be permitted.
25 3.2 FIELD WELDING
26 A. Welding Procedures:
27 1. All field welding shall be in accordance with AISC Specifications and conform to AWS D1.1
28 “Structural Welding Code - Steel”.
29 a. Comply with AISC’s “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges”
30 for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint
31 on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
32 b. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment
33 of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC’s “Code of Standard Practice” for
34 Steel Buildings and Bridges” for mill material.
35 c. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for
36 Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel will limit distortions to allowable
37 tolerances. Prevent damage due to field welding on exposed surfaces.
38 1) Grind butt welds flush.
39 2) Grind or fill exposed fillet welds to smooth profile. Dress exposed welds.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3.3 REPAIRS, PROTECTION, AND TOUCH UP
2 A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings and on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according
3 to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer’s written instructions.
4 B. Touch up Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field welds, final
5 connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists, bearing plates and abutting
6 structural steel.
7 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP3 power-tool

8 cleaning.
9 2. Apply a compatible primer of the same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces.
10 3.4 GROUTING
11 A. Grouting under structural framing members shall be completed after all members have been plumbed
12 and braced and before imposed loads are placed thereon.
13 B. Remove all defective concrete, dirt, oil, grease and other foreign matter from surfaces to which grout
14 will be placed.
15 3.5 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL AND STEEL LINTELS
16 A. Furnish and install all miscellaneous steel as detailed in Architectural and Structural Drawings.
17 B. The steel fabricator shall furnish all steel lintels required for masonry wall construction indicated in
18 the Architectural and Structural Drawings and Schedules.
19 C. Provide additional steel framing for continuous support of steel deck edges at openings and column
20 interruptions.
21 D. All exterior exposed steel shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 painted in
22 accordance with Division 9 after fabrication.
23 END OF SECTION

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 05 12 50
2 HISTORIC STRUCTURAL STEEL PRESERVATION/RESTORATION
3
6 1.2 WORK INCLUDED
9 1.5 REFERENCES
10 1.6 SUBMITTALS
12 1.8 GUARANTEES, WARRANTIES AND CERTIFICATES
15 2.2 MATERIALS - GENERAL
17 3.1 EXAMINATION
19 3.3 GENERAL NOTES
20 3.4 EXISTING STRUCTURAL STEEL LINTEL RESTORATION
21
23
25 A. The conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary, and Other Conditions) and the
28
30 A. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall furnish all materials, tools, equipment, apparatus,
31 transportation, labor and supervision required to totally complete all the structural steel restoration
32 work as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
33
35 A. Section 02 41 50 – Historic Selective Demolition/Deconstruction
36 B. Section 04 01 20.63 – Historic Brick Masonry Preservation/Restoration
37 C. Section 04 01 40 – Historic Stone Preservation/Restoration
38 D. Section 07 01 90.71 – Historic Sealant Rehabilitation
39
41 A. There shall be no deviation made from this Specification without prior written approval by the
42 Architect.
43 B. In some instances, shoring must be provided and installed prior to completing portions of the
44 structural steel restoration Work. All pertinent proposed shoring plans and details must be
45 approved by the Architect and in place as required before any subsequent structural steel
46 restoration work can proceed. All shoring systems shall be designed by the Contractor who shall
47 be ultimately responsible for same.
48 C. All structural steel restoration work shall be performed by skilled journeymen tradesmen including
49 but not limited to, steel workers, welders, stonemasons, masons, tuckpointers, and laborers who
50 are considered specialists in the field of the work specified in this Section.
51 D. Journeymen tradesmen shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience in the specified type of
52 work.
53 E. During the workday should the weather conditions appear to be changing adversely, the Contractor
54 shall take preventative measures to protect any unfinished Work that was to be performed that day
55 and to allow adequate time for the work area to be properly closed to a watertight condition to avoid
56 exposure to the building interior.
57 F. Repair any Work damaged by failure to provide proper and adequate protection, to its original state
58 to the satisfaction of the Owner, or remove and replace the defective Work with new at the
59 Contractor’s expense.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 051250 - 1 HISTORIC STRUCTURAL STEEL
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 G. It will be the Architect’s prerogative to forbid the use of tools or methods that do not produce the
2 quality of work that is expected and to insist on the use of tools and methods, which will do the
3 structural steel work properly.
4 H. The Architect reserves the right to approve the material supplier for the new materials specified in
5 this Section.
6 I. All material and workmanship quality shall be in accordance with current industry standards and
7 practices in conformance with the organizations outlined in 1.5. REFERENCES below.
8 J. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following, except as otherwise indicated:
9 1. AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges".
10 2. AISC "Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings".
11 3. “Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts” approved by the
12 Research Council on Structural Connections.
13 4. AWS D1.
14 5. ASTM A6.
15 K. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding procedures and welding operators in accordance
16 with the requirements of AWS D1.1.
17 L. All materials used shall not contain asbestos fibers.
18
19 1.5 REFERENCES
20 A. References shall refer to the most recent industry standard and recommendations as represented
21 by the organizations listed below.
22 1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC).
23 2. American Welding Society (AWS).
24 3. Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC).
27
28 1.6 SUBMITTALS
29 A. Provide all data and sample materials in strict conformance with SECTION 01 33 00 – SUBMITTAL
30 PROCEDURES, and as specified below.
31 B. Each submittal shall be clearly marked with the specific Specification Section, page number, and
32 item designation that it represents. Each submittal shall be presented in the order that it is outlined
33 in the PROJECT MANUAL – TABLE OF CONTENTS. Failure to do so may result in immediate
34 rejection of the submittal.
35 C. A total of three (3) copies of each submittal (data sheets) are required.
36 D. Provide submittal information and Shop Drawings (as applicable) for the following materials as
37 specified in PART 2 – PRODUCTS:
38 1. Structural Steel Protective Coating
39 2. Membrane Flashings (at steel lintels)
40 3. Termination Bar
41 4. Termination Bar Fasteners
42 5. Termination Bar Sealant
43 E. For structural steel and related items (as applicable to this Project) provide the following:
44 1. Product Data: Submit product data or Manufacturer’s specifications and installation
45 instructions for the following products. Include laboratory test reports and other data to
46 show compliance with Specifications (including specified standards).
47 a. Structural steel (each type), including certified copies of mill reports covering
48 chemical and physical properties.
49 b. Anchor bolts.
50 c. Unfinished threaded fasteners.
51 d. High-strength bolts (each type), including nuts and washers; include direct
52 tension indicators if used.
53 e. Structural steel primer paint.
54 f. Nonmetallic shrinkage-resistant grout.
55 2. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS): Submit MSDS for structural steel (each type),
56 anchor bolts, unfinished threaded fasteners, high-strength bolts (each type) including nuts
57 and washers, structural steel primer paint and nonmetallic shrinkage-resistant grout.
58 3. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings, including complete details and schedules for
59 fabrication and assembly of structural steel members, procedures, and diagrams.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 a. Include details of cuts, connections, cambers, holes, and other pertinent data.
2 Include welds by standard AWS symbols and show size, length, and type of each
3 weld.
4 b. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts
5 and other anchorages to be installed as work of other Sections.
6 4. Welder Certifications: Provide certification that welders to be employed in work have
7 satisfactorily passed qualification tests in accordance with AWS D1.1. If recertification of
8 welders is required, retesting will be Contractor’s responsibility.
9 5. Test Reports: Submit test reports conducted on shop, field bolted, and welded
10 connections. Include data on type(s) of tests conducted and test results.
11 6. Welding Procedures: Provide written welding procedure specification (WPS) document
12 per AWS Code requirements.
13
15 A. Deliver materials to site at such intervals to ensure uninterrupted progress of work.
16 B. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete
17 or masonry, in ample time so that work will not be delayed.
18 C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off
19 ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged
20 materials from corrosion and deterioration. If bolts and nuts become dry or rusty, clean and
21 lubricate before use. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or
22 damage to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures
23 as directed.
24 D. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of existing construction to which structural steel must
25 fit, by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final Shop
26 Drawings.
27
29 A. The Contractor and the material Manufacturer’s shall guaranty both material and/or workmanship,
30 and warrant the performance of all items specified in this Section for a period of two (2) years from
31 the date of Substantial Completion as determined by the Architect.
32
34
36 A. Provide products by Manufacturer’s specified herein, which meet or exceed standards as set forth
37 in this Section. No products specified or approved shall contain asbestos.
38 B. All materials shall be new unless noted otherwise on the Drawings and Specifications.
39 C. No material substitutions will be accepted unless specified as “or approved equal,” and approved in
40 advance by the Architect.
41
42 2.2 MATERIALS – GENERAL
43 A. New Structural Steel Sections and Plates: Conform to ASTM A36
44 B. Structural Steel Protective Coating: “Omnithane Series 1,” modified aromatic polyurethane primer
45 and, “Endura-Shield Series 73,” aliphatic acrylic polyurethane finish coating, as manufactured by
46 Tnemec Co, Inc., Kansas City, Missouri, or approved equal.
47 C. Membrane Flashings (at steel lintels): “Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing,” 40-mil, self-adhering
48 membrane wall flashing as manufactured by W.R. Grace & Co., Columbia, Maryland, or approved
49 equal.
50 D. Termination Bar: Stainless steel, 1” high by 0.075” thick, with pre-drilled holes at 8” on-center as
51 manufactured by Advanced Building Products, Inc., Springvale, ME, or approved equal.
52 E. Termination Bar Fasteners: “410 Stainless Steel Tapcon,” 3/16” diameter, minimum 1-1/4
53 penetration, as manufactured by ITW Buildex, Itasca, Illinois, or approved equal.
54 F. Termination Bar Sealant: “Sonolastic NP1,” one-component, polyurethane-based moisture curing
55 gun grade sealant by BASF Construction Chemicals, Shakopee, Minnesota, or approved equal.
56 Note: sealant shall also conform to Specification Section 07900 – Sealants.
57 G. Other Items: All other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
58 installation of the Work in this Section, shall be selected by the Contractor subject to approval by
59 the Architect.
60

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
2
3 3.1 EXAMINATION
6 Specifications.
7
8 3.2 SEQUENCE/SCHEDULING
9 A. During structural steel restoration operations, restore all areas to a weathertight condition each day
10 and/or before inclement weather commences.
11 B. The Contractor shall not proceed with the Work until all unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the
12 proper and timely completion of the Work have been corrected.
13
14 3.3 GENERAL NOTES
15 A. Structural steel shall be detailed, fabricated and erected in accordance with the AISC “Specification
16 for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings, Allowable Stress Design
17 and Plastic Design.” and the AISC “Code of Standard Practice”, current edition.
18 B. Steel shall conform to the following specifications (unless otherwise noted).
19 1. Miscellaneous Sections and Plates: ASTM A36
20 2. Welding Electrodes: E-70XX
21 C. All welding shall comply with AWS D1.1 using E-70XX electrodes. All welding shall be done by
22 AWS pre-qualified welders, certified for welds made. Provide continuous minimum sized welds per
23 AISC requirements, unless otherwise noted.
24 D. All existing dimensions and conditions must be verified by the Contractor prior to any fabrication
25 and installation.
26 E. The Contractor shall supervise and direct the structural steel restoration work and shall be solely
27 responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures.
28 F. All local, State, and Federal regulations and procedures regarding safety are the responsibility of
29 the Contractor.
30
31 3.4 EXISTING STRUCTURAL STEEL LINTEL RESTORATION
32 A. Carefully inspect the condition of the existing steel lintels once the existing masonry has been
33 removed at areas as indicated on the Drawings. Remove all existing mortar and other existing
34 materials as required so that the condition of the existing steel can be closely inspected. Report
35 any excessive rust, deterioration, or steel deformation to the Architect immediately prior to
36 continuing with any structural steel restoration work.
37 B. Replace and/or repair all severely rusted, deteriorated or deformed structural steel as deemed
38 unacceptable by the Architect and/or his Structural Engineer. All existing structural steel
39 replacement and/or repair work shall be performed as shown on the Drawings. However, if a
40 condition arises that is not properly addressed on the Drawings or as specified herein, notify the
41 Architect immediately prior to performing any structural steel restoration work.
42 C. Clean all existing structural steel to remain in-place as required to receive the new structural steel
43 coating (primer and finish coat) in strict conformance with the Manufacturer’s specifications.
44 D. Provide and install new structural steel coating (primer and finish coat) to all structural steel
45 (including new and existing structural steel that is to be left in-place) in strict conformance with the
46 Manufacturer’s specifications.
47 E. Provide and install new membrane flashings as shown on the Drawings on properly prepared
48 surfaces in strict conformance with the Manufacturer’s specifications.
49 F. Provide and install all contingent materials as shown on the Drawings, including but not limited to,
50 membrane flashing end-dams, stainless steel end-dams, stainless steel drip edges, new stainless
51 steel termination bars, termination bar fasteners, termination bar sealant, and all other materials not
52 specifically described but as required for a complete and proper installation of the Work in this
53 Section.
54 G. All new materials shall be installed in strict conformance with the Manufacturer’s specifications.
55
56 END OF SECTION

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 05 31 00
2 STEEL DECK
3
5 1.1 DESCRIPTION
7 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS
8 1.4 SUBMITTALS
10 1.6 COORDINATION
12 2.1 STEEL ROOF DECK
13 2.2 NON-COMPOSITE FORM DECK
14 2.3 FASTENERS
15 2.4 ACCESSORIES
16 2.5 LEED CREDIT
18 3.1 ERECTION
19 3.2 ROOF DECK
20 3.3 FLOOR DECK
21 3.4 FIELD TOUCH UP
22 PART 1 - GENERAL
23 1.1 DESCRIPTION
26 B. This section includes the fabrication and erection of steel deck. The Work shall include, but not be
28 1. Roof deck, roof deck accessories, and roof deck fasteners.

29 2. Noncomposite form deck.
30 C. Structural notes indicated on the drawings regarding steel decking shall be considered a part of this
31 specification.
33 A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications and
34 standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified.
35 1. AISI - Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.
36 2. ANSI/AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
37 3. ANSI/AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.
38 4. ASTM A1008- Standard Specification for Structural Steel (SS), Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled
39 5. ASTM A36 – Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
40 6. ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
41 Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process.
42 7. ASTM A924 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-
43 Coated by the Hot-Dip Process
44 8. SDI - Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks by the Steel Deck
45 Institute.

CONTRACT #7939 MUNIS #10129 05 31 00 - 1 STEEL DECK
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 B. Manufacture steel decking in accordance with the Steel Deck Institute’s (SDI) “Design Manual for
2 Composite Decks, Form Decks and Roof Decks”.
3 C. All steel deck shall be designed and fabricated in accordance with the above AISI and SDI
4 specifications. The gauges and section moduli indicated on the drawings or specified herein are
5 minimum and the gauge and section modules of the deck furnished shall meet or exceed these
6 minimum requirements. All gauges are United States standard, measured prior to coating.
7 D. Contractor to verify that the manufacturer’s steel deck type selected is listed on the UL fire rated roof
8 assembly specified by the Architect for this project.
9 E. Where any provisions of other pertinent codes and standards conflict with this specification, the more
11 F. Contractor to have pre-installation meeting where installer demonstrates workmanship by conducting

12 representative fastenings at pre-installation meeting, subject to guidance from mechanical fastener
13 manufacturer representative.
15 A. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five (5) years
16 documented experience at manufacturing steel deck. Fabrication Company shall be a current
17 member of the Steel Deck Institute (SDI).
18 B. Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five (5) years
19 documented experience at erecting steel deck.
20 1.4 SUBMITTALS
21 A. Prepare and submit shop drawings for Engineer’s approval. Shop drawings shall indicate deck
22 layout, depth, uncoated metal thickness, framing and supports with unit dimensions and sections and
23 complete end jointing.
24 B. Provide details of all accessories.
25 C. Shop drawings shall also indicate typical welding or mechanical anchoring pattern for steel deck and
26 accessories.
27 D. Prepare and submit allowable construction span tables and allowable total load tables for Engineer’s
28 approval. Tables shall be accompanied with a letter of certification from the manufacturer stating the
29 tabulated design values were determined in accordance with the steel deck institute’s “Design
30 Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, and Roof Decks.”
31 E. Provide manufacturer’s latest recommendations and installation instructions.
32 F. Prepare and submit product data of proposed materials.
33 G. LEED Certification: Submit manufacturer’s certification for each steel product including the following:
40 A. All decking materials shall be transported, stored and erected in a manner that will prevent damage
41 or deformation of sheets. Damaged material shall not be erected or repaired without Structural
42 Engineer’s approval.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 B. Deck panels shall be stored clear of the ground, elevated on one end, and protected from weather
2 with waterproof covering.
3 1.6 COORDINATION
4 A. Portions of decking to receive spray applied fireproofing shall be galvanized finish. Contractor shall
5 certify compatibility of any shop primer with field applied finishes or fireproofing required for this
6 project.
7 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
8 2.1 STEEL ROOF DECK
9 A. Standard Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels to comply with “SDI Specification and Commentary for
10 Steel Roof Deck,” and the following:
11 1. Steel decking sheet material, minimum yield strength, depth, gage, profile, and finish are
12 indicated on the Drawings, as classified by Steel Deck Institute (SDI). Panels shall be
13 formed with integral ribs and overlapping side flanges.
14 2.2 NON-COMPOSITE FORM DECK
15 A. Non-Composite Form Deck: Fabricate panels to comply with “SDI Specification and Commentary for
16 Non-Composite Steel Floor Deck,” and the following:
17 1. Steel decking sheet material, minimum yield strength, depth, gage, profile, and finish are
18 indicated on the Drawings, as classified by Steel Deck Institute (SDI). Panels shall be
19 formed with integral ribs and overlapping side flanges.
20 2.3 FASTENERS
21 A. Support Fasteners:
22 1. Welded: 5/8" diameter electric arc spot (puddle) welds. Refer to Drawings for weld spacing
23 requirements. Welds spaced at 12"O.C.
24 a. Weld washers required for material less than 0.028" thick. Welding washers shall
25 a minimum thickness of 0.0598 inches and be applicable to AWS D1.3 type
26 welding and of type as recommended by the deck manufacturer.
27 b. Weld metal shall penetrate all layers of deck material and shall have good fusion
28 to the supporting steel. Fasten ribbed deck to steel support members at ends and
29 intermediate supports.
30 1) All welding shall be in conformance with previously cited AWS

31 recommendations in appearance and quality of welds, and the methods
32 used in correcting welding work.
33 B. Side Lap Fasteners:
34 1. Mechanical: Zinc coated self-drilling, self-tapping type (minimum No. 10) steel screws.
35 Refer to Drawings for fastener spacing requirements. Side lap fasteners shall be placed at
36 mid-span or 36 inch intervals, whichever is smaller.
37 2.4 ACCESSORIES
38 A. Provide all closers, fillers, starters, metal cant strips, pour stops, column closures, girder fillers, and
39 similar accessories required for a complete installation. Provide cover plates at all locations where
40 direction of deck span changes. Unless otherwise noted, accessories shall be of the same steel
41 sheet material, finish, and thickness as the deck sections.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 B. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.
2 2.5 LEED CREDIT
9 recycled content.
14 3.1 ERECTION
15 A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
16 B. Deck units and deck accessories herein specified shall be thoroughly and securely erected by
17 experienced workmen fastening to supporting steel members as herein specified. All work shall be
18 in conformance with manufacturer’s latest printed recommendations and approved shop drawings.
19 C. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.
20 D. The finished work shall be true, flat planes and to slopes indicated with end joints flush and without
21 sharp protruding edges. Exposed underside of deck shall be true without defect.
22 E. Erector shall cut all openings in deck for piping and equipment furnished by other trades. Wherever
23 ribs are cut and are not supported by supplemental framing, the erector shall provide steel angles of
24 adequate size on all sides of the opening welded to the underside of each rib.
25 F. Burning of holes in decking will not be permitted.
26 G. Steel decking shall be installed to span supporting steel members at right angles. Panels shall be
27 securely anchored to each structural support it rests on or passes.
28 3.2 ROOF DECK
29 A. Fasten roof deck panels to steel supporting members using welds, mechanical fasteners, drive pins
30 as specified herein and on the Drawings.
31 B. Unless noted otherwise, secure side laps and perimeter edges of units with fasteners at mid-span
32 between supports or 36 inches on center, whichever distance is smaller.
33 C. Deck shall be fastened through the bottom of the deck rib to all structural supports for the specific
34 deck sections.
35 D. End bearing of roof decking shall have a minimum of 1-1/2 inches of bearing occurring over structural
36 supports
37 E. End joints shall be lapped 2 inches minimum.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 F. Install sound absorbing insulation into the topside ribs of the acoustical deck as specified in the deck
2 manufacturer’s installation instructions. Coordinate with the roofing installation to protect the
3 insulation from damage.
4 G. Place deck panels on structural supports and adjust to final position with ends aligned. Attach to
5 supports immediately after placement.
6 H. Roof sump pans shall be installed over openings provided in roof deck with flanges welded to the top
7 of the deck. Space welds at 12 inches apart with at least 1 weld in each corner.
8 I. Install all roof deck accessories in accordance with the roof deck manufacturer’s written instructions.
9 3.3 FLOOR DECK
10 A. Fasten steel floor deck to supporting steel with 5/8” diameter electric arc spot (puddle) welds spaced
11 at 12” O.C. minimum. Secure side laps and perimeter edges of units with fasteners at mid-span
12 between supports or 36 inches on center, whichever distance is smaller.
13 B. Place deck panels on structural supports and adjust to final position with ends aligned. Attach to
14 supports immediately after placement.
15 C. Install deck ends over supports with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches.
16 D. Non-composite decks end joints shall be lapped a minimum of 2 inches.
17 E. Install pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure according to manufacturer’s
18 recommendations.
19 F. Fasten column closures and cell closures to deck to provide a tight fit. Provide cell closures at
20 changes of direction of deck units, unless otherwise noted.
21 G. Install all floor deck accessories in accordance with the floor deck manufacturer’s written instructions.
22 3.4 FIELD TOUCH UP
23 A. After erection, all weld burn marks and abraded spots shall be cleaned and field painted with a rust-
24 inhibiting metal primer matching formulations and color of shop coat or a zinc-rich rust inhibiting paint
25 for galvanized deck surfaces.
26 END OF SECTION

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 05 40 00
2 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING (CFSF) SYSTEM
3
5 1.1 DESCRIPTION
7 1.3 SUBMITTALS
11 2.1 MATERIALS
12 2.2 FABRICATION
13 2.3 LEED CREDIT
15 3.1 INSPECTION
16 3.2 INSTALLATION
17 PART 1 - GENERAL
18 1.1 DESCRIPTION
21 B. Load bearing structural steel studs and joist framing system of 20 to 12 gauge (33 mil to 97 mil)
22 members along with fasteners and related accessories.
23 C. Furnish and install cold-formed steel framing system as shown on Drawings and herein specified.
24 1. Work shall include, but not be limited to the following items:
25 a. Non-load bearing formed steel stud exterior wall framing.
26 b. Formed steel joist framing and bridging.
27 c. Provide tracks, blocking, lintels, clips angles, bridging, shoes, reinforcements,

28 fasteners and accessories to construct a complete steel framing system.
29 D. Structural notes indicated on Drawings regarding cold-formed steel framing system shall be
30 considered a part of this Specification.
31 E. Refer to Division 9 for non-load bearing studs of 20 gauge (30 mil) or lighter.
33 A. Workmen Qualifications:
34 1. For the actual erection of cold-formed steel framing system, use only skilled journeymen
35 steel framing erectors who are thoroughly experienced with the materials and methods
36 specified.
37 2. Use qualified welders and comply with AWS standards.
38 B. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications, and
39 standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:
40 1. AISI - Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members, Current
41 Edition.
42 2. AISI General Provisions 2004 Edition.

CONTRACT #7939 MUNIS #10129 05 40 00 - 1 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING
(CFSF) SYSTEM
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3. AWCI - Association of Wall and Ceiling Industries, Current Edition.
2 4. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel
3 5. ASTM A653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated

4 (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process.
5 6. ASTM A1008 -Structural Steel (SS), Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled
6 7. ASTM C955 - Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Track) and
7 Bracing or Bridging for Screw Applications of Gypsum Board and Metal Plaster Base.
8 8. ASTM C1007 - Installation of Load Bearing Steel Studs and Related Accessories.
9 9. SSMA - Steel Stud Manufacturers Association.
10 C. Where any provisions of other pertinent codes and standards conflict with this specification, the more
12 D. Performance Requirement:
13 1. Provide CFSF capable of withstanding design loads indicated on the plans.
14 2. Design CFSF to withstand design loads meeting the following deflection limits:
15 a. Exterior walls backing up brick or stone veneer: Horizontal deflection of 1/600 of

16 wall height.
17 b. Exterior walls cladded with metal siding, exterior insulated finish systems or other
18 flexible non-brittle finishes: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 of wall height.
19 c. Floor Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/480 for live load and 1/360 for total
20 loads of the span.
21 3. Design CFSF to provide for movement of framing members without damage or

22 overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors,
23 or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of
24 120°F.
25 4. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural

26 members (1 inch maximum), and clearances of intended openings.
27 5. CFSF shall be designed in accordance with “Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing -
28 General Provisions”, current edition.
29 1.3 SUBMITTALS
30 A. Shop Drawings:
31 1. Prepare and submit complete erection and detailed shop drawings for Engineer’s approval,
32 including framing plans indicating size, gauge, weight and location of all framing members.
33 Shop drawings shall indicate the following:
34 a. Component details, framed openings, bearing, anchorage, loading, welds, type

35 and location of fasteners, bracing, bridging, strapping, connections, and
36 accessories or items required of other related work. Provide stud and ceiling joist
37 layout.
38 b. Describe method for securing studs to tracks and for bolted/welded framing
39 connections.

(CFSF) SYSTEM
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 c. Provide calculations for loadings and stresses of steel framing system, including
2 specially fabricated components and roof trusses, shall be prepared by a
3 registered professional engineer, with registration from the state in which the
4 building is located.
5 d. Detail size and location of all bridging, strapping, bracing, splices, and accessories
6 required for installation.
7 B. Product Data:
8 1. Provide product data on standard framing members. Describe materials and finish, product
9 criteria and limitations. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
10 C. LEED Certification: Submit manufacturer’s certification for each steel product including the following:
17 A. MANUFACTURER: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with a minimum of
18 five (5) years documented experience at manufacturing cold-formed steel and framing systems and
19 related accessories. Manufacturer shall be a current and “full” member of the Steel Stud
20 Manufacturers Association (SSMA).
21 B. All steel studs and track furnished under this section shall be supplier by a manufacturer who is a
22 current member of the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA).
23 C. All steel studs and tracks used for this project shall meet the minimum section properties published
24 by the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA).
25 D. Preparation of shop drawings, design calculations, and other structural data by a qualified
26 Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Wisconsin.
28 A. Steel members shall be transported, stored and erected in a manner that will avoid any damage or
29 deformation. Bent or deformed members will be rejected and shall be replaced or repaired at the
30 expense of the responsible party. Store clear of ground and in such a manner so as to eliminate
31 excessive handling.
33 2.1 MATERIALS
34 A. Framing Materials:
35 1. Studs shall be minimum 20 gauge (33 mil) thick sheet steel conforming to ASTM A653
36 Grade 33 for 18 gauge and thinner and/or Grade 50 for 16 gauge and thicker, formed to
37 channel shape, punched web, with nominal size as indicated on Drawings.
38 2. Joists shall be minimum 20 gauge (33 mil) thick sheet steel conforming to ASTM A653
39 Grade 33 for 18 gauge and thinner and/or Grade 50 for 16 gauge and thicker, formed to
40 channel of open box shape, solid or punched web with nominal depths as noted on
41 Drawings. All joists shall be single length span (without splices) with a minimum 8 inch
42 bearing on each end, unless otherwise indicated.

(CFSF) SYSTEM
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3. Track shall be minimum 20 gauge (33 mil) thick sheet steel, channel shaped, solid web,
2 same width as above studs. Track shall provide a tight fit for studs.
3 B. Accessories:
4 1. Bracing, furring and bridging shall consist of formed sheet steel with thickness determined
5 for conditions encountered. Provide manufacturer's standard shapes, complete with finish
6 same as framing members.
7 2. Plates, gussets and clips shall consist of formed sheet steel with thickness determined for
8 conditions encountered. Provide manufacturer's standard shapes, complete with finish
9 same as framing members.
10 C. Fasteners:
11 1. Self-drilling, self-tapping screws, bolts nuts and washers shall conform to ASTM A90,
12 complete with hot-dip galvanized minimum size: 1/4-14.
13 2. Expansion anchors shall be "Kwik" bolts, as manufactured by Hilti, Inc.
14 3. All other fasteners shall be as indicated on Drawings or as recommended by the above stud
15 manufacturer.
16 4. Welding connections are to be performed in accordance with American Welding Society

17 (AWS) D1.3 latest edition “Specification for Welded Sheet Steel in Structures.” Consult AWS
18 D19.0 latest edition “Welding Zinc Coated Sheet” and ANSI Standard Z49.1 for information
19 regarding welding procedures.
20 D. Finishes:
21 1. Furnish all stud and joist system components with a factory galvanized (G60) finish.
22 2.2 FABRICATION
23 A. Fabricate assemblies of framed sections, of sizes and profiles required with framing members fitted,
24 reinforced and braced to suit design requirements.
25 B. Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to Worksite, ready for installation.
26 C. Bearing studs must be fabricated with full stud end seated against track web. Do not use studs that
27 have been cut at punchouts.
28 2.3 LEED CREDIT

(CFSF) SYSTEM
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
2 3.1 INSPECTION
3 A. Verify that substrate surfaces and building framing components are ready to receive work.
4 B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions and substrate.
5 3.2 INSTALLATION
6 A. General:
7 1. Cold-formed steel framing system shall consist of structural steel studs and joists with
8 locations as shown on Drawings. All work shall be in accordance with approved shop
9 drawings and manufacturer's latest printed specifications. Framing members shall be
10 securely attached by mechanical fasteners as indicated on Drawings and as recommended
11 by the manufacturer.
12 a. All field welding shall be in accordance with AWS previously cited.
13 b. Wire tying of stud or components in system will not be allowed.
14 c. Complete framing system ready to receive subsequent facing material.
15 2. Provision shall be made in studs for rigid fastening of all blocking and special braces or
16 framing and for attachment and support of electrical outlets or other equipment indicated to
17 be supported by stud construction.
18 a. All anchorage, bracing and blocking shall be in accordance with approved shop
19 drawings and as recommended by the manufacturer.
20 3. Surfaces abraded by handling, weld locations and other miscellaneous defects shall be
21 touched-up with zinc-rich galvanizing compound (ZRC) coating.
22 B. Erection Of Studding:
23 1. Top and bottom runner members shall be the same size and gauge as the stud and be
24 continuous for the total length of framing system or as long as practical and shall be securely
25 attached a maximum of 24 inches on centers with approved fastening devices. Studs shall
26 extend in one piece full height vertically between runners, spaced no greater than 24 inches
27 on centers, with all web cut-outs in perfect alignment. Studs shall provide solid backing at
28 corners and jambs. Install joists with all components property aligned and braced with all
29 work plumb and true ready and acceptable to receive surface materials.
30 a. Coordinate installation of sealant with floor and ceiling tracks.

31 b. Field cutting of studs shall be done by sawing.
32 c. Splices in axial load studs will not be permitted.
33 d. Erect load bearing studs, brace and reinforce to develop full strength to meet
34 design requirements.
35 e. Extend stud framing through ceiling to underside of floor or roof structure above.
36 f. Install intermediate studs above and below openings with studs equally spaced to
37 correspond to adjacent stud spacing.
38 g. Provide deflection allowance in stud track, directly below horizontal building
39 framing for non-load bearing framing.
40 h. Framing fabricator shall ensure punchout alignment when assembling framing and
41 field cutting to length.
42 i. All framing components shall be cut squarely for attachment to perpendicular
43 members.
44 j. In the event a track butt joint occurs within a panel, abutting pieces of track shall
45 be butt welded or spliced together. No such splices shall occur at any head or sill
46 condition.

(CFSF) SYSTEM
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2. Steel studs shall be located not more than 2 inches from all door, abutting partitions, partition
2 corners and other construction. Unless detailed otherwise, runner track or stud member
3 shall be used as a runner over door frames. Structural studs and joists shall be securely
4 and rigidly anchored in place to give a total and complete support to subsequent materials
5 attached thereto. All studs shall be securely attached to jamb and head anchor clips of
6 each door frame by manufacturer's recommended method.
7 a. Construct corners using minimum three studs. Jamb studs at doors, windows, and
8 other wall openings shall be designed to resist the tributary load of the opening
9 and meet specified performance requirements.
10 b. Cold-rolled steel channel stiffeners or bridging shall be provided and installed

11 horizontally every 60 inches in all framing systems through stud web cut-outs with
12 welding clips welded in place at each stud.
13 C. Erection of Joists:
14 1. Place joist at spacing indicate on Drawings.
15 2. Make provisions for erection stresses. Provide temporary alignment and bracing.
16 3. Provide web stiffeners at reaction points.
17 END OF SECTION

(CFSF) SYSTEM
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 054500
2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT SYSTEMS
5 1.2 SUMMARY
6 1.3 REFERENCES
10 1.7 COORDINATION
12 1.9 WARRANTY
16 2.3 SUPPORT SYSTEM (ESS-1)
17 2.4 STRUT CHANNELS AND COMPONENTS
18 2.5 FABRICATION
20 3.1 EXAMINATION
21 3.2 INSTALLATION
22 PART 1 - GENERAL

26 1.2 SUMMARY
27 A. Section includes:
28 1. Continuous slot, bolted metal framing channels and all associated fittings and hardware.
29 2. Design and engineering to provide code compliant support framing fabricated to performance
30 standards specified.
31 3. Installation of design/build fabricated bolted metal framing as support for ceiling mounted medical
32 equipment.
33 1.3 REFERENCES
34 A. ASTM A123 - Specification for Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled,
35 Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip
36 B. ASTM A653 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated Galvanized by the Hot-Dip Process
37 C. ASTM A1011 - Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-
38 Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formablility (Formerly ASTM A570)
39 D. ASTM F1136 – Standard Specification for Chromium/Zinc Corrosion Protective Coatings for Fasteners
40 E. ASTM A907 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Heavy-Thickness Coils, Carbon, Hot-Rolled,
41 Structural Quality
42 F. ASTM B633 - Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel
43 G. MFMA - Metal Framing Manufacturers Association
44 H. ANSI/NFPA 70– National Fire Protection Association (National Electrical Code)
45 I. AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute

47 A. Submit manufacturer's product data on strut channels including, but not limited to, types, materials, finishes,
48 gauge thickness, and hole patterns. For each different strut cross-section, submit cross sectional properties
49 including Section Modulus (Sx) and Moment of Inertia (Ix).
50 1. Submit drawings of strut and accessories including clamps, brackets, hanger rods, and fittings.
51

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 54500 - 1 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT SYSTEMS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 B. Submit Shop Drawings which show methods of suspending and anchoring equipment, station details,
2 equipment locations and detailed dimensions of all major components. Medical equipment supports shall
3 be shown on an accurate 3-D model.
4 1. Final support system shop drawings and submittal information shall incorporate coordination
5 drawings information of plenum space utilization.
6 2. Provide structural calculations and engineering seals to further ensure that support system design
7 meets the requirements.
8 C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For equipment support systems indicated to comply with performance
9 requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional
10 engineer licensed in the State of Wisconsin responsible for their preparation.

12 A. Field quality-control reports.
13 B. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

15 A. Material and installation shall be provided by a qualified contractor, with at least ten years experience in the
16 manufacture and installation of metal framing medical equipment supports. Vendor shall demonstrate
17 experience of projects of similar scope and size, and shall maintain a continuing quality assurance program
18 for both its material and installation crews.
19 B. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of bolted metal framing of the types required,
20 whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
21 C. Contractor shall provide the single source responsibility for design, materials and workmanship, and shall
22 provide a warranty period of one year from date of acceptance by Owner.
23 D. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for
24 installation of bolted metal support framing required for this Project.
25 E. MFMA Compliance: Comply with the latest revision of MFMA Standards Publication Number MFMA-3,
26 "Metal Framing Standards Publication".
27 F. NEC Compliance: Comply with the latest revision NFPA 70 - Article 352 "Surface Metal Raceways and
28 Surface Nonmetallic Raceways".
29 G. UL Compliance: Comply with UL "Standard for Surface Metal Raceway and Fittings", UL 5.
30 H. Bolted framing channels and fittings shall have the manufacturers name, part number, and material heat
31 code identification number stamped in the part itself for identification. Material certification sheets and test
32 reports shall be made available by the manufacturer upon request.
33 I. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for performance
34 characteristics. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more
35 methods including testing conducted by an independent testing agency and in-service performance.
36 J. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
37 K. Mockup: Refer to Section 01 43 39 – Mockups for description of construction required to complete a mockup
39 1. Typical ACT-3 and ESS-1 assembly in open office bay, min. full structural bay x 4ft wide panels each
40 side of ESS-1. Location to be south-east corner of open office at Ground Level.
41

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 1.7 COORDINATION
2 A. Ceiling Plenum Coordination:
3 1. Submit an accurate 3-D model of the equipment support system to the Contractor, who will use the
4 3-D model for MEPT clash detection. The HVAC contractor will develop and analyze the 3-D model,
5 based on electronic 3-D information furnished by other MEP contractors who will share the ceiling
6 plenum space.
7 2. Design/Builder shall modify support design based on MEPT clash detection and resolution
8 coordination.
9 3. Design/Builder shall directly coordinate with Owner to obtain final purchased equipment information
10 necessary to accurately coordinate, design, fabricate and install equipment supports.
11 4. Contractor will furnish one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in preparing coordination digital
12 data files.
13 5. Content: Include the following information, as applicable:
14 a. Indicate space requirements for equipment support systems.
15 b. Show location and size of access required for installation.
16 c. Indicate required installation sequences.
17 d. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be
18 in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate
19 sketches indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts.
20 e. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the
21 Contract.

23 A. Deliver strut systems and components carefully to avoid breakage, denting, and scoring finishes. Do not
24 install damaged equipment.
25 B. Store strut systems and components in original cartons and in clean dry space; protect from weather and
26 construction traffic.
27 1.9 WARRANTY
28 A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
29 components of that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
30 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
31 a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
32 b. Noise or vibration caused by support framing movement from equipment operation.
33 2. Warranty Period: Twenty years from date of Substantial Completion.

36 A. Product Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with these specifications, strut systems to be installed shall
37 be as manufactured by Unistrut, Inc. or Design/Builder approved equal. Framing system shall be equal to:
38 1. Unistrut Metal Framing.
39 2. Telestrut Telescoping Strut.
40 3. Telespar Telescoping Tubing.
41 B. Approved Design/Builder:
42 1. Unistrut Wisconsin
43 15350 W National Avenue
44 New Berlin, WI 53151-5158
45 Contact: Carl Pfeifer
46 Phone: (262)796-8707
47 Phone: 262-796-8710
48 Fax: 262-796-8712
49 Email: [email protected]
50 2. Equipment Support Systems™
51 2390 Capitol Landing Drive
52 Ballwin, MO 63017
53 Phone: (505) 401-1234
54 website: www.EquipmentSS.com
55 e-mail: [email protected]

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3. Vertex Steel Inc. Home Office

2 2175 Fyke Dr. Milford, MI 48381
3 Phone : (248) 684-4177
4 Fax : (248) 684-9327

6 A. Delegated Design: Design metal-framed equipment supports, including comprehensive engineering
7 analysis by a qualified professional engineer licensed in the State of Wisconsin, using performance
8 requirements and design criteria indicated.
9 B. General:
10 1. The ceiling tile flanges shall be installed directly on the metal support framing flush with the bottom
11 of the channel opening creating a clean, unobtrusive look consistent with the room aesthetics.
12 C. Metal-framed equipment supports shall withstand the effects of the following without failure due to defective
13 manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction:
14 1. Structural loads.
15 2. Movements of supporting structure.
16 3. Dimensional tolerances of support system and other adjacent construction.
17 4. Failure includes, but is not limited to, the following:
18 a. Deflection exceeding specified limits.
19 b. Noise or vibration created by equipment operation.
20 c. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
21 D. Structural Loads:
22 1. Static and Dynamic Loads: As provided by the structural engineer.
23 2. Seismic Loads: None.
24 E. Deflection of Framing Members: as follows:
25 1. System shall be true, plumb and level to the tolerances indicated, with no more than 1/720th of the
26 span maximum deflection in either plane, when maximum loading conditions are applied due to
27 equipment operation.
28 F. Lateral Bracing of Framing Members:
29 2.3 SUPPORT SYSTEM (ESS-1)

30 A. The support system shall lend itself to a rational structural analysis with section properties of framing
31 members demonstrated by calculations. Structural calculations and drawings shall be furnished with a stamp
32 by a licensed engineer licensed in the State of Wisconsin complying with all applicable codes and regulatory
33 requirements.
34 B. Design:
35 1. Support Structure: The support members at the ceiling plane shall be located as indicated on the
36 drawings. The spacing shall allow installation of standard modular ceiling tiles, fixtures and
37 equipment. It shall be possible to attach the equipment at any point on the support system.
38 2. Ceiling Anchorage: Whenever possible, attachment to ceiling structure above shall be done by
39 means of imbedded concrete inserts, through bolts, or by direct attachment to the structural framing
40 of the building.
41 3. Vertical supports: The exposed rails and the ceiling anchorage shall be connected by a series of
42 vertical supports as indicated on the drawings. Vertical supports shall provide for both basic and
43 micro vertical adjustment.
44 4. Loading: The support structure shall be designed to support the equipment manufacturer’s
45 equipment load at any single point along the exposed rails. The concentrated load shall be the
46 maximum that will be encountered by positioning the equipment at the extremities of its travel
47 (maximal load configuration).
48 5. Safety Factor: The system shall be designed with a minimum safety factor of 2 based on ultimate
49 strength under static and dynamic conditions.
50 2.4 STRUT CHANNELS AND COMPONENTS

51 A. Made from easy-to-assemble systems
52 1. Unistrut Metal Framing.
53 2. Telestrut Telescoping Strut.
54 3. Telespar Telescoping Tubing.
55 4. Similar from other manufacturers.
56 5. Anchors: Hilti KB-TZ anchors
57 B. General: Strut shall be 1-5/8 inches wide in varying heights and shop welded combinations as required to
58 meet load capacities and designs indicated on the drawings.
59 C. Materials and Finish: Material and finish specifications for each strut type are as follows:

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 1. Pre-galvanized Steel: Strut shall be made from steel meeting the minimum mechanical properties of
2 ASTM A653 SS, Grade 33, and mill galvanized in accordance with coating designation G90. Fittings
3 shall be manufactured from steel meeting the minimum requirements of ASTM A907 SS, Grade 33.
4 All fittings and hardware shall be zinc plated in accordance with ASTM B633 (SC3 for fittings, SC1
5 for threaded hardware).
6 2.5 FABRICATION
7 A. Where practical, fit and assemble metal-framed in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at
8 Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
9 B. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.
11 3.1 EXAMINATION
12 A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
13 tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
14 B. Installation / Substrate Conditions / Acceptance:
15 1. Installation of product shall constitute acceptance of existing conditions / substrates for compatibility
16 with specified products unless the architect and Contractor are both notified in writing prior to the
17 start of installation.
18 C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
19 D. Field Measurements:
20 1. The contractor shall make field measurements to assure that the medical support can be installed
21 according to plans, and without
22 2. Interference with structural framing, mechanical systems, plumbing or other obstructions. Any
23 interference shall be reported to the architect.
24 E. Sequencing:
25 1. The contractor shall assure that the support system is installed in a timely and practical sequence,
26 ahead of any extensive electrical, mechanical or HVAC work in the area, and prior to any ceiling
27 framing or room finishes.
28 F. Modifications:
29 1. Any changes or modifications from approved shop drawings shall require approval from the architect
30 and engineer, and shall be noted on the final drawings.
31 3.2 INSTALLATION
32 A. General:
33 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
34 2. Do not install damaged components.
35 3. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration.
36 4. Galvanized components cut on site shall be coated with corrosion-prevention paint at cut ends after
37 grinding sharp burrs from cut ends.
38 B. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and elevations.
39 C. Erection Tolerances: Install metal-framed equipment supports to comply with the following maximum
40 tolerances:
41 1. Alignment: Limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch where surfaces abut in line, edge to edge,
42 at corners, or where a reveal or protruding element separates aligned surfaces by less than 3 inches;
43 otherwise, limit offset to 1/16 inch.
44 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 05 50 00
2 METAL FABRICATIONS
4 1.1 SUMMARY
5 1.2 COORDINATION
12 2.2 METALS
13 2.3 FASTENERS
15 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
16 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
17 2.7 SHELF ANGLES
18 2.8 METAL FLOOR PLATE
19 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
20 2.10 METAL BOLLARDS (BOLLARD-1)
21 2.12 METAL GRATES (GRATE-#)
22 2.11 PIPE OR DOWNSPOUT GUARDS (GUARD-1)
23 2.12 COUNTER SUPPORTS
24 2.13 MADISON FIRE DEPARTMENT KNOX BOX
25 2.14 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
26 2.15 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
27 2.16 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES
28 2.17 FINISHES, GENERAL
29 2.18 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
32 3.3 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS
33 3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
34 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
35 PART 1 - GENERAL
36 1.1 SUMMARY
38 1. Metal fabrications (MTLFAB-1)
39 a. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports.
40 b. Shelf angles.
41 c. Metal floor plate and supports.
42 d. Miscellaneous steel trim.
43 e. Metal bollards.
44 2. Downspout guards (GUARD-1).
45 3. Madison Fire Department KNOX Box.
46 B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:
47 1. Loose steel lintels.
48 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast
49 into concrete or built into unit masonry.
50 1.2 COORDINATION
51 A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating
52 manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one
53 another.
54

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 055000 - 1 METAL FABRICATIONS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting
2 drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
3 bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items
4 to Project site in time for installation.

6 A. Product Data: For the following:
7 1. Paint products.
8 2. Grout.
10 1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and
11 cost.
12 C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of
13 metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
14 D. Samples for Verification: For each type and finish of extruded nosing and tread.
15 E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For ladders, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
16 professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

18 A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
19 B. Mill Certificates: Signed by stainless-steel manufacturers, certifying that products furnished comply with
20 requirements.
21 C. Welding certificates.
22 D. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that
23 shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
24 E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.

26 A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural
27 Welding Code - Steel."
28 B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
29 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
30 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."
31 3. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."

33 A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal
34 fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

37 A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer licensed in the State of Wisconsin, as defined
38 in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design ladders.
39 B. Structural Performance of Aluminum Ladders: Aluminum ladders shall withstand the effects of loads and
40 stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3.
41 C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting
42 on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure
43 of connections, and other detrimental effects.
44 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
45

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2.2 METALS
2 A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal
3 fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks,
4 rolled trade names, or blemishes.
5 B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled
6 content not less than 25 percent.
7 C. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
8 D. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 316L.
9 E. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.
10 F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.
11 2.3 FASTENERS
12 A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-
13 plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls.
14 Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
15 1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.
16 2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.
17 B. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated;
18 galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel.
19 Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.
20 C. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.
21 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or
22 ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
23 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 2 stainless-steel
24 bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.
25 D. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-
26 4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 3 inches long at not more
27 than 8 inches o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-
28 plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts.

30 A. Shop Primers (Exposed to view locations): Provide primers that comply with Section 09 91 13 "Exterior
31 Painting," and Section 09 91 23 “Interior Painting".
32 B. Water-Based Primer (interior concealed locations): Emulsion type, anticorrosive primer for mildly corrosive
33 environments that is resistant to flash rusting when applied to cleaned steel, complying with MPI#107 and
34 compatible with topcoat.
35 C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with
36 paints specified to be used over it.
37 D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
38 E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying
39 with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and
40 exterior applications.
41 F. Concrete for steel bollards, bollard footings: Comply with requirements in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place
42 Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000
43 psi.

45 A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that maintain
46 structural value of joined pieces.
47 B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove sharp or rough
48 areas on exposed surfaces.
49 C. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
50 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance
51 of base metals.
52 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
53 3. Remove welding flux immediately.
54 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.
55 D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where
56 possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
57 E. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide
58 weep holes where water may accumulate.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 F. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel
2 strap anchors not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c.
3 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

4 A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.
5 B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated.
6 Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.
7 2.7 SHELF ANGLES

8 A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide
9 horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches from ends and 24 inches
10 o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
11 B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and concrete.
12 C. Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls.
13 D. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-in-place
14 concrete.
15 2.8 METAL FLOOR PLATE

16 A. Fabricate from abrasive-surface floor plate of thickness indicated below:
17 1. Thickness: 1/4 inch.
18 B. Provide steel angle supports as indicated.
19 C. Provide flush steel bar drop handles for lifting removable sections, one at each end of each section.
20 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

21 A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with
22 continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where
23 possible.
24 B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work.
25 2.10 METAL BOLLARDS (BOLLARD-1)

26 A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe
27 1. Cap bollards with 1/4-inch-thick steel plate.
28 B. Fabricate bollards with 3/8-inch-thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab. Drill baseplates at all four
29 corners for 3/4-inch anchor bolts.
30 C. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe or tubing with 1/4-inch-thick steel plate welded to
31 bottom of sleeve.
32 D. Prime bollards with zinc-rich primer.
33 2.11 PIPE OR DOWNSPOUT GUARDS (GUARD-1)

34 A. Fabricate pipe and downspout guards from 3/8-inch-thick by 12-inch-wide steel plate, bent to fit flat against
35 the wall or column at both ends and to fit around pipe with 2-inch clearance between pipe and pipe guard.
36 Drill each end for two 3/4-inch anchor bolts.
37 B. Galvanize pipe and downspout guards.
38 2.12 METAL GRATES (GRATE-#)

39 A. Construction: Grate 1.
40 1. Welded bar grating, plain steel painted black, smooth, welded construction, 1-1/4 inches x 3/16 inch
41 bearing bars, 1-3/16 inches on center, regular cross bars 4 inches on center, 24. Inches width x
42 240.0000" length (span). Provide banding and bearing angles.
43 B. Construction: Grate 2 (service grate). Hughes Bros C4270.13
44 1. Rectangular tri-section lift sections of 1/4 inch thick diamond pattern plates. Set in angle frame with
45 1/2 inch anchor rods for concrete installation. Galvanized steel material.
46 C. Construction: Grate 3. (manhole cover) Hughes Bros C4270.13
47 1. Rectangular bi-parting manual lift access doors with steel bar grating. Safety bar with latch and tie-
48 rod for opened doors. Angle frame with 1/2 anchor rods for concrete installation. Keyed lock bar for
49 grate release. Galvanized steel material.
50

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2.13 COUNTER SUPPORTS
2 A. Counter Support Brackets: Rakks counter support brackets, clear anodized aluminum by Rangine Corp.,
3 Needham, MA, as follows:
4 1. Anodized aluminum face plates with adhesive backing, Model No. EHFP-0202.
5 2. Bracket Model No. EH-1818, for countertops up to 25-inch depth, 18” x 18”, 450-pound capacity,
6 surface-mounted.
7 3. Bracket Model No. EH-1824, for countertops up to 30-inch depth, 18” x 24”, 450-pound capacity,
8 surface-mounted.
9 4. Bracket Model No. EH-1818-FM, for countertops up to 25-inch depth, 18” x 20”, 300-pound capacity,
10 flush-mounted for countertops.
11 5. Bracket Model No. EH-1824-FM, for countertops up to 30-inch depth, 18” x 26”, 300-pound capacity,
12 flush-mounted for countertops.
13 6. Bracket Model No. EH-1212, for shelf supports
14 2.14 MADISON FIRE DEPARTMENT KNOX BOX

15 A. Key Vaults: A key box shall be installed and incorporated into the entry access bollard as located on plan
16 and as detailed. Fabrication and installation shall comply with Madison City Ordinance 918.
17 B. Provide and place Fire Department alert decals (e.g. Knox Company stock #1001) on each exterior door or
18 door frame of the building near the lock cylinder. Regarding label placement for a group of doors, one label
19 for each pair of doors or a group of contiguous doors shall be required.
20 2.15 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

21 A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill
22 plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
23 2.16 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

24 A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in
25 masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.
26 B. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.
27 C. Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.
28 2.17 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

29 A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete
30 construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded
31 steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

33 A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

35 A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron
36 hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.
37 B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete,
38 sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.
39 C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below:
40 1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
41 2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
42 3. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

45 A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications.
46 Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb,
47 true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.
48 B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left
49 as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or
50 abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or
51 screwed field connections.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

3 of base metals.
6 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness
7 shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
8 D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are
9 required to be fastened to in-place construction.
10 E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or
11 similar construction.
12 3.2 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS

13 A. Anchor pedestrian control bollards as indicated on the drawings.
14 B. Anchor vehicle drive bollards in place with concrete footings. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for
15 consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured.
16 C. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.
17 3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

18 A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to
19 surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
20 B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been
21 positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush
22 with edge of bearing plate before packing with nonshrink grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces
23 and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

25 A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas.
26 Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-
27 PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
28 B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to
29 comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
30 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 05 51 13
2 METAL PAN STAIRS
5 1.2 SUMMARY
6 1.3 COORDINATION
12 2.2 METALS
13 2.3 FASTENERS
15 2.5 PRECAST CONCRETE TREADS
17 2.7 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS
18 2.8 STAIR RAILINGS
19 2.9 FINISHES
21 3.1 INSTALLING METAL PAN STAIRS
22 3.2 INSTALLING RAILINGS
24 PART 1 - GENERAL

28 1.2 SUMMARY
30 1. Preassembled steel stairs with precast terrazzo treads.
31 2. Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs.
32 3. Steel tube handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs.
33 B. Related Sections:
34 1. 09 66 13 “Portland Cement Terrazzo Flooring”: Match of terrazzo stair treads to flooring.
35 1.3 COORDINATION
38 another.
39 B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions
40 for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors,
41 that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
42 C. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they do not encroach on required stair
43 width and are within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.

45 A. Product Data: For metal pan stairs and the following:
46 1. Precast concrete terrazzo treads.
47 2. Paint products.
50 cost.
51 C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
52 D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For stairs and railings, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
53 qualified professional engineer licensed in the State of Wisconsin responsible for their preparation.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 055113 - 1 METAL PAN STAIRS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 A. Welding certificates.
3 B. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that

6 A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
7 B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
9 2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

13 in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design stairs and railings.
14 B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following
15 loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
16 1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft.
17 2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in.
18 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
19 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to loads
20 specified above.
21 C. Structural Performance of Railings: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following
23 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
24 a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction.
25 b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction.
26 c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
27 2. Infill of Guards:
28 a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft..
29 b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
30 3. Component Importance Factor: 1.5.
31 2.2 METALS
32 A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For
33 components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks,
38 D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed).
39 E. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural
40 steel, Grade 25, unless another grade is required by design loads; exposed.
41 2.3 FASTENERS
42 A. Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 12 for
43 exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class
44 required.

46 A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting,"
47 B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
48 C. Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, 6 by 6 inches, W1.4 by W1.4, unless otherwise
49 indicated.
50 2.5 PRECAST CONCRETE TREADS

51 A. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete"
52 for normal-weight, ready-mixed concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 5000 psi and a
53 total air content of not less than 4 percent or more than 6 percent.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 B. Reinforcement: Galvanized, welded wire reinforcement, 2 by 2 inches by 0.062-inch-diameter wire; comply

2 with ASTM A 185/A 185M and ASTM A 82/A 82M, except for minimum wire size.
3 C. Color, Pattern, and Finish: Color based on Tectura TZ-03: Foggy Day. Use inset non-slip strips per the
4 drawings.

6 A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips, brackets, bearing
7 plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure.
8 1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated.
9 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
10 B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as
11 necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated
12 installation.
13 C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
14 approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
15 D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing
16 work.
17 E. Weld connections to comply with the following:
19 of base metals.
22 4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated.
23 5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish
24 Standards" for Type 3 welds: partially dressed weld with spatter removed.
25 F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible.
26 Locate joints where least conspicuous.

28 A. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs"
29 in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," Commercial Class, unless more stringent requirements are
30 indicated.
31 B. Stair Framing:
32 1. Fabricate stringers of steel channels.
33 a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers.
34 2. Construct platforms of steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as needed to
35 comply with performance requirements.
36 3. Weld stringers to headers; weld framing members to stringers and headers.
37 4. Where stairs are enclosed by gypsum board assemblies, provide hanger rods or struts to support
38 landings from floor construction above or below. Locate hanger rods and struts where they do not
39 encroach on required stair width and are within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.
40 5. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts designed for erecting
41 steel stair components before installing masonry.
42 C. Metal Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown from steel sheet of
43 thickness needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than 0.067 inch.
44 D. Abrasive-Coating-Finished, Formed-Metal Stairs: Form risers, treads, and platforms to configurations shown
45 from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than 0.097 inch.

47 A. Steel Tube Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details,
48 finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than
49 that needed to withstand indicated loads.
50 1. Rails and Posts: 1-1/2-inch-square top and bottom rails and 1-1/2-inch-square posts.
51 B. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at connections to
52 provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
53 1. Finish welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 welds: no
54 evidence of a welded joint as shown in NAAMM AMP 521.
55 C. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive
56 configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting,
57 cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.
58 D. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
59 E. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 F. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding.

2 G. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous
3 fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work.
4 H. Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material, where needed to
5 transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish
6 thicknesses.
7 2.9 FINISHES
8 A. Finish metal stairs after assembly.
9 B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power
10 Tool Cleaning."
11 C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with galvanized finishes
12 and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1,
13 "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
15 3.1 INSTALLING METAL PAN STAIRS

16 A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set
17 units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free
18 of rack.
19 B. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete unless
21 C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left
22 as exposed joints.
23 D. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article.
24 E. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place
25 Concrete."
26 1. Install abrasive nosings with anchors fully embedded in concrete.
27 F. Install precast concrete treads with adhesive supplied by manufacturer.
28 3.2 INSTALLING RAILINGS

29 A. Adjust railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at
30 spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure
31 posts and rail ends to building construction as follows:
32 1. Anchor posts to steel by welding to steel supporting members.
33 2. Anchor handrail ends to concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail ends and
34 anchored with postinstalled anchors and bolts.
35 B. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing
36 required to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets to building construction as required to comply with
37 performance requirements.

39 A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of
40 shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-
42 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 05 51 16
2 METAL FLOOR PLATE STAIRS
4 1.1 SUMMARY
5 1.2 COORDINATION
11 2.2 METALS
12 2.3 FASTENERS
17 2.8 FINISHES
19 3.1 INSTALLATION
21 PART 1 - GENERAL
22 1.1 SUMMARY
23 A. Section includes industrial-type, straight-run stairs with steel floor plate treads and railings attached to metal
24 floor plate stairs.
25 1.2 COORDINATION
28 another.
29 B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions
30 for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors,

33 A. Product Data: For metal floor plate stairs.
36 cost.
38 D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For stairs, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
39 professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

41 A. Welding certificates.
42 B. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that

46 B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural
47 Welding Code - Steel."

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 055116 - 1 METAL FLOOR PLATE STAIRS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

4 in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design stairs.
5 B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following
7 1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft..
8 2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in.
9 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
10 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to loads
11 specified above.
12 2.2 METALS
13 A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For
14 components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks,
16 B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled
19 D. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or
20 ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
21 2.3 FASTENERS
22 A. Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 12 for
23 exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class
24 required.

26 A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09 91 23
27 "Interior Painting."
28 B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying
29 with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

33 A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and
34 other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure.
35 1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated.
36 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
37 3. Fabricate treads and platforms of exterior stairs so finished walking surfaces slope to drain.
38 B. Weld connections to comply with the following:
40 of base metals.
43 4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated.
45 Standards" for Type 4 welds: good quality, uniform undressed weld with minimal splatter.
46 C. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where
47 water may accumulate.
48

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 A. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs"
3 in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," industrial class, unless more stringent requirements are
4 indicated.
5 B. Stair Framing:
6 1. Fabricate stringers of steel channels
7 a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers.
8 2. Construct platforms of steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as needed to
9 comply with performance requirements indicated.
10 3. Weld or bolt stringers to headers; weld or bolt framing members to stringers and headers.
11 C. Metal Floor Plate Stairs: Form treads and platforms to configurations shown from rolled-steel abrasive-
12 surface floor plate of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than 3/16
13 inch.
14 1. Form treads with integral nosing and back edge stiffener and with open risers.
15 a. NOSING-1: Non-slip aluminum nosing with abrasive treads.
16 2. Weld steel supporting brackets to stringers and weld treads to brackets.
17 3. Fabricate platforms with integral nosing matching treads and weld to platform framing.

19 A. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 05 52 13 "Pipe and Tube Railings."
20 1. Rails may be bent at corners, rail returns, and wall returns, instead of using prefabricated fittings.
21 2. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated.
22 2.8 FINISHES
23 A. Finish metal stairs after assembly.
24 B. Exterior: Galvanized.
25 C. Interior: Uncoated steel.
26 D. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron
27 hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.
28 E. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power
29 Tool Cleaning."
30 F. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with galvanized finishes
31 and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1,
32 "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
34 3.1 INSTALLATION
35 A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set
36 units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free
37 of rack.
38 B. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article.

41 shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-
45 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 05 52 13
2 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
4 1.1 SUMMARY
5 1.2 COORDINATION
14 2.3 METALS, GENERAL
15 2.4 STEEL AND IRON
16 2.5 FASTENERS
18 2.7 FABRICATION
22 3.2 ANCHORING POSTS
23 3.3 ATTACHING RAILINGS
25 PART 1 - GENERAL
26 1.1 SUMMARY
28 1. Steel pipe and tube railings (RAIL-4).
29 B. Related Requirements:
30 1. Section 05 51 16 "Metal Floor Plate Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with metal plate stairs.
31 1.2 COORDINATION
33 manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with
34 one another.
35 B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for
36 installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors,
38 C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings
39 temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.

42 1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings.
43 2. Railing brackets.
44 3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
46 1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content
47 and cost.
49 D. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.
50 E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For railings, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
51 professional engineer licensed in the State of Wisconsin responsible for their preparation.

53 A. Product Test Reports: For pipe and tube railings, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency,
54 according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 055213 - 1 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

5 A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
6 protective covering before shipping.

8 A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal
9 fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
12 A. Steel Pipe and Tube Railings [RAIL-4]:
14 that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
15 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or comparable product
16 by one of the following:
17 a. Wagner, R & B, Inc.
18 b. McMaster-Carr
19 c. Steele Solutions, Inc.

22 in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design railings, including attachment to building
23 construction.
24 B. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand the effects
25 of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
27 a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction.
31 a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft..

34 A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported
35 rails unless otherwise indicated.
36 1. Provide type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt and
37 that provides 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall surface.

39 A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer
40 recycled content not less than 25 percent.
41 B. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.
42 C. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another
43 grade and weight are required by structural loads.
44 1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.
45 D. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
46 E. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise
47 indicated.
48

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2.5 FASTENERS
2 A. General: Provide the following:
3 1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941,
4 Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating.
5 2. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel.
6 B. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load
7 equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and 4 times the load imposed when
8 installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified
9 independent testing agency.
10 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or

13 A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.
14 B. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.
17 D. Field Finish Painted interior Railings:
18 1. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."
19 E. Shop Finish Painted Exterior Railings:
20 1. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal and
21 compatible with finish paint systems indicated.
22 2. Epoxy Intermediate Coat: Complying with MPI #77 and compatible with primer and topcoat.
23 3. Polyurethane Topcoat: Complying with MPI #72 and compatible with undercoat.
24 F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
25 G. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying
28 2.7 FABRICATION
29 A. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
30 approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
31 B. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
32 C. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this
33 purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
35 of base metals.
37 3. Remove flux immediately.
38 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows
39 after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
40 D. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate
41 members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.
42 E. Form changes in direction by bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.
43 F. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive
44 configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting,
45 cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.
46 G. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
47 H. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated.
48 I. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and
49 anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.
50 1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-resistant
51 fillers or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent
52 bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.
53

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 A. Galvanized Railings:
3 1. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel railings, including hardware, after fabrication.
4 2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings.
5 3. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware.
6 B. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt,
7 oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.
8 C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE
9 No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
10 D. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated. Comply
11 with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
12 Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry.
13 E. High-Performance Coating: Apply epoxy intermediate and polyurethane topcoats to prime-coated
14 surfaces. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions and with requirements in SSPC-PA 1,
15 "Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Apply at spreading rates
16 recommended by coating manufacturer.
17 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

20 A. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels
21 and free of rack.
22 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that are coated or finished after
23 fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further
24 cutting or fitting.
25 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet.
26 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of
27 steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.
28 B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other
29 materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
30 1. Coat, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint, concealed surfaces of aluminum that are in contact
31 with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals.
32 3.2 ANCHORING POSTS

33 A. Use metal sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts are inserted into
34 sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring
35 cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.
36 B. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for installing posts
37 in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete
38 with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring
39 material manufacturer's written instructions.
40 C. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions,
41 connected to posts and to metal supporting members.
42 3.3 ATTACHING RAILINGS

43 A. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Locate brackets as indicated
44 or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.
45 B. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:
46 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag
47 bolts.
48 2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
49 3. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into fire-retardant-treated wood backing
50 between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members.
51

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

3 shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with
4 SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
5 B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and repair galvanizing to
7 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 05 70 00
2 DECORATIVE METAL
5 1.2 SUMMARY
6 1.3 COORDINATION
14 2.3 FASTENERS
17 2.6 DECORATIVE MECHANICAL GRILLES (GR-1 and GR-2)
19 2.8 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES (for wall corner guards: GUARD-2)
22 3.1 EXAMINATION
23 3.2 INSTALLATION
24 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
25 PART 1 - GENERAL

29 1.2 SUMMARY
31 1. Decorative mechanical grilles and frames.
32 2. Wall corner guards.
34 1. Section 05 73 00 "Decorative Metal Railings" for decorative metal railings.
35 2. Section 05 75 00 "Decorative Formed Metal" for decorative metal items made from shop formed
36 custom sheet metal.
37 1.3 COORDINATION
38 A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for decorative metal items. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
39 directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral
40 anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for
41 installation.


45 A. Product Data: For each type of product, including finishing materials.
48 cost.
49 C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for decorative metal.
50 1. Indicate materials, finishes, fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items.
51 D. Patterns, Models, or Plaster Castings: For each custom casting required.
52 E. Samples: For each type of exposed finish.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 057000 - 1 DECORATIVE METAL
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.
3 B. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel certifying that products furnished comply with
4 requirements.

7 A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing decorative metal similar to that indicated for this
8 Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to
9 produce required units.
10 B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
11 C. Organic-Coating Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in successfully applying organic coatings, of
12 type indicated, to aluminum extrusions and employing competent control personnel to conduct continuing,
13 effective quality-control program to ensure compliance with requirements.
14 D. Anodic Finisher Qualifications: A firm experienced in successfully applying anodic finishes of type indicated
15 and employing competent control personnel to conduct continuing, effective quality-control program to
16 ensure compliance with requirements.
17 E. Powder-Coating Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in successfully applying powder coatings of
18 type indicated and employing competent control personnel to conduct continuing, effective quality-control
19 program to ensure compliance with requirements.
20 F. Mockup: Refer to Section 01 43 39 – Mockups for description of construction required to complete a
22 1. Build mockups for the following types of decorative metal:
23 a. GR-1 and GR-2.

25 A. Store decorative metal in a well-ventilated area, away from uncured concrete and masonry, and protected
26 from weather, moisture, soiling, abrasion, extreme temperatures, and humidity.
27 B. Deliver and store cast-metal products in wooden crates surrounded by enough packing material to ensure
28 that products are not cracked or otherwise damaged.

31 A. Metal Surfaces, General: Use materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. Use materials
32 without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.

34 A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled
36 2.3 FASTENERS
37 A. Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
38 B. Provide square or hex socket flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
39 C. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having
40 jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC193.
42 ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5 unless otherwise indicated.

44 A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."

46 A. Form decorative metal to required shapes and sizes, true to line and level with true curves and accurate
47 angles and surfaces. Finish exposed surfaces to smooth, sharp, well-defined lines and arris.
48 B. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to
49 weather in a manner to exclude water.
50

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2.6 DECORATIVE MECHANICAL GRILLES (GR-1 and GR-2)

2 A. Refer to Material Tag Index for product.
3 B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may
4 be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
5 1. Architectural Grille.
6 2. Beaux-Artes.
7 3. Harrington & King Perforating Company, Inc.
8 4. Precision Metal Fabricators, Inc.
9 5. Reggio Register Company, Inc.
10 6. Register & Grille Mfg. Co., Inc.
11 C. Fabricate decorative grilles from perforated steel sheet or plate of thickness, size, and pattern indicated.
12 Form perforations by punching, cutting, or drilling to produce openings of sizes and shapes indicated. Roll,
13 press, and grind perforated metal to flatten and to remove burrs and deformations.
14 1. Drawings indicate perforated metal patterns required and are based on products of one
15 manufacturer. Perforated metal patterns produced by other manufacturers may be considered,
16 provided deviations are minor and do not change design concept as judged solely by Architect.

18 A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations
19 for applying and designating finishes.
20 2.8 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES (for wall corner guards: GUARD-2)

21 A. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.

23 A. Preparing Nongalvanized Items for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
24 SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
25 B. Powder-Coat Finish: Prepare, treat, and coat nongalvanized ferrous metal to comply with resin
26 manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
27 1. Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial
28 Blast Cleaning."
29 2. Treat prepared metal with iron-phosphate pretreatment, rinse, and seal surfaces.
30 3. Apply thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder coating with cured-film thickness not less
31 than 1.5 mils.
32 4. Color: Match Architect's sample
34 3.1 EXAMINATION
35 A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
36 tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of decorative metal.
37 B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
38 3.2 INSTALLATION
39 A. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where needed to secure decorative metal to in-place construction.
40 B. Set products accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels.
41 C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints or, where indicated, uniform reveals
42 and spaces for sealants and joint fillers.
43 D. Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return items with such finishes
44 to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete refinishing, or provide new units as required.
45 E. Restore protective coverings that have been damaged during shipment or installation. Remove protective
46 coverings only when there is no possibility of damage from other work.

48 A. Unless otherwise indicated, clean metals by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap, rinsing with
49 clean water, and drying with soft cloths.
50 B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of
51 shop paint and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-
53 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 C. Protect finishes of decorative metal from damage during construction period with temporary protective
2 coverings approved by decorative metal fabricator. Remove protective covering at time of Substantial
3 Completion.
4 D. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction
5 work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish
6 entire unit, or provide new units.
7 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 05 73 00
2 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
5 1.2 SUMMARY
6 1.3 DEFINITIONS
7 1.4 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
17 2.4 FASTENERS
19 2.6 FABRICATION
22 3.1 INSTALLATION
23 3.2 CLEANING
24 3.3 PROTECTION
25 PART 1 - GENERAL

29 1.2 SUMMARY
31 1. Steel guardrails and handrails at exterior stairs and exterior light wells (RAIL-1).
32 2. Steel handrails at existing interior stairs (RAIL-2).
33 3. Steel handrails at new interior stairs (RAIL-3).
34 1.3 DEFINITIONS
35 A. Railings: Guards, handrails, and similar devices used for protection of occupants at open-sided floor areas
36 and for pedestrian guidance and support, visual separation, or wall protection.
37 1.4 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING

39 manufacturers' written instructions to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible.
40 B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for
41 installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that
42 are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver items to Project site in time for installation.
43 C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings
44 temporarily by any means that do not meet structural performance requirements.

47

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 057300 - 1 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

3 1. Material alloy, tempering and finish for components.
4 2. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
7 cost.
8 C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
9 D. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.
10 E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and
11 design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer licensed in
12 the State of Wisconsin responsible for their preparation.

14 A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
15 B. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of steel products certifying that products furnished comply with
16 requirements.
18 D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency,
19 according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
20 E. Preconstruction test reports.
21 F. Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.

23 A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
25 B. Mockup: Refer to Section 01 43 39 – Mockups for description of construction required to complete a
27 1. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate
28 aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
29 a. New exterior railing RAIL-1 installation detail at corner of existing light well / areaway, min. 4ft
30 long from each corner. Location: New expanded areaway at north-west corner of building.
31 b. New interior stair railing RAIL-3 at new stair: 4ft long railing at floor opening plus 4ft long railing
32 including handrail at stair flight including anchoring detail to floor opening and stair stringer.

34 A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with railings by field
35 measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

39 in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design railings, including attachment to building construction.
40 B. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working
41 stresses of railing materials based on the following:
42 1. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength.
43 C. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand the effects
44 of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
46 a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction.
50 a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.

53 A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.
54 B. Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M (cold formed).

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 C. Bars: Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M, Grade 1010.
2 D. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
3 E. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise
4 indicated.
5 F. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled
7 2.3 STEEL GUARD RAILS AND HANDRAILS

8 A. Steel guardrails and handrails at exterior stairs and exterior light wells (RAIL-1).
9 1. Refer to Drawings for profile, materials and finish.
10 B. Steel handrails at existing interior stairs (RAIL-2).
12 C. Steel handrails at new interior stairs (RAIL-3).
14 D. Handrail Bracket and sub rail to support coped wood handrail:
15 2.4 FASTENERS
16 A. Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
17 1. Uncoated Steel Components: Plated-steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25
18 for electrodeposited zinc coating where concealed; Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners where
19 exposed.
20 2. Galvanized-Steel Components: Plated-steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25
21 for electrodeposited zinc coating.
22 3. Dissimilar Metals: Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners.
23 B. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load,
24 according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC193.
27 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 2 stainless-steel
28 bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.

30 A. Interior Materials:
31 1. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting.
32 B. Exterior materials:
33 1. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.
34 2. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and
35 compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
36 3. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
37 4. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with intermediate and topcoat.
38 5. Epoxy Intermediate Coat: Complying with MPI#77 and compatible with primer and topcoat.
39 6. Polyurethane Topcoat: Complying with MPI#72 and compatible with undercoat.
40 C. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying
43 2.6 FABRICATION
44 A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and
45 spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads.
46 B. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated.
47 C. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit. Weld all around at connections,
48 including at fittings.
50 Standards" for Type 1 welds; no evidence of a welded joint.
51 D. Form changes in direction by bending
52 E. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain cross section
53 of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed
54 surfaces of components.
55 F. Close exposed ends of hollow handrail members with prefabricated end fittings.
56 G. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 H. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors
2 to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.

4 A. Preparing Nongalvanized Items for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
5 SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning.
6 1. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated.
7 Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and
8 Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
9 B. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication.
10 1. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings.
11 2. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware.
12 3. Do not quench or apply post-galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.
13 4. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of
14 grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.
15 5. High-Performance Coating: Apply epoxy intermediate and polyurethane topcoats to prime-coated
16 surfaces. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions and with requirements in SSPC-
17 PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for
18 shop painting. Apply at spreading rates recommended by coating manufacturer.
19 a. Color: Refer to Material Tag Index and Drawings.
21 3.1 INSTALLATION
22 A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.
23 B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location,
24 alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.
25 1. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet.
26 2. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of
27 steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.
28 C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other
29 materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
30 1. Coat concealed surfaces that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar
31 metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
32 D. Post anchorage: Refer to Drawings for type indicated.
33 1. Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been
34 inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.
35 2. Anchor posts to existing surfaces with baseplates as required by conditions, connected to posts and
36 to supporting surfaces. Fasten to support surfaces with stainless steel bolts and post installed
37 sleeves.
38 E. Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry with sleeves concealed within railing ends and anchored to
39 wall construction with anchors and bolts.
40 F. Attach handrails to walls with wall brackets except where end flanges are used.
41 1. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt.
42 2. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.
43 3.2 CLEANING
45 shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-
50

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3.3 PROTECTION
2 A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings
3 approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.
4 B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction
6 entire unit, or provide new units.
7 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 05 75 00
2 DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
5 1.2 SUMMARY
6 1.3 COORDINATION
14 2.1 SHEET METAL
16 2.3 PAINTS AND COATINGS
18 2.5 CLOSURES AND TRIM (MTL-1)
19 2.6 POCKETS FOR WINDOW TREATMENT (MTL-2)
20 2.7 WINDOW STOOLS (MTL-3)
21 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES
23 3.1 EXAMINATION
24 3.2 INSTALLATION
26 3.4 PROTECTION
27 PART 1 - GENERAL

31 1.2 SUMMARY
33 1. Closures and trim.
34 2. Filler panels between dissimilar construction.
35 3. Pockets for window treatment.
36 4. Window stools.
38 1. Section 05 70 00 "Decorative Metal" for decorative items made primarily from plate, bars, extrusions,
39 tubes, castings, and other forms of metal, but which may include sheet metal components.
40 1.3 COORDINATION
41 A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for decorative formed metal items. Furnish setting drawings,
42 templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
43 items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver items to Project site in
44 time for installation.
45 B. Coordinate installation of decorative formed metal with adjacent construction to ensure that wall assemblies,
46 flashings, trim, and joint sealants, are protected against damage from the effects of weather, age, corrosion,
47 and other causes of deterioration.


51 A. Product Data: For each type of product, including finishing materials.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 057500 - 1 DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
2 cost.
3 C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for decorative formed metal.
4 1. Include plans, elevations, component details, and attachment details.
5 2. Indicate materials and profiles of each decorative formed metal member, fittings, joinery, finishes,
6 fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items.
7 D. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on 6-inch-square Samples of metal of same
8 thickness and material indicated for the Work.

10 A. Coordination Drawings: For decorative formed metal elements that house items specified in other Sections.
11 Show dimensions of housed items, including locations of housing penetrations and attachments, and
12 necessary clearances.
13 B. Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.

15 A. Maintenance Data: For finish to include in maintenance manuals.

17 A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing decorative formed metal similar to that indicated
18 for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance as well as sufficient production
19 capacity to produce required units.
20 B. Organic-Coating Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in successfully applying organic coatings of
21 type indicated to metals of types indicated and that employs competent control personnel to conduct
22 continuing, effective quality-control program to ensure compliance with requirements.
23 C. Powder-Coating Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in successfully applying powder coatings of
24 type indicated to metals of types indicated and that employs competent control personnel to conduct
25 continuing, effective quality-control program to ensure compliance with requirements.
26 D. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
27 E. Mockup: Refer to Section 01 43 39 – Mockups for description of construction required to complete a mockup
29 1. Room 260: Typical historic vent grille within wood panel zone, re-finishing and acoustic fabric behind.
30 2. Room 260: Typical radiator grille refinishing – both the main upper portion and the wall base portion.
31 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed
32 Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

34 A. Deliver decorative formed metal products wrapped in protective coverings and strapped together in suitable
35 packs or in heavy-duty cartons. Remove protective coverings before they stain or bond to finished surfaces.
36 B. Store products on elevated platforms in a dry location.

38 A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, beams, and other construction contiguous
39 with decorative formed metal by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
40 Drawings.
42 2.1 SHEET METAL

43 A. General: Fabricate products from sheet metal without pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
44 discolorations, or other imperfections where exposed to view on finished units.
47 C. Aluminum Sheet: Flat sheet complying with ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum
48 producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with strength and durability properties of not
49 less than Alloy 5005-H32.

51 A. Gaskets: As required to seal joints in decorative formed metal and remain weathertight; light tight as
52 recommended in writing by decorative formed metal manufacturer.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 1. ASTM D 1056, Type 1, Class A, grade as recommended by gasket manufacturer to obtain seal for
2 application indicated.
3 2. Closed-cell polyurethane foam, adhesive on two sides, release paper protected.
4 B. Sealants, Interior: Nonsag, paintable sealant complying with Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" and as
5 recommended in writing by decorative formed metal manufacturer.
6 C. Filler Metal and Electrodes: Provide type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes as necessary for strength,
7 corrosion resistance, and compatibility in fabricated items.
8 1. Use filler metals that will match the color of metal being joined.
9 D. Fasteners: Fabricated from same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal unless otherwise indicated.
10 1. Provide square or hex socket flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise
11 indicated.
12 E. Anchors: Provide fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
13 based on ICC-ES AC193.
14 F. Anchor Materials:
17 G. Sound-Deadening Materials:
18 1. Insulation: Unfaced, mineral-fiber blanket insulation complying with ASTM C 665, Type I, and
19 passing ASTM E 136 test.
20 2. Mastic: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
21 H. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive recommended by metal fabricator that will fully bond metal to metal and is
22 noncombustible after curing.
23 2.3 PAINTS AND COATINGS

24 A. Shop Primers: Comply with Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."

26 A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble decorative formed metal items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize
27 field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.
28 Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
29 B. Fold back exposed edges of unsupported sheet metal to form a 1/2-inch-wide hem on the concealed side,
30 or ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch and support with concealed stiffeners.
31 C. Increase metal thickness or reinforce with concealed stiffeners, backing materials, or both, as needed to
32 provide surface flatness and sufficient strength for indicated use.
33 1. Support joints with concealed stiffeners as needed to hold exposed faces of adjoining sheets in flush
34 alignment.
35 D. Where welding or brazing is indicated, weld or braze joints and seams continuously. Grind, fill, and dress to
36 produce smooth, flush, exposed surfaces in which joints are not visible after finishing is completed.
37 2.5 CLOSURES AND TRIM (MTL-1)

38 A. Form closures and trim from metal of type and thickness indicated below. Fabricate to fit tightly to adjoining
39 construction.
40 1. Aluminum Sheet: 0.063 inch.
41 a. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.
42 2.6 POCKETS FOR WINDOW TREATMENT (MTL-2)

43 A. Form pockets from metal of type and thickness indicated below, with end closures. Coordinate dimensions
44 and attachment methods with window treatment equipment, window frames, ceiling suspension system, and
45 other related construction to produce a coordinated, closely fitting assembly.
48 2.7 WINDOW STOOLS (MTL-3)

49 A. Form window stools from metal of type and thickness indicated below, with end closures:

53 A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils.
54 Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and
55 baking finish.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect.
3 3.1 EXAMINATION
4 A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
5 installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of decorative formed metal.
7 3.2 INSTALLATION
8 A. Locate and place decorative formed metal items level and plumb and in alignment with adjacent
9 construction. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install decorative formed metal.
10 B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where needed
11 to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.
12 C. Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide reveals and openings for
13 sealants and joint fillers as indicated.
14 D. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction
16 entire unit or provide new units.

18 A. Unless otherwise indicated, clean metals by washing thoroughly with water and soap, rinsing with clean
19 water, and drying with soft cloths.
20 B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of
21 shop paint and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-
24 C. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction
26 entire unit or provide new units.
27 3.4 PROTECTION
28 A. Protect finishes of decorative formed metal items from damage during construction period. Remove
29 temporary protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.
30 END OF SECTION

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2016
1 SECTION 06 03 12
2 HISTORIC WOOD REPAIR AND NEW WOOD HANDRAILS
5 1.2 SUMMARY
7 1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
14 2.1 HISTORIC WOOD REPAIR, GENERAL
15 2.2 REPLICATED WOOD ITEMS
16 2.3 WOOD-REPLACEMENT MATERIALS
17 2.4 WOOD-REPAIR MATERIAL FOR PAINTED WOOD
18 2.5 HARDWARE
20 2.7 WOOD FINISHES
22 3.1 PREPARATION
24 3.3 WOOD PATCH-TYPE REPAIR FOR PAINTED SURFACES
25 3.4 WOOD-REPLACEMENT/REPAIR FOR STAINED & VARNISH SURFACES
26 3.5 ADJUSTMENT
28
29
30 PART 1 -GENERAL
31
32
33 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
34
35 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
36 Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
37
38 1.2 SUMMARY
39
40 A. Section includes historic treatment of wood in the form of repairing wood features as follows:
41
42 1. Repairing existing and adding new interior wood wainscot, paneling, judges bench, base/shoe, handrails and trim.
43 2. Replacing interior wood wainscot, paneling, base/shoe, railings and trim.
44 3. Repairing, refinishing, and replacing hardware.
45 4. Repairing and replacing wood base & shoe.
46
48
49 1. Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry.
50 2. Section 08 21 10 - Wood Doors Rehabilitation
51 3. Section 09 64 29 - Wood Floors
52 7. Section 09 90 00- Painting and Coating
53 8. Section 09 93 00- Stains and Varnishes
54
55
57
58 A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference Project site minimum of one week in advance of starting work of this
59 Section.
60
61 1. Review methods and procedures related to historic wood repair, including, but not
62 limited to, the following:
63
CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 060312 - 1 HISTORIC WOOD REPAIR AND NEW WOOD HANDRAILS
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2016
1 a. Historic treatment specialist's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to
2 make progress and avoid delays.
3 b. Materials, material application, sequencing, tolerances, and required clearances.
4 c. Fire-protection plan.
5 d. Wood historic treatment program.
6
7
8 1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
9
10 A. Perform historic wood repair in the following sequence, which includes work specified in this and other
11 Sections:
12
13 1. Before removing wood components for on-site or off-site repair, tag each component with location-
14 identification numbers. Indicate on tags and building plans the locations of each component, such as
15 "Baseboard on North Side of Room 207."
16 2. Dismantle hardware, tag and bag with location-identification numbers.
17 3. In the shop, label each repaired component and whole or partial replacement with permanent location-
18 identification number in inconspicuous location and remove site- applied tags.
19 4. Sort units by condition, separating those that need extensive repair.
20 5. Clean surfaces.
21 6. General Wood-Repair Sequence:
22 a. Remove paint or stain to bare wood.
23 b. Repair wood by consolidation, replacement, partial replacement, infill and patching.
24 c. Sand, prime, fill, sand again, and prepare surfaces for refinishing.
25 7. Refinish, and replace hardware if required. Reinstall operating hardware.
26 8. Reinstall components.
27 9. Apply finish coats.
28 10. Install remaining hardware.
29
30
32
34
35 1. Include recommendations for product application and use. Include test data substantiating
36 that products comply with requirements.
37
38 B. Shop Drawings:
39
40 1. Include plans, elevations, and sections showing locations and extent of repair and replacement
41 work, with enlarged details of replacement parts indicating materials, profiles, joinery, reinforcing,
42 method of splicing or attaching wood members to other surfaces, accessory items, and finishes.
43 2. Include field-verified dimensions and the following:
44
45 a. Full-size shapes and profiles with complete dimensions for replacement components and
46 their jointing, showing relationship of existing components to new components.
47 b. Templates and directions for installing hardware and anchorages.
48 c. Identification of each new unit and its corresponding location in the building on
49 annotated plans and elevations.
50
51 C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed wood and finish.
52
53 1. Identify wood species, cut, and other features.
54 2. Include Samples of hardware and accessories involving color selection.
55
56
58
59 A. Qualification Data: For historic treatment specialist including workers and wood-repair-
60 material manufacturer.
61
62 B. Wood Historic Treatment Program: Submit before work begins.
63

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2016
2
3 A. Historic Treatment Specialist Qualifications: Engage an experienced and qualified historic wood-repair
4 specialist to perform work of this Section. Firm shall have completed work similar in materials, design, and
5 extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance. Firm must have
6 successfully completed five similar projects in the last five years. Experience only in fabricating and installing
7 new woodwork is insufficient experience for wood historic treatment work.
8
9 B. Worker Qualifications. Persons who are experienced and specialize in rehabilitation work of types they will be
10 performing. Workers shall have minimum of three years of documented experience. Key staff shall be of
11 sufficient number to accomplish the required work with the required project schedule.
12 C. Submit documentation of firm experience, qualifications and worker resumes. Submittals shall be in an indexed three
13 ring binder and shall include:
14 1. Name of firm and location of office.
15 2. Description and location of a minimum of fire required projects.
16 3. References for five required projects including contact information.
17 4. Name of individuals that worked on the five required projects that will work on this project.
18 5. Brief resumes of individual Rehabilitation workers, including supervisors, proposed for this project.
19
20
21 B. Wood-Repair-Material Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm regularly engaged in producing wood consolidant
22 and wood-patching compound that have been used for similar historic wood- treatment applications with
23 successful results, and with factory-authorized service representatives who are available for consultation,
24 Project-site inspection, and on-site assistance.
25
26 C Wood Historic Treatment Program: Submit a written Historic Treatment Plan. Submittals shall be in an
27 indexed three ring binder and shall include: detailed description of materials, methods, equipment, and
28 sequence of operations to be used for historic treatment work, including protection of surrounding
29 materials and Project site.
30
31 1. If materials and methods other than those indicated are proposed for any phase of historic treatment
32 work, add a written description of such materials and methods, including evidence of successful
33 use on comparable projects, and demonstrations to show their effectiveness for this Project
34
35 D. Mockups: R e f e r t o S e c t i o n 0 1 4 3 3 9 . Prepare mockups of historic treatment repair processes
36 to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution, and for fabrication
37 and installation. Prepare mockups so they are as inconspicuous as practicable. Mock-ups shall be full panels
38 or sections.
39
40 1. Locate mockups on existing surfaces where directed by Architect in locations that enable viewing under
41 same conditions as the completed Work.
42 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
43 Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.
44 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
45 completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
46
47
49
50 A. Pack, deliver, and store products in suitable packs, heavy-duty cartons, or wooden crates; surround with
51 sufficient packing material to ensure that products will not be deformed, broken, or otherwise damaged.
52
53 B. Until installed, store products inside a well-ventilated area and protect from weather, moisture, soiling,
54 abrasion, ex1reme temperatures, and humidity, and where environmental conditions comply with
55 manufacturer's requirements.
56
57
58
60
61 A. Temperature and humidity limitations: Proceed with historic wood repair only when conditions are within
62 the environmental limits set by each manufacturer's written instructions and specified requirements.
63
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2016
1
2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
3
4
6
7 A. Quality Standard: Comply with applicable requirements in AWI/A'MMC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork
8 Standards" for construction, finishes, grade rules, and other requirements unless otherwise indicated.
9
10
11 2.2 REPLICATED WOOD ITEMS
12
13 A. Replicated Wood Paneling m o l d i n g s and Trim: Custom-fabricated replacement wood units and
14 components.
15
16 1. Joint Construction: Joints· matching existing joints.
17 2. Wood Species: Match species of existing wood.
18 3. Wood Cut: Match cut of existing wood.
19 4. Veneer: Match gain pattern, color, width and thickness of existing veneer flitch.
20 5. Wood Member and Trim Profiles: Match profiles and detail of existing.
21 6. Hardware: Reuse existing unless otherwise indicated.
22
23 2.3 WOOD-REPLACEMENT MATERIALS
24
25 A. Painted Wood, General: Clear fine-grained lumber; kiln dried to a moisture content of 6 to 12 percent at time
26 of fabrication; free of visible finger joints, blue stain, knots, pitch pockets, and surface checks larger than
27 1/32 inch deep by 2 inches wide.
28
29 1. Species:
30 a. Match species of each existing type of wood component or assembly unless
32 b. WD-3: Solid White Oak hand rails to new and existing interior stairs. See drawings for profile. Finish per
33 spec 099300.
34
35 B. Stained/Varnished wood: Clear, kiln dried to a moisture content of 6 to 12 percent at time of fabrication; free
36 of visible imperfections. Profile, gain pattern, figuring and color to match existing wood.
37
38 B. Wainscot: Match existing species.
39
40 C. Moldings: Match existing species and profile.
41
42 D. Paneling: Match existing species.
43 E. Interior Trim: Match existing species.
44 F. Base/shoe: Match existing species.
45
46 2.4 WOOD-REPAIR MATERIAL FOR PAINTED WOOD
47
48 A. Source Limitations: Obtain wood consolidant and wood-patching compound from single source from single
49 manufacturer.
50
51 B. Wood Consolidant: Ready-to-use product designed to penetrate, consolidate, and strengthen soft fibers of
52 wood materials that have deteriorated due to decay and designed specifically to enhance the bond of wood-
53 patching compound to existing wood.
54
55 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
56 following:
57
58 a. Abatron, Inc.; LiquidWood or approved equal.
59
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2016
1 C. Wood-Patching Compound: Two-part, epoxy-resin, wood-patching compound; knife-grade formulation as
2 recommended in writing by manufacturer for type of wood repair indicated, tooling time required for the
3 detail of work, and site conditions. Compound shall be designed for filling voids in damaged wood materials
4 that have deteriorated due to weathering and decay. Compound shall be capable of filling deep holes and
5 spreading to featheredge.
6
7 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
8
9 a. Abatron, Inc.; WoodEpox or approved equal.
10
11
12 2.5 HARDWARE
13
14 A. Hardware, General: Provide hardware required for each type of replicated or repaired wood, including but
15 not limited to, hinges, pulls, latches, fasteners, and accessories indicated or required for proper operation.
16 Hardware shall smoothly operate, tightly close, and secure units appropriately for frequency of use, unit
17 weight, and dimensions.
18
19 B. Replacement Hardware: Replace existing damaged or missing hardware with new hardware to match original.
20
21 C. Material and Design:
22
23 1. Material: match existing.
24 2. Design: Match type, finish and appearance of existing hardware.
25 3. Replacement Hardware: Regardless of mechanisms within, match existing, exposed
26 Hardware.
27
28 D. Hardware Finishes: Comply with BHMAA156.18 for base material and finish
29 requirements indicated by the following:
30 1. Match existing hardware finishes.
31
32
34
35 A. Cleaning Materials:
36
37 1. Detergent Solution: Solution prepared by mixing 2 cups of tetrasodium pyrophosphate (TSPP), 1/2
38 cup of laundry detergent that contains no ammonia, 5 quarts of 5 percent sodium hypochlorite bleach,
39 and 15 quarts of warm water for each 5 gal. of solution required.
40 2. Mildewcide: Commercial, proprietary mildewcide or a solution prepared by mixing 1/3 cup of household
41 detergent that contains no ammonia, 1 quart of 5 percent sodium
42 hypochlorite bleach, and 3 quarts of warm water.
43
44 B. Stripper:
45
46 1. Nonvolatile, biodegradable, water based, low odor type product.
47 2. 3M Safest Stripper
48 3. Rinse as recommended by stripper manufacturer
49
50 C. Adhesives: Wood adhesives with minimum 15·to 45-minute cure at 70 deg F, in gunnable and liquid
51 formulations as recommended in writing by adhesive manufacturer for each type of repair and exposure
52 condition.
53
54 D. Bleach: Oxalic acid solution or similar solution.
55
56 E. Filler/sealer: Compatible with wood and finish coatings.
57
58 F. Fasteners: Use fastener metals that are noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined.
59
60 1. Match existing fasteners in material and type of fastener unless otherwise indicated.
61 2. Use concealed fasteners for interconnecting wood components.
62 3. Use concealed fasteners for attaching items to other work unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or
63 the existing fastening method.
64 4. For exposed fasteners, use Flat-tip-type machine screws of head profile flush with metal surface unless
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2016
2 5. Finish exposed fasteners to match finish of metal fastened unless otherwise indicated.
3
4 G. Leather: New Leather: 4-5 oz, Aniline dyed, full grain leather. Single piece for entire top surface, no splices
5 or joints. Masters of Barge adhesive as recommended for this use.
6
7 2.7 WOOD FINISHES
8
9 A. Unfinished Replacement Units: Provide exposed interior wood surfaces of replacement units unfinished;
10 smooth, filled, and suitably prepared for on-site priming and finishing.
11
12
14
15
16 3.1 PREPARATION
17
18 A. Protect adjacent materials from damage by historic wood repair.
19
20 B. Clean wood of mildew, loose paint, grease, dirt, and other debris by scrubbing with bristle brush or sponge and
21 detergent solution. Scrub mildewed areas with mildewcide. After cleaning, rinse thoroughly with fresh water.
22 Allow to dry before repairing or painting.
23
24 C. Condition replacement wood members and replacement units to prevailing conditions at installation
25 areas before installing.
26
27
29
30 A. Historic Treatment Appearance Standard: Completed work is to have a uniform appearance as
31 viewed by Architect from 5 feet away for interior work and shall blend in with adjacent wood components
32 for a uniform overall appearance.
33
34 B. General: In treating historic items, disturb them as minimally as possible and as follows:
35 1. Stabilize and repair wood to reestablish structural integrity and durability while maintaining the existing
36 form of each item.
37 2. Remove coatings.
38 3. Repair items in place where possible.
39 4. Install temporary protective measures to protect wood-treatment work that is indicated to
40 be completed later and all adjacent surfaces.
41 5. Refinish historic wood according to Section 09 930 - Stains and Varnishes unless otherwise
42 indicated.
43
44 C. Mechanical Abrasion: Where mechanical abrasion is needed for the work, use only the gentlest mechanical
45 methods, such as scraping and natural-fiber bristle brushing, that will not abrade wood substrate, reducing
46 clarity of detail. Do not use abrasive methods, such as sanding, wire brushing, or power tools, except as
47 indicated as part of the historic treatment program and as approved by Architect.
48
49 D. Repair and Refinish Existing Hardware: Dismantle hardware; strip finish, repair, and refinish it to match finish
50 samples; and lubricate moving parts just enough to function smoothly.
51
52 E. Repair Wood: Match existing materials and features, retaining as much original material as possible to
53 perform repairs.
54
55 1. Unless otherwise indicated, repair wood by consolidating, patching, splicing, Dutchman, or otherwise
56 reinforcing wood with new wood matching existing wood or with salvaged, sound, original wood.
57 2. Where indicated, repair wood by limited replacement matching existing material.
58
59 F. Replace Wood: Where indicated, duplicate and replace units with units made from salvaged, sound,
60 original wood or with new wood matching existing wood. Use surviving prototypes to create patterns for
61 duplicate replacements.
62
63 1. Do not use substitute materials unless otherwise indicated.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2016
1
2 G. Identify removed items with numbering system corresponding to item locations, to ensure reinstallation in
3 same location. Key items to Drawings showing location of each removed unit. Permanently label units in a
4 location that will be concealed after reinstallation.
5
6
7
8 3.3 WOOD PATCH-TYPE REPAIR FOR PAINTED SURFACES
9
10 A. General: Patch wood that exhibits depressions, g o u g e s , holes, or similar voids, and that has limited
11 amounts of deteriorated wood.
12
13 1. Verify that surfaces are sufficiently clean and free of finish residue prior to patching.
14 2. Treat wood with wood consolidant prior to application of patching compound. Coat wood surfaces by
15 brushing, applying multiple coats until wood is saturated and refuses to absorb more. Allow treatment
16 to harden before filling void with patching compound.
17
18
19 b. Apply wood-patching compound to fill depressions, nicks, cracks, and other voids created by removed or
20 missing wood.
21 1. Prime patch area with application of wood consolidant or manufacturer's recommended primer.
22 2. Mix only as much patching compound as can be applied according to manufacturer's
23 written instructions.
24 3. Apply patching compound in layers as recommended in writing by manufacturer until the
25 void is completely filled.
26 4. Sand patch surface smooth and flush with adjacent wood, without voids in patch material,
27 and matching contour of wood member.
28 5. Clean spilled compound from adjacent materials immediately.
29
30
31 3.4 WOOD-REPLACEMENT/REPAIR FOR STAINED & VARNISH SURFACES
32
33 A. General: Repair and patch. Replace only if damage is too extensive to repair.
34
35 1. Remove surface-attached items from wood surface before performing wood-replacement /repairs unless
37 2. Verify that surfaces are sufficiently clean and free of finish residue prior to repair.
38 3. Remove damaged, broken, rotted, and decayed wood down to sound wood.
39 4. Custom fabricate new wood to replace missing wood; utilize splices, Dutchman, infill repairs or if severe
40 damage replace entire wood member.
41 5. Secure new wood using b i s c u i t s , multiple dowels, or splines with adhesive and nailing to ensure
42 maximum structural integrity at each repair. Use only concealed fasteners. Fill nail holes and patch
43 surface to match surrounding sound wood.
44
45
46 B. Repair remaining depressions, holes, or similar voids.
47 D. Clean spilled materials from adjacent surfaces immediately.
48 C. Reinstall items removed for repair into original locations.
49
50
51 3.5 ADJUSTMENT
52
53 A. Adjust existing and replacement operating items, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points
54 and for smooth operation and tight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts.
55
56
58
59 A. Protect wood surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations.
60 Monitor wood surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete and masonry during construction for presence
61 of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances contact wood
62 surfaces, remove contaminants immediately.
63

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2016
1 B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after historic wood repair. Avoid damage to coatings and
2 finishes. Remove excess sealants, patching materials, dirt, and other substances.
3
4 C. Protect all finished surfaces until substantial completion.
5
6 END OF SECTION 06 03 12

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 06 10 00
2 ROUGH CARPENTRY
5 1.2 SUMMARY
6 1.3 DEFINITIONS
12 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
13 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER
14 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
15 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
16 2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
17 2.6 FASTENERS
21 3.2 PROTECTION
22 PART 1 - GENERAL

26 1.2 SUMMARY
28 1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. Indicated as CURB-2.
29 2. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.
30 3. Wood furring and grounds.
31 4. Wood sleepers.
32 5. Plywood backing panels.
33 1.3 DEFINITIONS
34 A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) size in least dimension.
35 B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) size or greater but less than 5 inches
36 nominal (114 mm actual) size in least dimension.
37 C. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.
38 D. OSB: Oriented strand board.

40 A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.
41 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
42 certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of
43 preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
44 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by
45 treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated
46 materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency.
47 3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after
48 exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency
49 according to ASTM D 5664.
50 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated
51 materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
52

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 061000 - 1 ROUGH CARPENTRY
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

5 2. Chain-of-Custody Certificates: For certified wood products. Include statement of costs.
6 3. Chain-of-Custody Qualification Data: For manufacturer and vendor.
7 4. Product Data: For composite wood products, indicating that product contains no urea
8 formaldehyde.
9 5. Laboratory Test Reports: For composite wood products, indicating compliance with requirements
10 for low-emitting materials.
11 6. Product Data: For installation adhesives, indicating VOC content.
12 7. Laboratory Test Reports: For installation adhesives, indicating compliance with requirements for
13 low-emitting materials.

15 A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses.
16 Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of
17 Review.
18 B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:
19 1. Wood-preservative-treated wood.
20 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood.
21 3. Engineered wood products.
22 4. Power-driven fasteners.
23 5. Post-installed anchors.

25 A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-
26 accredited certification body.
27 B. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification
28 body.
29 C. Mockup: Refer to Section 01 43 39 – Mockups for description of construction required to complete a

32 A. Stack wood products flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect
33 wood products from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air
34 circulation around stacks and under coverings.
36 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

37 A. Regional Materials: The following wood products shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project site
38 from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500
39 miles of Project site.
40 1. Dimension lumber.
41 2. Laminated-veneer lumber.
42 B. Certified Wood: The following wood products shall be certified as "FSC Pure" according to FSC STD-01-
43 00 and FSC STD-40-004.
44 1. Dimension lumber, except treated materials.
45 2. Laminated-veneer lumber.
46

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 C. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated,
2 comply with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Grade
3 lumber by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules
4 indicated.
5 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
6 2. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
7 D. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal thickness or less; 19 percent for
8 more than 2-inch nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.
9 E. Engineered Wood Products: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code
10 research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project.
11 1. Allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, shall meet or exceed those indicated.
12 Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering
13 analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing
14 agency.
15 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER

16 A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in
17 contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with ground, and
18 Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground.
19 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or
20 chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates.
21 B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is
22 warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
23 C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.
24 D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
25 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in
26 connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
27 a. Lumber treated with wood preservatives such as Pentachlorophenol, Copper Naphthenate
28 or Copper 8-quinolinolate that adversely affect the membrane when in direct contact not
29 acceptable.
30 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with
31 masonry or concrete.
32 3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or
33 concrete walls.

35 A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply with requirements in
36 this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics
37 specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing
38 agency.
39 B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of
40 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive
41 combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending
42 more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.
43 1. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested
44 according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated.
45 C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry plywood after
46 treatment to maximum moisture content of 15 percent.
47 D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency.
48 E. Application: Treat all rough carpentry unless otherwise indicated.
49 1. Framing for raised platforms.
50 2. Concealed blocking.
51 3. Plywood backing panels.
52 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

53 A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other
54 construction, including the following:
55 1. Blocking.
56 2. Nailers.
57 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
58 4. Cants.
59 5. Furring.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 6. Grounds.
2 B. Dimension Lumber Items: Wood roof curbs and nailers shall be kiln-dried (Southern Pine, Douglas Fir)
3 structural grade #2 or better.
4 C. Concealed Boards: 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of ]the following species and grades:
5 1. Mixed southern pine or southern pine; No. 2 grade; SPIB.
6 2. Northern species; No. 2 Common grade; NLGA.
7 2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

8 A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not
9 indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.
10 2.6 FASTENERS
11 A. General: Fasteners shall be of size and type indicated and shall comply with requirements specified in this
12 article for material and manufacture.
13 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or
14 in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with
15 ASTM A 153/A 153M.
16 B. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having
17 jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.
18 C. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having
19 jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01, ICC-ES AC58, ICC-ES AC193 or ICC-ES AC308 as appropriate for
20 the substrate.

22 A. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber or
23 rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded
24 polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.
25 B. Adhesives for Gluing Furring and Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with
26 ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.
27 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 < g/L or less.

30 A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough
31 carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate nailers, blocking,and similar supports to comply with
32 requirements for attaching other construction.
33 B. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.
34 C. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible
35 flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
36 D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with
37 the following:
38 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code (IBC).
39 2. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.
40 3.2 PROTECTION
41 A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection,
42 inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution
43 by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
44 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 06 15 16
2 WOOD ROOF DECKING
5 1.2 SUMMARY
11 2.1 WOOD ROOF DECKING, SALVAGED
12 2.2 WOOD ROOF DECKING, GENERAL
13 2.3 GLUED-LAMINATED WOOD ROOF DECKING
16 3.1 INSTALLATION
17 3.2 ADJUSTING
18 3.3 PROTECTION
19 PART 1 - GENERAL

23 1.2 SUMMARY
24 A. Section includes glued-laminated wood roof decking

28 1. Product Certificates: For regional materials, indicating location of material manufacturer and point of
29 extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each
30 regional material.
33 4. Product Data: For laminating adhesives, indicating that product contains no urea formaldehyde.

35 A. Research/Evaluation Reports: For glued-laminated wood roof decking indicated to be of diaphragm design
36 and construction, from ICC-ES.

40 B. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

42 A. Schedule delivery of wood roof decking to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying the Work.
43 B. Store materials under cover and protected from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Provide for
44 air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. Stack wood roof decking with
45 surfaces that are to be exposed in the final Work protected from exposure to sunlight.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 061516 - 1 WOOD ROOF DECKING
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 2.1 WOOD ROOF DECKING, SALVAGED

3 A. Decking from demolished lower roof shall be salvaged and re-used for repair and infill of upper roof.
4 B. Refer to Section 02 41 19 – Selective Demolition for salvaging, cleaning and storage requirements.
5 2.2 WOOD ROOF DECKING, GENERAL

6 A. General: Comply with DOC PS 20 and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by
7 ALSC's Board of Review.
8 B. Regional Materials: Wood products shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project site from materials
9 that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site.
10 C. Regional Materials: Wood products shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project site.
11 D. Certified Wood: Wood products shall be certified as "FSC Pure" according to FSC STD-01-00 and FSC STD-
12 40-004.
13 2.3 GLUED-LAMINATED WOOD ROOF DECKING

14 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may
16 1. Disdero Lumber Company.
17 2. Filler King Company.
18 3. Structural Wood Systems; A Division of Harrison Industries.
19 4. Timberweld.
20 B. Face Species: Douglas fir-larch or Douglas fir-larch (North).
21 C. Roof Decking Nominal Size: 2 inch actual depth by width as required.
22 D. Note that existing framing below deck varies in spacing: 5 feet nominal spacing is typical.
23 E. Face Grade: Service: Face knot holes, stains, end splits, skips, roller splits, planer burns, and other
24 nonstrength-reducing characteristics are allowed. Strength-reducing characteristics are not allowed.
25 F. Moisture Content: Provide wood roof decking with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing.
26 G. Face Surface: Rough sanded or wire brushed.
27 H. Edge Pattern: Beaded edge.
28 I. Laminating Adhesive: Wet-use type complying with ASTM D 2559.
29 1. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

31 A. Fastener Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel.
32 B. Sealants: Latex, complying with applicable requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" and
33 recommended by sealant manufacturer and manufacturer of substrates for intended application.
35 3.1 INSTALLATION
36 A. Install laminated wood roof decking to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
37 1. Locate end joints for two-span continuous lay-up.
38 2. Nail each course of glued-laminated wood roof decking at each support with one nail slant nailed
39 above the tongue and one nail straight nailed through the face.
40 a. Use 12d nails for 2-by-6 and 2-by-8 roof decking.
41 3. Slant nail each course of glued-laminated wood roof decking to the tongue of the adjacent course at
42 30 inches o.c. and within 12 inches of the end of each unit. Stagger nailing 15 inches in adjacent
43 courses.
44 a. Use 6d nails for 2-by-6 and 2-by-8 roof decking.
45 B. Anchor wood roof decking, where supported on walls, with bolts as indicated.
46 C. Apply joint sealant to seal roof decking at exterior walls at the following locations:
47 1. Between roof decking and supports located at exterior walls.
48 2. Between roof decking and exterior walls that butt against underside of roof decking.
49 3. Between tongues and grooves of roof decking over exterior walls and supports at exterior walls.
50 3.2 ADJUSTING
51 A. Repair damaged surfaces and finishes after completing erection. Replace damaged roof decking if repairs
52 are not approved by Architect.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3.3 PROTECTION
2 A. Provide water-resistive barrier over roof decking as the Work progresses to protect roof decking until roofing
3 is applied.
4 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 06 16 00
2 SHEATHING
5 1.2 SUMMARY
12 2.2 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS
13 2.3 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD
14 2.4 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED PLYWOOD
15 2.5 WALL SHEATHING [SHTG-1]
16 2.6 PARAPET SHEATHING [SHTG-2]
17 2.8 FASTENERS
21 PART 1 - GENERAL

25 1.2 SUMMARY
27 1. Wall sheathing.
28 2. Parapet sheathing.
30 1. Section 06 15 16 “Wood Roof Decking” for additional decking material at upper roof repair.

37 formaldehyde.

44 A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:
45 1. Wood-preservative-treated plywood.
46 2. Fire-retardant-treated plywood.
47 3. Foam-plastic sheathing.

52 body.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 061600 - 1 SHEATHING
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 C. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant-treated
2 material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs
3 inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material
4 tested.
5 D. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-
7 E. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification
8 body.

10 A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect
11 sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air
12 circulation around stacks and under coverings.

15 A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As tested according to ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency.
16 Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
17 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or
18 from the listings of another qualified testing agency.
19 2.2 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS

20 A. Certified Wood: The following wood products shall be certified as "FSC Pure" according to FSC STD-01-
21 00 and FSC STD-40-004.
22 1. Plywood.
23 2. Oriented strand board.
24 3. Particleboard underlayment.
25 4. Hardboard underlayment.
26 2.3 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD

27 A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in
28 contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with ground, and
29 Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground.
30 B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to authorities
31 having jurisdiction.
32 C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings.
33 2.4 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED PLYWOOD

34 A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements
35 in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire-test-response
36 characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a
37 qualified testing agency.
38 B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less
39 when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when
40 the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet
41 beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.
42 1. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-retardant-
43 treated plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to
44 ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.
45 2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested
46 according to ASTM D 3201/D 3201M at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not
47 indicated.
48 3. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber plywood shall be tested according to
49 ASTM D 5516 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6305.
50 Span ratings after treatment shall be not less than span ratings specified.
51 C. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.
52 D. Identify fire-retardant-treated plywood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency.
53 E. Application: Treat [all plywood unless otherwise indicated.] [plywood indicated on Drawings.]

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2.5 WALL SHEATHING (SHTG-1)

2 A. Plywood Sheathing: DOC PS 1 Exterior, Structural I sheathing.
3 2.6 PARAPET SHEATHING (SHTG-2)

4 A. Plywood Sheathing: DOC PS 1, Exterior, Structural I sheathing.
5 2.7 FASTENERS
6 A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article
7 for material and manufacture.
8 1. For [roof] [parapet] [and] [wall] sheathing, provide fasteners [with hot-dip zinc coating complying
9 with ASTM A 153/A 153M] [of Type 304 stainless steel].
10 2. For [roof] [parapet] [and] [wall] sheathing, provide fasteners with organic-polymer or other
11 corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to
12 ASTM B 117.

14 A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Wood Framing: Formulation complying with [APA AFG-01]
15 [ASTM D 3498] that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of both
16 adhesives and panels.
17 1. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of [50] [70] <Insert value> g/L or less.

20 A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with
21 minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span
22 between fewer than three support members.
23 B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction
25 C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
26 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the ICC's International Building Code.
27 2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate
28 Attachments," in the ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings.
29 3. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.
30 D. Coordinate [wall] [parapet] [and] [roof] sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so
31 these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through
32 completed assembly.
33 E. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural
34 support elements.
35 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 06 40 23
2 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
5 1.2 SUMMARY
7 1.4 DEFINITIONS
12 1.9 COORDINATION
14 2.1 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK, GENERAL
15 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
17 2.4 SHELVING AND CLOTHES RODS
20 3.1 PREPARATION
22 3.3 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION
23 3.4 PANELING INSTALLATION
24 3.5 SHELVING INSTALLATION
26 PART 1 - GENERAL

30 1.2 SUMMARY
32 1. Interior trim.
33 2. Shelving.
34 3. Window stools.
35 4. Related woodwork accessories.
37 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips
38 required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork
39 installation.
40 2. Section 06 42 14 "Historic Stile and Rail Wood Paneling."

43 1.4 DEFINITIONS
44 A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing
45 woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

48 B. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating
49 plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
50

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 064023 - 1 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 C. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details,
2 attachment devices, and other components.
3 1. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and
4 reinforcement specified in other Sections.
5 2. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap dispensers, and
6 other items installed in architectural woodwork.
7 3. Coordination of adjoining construction, trim and moldings.
8 D. Sustainable Design Submittals:
15 E. Samples: For each type of trim, board, stool and panel.
16 F. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.

21 body.
22 C. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
23 D. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for
24 production of interior architectural woodwork with sequence-matched wood veneers.
25 1. Fabricator Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program with not less
26 than 10 years experience in projects of similar size.
27 E. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality
28 Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation,
29 and other requirements.
30 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program labels or certificates indicating that woodwork, including
31 installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.
32 F. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-retardant materials or products are indicated, provide
33 materials and products with specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical
34 products per test method indicated by UL, ITS, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
35 authorities having jurisdiction. Identify with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
36 agency in the form of separable paper label or, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on
37 surfaces of materials that will be concealed from view after installation.
38 G. Mockup: Refer to Section 01 43 39 – Mockups for description of construction required to complete a
40 H. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
41 effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
42 1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by the
43 Architect.
44 2. Notify Architect seven (7) days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be fabricated and
45 installed.
46 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
47 4. Obtain Architect’s approval of mockups before starting interior architectural woodwork fabrication.
48 5. Maintain approved mockups throughout construction in an undisturbed condition as the standard
49 for judging completed work.
50 6. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial
51 Completion.
52 I. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01
53 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

55 A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and
56 deterioration.
57 B. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been
58 completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in
59 areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is
3 complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and
4 relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period.
5 B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other
6 construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
7 Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
8 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field
9 measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
10 1.9 COORDINATION
11 A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of
12 Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and
13 installed as indicated.
15 2.1 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK, GENERAL

16 A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for
17 grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other
18 requirements.

20 A. Regional Materials: The following wood products shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of
21 Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured,
22 within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
24 2. Fire-rated interior door and sidelight frames.
25 3. Interior plywood paneling.
26 4. Shelving.
27 5. Interior railings.
28 B. Certified Wood: The following wood products shall be certified as "FSC Pure" according to FSC STD-01-
29 00 and FSC STD-40-004.
31 2. Fire-rated interior door and sidelight frames.
32 3. Interior plywood paneling.
33 4. Shelving.
34 5. Interior railings.
35 C. Composite Wood Products: Products shall be made without urea formaldehyde.
36 D. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Provide AWI Premium grade wood of similar grain, texture,
37 and density to produce uniformity of color and finish throughout the complete installation of furniture,
38 architectural woodwork, and millwork as follows:
39 1. (WD-1) Solid: plain sliced. Refer to Material Tag List.
40 E. Melamine-Faced Particleboard (PLSHLF-1) Particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2,
41 finished on both faces with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with
42 requirements of NEMA LD3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.

45 A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of
46 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion
47 when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5
48 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.
49 1. Kiln dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent
50 respectively.
51 B. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency
52 acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
53 1. For exposed lumber and plywood indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark back of each
54 piece.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 C. Application: All interior lumber and plywood.
2 2.4 SHELVING AND CLOTHES RODS

3 A. Shelving (WDSHLF-1): Made from one of the following materials, 3/4 inch thick.
4 1. Particleboard with solid-wood front edge.
5 2. MDF with solid-wood front edge.
6 3. MDO softwood plywood with solid-wood edge.
7 4. Melamine-faced particleboard with radiused and filled front edge.
8 5. Softwood Boards: Eastern white, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, radiata, or sugar pine;
9 C Select (Choice); NeLMA, NLGA, or WWPA; kiln dried.
10 6. Softwood Boards: Douglas fir-larch, Douglas fir south, or hem-fir; Superior or C & Btr finish; NLGA,
11 WCLIB, or WWPA; or southern pine, B & B finish; SPIB; kiln dried.
12 B. Shelf Cleats: 3/4-by-3-1/2-inch boards, as specified above for shelving.
13 C. Shelf Brackets with Rod Support: BHMA A156.16, B04051; prime-painted formed steel.
14 D. Shelf Brackets without Rod Support: BHMA A156.16, B04041; prime-painted formed steel.
15 E. Closet Rods: 1-5/16-inch-diameter, chrome-plated-steel tubes complying with BHMA A156.16, L03131..

17 A. Glue: Aliphatic-resin, polyurethane, or resorcinol wood glue recommended by manufacturer for general
18 carpentry use.
19 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 30 g/L or less.
20 B. Paneling Adhesive: Comply with paneling manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives.
21 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of [50] <Insert value> g/L or less.
23 3.1 PREPARATION
24 A. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation
25 areas for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer.

27 A. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims
28 where necessary for alignment.
29 1. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended
30 by manufacturer.
31 2. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand unless otherwise indicated.
32 3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining interior finish
33 carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum offset for
34 reveal installation.
35 3.3 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION

36 A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber
37 available. Cope at returns, miter at outside corners, and cope at inside corners to produce tight-fitting joints
38 with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints.
39 3.4 PANELING INSTALLATION

40 A. Plywood Paneling: Select and arrange panels on each wall to minimize noticeable variations in grain
41 character and color between adjacent panels. Leave 1/4-inch gap to be covered with trim at top, bottom,
42 and openings. Install with uniform tight joints between panels.
43 1. Attach panels to supports with manufacturer's recommended panel adhesive and fasteners. Space
44 fasteners and adhesive as recommended by panel manufacturer.
45 2. Conceal fasteners to greatest practical extent.
46 B. Hardboard Paneling: Install according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Leave 1/4-inch gap to
47 be covered with trim at top, bottom, and openings. Butt adjacent panels with moderate contact. Use
48 fasteners with prefinished heads matching paneling color.
49

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 C. Board Paneling: Arrange in random-width pattern suggested by manufacturer unless boards or planks are
2 of uniform width.
3 1. Stagger end joints in random pattern to uniformly distribute joints on each wall.
4 2. Select and arrange boards on each wall to minimize noticeable variations in grain character and
5 color between adjacent boards. Install with uniform tight joints between boards.
6 3. Fasten paneling by face nailing, setting nails, and filling over nail heads.
7 4. Fasten paneling with trim screws, set below face and filled.
8 5. Fasten paneling by blind nailing through tongues.
9 3.5 SHELVING INSTALLATION

10 A. Cut shelf cleats at ends of shelves about 1/2 inch less than width of shelves and sand exposed ends
11 smooth.
12 B. Install shelf cleats by fastening to framing or backing with finish nails or trim screws, set below face and
13 filled. Space fasteners not more than 16 inches o.c.
14 C. Install shelf brackets according to manufacturer's written instructions, spaced not more than 32 inches o.c.
15 Fasten to framing members, blocking, or metal backing, or use toggle bolts or hollow wall anchors.
16 D. Cut shelves to neatly fit openings with only enough gap to allow shelves to be removed and reinstalled.
17 Install shelves, fully seated on cleats, brackets, and supports.

19 A. Repair damaged and defective interior architectural woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and
20 visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace interior architectural woodwork. Adjust joinery for
21 uniform appearance.
22 B. Clean interior architectural woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied
23 finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
24 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 06 41 16
2 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
5 1.2 SUMMARY
6 1.3 COORDINATION
14 2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
15 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS
17 2.4 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
19 2.6 FABRICATION
21 3.1 PREPARATION
22 3.2 INSTALLATION
24 PART 1 - GENERAL

28 1.2 SUMMARY
30 1. Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets.
31 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-faced architectural
32 cabinets that are not concealed within other construction.
34 1. Section 12 36 61 "Simulated Stone Countertops."
35 1.3 COORDINATION
36 A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work
37 specified in other Sections to support loads imposed by installed and fully loaded cabinets.


42 1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by
43 treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
44

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 064116 - 1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

3 cost.
8 4. Product Data: For adhesives, indicating that product contains no urea formaldehyde.
9 5. Laboratory Test Reports: For adhesives, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting
10 materials.
11 6. Product Data: For composite wood products, indicating that product contains no urea formaldehyde.
12 7. Laboratory Test Reports: For composite wood products, indicating compliance with requirements for
14 C. Shop Drawings: For plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets.
15 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
16 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and
17 reinforcement specified in other Sections.
18 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in plastic-laminate architectural
19 cabinets.
20 4. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings.
21 D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, in manufacturer's or
22 fabricator's standard size.
23 1. Plastic laminates, for each color, pattern, and surface finish.
24 2. Thermoset decorative panels, for each color, pattern, and surface finish.

26 A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.
27 B. Product Certificates: For each type of product.
28 C. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program.
29 D. Evaluation Reports: For fire-retardant-treated materials, from ICC-ES.

31 A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those
32 required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.
33 1. Shop Certification: AWI's Quality Certification Program accredited participant.
34 B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

36 A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar finish operations that might damage architectural cabinets
37 have been completed in installation areas. Store cabinets in installation areas or in areas where
38 environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article.

40 A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete,
41 and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels planned for
42 building occupants during the remainder of the construction period.
44 2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

46 grades of cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.
47 1. Provide inspections of fabrication and installation together with labels and certificates from AWI
48 certification program indicating that woodwork complies with requirements of grades specified.
49 2. The Contract Documents contain requirements that are more stringent than the referenced quality
50 standard. Comply with requirements of Contract Documents in addition to those of the referenced
51 quality standard.
52 B. Grade: Premium.
53

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 C. Regional Materials: Wood products shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site from
2 materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800
3 km) of Project site.
4 D. Certified Wood: Wood products shall be certified as "FSC Pure" according to FSC STD-01-001 and FSC
5 STD-40-004.
6 E. Type of Construction: Frameless.
7 F. Door and Drawer-Front Style: Flush overlay.
8 G. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by
9 quality standard.
12 a. Formica Corporation.
13 b. Pionite: a Panolam Industries International, Inc. brand.
14 c. Wilsonart International Holdings, Inc.
15 H. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces (PLAM-#):
16 1. Refer to Material Tag Index.
17 2. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS.
18 3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS.
19 I. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:
20 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels.
21 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber.
22 3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.
23 J. Dust Panels: 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers unless located
24 directly under tops.
25 K. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate,
26 NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL.
27 L. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior
28 of body.
29 1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical fasteners
30 or glued dovetail joints.
31 M. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed
32 laminate surfaces complying with the selected material.

34 A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each
35 type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
36 1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.
37 B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced
38 quality standard for each type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
39 1. Recycled Content of MDF and Particleboard: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
40 preconsumer recycled content not less than 100 percent.
42 D. Composite Wood Products: Products shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
43 Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical
44 Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
45 1. Medium-Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.
46 2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
47 3. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1.
48 4. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or MDF finished with thermally fused, melamine-
49 impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for Test
50 Methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.

52 A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials, General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use
53 materials that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire-test-response characteristics
54 specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.
55 1. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing
56 agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on surfaces that will be concealed from view
57 after installation.
58

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested
2 according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended
3 an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline
4 of the burners at any time during the test.
5 1. Kiln-dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent,
6 respectively.
7 2.4 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

8 A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets except
9 for items specified in Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware."
10 1. Doug Mockett, DP105A/2.
11 2. Finish: 26M Matte Chrome.
12 3. Size 4-3/16” 3/8” profile.
13 B. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for
14 BHMA finish numbers indicated:
15 1. Satin Chrome: BHMA 626 /652.
16 2. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.
17 3. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer’s standard finish that complies with product class
18 requirements in BHMA A156.9.
19 C. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class
20 requirements in BHMA A156.9.
21 D. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): Totally concealed spring-activated, self-closing European
22 type cabinet hinges for vertical, horizontal, and depth adjustment, not less than 165 degrees opening, except
23 provide 90 degree opening where door may strike adjacent walls or cabinets. Nickel plated.
24 1. Acceptable manufacturers and products:
25 a. Hafele America, Co; Duomatic #0.329.06.
26 b. Grass America, Inc.; #3903.
27 c. Hettich America; Euromat Topsafe #4955.
28 E. Center Pivot Hinges: Totally concealed spring-activated, self-closing European type cabinet hinges for
29 Trash / Recycling Containers. Nickel plated.
30 1. Acceptable manufacturers and products:
31 a. E.R. Butler & Co Manufacturing.
32 F. Back-Mounted Pulls: Ives #026 Bar Window Lift; finish Aluminum #A92.
33 1. Drawers: Horizontal installation.
34 2. Doors: Vertical installation.
35 G. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081.
36 H. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091.
37 1. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated
38 steel ball-bearing slides.
39 2. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for drawers not more than 6 inches high and 24 inches wide.
40 3. File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-200; for drawers more than 6 inches high or 24 inches wide.
41 4. Pencil Drawer Slides: Grade 1; for drawers not more than 3 inches high and 24 inches wide.
42 5. Keyboard Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for computer keyboard shelves.
43 6. Trash Bin Slides: Grade 1HD-200; for trash bins not more than 20 inches high and 16 inches wide.
44 I. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.
45 J. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.
46 K. Hanging Hardware for Wood Ceiling Panels: Refer to Section 05 50 00 for steel rod supports:
47 1. Provide wire connections and bolts as indicated on drawings capable of supporting panels without
48 deflection or sway.
49 L. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops (MA-3): Size: 7-3/32" x 1-25/32" overall fitting into a slot
50 6-7/8" x 1-9/16" square. 3/4" deep.
51 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by Doug Mockett & Company,
52 Inc. Refer to Material Tag Index.
53 2. Finish: Per Materials List.
54

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 M. Moldings and Trim:

2 1. ‘J’ Molding
3 a. Manufacturer: Fry Reglet.
4 b. Product Number: JDM-50-50.
5 c. Finish: Clear Anodized Aluminum.
6 2. X’ Molding
8 b. Product Number: XDM-50-50.
9 c. Finish: Clear Anodized Aluminum.
10 3. Reveal Channel Screed
12 b. Product Number: DCS-50-V-50 (1/2” reveal depth x 1/2” reveal width).
13 c. Finish: Clear Anodized Aluminum

15 A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15
16 percent moisture content.
17 B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide
18 metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip
19 galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.
20 C. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
21 D. Adhesives: Use adhesives that meet the testing and product requirements of the California Department of
22 Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions
23 from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
24 E. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement.
25 1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.
26 2.6 FABRICATION
27 A. Fabricate architectural cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.
28 B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before
29 shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where
30 necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
31 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times architectural cabinet fabrication will be
32 complete.
33 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels,
34 screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify
35 that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements
36 before disassembling for shipment.
37 C. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar
38 items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized
39 and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.
40 D. Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Premium-grade interior woodwork complying with referenced
41 quality standard.
42 E. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content
43 in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas.
44 F. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication.
45 G. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the
46 following:
47 1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch Thick or Less: 1/16 inch.
48 Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch.
49 2. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch.
50 H. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before
51 shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where
52 necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
53 I. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar
54 items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately
55 sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
2 3.1 PREPARATION
3 A. Before installation, condition cabinets to humidity conditions in installation areas for not less than 72 hours.
4 3.2 INSTALLATION
5 A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with quality standard grade of item to be installed.
6 B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to extent that it was not completed in the shop.
7 C. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with wafer-head
8 cabinet installation screws.
9 D. Install cabinets level, plumb, and true in line to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches using concealed shims.
10 1. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.
11 2. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are accurately aligned.
12 Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation.
13 Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
14 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches o.c.
15 with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch penetration into wood framing,
16 blocking, or hanging strips and toggle bolts through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish
17 where no blocking.

19 A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects. Where
20 not possible to repair, replace architectural cabinets. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
21 B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
22 C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces.
23 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 06 46 00
2 WOOD TRIM
5 1.2 SUMMARY
11 1.8 COORDINATION
13 2.1 WOOD TRIM, GENERAL
16 2.4 FABRICATION
17 2.5 SHOP PRIMING
18 2.6 SHOP FINISHING
20 3.1 PREPARATION
21 3.2 INSTALLATION
23 PART 1 - GENERAL

27 1.2 SUMMARY
29 1. Interior standing and running trim.
30 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed
31 within other construction before woodwork installation.
32 3. Shop finishing of wood trim. Refer to 09 93 00

34 A. Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products fire-retardant-treated materials and
35 finishing materials and processes.
38 and cost.
45 formaldehyde.
49 C. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details,
50 attachment devices, and other components.
51

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 064600 - 1 WOOD TRIM
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 D. Samples:
2 1. Lumber for transparent finish, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge.
3 2. Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, for each finish system and color, with
4 exposed surface finished.

6 A. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.

8 A. Fabricator Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
9 B. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
12 1. New interior wood feature wall types WDF-1 and AWP-3 and junction with storefront framing: Each
13 type to consist of two 4ft wide x 8ft high panels starting at floor finish, with one vertical edge
14 intersection with storefront system GLWS-5.

16 A. Do not deliver wood trim until operations that could damage wood trim have been completed in installation
17 areas. If wood trim must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental
18 conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article.

20 A. Environmental Limitations for Interior Work: Do not deliver or install interior wood trim until building is
21 enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
22 humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
23 1.8 COORDINATION
24 A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of
25 Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wood trim can be supported and installed as indicated.
27 2.1 WOOD TRIM, GENERAL

29 grades of wood trim indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.
30 1. Provide labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork, including
31 installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.

33 A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each
34 type of wood trim and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
35 1. Wood Moisture Content for Interior Materials: 5 to 10 percent.
36 B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced
37 quality standard for each type of wood trim and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
38 1. Recycled Content of MDF and Particleboard: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
39 preconsumer recycled content not less than 50 percent.
41 1. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130
42 2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
43 3. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1.
44 4. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally
45 fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3,
46 Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials, General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use
3 materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction
4 and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test
5 method indicated by a qualified testing agency.
6 1. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing
7 agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on surfaces that will be concealed from view
8 after installation.
9 B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to
10 ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an
11 additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of
12 the burners at any time during the test.
13 1. For exterior applications, use materials that comply with testing requirements after being subjected
14 to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898.
15 2. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.

17 A. Interior Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than
18 15 percent moisture content.
19 B. Provide self-drilling screws for metal-framing supports.
20 C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide
21 metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip
22 galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.
23 D. Handrail Brackets: Cast from malleable iron with wall flange drilled and tapped for concealed hanger bolt
24 and with support arm for screwing to underside of rail. Sized to provide 1-1/2-inch clearance between
25 handrail and wall.
26 E. Handrail/Bumper Rail Brackets: Pairs of extruded-aluminum channels; one for fastening to back of rail and
27 one for fastening to face of wall. They are then assembled in overlapping fashion and fastened together
28 top and bottom with self-tapping screws. Sized to provide 1-1/2-inch clearance between handrail and wall.
29 F. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
31 2.5 FABRICATION
32 A. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication.
33 B. Fabricate wood trim to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the
34 following:
35 1. Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch unless otherwise indicated.
36 2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch.
37 C. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members except for
38 members with ends exposed in finished work.
39 D. Assemble casings in shop except where shipping limitations require field assembly.
40 2.6 SHOP PRIMING

41 A. Interior Wood Trim for Transparent Finish: Shop seal with stain (if required), other required pretreatments,
42 and first coat of finish as specified in Section 09 93 00 "Staining and Transparent Finishing."
43 B. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk
44 fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing wood trim, as applicable to
45 each unit of work.
46 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed
47 surfaces of wood trim. Apply two coats to surfaces installed in contact with concrete or masonry
48 and to end-grain surfaces.
49 2.7 SHOP FINISHING

50 A. General: Finish wood trim at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup,
51 cleaning, and polishing until after installation.
52 B. General: Drawings indicate items that are required to be shop finished. Finish such items at fabrication
53 shop as specified in this Section. Refer to Section 09 93 00 "Staining and Varnishes" for field finishing
54 wood trim not indicated to be shop finished.
55 C. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk
56 fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing wood trim, as applicable to
57 each unit of work.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed
2 surfaces of wood trim. Apply two coats to end-grain surfaces.
3 D. Transparent Finish for Interior Trim: Refer to Section 09 93 00.
4 1. Grade: Premium.
6 3.1 PREPARATION
7 A. Before installation, condition wood trim to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.
8 3.2 INSTALLATION
9 A. Grade: Install wood trim to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
10 B. Install wood trim level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and
11 plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
12 C. Scribe and cut wood trim to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.
13 D. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply with
14 chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used to install
15 woodwork.
16 E. Preservative-Treated Wood: Where cut or drilled in field, treat cut ends and drilled holes according to
17 AWPA M4.
18 F. Anchor wood trim to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
19 countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed
20 fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.
21 1. For shop-finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed.
22 G. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from
23 maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 36 inches
24 long except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent
25 and related members.
26 1. Install wall railings on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall framing.
27 2. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96
28 inches.

30 A. Repair damaged and defective wood trim, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects;
31 where not possible to repair, replace wood trim. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
32 B. Clean wood trim on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore
33 damaged or soiled areas.
34 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 07 01 50.19
2 PREPARATION FOR REROOFING
5 1.2 SUMMARY
6 1.3 DEFINITIONS
10 1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
13 2.1 SUBSTRATE BOARDS (DECK UNDERLAYMENT
14 2.2 INFILL AND REPLACEMENT MATERIALS
15 2.3 AUXILIARY REROOFING MATERIALS
17 3.1 PREPARATION
18 3.2 ROOF TEAR-OFF
19 3.3 DECK PREPARATION
20 3.4 BASE FLASHING REMOVAL
21 3.5 DISPOSAL
22 PART 1 - GENERAL

26 1.2 SUMMARY
28 1. Full tear-off of entire roof.
29 2. Removal of base flashings.
31 1. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry: Roof curbs and roof blocking.
32 2. Section 06 15 16 – Wood Roof Decking: Decking replacement material.
33 3. Section 07 52 13 - Modified Bituminous Roofing (APP): New roof system.
34 4. Section 07 52 16 - Modified bituminous Roofing (SBS): New roof system.
35 5. Section 07 71 00 - Roof Specialties: For reglets and counterflashing repair materials.
36 1.3 DEFINITIONS
37 A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and
38 Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section.
39 B. Full Roof Tear-Off: Removal of existing roofing system from deck.

42 B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, and details.

44 A. Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements,
45 including exterior and interior finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as having been damaged by
46 reroofing operations. Submit before Work begins.
47 B. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of demolished roofing materials by a landfill facility
48 licensed to accept them.
49 C. Preconstruction Test Reports.

51 A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning roofing
52 removal. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 07015019 - 1 PREPARATION FOR REROOFING
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 B. Reroofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

2 1. Meet with Owner; Architect; Owner's insurer if applicable; testing and inspecting agency
3 representative; roofing system manufacturer's representative; roofing Installer, including project
4 manager, superintendent, and foreman; and installers whose work interfaces with or affects
5 reroofing, including installers of roof deck, roof accessories, and roof-mounted equipment.
6 2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing system tear-off, including, but not limited to, the
7 following:
8 a. Temporary protection requirements for existing roofing system components that are to
9 remain.
10 b. Existing roof drains and roof drainage during each stage of work, and roof-drain plugging and
11 plug removal.
12 c. Construction schedule and availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and
13 facilities needed to avoid delays.
14 d. Existing roof deck conditions requiring notification of Architect. Coordination of roof deck
15 repair required.
16 e. Condition and acceptance of existing roof deck and base flashing substrate for reuse.
17 f. Structural loading limitations of roof deck during reroofing.
18 g. Shutdown of fire-suppression, -protection, and -alarm and -detection systems.
19 h. Governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.
20 i. Existing conditions that may require notification of Architect before proceeding.

22 A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner shall engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction
23 testing on the existing wood deck for penetration withdrawal of fasteners.
24 1. The sections of the substrate where integrity is most in question shall be used for testing. Test areas
25 shall include corners, drain areas, and perimeters.
26 2. The minimum number of pullout test shall be 20.
27 3. Minimum acceptable pull-out resistance is 300 lbs. (136.1 Kg) pullout.
28 B. Preconstruction Testing: Performed by a qualified testing agency.

30 A. Existing Roofing System: Built-up asphalt roofing and built-up coal-tar “pitch” roofing.
31 B. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately below reroofing area. Conduct reroofing so Owner's
32 operations are not disrupted. Provide Owner with not less than 72 hours' notice of activities that may affect
33 Owner's operations.
34 C. Protect building to be reroofed, adjacent buildings, walkways, site improvements, exterior plantings, and
35 landscaping from damage or soiling from reroofing operations.
36 D. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.
37 E. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding shall be maintained by Owner as far as practical.
38 F. Limit construction loads on roof to 30 PSF for uniformly distributed loads.
39 G. Weather Limitations: Proceed with reroofing preparation only when existing and forecasted weather
40 conditions permit Work to proceed without water entering existing roofing system or building.
41 1. Remove only as much roofing in one day as can be made watertight in the same day.
43 2.1 SUBSTRATE BOARDS (DECK UNDERLAYMENT)

44 A. Substrate Board (Wood Deck Assembly):
45 2.2 INFILL AND REPLACEMENT MATERIALS

46 A. Wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are specified in Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry."
47 B. Lumber roof deck is specified in Section 06 15 16 "Wood Roof Decking."
48 2.3 AUXILIARY REROOFING MATERIALS

49 A. General: Use auxiliary reroofing preparation materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for
50 intended use and compatible with components of new roofing system.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
2 3.1 PREPARATION
3 A. Shut off rooftop utilities and service piping before beginning the Work.
4 B. Test existing roof drains to verify that they are not blocked or restricted. Immediately notify Architect of any
5 blockages or restrictions.
6 C. During removal operations, have sufficient and suitable materials on-site to facilitate rapid installation of
7 temporary protection in the event of unexpected rain.
8 D. Maintain roof drains in functioning condition to ensure roof drainage at end of each workday. Prevent debris
9 from entering or blocking roof drains and conductors. Use roof-drain plugs specifically designed for this
10 purpose. Remove roof-drain plugs at end of each workday, when no work is taking place, or when rain is
11 forecast.
12 1. If roof drains are temporarily blocked or unserviceable due to roofing system removal or partial
13 installation of new roofing system, provide alternative drainage method to remove water and
14 eliminate ponding.
15 3.2 ROOF TEAR-OFF

16 A. Remove loose aggregate from aggregate-surfaced built-up bituminous roofing using a power broom.
17 B. Full Roof Tear-Off: Remove existing roofing and other roofing system components down to the roof deck.
18 1. Remove fasteners from deck or cut fasteners off slightly above deck surface.
19 3.3 DECK PREPARATION

20 A. Inspect wood deck after tear-off of roofing system. Obtain Architect’s authorization before proceeding.
21 B. Do not proceed with Work until wood deck repair/construction have been accomplished and approved.
22 3.4 BASE FLASHING REMOVAL

23 A. Remove existing base flashings. Clean substrates of contaminants, such as asphalt, sheet materials, dirt,
24 and debris.
25 B. Do not damage metal counterflashings that are to remain. Replace metal counterflashings damaged during
26 removal with counterflashings specified in Section 07 71 00 "Roof Specialties."
27 C. Inspect parapet sheathing, wood blocking, curbs, and nailers for deterioration and damage. If parapet
28 sheathing, wood blocking, curbs, or nailers have deteriorated, immediately notify Architect.
29 3.5 DISPOSAL
30 A. Recycling:
31 1. Contractor shall divert all of the following materials from disposal at the landfill
32 a. Metals including edge metal, copings, counter flashings, expansion /control joint covers, and
33 all non-contaminated metal pails.
34 b. Plastics, including packaging materials, pails, and containers
35 c. Cardboard, including packaging materials and roll cores
36 d. Wood, including demolished nailers, demolished plywood, demolished wood plank decking,
37 damaged pallets, and new wood or plywood scrap and pieces
38 2. Contractor shall package the debris as required by the recycler
39 3. Contractor shall transport the debris to approved recyclers.
40 4. Pallets in a condition to be reused shall not be land filled.
41 5. Metal or plastic pails and containers that are contaminated with adhesive, mastic, coatings, and
42 similar materials are excluded.
43 B. Collect demolished materials and place in containers. Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not
44 allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
45 1. Storage or sale of demolished items or materials on-site is not permitted.
46 C. Transport and legally dispose of demolished materials off Owner's property.
47 END OF SECTION

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 07 01 90.71
2 HISTORIC SEALANT REHABILITATION
3
5 1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK
7 1.3 SUBMITTALS
8 1.4 MATERIAL HANDLING
9 1.5 WARRANTIES
12 2.2 MATERIALS
13 2.3 TYPICAL PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
15 3.1 EXAMINATION
18 3.4 SEALANT APPLICATION – SINGLE STAGE
19 3.5 SEALANT APPLICATION – TWO STAGE
20
21 PART 1 - GENERAL
22
24 A. This Section includes all labor, materials and equipment necessary to perform the following Work:
25 1. Removal of all existing caulking/sealant to be replaced.
26 2. Preparation of all surfaces to receive new sealant work.
27 3. Application of the joint waterproofing sealant.
28 4. Clean up.
29
31 A. The Manufacturer of the sealant system shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience in the
32 manufacture of waterproof coatings and sealants.
33
34 1.3 SUBMITTALS
35 A. Manufacturer’s Literature: Submit three (3) complete sets of Manufacturer’s literature and technical
36 data for the sealant system.
37 B. Contractor’s Certificate: Submit copies of “Licensed Applicator’s Certificate” issued by the
38 Manufacturer.
39 C. A total of three (3) copies of each submittal is required, unless noted otherwise.
40
42 A. Delivery and Storage of Materials
43 1. Deliver all materials in their original unopened containers with all markings intact.
44 2. All materials must be stored in a dry place or otherwise protected from water or extreme
45 humidity.
46 3. Stack material on pallets at least 4” above the ground and cover with a breathable
47 covering, such as canvas.
48 4. Store sealants in the manner and temperature range recommended by the Manufacturer.
49 B. Handling Materials
50 1. Do not store or transport materials on the roof in a manner that may exceed the live load
51 capacity of the deck system or the structure. The Architect, during routine inspections,
52 may make recommendations as to loading.
53 2. Do not transport materials over or store materials on a finished section without prior
54 approval of Architect.
55

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 070190.71- 1 HISTORIC SEALANT REHABILITATION
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 1.5 WARRANTIES
2 A. The sealant Manufacturer and the Contractor shall warrant the performance of the sealant system
3 for a period of five (5) years starting from the date of acceptance by the Architect. Such warranty
4 shall include material as well as labor for application. Damage and/or failure due to acts of God
5 and vandalism, may be excluded from such warranty.
6
7 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
8
9 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
10 A. Provide materials from the following Manufacturers:
11 1. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd.
12 2. SIKA Corp.
13 3. BASF Corp.
14 4. Tremco, Inc.
15 5. Soudal
16 B. Materials shall meet all specified standards.
17 C. All materials shall be new unless noted otherwise.
18 D. New materials shall not contain asbestos.
19
20 2.2 MATERIALS
21 A. Sealant: A hybrid multi-component chemically curing polyurethane joint sealant meeting the
22 requirements of ASTM C920 Type M or S, Grade NS. Sealant material shall be polyurethane
23 elastomer based, meeting or exceeding minimum physical properties as listed in Section 2.3, and
24 capable of producing a seamless waterproof joint seal. Color shall be chosen to most closely
25 match that of the adjacent limestone/masonry, or, non-staining and no-tack, soft type with high
26 elongation properties and shall be so designated on the label by the Manufacturer such as “Sikaflex
27 1a” by SIKA Corp., “Sikaflex - 2c NS” (Class 25) by SIKA Corp., “MasterSeal NP1” (Class 35) by
28 BASF Corp., “DynaTrol II” (Class 50) by Pecora Corp., “Dymonic” (Class 25) by Tremco, Inc. or
29 "SoudaSeal AP" (Class 35) by Soudal. Follow all Manufacturers’ previously submitted
30 recommendations for type required at joints. Use non-sag at all joints. All sealants must take latex
31 and oil base paint.
32 B. Expandable Acrylic Foam Sealant such as BACKERSEAL, as manufactured by EMSEAL Joint
33 Systems Ltd, and as indicated on drawings for waterproof wall assembly locations.
34 1. Preformed sealant shall be preformed, pre-compressed, self-expanding, sealant system.
35 Expanding foam to be cellular foam impregnated with a water-based, non-drying, polymer-
36 modified 100% acrylic dispersion.
37 2. Material shall be capable of movement of +25%, -25% (50% total) of nominal material
38 size.
39 3. Expandable Acrylic Foam Sealant to be installed recessed from the substrate faces as
40 shown on the drawings to receive a primary field-applied coating of low-modulus liquid
41 sealant.
42 4. Expandable Acrylic Foam Sealant to be installed at depth sufficient to allow installation of
43 properly sized backer rod and liquid sealant, with appropriate air space, in front of
44 material.
45 5. Consult the architect to determine the sealant system model appropriate to the movement
46 and design requirements at each joint location.
47 6. Fabrication: Expandable Acrylic Foam Sealant must be supplied pre-compressed to less
48 than the joint size, packaged in reels or shrink-wrapped lengths (sticks) with a mounting
49 adhesive on one face.
50 C. Joint Cleaning Compound: As recommended by the sealant Manufacturer for the joint surfaces to
51 be cleaned.
52 D. Joint Primer/Sealer: As recommended by the sealant Manufacturer for the joint surface to be
53 primed or sealed. All surfaces to which sealant is intended to bond shall be primed.
54 E. Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by the sealant
55 Manufacturer to be applied to sealant-contact surfaces where bond to the substrate or joint filler
56 must be avoided for proper performance of sealant. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 F. Sealant Backer Rod: Compressible rod stock polyethylene foam, polyethylene jacketed and
2 polyurethane foam or other flexible, permanent, durable non-absorptive material as recommended
3 for the compatibility with sealant by the sealant Manufacturer; which will control the joint depth for
4 sealant placement, break bond of sealant at bottom of joint, form optimum shape of sealant bead
5 on back side, and provide a highly compressible backer to minimize the possibility of sealant
6 extrusion when the joint is compressed. Backer rod shall be at least larger than the width of the
7 joint. Refer to manufacturer recommendations for backer rod size. Coordinate with Architect.
8
9 2.3 TYPICAL PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
A. T-S-00227E and 19-GP-24 test method:
Adhesion-In-Peel Mortar 6.3 kg (14 lbs)
Anodized aluminum 8.2 kg (18 lbs)
Granite 7.3 kg (16 lbs)
Minimum requirement 2.26 kg (5 lbs)
Durability (Bond and Cohesion) Passed (on mortar, granite and anodized aluminum at
± 25% movement)
Sagging None up to 50°C (122°F)
Hardness 25 (Shore A) after 7 days at 24°C (75°F), plus 21 days
at 70°C (158°F)
Percent Solids 96% after 7 days at 24°C (75°F), plus 21 days at 70°C
(158°F)
Pot Life Up to 7 hours at 24°C (75°F)
Tack-Free Time Less than 72 hours at 24°C (75°F)
Low Temperature Flexibility -54°C (-65°F)
Staining None
B. Other Test Methods:

Hardness Average 35 (Shore A) after 5 years
ASTM D2240
Extension and Compression and 1/2” X 1/2” (12 mm X 12 mm) at 24°C (75°F) will withstand 100
Cycle cycles of 40% extension and 25% compression
TRC-ST/450
Ultra-Violet Resistance No adverse effects after 5 weeks’ exposure to 14-25 E-Viton of UV
TRC-ST/448 energy at 70°C (158°F)
Accelerated Aging No adhesive or cohesive failure, nor significant changes at 8,000

ASTM E42, Method E hours
10
12
13 3.1 EXAMINATION
16 Specifications.
17
19 A. Remove only as much sealant work as can be restored to a weathertight condition each day and
20 before showers commence.
21 B. All sealant work shall be completed each day on the section being worked on.
22 C. The Contractor shall not proceed with the sealant work until all unsatisfactory conditions
23 detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the sealant work have been corrected.
24
26 A. Remove all debris from working surfaces. Remove all loose materials.
27 B. Thoroughly clean all surface areas involved to remove dirt, oils, grease, heavy laitance, for release
28 agent, curing compound, and other contaminants, which would interfere with the application and
29 performance of the sealant, in accordance with the Manufacturer’s recommendations.
30 C. Remove all foreign projections in the joint by grinding or other suitable methods.
31 D. Prime all surfaces requiring adhesion of sealant.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 E. Install the sealant material under conditions where rain is not anticipated within eight hours of
2 application and substrate surface temperatures are above 40°F and below 110°F.
3
4 3.4 SEALANT APPLICATION – SINGLE STAGE
5 A. All material shall be applied in strict accordance with the Manufacturer’s recommendations.
6 B. All surfaces to receive the sealant system shall be air-dried a minimum of 24 hours immediately
7 prior to performing Work.
8 C. Where Manufacturer’s specifications are more stringent or require more material than specified
9 herein, follow the Manufacturer’s specifications.
10 D. Primer
11 1. Apply the concrete primer at the rate of 225 square feet per gallon. Evenly apply two
12 consecutive coats to the joint interface to produce a continuous film.
13 2. Allow the primer to dry for 45 minutes or until tack-free.
14 3. Do not apply more primer than can be coated over within 8 hours.
15 4. Do not apply primer to adjacent surfaces not scheduled for sealant to prevent staining.
16 E. Joint Backing
17 1. Joint backing shall be used to control the depth of joint to the recommended dimension.
18 2. Select a size, to allow for 25% minimum compression of the backing when inserted into
19 the joint.
20 3. Where depth of joint will not permit use of joint backing, a bond-breaker tape must be
21 installed to prevent three-sided adhesion.
22 F. Sealant
23 1. Mix according to Manufacturer’s detailed instructions.
24 2. Minimum mixing time: 6 minutes.
25 3. Apply with conventional sealant equipment, filling joint completely.
26 G. Tooling
27 1. Immediately after application, tooling shall be employed to insure firm, full contact with the
28 inner faces of the joint.
29 2. Dry tooling is preferred. Tooling agents can be used.
30 H. Cleaning
31 1. Remove immediately all excess sealant adjacent to the joint with “Xylol” or “Toluol” as
32 work progresses.
33 2. Avoid staining of adjacent areas.
34 3. At the conclusion of the sealant Work, remove all tools, scaffolding, equipment,
35 construction materials and construction debris from the site.
36
37 3.5 SEALANT APPLICATION – TWO STAGE
38 A. All material shall be applied in strict accordance with the Manufacturer’s recommendations.
39 B. All surfaces to receive the sealant system shall be air-dried a minimum of 24 hours immediately
40 prior to performing Work.
41 C. Where Manufacturer’s specifications are more stringent or require more material than specified
42 herein, follow the Manufacturer’s specifications.
43 D. Primer
44 1. Apply the concrete primer at the rate of 225 square feet per gallon. Evenly apply two
45 consecutive coats to the joint interface to produce a continuous film.
46 2. Allow the primer to dry for 45 minutes or until tack-free.
47 3. Do not apply more primer than can be coated over within 8 hours.
48 4. Do not apply primer to adjacent surfaces not scheduled for sealant to prevent staining.
49 E. Joint Backing Stage I
52 the joint.
55 F. Installation of Expandable Acrylic Foam Sealant
56 1. Preparation of the Work Area
57 a. The contractor shall provide a properly formed and prepared building joint
58 openings constructed to the exact dimensions and elevations shown on shown
59 on the contract drawings. Deviations from these dimensions will not be allowed
60 without the written consent of the engineer of record.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 b. The contractor shall clean the joint opening of all contaminants immediately prior
2 to installation of expansion joint system. Repair spalled, irregular or unsound
3 joint surfaces using accepted industry practices for repair of the substrates in
4 question (by masonry contractor or others). Remove protruding roughness to
5 ensure joint sides are smooth. Ensure that there is sufficient depth to receive the
6 full depth of the size of the BACKERSEAL being installed. Refer to
7 Manufacturers Installation Guide for detailed step-by-step instructions.
8 c. No drilling, or screwing, or fasteners of any type are permitted to anchor the
9 system into the substrate.
10 G. Cleaning Stage I
13 H. Joint Backing Stage II
16 the joint.
19 I. Sealant Stage II
20 1. Mix according to Manufacturer’s detailed instructions.
21 2. Minimum mixing time: 6 minutes.
22 3. Apply with conventional sealant equipment, filling joint completely.
23 J. Tooling Stage II
24 1. Immediately after application, tooling shall be employed to insure firm, full contact with the
25 inner faces of the joint.
26 2. Dry tooling is preferred. Tooling agents can be used.
27 K. Cleaning Stage II
28 1. Remove immediately all excess sealant adjacent to the joint with “Xylol” or “Toluol” as
29 work progresses.
30 2. Avoid staining of adjacent areas.
33 Install Stage II sealant after Stage I sealant has cured sufficiently. Refer to manufacturer’s recommendations.
34 Make certain that each stage is allowed to work independently and that all sealant has ample opportunity to fully
35 cure.
36 END OF SECTION

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 07 13 50
2 HISTORIC SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING
3
6 1.2 SUMMARY
7 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
8 1.4 SUBMITTALS
12 1.8 WARRANTY
14 2.1 MATERIALS
16 3.1 EXAMINATION
17 3.2 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATES
18 3.3 INSTALLATION
20
21 PART 1 - GENERAL
22
24 A. All of the Contract Documents, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
25 General Requirements, apply to the work of this section.
26
27 1.2 SUMMARY
28 A. The work of this section includes, but is not limited to, the following:
29 1. Self-adhering rubberized asphalt sheet membrane waterproofing
30 2. Prefabricated drainage composite
31 3. Protection board
32 B. Related Sections: Other specification sections which directly relate to the work of this section
33 include, but are not limited to, the following:
34 1. Section 07 01 90.71 – Historic Sealant Rehabilitation
35 2. Section 07 62 50 – Historic Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
36
37 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
38 A. The following standards and publications are applicable to the extent referenced in the text.
39 B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
40 C 836 Standard Specification for High Solids, Cold Liquid-Applied Elastomeric
41 Waterproofing Membrane for Use with Separate Wearing Course
42 D 412 Standard Test Methods for Rubber Properties in Tension
43 D 570 Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics
44 D 882 Standard Test Methods for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting
45 D 903 Standard Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive Bonds
46 D 1876 Standard Test Method for Peel Release of Adhesives (T-Peel)
47 D 1970 Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet
48 Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection
49 D 3767 Standard Practice for Rubber - Measurements of Dimensions
50 D 5385 Standard Test Method for Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance of Waterproofing
51 Membranes
52 E 96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
53 E 154 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth
54 Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover
55
56 1.4 SUBMITTALS
57 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data, installation instructions, use limitations and
58 recommendations. Include certification of data indicating VOC (Volatile Organic Compound)
59 content of all components of waterproofing system.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 071350 - 1 HISTORIC SELF-ADHERING
SHEET WATERPROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 B. Samples: Submit representative samples of the following for approval:

2 1. Sheet membrane
3 2. Protection board
4 3. Prefabricated drainage composite
5
7 A. Manufacturer: Sheet membrane waterproofing shall be manufactured and marketed by a firm with
8 a minimum of 20 years’ experience in the production and sales of self-adhesive sheet membrane
9 waterproofing. Manufacturers proposed for use but not named in these specifications shall submit
10 evidence of ability to meet all requirements specified, and include a list of projects of similar design
11 and complexity completed within the past 5 years.
12 B. Installer: A firm which has at least 5 years’ documented experience in work of the type required by
13 this section.
14 C. Materials: For each type of material required for the work of this section, provide primary materials
15 which are the products of one manufacturer.
16 D. Pre-Installation Conference: A pre-installation conference shall be held prior to commencement of
17 field operations to establish procedures to maintain optimum working conditions and to coordinate
18 this work with related and adjacent work. Agenda for meeting shall include review of special details
19 and flashing.
20
22 A. Deliver materials and products in labeled packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with
23 manufacturer’s instructions, recommendations and material safety data sheets. Protect from
24 damage from sunlight, weather, excessive temperatures and construction operations. Remove
25 damaged material from the site and dispose of in accordance with applicable regulations.
26 1. Do not double-stack pallets of membrane on the job site. Provide cover on top and all
27 sides, allowing for adequate ventilation.
28 2. Protect mastic and adhesive from moisture and potential sources of ignition.
29 3. Store drainage composite or protection board flat and off the ground. Provide cover on
30 top and all sides.
31 B. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, but minimize on-site storage.
32
34 A. Perform work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions are within the limits
35 established by the manufacturer of the materials and products used.
36 B. Proceed with installation only when substrate construction and preparation work is complete and in
37 condition to receive sheet membrane waterproofing.
38
39 1.8 WARRANTY
40 A. Provide a written 2-year contractor’s workmanship warranty.
41 B. Sheet Membrane Waterproofing: Provide written 5-year material warranty issued by the membrane
42 manufacturer upon completion of the work.
43
45
46 2.1 MATERIALS
47 A. Self-adhering Sheet Membrane Waterproofing: self-adhesive, cold-applied composite sheet
48 consisting of a thickness of 1.4 mm (0.056 in.) of rubberized asphalt and 0.1 mm (0.004 in.) of
49 cross-laminated, high density polyethylene film. Provide rubberized asphalt membrane covered
50 with a release sheet, which is removed during installation. No special adhesive or heat shall be
51 required to form laps. Such as: Bituthene 3000/Low Temperature Membrane by Grace
52 Construction Products.
53 B. Sheet Membrane Waterproofing

SHEET WATERPROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES FOR SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING:

Property Test Method Typical Value
Color Dark gray-black
Thickness ASTM D 3767 Method A 1.5 mm (0.060 in.) nominal
Flexibility, 180° bend over ASTM D 1970 Unaffected
25 mm (1 in.) mandrel at
-43°C (-45°F)
Tensile Strength, Membrane ASTM D 412 Modified1 2240 kPa (325 lbs/in.2) minimum
Die C
Tensile Strength, Film ASTM D 882 Modified1 34.5 MPa (5,000 lbs/in.2)
minimum
Elongation, Ultimate Failure of ASTM D 412 Modified1 300% minimum
Rubberized Asphalt
Crack Cycling at -32°C (-25°F), ASTM C 836 Unaffected
100 Cycles
Lap Adhesion at Minimum ASTM D 1876 Modified2 700 N/m (4 lbs/in.) – Bituthene
Application Temperature 3000
880 N/m (5 lbs/in.) – Low Temp
Peel Strength ASTM D 903 Modified3 1576 N/m (9 lbs/in.)
Puncture Resistance, Membrane ASTM E 154 222 N (50 lbs) minimum
Resistance to Hydrostatic Head ASTM D 5385 60 m (200 ft) of water
Permeance ASTM E 96, 2.9 ng/m2sPa
Section 12 – Water Method (0.05 perms) maximum
Water Absorption ASTM D 570 0.1% maximum
2
3 Footnotes:
4 1. The test is run at a rate of 50 mm (2 in.) per minute.
5 2. The test is conducted 15 minutes after the lap is formed and run at a rate of 50 mm (2 in.) per minute at -4°C
6 (25°F).
7
8 a. Prefabricated Drainage Composite: (Hydroduct® 220) (Hydroduct® 660) Drainage Composite by
9 Grace Construction Products. Drainage Composite shall be designed to promote positive drainage
10 while serving as a protection course.
11 b. Protection Board
12 i. Expanded Polystyrene Protection Board: 25 mm (1 in.) thick for vertical applications with
13 the following characteristics. Adhere to waterproofing membrane with Bituthene
14 Protection Board Adhesive.
15 Normal Density: 16 kg/m3 (1.0 lb/ft3)
16 Thermal Conductivity, K factor: 0.24 at 5°C (40°F), 0.26 at 24°C (75°F)
17 Thermal Resistance, R-Value: 4 per 25 mm (1 in.) of thickness
18 c. Liquid Membrane (for cants, terminations and penetrations): Bituthene Liquid Membrane, by Grace
19 Construction Products
20 d. Waterstop: Adcor ES hydrophilic non-bentonite waterstop by Grace Construction Products for
21 non-moving concrete construction joints.
22 e. Waterproofing Primer: Such as Permabarrier WB Primer, by Grace Construction Products.
23 f. Miscellaneous Materials: Surface conditioner, mastic, liquid membrane, tape and accessories
24 specified or acceptable to manufacturer of the sheet membrane waterproofing.
25
27
28 3.1 EXAMINATION
29 A. The installer shall examine conditions of substrates and other conditions under which this work is to
30 be performed and notify the contractor, in writing, of circumstances detrimental to the proper
31 completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
32
33 3.2 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATES
34 A. Refer to manufacturer’s literature for requirements for preparation of substrates. Surfaces shall be
35 structurally sound and free of voids, spalled areas, loose aggregate and sharp protrusions.

SHEET WATERPROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 B. Remove contaminants such as grease, oil and wax from exposed surfaces. Remove dust, dirt,
2 loose stone and debris. Use repair materials and methods which are acceptable to manufacturer of
3 sheet membrane waterproofing.
4 C. Cast-In-Place Concrete Substrates:
5 1. Fill form tie rod holes with concrete and finish flush with surrounding surface.
6 2. Repair bugholes over 13 mm (0.5 in.) in length and 6 mm (0.25 in.) deep and finish flush
7 with surrounding surface.
8 3. Remove scaling to sound, unaffected concrete and repair exposed are
9 4. Grind irregular construction joints to suitable flush surface.
10 D. Related Materials: Treat joints and install flashing as recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
11
12 3.3 INSTALLATION
13 A. Refer to manufacturer’s literature for installation requirements, including but not limited to, the
14 following:
15 1. Apply primer at rate recommended by manufacturer. Recoat areas not waterproofed if
16 contaminated by dust. Mask and protect adjoining exposed finish surfaces to protect
17 those surfaces from excessive application of primer.
18 2. Delay application of membrane until primer is completely dry. Dry time will vary with
19 weather conditions.
20 3. Seal daily terminations with troweled bead of liquid membrane.
21 4. Apply protection board and related materials in accordance with manufacturer’s
22 recommendations.
23
25 A. Remove any masking materials after installation. Clean any stains on materials which would be
26 exposed in the completed work.
27 B. Protect completed membrane waterproofing from subsequent construction activities as
28 recommended by manufacturer.
29
30 END OF SECTION

SHEET WATERPROOFING
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 07 14 16
2 COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING
5 1.2 SUMMARY
10 2.2 LATEX-RUBBER WATERPROOFING (WP-2)
11 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
12 2.4 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS
14 3.1 EXAMINATION
15 3.2 PREPARATION
16 3.3 PREPARATION AT TERMINATIONS, PENETRATIONS, AND CORNERS
17 3.4 JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT
18 3.5 WATERPROOFING APPLICATION
19 3.6 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION
20 3.7 PROTECTION
21 PART 1 - GENERAL

25 1.2 SUMMARY
27 1. Latex-rubber waterproofing.
28 2. Foundation thermal/protection insulation.
30 1. Section 07 21 00 “Thermal Insulation” for below grade perimeter insulation.
31 2. Section 09 30 13 "Ceramic Tiling" for fluid-applied waterproof membranes beneath ceramic tiles.

34 1. Review waterproofing requirements including, but not limited to, the following:
35 a. Surface preparation specified in other Sections.
36 b. Minimum curing period.
37 c. Forecasted weather conditions.
38 d. Special details and sheet flashings.
39 e. Repairs.

42 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, and tested physical and performance properties
43 of waterproofing.
44 2. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate.
46 1. Show locations and extent of waterproofing.
47 2. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside
48 corners, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions.
49 3. Include setting drawings showing layout, sizes, sections, profiles, and joint details of pedestal-
50 supported concrete pavers.
51

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 07 14 16 - 1 COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, including the following
2 products:
3 1. Flashing sheet, 8 by 8 inches.
4 2. Membrane-reinforcing fabric, 8 by 8 inches.
5 3. Insulation, 8 by 8 inches.
6 4. Drainage panel, 4 by 4 inches.

8 A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
9 B. Field quality-control reports.
10 C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.

12 A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by
13 waterproofing manufacturer.

15 A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures
16 recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer.
17 1. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate, when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent,
18 or when temperatures are less than 5 deg F above dew point.
19 2. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when such weather conditions are
20 imminent during application and curing period.
21 B. Maintain adequate ventilation during application and curing of waterproofing materials.
22 1.8 WARRANTY
23 A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace waterproofing that fails in
24 materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
25 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

28 A. Source Limitations for Waterproofing System: Obtain waterproofing materials from single source from
29 single manufacturer.
30 2.2 LATEX-RUBBER WATERPROOFING (WP-1)

31 A. Two-Component, Unreinforced, Latex-Rubber Waterproofing: ASTM C 836/C 836M; coal-tar free.
32 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
33 a. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn; Procor.
34 b. Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing; CCW-703.
35 c. Comparable product by Polyguard Inc.
36 2. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 65 feet minimum; ASTM D 5385.

38 A. General: Provide auxiliary materials recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer for intended
39 use and compatible with one another and with waterproofing.
40 1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
41 B. Primer: Manufacturer's standard primer, sealer, or surface conditioner; factory-formulated acrylic latex,
42 polyurethane, or epoxy.
43 C. Sheet Flashing: 50-mil-minimum, nonstaining, uncured sheet neoprene.
44 1. Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended contact adhesive.
45 D. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Manufacturer's recommended fiberglass mesh or polyester fabric.
46 E. Joint Sealant: Multicomponent polyurethane sealant, compatible with waterproofing; ASTM C 920,
47 Type M, Class 25 or greater; Grade NS for sloping and vertical applications and Grade P for deck
48 applications; Use NT exposure; and as recommended by manufacturer for substrate and joint conditions.
49 1. Backer Rod: Closed-cell polyethylene foam.
50

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2.4 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS

2 A. Nonwoven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Composite subsurface drainage panel
3 consisting of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core; with a nonwoven, needle-
4 punched geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 70 sieve laminated to one side
5 of the core and a polymeric film bonded to the other side; and with a vertical flow rate of 9 to 18 gpm per
6 ft..
7 2.5 INSULATION
8 A. Board Insulation: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation according to ASTM C 578, square or shiplap
9 edged.
11 a. DiversiFoam Products.
12 b. Dow Chemical Company (The).
13 2. Type IV, minimum compressive strength.
15 3.1 EXAMINATION
16 A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and
17 other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
18 1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended in writing by
19 waterproofing manufacturer.
20 2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and within the moisture limits recommended in writing by
21 manufacturer. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
23 3.2 PREPARATION
24 A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-
25 free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application.
26 B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other
27 construction.
28 C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, acid residues, and other
29 penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.
30 D. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections, and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids.
31 3.3 PREPARATION AT TERMINATIONS, PENETRATIONS, AND CORNERS

32 A. Prepare surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at expansion joints, drains,
33 sleeves, and corners according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and to
34 recommendations in ASTM C 1471.
35 B. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications, and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first preparation
36 coat when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
37 3.4 JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT

38 A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to waterproofing manufacturer's written
39 instructions and to recommendations in ASTM C 898/C 898M and ASTM C 1471. Before coating
40 surfaces, remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.
41 1. Comply with ASTM C 1193 for joint-sealant installation.
42 2. Apply bond breaker on sealant surface, beneath preparation strip.
43 3. Prime substrate along each side of joint and apply a single thickness of preparation strip at least 6
44 inches wide along each side of joint. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications and embed
45 a joint reinforcing strip in the first preparation coat.
46 B. Install sheet flashing and bond to deck and wall substrates where required according to waterproofing
47 manufacturer's written instructions.
48 1. Extend sheet flashings for 4 inches onto perpendicular surfaces and items penetrating substrate.
49

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3.5 WATERPROOFING APPLICATION

2 A. Apply waterproofing according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in
3 ASTM C 1471.
4 B. Apply primer over prepared substrate unless otherwise instructed in writing by waterproofing manufacturer.
5 C. Unreinforced Waterproofing Applications: Mix materials and apply waterproofing by spray, roller, notched
6 squeegee, trowel, or other application method suitable to slope of substrate.
7 1. Apply one or more coats of waterproofing to obtain a seamless membrane free of entrapped gases
8 and pinholes, with a dry film thickness of 90 mils.
9 2. Apply waterproofing to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces.
10 3. Verify manufacturer's recommended wet film thickness of waterproofing every 100 sq. ft..
11 D. Cure waterproofing, taking care to prevent contamination and damage during application and curing.
12 E. Install protection course with butted joints over waterproofing before starting subsequent construction
13 operations.
14 1. For vertical applications, set protection course in nominally cured membrane, which will act as an
15 adhesive. If membrane cures before application of protection course, use adhesive.
16 3.6 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION

17 A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall or deck substrate,
18 according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive or another method that does not penetrate
19 waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet
20 drainage panels during subsequent construction.
21 3.7 PROTECTION
22 A. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
23 B. Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates,
24 reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.
25 C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended
26 in writing by manufacturer of affected construction.
27 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 07 16 13
2 POLYMER MODIFIED CEMENT WATERPROOFING
5 1.2 SUMMARY
12 2.1 PREPACKAGED, POLYMER-MODIFIED CEMENT WATERPROOFING (WP-2)
14 2.3 MIXES
16 3.1 EXAMINATION
17 3.2 PREPARATION
18 3.3 APPLICATION
19 PART 1 - GENERAL

23 1.2 SUMMARY
24 A. Section includes polymer-modified cement waterproofing.
26 1. Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for the finishing of concrete walls and slabs to receive
27 waterproofing.


32 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, and installation instructions.
34 1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.2: For waterproofing for negative-side application, documentation
35 including printed statement of VOC content.
36 C. Samples for Verification: For each type of waterproofing indicated, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

38 A. Product Certificates: For each type of waterproofing, patching, and plugging material.
39 B. Product Test Reports: For each product formulation, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed
40 by a qualified testing agency.

42 A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in applying polymer-modified cement waterproofing similar in
43 material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with
44 a record of successful in-service performance.
45

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 071613 - 1 POLYMER MODIFIED CEMENT WATERPROOFING
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with application only when existing and forecasted weather conditions
3 permit polymer-modified cement waterproofing to be performed according to manufacturer's written
4 instructions.
5 B. Proceed with waterproofing work only after pipe sleeves, vents, curbs, inserts, drains, and other
6 projections through the substrate to be waterproofed have been completed. Proceed only after substrate
7 defects, including honeycombs, voids, and cracks, have been repaired to provide a sound substrate free of
8 forming materials, including reveal inserts.
9 C. Ambient Conditions: Proceed with waterproofing work only if temperature is maintained at 40 deg For
10 above during work and cure period, and space is well ventilated and kept free of water.
12 2.1 PREPACKAGED, POLYMER-MODIFIED CEMENT WATERPROOFING (WP-2)

13 A. Negative-Side, Polymer-Modified Cement Waterproofing: Manufacturer's proprietary blend of dry
14 cementitious and other ingredients for mixing with polymer admixture to produce a waterproof coating that
15 is suitable for vertical and horizontal applications below or above grade, is breathable, resists negative-
16 side hydrostatic pressure, and has properties complying with or exceeding the criteria specified below.
17 1. Water Permeability: Maximum zero for water at 30 feet when tested according to COE CRD-C 48.
18 2. Compressive Strength: Minimum 4000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C
19 109M.
20 3. Flexural Strength: Minimum 710 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 348.
21 4. Bond Strength: Minimum 220 psi at 14 days when tested according to ASTM C 321.
22 5. Color: White.
23 6. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction, but not
24 exceed 250 g/L.

26 A. Patching Compound: Factory-premixed cementitious repair mortar, crack filler, or sealant recommended
27 by waterproofing manufacturer for filling and patching tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other
28 imperfections and compatible with substrate and other materials indicated.
29 B. Plugging Compound: Factory-premixed cementitious compound with hydrophobic properties and
30 recommended by waterproofing manufacturer; resistant to water and moisture but vapor permeable for all
31 standard applications (vertical, overhead, and horizontal surfaces not exposed to vehicular traffic); and
32 compatible with substrate and other materials indicated.
33 C. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I.
34 D. Slurry-Coat Sand: ASTM C 144.
35 E. Trowel-Coat Sand: ASTM C 33/C 33M, fine aggregate.
36 F. Water: Potable.
37 2.3 MIXES
38 A. Prepackaged, Polymer-Modified Cement Waterproofing: Add prepackaged dry ingredients to mixing liquid
39 according to manufacturer's written instructions. Mix together with mechanical mixer or by hand to required
40 consistency.
41

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
2 3.1 EXAMINATION
3 A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for suitable conditions where
4 waterproofing is to be applied.
5 B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
6 C. Notify Architect in writing of active leaks or defects that would affect system performance.
7 3.2 PREPARATION
8 A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
9 B. Protect other work from damage caused by cleaning, preparation, and application of waterproofing.
10 Provide temporary enclosure to ensure adequate ambient temperatures and ventilation conditions for
11 application.
12 C. Do not allow waterproofing, patching, and plugging materials to enter reveals or annular spaces intended
13 for resilient sealants or gaskets, such as joint spaces between pipes and pipe sleeves.
14 D. Stop active water leaks with plugging compound.
15 E. Repair damaged or unsatisfactory substrate with patching compound.
16 1. At holes and cracks 1/16 inch wide or larger in substrate, remove loosened chips and cut reveal
17 with sides perpendicular to surface, not tapered, and minimum 1 inch deep. Fill reveal with patching
18 compound flush with surface.
19 F. Surface Preparation: Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, mortar spatter, grease, oils, paint, curing
20 compounds, and form-release agents to ensure that waterproofing bonds to surfaces.
21 1. Clean concrete surfaces according to ASTM D 4258.
22 a. Smooth-Formed and Trowel-Finished Concrete: Prepare by mechanical abrading or
23 abrasive-blast cleaning according to ASTM D 4259.
24 2. Concrete Joints: Clean reveals.
25 3.3 APPLICATION
26 A. General: Comply with waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions for application and curing.
27 1. Saturate surface with water and maintain damp condition until applying waterproofing. Remove
28 standing water.
29 2. Number of Coats: Two.
30 a. Coating Thickness: Maximum application thickness of 47 mils per coat for total thickness as
31 required for specified water permeability.
32 b. Apply first coat as a slurry with brush or roller, and apply subsequent coats with brush,
33 roller, spray, or trowel.
34 c. Vigorously work first coat onto the substrate, forcing the material into surface voids. Apply
35 each subsequent coat into full contact with previous coat.
36 d. Allow manufacturer's recommended time between coats. Dampen surface between coats.
37 B. Final Coat Finish: Smooth troweled.
38 C. Curing: Cure waterproofing for not less than five days immediately after application and prior to being
39 placed in service.
40 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 07 18 00
2 TRAFFIC COATINGS
5 1.2 SUMMARY
11 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
12 1.9 WARRANTY
15 2.2 TRAFFIC COATING (PTC-1)
16 2.3 TRAFFIC COATINGS FOR PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC
19 3.1 EXAMINATION
20 3.2 PREPARATION
21 3.3 TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS
22 3.4 PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC-COATING APPLICATION
23 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
24 PART 1 - GENERAL

28 1.2 SUMMARY
29 A. Section includes traffic coatings for the following applications:
30 1. Equipment-room floor.
32 1. Section 09 67 23 "Resinous Flooring" for fluid-applied, decorative resinous flooring that does not
33 serve as a waterproofing membrane with integral wearing surface.

36 1. Review requirements for traffic coating products and installation, including surface preparation,
37 substrate conditions, project and manufacturer's details, installation procedures, mockups, testing
38 and inspection requirements, protection and repairs, and coordination and sequencing of traffic
39 coating work with work of other Sections.

41 A. Product Data: For each type of product, including installation instructions.
42 B. Shop Drawings: Show locations for traffic coating system components. Show details for each type of
43 substrate, movement joints, corners, and edge conditions, including penetrations, transitions, and
44 terminations.
45 C. LEED Submittals:
46 1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.2: For interior field-applied traffic coatings, documentation including
47 printed statement of VOC content.
48

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 071800 - 1 TRAFFIC COATINGS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

3 B. Product Test Reports: Test data for traffic coating products and traffic coating system, by qualified testing
4 agency, indicating proposed traffic coating meets performance requirements.
5 C. Warranty: Sample of unexecuted manufacturer and installer special warranties.
6 D. Field quality control reports.
7 E. Product Certificates: For each type of traffic coating.
8 F. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

10 A. Installer Qualifications: A manufacturer-approved firm with minimum five years' experience in installation of
11 specified products in successful use on similar projects, employing workers trained by manufacturer,
12 including a full-time on-site supervisor with a minimum of three years' experience installing similar work.
13 B. Product Certifications:
14 1. VOC emissions per 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission
15 Standards for Architectural Coatings.

17 A. Accept materials on site in manufacturer's unopened original packaging.
18 B. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture, within temperature ranges
19 recommended by traffic coating manufacturer.
20 C. Construction Waste: Store and dispose of packaging materials and construction waste in accordance with
21 requirements of Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management"

23 A. Environmental Limitations: Apply traffic coating within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures
24 recommended by traffic coating manufacturer.
25 1. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect coating performance.
26 2. Do not apply traffic coating to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist or when dew
27 is present.
28 B. Do not install traffic coating until items that penetrate membrane have been installed.
29 1.9 WARRANTY
30 A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace traffic coating that fails in materials or
31 workmanship within specified warranty period.
33 a. Adhesive or cohesive failures.
34 b. Abrasion or tearing failures.
35 c. Surface crazing or spalling.
36 d. Intrusion of water, oils, gasoline, grease, salt, deicer chemicals, or acids into deck substrate.

40 A. Material Compatibility: Provide primers; base-, intermediate-, and topcoat; and accessory materials that are
41 compatible with one another and with substrate under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated
42 by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
43 B. Source Limitations:
44 1. Obtain traffic coatings from single source from single manufacturer.
45 2. Obtain primary traffic-coating materials, including primers, from traffic-coating manufacturer. Obtain
46 accessory materials including aggregates, sheet flashings, joint sealants, and substrate repair
47 materials of types and from sources recommended in writing by primary material manufacturer.
48

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2.2 TRAFFIC COATING (PTC-1)

2 A. Traffic Coating: Manufacturer's standard, traffic-bearing, seamless, high-solids-content, cold liquid-applied,
3 elastomeric, waterproofing membrane system with integral wearing surface for equipment-room floor;
4 according to ASTM C 957.

6 a. Tremco Incorporated.
7 2.3 TRAFFIC COATINGS FOR PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC

8 A. Traffic Coatings: Manufacturer's low-odor, low-VOC, interior and exterior exposure, pedestrian traffic-
9 bearing, seamless, high-solids-content, cold liquid-applied, elastomeric, waterproofing membrane system
10 meeting ASTM C 957, and SWRI validated.
11 1. Basis of Design Products: Tremco Incorporated, Sealant/Waterproofing Division; Vulkem
12 Mechanical Room Coating System 350/950/951NF.
13 B. Primer: Liquid primer recommended for substrate and conditions by traffic-coating manufacturer.
14 C. Base Coat: Aromatic Polyurethane.
15 D. Topcoat Aggregate: Manufacturer's standard aggregate for each use indicated of particle sizes, shape, and
16 minimum hardness recommended in writing by traffic-coating manufacturer.
17 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range

19 A. General: Accessory materials as described in manufacturer's written installation instructions, recommended
20 to produce complete traffic coating system meeting performance requirements, and compatible with traffic
21 coating material and adjacent materials..
22 B. Single-Component, Non-Sagging Polyurethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type NS, Class 50.
23 1. Basis of Design Product: Tremco Inc., Dymonic 100.
25 3.1 EXAMINATION
26 A. Surface Condition: Before applying traffic coating materials, examine substrate and conditions to ensure
27 substrates are fully cured and free from high spots, depressions, loose and foreign particles and other
28 deterrents to adhesion, and conditions comply with manufacturer's written recommendations.
29 1. Verify concrete surfaces are visibly dry, have cured for time period recommended by traffic coating
30 manufacturer, and are free from release agents, curing agents, laitance, and other contaminates.
31 2. Test surfaces following cleaning and abrasion specified below.
32 a. Test for capillary moisture by method recommended in writing by traffic-coating manufacturer.
33 b. Test for traffic coating adhesion per manufacturer's recommended method.
34 c. Notify Architect in writing of unsatisfactory conditions.
35 B. Proceed with installation once unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
36 3.2 PREPARATION
37 A. Surface Preparation: Clean, prepare, and treat substrates in accordance with ASTM C 1127 and traffic
38 coating manufacturer's written instructions.
39 1. Remove contaminants, curing compounds, and film-forming coatings from substrates.
40 2. Remove projections and excess materials and fill voids with manufacturer's recommended substrate
41 patching material.
42 3. Prepare surfaces to a uniform profile in accordance with ASTM D 4259 and meeting ICRI Surface
43 Profile CSP 2 - 4. Do not acid etch.
44 4. Clean prepared surfaces in accordance with ASTM D 4258.
45 B. Protect adjacent finished surfaces by masking. Mask termination point on vertical surfaces. Protect weep
46 holes and drains.
47

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3.3 TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS

2 A. Detail Preparation: Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at horizontal to vertical transitions, terminations,
3 joints, and penetrations through traffic coatings in accordance with ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written
4 instructions, using accessory materials specified.
5 1. At terminations of traffic coating exposed to traffic, rout 1/4 by 1/4 inch keyway in concrete.
6 2. Prepare non-moving shrinkage cracks, large cracks, construction joints, expansion joints, projections
7 and protrusions, penetrations, drains, and changes in plane in accordance with manufacturer's
8 written instructions and details.
9 3. Prepare joints and cracks in substrate in accordance with ASTM C 1127 and ASTM D 4258 and
11 B. Joint Sealant Installation: Comply with ASTM C 1193 and manufacturer's written instructions. Allow joint
12 sealants to cure adequately before coating with traffic coating.
13 1. Provide joint sealant cants with backer rods at penetrations and at horizontal-to-vertical intersections.
14 Tool sealant material to form 45 degree angle transition.
15 2. Rout and fill cracks with joint sealant and tool flush with surface.
16 3. Feather edges of joint sealant applications.
17 4. Allow joint sealant to cure. Apply detail coat of base coat over unfilled and filled cracks and joints,
18 and feather terminating edges.
19 5. Fill expansion joints with backer rod and joint sealant. Do not apply traffic coating over expansion
20 joints.
21 3.4 PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC-COATING APPLICATION

22 A. Primer: Prime metal surfaces, porous surfaces (when required), and preceding coats left uncoated for more
23 than 24 hours or that have lost surface tack, with manufacturer's recommended primer. Allow to cure before
24 proceeding.
25 B. Apply traffic coating according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written instructions. Use roller-applied
26 or self-leveling formulations as recommended by manufacturer for project conditions.
27 1. Verify that wet film thickness of each coat complies with requirements every 100 sq. ft.
28 C. Apply number of coats of specified compositions for pedestrian traffic coating at locations indicated on
29 Drawings.
30 1. Base Coat: Single application of not less than 40 mil.
31 2. Top Coat: Single application at not less than 15 mil.
32 3. Aggregate: Uniformly broadcast aggregate on coats specified to receive aggregate. Embed
33 aggregate according to manufacturer's written instructions.
34 D. Apply traffic coatings to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces to height indicated; omit aggregate
35 on vertical surfaces.
36 E. Cure traffic coatings. Prevent contamination and damage during application and curing stages.
37 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

38 A. Clean spills, stains, and overspray resulting application utilizing cleaning agents recommended by
39 manufacturers of affected construction. Remove masking materials.
40 B. Protect traffic coating from damage from subsequent work.
41 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 07 21 00
2 THERMAL INSULATION
5 1.2 SUMMARY
10 2.1 EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD [INSUL-1]
11 2.2 POLYISOCYANURATE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD [INSUL-2]
12 2.3 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKETS [INSUL-3]
13 2.4 MINERAL-WOOL BOARD [INSUL-4]
14 2.5 ACCESSORIES
16 3.1 PREPARATION
18 3.3 INSTALLATION OF SLAB INSULATION
19 3.4 INSTALLATION OF FOUNDATION WALL INSULATION
20 3.5 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION
21 3.6 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN VOID SPACES AND OPEN JOINTS
22 3.7 PROTECTION
23 PART 1 - GENERAL

27 1.2 SUMMARY
29 1. Extruded polystyrene foam-plastic board.
30 2. Polyisocyanurate foam-plastic board.
31 3. Mineral-wool blanket.
32 4. Mineral-wool board.

37 cost.
38 2. Product Data: For adhesives, indicating VOC content.
40 materials.

42 A. Product test reports.
43 B. Research reports.
44

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 072100 - 1 THERMAL INSULATION
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other
3 sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling,
4 storing, and protecting during installation.
5 B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:
6 1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment.
7 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project site until
8 just before installation time.
9 3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of
10 construction.
12 2.1 EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD (INSUL-1)

13 A. Extruded polystyrene boards also called "XPS boards."
14 B. Extruded Polystyrene Board, Type VII (INSUL-1): ASTM C 578, Type VII, 60-psi minimum compressive
15 strength; maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450, respectively, per
16 ASTM E 84.
19 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable product by
20 one of the following:
21 a. DiversiFoam Products.
23 c. Owens Corning.
24 2.2 POLYISOCYANURATE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD (INSUL-2)

25 A. Polyisocyanurate Board, Foil Faced (INSUL-2): ASTM C 1289, foil faced, Type I, Class 1 or 2.
30 a. Atlas Roofing Corporation.
32 c. Hunter Panels.
33 d. Johns Manville.
34 e. Rmax, Inc.
35 3. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved assembly.
36 2.3 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKETS (INSUL-3)
37 A. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of Pre-consumer recycled content not less
38 than 35 percent. Pre consumer = 70%. Post-consumer = 0%.
39 B. Mineral-Wool Blanket, Unfaced (INSUL-3): ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing);
40 consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively,
41 per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
46 a. Industrial Insulation Group, LLC (IIG-LLC).
47 b. Roxul Inc.
48 c. Thermafiber Inc.; an Owens Corning company.
49

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2.4 MINERAL-WOOL BOARD (INSUL-4)

2 A. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of Pre-consumer recycled content not less
3 than 35 percent. Pre consumer = 70%. Post-consumer = 0%.
4 B. Mineral-Wool Board, Types IA and IB (INSUL-4): ASTM C 612, Types IA and IB; unfaced, with maximum
5 flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 15 and zero, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing
6 ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. Nominal density of 4 lb/cu. ft..
9 a. Industrial Insulation Group, LLC (IIG-LLC).
10 b. Roxul Inc.
11 c. Thermafiber, Inc.; an Owens Corning company.
12 2.5 ACCESSORIES
13 A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids (INSUL-5):
14 1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-
15 developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84.
16 2. Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type II, closed cell, with maximum flame-
17 spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
18 B. Insulation Anchors, Spindles, and Standoffs: As recommended by manufacturer.
19 C. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation (TAPE-1): Product compatible with insulation and air and water barrier
20 materials, and with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging
21 insulation and substrates.
24 3.1 PREPARATION
25 A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of
26 puncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment.

28 A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications.
29 B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or
30 snow at any time.
31 C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with
32 insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
33 D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths.
34 Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total
35 thickness or to achieve R-value.
36 3.3 INSTALLATION OF SLAB INSULATION

37 A. On vertical slab edge and foundation surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's recommended
38 adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions.
39 1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches below exterior grade line.
40 B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger
41 end joints and tightly abut insulation units.
42 1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches in from exterior walls.
43 3.4 INSTALLATION OF FOUNDATION WALL INSULATION

44 A. Butt panels together for tight fit.
45 B. Anchor Installation: Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type
46 insulation anchors.
47 C. Adhesive Installation: Install with adhesive or press into tacky waterproofing or dampproofing according to
49 3.5 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION

50 A. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches o.c. both ways on
51 inside face and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other
52 obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions. Press units firmly against inside substrates.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 1. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece wall ties designed
2 for this purpose and specified in Section 04 20 00 "Unit Masonry."
3 3.6 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN VOID SPACES AND OPEN JOINTS

4 A. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent
5 gaps in insulation using the following materials:
6 1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling
7 a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft.
8 2. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.
9 3.7 PROTECTION
10 A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other
11 causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be
12 concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.
13 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 07 21 29
2 SPRAYED CELLULOSE ACOUSTICAL INSULATION
5 1.2 SUMMARY
11 2.1 SPRAY-ON SYSTEM
14 3.1 EXAMINATION
15 3.2 PREPARATION
16 3.3 INSTALLATION
17 3.4 PROTECTION
18 PART 1 - GENERAL

22 1.2 SUMMARY
24 1. Sprayed cellulose acoustical insulation (indicated as SAI-1 on the Drawings).
26 1. Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation" for foam-plastic board insulation.

29 B. Manufacturer's Written Certification:
30 1. Product contains no asbestos, fiberglass or other man-made mineral fibers.
31 2. Recycled Content: Minimum fiber recycled content shall no less than 75%.
32 3. Materials shall not contain any added Urea-Formaldehyde Resins.

35 B. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

37 A. Manufacturer shall have a current Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Code Evaluation Report.
38 B. Manufacturer shall be in compliance with the 2009 and 2012 International Building Code.
39 C. Manufacturer shall subscribe to independent laboratory follow-up inspection services of Underwriters
40 Laboratories and Factory Mutual. Each bag shall be labeled accordingly.
41 D. Applicator: Licensed by manufacturer.

43 A. Deliver in original, unopened containers bearing name of manufacturer, product identification and
44 reference to U.L. testing.
45 B. Store materials dry, off ground, and under cover.
46 C. Protect liquid adhesive from freezing.
47 D. Water to be potable.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 072129 - 1 SPRAYED CELLULOSE ACOUSTICAL INSULATION
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 2.1 SPRAY-ON SYSTEM

3 A. Performance:
4 1. Bond strength shall be greater than 100 psf per ASTM E 736.
5 2. Product shall be Class 1 Class A per ASTM E 84/ UL 723.
6 3. Non-corrosive per ASTM C 739.
7 4. Bond Deflection per ASTM E 759: 6” Deflection in 10’ Span – No Spalling or Delamination.
8 5. R-Value shall be 3.75 per inch per ASTM C518.
9 6. Comply with IBC 803.3/2009 IBC 803.10 stability requirements for interior finishes.
10 7. Meet ASTM C 1149.
11 B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide International Cellulose
12 Corporation - K-13 Spray-On-Systems or comparable product by one of the following:
13 1. Applegate Insulation.
14 C. Material:
15 1. Color shall be from Manufacturer’s standard color chart.
16 2. Comply with local Building Code requirements.
17 3. Material shall have been tested in accordance with ASTM E 1042. Testing laboratory shall be
18 NVLAP accredited.

20 A. Primer: Material recommended by insulation manufacturer where required for adhesion of insulation to
21 substrates.
23 3.1 EXAMINATION
24 A. Examine surfaces and report unsatisfactory conditions in writing. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory
25 conditions are corrected.
26 B. Verify surfaces to receive spray insulation to determine if priming/sealing is required to insure bonding
27 and/or to prevent discoloration caused by migratory stains.
28 3.2 PREPARATION
29 A. Clips, hangers, supports, sleeves and other attachments to spray bases are to be placed by other trades
30 prior to the application of sprayed insulation.
31 B. Ducts, piping, conduit or other suspended equipment shall not be positioned until after the application of
32 sprayed insulation.
33 C. Provide masking, drop cloths or other satisfactory coverings for materials/surfaces that are not to receive
34 insulation to protect from over-spray.
35 D. Coordinate installation of the sprayed cellulose fiber with work of other trades.
36 E. Prime surfaces as required by manufacturer’s instructions or as determined by examination.
37 3.3 INSTALLATION
38 A. Install spray applied insulation to achieve an average NRC as indicated on the Material Tag Index.
39 B. Cure insulation with continuous natural or mechanical ventilation.
40 C. Remove and dispose of over-spray.
41 3.4 PROTECTION
42 A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other
43 causes.
44 END OF SECTION

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 072129 - 2 SPRAYED CELLULOSE ACOUSTICAL INSULATION
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 07 27 15.13
2 NON BITUMINOUS SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS
5 1.2 SUMMARY
6 1.3 DEFINITIONS
13 1.10 WARRANTY
15 2.1 MATERIALS
17 2.3 NONBITUMINOUS SHEET AIR BARRIER (AB-2)
20 3.1 EXAMINATION
21 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
22 3.3 INSTALLATION
24 PART 1 - GENERAL

28 1.2 SUMMARY
30 1. Self-adhering, vapor-permeable, nonbituminous sheet air barriers.
32 1. Section 06 16 00 "Sheathing" for wall sheathings and wall sheathing joint-and-penetration treatments.
33 2. Section 07 42 13.13 “Formed Metal Wall Panels” for the weather barrier envelope system.
34 1.3 DEFINITIONS
35 A. Air-Barrier Material: A primary element that provides a continuous barrier to the movement of air.
36 B. Air-Barrier Accessory: A transitional component of the air barrier that provides continuity.
37 C. Air-Barrier Assembly: The collection of air-barrier materials and accessories applied to an opaque wall,
38 including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air movement through the wall.

41 1. Review air-barrier requirements and installation, special details, mockups, air-leakage and bond
42 testing, air-barrier protection, and work scheduling that covers air barriers.

45 1. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating each substrate;
46 technical data; and tested physical and performance properties of products.
47 B. Shop Drawings: For air-barrier assemblies.
48 1. Show locations and extent of air-barrier materials, accessories, and assemblies specific to Project
49 conditions.
50 2. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, counterflashing strips, penetrations, inside and outside
51 corners, terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining construction.
52 3. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of air barrier.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 072715.13 - 1 NON-BITUMINOUS SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 C. Sustainable Design Submittals:

7 B. Product Certificates: From air-barrier manufacturer, certifying compatibility of air barriers and accessory
8 materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in contact with air barrier.
9 C. Product Test Reports: For each air-barrier assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
10 1. Submit documentation from an approved independent testing laboratory certifying compliance with a)
11 the air leakage rates of the air barrier membrane assembly, including primary membrane, primer and
12 sealants have been tested to meet ASTM E2357, b) ICC-AC 38, c) Peel adhesion to unprimed
13 plywood and cyclic and elongation per ICC-AC 48, d) Class A flame spread index and smoke
14 development per ASTM E-84.
15 2. Submit documentation from an approved independent testing laboratory certifying the air leakage and
16 vapor permeance rates of the air barrier membrane, including primary membrane and transition
17 sheets, exceed the requirements of the Massachusetts Energy Code and in accordance with ASTM
18 E2178.
19 a. Test report submittals shall include test results of sustained wind loads and gust load air
20 leakage results.
21 D. Field quality-control reports.

24 manufacturer.

26 A. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.
27 B. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.

29 A. Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures
30 recommended in writing by air-barrier manufacturer.
31 1. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect air-barrier performance.
32 2. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist.
33 1.10 WARRANTY
34 A. Provide manufacturer’s published 12-year material warranty for air barrier membrane materials, sealant and
35 flashing membrane.
37 2.1 MATERIALS
38 A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary air-barrier materials and air-barrier accessories from single source from
39 single manufacturer.

41 A. Air-Barrier Performance: Air-barrier assembly and seals with adjacent construction shall be capable of
42 performing as a continuous air barrier and as a liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the
43 exterior incidental condensation or water penetration. Air-barrier assemblies shall be capable of
44 accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction
45 material changes, penetrations, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage
46 exceeding specified limits.
47

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2.3 NONBITUMINOUS SHEET AIR BARRIER (AB-2)

2 A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide BlueskinVP 160 manufactured
3 by Henry. or comparable product by one of the following:
4 1. Tremco, Inc., ExoAir 111.
5 2. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.
6 3. Cosella-Dörken Products, Inc.
7 4. GCP Applied Technologies Inc. (formerly Grace Construction Products).
8 5. VaproShield LLC.
9 B. Nominal 23-mil- (0.58 mm-) thick, self-adhering sheet consisting of a breathable carrier film or fabric and an
10 adhesive with release liner on adhesive side and formulated for application with primer that complies with
11 VOC limits
12 C. Physical and Performance Properties:
13 1. Air leakage: <0.004 CFM/ft2 @ 1.57 lbs/ft2 when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178,
14 2. Water Vapor Permeance: 29 perms to ASTM E96, Method B,
15 3. Tested to ASTM E2357 for Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies,
16 4. Resistance to Water Penetration: Pass ICC-ES AC 38
17 5. Water Penetration Resistance around Nails: Pass when tested to AAMA 711-05 & ASTM D 1970
18 modified,
19 6. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84: Flame Spread
20 Rating of 0 and Smoke Development Classification of 105,
21 7. Basis Weight: Minimum 160 gm/m2, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-410,
22 8. Tensile Strength: 40 lbF MD and 29 lbF CD per ASTM D828,
23 9. Average Dry Breaking Force: 127 lbF MD, and 91 lbF CD per ASTM D 5034,
24 10. Cyclic and Elongation: Pass at 100 cycles, -29 degrees C (-20 degrees F) per ICC-ES AC 48

26 A. Requirement: Provide primers, transition strips, termination strips, joint sealants, counterflashing strips,
27 flashing sheets and metal termination bars, termination mastic, substrate patching materials, adhesives,
28 tapes, foam sealants, lap sealants, and other accessory materials that are recommended in writing by air-
29 barrier manufacturer to produce a complete air-barrier assembly and that are compatible with primary air-
30 barrier material and adjacent construction to which they may seal.
31 B. Self-adhering membrane for window sill pan flashings shall be Blueskin SA, LT, or HT manufactured by
32 Henry; an SBS modified bitumen, self-adhering sheet membrane which is integrally laminated to a blue
33 polyethylene film. Membrane shall have the following physical properties:
34 C. Self-adhering membrane for all window jambs, headers, door openings, inside and outside corners, and
35 other transitions shall be pre-cut BlueskinVPTM 160 manufactured by Henry; a self-adhering sheet air barrier
36 membrane with an engineered film specifically designed to be water resistant and vapor permeable.
37 Membrane shall have the following physical properties:
38 D. Low VOC adhesive primer for primary self-adhering water resistive air barrier membrane, self-adhering
39 transition membrane and SBS modified bitumen membranes at all temperatures shall be Blueskin LVC
40 Adhesive as supplied by Henry; a low V.O.C. quick setting rubber based adhesive. Adhesive Primer shall
41 have the following physical properties:
42 E. Termination Sealant shall be HE925 BES Sealant manufactured by Henry; a moisture cure, medium
43 modulus polymer modified sealing compound having the following physical properties:
44 1. Compatible with sheet air barrier, roofing and waterproofing membranes and substrate,
45 2. Seals construction joints up to 1 inch wide,
47 3.1 EXAMINATION
50 1. Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other contaminants.
51 2. Verify that substrates have cured and aged for minimum time recommended in writing by air-barrier
52 manufacturer.
53 3. Verify that substrates are visibly dry and free of moisture.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

2 A. Clean, prepare, treat, fill, and seal substrate and joints and cracks in substrate according to manufacturer's
3 written instructions and details. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for air-barrier application.
4 B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other
5 construction.
6 C. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners and edges to
7 form a smooth transition from one plane to another.
8 D. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to another with
9 stainless-steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide continuous support for air barrier.
10 3.3 INSTALLATION
11 A. Install materials according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions and details to form a seal with
12 adjacent construction and ensure continuity of air and water barrier.
13 B. Prepare, treat, and seal inside and outside corners and vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and
14 penetrations with termination mastic.
15 C. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by
16 air-barrier sheet on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.
17 D. Apply and firmly adhere air-barrier sheets over area to receive air barrier. Accurately align sheets and
18 maintain uniform minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams, and stagger end laps to ensure
19 airtight installation.
20 1. Apply sheets in a shingled manner to shed water.
21 2. Roll sheets firmly to enhance adhesion to substrate.
22 E. Apply continuous air-barrier sheets over accessory strips bridging substrate cracks, construction, and
23 contraction joints.
24 F. Seal top of through-wall flashings to air-barrier sheet with an additional 6-inch-wide, transition strip.
25 G. Seal exposed edges of sheet at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed by metal
26 counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic.
27 H. Install air-barrier sheet and accessory materials to form a seal with adjacent construction and to maintain a
28 continuous air barrier.
29 I. At end of each working day, seal top edge of air-barrier material to substrate with termination mastic.
30 J. Apply joint sealants forming part of air-barrier assembly within manufacturer's recommended application
31 temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
32 K. Wall Openings: Prime concealed, perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors.
33 Apply transition strip so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate. Maintain
34 3 inches of contact over firm bearing to perimeter frames, with not less than 1 inch of full contact.
35 1. Transition Strip: Roll firmly to enhance adhesion.
36 2. Preformed Silicone Extrusion: Set in full bed of silicone sealant applied to walls, frame, and air-barrier
37 material.
38 L. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, doors, and miscellaneous
39 penetrations of air-barrier material with foam sealant.
40 M. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in air barrier. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters.
41 Patch with air-barrier sheet extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in all directions.

43 A. Protect air-barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, according
44 to manufacturer's written instructions.
45 1. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as recommended in writing
46 by manufacturer. If exposed to these conditions for longer than recommended, remove and replace
47 air barrier or install additional, full-thickness, air-barrier application after repairing and preparing the
48 overexposed materials according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions.
49 2. Protect air barrier from contact with incompatible materials and sealants not approved by air-barrier
50 manufacturer.
51 B. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed Work, using
52 cleaning agents and procedures recommended in writing by manufacturer of affected construction.
53 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 07 42 13.13
2 FORMED METAL WALL PANELS
5 1.2 SUMMARY
13 1.10 COORDINATION
14 1.11 WARRANTY
16 2.1 MANUFACTURER:
17 2.2 MATERIALS
18 2.3 FABRICATION
19 2.4 ACCESSORIES
21 3.1 EXAMINATION
22 3.2 PREPARATION
23 3.3 INSTALLATION
24 3.4 TOLERANCES
25 3.5 PROTECTION
26 3.6 CLEANING
27 PART 1 - GENERAL

31 1.2 SUMMARY
33 1. Zinc alloy metal plate wall panels in an open joint rain screen assembly.
35 1. Section 05 40 00 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Wall panel substrates support framing.
36 2. Section 06 16 00 – Sheathing: Plywood substrate wall sheathing
37 3. Section 07 27 15 – Non-bituminous Self-adhering Sheet Air Barriers: Air and moisture barrier
38 required as part of metal wall panel assembly.
39 4. Section 07 62 00 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Field formed flashings and other sheet metal
40 work.

42 A. Coordination: Coordinate panel assemblies with rain drainage, flashing, trim, stud back-up, soffits, and other
43 adjoining work.
44 B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
45 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, metal panel Installer, metal panel
46 manufacturer's representative, structural-support Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with
47 or affects metal panels, including installers of doors, windows, and louvers.
48 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel,
49 equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
50 3. Review methods and procedures related to metal panel installation, including manufacturer's written
51 instructions.
52 4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment between and
53 attachment to structural members.
54 5. Review flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and condition of other
55 construction that affect metal panels.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 07421313 - 1 FORMED METAL WALL PANELS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests and inspections
2 if applicable.
3 7. Review temporary protection requirements for metal panel assembly during and after installation.
4 8. Review of procedures for repair of metal panels damaged after installation.
5 9. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy of
6 record to each participant.

8 A. Product Data: Submit for each type of product indicated, include construction details, material descriptions,
9 dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of metal plate wall panel and
10 accessory.
11 B. Sustainable Design Submittals LEED Reports:
12 1. Submit documentation from manufacturer for amounts of pre-consumer and post-consumer recycled
13 content for products specified, and include statement indicating costs for materials having recycled
14 content.
15 2. Submit documentation showing manufacturing location, and location of harvested raw materials.
17 cost.
18 C. Shop Drawings: Submit fabrication and installation layouts of metal plate wall panels; including details of
19 edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures,
20 and accessories; and special details.
21 1. Provide distinction between factory-assembled, shop-assembled, and field-assembled work.
22 2. Provide details of following items at full scale.
23 a. Manufacturer’s standard sheet metal trims.
24 b. Components of wall panel construction, anchorage methods, and hardware.
25 D. Coordination Drawings: Submit exterior elevations, drawn to scale, that have the following items shown and
26 coordinated with each other, using input from installers of these items as follows:
27 1. Metal plate wall panels and attachments.
28 2. Girts.
29 3. Wall-mounted items including doors, windows, louvers, and lighting fixtures.
30 4. Penetrations of wall by pipes and utilities.
31 E. Samples: Submit for each type of exposed finish required, and prepared on samples of size indicated below:
32 1. Zinc Alloy Metal Plate Wall Panels: At least 6 inch by 6 inch.
33 F. Test and Inspection Reports: Submit test and inspection reports on each type of wall panel system provided
34 for project based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by qualified testing agency.
35 G. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for metal plate wall panels

38 B. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
39 C. Field quality-control reports.
40 D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and
41 registered with manufacturer.

43 A. Maintenance Data: For metal panels to include in maintenance manuals.

45 A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
46 at least five years of documented experience.
47 B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section and approved by manufacturer.
48 1. Install system in strict compliance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.
49 C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal plate wall panel from single source and from single
50 manufacturer.
51 D. Mockup: Refer to Section 01 43 39 – Mockups for description of construction required to complete a
53 1. Corner of metal panel cladding system MTLP-1 at external corner, and at curtain wall jamb. Base
54 size on at least three typical panel heights per the enlarged elevations and one panel width per
55 manufacturer’s typical panel sizes for the design intent.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 A. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly
3 identifying product name and manufacturer.
4 B. Storage and Handling: Store materials in clean, dry, interior area in accordance with manufacturer’s
5 instructions.
6 C. Deliver panels, components, and other manufactured items without damage or deformation.
7 D. Protect panels during transportation, handling, and installation from weather, excessive temperatures and
8 construction operations.
9 E. Handle panels in strict compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations, and in a manner
10 to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.
11 1. Store panels vertically with top of panel down, storage of panels horizontally is not permitted.
12 F. Store panels covered with suitable weather tight and ventilated covering.
13 G. Provide storage of panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of moisture.
14 H. Do not store panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface
15 damage.
16 I. Remove strippable protective covering from zinc alloy panel only after installation.

18 A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit
19 assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty
20 requirements.
21 1.10 COORDINATION
22 A. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of soffits, and other
23 adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
24 1.11 WARRANTY
25 A. Wall System Warranty: Provide wall panel manufacturer warranty, agreeing to correct defects in
26 manufacturing of materials within one year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
28 a. Structural failures, including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.
29 b. Deterioration: Beyond normal weathering of wall system metals and other materials.
30 B. Panel Material Warranty: Provide panel material manufacturer warranty, agreeing to repair finish of metal
31 plate wall panels that show evidence of corrosive deterioration within specified warranty period.
32 1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from Date of Substantial Completion.
34 2.1 MANUFACTURER
35 A. Dri-Design – Zinc Alloy Wall Panel System (MTLP-1).
36 B. Zinc Alloy Plate Material Supplier:
37 1. Unicore Building Products; Product Architectural Zinc, VMZINC®

39 A. Metal Plate Wall Panel Assembly: Metal plate wall panels, attachment system components, miscellaneous
40 metal framing, and accessories necessary for a complete weather tight wall system based on AAMA CW-
41 RS-1
42 B. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content:
43 1. Post-consumer content: 17%.
44 2. Pre-consumer (Post-industrial) content: 35%.
45 C. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following
46 loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592:
47 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
48 2. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/180 of the span.
49 3. Provide systems tested in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M and certified to be without permanent
50 deformation or failure of structural members.
51 D. Metal Plate Wall Panel Assemblies: Comply with performance requirements without failure due to defective
52 manufacturing, fabrication, installation, or other construction defects.
53

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 E. Design, fabricate, and erect a dry joint, pressure equalized rainscreen zinc alloy wall panel system without
2 use of sealants, gaskets, or butyl tape, tested as installed in compliance with AAMA 508, and as follows:
3 1. Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential: Pass cycled pressure loading at 25 psf in 100 three-second
4 cycles in accordance with ASTM E1233/E1233M.
5 2. Air Infiltration: Pass when tested at 1.57 psf (25 mph) in accordance with ASTM E283.
6 3. Water Penetration:
7 a. Static: Pass water penetration test under 25.0 psf positive static air pressure difference for at
8 least 15 minutes with 5 gallons per sf per hour of water applied in accordance with ASTM
9 E331.
10 b. Dynamic: Pass water penetration test under 15.0 psf dynamic pressure difference for at least
11 15 minutes with 5 gallons per sf per hour of water applied in accordance with AAMA 501.1.
12 4. Structural: Provide systems tested in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M and certified to be without
13 permanent deformation or failure of structural members.
14 5. System Thermal Design: Installed insulation and CFS clip system, sub-framing, clips and cladding
15 attachment shall not have thermal bridging of fasteners or framing that creates a continuous metal
16 path from exterior surface of insulation to interior face of insulation.
17 2.3 MATERIALS
18 A. Zinc Alloy Plate: Alloy and temper as recommended by manufacturer for application, Architectural Rolled
19 Zinc, Type 1-Cut from Strip, in accordance with ASTM B69 and manufacturers performance requirements.
20 1. Thickness: [1.0 mm (0.039 inch)] or [1.5 mm (0.059 inch)].
21 2. Tensile Strength: Range of 14 to 38 ksi; ASTM B69.
22 3. Hardness: Range of 54 to 74; in accordance with Rockwell tester for 15T scale; ASTM E18.
23 B. Panel Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
24 C. Panel Size: As indicated on Drawings.
25 D. Panel Joints: As indicated on Drawings.
26 E. Color:
27 1. Preweathered Zinc:
28 a. Quartz Zinc; zinc finish with dark grey aspect.
29 2.4 FABRICATION
30 A. Fabricate and finish wall panels within manufacturer’s facilities and fulfill indicated performance requirements
31 demonstrated by laboratory testing.
32 1. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.
33 2.5 ACCESSORIES
34 A. Metal Plate Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal plate wall panel
35 assembly including trim, copings, fascia, mullions, sills, corner units, flashings, and similar items. Match
36 material and finish of panels unless otherwise indicated.
37 B. Provide integral drainage system and manufactures standard extrusions at termination of dissimilar
38 materials.
39 C. Flashing and Trim: Match material, finish, and color of adjacent wall panels.
40 1. Thickness: At least 0.040 inch.
41 2. Refer to Section 07 62 00.
42 D. Panel Fasteners: Designed to withstand design loads, with at least 7/16 inch diameter head and neoprene
43 washer.
44 1. Material: Provide stainless steel fasteners.
45 E. Sub-Girts: Galvanized, provide size and gage in accordance with project requirements.
46 1. Furring Channel: Provide Hat, C, U or Z type as recommended by manufacturer.
47 2. Flat Strap: At least 14 gage, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick.
49 F. CFS Clip (CLIP-1): Provide CFS GreenGirt Clip consisting of polyester and vinyl ester bioresin matrix (FRP)
50 with recycled materials, fire retardant additives and integral continuous metal inserts the length of clip profile.
51 Reinforce CFS clip with glass strand rovings used internally for longitudinal (lengthwise) strength and
52 continuous strand glass mats or stitched reinforcements used internally for transverse (crosswise) strength.
53 1. Length of Clip: 6 inch long.
54 2. Depth of Clip; Refer to Drawings or as required.
55 3. Grid Spacing of CFS Clips; Horizontally & Vertically: Refer to Drawings or as required.
56 G. Substrate Wall Sheathing: Plywood, PS 1, Grade C-D, Exposure I, at least 5/8 inch thick.
57 1. Refer to Drawings and Section 06 16 00 for requirements.
58

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 H. Air/Weather Barriers: Provide climate specific weather barrier with performance characteristics for air
2 penetration, water vapor transmission, and water penetration resistance.
3 1. Refer to Section 07 27 15 for requirements.
5 3.1 EXAMINATION
6 A. Examine substrates, and Work areas and conditions with Installer present for compliance with requirements
7 for installation tolerances, wall panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of this Work.
8 B. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural wall panel support
9 members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances required by wall panel
10 manufacturer.
11 C. Verify that weather barrier has been installed over sheathing or substrate to prevent air infiltration or water
12 penetration.
13 D. Examine rough-in for components and systems penetrating wall panels to coordinate actual penetration
14 locations relative to wall panel joint locations prior to installation.
15 E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
16 3.2 PREPARATION
17 A. Miscellaneous Framing: Install sub-girt, base angles, sills, furring, and other wall panel support members
18 and provide anchorage in accordance with ASTM C754 for gypsum panel type substrates and panel
19 manufacturer’s installation instructions.
20 3.3 INSTALLATION
21 A. Assemble CFS clip system using manufacturer’s standard procedures and processes identical to tested
22 units and as necessary to comply with performance requirements indicated.
23 1. Install CFS clip system in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
24 2. Comply with CFS clip system and dimensional and structural requirements as indicated on drawings.
25 3. Erect CFS clip system in established sequence in accordance with manufacturer’s standard
26 installation procedures.
27 4. Provide spray foam sealant on backside of cantilevered fasteners that completely puncture insulation
28 layer.
29 B. Install wall panels in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, including pressure equalized
30 rainscreen installation method and installation guidelines.
31 1. Wall panels consist of single sheets of metal formed with interlocking gutter and drainage system
32 integral to the panel with single horizontal attachment for dry-joint rainscreen assembly.
33 2. Use of secondary drainage channels, brackets, support pins, joint sealants or gaskets to manage the
34 drainage of wall panel system is not permitted.
35 3. Attach wall panels using progressive interlocking method, engaging bottom of panel in top of previous
36 panel working bottom up, and left to right.
37 4. Install wall panels with single top attachment in pre-punched holes to allow individual panels to move
38 due to thermal expansion.
39 5. Do not compromise internal gutter.
40 C. Installers shall wear gloves and long sleeve shirts to prevent oils on fingers and skin from leaving marks on
41 zinc alloy surfaces.
42 1. Use mineral oil approved by zinc alloy supplier to remove finger prints.
43 D. To limit damage due to galvanic action on metal panels from water flowing over surfaces, install metals in
44 the following order from top to bottom; aluminum, zinc, galvalume, lead, and copper.
45 E. Install wall panels for orientation, sizes, and locations as indicated on Drawings.
46 F. Install wall panels with proper anchorage and other components for this Work securely in place.
47 G. Install wall panels with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
48 H. Install shims to plumb substrates as necessary for installation of wall panels.
49 I. Install weather tight seals at perimeter of wall panel openings.
50 1. Test for proper adhesion on small unexposed area of solid surfacing prior to use.
52 J. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's installation guidelines, and
53 SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
54 1. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated.
55 2. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
56 3. Install flashing and trim as wall panel Work proceeds.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 K. Install weather tight escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.
2 L. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against
3 galvanic action as recommended by wall panel manufacturer.
4 M. Install attachment system to support wall panels and with provisions to provide a complete weather tight wall
5 system, including sub girts, extrusions, flashings and trim.
6 1. Include attachment to supports and trims at locations using dissimilar materials.
7 2. Do not apply sealants to joints, unless noted otherwise on Drawings or Shop Drawings.
8 3. Install starter extrusion at base course and at cut panel locations.
9 N. Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weather tight mounting and provisions for thermal
10 expansion, and coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
11 1. Install components required for a complete wall panel assembly including trim, copings, flashings
12 and other accessory items.
13 O. Weather Barrier: Install weather barrier behind wall panels and over substrate in accordance with
14 requirements of Section 07 27 15.
15 3.4 TOLERANCES
16 A. Shim and align wall panel units with installed tolerances of 1/4 inch in 20 feet, non-cumulative, on level,
17 plumb, and location lines as indicated.
18 3.5 PROTECTION
19 A. Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction.
20 B. Provide protection of wall panels as necessary due to cleaning of adjacent materials with chemicals that
21 may harm wall panel finish.
22 C. Replace wall panels damaged or deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor
23 repair procedures.
24 3.6 CLEANING
25 A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless
26 otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal panel
27 installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean
28 condition during construction.
29 B. After metal panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant.
30 C. Upon completion of wall panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by panel manufacturer
31 and panel material supplier.
32 D. Clean zinc surfaces of fingerprints immediately with wall panel manufacturer approved mineral oil.
33 E. Upon completion of wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions and dirt.
34 END OF SECTION

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 07 52 13
2 APP MODIFIED ASPHALT BITUMINOUS ROOFING (OPTION A)
3
6 1.2 WORK INCLUDED
10 1.6 REFERENCES
11 1.7 DEFINITIONS
12 1.8 SPECIAL ROOFING CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS
13 1.9 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE
14 1.10 SUBMITTALS - ROOFING
15 1.11 SUBMITTALS – VEGETATED ROOF ASSEMBLIES
19 1.15 VEGETATED ROOF PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
24 2.2 MATERIALS
26 ROOFING
27 3.1 DEFINITIONS
28 3.2 EXAMINATION
30 3.4 OTHER REPAIRS AND CONSTRUCTION
31 3.5 ROOF MEMBRANE WORKMANSHIP
32 3.6 PHASED CONSTRUCTION CRITERIA
33 3.7 ROOF INSULATION INSTALLATION
34 3.8 ROOF MEMBRANE APPLICATION
35 3.9 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION
36 3.10 MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS
37 VEGETATED ROOF ASSEMBLIES
38 3.11 EXAMINATION
40 3.13 TRAY PLACEMENT
41 3.14 TRAY EDGER INSTALLATION
42 3.15 PLANTING
44 3.17 ADJUSTING
45 3.18 CLEANING
46 3.19 PROTECTION
47 3.20 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
48 3.21 ACCEPTANCE
49
50 PART 1 - GENERAL
51
53 A. The conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions) and the
56
57
58

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 075213 - 1 APP MODIFIED ASPHALT BITUMINOUS
ROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 1.2 WORK INCLUDED

2 A. This Section includes all labor, material, equipment and related services necessary to perform the
3 following Work:
4 1. Furnish and install new insulated two (2) ply 30-year NDL APP modified bitumen roof
5 membrane system.
6 2. Furnish and install new APP modified bitumen roof flashings.
7 3. Furnish and install new lead flashings at all drains and vent details.
8 4. Coordinate the installation of new metal work incidental to the roofing Work.
9 5. Furnish and install new surfacing.
10 6. Embed new surface granules into fluid applied and heat applied membrane areas at base
11 flashings only.
12 7. Repair or replace adjacent roof areas that are damaged by the roofing Contractor.
13 8. Tray-type Vegetated Roof Assemblies.
14 9. Vegetated Roof Assembly Accessories.
15 10. Provide an all-inclusive warranty as specified herein for the following systems:
16 a. Single Source Warranty for Vegetated Roof Assembly
17 b. Membrane Manufacturer’s No Dollar Limit Warranty
18 c. Extended Overburden Warranty for Vegetated Roof Assembly
19
21 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
22 and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
23 B. Section 02 41 50 – Historic Selective Demolition/Deconstruction
24 C. Section 07 01 90.71 – Historic Sealant Rehabilitation
25 D. Section 07 62 52 – Historic Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
26
28 A. The membrane Manufacturer shall have a minimum ten (10) years experience specializing in
29 modified asphalt roof membranes.
30 B. The applicator shall have a minimum five (5) years documented experience specializing in modified
31 asphalt roof membranes.
32 C. The roof insulation and membrane system must be applied by a roofing Contractor authorized by
33 the roof system Manufacturer.
34 D. The insulation system shall be manufactured by the roof membrane system manufacturer or
35 specifically approved for use in the specified roof membrane system in order to meet all stated
36 warranty requirements.
37 E. The applicator shall be licensed by the roof membrane manufacturer to install all roof membrane
38 insulation and vegetated roof assemblies.
39 F. The membrane Manufacturer shall approve all components used in the roof system.
40 G. At start of new membrane installation, Manufacturer’s Representative shall visit the job site to
41 ensure that the installation begins correctly with all installation procedures and guidelines being
42 followed and notify the Architect of his findings. Failure to notify constitutes acceptance of the
43 Work of his licensed applicator (the Contractor) by the Manufacturer.
44 H. Upon 50 percent completion of the project, the roof membrane Manufacturer’s Representative shall
45 inspect the installation for adherence to installation procedures and guidelines. The installation
46 shall be inspected more frequently if deemed necessary by the Manufacturer, Architect, Owner or
47 Contractor.
48 I. Upon completion of the installation, an inspection shall be made by the roof membrane
49 Manufacturer’s Representative to ascertain that the roof system has been installed according to the
50 applicable roof membrane Manufacturer’s specifications.
51 J. All the above indicated job visits shall be documented in writing by the roof membrane
52 Manufacturer’s Representative indicating all problems, concerns, recommendations and directives
53 given to the roofing Contractor regarding roof system installation. Copies shall be provided to the
54 Architect within ten (10) days of the inspection date.
55 K. It is the roofing Contractor’s responsibility to arrange the Manufacturer’s Representative’s
56 inspections.
57 L. There shall be no deviation made from this Specification or the approved shop drawing without
58 prior written approval by the Manufacturer and Architect.

ROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 M. Shop drawings of proposed alternate details shall be submitted to the Architect for approval prior to
2 the start of construction.
3 N. Proposed alternate details and application procedures shall comply with the Specifications,
4 Drawings and Manufacturer’s recommendations.
5 O. The Contractor shall keep a copy of the membrane Manufacturer’s installation instructions and
6 these Specifications on site at all times.
7 P. Vegetated Roof Assemblies Installer Qualifications: A qualified vegetated roof assembly
8 Installer, approved, authorized or licensed by vegetated roofing system provider, whose work has
9 resulted in successful establishment of vegetated roofs from pre-vegetated trays.
10 1. Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on
11 Project site when vegetated roof assembly work is in progress.
12 Q. Single Source Responsibility: Vegetated green roof components shall be from a single source.
13 Installer may request inspection or oversight during installation from the Green Roof Provider.
14 R. There shall be no deviation from this Specification or the Drawings. Installer assumes liability for
15 any deviations from Specifications and/or Drawings.
16 S. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall be qualified to install the vegetative green roof system. If
17 Installer does not meet the minimum requirements, Green Roof Provider technical representative
18 shall be present for at least 1 work day to verify training and module handling.
19 T. Roofing Inspection: By Owner or designated Waterproofing Provider to verify that the waterproofing
20 surface is approved for installation of the vegetated green roof system.
21 1. At a minimum, a slip sheet or protection layer (6 ounce non-woven geotextile or
22 equivalent) may be required to protect the work surface and waterproofing warranty. Verify
23 and document the need for a slip sheet or protection layer.
24 2. Verify existing roof loads and roof load limitations prior to hoisting green roof materials.
25 U. Once the green roof installation is complete, an inspection shall be conducted by a technical
26 representative of the Green Roof Installer and/or the Green Roof Provider to verify that the green
27 roof system was installed properly.
28
30 A. Materials and construction shall meet the following:
31 1. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Class A Fire Hazard Classification.
32 2. Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation (FM): Windstorm Resistance Classification, FM
33 Data Sheets 1-28 (September, 1991 Revision) and 1-49 (Class I-90 Construction); Fire
34 Classification, Class 1 (FM Approval Standards).
35 3. International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO)
36 4. Uniform Building Code (UBC).
37 5. Regional, State and Local Building Codes and/or Ordinances.
38
39 1.6 REFERENCES
43 3. Factory Mutual System (FM).
44
45 1.7 DEFINITIONS
46 A. Contract Documents: All specifications and Drawings that collectively describe the requirements for
47 construction of the Project.
48 B. Vegetated Green Roof: An area of landscaped planting constructed over a waterproofed substrate
49 and separated from the natural ground by a structure.
50 C. Vegetated Green Roof System: The complete system of materials and components which are
51 installed above the waterproofing and result in a vegetated green roof surface.
52 D. Extensive Green Roof: These extensive green roof systems are constructed in shallow soil depths
53 nominal 4-inches with hearty, drought-tolerant plants such as sedums, herbs and groundcovers. In
54 northern climates, extensive green roofs typically do not require permanent irrigation systems.
55 However, irrigation may be needed in semi-arid and arid climates. Extensive green roof systems
56 are low-maintenance and typically require occasional weeding or plant maintenance on an annual
57 basis.

ROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 E. Growing Medium or Substrate: An engineered, blended mixture composed of composted organic

2 matter and lightweight, coarse and porous aggregate. The substrate is blended to be lightweight
3 and conducive to vigorous plant growth.
4 F. Filter Fabric: Woven geotextile that is placed within the module (optional) prior to filling media to
5 reduce likelihood of fines being released via the drainage holes.
6 G. Sedum Tile or Mat: An integrated layer of sedum which covers the entire surface of growing media
7 in the green roof modules. The sedum may be grown in the modules from plugs or cuttings, or
8 alternatively pre-grown in a production field and harvested into tiles or mat and then rooted in the
9 modules.
10 H. Green Roof System Installer (or ‘Installer’): Company retained to install the green roof system as
11 per this specification.
12 I. Waterproofing Provider: Company that provides and/or certifies all materials required for installation
13 of the building/roof waterproofing, furnishes and verifies installation and water tightness and
14 confirms acceptability prior to installation of the Green Roof System.
15 J. Captured Water: Water that is retained in the drainage layer of a vegetated roof assembly after new
16 water additions have ceased and that cannot escape the roof except through evaporation or plant
17 transpiration.
18 K. Finish Elevation: Elevation of finished growing-media surface of planting area.
19 L. Planting Area: Areas to be planted.
20 M. Plant; Plants; Plant Material: Vegetation in general, including trees, shrubs, vines, ground covers,
21 ornamental grasses, bulbs, corms, tubers, or herbaceous vegetation.
22 N. Growing Medium: Manufactured, lightweight soil mixture that promotes good growing conditions for
23 specific varieties of plants.
24 O. FLL Greenroof Guidelines: German Guidelines for Planning, Execution, and Upkeep of Green Roof
25 Sites, Current Release. Worldwide acknowledged state-of-the-art technology as scientific
26 foundation for successful and thriving green roofs.
27 P. FM Approval: Class Number 4477, Approval Standard for Vegetated Roof System.
28
30 A. The Contractor shall provide a Project Foreman with a minimum of five (5) years documented
31 experience in the supervision of roof system and vegetated roof assembly installation and shall be
32 knowledgeable in the type of roof system specified herein.
33 B. The Contractor shall not change Foreman or crew without prior approval of the Architect.
34 C. The Contractor’s Foreman shall be present on the job site during the majority of work hours and
35 shall be accessible at all times to ensure good Project coordination and communication.
36 D. During the workday should the weather conditions appear to be changing adversely, the Foreman
37 shall take preventative measures to allow the roof to be closed to a watertight condition to avoid
38 exposure of buildings, equipment and materials.
39 E. All Work that requires saw cutting, vacuuming and other similar functions that create substantial
40 noise and/or vibration shall be coordinated well in advance of the Work with the Owner and the
41 Architect.
42 F. Prior to the start of any roof project, and daily after the start, the Contractor shall review the type of
43 space below the roof being worked on to ensure that all special requirements because of
44 occupancy are complied with prior to start of the Work.
45 G. Take all necessary precautions to protect the Owner’s property as well as adjacent property,
46 including trees, shrubs, buildings, sanitary and storm sewers, water piping, gas piping, electric
47 conduit or cable, etc. from any and all damage which may result due to work on this Project.
48 H. Repair any Work, damaged by failure to provide proper and adequate protection, to its original
49 state to the satisfaction of the Owner or remove and replace with new Work at the Contractor’s
50 expense.
51
53 A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at the Madison Municipal Building; 210 Martin
54 Luther King Jr Blvd., Madison, WI 53703
55 1. Attendance: Contractor, Installer, Owner Architect, Architect’s Roof Consultant, Architect’s
56 Landscape Architect, vegetated roofing system and membrane roofing system
57 manufacturer representatives, roofing installer, and those requested to attend.
58 2. Meeting Date: Minimum 2 weeks prior to beginning work of this Section, and to prior work
59 of related Sections affecting work of this Section.

ROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3. Agenda:
2 a. Discuss flood testing and other special considerations for this project.
3 b. Discuss expectations for slip sheets, protection course and vegetated roof
4 assemblies including, but not limited to: pre-vegetated trays, edging for trays,
5 stand-alone edging, stone mulch, and pavers on tabs.
6 c. Discuss post-installation care including establishment period and maintenance
7 regimen.
8
10 A. Submit shop drawings as required. Drawings shall show roof edge condition details, roof
11 penetration flashing details, standard roof section and all other details required for proper roof
12 system installation that are not shown in or that differ from the Specifications and Drawings.
13 B. Submit a list of materials for use in the Work.
14 C. Submit product data for membrane and flashing with temperature range for application of
15 membrane.
16 D. Submit current membrane Manufacturer’s installation instructions.
17 E. A total of three (3) copies of each submittal are required.
18 F. Submit copies of proposed manufacturer’s guaranty.
19 G. Submit written proof of contractor’s approval by specified system manufacturer.
20
21 1.11 SUBMITTALS - VEGETATED ROOF ASSEMBLIES
22 A. Product Data: For each vegetated roof assembly.
23 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and
24 profiles, and finishes.
25 2. Include material descriptions for each growing medium.
26 3. Include material descriptions for each plant type and characteristics.
28 1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and pre-consumer recycled
29 content and manufacturing locations for each system.
30 2. Product Data: For tray system product ingredients, disclose product ingredients, source,
31 manufacturing locations, and recycling options content conforming to LEED requirements.
32 3. Product Data: Include FM Approval Class Number 4477 certificate for tray system.
33 C. Shop Drawings: For each vegetated roof assembly.
34 1. Include plans, sections, and edger locations.
35 2. Indicate dimensions, weights, and loads.
36 3. Detail field assembly of components, depth of growing media, metal edger connections
37 (including corner pieces), and attachments to other work.
38 4. Note any deviations from the drawings or specs and any limitations of the proposed
39 vegetated roof assembly components or overall system.
40
43 1. Written submittal by manufacturer indicating that installer is certified as qualified to perform
44 the work of this section.
45 B. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product.
46 1. Manufacturer's technical data sheets for standard products.
47 2. Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory, according to methods established by
48 the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable.
49 3. Product Test Reports: For complete analysis of each growing medium, for tests performed
50 by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency or by a qualified testing
51 agency. Confirm that growing medium meets FFL Green Roof Guidelines.
52 4. Field quality-control reports.
53 5. Sample Warranty: For special warranties.
54
56 A. Deliver all materials in Manufacturer’s original, unopened containers with Manufacturer’s labels
57 intact and legible.

ROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 B. Store rolls of roofing membrane, cans and drums of cement, primers and coatings on end. Do not
2 use rolls of roofing membrane that have been flattened out of round and/or been used for
3 weighting.
4 C. Materials shall be stored so as to protect them completely from damage by the elements and
5 temperatures. Storage of materials on ground and/or rooftop shall be protected with waterproof
6 canvas covering and stored on raised platforms. The use of pallets or similar type equipment will
7 be acceptable.
8 1. Waterproof canvas covering shall be applied in a watertight manner and securely tied at
9 the end of each workday or work period.
10 2. Use of Manufacturer’s product protection wrapping is not acceptable for worksite type
11 protection. Wrapping shall be side-punctured or end-punctured or slashed before
12 covering with canvas.
13 3. No tears in the waterproof canvas covering will be allowed.
14 D. Material storage in warehouse, storage trailer, or tent is recommended.
15 E. Keep lids tightly sealed on all emulsions, solvent-based adhesives and cements to keep volatiles
16 from escaping.
17 F. Handling Materials
18 1. Do not store or transport roofing materials on the roof in a manner that may exceed the
19 live load capacity of the deck system or the structure. The Architect during routine
20 observations may make recommendations as to loading.
21 2. Do not transport roofing materials over or store materials on a finished section, without
22 prior approval of the Architect.
23 3. The Contractor’s Foremen shall have a hand held thermometer on the roof to check
24 application temperature.
25 G. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight,
26 certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and
27 Federal laws if applicable. Store away from sources of ignition and extremely high temperatures.
28 Avoid exposure to heat, sparks, and open flames.
29 H. Bulk Materials:
30 1. Do not dump or store bulk materials on or near structures, utilities, walkways and
31 pavements, or existing roof areas or plants.
32 2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials,
33 discharge of debris-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties,
34 water conveyance systems, or walkways.
35 3. Store growing medium in a dry area, free of contaminants which may adversely affect the
36 engineered blend, including weed seeds.
37 4. Accompany each delivery of bulk materials with product certificates.
38 I. Plant Materials:
39 1. Maintain health of plants as recommended by nursery guidelines prior to installation.
40 Store vegetated planters and materials over plywood panels or protective sheeting on the
41 roof.
42 2. Pre-vegetated trays may be stored in a cool location, below 75 degrees for a maximum
43 of 24 hours. Do not leave pre-vegetated trays in hot storage areas or sitting in full sun
44 locations on the project site or on the roof.
45 3. Provide water source for irrigating plants per manufacturer's recommendations.
46 J. Handle and store materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoid overloading roof structure or
47 damaging roofing membrane.
48
50 A. Do not apply roof membrane or base flashings during inclement weather or when air temperature is
51 below (or is expected to be below) 40°F (5°C).
52 B. Do not start tear off of existing materials when inclement weather is expected.
53 C. Vegetated Roofing Assemblies Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing
54 and forecasted weather conditions permit installation to be performed when optimum results may
55 be obtained. Install plant materials when temperatures are between 40 deg F (5 deg C) and 95 deg
56 F (35 deg C), except as otherwise instructed by manufacturer. Do not install if extended freezing
57 temperatures are expected or if ambient soil temperature is expected to remain below 50 deg F (10
58 deg C). Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written
59 instructions and warranty requirements.

ROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 D. Protect the roof deck and waterproofing membranes using appropriate materials such as plywood
2 sheeting. Avoid using sharp tools and keep the roof surfaces clean and free of soil, grit, or debris.
3
5 A. Vegetated roof covering system shall:
6 1. Support sedums and other vegetated groundcovers.
7 2. Provide efficient drainage of moisture that is in excess of that required for the vigorous
8 growth of the installed vegetation.
9 3. Protect roof waterproofing materials from damage caused by exposure to ultraviolet
10 radiation, physical abuse, and rapid temperature fluctuations.
11 4. Retain moisture in accordance with ASTM E2398.
12
14 A. Furnish two copies of the following to the Architect:
15 1. Contractor’s Warranty: The Contractor shall warrant, in writing, that the roof system shall
16 remain leak free for a period of two (2) years following completion and that the roof system
17 has been installed according to material Manufacturer’s current specification. The
18 warranty shall cover labor and materials. The MRCA printed guarantee shall be used as a
19 standard. Roofing Contractor shall verify that the Extended Overburden Warranty for
20 Vegetated Roof Assembly (see below) is covered by either the Roofing Contractor or Roof
21 Membrane System Manufacturer.
22 2. Single Source Warranty for Vegetated Roof Assembly: Provide materials and labor
23 warranty for both full roof assembly and vegetated roof system (including pre-vegetated
24 tray systems, metal tray edging, stand-alone metal edging, stone mulch, pavers on tabs,
25 and other individual components and assemblies that make up the Vegetated Roof
26 Assembly) for length of roofing membrane warranty along with removal of overburden.
27 a. Contractor and manufacturer should review this with Architect to confirm that the
28 system will meet all requirements of all intended warranties.
29 3. Membrane Manufacturer’s No Dollar Limit Warranty: The roof system Manufacturer shall
30 furnish a Cost of Repair/Replacement Manufacturer’s Materials Roofing Guarantee. The
31 guarantee shall include the costs of repairs or replacement of the membrane and flashing,
32 and insulation systems damaged as a result of the membrane failure and necessary to
33 stop leaks which occur during a period of THIRTY (30) years from the date of completion,
34 as a result of workmanship or deterioration of the membrane system or base flashing.
35 The guarantee shall cover both labor and materials.
36 4. Extended Overburden Warranty for Vegetated Roof Assembly: Manufacturer will provide
37 removal and replacement of vegetated roof assembly.
38 a. Warranty Period: Twenty years
39 5. Membrane Manufacturer’s Owner Service Manual: Provide for the Owner an
40 informational manual to include the Manufacturer’s approved emergency repair
41 procedures and materials, maintenance procedures and customer service information.
42
44 A. Maintenance Data: For vegetated roof assembly and plants, including a recommended
45 maintenance plan with procedures for inspection and care during a calendar year. Submit before
46 start of required warranty and maintenance periods.
47 B. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: From vegetated roof assembly Installer to Owner, in the form of
48 a standard two-year maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is
49 concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future
50 renewal options.
51
53
55 A. There will be no substitute roof membrane manufacturers considered for this membrane option
56 B. Roof Membrane, Insulation and Vegetated Roofing Manufacturer for this system option (Option A)
57 shall be Derbigum Roof Systems, Inc.
58 C. Obtain vegetated roof assembly components, growing medium, plants, and accessories from single
59 source from single manufacturer.

ROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 D. Provide products by Manufacturers specified herein which meet the approval of the specified
2 manufacturer. No non-approved materials will be used by the Contractor.
3 E. No material specified or approved shall contain asbestos.
4 F. All materials shall be new unless noted otherwise.
5
6 2.2 MATERIALS
7 Roof Insulation Membrane System:
8 A. Insulation – thickness as shown on the Drawings
9 1. Flat Stock:
10 a. Polyisocyanurate: ASTM C 1289 Type II and compressive strength of 25 pounds
11 per square inch nominal, dimensional stability of 2% maximum linear change (@
12 158F and 97% relative humidity for 7 days) and a curing time of 24 hours plus
13 an additional 24 hours per inch of thickness at a minimum of 60F before
14 Manufacturer shipment. Rigid board insulation with fiberglass facers such as
15 Derbiboard by Derbigum or manufacturer approved equal. No substitutions will
16 be allowed that would void the intended warranty. Fiberglass facers are required.
17 4’ X 4’ maximum board size for adhered application, 4’ x 8’ maximum board size
18 for mechanically attached application.
19 b. Cover Board: Gypsum Roof Board meeting ASTM C473; 1/2” nominal thickness
20 such as “DensDeck Prime” by G-P Gypsum Corporation or approved equal.
21 2. Tapered:
22 a. Saddles and Crickets: Tapered ASTM C 1289. (except as noted on the
23 Drawings, provide taper as required to achieve a minimum net slope of ¼” per
24 foot slope) tapered polyisocyanurate system with fiberglass facers, such as
25 “Derbiboard Tapered” by Derbigum or approved equal. All boards shall be
26 factory primed.
27 b. Tapered Polyisocyanurate Edge Strip: Tapered ASTM C 1289. tapered
28 polyisocyanurate system with fiberglass facers, such as “Gemini Series Tapered
29 Edge Strip” by Atlas Roofing Corporation or approved equal.
30 c. Pre-manufactured tapered sump: tapered ASTM 1289, such as “Panel Q Hinged
31 Target Sump” by Hunter Panels or manufacturer approved equal.
32 B. Asphalt: Hot asphalt may be used on this Project as an insulation adhesive only.
33 C. Adhesive: Polyurethane spray adhesive such as “Insta-Stik” by the DOW Chemical Corporation
34 (www.dow.com), two-component, low-rise, expanding, polyurethane adhesive such as "OlyBond
35 Classic" by OMG Roofing Products (www.olyfast.com) or approved equal or roofing asphalt may be
36 used to adhere insulation coverboard and saddles and crickets.
37 D. Base Sheet (only as required): ASTM D4601 Type II Oxidized asphalt coated fiberglass matt base
38 sheet such as PRS Glass Base by Derbigum.
39 E. Fasteners:
40 1. Insulation to metal deck: Fasteners shall be self-drilling, self-tapping, organic
41 fluoropolymer coated screws (minimum 30 Kesternich Cycles) with a minimum 0.222”
42 shank diameter with G-90 galvanized metal plate devices, minimum 2-7/8” hexagonal,
43 such as those manufactured by Olympic Manufacturing Group (www.olyfast.com), ITW
44 Buildex (www.itwbuildex.com), or DekFast (www.sfsintecusa.com), length as required.
45 Fasteners shall be FM approved for the specific use. In areas of metal deck with conduit
46 nested within the flutes of the deck, as identified by the Contractor prior to insulation
47 installation, “Lexsuco Clips” by GAF Materials Corporation (www.gaf.com) shall be used.
48 Fasteners shall be installed according to the Roof Insulation Installation Section of this
49 Specification.
50 2. Insulation to wood deck: Fasteners shall be self-drilling, self-tapping, organic
55 Fasteners shall be FM approved for the specific use.
56 3. Wood to wood: Fasteners (nails or lag screws) shall be galvanized and long enough to
57 penetrate into substrate 1-1/4”. Withdrawal resistance shall be 100 pounds per nail
58 minimum.

ROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 4. Wood to masonry/concrete: Fasteners shall be 1/2” minimum diameter metal expansion

2 stud anchors in pre-drilled holes such as “Kwik Bolt 3 Stud Expansion Anchor” by Hilti, Inc.
3 (www.hilti.co) or approved equal.
4 5. Wood to metal deck: Fasteners shall be self-drilling, self-tapping, organic fluoropolymer
5 coated screws (minimum 30 Kesternich Cycles) with a minimum 0.201” shank diameter
6 such as “Type 14-10 Heavy Duty All Purpose Screw” by Olympic Manufacturing Group
7 (www.olyfast.com) or approved equal (fasteners shall be long enough to penetrate metal
8 minimum ¾”).
9 6. Concrete Anchor – General: Other fasteners not specifically described shall be as
10 selected by the Contractor subject to approval by the Architect. All fasteners shall meet
11 the requirements set forth herein.
12 F. Fiber Cant: Nominal 4 X 4 perlite or 4 X 4 split lumber #2 grade or better, or as indicated on the
13 Drawings.
14 G. Insulated Tapered Edge Strips (as required): ASTM C 728 Type 1. Tapered perlite rigid board
15 insulation as shown on the Drawings such as “Tapered Fesco Board” by Johns Manville, or
16 approved equal.
17 H. Asphalt Primer: Refer to roof membrane specification section(s) herein for Asphalt Primer.
19 proper installation of the Work in this Section, shall be as selected by the Contractor subject to
20 approval by the Architect.
21
22 Roof Membrane System:
23 Bidder’s Note: Torch applied membrane system Derbicolor XPS-T6-FR (slate) may be used in any
24 combination acceptable to the manufacturer to achieve the specified warranty at the best possible price.
25 A. Base Membrane (this installation will require one (1) base membrane ply – refer to drawings): APP
26 modified asphalt base sheet meeting ASTM D6509 such as “Derbigum GP” by Derbigum Roof
27 Systems, Inc.
28 B. Surface Membrane: UL Class A, fire resistance rated, heat welded APP modified asphalt
29 membrane such as “Derbicolor XPS-FR” by Derbigum Roof Systems, Inc. with slate granules.
30 C. Base Flashing Stripping Ply: APP modified asphalt base sheet meeting ASTM D6509 such as
31 “Derbigum GP” by Derbigum Roof Systems, Inc.
32 D. Base Flashing Surface Ply: Torch applied, UL Class A, fire resistance rated APP modified asphalt
33 membrane such as “Derbicolor XPS-FR” by Derbigum Roof Systems, Inc.
34 E. Base Sheet over Lightweight Insulating Concrete: ASTM D4897 (fiberglass), Type II venting base
35 sheet such as “PRS Vented Base Sheet” by Derbigum Roof Systems, Inc.
36 F. Fluid Applied Flashing Membrane: “Derbigum Liquid,” is a two-component with catalyst, high
37 performance seamless and self-terminating cold fluid applied reinforced unsaturated polyester
38 membrane system, as manufactured by Derbigum Roof Systems, Inc., color shall be white.
39 G. Lead Flashing: FS QQ-L11-201, Grade B, 4 lb./sq. ft. lead at drain and plumbing vent details; 30”
40 X 30” required minimum dimension for drains and 12” required minimum roof flange dimension for
41 plumbing vents.
42 H. Termination Bar: Stainless steel, 1” high by 0.075” thick, with pre-drilled holes at 8” on-center as
43 manufactured by Advanced Building Products, Inc., Springvale, ME, or approved equal.
44 I. Field Membrane Cold Adhesive Mastic: Asbestos-FREE grade, “Permastic” by Derbigum Roof
45 Systems, Inc.
46 J. Flashing Membrane Cold Adhesive Mastic: Asbestos-FREE grade, “Perflash” by Derbigum Roof
47 Systems, Inc.
48 K. Fasteners (Miscellaneous):
49 1. Fasteners such as nails, screws and bolts, etc. shall be compatible with roof membrane
50 and flashing system. They shall be of type and size as shown on the Drawings,
51 recommended by the roof membrane Manufacturer or specified herein.
52 2. Screws used to secure metal to blocking shall be No. 8 minimum, galvanized penetrating
53 wood blocking a minimum 1-1/2” and shall have watertight neoprene washers under head.
54 The installed withdrawal resistance shall be a minimum of 150 pounds per screw.
55 3. Nails used to secure wood such as fascias, cant strips, blocking and nailers to other wood
56 members shall be galvanized and long enough to penetrate 1-1/4”. Two rows are
57 required, staggered when feasible. Spacing in any one row shall not exceed 24”. Spacing
58 shall not exceed 12”, 8’ each way from outside corners. Withdrawal resistance shall be
59 100 pounds per nail minimum. (Lag screws of equivalent strength may be used if desired.)

ROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 4. Fasteners used to secure lumber to masonry or concrete shall be 1/2” minimum diameter
2 metal expansion stud anchors in pre-drilled holes such as “Kwik-Bolt II Stud Expansion
3 Anchor” by Hilti, Inc. or approved equal. Space fasteners at 24” o.c. (maximum).
4 5. Fasteners used to secure lumber to metal deck shall be self-drilling, self-tapping, organic
6 shank diameter such as “Type 14-10 Heavy Duty All Purpose Screw” by Olympic
7 Manufacturing or approved equal (2-1/4” length required for 2x nailer or blocking). Space
8 fasteners at 12” o.c. (maximum). AND/OR nut, bolt and washer assemblies, 1/2”
9 minimum diameter, spaced 4’ o.c. and have galvanized metal or stainless steel
10 consistency. Stagger if lumber is 6” or wider. At outside corners fasteners shall be
11 spaced 2’ o.c., 8’ each way from the corner. Minimum withdrawal resistance shall be 800
12 pounds per fastener.
13 6. Fasteners used to secure metal to metal shall be hardened, self-tapping, sheet metal
14 gimlet point type, with hex/washer head and be of compatible material.
15 7. Other fasteners not specifically described shall be as selected by the Contractor subject to
16 approval by the Architect. All fasteners shall meet the requirements set forth in FM Data
17 Sheets1-28 and 1-49 as appropriate.
18 L. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41 asphaltic based primer such as PRS Asphalt Roof Primer by Derbigum
19 Roof Systems, Inc.
20 M. Cant: DERBICANT, new 1 ¼” x 1 ¼” x 2 or 2 ¼” x 2 ¼” x 3 ¼” regular bitumen cant strip.
21 N. Roof Drain Assemblies: Obtain replacement clamps, rings, and strainers. All strainers shall be
22 cast iron.
23 O. Lumber, Nailers and Blocking: #2 grade wood (lumber) or better with salt preservative pressure
24 treatment (0.40 pcf minimum retention).
25 P. Plywood: (Thickness as shown on the Drawings) APA exterior rated 4-ply CDX with salt
26 preservative pressure treatment (0.40 pcf minimum retention).
27 Q. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Piping: Conforming to requirements for Schedule 40, DWV pattern,
28 ASTM Specification D1785 and D2665.
29 R. Cap Flashing/Membrane Flashing: Ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM), 0.45 inches thick
30 in compliance with RMA IPR-1 and UL Class A fire rating such as “Carlisle SynTec Systems” by
31 Carlisle Corp. or approved equal.
32 S. Other Materials: All other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and
33 proper installation of the work in this Section, shall be as selected by the Contractor subject to
35 Vegetated Roof System

36 A. Tray-Type Vegetated Roof Assembly: Modular assembly consisting of manufacturer's standard
37 trays for field assembly adjacent to and interlocking with each other over roofing system.
38 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Derbigreen/Columbia Green Technologies Pre-Grown
39 Tray, no substitutions.
40 2. Tray Depth, Nominal: 4-5/8 inches (117.5 mm).
41 3. Tray Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm).
42 4. Tray Material: Injection molded, 100 mil polypropylene, 88 percent post-consumer
44 5. Tray Design: Trays must be fully interlocking and overlap adjacent trays by a minimum of
45 1/4 inch (6.5 mm). Tray bottom to have ridges and trough design to maximize air flow and
46 retain stormwater.
47 6. Connection Holes and Fasteners:
48 a. Four 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) holes, aligned and centered in each vertical side panel.
49 b. Plastic Tray Pin: Provided by manufacturer.
50 c. Hook and Plastic Tray Pin: For integrated drip irrigation. Provided by
51 manufacturer.
52 7. Growing Medium Depth: Manufacturer’s standard media depth for pre-grown trays.
53 8. Assembly Weight: Manufacturer’s given weight, fully saturated, is 30-32 lbs/sf. Assembly
54 shall not ever exceed 40 lbs/sq. ft., including growing media and plants and saturated with
55 captured water, but not including weight of roofing system.
56 9. Recycled Content: Trays shall have post-consumer recycled content of not less than 88
57 percent.

ROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 B. Growing Medium: Vegetated roof assembly manufacturer's lightweight, manufactured soil mixture
2 designed for Extensive Green Roof areas indicated in the drawings.
3 1. Basis of Design Product: Columbia Green Technologies; Extensive Growing Medium.
4 2. General Condition at Time of Planting: Free of aggregates 1/2 inch (13 mm) or larger in
5 any dimension; free of roots, plants, clods, pockets of sand, paint, building debris, oils,
6 solvents, roofing materials, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth; free of
7 weeds, disease-causing plant pathogens, and other undesirable organisms.
8 3. Maximum Media Density: ASTM E 2399, 80 lb/cu. ft. (1280 kg/cu. m) for growing-medium
9 mixture.
10 4. Maximum Media Water Retention: ASTM E 2399, 35 to 65 percent by volume for growing-
11 medium mixture at maximum media density per FLL Green Roof Guidelines.
12 C. Plants
13 1. Pre-grown Tray: Species provided by manufacturer, grown in tray to project specifications
14 with minimum 90 percent plant coverage. Match hardiness zone.
15 2. Sourced or approved by Columbia Green Technologies for warranty to apply.
16 3. Conform to Project landscape design requirements, recommendations of local
17 horticulturalists, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, including Fire Marshal,
18 for specific recommendations and regulations.
19 D. Access Boxes: Vegetated roof assembly manufacturer's aluminum drain boxes with removable,
20 rigid covers for accessing drains, valves, and switches beneath the finish elevation of growing
21 medium; secure each cover with four noncorrosive screws.
22 1. Size: 12 inches (305 mm) square by depth of vegetated roof assembly at each location.
23 E. Soil Retainer: Vegetated roof assembly manufacturer's extruded-aluminum edging.
24 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Columbia Green Technologies; Standard Tray Edger.
25 2. Tray Edger: 5.5 inch (140 mm) height 18 gauge aluminum with prefabricated tray pin
26 receiving slot for tray attachment.
27 a. Color: Mill finish.
28 b. Corners: Provide manufacturer's Prefabricated Standard Tray Edger Inside
29 Corner and Prefabricated Outside Corner at 90 degree corners. Match color to
30 tray edger.
31 3. Method of Attachment, Tray System: Tray edger is held in place by the weight of the
32 system. Use manufacturer's standard removable pin fastener to attach edger to sides of
33 tray.
34
36
37 ROOFING
38
39 3.1 DEFINITIONS
40 A. The term “phased construction” or “phased application” shall mean the roof system construction or
41 application process in which all parts of cross-section of a roof system (including vapor retarder),
42 roof insulation, roof membrane and surfacing are not completed for a particular roof area during
43 one day or work period.
44
45 3.2 EXAMINATION
48 Specifications.
49
51 A. Remove the existing construction to the extent shown on the drawings.
52 B. Do not cut the existing structural components.
53 C. Clean and dry substrate.
54 D. Deck Repairs: If deck repairs are required, the Contractor shall contact the Architect immediately.
55 (All required deck repairs shall be as directed by the Architect and shall be by Change Order.)
56
58 A. Replace all deteriorated construction not originally scheduled for replacement. Repairs shall be by
59 Change Order and as directed by the Architect.

ROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 A. All roofing work shall be accomplished with a Foreman fully trained and knowledgeable in the
3 application procedures of the specified roof membrane. The Foreman shall oversee the work of all
4 working personnel who are thoroughly skilled in the application of specified materials. All
5 workmanship to be of the very best quality and shall be done in such a manner as to fulfill the intent
6 of the Drawings and Specifications.
7 B. Bidder’s Note: Propane torch work will not be allowed at the surface membrane laps. Contractors
8 shall utilize hot air welding robots or other equipment approved by the Architect. Bleed-out will be
9 monitored closely.
10 C. Any propane torch work shall be pre-approved by the Architect and completed in accordance with
11 NRCA/MRCA CERTA program requirements. All propane equipment shall be handled by CERTA-
12 certified operators only.
13 D. Weather Condition Limitations: Proceed with roofing work only when existing and forecasted
14 weather conditions will permit Work to be performed in accordance with the requirements of this
15 Specification.
16 E. After starting the Work, the Contractor shall be responsible for complete moisture integrity of the
17 roofing and flashing membrane and for providing a properly applied roof. Therefore, the Contractor
18 shall:
19 1. Establish and follow application procedures to insure that adequate quantities of materials
20 are used.
21 2. Maintain competent Foreman continuously supervising the Work with authority to discard
22 unsuitable materials and remove unsatisfactory workmen from the Project.
23 3. Observe all fire precautions involving the storage and handling of roofing materials.
24 Provide adequate quantity of fire extinguishers at the worksite, especially at any open
25 flames.
26 4. Comply with current roofing safety standards at all times.
27 5. Supervise installation of and be responsible for seeing that roof mechanical and electrical
28 equipment, roof drains, etc. are properly set without damage to the roof. Make roof and
29 flashing repairs as necessary and advise the Architect in writing of all potential leaks as
30 may be caused by other trades not under the Contractor’s control.
31 6. Under no conditions shall any roofing materials be applied before sunrise, or at anytime
32 when there are indications of moisture present (rain, mist, dew, frost, and snow).
33 7. Install only as much roofing material as can be completed and covered in accordance with
34 the requirements of this Specification in any one day or work period.
35 8. Apply roofing membrane as directed by the Manufacturer and in strict accordance with this
36 Project Manual.
37 9. Avoid walking on membrane while being laid, roofing mechanic shall set and kick the roll
38 of roofing membrane from the insulation or deck side, not from the side previously covered
39 with roofing membrane.
40 10. Insure that all wheeled equipment on the roof be equipped with pneumatic tires.
41 11. Permit no traffic over, nor stack roofing equipment or materials on completed new roofing
42 surfaces without adequate protection with 1/2” plywood.
43 12. Insure that all fishmouths are cut (do not attempt to walk down) and objects causing
44 separation are removed. Patch the areas if the cut is made after the bitumen has set.
45 13. Install flashings at openings, projections and walls adjoining new roofing every day or
46 work period. If circumstances do not allow this, these areas shall be made watertight at
47 the end of each day or work period.
48 14. At the end of each day’s Work, install temporary water cut-offs at all points where the roof
49 membrane does not abut a wall, wood edge member or expansion joint. Water Cut-Off:
50 At end of day's work, or when precipitation is imminent, construct a water cut-off at all
51 open edges. Cut-offs can be built using plastic cement and roofing felts, constructed to
52 withstand protracted periods of service. Cut-offs must be completely removed prior to the
53 resumption of roofing. The water cut-off shall be removed completely before continuing
54 the roof installation. If breaks occur in the water cut-offs or any other part of the roof
55 membrane and water damages the roof insulation, all damaged roof insulation, vapor
56 retarder and roof membrane over the damaged insulation shall be removed and replaced
57 with new materials.
58 15. When using hot air welding equipment, follow all specified procedures outlined by the roof
59 membrane Manufacturer.

ROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 16. Comply with other workmanship requirements as outlined in other Sections of this
2 Specification.
3
5 A. Phased construction of the roof membrane, outside the normal recommendations of the membrane
6 manufacturer will not be permitted.
7
9 A. Insulation Attachment, All Deck Types:
10 1. Mechanically attached - Mechanically fasten base sheet or insulation, as noted on the
11 Drawings, in a Factory Mutual 1-90 pattern. Verify fastening pattern with Architect.
12 2. Loose-laid - Install insulation without attachment.
13 3. Foam Adhesive Adhered – Adhere insulation as noted on Drawings in full applications of
14 adhesive.
15 B. Install all base layers of insulation as indicated on the drawings.
16 C. The two opposite sides of any base layer insulation board shall be directly supported to provide the
17 maximum bearing width (minimum 1.5”). Board edges shall be trimmed as required.
18 D. Install insulation coverboard atop base layer as indicated on the Drawings (adhered with hot
19 asphalt or low rise foam adhesive).
20 E. Install tapered insulation for saddles and crickets as indicated on the Drawings (adhered with hot
22 F. Install cover board insulation as indicated on the drawings atop preceding layers of insulation,
23 including saddles and crickets. Cut or score insulation boards to conform to angles of new
24 substrate (adhered with hot asphalt or low rise foam adhesive).
25 G. Limit gaps to 1/8” maximum between boards. Stagger all board joints within the field of the roof.
26 Offset the end and side joints a minimum of 6” from the joints of the preceding layer.
27 H. Cover all installed insulation with roofing membrane by the end of each day.
28
30 A. Prior to roof membrane application, coordinate all HVAC work with the Owner’s HVAC
31 representative. Proper coordination of this work will be the responsibility of the Contractor.
32 B. Execute Work such that the membrane can be sealed on a down slope surface at the end of each
33 day.
34 C. Atop insulation install all modified asphalt membrane materials in strict accordance with the
35 membrane manufacturer’s requirements.
36 D. Install longitudinal runs of roof membrane at right angles to the main slope direction (at roof slopes
37 not exceeding 1/2” per foot) of the field of the roof (or continuous with the roof section’s long
38 dimension). Begin membrane installation at the low point of the roof. Shingle membranes such
39 that water does not run against seams and laps.
40 E. All membrane materials shall be laid free from wrinkles, buckles and voids and shall be turned up
41 and adhered or heat welded to cant strips and trimmed at vertical walls.
42 F. Membrane construction shall not be phased. “Phasing” shall be defined by the manufacturer.
43 G. At end of day's work, or when precipitation is imminent, construct a water cut-off at all open edges.
44 Cut-offs can be built using plastic cement and roofing felts, constructed to withstand protracted
45 periods of service. Cut-offs must be completely removed prior to the resumption of roofing.
46 H. At the end of every day, install “three-course” flashing system consisting of alternating layers of
47 reinforcement material and mastic to all wall terminations.
48
50 A. Install new wood blocking and metal where required and as specified in other Sections of this
51 Specification.
52 B. All rooftop equipment (including plumbing vents, base flashings, exhaust fans, skylights, vents,
53 etc.) shall be raised by the roofing Contractor with specified and/or approved material to provide a
54 minimum of 8” between the surface membrane and the top of the base flashing.
55 C. Install the base flashing according to the Drawings and roof membrane Manufacturer’s
56 requirements.
57 D. Nail at 8” o.c. top edge and vertical laps of the base flashing to the substrate.
58 E. Install “three-course” flashing system consisting of alternating layers of reinforcement material and
59 mastic to the tops of all exposed base flashings.

ROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 F. Extend plumbing vents as necessary to assure a minimum of 8” of flashing height as measured

2 from the surface membrane to the top of the vent stack. Furnish and install PVC piping with EPDM
3 couplers as required.
4 G. Install lead flashing at plumbing vents. Lead shall be installed in mastic over base sheet
5 underlayment and flashed with base sheet underlayment material (as shown on the Drawings) prior
6 to membrane installation. Prime lead prior to installation.
7 H. Install lead flashing at all drain locations. Lead shall be installed in mastic over base sheet
10 I. Prime all sheet metal that is to be stripped into the roof membrane. Allow primer to dry before
11 stripping in.
12 J. Comply with applicable recommendations of Factory Mutual Prevention Data 1-49.
13 K. All flashings on the section being rehabilitated shall be completed or made watertight by the end of
14 the working day.
15
17 A. Roof Drains
18 1. Disassemble and remove domes and clamping collars scheduled to remain. Clean and
19 examine sumps and leader components as directed. Replace all missing or broken
20 components. Install new drain and bolts.
21 2. Install and seal roof membrane and flashings at drains according to the Drawings.
22 3. All roof drain systems shall be installed to allow positive water flow into the roof drain from
23 the roof surface.
24 4. Replace strainers in drains at the end of each working day.
25
27
28 3.11 EXAMINATION
29 A. Examine each area to receive vegetated roof assembly for compliance with requirements for
30 installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
31 1. Verify that roof insulation over roofing membrane is in place, secure, and flush along all
32 seams.
33 2. Verify that perimeter and other flashings are in place and secure along entire lengths
34 where they will be covered by vegetated roof assembly.
35 3. Verify protection course over membrane roofing is in place and conforming to roofing
36 manufacturer instructions, as inspected and accepted by roofing manufacturer's technical
37 representative.
38 B. Inspect growing medium.
39 1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid, such as paint, paint washout,
40 concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel,
41 paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in growing
42 medium within a planting area.
43 2. If growing medium is contaminated by foreign or deleterious material or liquid, remove
44 growing medium and contamination and replace with new growing medium.
45
47 A. Protection Course: Cover roofing system with protection board if required by roofing manufacturer
48 with butted and fully taped joints before roofing system is subject to vegetated roof assembly
49 installation work.
50 B. Sweep with broom and then use air compressor to blow remaining dust and debris from substrate.
51 C. Install vegetated roof assembly according to manufacturer's written instructions.
52 D. Prepare Surface:
53 1. All surfaces to be smooth, free of debris, soil, and grit prior to placing modules. All
54 surfaces shall be maintained clean and free of debris, soil, and grit during installation.
55 Never walk upon such materials as they may damage waterproofing membrane. If
56 required, clean the surface as recommended by Waterproofing Provider.
57 E. Protect Roof Surface and Structures:
58 1. Traffic over the working area shall be restricted and controlled to qualified personnel only.
59 Provide safety signage, barriers and safety equipment, as appropriate.

ROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2. Protect heavily traveled areas or use protected layers during mobilization of materials and
2 equipment to the work area, as recommend by the Waterproofing Provider.
3 3. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling
4 or migrating onto surfaces of other construction.
5 F. Inspect the Work Area:
6 1. Perform a pre-installation inspection of the work areas
7 2. Install slop sheet or protection later above the roof membrane waterproofing in
8 accordance with manufacturer’s guidance. The roof surface shall be smooth, free of
9 debris and grit before installing a slop sheet or protective layer.
10 3. Perform module installation only after appropriate roof waterproofing system has been
11 installed, tested for leaks, and certified to be ready for installation of green roof system.
12 Verify that roof assembly is watertight and free draining.

14 A. Install trays according to manufacturer's written instructions and details.
15 B. Place trays directly over protection cover provided under roofing work of this Section.
16 C. Position bottom troughs of trays perpendicular to direction of roof slope, except minor crickets.
17 D. Orient and overlap interlocking sides to hold trays in place.
18
20 A. Install edger according to manufacturer's written instructions and details.
21 B. Install tray edger at vegetated roof perimeter to conceal tray sides.
22 C. Place short end of edging under tray so that it is held in place by weight of tray. Ensure inverted
23 "U" section at top of edger conceals tray edge.
24 D. Abut lengths of edging neatly. Allow 1/4 inch (6 mm) gap maximum between edging sections.
25 Adjust and trim edging to align sections and achieve a tight fit.
26 E. Corners: Utilize manufacturer's prefabricated corners.
27 F. Access Boxes: Install access box at each drain, valve, and switch. Install top of boxes 0.5 - 1
28 inches above the finish elevation of growing medium where applicable.
29
30 3.15 PLANTING
31 A. Thoroughly water plant material immediately after planting, at the end of each work day, and after
32 the entire installation of plant material is completed.
33 B. Inspect planting work at the end of each day and after entire installation is complete. Immediately
34 repair any areas that show signs of subsidence, un-evenness, or extreme plant stress with new
35 materials conforming to this Section.
36
38 A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests.
39 B. Perform the following tests:
40 1. Flood Testing: Flood test each deck area for leaks, according to procedures in
41 ASTM D 5957, after completing and protecting roofing membrane but before placing
42 overlaying construction. Install temporary containment assemblies, plug or dam drains,
43 and flood with potable water.
44 a. Flood to an average depth of 2-1/2 inches (64 mm), with a minimum depth of 1
45 inch (25 mm) and a maximum depth of 4 inches (100 mm). Maintain 2 inches (50
46 mm) of clearance from top of sheet flashings.
47 b. Flood each area for 72 hours.
48 C. Correct deficiencies in work that do not comply with requirements.
49 D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
50
51 3.17 ADJUSTING
52 A. Make adjustments and alignments of trays and metal edger as necessary to give a uniform and
53 finished appearance.
54 B. Replace plant material that appears to be stressed or damaged.
55
56
57

ROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3.18 CLEANING
2 A. During planting and maintenance, keep adjacent areas and construction clean and maintain work
3 area in an orderly condition.
4
5 3.19 PROTECTION
6 A. Protect vegetated roof assemblies from damage, including growing-medium contamination, due to
7 operations of other contractors and trades. Repair or replace damaged vegetated roof assemblies.
8
10 A. Maintenance Service: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of vegetated roof assembly
11 Installer approved by roofing-membrane manufacturer. Begin maintenance immediately after plants
12 are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but for not
13 less than the specified maintenance period.
14 1. Assembly and Plant Maintenance: During maintenance period, maintain plantings by
15 cultivating, watering, hand-weeding, fertilizing (if necessary), adjusting and repairing, and
16 performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings.
17 a. Replace growing medium that becomes displaced or eroded because of settling
18 or other processes.
19 b. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and growing
20 medium free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated past
21 management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and
22 reduce hazards. Treatments include physical controls such as hosing off foliage,
23 mechanical controls such as traps, and biological control agents.
24 c. Use only products and methods acceptable to roofing-membrane manufacturer.
25 d. Following maintenance period, instruct Owner and furnish written maintenance
26 instructions as necessary for planting materials to develop and maintain healthy
27 root structure.
28 2. Maintenance Period: 24 months from date of Planting Completion.
29 B. Record all green roof maintenance events. Include name of person, date and activity.
30 1. If growing media test, record lab, test and results.
31 2. If fertilizer, record type and amount applied per 1000 sf.
32 3. Record time needed for bi-weekly weed walk and drain inspection.
33 C. Foot Traffic: Limit foot traffic to a random path a couple times per week by one person. Avoid
34 walking in a single path, standing in one place, or trampling plants. If parapet or adjoining wall
35 must be serviced, plants may be covered with plywood or foam sheeting for up to 4 hours
36 intermittently, provided foliage is not wet or frozen and conditions are not too hot or sunny.
37 D. Spring Maintenance (March to June):
38 1. Soil Testing and Fertilization. Approximately 2-3 weeks before spring “growth flush”,
39 administer an annual soil test for PH and fertility levels. Growth flush varies by region,
40 consult biweekly maintenance protocol email for specific recommended testing date in
41 project’s region.
42 2. Maintain pH in the range of 6.5 to 8.0. In the event that pH falls below 6.0, consult the testing
43 lab for appropriate recommendations to increase alkalinity. If the soil is above 8.0, it can be
44 made more acidic with elemental Sulphur or an application of acidifying fertilizer.
45 3. Maintain fertility in the normal range using a typical field soil fertility test as provided by A&L
46 labs or equivalent testing lab. Evaluate the various nutrient levels such as Nitrogen (N or
47 NO3N), Potassium (K), Phosphorus (P). If the soil contains a low (L) amount of these
48 nutrients, conduct a single application of controlled release fertilizer, such as Nutricote® or
49 Osmocote®, at the lab recommended rate. Ensure that fertilizer contains NO Herbicides or
50 Pesticides. Follow the fertilizer labeled directions for application rate and use a rotary
51 spreader to ensure even fertilizer application. Runoff potential does exist and should be
52 evaluated by the applicator in accord with the site specifics; the greater the runoff sensitivity,
53 the lower the application rate. All applications of fertilizer are the sole responsibility of the
54 applicator.
55 4. Coordinate with irrigation contractor to ensure that irrigation system is brought back on-line
56 at the appropriate time to avoid freezing but to provide adequate water to plants starting in
57 the spring.
58 5. Conduct Monthly Inspections:

ROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 a. Weed Walk: Pull and dispose of all weeds before they flower and set seed.
2 NEVER allow any woody plant to establish in a green roof system, unless they
3 have been specified in intensive green roof areas as part of this project.
4 b. Displaced Soil: Nesting birds may displace soil. Replace lost soil using only
5 manufacturer’s specific, tested, approved engineered green roof growing media
6 based on the intensive or extensive area in which the displacement occurs.
7 c. Drainage Inspection: Inspect roof drains for any debris, pebbles or leaves and
8 remove to ensure proper drainage.
9 d. Debris Removal: Remove any debris blown onto the roof immediately to ensure
10 no damage to plants.
11 e. Pest Control: Monitor pest presence, as most pest problems are the result of an
12 imbalance in the relationship of pest organism and its natural biological controls
13 and these problems may self-correct. If pest problems are persistent, use
14 organic and natural biological control agents to restore balance. Pesticide use is
15 discouraged and should always be considered secondary to cultural and
16 biological control measures, as pesticides can contaminate runoff water and
17 cause environmental damage. Pesticides shall only be applied by qualified and
18 licensed applicators, and only as required. All applications of pesticides are the
19 sole responsibility of the applicator.
20 f. Examine paver and stone mulch areas. Correct any areas that have settled,
21 where stone mulch has been displaced, where pavers have separated away from
22 one another, and/or correct any other unsatisfactory conditions related to the
23 pavers, stone mulch, and edging for the duration of the maintenance period.
24 E. Summer Maintenance (June to September):
25 1. Conduct Monthly Inspections as outlined above for Spring Maintenance.
26 F. Fall Maintenance (October to November):
27 1. Conduct Monthly Inspections as outlined above for Sprint Maintenance.
28 2. Do Not Fertilize during the fall. It may stimulate tender growth and compromise the cold
29 hardiness of the plant materials.
30 3. Do Not Water Period: For northern temperate zones, do not water within 4 weeks of the
31 expected average frost date. Normally, there is plenty of moisture this time of year, and
32 adding additional water may compromise the durability of the plants to endure winter’s cold.
33 For this reason, watering during the winter is also not recommended.
34 G. Winter Maintenance:
35 1. Avoid walking on frozen plants and roof surfaces as they are slippery and dangerous.
36 2. If clear pathways are needed, avoid using salt and other deicing chemicals, which may kill
37 plants and damage pavers. Instead, use sand or cat litter as anti-slip agents. Consider use
38 of heat strips with pavers, provided they can be applied without damage to the roofing
39 membrane.
40 3. Avoid piling the snow in a single place. Disperse snow evenly over the green roof plantings
41 as excess snow piling can potentially damage plants by insulating the plants and keeping
42 them warm and wet, thereby triggering fungal diseases.
43 H. Watering:
44 1. Water only during establishment period outlined in LEED SSc6.1.
45
46 3.21 ACCEPTANCE
47 A. Conduct post installation inspection to determine acceptance of vegetated green roof assemblies.
48 Inspection to be made by Construction Manager or by Owner’s Representative upon Vegetative
49 Roof Assembly Contractor’s request; five working days’ notice required.
50 B. Installer is responsible to complete requirements to obtain confirmation of warranty from the green
51 roof systems manufacturer(s).
52 C. Installer is responsible to ensure proper maintenance until work has been accepted by
53 representative of Owner or Construction Manager.
54 D. Upon acceptance, and at the end of the maintenance and warranty period, Owner assumes
55 responsibility for maintenance unless otherwise specified.
56
57 END OF SECTION

ROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 07 52 16
2 SBS MODIFIED ASPHALT BITUMINOUS ROOFING (OPTION B)
3
6 1.2 WORK INCLUDED
10 1.6 REFERENCES
11 1.7 DEFINITIONS
15 1.11 SUBMITTALS – VEGETATED ROOF ASSEMBLIES
24 2.2 MATERIALS
26 ROOFING
27 3.1 DEFINITIONS
28 3.2 EXAMINATION
38 3.11 EXAMINATION
42 3.15 PLANTING
44 3.17 ADJUSTING
45 3.18 CLEANING
46 3.19 PROTECTION
48 3.21 ACCEPTANCE
49
50 PART 1 - GENERAL
51
53 A. The conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions) and the
56
58 A. This Section includes all labor, material, equipment and related services necessary to perform the
59 following Work:

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 075216 - 1 SBS MODIFIED ASPHALT BITUMINOUS
ROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 1. Furnish and install new three (3) ply 30-year NDL SBS modified bitumen roof membrane
2 system.
3 2. Furnish and install new SBS modified bitumen roof flashings.
4 3. Furnish and install new lead flashings at all drains and vent details.
5 4. Coordinate the installation of new metal work incidental to the roofing Work.
6 5. Furnish and install new surfacing.
7 6. Embed new surface granules into all “bleed-out” areas.
8 7. Repair or replace adjacent roof areas that are damaged by the roofing Contractor.
9 8. Tray-type Vegetated Roof Assemblies
10 9. Vegetated Roof Assembly Accessories
11 10. Provide an all-inclusive warranty as specified herein for the following systems:
12 a. Single Source Warranty for Vegetated Roof Assembly
13 b. Membrane Manufacturer’s No Dollar Limit Warranty
14 c. Extended Overburden Warranty for Vegetated Roof Assembly
15
17 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
18 and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
19 B. Section 02 41 00 – Historic Selective Demolition/Deconstruction
20 C. Section 07 01 90.71 – Historic Sealant Rehabilitation
21 D. Section 07 62 52 – Historic Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
22
24 A. The membrane Manufacturer shall have a minimum ten (10) years experience specializing in
25 modified asphalt roof membranes.
26 B. The applicator shall have a minimum five (5) years documented experience specializing in modified
27 asphalt roof membranes and shall be licensed by the roof membrane manufacturer to install all roof
28 membrane insulation and vegetated roof assemblies.
29 C. The roof insulation and membrane system must be applied by a roofing Contractor authorized by
30 the roof system Manufacturer.
31 D. The insulation system shall be manufactured by the roof membrane system manufacturer or
32 specifically approved for use in the specified roof membrane system in order to meet all stated
33 warranty requirements.
34 E. The membrane Manufacturer shall approve all components used in the roof system.
35 F. At start of new membrane installation, Manufacturer’s Representative shall visit the job site to
36 ensure that the installation begins correctly with all installation procedures and guidelines being
37 followed and notify the Architect of his findings. Failure to notify constitutes acceptance of the
38 Work of his licensed applicator by the Manufacturer.
39 G. Upon 50 percent completion of the project, the roof membrane Manufacturer’s Representative shall
40 inspect the installation for adherence to installation procedures and guidelines. The installation
41 shall be inspected more frequently if deemed necessary by the Manufacturer, Architect, Owner or
42 Contractor.
43 H. Upon completion of the installation, an inspection shall be made by the roof membrane
44 Manufacturer’s Representative to ascertain that the roof system has been installed according to the
45 applicable roof membrane Manufacturer’s specifications.
46 I. All the above indicated job visits shall be documented in writing by the roof membrane
47 Manufacturer’s Representative indicating all problems, concerns, recommendations and directives
48 given to the roofing Contractor regarding roof system installation. Copies shall be provided to the
49 Architect within ten (10) days of the inspection date.
50 J. It is the roofing Contractor’s responsibility to arrange the Manufacturer’s Representative’s
51 inspections.
52 K. All components used in the insulation system shall be approved by the Roof Membrane
53 Manufacturer.
54 L. There shall be no deviation made from this Specification or the approved shop drawing without
56 M. Shop drawings of proposed alternate details shall be submitted to the Architect for approval prior to
57 the start of construction.
58 N. Proposed alternate details and application procedures shall comply with the Specifications,
59 Drawings and Manufacturer’s recommendations.

ROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 O. The Contractor shall keep a copy of the Roof Membrane Manufacturer’s installation instructions
2 and these Specifications on site at all times.
3 P. Vegetated Roof Assemblies Installer Qualifications: A qualified vegetated roof assembly
4 Installer, approved, authorized or licensed by vegetated roofing system provider, whose work has
5 resulted in successful establishment of vegetated roofs from pre-vegetated trays.
6 1. Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on
7 Project site when vegetated roof assembly work is in progress.
8 Q. Single Source Responsibility: Vegetated green roof components shall be from a single source.
9 Installer may request inspection or oversight during installation from the Green Roof Provider.
10 R. There shall be no deviation from this Specification or the Drawings. Installer assumes liability for
11 any deviations from Specifications and/or Drawings.
12 S. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall be qualified to install the vegetative green roof system. If
13 Installer does not meet the minimum requirements, Green Roof Provider technical representative
14 shall be present for at least 1 work day to verify training and module handling.
15 T. Roofing Inspection: By Owner or designated Waterproofing Provider to verify that the waterproofing
16 surface is approved for installation of the vegetated green roof system.
17 1. At a minimum, a slip sheet or protection layer (6 ounce non-woven geotextile or
18 equivalent) may be required to protect the work surface and waterproofing warranty. Verify
19 and document the need for a slip sheet or protection layer.
20 2. Verify existing roof loads and roof load limitations prior to hoisting green roof materials.
21 U. Once the green roof installation is complete, an inspection shall be conducted by a technical
22 representative of the Green Roof Installer and/or the Green Roof Provider to verify that the green
23 roof system was installed properly.
24
26 A. Materials and construction shall meet the following:
27 1. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Class A Fire Hazard Classification.
28 2. Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation (FM): Windstorm Resistance Classification, FM
29 Data Sheets 1-28 (September, 1991 Revision) and 1-49 (Class I-90 Construction); Fire
30 Classification, Class 1 (FM Approval Standards).
31 3. International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO)
32 4. Uniform Building Code (UBC).
33 5. Regional, State and Local Building Codes and/or Ordinances.
34
35 1.6 REFERENCES
39 3. Factory Mutual System (FM).
40
41 1.7 DEFINITIONS
42 A. Contract Documents: All specifications and Drawings that collectively describe the requirements for
43 construction of the Project.
44 B. Vegetated Green Roof: An area of landscaped planting constructed over a waterproofed substrate
45 and separated from the natural ground by a structure.
46 C. Vegetated Green Roof System: The complete system of materials and components which are
47 installed above the waterproofing and result in a vegetated green roof surface.
48 D. Extensive Green Roof: These extensive green roof systems are constructed in shallow soil depths
49 nominal 4-inches with hearty, drought-tolerant plants such as sedums, herbs and groundcovers. In
50 northern climates, extensive green roofs typically do not require permanent irrigation systems.
51 However, irrigation may be needed in semi-arid and arid climates. Extensive green roof systems
52 are low-maintenance and typically require occasional weeding or plant maintenance on an annual
53 basis.
54 E. Growing Medium or Substrate: An engineered, blended mixture composed of composted organic
55 matter and lightweight, coarse and porous aggregate. The substrate is blended to be lightweight
56 and conducive to vigorous plant growth.
57 F. Filter Fabric: Woven geotextile that is placed within the module (optional) prior to filling media to
58 reduce likelihood of fines being released via the drainage holes.
59

ROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 G. Sedum Tile or Mat: An integrated layer of sedum which covers the entire surface of growing media
2 in the green roof modules. The sedum may be grown in the modules from plugs or cuttings, or
3 alternatively pre-grown in a production field and harvested into tiles or mat and then rooted in the
4 modules.
5 H. Green Roof System Installer (or ‘Installer’): Company retained to install the green roof system as
6 per this specification.
7 I. Waterproofing Provider: Company that provides and/or certifies all materials required for installation
8 of the building/roof waterproofing, furnishes and verifies installation and water tightness and
9 confirms acceptability prior to installation of the Green Roof System.
10 J. Captured Water: Water that is retained in the drainage layer of a vegetated roof assembly after new
11 water additions have ceased and that cannot escape the roof except through evaporation or plant
12 transpiration.
13 K. Finish Elevation: Elevation of finished growing-media surface of planting area.
14 L. Planting Area: Areas to be planted.
15 M. Plant; Plants; Plant Material: Vegetation in general, including trees, shrubs, vines, ground covers,
16 ornamental grasses, bulbs, corms, tubers, or herbaceous vegetation.
17 N. Growing Medium: Manufactured, lightweight soil mixture that promotes good growing conditions for
18 specific varieties of plants.
19 O. FLL Greenroof Guidelines: German Guidelines for Planning, Execution, and Upkeep of Green Roof
20 Sites, Current Release. Worldwide acknowledged state-of-the-art technology as scientific
21 foundation for successful and thriving green roofs.
22 P. FM Approval: Class Number 4477, Approval Standard for Vegetated Roof System.
23
25 A. The Contractor shall provide a Project Foreman with a minimum of five (5) years documented
26 experience in the supervision of roof system and vegetated roof assembly installation and shall be
27 knowledgeable in the type of roof system specified herein.
28 B. The Contractor shall not change Foreman or crew without prior approval of the Architect.
29 C. The Contractor’s Foreman shall be present on the job site during the majority of work hours and
30 shall be accessible at all times to ensure good Project coordination and communication.
31 D. During the workday should the weather conditions appear to be changing adversely, the Foreman
32 shall take preventative measures to allow the roof to be closed to a watertight condition to avoid
33 exposure of buildings, equipment and materials.
34 E. All Work that requires saw cutting, vacuuming and other similar functions that create substantial
36 Architect.
37 F. Prior to the start of any roof project, and daily after the start, the Contractor shall review the type of
38 space below the roof being worked on to ensure that all special requirements because of
39 occupancy are complied with prior to start of the Work.
40 G. Take all necessary precautions to protect the Owner’s property as well as adjacent property,
42 conduit or cable, etc. from any and all damage which may result due to work on this Project.
43 H. Repair any Work, damaged by failure to provide proper and adequate protection, to its original
44 state to the satisfaction of the Owner or remove and replace with new Work at the Contractor’s
45 expense.
46
48 A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at the Madison Municipal Building; 210 Martin
49 Luther King Jr Blvd., Madison, WI 53703
50 1. Attendance: Contractor, Installer, Owner Architect, Architect’s Roof Consultant, Architect’s
51 Landscape Architect, vegetated roofing system and membrane roofing system
52 manufacturer representatives, roofing installer, and those requested to attend.
53 2. Meeting Date: Minimum 2 weeks prior to beginning work of this Section, and to prior work
54 of related Sections affecting work of this Section.
55 3. Agenda:
56 a. Discuss flood testing and other special considerations for this project.
57 b. Discuss expectations for slip sheets, protection course and vegetated roof
58 assemblies including, but not limited to: pre-vegetated trays, edging for trays, stand-
59 alone edging, stone mulch, and pavers on tabs.

ROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 c. Discuss post-installation care including establishment period and maintenance

2 regimen.
3
5 A. Submit shop drawings as required. Drawings shall show roof edge condition details, roof
6 penetration flashing details, standard roof section and all other details required for proper roof
7 system installation that are not shown in or that differ from the Specifications and Drawings.
9 C. Submit product data for membrane and flashing with temperature range for application of
10 membrane.
11 D. Submit membrane Manufacturer’s installation instructions.
13 F. Submit copies of proposed manufacturer’s guaranty.
14 G. Submit written proof of contractor’s approval by specified system manufacturer.
15
16 1.11 SUBMITTALS - VEGETATED ROOF ASSEMBLIES
17 A. Product Data: For each vegetated roof assembly.
18 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
19 and profiles, and finishes.
20 2. Include material descriptions for each growing medium.
21 3. Include material descriptions for each plant type and characteristics.
23 1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and pre-consumer recycled
24 content and manufacturing locations for each system.
25 2. Product Data: For tray system product ingredients, disclose product ingredients, source,
26 manufacturing locations, and recycling options content conforming to LEED requirements.
27 C. Shop Drawings: For each vegetated roof assembly.
28 1. Include plans, sections, and edger locations.
29 2. Indicate dimensions, weights, and loads.
30 3. Detail field assembly of components, depth of growing media, metal edger connections,
31 and attachments to other work.
32 4. Note any deviations from the drawings or specs and any limitations of the proposed
33 vegetated roof assembly components or overall system.
34
37 1. Written submittal by manufacturer indicating that installer is certified as qualified to
38 perform the work of this section.
39 B. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product.
40 1. Manufacturer's technical data sheets for standard products.
41 2. Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory, according to methods established
42 by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable.
43 3. Product Test Reports: For complete analysis of each growing medium, for tests performed
44 by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency or by a qualified testing
45 agency. Confirm that growing medium meets FFL Green Roof Guidelines.
46 4. Field quality-control reports.
47 5. Sample Warranty: For special warranties.
48
50 A. Deliver all materials in Manufacturer’s original, unopened containers with Manufacturer’s labels
51 intact and legible.
52 B. Store rolls of roofing membrane, cans and drums of cement, primers and coatings on end. Do not
53 use rolls of roofing membrane that have been flattened out of round and/or been used for
54 weighting.
55 C. Materials shall be stored so as to protect them completely from damage by the elements and
56 temperatures. Storage of materials on ground and/or rooftop shall be protected with waterproof
57 canvas covering and stored on raised platforms. The use of pallets or similar type equipment will
58 be acceptable.
59 1. Waterproof canvas covering shall be applied in a watertight manner and securely tied at
60 the end of each workday or work period.

ROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2. Use of Manufacturer’s product protection wrapping is not acceptable for worksite type
2 protection. Wrapping shall be side-punctured or end-punctured or slashed before
3 covering with canvas.
4 3. No tears in the waterproof canvas covering will be allowed.
5 D. Material storage in warehouse, storage trailer, or tent is recommended.
6 E. Keep lids tightly sealed on all emulsions, solvent-based adhesives and cements to keep volatiles
7 from escaping.
8 F. Handling Materials
9 1. Do not store or transport roofing materials on the roof in a manner that may exceed the
10 live load capacity of the deck system or the structure. The Architect during routine
11 observations may make recommendations as to loading.
12 2. Do not transport roofing materials over or store materials on a finished section, without
13 prior approval of the Architect.
14 3. The Contractor’s Foremen shall have a hand held thermometer on the roof to check
15 application temperature.
16 G. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight,
17 certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and
18 Federal laws if applicable. Store away from sources of ignition and extremely high temperatures.
19 Avoid exposure to heat, sparks, and open flames.
20 H. Bulk Materials:
21 1. Do not dump or store bulk materials on or near structures, utilities, walkways and
22 pavements, or existing roof areas or plants.
23 2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials,
24 discharge of debris-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties,
25 water conveyance systems, or walkways.
26 3. Store growing medium in a dry area, free of contaminants which may adversely affect the
27 engineered blend, including weed seeds.
28 4. Accompany each delivery of bulk materials with product certificates.
29 I. Plant Materials:
30 1. Maintain health of plants as recommended by nursery guidelines prior to installation.
31 Store vegetated planters and materials over plywood panels or protective sheeting on the
32 roof.
33 2. Pre-vegetated trays may be stored in a cool location, below 75 degrees for a maximum
34 of 24 hours. Do not leave pre-vegetated trays in hot storage areas or sitting in full sun
35 locations on the project site or on the roof.
36 3. Provide water source for irrigating plants per manufacturer's recommendations.
37 J. Handle and store materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoid overloading roof structure or
38 damaging roofing membrane.
39 K. Protect the roof deck and waterproofing membranes using appropriate materials such as plywood
40 sheeting. Avoid using sharp tools and keep the roof surfaces clean and free of soil, grit, or debris.
41
43 A. Do not apply roof membrane or base flashings during inclement weather or when air temperature is
44 below (or is expected to be below) 40°F (5°C).
45 B. Do not start tear off of existing materials when inclement weather is expected.
46 C. Vegetated Roofing Assemblies Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing
47 and forecasted weather conditions permit installation to be performed when optimum results may
48 be obtained. Install plant materials when temperatures are between 40 deg F (5 deg C) and 95 deg
49 F (35 deg C), except as otherwise instructed by manufacturer. Do not install if extended freezing
50 temperatures are expected or if ambient soil temperature is expected to remain below 50 deg F (10
51 deg C). Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written
52 instructions and warranty requirements.
53
55 A. Vegetated roof covering system shall:
56 1. Support sedums and other vegetated groundcovers.
57 2. Provide efficient drainage of moisture that is in excess of that required for the vigorous
58 growth of the installed vegetation.
59 3. Protect roof waterproofing materials from damage caused by exposure to ultraviolet
60 radiation, physical abuse, and rapid temperature fluctuations.

ROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 4. Retain moisture in accordance with ASTM E2398.

2
5 1. Contractor’s Warranty: The Contractor shall warrant, in writing, that the roof system shall
6 remain leak free for a period of two (2) years following completion and that the roof system
7 has been installed according to material Manufacturer’s current specification. The
8 warranty shall cover labor and materials. The MRCA printed guarantee shall be used as a
9 standard. Roofing Contractor shall verify that the Extended Overburden Warranty for
10 Vegetated Roof Assembly (see below) is covered by either the Roofing Contractor or Roof
11 Membrane System Manufacturer.
12 2. Single Source Warranty for Vegetated Roof Assembly: Provide materials and labor
13 warranty for both full roof assembly and vegetated roof system (including pre-vegetated
14 tray systems, metal edging, stone mulch, pavers on tabs, and other individual components
15 and assemblies that make up the Vegetated Roof Assembly) for length of roofing
16 membrane warranty along with removal of overburden.
17 a. Contractor and manufacturer should review this with Architect to confirm that the
18 system will meet all requirements of all intended warranties.
19 3. Membrane Manufacturer’s No Dollar Limit Warranty: The roof system Manufacturer shall
20 furnish a Cost of Repair/Replacement Manufacturer’s Materials Roofing Guarantee. The
21 guarantee shall include the costs of repairs or replacement of the membrane and flashing,
22 and insulation systems damaged as a result of the membrane failure and necessary to
23 stop leaks which occur during a period of THIRTY (30) years from the date of completion,
24 as a result of workmanship or deterioration of the membrane system or base flashing.
25 The guarantee shall cover both labor and materials.
26 4. Extended Overburden Warranty for Vegetated Roof Assembly: Manufacturer will provide
27 removal and replacement of vegetated roof assembly.
28 a. Warranty Period: Twenty years
29 5. Membrane Manufacturer’s Owner Service Manual: Provide for the Owner an
30 informational manual to include the Manufacturer’s approved emergency repair
31 procedures and materials, maintenance procedures and customer service information.
32
34 A. Maintenance Data: For vegetated roof assembly and plants, including a recommended
35 maintenance plan with procedures for inspection and care during a calendar year. Submit before
36 start of required warranty and maintenance periods.
37 B. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: From vegetated roof assembly Installer to Owner, in the form of
38 a standard two-year maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is
39 concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future
40 renewal options.
41
42
44
46 A. There will be no substitute roof membrane manufacturers considered for this membrane option.
47 B. Roof Membrane, Insulation and Vegetated Roofing Manufacturer for this system option (Option B)
48 shall be Soprema.
49 C. Obtain vegetated roof assembly components, growing medium, plants, and accessories from single
50 source from single manufacturer.
51 D. Provide products by Manufacturers specified herein which meet the approval of the specified
52 manufacturer. No non-approved materials will be used by the Contractor.
53 E. No material specified or approved shall contain asbestos.
54 F. All materials shall be new unless noted otherwise.
55
56 2.2 MATERIALS
57 Roof Insulation Membrane System:
58 A. Insulation – thickness as shown on the Drawings
59 1. Flat Stock:

ROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 a. Polyisocyanurate: ASTM C 1289 Type II and compressive strength of 25 pounds

2 per square inch nominal, dimensional stability of 2% maximum linear change (@
3 158F and 97% relative humidity for 7 days) and a curing time of 24 hours plus
4 an additional 24 hours per inch of thickness at a minimum of 60F before
5 Manufacturer shipment. Rigid board insulation with fiberglass facers such as
6 SOPRA-ISO by Soprema or manufacturer approved equal. No substitutions will
7 be allowed that would void the intended warranty. Fiberglass facers are required.
8 4’ X 4’ maximum board size for adhered application, 4’ x 8’ maximum board size
9 for mechanically attached application.
10 b. Cover Board: 1/4” 4 x 4 “Sopraboard” by Soprema.
11 2. Tapered:
12 a. Saddles and Crickets: Tapered ASTM C 1289. (except as noted on the
13 Drawings, provide taper as required to achieve a minimum net slope of ¼” per
14 foot slope) tapered polyisocyanurate system with fiberglass facers, such as
15 “SOPRA-ISO Tapered” by Soprema or manufacturer approved equal. All boards
16 shall be factory primed.
17 b. Tapered Polyisocyanurate Edge Strip: Tapered ASTM C 1289. tapered
18 polyisocyanurate system with fiberglass facers, such as “Gemini Series Tapered
19 Edge Strip” by Atlas Roofing Corporation or approved equal.
20 c. Pre-manufactured tapered sump: tapered ASTM 1289, such as “Panel Q Hinged
21 Target Sump” by Hunter Panels.
22 B. Asphalt: Hot asphalt may be used on this Project as an insulation adhesive only.
23 C. Adhesive: Such as Duotack Insulation Adhesive by Soprema of roofing asphalt may be used to
24 adhere insulation coverboard and saddles and crickets.
25 D. Base Sheet: Modified Sopra G by Soprema.
26 E. Fasteners:
27 1. Insulation to metal deck: Fasteners shall be self-drilling, self-tapping, organic
32 Fasteners shall be FM approved for the specific use. In areas of metal deck with conduit
33 nested within the flutes of the deck, as identified by the Contractor prior to insulation
34 installation, “Lexsuco Clips” by GAF Materials Corporation (www.gaf.com) shall be used.
35 Fasteners shall be installed according to the Roof Insulation Installation Section of this
36 Specification.
37 2. Insulation to wood deck: Fasteners shall be self-drilling, self-tapping, organic
42 Fasteners shall be FM approved for the specific use.
43 3. Wood to wood: Fasteners (nails or lag screws) shall be galvanized and long enough to
44 penetrate into substrate 1-1/4”. Withdrawal resistance shall be 100 pounds per nail
45 minimum.
46 4. Wood to masonry/concrete: Fasteners shall be 1/2” minimum diameter metal expansion
47 stud anchors in pre-drilled holes such as “Kwik Bolt 3 Stud Expansion Anchor” by Hilti, Inc.
48 (www.hilti.co) or approved equal.
49 5. Wood to metal deck: Fasteners shall be self-drilling, self-tapping, organic fluoropolymer
50 coated screws (minimum 30 Kesternich Cycles) with a minimum 0.201” shank diameter
51 such as “Type 14-10 Heavy Duty All Purpose Screw” by Olympic Manufacturing Group
52 (www.olyfast.com) or approved equal (fasteners shall be long enough to penetrate metal
53 minimum ¾”).
54 6. Concrete Anchor – General: Other fasteners not specifically described shall be as
55 selected by the Contractor subject to approval by the Architect. All fasteners shall meet
56 the requirements set forth herein.
57 F. Fiber Cant: Nominal 4 X 4 perlite or 4 X 4 split lumber #2 grade or better, or as indicated on the
58 Drawings.

ROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 G. Insulated Tapered Edge Strips (as required): ASTM C 728 Type 1. Tapered perlite rigid board
2 insulation as shown on the Drawings such as “Tapered Fesco Board” by Johns Manville, or
3 approved equal.
4 H. Asphalt Primer: Refer to roof membrane specification section(s) herein for Asphalt Primer.
6 proper installation of the Work in this Section, shall be as selected by the Contractor subject to
8
9 Roof Membrane System:
10 A. Base Membrane (this installation will require 2 base membrane plies – refer to drawings): Modified
11 asphalt base sheet meeting ASTM D5147 such as Sopralene 180 sanded 2.2 or Sopralene Flam
12 180 by Soprema.
13 B. Surface Membrane: WH UL Class A, fire resistance rated, chemically or thermally bonded,
14 Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) modified asphalt membrane such as Sopralene 180 FR GR WH
15 or Sopralene Flam 180 FR GR WH by Soprema.
16 C. Base Flashing Stripping Ply: Modified asphalt base sheet meeting ASTM D5147 such as Sopralene
17 180 sanded 2.2 or Sopralene Flam by Soprema.
18 D. Base Flashing Surface Ply: Chemically or thermally bonded, modified asphalt membrane meeting
19 ASTM D5147 such as Sopralene 180 FR GR WH or Sopralene Flam 180 FR GR WH by Soprema.
20 E. Fluid Applied Flashing Membrane: Catalyzed Acrylic Resin Flashing System consisting of a liquid-
21 applied, fully reinforced, multi-component acrylic membrane such as Alsan RS 230 Flashing. The
22 flashing system consists of a catalyzed acrylic resin (polymethyl methacrylate –or – PMMA),
23 primer, basecoat and topcoat, combined with a non-woven polyester fleece.
24 F. Lead Flashing: FS QQ-L11-201, Grade B, 4 lb./sq. ft. lead at drain and plumbing vent details; 30”
25 X 30” required minimum dimension for drains and 12” required minimum roof flange dimension for
26 plumbing vents.
27 G. Mastic: Asbestos-FREE grade, Sopramastic SBS Elastic Cement“ to conform to FS SS-C-153C
28 Type I and ASTM D2822 Type I standards.
29 H. Fasteners (Miscellaneous):
30 1. Fasteners such as nails, screws and bolts, etc. shall be compatible with roof membrane
31 and flashing system. They shall be of type and size as shown on the Drawings,
32 recommended by the roof membrane Manufacturer or specified herein.
33 2. Screws used to secure metal to blocking shall be No. 8 minimum, galvanized penetrating
34 wood blocking a minimum 1-1/2” and shall have watertight neoprene washers under head.
35 The installed withdrawal resistance shall be a minimum of 150 pounds per screw.
36 3. Nails used to secure wood such as fascias, cant strips, blocking and nailers to other wood
37 members shall be galvanized and long enough to penetrate 1-1/4”. Two rows are
38 required, staggered when feasible. Spacing in any one row shall not exceed 24”. Spacing
39 shall not exceed 12”, 8’ each way from outside corners. Withdrawal resistance shall be
40 100 pounds per nail minimum. (Lag screws of equivalent strength may be used if
41 desired.)
42 4. Fasteners used to secure lumber to masonry or concrete shall be 1/2” minimum diameter
43 metal expansion stud anchors in pre-drilled holes such as “Kwik-Bolt II Stud Expansion
44 Anchor” by Hilti, Inc. or approved equal. Space fasteners at 24” o.c. (maximum).
45 5. Fasteners used to secure lumber to metal deck shall be self-drilling, self-tapping, organic
47 shank diameter such as “Type 14-10 Heavy Duty All Purpose Screw” by Olympic
48 Manufacturing or approved equal (2-1/4” length required for 2x nailer or blocking). Space
49 fasteners at 12” o.c. (maximum). AND/OR nut, bolt and washer assemblies, 1/2”
50 minimum diameter, spaced 4’ o.c. and have galvanized metal or stainless steel
51 consistency. Stagger if lumber is 6” or wider. At outside corners fasteners shall be
52 spaced 2’ o.c., 8’ each way from the corner. Minimum withdrawal resistance shall be 800
53 pounds per fastener.
56 7. Other fasteners not specifically described shall be as selected by the Contractor subject to
57 approval by the Architect. All fasteners shall meet the requirements set forth in FM Data
58 Sheets1-28 and 1-49 as appropriate.
59 I. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41 primer such as Elastocol 500 by Soprema.

ROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 J. Roof Drain Assemblies: Obtain replacement clamps, rings, and strainers. All strainers shall be
2 cast iron.
3 K. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Piping: Conforming to requirements for Schedule 40, DWV pattern,
4 ASTM Specification D1785 and D2665.
5 L. Solvent Free Adhesive: Such as Colply EF Adhesive by Soprema.
6 M. Solvent Free Flashing: Such as Colply EF Flashing Cement by Soprema.
7 N. Surfacing Granules: Additional surface granules of the type and color of the cap sheet shall be
8 used to cover “bleed-out” areas.
9 O. Other Materials: All other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and
10 proper installation of the work in this Section, shall be as selected by the Contractor subject to
12 Vegetated Roof System

13 A. Tray-Type Vegetated Roof Assembly: Modular assembly consisting of manufacturer's standard
14 trays for field assembly adjacent to and interlocking with each other over roofing system.
15 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Columbia Green Technologies Pre-Grown Tray, no
16 substitutions.
17 2. Tray Depth, Nominal: 4-5/8 inches (117.5 mm).
18 3. Tray Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm).
19 4. Tray Material: Injection molded, 100 mil polypropylene, 88 percent post-consumer
21 5. Tray Design: Trays must be fully interlocking and overlap adjacent trays by a minimum of
22 1/4 inch (6.5 mm). Tray bottom to have ridges and trough design to maximize air flow and
23 retain stormwater.
24 6. Connection Holes and Fasteners:
25 a. Four 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) holes, aligned and centered in each vertical side panel.
26 b. Plastic Tray Pin: Provided by manufacturer.
27 c. Hook and Plastic Tray Pin: For integrated drip irrigation. Provided by
28 manufacturer.
29 7. Growing Medium Depth: Manufacturer’s standard media depth for pre-grown trays.
30 8. Assembly Weight: Manufacturer’s given weight, fully saturated, is 30-32 lbs/sf. Assembly
31 shall not ever exceed 40 lbs/sq. ft., including growing media and plants and saturated with
32 captured water, but not including weight of roofing system.
33 9. Recycled Content: Trays shall have post-consumer recycled content of not less than 88
34 percent.
35 B. Growing Medium: Vegetated roof assembly manufacturer's lightweight, manufactured soil mixture
36 designed for Extensive Green Roof areas indicated in the drawings.
37 1. Basis of Design Product: Columbia Green Technologies; Extensive Growing Medium.
38 2. General Condition at Time of Planting: Free of aggregates 1/2 inch (13 mm) or larger in
39 any dimension; free of roots, plants, clods, pockets of sand, paint, building debris, oils,
40 solvents, roofing materials, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth; free of
41 weeds, disease-causing plant pathogens, and other undesirable organisms.
42 3. Maximum Media Density: ASTM E 2399, 80 lb/cu. ft. (1280 kg/cu. m) for growing-medium
43 mixture.
44 4. Maximum Media Water Retention: ASTM E 2399, 35 to 65 percent by volume for growing-
45 medium mixture at maximum media density per FLL Green Roof Guidelines.
46 C. Plants
47 1. Pre-grown Tray: Species provided by manufacturer, grown in tray to project specifications
48 with minimum 90 percent plant coverage. Match hardiness zone.
49 2. Sourced or approved by Columbia Green Technologies for warranty to apply.
50 3. Conform to Project landscape design requirements, recommendations of local
51 horticulturalists, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, including Fire Marshal,
52 for specific recommendations and regulations.
53 D. Access Boxes: Vegetated roof assembly manufacturer's aluminum drain boxes with removable,
54 rigid covers for accessing drains, valves, and switches beneath the finish elevation of growing
55 medium; secure each cover with four noncorrosive screws.
56 1. Size: 12 inches (305 mm) square by depth of vegetated roof assembly at each location.
57 E. Soil Retainer: Vegetated roof assembly manufacturer's extruded-aluminum edging.
58 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Columbia Green Technologies; Standard Tray Edger.

ROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2. Tray Edger: 5.5 inch (140 mm) height 18 gauge aluminum with prefabricated tray pin
2 receiving slot for tray attachment.
3 a. Color: Mill finish.
4 b. Corners: Provide manufacturer's Prefabricated Standard Tray Edger Inside
5 Corner and Prefabricated Outside Corner at 90 degree corners. Match color to
6 tray edger.
7 3. Method of Attachment, Tray System: Tray edger is held in place by the weight of the
8 system. Use manufacturer's standard removable pin fastener to attach edger to sides of
9 tray.
10
12
13 ROOFING
14
15 3.1 DEFINITIONS
16 A. The term “phased construction” or “phased application” shall mean the roof system construction or
17 application process in which all parts of cross-section of a roof system (including vapor retarder),
18 roof insulation, roof membrane and surfacing are not completed for a particular roof area during
19 one day or work period.
20
21 3.2 EXAMINATION
24 Specifications.
25
27 A. Remove the existing construction to the extent shown on the drawings.
28 B. Do not cut the existing structural components.
29 C. Clean and dry substrate.
30 D. Deck Repairs: If deck repairs are required, the Contractor shall contact the Architect immediately.
31 (All required deck repairs shall be as directed by the Architect and shall be by Change Order.)
32
34 A. Replace all deteriorated construction not originally scheduled for replacement. Repairs shall be by
35 Change Order and as directed by the Architect.
36
38 A. All roofing work shall be accomplished with a Foreman fully trained and knowledgeable in the
39 application procedures of the specified roof membrane. The Foreman shall oversee the work of all
40 working personnel who are thoroughly skilled in the application of specified materials. All
41 workmanship to be of the very best quality and shall be done in such a manner as to fulfill the intent
42 of the Drawings and Specifications.
43 B. For thermally bonded applications all propane work shall be completed in accordance with
44 NRCA/MRCA CERTA program requirements. All propane equipment shall be handled by CERTA-
45 certified operators only.
46 C. Weather Condition Limitations: Proceed with roofing work only when existing and forecasted
47 weather conditions will permit Work to be performed in accordance with the requirements of this
48 Specification.
49 D. After starting the Work, the Contractor shall be responsible for complete moisture integrity of the
50 roofing and flashing membrane and for providing a properly applied roof. Therefore, the Contractor
51 shall:
52 1. Establish and follow application procedures to insure that adequate quantities of materials
53 are used.
54 2. Maintain competent Foreman continuously supervising the Work with authority to discard
55 unsuitable materials and remove unsatisfactory workmen from the Project.
56 3. Observe all fire precautions involving the storage and handling of roofing materials.
57 Provide adequate quantity of fire extinguishers at the worksite, especially at the kettles,
58 torches, or open flames.
59 4. Comply with current roofing safety standards at all times.

ROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 5. Supervise installation of and be responsible for seeing that roof mechanical and electrical
2 equipment, roof drains, etc. are properly set without damage to the roof. Make roof and
3 flashing repairs as necessary and advise the Architect in writing of all potential leaks as
4 may be caused by other trades not under the Contractor’s control.
5 6. Under no conditions shall any roofing materials be applied before sunrise, or at anytime
6 when there are indications of moisture present (rain, mist, dew, frost, and snow).
7 7. Install only as much roofing material as can be completed and covered in accordance with
8 the requirements of this Specification in any one day or work period.
9 8. Apply roofing membrane as directed by the Manufacturer and in strict accordance with this
10 Project Manual.
11 9. Avoid walking on membrane while being laid, roofing mechanic shall set and kick the roll
12 of roofing membrane from the insulation or deck side, not from the side previously covered
13 with roofing membrane.
14 10. Insure that all wheeled equipment on the roof be equipped with pneumatic tires.
15 11. Permit no traffic over, nor stack roofing equipment or materials on completed new roofing
16 surfaces without adequate protection with 1/2” plywood.
17 12. Insure that all fishmouths are cut (do not attempt to walk down) and objects causing
18 separation are removed. Patch the areas if the cut is made after the bitumen has set.
19 13. Install flashings at openings, projections and walls adjoining new roofing every day or
20 work period. If circumstances do not allow this, these areas shall be made watertight at
21 the end of each day or work period.
22 14. At the end of each day’s Work, install temporary water cut-offs at all points where the roof
23 membrane does not abut a wall, wood edge member or expansion joint. Water Cut-Off:
24 At end of day's work, or when precipitation is imminent, construct a water cut-off at all
25 open edges. Cut-offs can be built using plastic cement and roofing felts, constructed to
26 withstand protracted periods of service. Cut-offs must be completely removed prior to the
27 resumption of roofing. The water cut-off shall be removed completely before continuing
28 the roof installation. If breaks occur in the water cut-offs or any other part of the roof
29 membrane and water damages the roof insulation, all damaged roof insulation, vapor
30 retarder and roof membrane over the damaged insulation shall be removed and replaced
31 with new materials.
32 15. When using propane torch and/or hot air welding equipment, follow all specified
33 procedures outlined by the roof membrane Manufacturer.
34 16. Comply with other workmanship requirements as outlined in other Sections of this
35 Specification.
36
38 A. Phased construction of the roof membrane, outside the normal recommendations of the membrane
39 manufacturer will not be permitted.
40
42 A. Insulation Attachment, All Deck Types:
43 1. Mechanically attached - Mechanically fasten base sheet or insulation, as noted on the
44 Drawings, in a Factory Mutual 1-90 pattern. Verify fastening pattern with Architect.
45 2. Loose-laid - Install insulation without attachment.
46 3. Foam Adhesive Adhered – Adhere insulation as noted on Drawings in full applications of
47 adhesive.
48 B. Install all base layers of insulation as indicated on the drawings.
49 C. The two opposite sides of any base layer insulation board shall be directly supported to provide the
50 maximum bearing width (minimum 1.5”). Board edges shall be trimmed as required.
51 D. Install insulation coverboard atop base layer as indicated on the Drawings (adhered with hot
53 E. Install tapered insulation for saddles and crickets as indicated on the Drawings (adhered with hot
55 F. Install cover board insulation as indicated on the drawings atop preceding layers of insulation,
56 including saddles and crickets. Cut or score insulation boards to conform to angles of new
57 substrate (adhered with hot asphalt or low rise foam adhesive).
58 G. Limit gaps to 1/8” maximum between boards. Stagger all board joints within the field of the roof.
59 Offset the end and side joints a minimum of 6” from the joints of the preceding layer.
60 H. Cover all installed insulation with roofing membrane by the end of each day.

ROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 A. Prior to roof membrane application, coordinate all HVAC work with the Owner’s HVAC
3 representative. Proper coordination of this work will be the responsibility of the Contractor.
4 B. Execute Work such that the membrane can be sealed on a down slope surface at the end of each
5 day.
6 C. Atop insulation install all modified asphalt membrane materials in strict accordance with the
7 membrane manufacturer’s requirements.
8 D. Install longitudinal runs of roof membrane at right angles to the main slope direction (at roof slopes
9 not exceeding 1/2” per foot) of the field of the roof (or continuous with the roof section’s long
10 dimension). Begin membrane installation at the low point of the roof. Shingle membranes such
11 that water does not run against seams and laps.
12 E. All membrane materials shall be laid free from wrinkles, buckles and voids and shall be turned up
13 and thermally bonded to cant strips and trimmed at vertical walls.
14 F. Membrane construction shall not be phased. “Phasing” shall be defined by the manufacturer.
15 G. At end of day's work, or when precipitation is imminent, construct a water cut-off at all open edges.
16 Cut-offs can be built using plastic cement and roofing felts, constructed to withstand protracted
17 periods of service. Cut-offs must be completely removed prior to the resumption of roofing.
18 H. At the end of every day, install “three-course” flashing system consisting of alternating layers of
19 reinforcement material and mastic to all wall terminations.
20
22 A. Install new wood blocking and metal where required and as specified in other Sections of this
23 Specification.
24 B. All rooftop equipment (including plumbing vents, base flashings, exhaust fans, skylights, vents,
25 etc.) shall be raised by the roofing Contractor with specified and/or approved material to provide a
26 minimum of 8” between the surface membrane and the top of the base flashing.
27 C. Install the base flashing according to the Drawings and roof membrane Manufacturer’s
28 requirements.
29 D. Nail at 8” o.c. top edge and vertical laps of the base flashing to the substrate.
30 E. Install “three-course” flashing system consisting of alternating layers of reinforcement material and
31 mastic to the tops of all exposed base flashings.
32 F. Extend plumbing vents as necessary to assure a minimum of 8” of flashing height as measured
33 from the surface membrane to the top of the vent stack. Furnish and install PVC piping with EPDM
34 couplers as required.
35 G. Install lead flashing at plumbing vents. Lead shall be installed in mastic over base sheet
38 H. Install lead flashing at all drain locations. Lead shall be installed in mastic over base sheet
41 I. Prime all sheet metal that is to be stripped into the roof membrane. Allow primer to dry before
42 stripping in.
43 J. Comply with applicable recommendations of Factory Mutual Prevention Data 1-49.
44 K. All flashings on the section being rehabilitated shall be completed or made watertight by the end of
45 the working day.
46
48 A. Roof Drains
49 1. Disassemble and remove domes and clamping collars scheduled to remain. Clean and
50 examine sumps and leader components as directed. Replace all missing or broken
51 components. Install new drain and bolts.
52 2. Install and seal roof membrane and flashings at drains according to the Drawings.
53 3. All roof drain systems shall be installed to allow positive water flow into the roof drain from
54 the roof surface.
55 4. Replace strainers in drains at the end of each working day.
56
58 3.11 EXAMINATION
59 A. Examine each area to receive vegetated roof assembly for compliance with requirements for
60 installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

ROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 1. Verify that roof insulation over roofing membrane is in place, secure, and flush along all
2 seams.
3 2. Verify that perimeter and other flashings are in place and secure along entire lengths
4 where they will be covered by vegetated roof assembly.
5 3. Verify protection course over membrane roofing is in place and conforming to roofing
6 manufacturer instructions, as inspected and accepted by roofing manufacturer's technical
7 representative.
8 B. Inspect growing medium.
9 1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid, such as paint, paint washout,
10 concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel,
11 paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in growing
12 medium within a planting area.
13 2. If growing medium is contaminated by foreign or deleterious material or liquid, remove
14 growing medium and contamination and replace with new growing medium.
15
17 A. Protection Course: Cover roofing system with protection board if required by roofing manufacturer
18 with butted and fully taped joints before roofing system is subject to vegetated roof assembly
19 installation work.
20 B. Sweep with broom and then use air compressor to blow remaining dust and debris from substrate.
21 C. Install vegetated roof assembly according to manufacturer's written instructions.
22 D. Prepare Surface:
23 1. All surfaces to be smooth, free of debris, soil, and grit prior to placing modules. All
24 surfaces shall be maintained clean and free of debris, soil, and grit during installation.
25 Never walk upon such materials as they may damage waterproofing membrane. If
26 required, clean the surface as recommended by Waterproofing Provider.
27 E. Protect Roof Surface and Structures:
28 1. Traffic over the working area shall be restricted and controlled to qualified personnel only.
29 Provide safety signage, barriers and safety equipment, as appropriate.
30 2. Protect heavily traveled areas or use protected layers during mobilization of materials and
31 equipment to the work area, as recommend by the Waterproofing Provider.
32 3. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling
33 or migrating onto surfaces of other construction.
34 F. Inspect the Work Area:
35 1. Perform a pre-installation inspection of the work areas
36 2. Install slop sheet or protection later above the roof membrane waterproofing in
37 accordance with manufacturer’s guidance. The roof surface shall be smooth, free of
38 debris and grit before installing a slop sheet or protective layer.
39 3. Perform module installation only after appropriate roof waterproofing system has been
40 installed, tested for leaks, and certified to be ready for installation of green roof system.
41 Verify that roof assembly is watertight and free draining.

43 A. Install trays according to manufacturer's written instructions and details.
44 B. Place trays directly over protection cover provided under roofing work of this Section.
45 C. Position bottom troughs of trays perpendicular to direction of roof slope, except minor crickets.
46 D. Orient and overlap interlocking sides to hold trays in place.
47
49 A. Install edger according to manufacturer's written instructions and details.
50 B. Install tray edger at vegetated roof perimeter to conceal tray sides.
51 C. Place short end of edging under tray so that it is held in place by weight of tray. Ensure inverted "U"
52 section at top of edger conceals tray edge.
53 D. Abut lengths of edging neatly. Allow 1/4 inch (6 mm) gap maximum between edging sections.
54 Adjust and trim edging to align sections and achieve a tight fit.
55 E. Corners: Utilize manufacturer's prefabricated corners.
56 F. Access Boxes: Install access box at each drain, valve, and switch. Install top of boxes 0.5 - 1
57 inches above the finish elevation of growing medium where applicable.
58

ROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3.15 PLANTING
2 A. Thoroughly water plant material immediately after planting, at the end of each work day, and after
3 the entire installation of plant material is completed.
4 B. Inspect planting work at the end of each day and after entire installation is complete. Immediately
5 repair any areas that show signs of subsidence, un-evenness, or extreme plant stress with new
6 materials conforming to this Section.
7
9 A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests.
10 B. Perform the following tests:
11 1. Flood Testing: Flood test each deck area for leaks, according to procedures in
12 ASTM D 5957, after completing and protecting roofing membrane but before placing
13 overlaying construction. Install temporary containment assemblies, plug or dam drains,
14 and flood with potable water.
15 a. Flood to an average depth of 2-1/2 inches (64 mm), with a minimum depth of 1
16 inch (25 mm) and a maximum depth of 4 inches (100 mm). Maintain 2 inches (50
17 mm) of clearance from top of sheet flashings.
18 b. Flood each area for 72 hours.
19 C. Correct deficiencies in work that do not comply with requirements.
21
22 3.17 ADJUSTING
23 A. Make adjustments and alignments of trays and metal edger as necessary to give a uniform and
24 finished appearance.
25 B. Replace plant material that appears to be stressed or damaged.
26 3.18 CLEANING
27 A. During planting and maintenance, keep adjacent areas and construction clean and maintain work
28 area in an orderly condition.
29
30 3.19 PROTECTION
31 A. Protect vegetated roof assemblies from damage, including growing-medium contamination, due to
32 operations of other contractors and trades. Repair or replace damaged vegetated roof assemblies.
33
35 A. Maintenance Service: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of vegetated roof assembly
36 Installer approved by roofing-membrane manufacturer. Begin maintenance immediately after plants
37 are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but for not
38 less than the specified maintenance period.
39 1. Assembly and Plant Maintenance: During maintenance period, maintain plantings by
40 cultivating, watering, hand-weeding, fertilizing (if necessary), adjusting and repairing, and
41 performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings.
42 a. Replace growing medium that becomes displaced or eroded because of settling
43 or other processes.
44 b. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and growing
45 medium free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated past
46 management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and
47 reduce hazards. Treatments include physical controls such as hosing off foliage,
48 mechanical controls such as traps, and biological control agents.
49 c. Use only products and methods acceptable to roofing-membrane manufacturer.
50 d. Following maintenance period, instruct Owner and furnish written maintenance
51 instructions as necessary for planting materials to develop and maintain healthy
52 root structure.
53 2. Maintenance Period: 24 months from date of Planting Completion.
54 B. Record all green roof maintenance events. Include name of person, date and activity.
55 1. If growing media test, record lab, test and results.
56 2. If fertilizer, record type and amount applied per 1000 sf.
57 3. Record time needed for bi-weekly weed walk and drain inspection.
58 C. Foot Traffic: Limit foot traffic to a random path a couple times per week by one person. Avoid
59 walking in a single path, standing in one place, or trampling plants. If parapet or adjoining wall

ROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 must be serviced, plants may be covered with plywood or foam sheeting for up to 4 hours
2 intermittently, provided foliage is not wet or frozen and conditions are not too hot or sunny.
3 D. Spring Maintenance (March to June):
4 1. Soil Testing and Fertilization. Approximately 2-3 weeks before spring “growth flush”,
5 administer an annual soil test for PH and fertility levels. Growth flush varies by region,
6 consult biweekly maintenance protocol email for specific recommended testing date in
7 project’s region.
8 2. Maintain pH in the range of 6.5 to 8.0. In the event that pH falls below 6.0, consult the testing
9 lab for appropriate recommendations to increase alkalinity. If the soil is above 8.0, it can be
10 made more acidic with elemental Sulphur or an application of acidifying fertilizer.
11 3. Maintain fertility in the normal range using a typical field soil fertility test as provided by A&L
12 labs or equivalent testing lab. Evaluate the various nutrient levels such as Nitrogen (N or
13 NO3N), Potassium (K), Phosphorus (P). If the soil contains a low (L) amount of these
14 nutrients, conduct a single application of controlled release fertilizer, such as Nutricote® or
15 Osmocote®, at the lab recommended rate. Ensure that fertilizer contains NO Herbicides or
16 Pesticides. Follow the fertilizer labeled directions for application rate and use a rotary
17 spreader to ensure even fertilizer application. Runoff potential does exist and should be
18 evaluated by the applicator in accord with the site specifics; the greater the runoff sensitivity,
19 the lower the application rate. All applications of fertilizer are the sole responsibility of the
20 applicator.
21 4. Coordinate with irrigation contractor to ensure that irrigation system is brought back on-line
22 at the appropriate time to avoid freezing but to provide adequate water to plants starting in
23 the spring.
24 5. Conduct Monthly Inspections:
25 a. Weed Walk: Pull and dispose of all weeds before they flower and set seed.
26 NEVER allow any woody plant to establish in a green roof system, unless they
27 have been specified in intensive green roof areas as part of this project.
28 b. Displaced Soil: Nesting birds may displace soil. Replace lost soil using only
29 manufacturer’s specific, tested, approved engineered green roof growing media
30 based on the intensive or extensive area in which the displacement occurs.
31 c. Drainage Inspection: Inspect roof drains for any debris, pebbles or leaves and
32 remove to ensure proper drainage.
33 d. Debris Removal: Remove any debris blown onto the roof immediately to ensure
34 no damage to plants.
35 e. Pest Control: Monitor pest presence, as most pest problems are the result of an
36 imbalance in the relationship of pest organism and its natural biological controls
37 and these problems may self-correct. If pest problems are persistent, use
38 organic and natural biological control agents to restore balance. Pesticide use is
39 discouraged and should always be considered secondary to cultural and
40 biological control measures, as pesticides can contaminate runoff water and
41 cause environmental damage. Pesticides shall only be applied by qualified and
42 licensed applicators, and only as required. All applications of pesticides are the
43 sole responsibility of the applicator.
44 f. Examine paver and stone mulch areas. Correct any areas that have settled,
45 where stone mulch has been displaced, where pavers have separated away from
46 one another, and/or correct any other unsatisfactory conditions related to the
47 pavers, stone mulch, and edging for the duration of the maintenance period.
48 E. Summer Maintenance (June to September):
49 1. Conduct Monthly Inspections as outlined above for Spring Maintenance.
50 F. Fall Maintenance (October to November):
51 1. Conduct Monthly Inspections as outlined above for Sprint Maintenance.
52 2. Do Not Fertilize during the fall. It may stimulate tender growth and compromise the cold
53 hardiness of the plant materials.
54 3. Do Not Water Period: For northern temperate zones, do not water within 4 weeks of the
55 expected average frost date. Normally, there is plenty of moisture this time of year, and
56 adding additional water may compromise the durability of the plants to endure winter’s cold.
57 For this reason, watering during the winter is also not recommended.
58 G. Winter Maintenance:
59 1. Avoid walking on frozen plants and roof surfaces as they are slippery and dangerous.

ROOFING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2. If clear pathways are needed, avoid using salt and other deicing chemicals, which may kill
2 plants and damage pavers. Instead, use sand or cat litter as anti-slip agents. Consider use
3 of heat strips with pavers, provided they can be applied without damage to the roofing
4 membrane.
5 3. Avoid piling the snow in a single place. Disperse snow evenly over the green roof plantings
6 as excess snow piling can potentially damage plants by insulating the plants and keeping
7 them warm and wet, thereby triggering fungal diseases.
8 H. Watering:
9 1. Water only during establishment period outlined in LEED SSc6.1.
10
11 3.21 ACCEPTANCE
12 A. Conduct post installation inspection to determine acceptance of vegetated green roof assemblies.
13 Inspection to be made by Construction Manager or by Owner’s Representative upon Vegetative
14 Roof Assembly Contractor’s request; five working days’ notice required.
15 B. Installer is responsible to complete requirements to obtain confirmation of warranty from the green
16 roof systems manufacturer(s).
17 C. Installer is responsible to ensure proper maintenance until work has been accepted by
18 representative of Owner or Construction Manager.
19 D. Upon acceptance, and at the end of the maintenance and warranty period, Owner assumes
20 responsibility for maintenance unless otherwise specified.
21
22 END OF SECTION

ROOFING
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 07 62 00
2 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
5 1.2 SUMMARY
11 1.8 WARRANTY
14 2.2 SHEET METALS
15 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
18 2.6 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
19 2.7 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
21 3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
23 3.3 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
24 3.4 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION
26 PART 1 - GENERAL

30 1.2 SUMMARY
32 1. Formed wall sheet metal flashing fabrications.
33 2. Formed low slope roofing counter flashing fabrications.
34 B. Related Work:
35 1. Section 04 22 00 - Concrete Unit Masonry.
36 2. Section 07 52 13 - Modified Bituminous Roofing (APP).
37 3. Section 07 52 16 - Modified bituminous Roofing (SBS).
38 4. Section 07 71 00 - Roof Specialties: for copings, roof edge drainage and reglets.


45 cost.
46 C. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.
48 2. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work.
49 3. Include identification of finish for each item.
50 4. Include pattern of seams and details of termination points, expansion joints and expansion-joint
51 covers, direction of expansion, roof-penetration flashing, and connections to adjoining work.
52 D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 076200 - 1 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 A. Product certificates.
3 B. Product test reports.
4 C. Sample warranty.

6 A. Maintenance data.

8 A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar
9 to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.
10 1.8 WARRANTY
11 A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim
12 that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
13 1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

16 A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement,
17 thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture,
18 fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not
19 rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.
20 B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"
21 requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
22 C. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less
23 than 25 percent.
24 D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.
26 2.2 SHEET METALS

27 A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable,
28 temporary protective film before shipping.
29 B. Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless-Steel Sheet (FLASH-3): ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, dead-soft, fully
30 annealed, stainless-steel sheet of minimum uncoated thickness indicated; coated on both sides with zinc-
31 tin alloy (50 percent zinc, 50 percent tin), with factory-applied gray preweathering.
32 C. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as
33 required to suit forming operations and performance required.
34 1. Alclad Finish: Metallurgically bonded surfacing alloy on both sides, forming aluminum sheet with
35 reflective luster.
36 D. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet according to
37 ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet according to
38 ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40; prepainted by coil-coating process to
40 1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:
41 a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70
42 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed
43 metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

46 A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 mils thick, consisting of a slip-resistant polyethylene-
47 or polypropylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl- or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with
48 release-paper backing; specifically designed to withstand high metal temperatures beneath metal roofing.
49 Provide primer according to written recommendations of underlayment manufacturer.
50 1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F or higher.
51 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F or lower.
52 B. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized building paper, 3 lb/100 sq. ft. minimum.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, protective coatings, sealants, and other
3 miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended
4 by manufacturer of primary sheet metal[ or manufactured item] unless otherwise indicated.
5 B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other
6 suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet
7 metal.
8 1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.
9 a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied
10 coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed
11 fasteners bearing on weather side of metal.
12 b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being
13 fastened.
14 2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.
15 3. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.
16 4. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized
17 steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
18 C. Solder:
19 1. For base materials a mixture of tin and lead [with maximum lead content of 0.2 percent.
20 D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-
21 paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch
22 thick.
23 E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use
24 classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.
25 F. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by
26 aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.
27 G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187.
28 H. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.

30 A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations
31 in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other
32 characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible.
33 1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
34 2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
35 marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
36 3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces
37 exposed to view.
38 B. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
39 1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl
40 sealant concealed within joints.
41 2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
42 C. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for proper
43 installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.
44 D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from
45 compatible, noncorrosive metal.
46 E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal standard for
47 application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
48 F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
49 2.6 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

50 A. Base Flashing (FLASH-3): Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the following
51 materials:
52 1. Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless-Steel Sheet.
53 B. Counterflashing : Fabricate from the following materials:
54 1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.
55 C. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
56 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick.
57 D. Roof-Drain Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
58 1. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2.7 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

2 A. Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch-long, but not exceeding 12-foot-
3 long, sections, under copings, and at shelf angles. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings
4 to extend 6 inches beyond each side of wall openings; and form with 2-inch-high, end dams. Fabricate from
5 the following materials:
7 B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill and similar flashings to extend 4 inches
8 beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch-high, end dams. Fabricate from the following
9 materials:
11 C. Wall Expansion-Joint Cover: Fabricate from the following materials:

15 A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment, wrinkle free, using adhesive to minimize use of mechanical
16 fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of
17 not less than 2 inches.
18 B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Prime substrate
19 if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment
20 manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle
21 fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap
22 side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps and edges with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.

24 A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with
25 provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators,
26 sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
27 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with
28 minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.
29 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify
30 shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.
31 3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs
32 over fasteners.
33 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool
34 marks.
35 5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
36 B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-treated
37 wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces
38 with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or
39 cited sheet metal standard.
40 1. Coat concealed side of uncoated-aluminum and stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim with
41 bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
42 2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood
43 substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.
44 C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints
45 at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or intersection.
46 1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant
47 concealed within joints.
48 2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
49 D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails
50 and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.
51 E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize
52 possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation.
53 F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with
54 requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."
55 G. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets
56 with solder to width of 1-1/2 inches; however, reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in
57 completed Work.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 1. Do not solder aluminum sheet.

2 2. Do not use torches for soldering.
3 3. Heat surfaces to receive solder, and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove
4 flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.
5 4. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets, using solder for stainless steel and acid
6 flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering. Comply with solder
7 manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization.
8 5. Copper Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets, using solder for copper.
9 H. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where necessary for strength.
10 3.3 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

11 A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and cited sheet
12 metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes.
13 Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant.
14 B. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for
15 elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band
16 and tighten.
17 C. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert
18 counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over
19 base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4 inches.
20 D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and
21 other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.
22 3.4 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION

23 A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to cited
24 sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of
25 wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.
26 B. Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of through-wall flashing is specified in Section 04 22 00 "Concrete Unit
27 Masonry."

29 A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.
30 B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.
31 C. Clean off excess sealants.
32 D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed
33 unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
34 END OF SECTION

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 07 62 50
2 HISTORIC SHEET METAL FLASHINGS AND TRIM
3
7 1.3 REFERENCES
8 1.4 CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS
9 1.5 SUBMITTALS
11 1.7 WARRANTIES
14 2.2 MATERIALS
15 2.3 FABRICATION
17 3.1 EXAMINATION
18 3.2 INSTALLATION
19
20 PART 1 - GENERAL
21
23 A. This Section includes all labor, material, equipment and related services necessary to furnish and
24 install the following Work.
25 1. Sheet metal counterflashings and receivers.
26
28 A. There shall be no deviation made from this Specification or the approved shop drawing without
30 B. Shop drawings of proposed alternate details shall be submitted to Architect for approval prior to
31 start of construction.
32 C. Proposed alternate details and application procedures shall comply with the intent of these
33 Specifications, Drawings and/or Manufacturer’s recommendations.
34
35 1.3 REFERENCES
38 2. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association (SMACNA).
39
40 1.4 CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS
41 A. The Contractor shall not change the Project Foreman without prior approval of the Architect.
42 B. The Contractor shall not change the crew without 5 days notice to the Architect.
43 C. The Contractor’s Foreman shall be present on the job site during work hours.
44 D. A competent Foreman shall oversee all roofing work. The Foreman shall have the authority to
45 remove unfit workers from the project along with wet, damaged or unsuitable materials. All workers
46 shall be skilled in the application of the materials and all workmanship shall be of the highest
47 quality.
48 E. Roofing work shall not be performed when adverse weather conditions are existing, forecasted or
49 when indications of moisture are present. Roofing materials shall not be applied before sunrise.
50 F. Roofing work shall not be performed when air temperatures are (or are expected to be) below 40°F.
51 G. All Work that requires saw cutting, vacuuming and other similar functions that create substantial
53 Architect.
54 H. Prior to the start of the Project, and daily after the start, the Contractor shall review the type of
55 space below the roof being worked on, and comply with all special requirements due to occupancy
56 type.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 076250 - 1 HISTORIC SHEET METAL FLASHINGS
AND TRIM
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 I. Take all necessary precautions to protect the Owner’s property as well as adjacent property,
3 conduit or cable, etc., from any and all damage which may result due to Work on this Project.
4 J. The Contractor shall provide a weathertight condition throughout the duration of this project. At the
5 Contractor’s expense, the Contractor shall repair or replace (as determined by the Architect) any
6 Work or property damaged by failure to provide a weathertight condition.
7
8 1.5 SUBMITTALS
9 A. Submit shop drawings. Details required for roof system installation that are not shown or differ
10 from the Specifications shall be submitted to the Architect. All dimensions and installation methods
11 shall be detailed on shop drawings.
13 C. Submit standard samples for approval.
14 D. Submit shop drawing of counterflashing and receiver.
16
18 A. Deliver all materials in Manufacturer’s original, unopened packaging with Manufacturer’s labels
19 intact and legible and store as required by the Manufacturer.
20 B. All materials sensitive to moisture and UV radiation shall be covered with a properly secured,
21 water-resistant, breathable covering, such as canvas tarps at the end of each work period and
22 during adverse weather. The Manufacturers’ shrink wrap covering shall be slashed. Materials
23 shall be raised above the ground or roof and placed on pallets or platforms.
24 C. Do not overload the roof deck or structural assembly.
25 D. Do not transport roofing materials over or store materials on a finished roof section, without prior
26 approval of the Architect.
27 E. The Contractor shall replace at his own expense all materials damaged due to improper handling.
28
29 1.7 WARRANTIES
31 1. Contractor’s Warranty: The Contractor shall warrant, the workmanship in writing for a
32 period of two (2) years following completion and that the Work has been installed
33 according to material Manufacturer’s current specifications and according to this
34 Specification. The warranty shall cover labor and materials.
35 2. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Provide Manufacturer’s standard warranty guaranteeing color,
36 fade, chalking and film integrity for a period of 20 years when tested against the
37 Weatherometer Method 6152, acceptable per FED TEST METHOD 141 for prefinished
38 metals with resin coating.
39
41
43 A. Provide materials from the Manufacturers listed in this section.
44 B. Materials shall meet all specified standards.
45 C. All materials shall be new unless noted otherwise.
46 D. New materials shall not contain asbestos.
47
48 2.2 MATERIALS
49 A. Counterflashing: Shall be 24 gauge, two-piece 304-2B stainless steel.
50 B. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal: Galvanized steel, ASTM A525 Class G-90 zinc coating, 24 gage with
51 minimum 1.25 oz. per square foot galvanized coating.
52 C. Continuous Cleat: 22 gage-galvanized steel with minimum 1.25 oz. per square foot galvanized
53 Fasteners (Miscellaneous)
54 1. Fasteners such as nails, screws, etc. shall be of same material as metal flashing on which
55 they are used. They shall be of type and size as shown on the Drawings or specified
56 herein.
57
58 2. Screws used to secure metal to blocking shall be #8 minimum, penetrate wood blocking
59 minimum 1-1/2” and shall have metal washers and watertight neoprene washers under

AND TRIM
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 hex head. The installed withdrawal resistance shall be a minimum of 150 pounds per
2 screw.
5 4. Fasteners used to secure sheet metal to masonry or stone shall be 1/4” minimum
6 diameter metal expansion stud anchors in pre-drilled holes such as “Kwik-Bolt II Stud
7 Expansion Anchor” by Hilti, Inc. or approved equal. Space fasteners at 24” o.c. maximum
8 spacing.
9 5. Fasteners used to secure gutter spacers to hemmed edge shall be 3/8” diameter cadmium
10 plated nut, bolt and washer assemblies.
11 D. Solder: FS QQ-S-571 or ASTM B32. Use 50/50 for all applicable work unless otherwise specified.
12 E. Soldering Flux: FS O-F-506, type best suited for specific material.
13 F. Other Materials: All other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and
14 proper installation of the Work in this Section, shall be as selected by the Contractor subject to the
16
17 2.3 FABRICATION
18 A. Form sections square, true and accurate to size, free from distortion and other defects detrimental
19 to appearance or performance.
20 B. Provide cross-break to top surface of coping metal and at all exposed surfaces of all metals which
21 exceed 8” in cross dimension.
22 C. Fascia Panel Assembly
23 1. Fabricate side lap joints in male/female configuration for air and water tightness and
24 structural integrity between adjacent panels.
25 2. Fabricate side lap joints to permit concealed fastening of panels to structure.
26 3. Fabricate panels with a flatness deviation not to exceed 0.030” in 18” in any direction
27 when measured with a metal straight edge.
28 4. Panels exhibiting rippling, waving or oil canning exceeding 0.030” in 18” in any direction
29 when measured with a metal straight edge will be rejected.
30
32
33 3.1 EXAMINATION
34 A. Examine supporting members and substrate for layout, alignment and soundness.
35 B. Verify that surfaces are free from debris and unnecessary protrusions.
36
37 3.2 INSTALLATION
38 A. Counterflashing and Receivers
39 1. Saw-cut or rake out mortar joints to form new reglet approximately 1” minimum uniform
40 depth at elevation of a minimum 10” above the surface of the roof membrane, as shown
41 on the Drawings.
42 2. Secure spring locked reglet receivers in clean and sound saw cuts at mortar joint.
43 3. The reglet receiver shall be notched and lapped at all corners and joints.
44 4. Receiver shall be attached at 24” O.C. minimum.
45 5. Secure flashings to reglet receivers using specified type fasteners at 18” o.c. maximum
46 and as noted on the Drawings.
47 6. Fit flashing tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and
48 lines accurate to profiles.
49 7. The counterflashing shall be notched and lapped at inside corners and joints and seamed
50 at outside corners.
51 8. Maintain lines of constant elevation around entire perimeter unless noted otherwise on the
52 Drawings.
53 9. Apply continuous bead of sealant to masonry/metal intersection at top of reglet. Tool to
54 smooth finish.
55 10. Where existing structural expansion joint intersects sheet metal work, provide “slip joint” in
56 sheet metal work to accommodate movement of the structure.
57
58 END OF SECTION

AND TRIM
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 07 71 00
2 ROOF SPECIALTIES
4 1.1 SUMMARY
9 1.6 WARRANTY
12 2.2 COPINGS
13 2.3 ROOF EDGE GRAVEL STOP
14 2.4 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
15 2.5 MANUFACTURED REGLETS
16 2.6 REGLETS AND COUNTERFLASHINGS
22 3.3 COPING INSTALLATION
23 3.4 ROOF-EDGE SPECIALITIES INSTALLATION
24 3.5 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
25 3.6 REGLET AND COUNTERFLASHING INSTALLATION
27 PART 1 - GENERAL
28 1.1 SUMMARY
30 1. Copings (COPING-1).
31 2. Gravel stops.
32 3. Roof-edge drainage systems (SCUPPER-1).
33 4. Reglets and counterflashings (REGLET-1).
34 B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

39 cost.
40 C. Shop Drawings: For roof specialties.
41 1. Include plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, keyed details, and attachments to other work.
42 Distinguish between plant- and field-assembled work.
43 D. Samples: For each type of roof specialty and for each color and texture specified.

45 A. Product Test Reports: For tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
46 B. Sample warranty.

48 A. Maintenance Data: For roofing specialties to include in maintenance manuals.

50 A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer offering products meeting requirements that are SPRI
51 ES-1 tested to specified design pressure.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 077100 - 1 ROOF SPECIALTIES
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 1.6 WARRANTY
2 A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof specialties that
3 show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
4 1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
5 a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
6 b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
7 c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
9 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

11 A. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less
12 than 25 percent.
13 B. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings tested according to SPRI ES-1 and capable
14 of resisting the following design pressures:
15 1. Design Pressure: As indicated on Drawings.
16 C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to
17 prevent buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants,
18 failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress
19 as a result of thermal movements. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar
20 heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
21 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
22 2.2 COPINGS
23 A. Metal Copings (COPING-1): Manufactured coping system consisting of metal coping cap in section lengths
24 not exceeding 12 feet, concealed anchorage; with corner units, end cap units, and concealed splice plates
25 with finish matching coping caps.
26 1. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Coping Caps: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel, nominal thickness as
27 required to meet performance requirements.
28 a. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.
29 b. Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer.
30 c. Color: Refer Material Tag Index.
31 2. Corners: Factory mitered and soldered.
32 3. Coping-Cap Attachment Method: face leg hooked to continuous cleat with back leg fastener
33 exposed, fabricated from coping-cap material.
34 a. Face-Leg Cleats: Concealed, continuous stainless steel.
35 2.3 ROOF EDGE GRAVEL STOP
36 A. One-Piece Gravel Stops: Manufactured, one-piece, metal gravel stop in section lengths not exceeding 12
37 feet (3.6 m), with a horizontal flange and vertical leg fascia terminating in a drip edge, and concealed splice
38 plates of same material, finish, and shape as gravel stop. Provide matching corner units.
39 1. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Gravel Stops: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel, nominal thickness as
40 required to meet performance requirements.
41 a. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.

42 b. Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer.
43 c. Color: Color: Refer Material ID List.
44

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2.4 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE SYSTEMS

2 A. Parapet Scuppers (SCUPPER-1): Manufactured with closure flange trim to exterior, 4-inch-wide wall flanges
3 to interior, and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof.
4 1. Zinc-Coated Steel: Nominal 0.028-inch thickness.
5 2. Downspouts: Open-face rectangular complete with mitered elbows, manufactured from the following
6 exposed metal. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors.
7 a. Zinc-Coated Steel: Nominal 0.034-inch thickness.
8 b. Size: Refer to Drawings.
9 3. Conductor Heads: Manufactured conductor heads, each with flanged back and stiffened top edge,
10 and of dimensions and shape indicated, complete with outlet tube that nests into upper end of
11 downspout.
12 a. Zinc-Coated Steel: Nominal 0.028-inch thickness.
13 B. Zinc-Coated Steel Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer.
14 1. Color: Refer Material ID List.
15 2.5 MANUFACTURED REGLETS

16 A. Reglets (REGLET-1): Units of type, material, and profile required, formed to provide secure interlocking of
17 separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with factory-mitered and
18 -welded corners and junctions and with interlocking counterflashing on exterior face, of same metal as reglet.
19 1. Material: Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.
20 2.6 REGLETS AND COUNTERFLASHINGS

21 A. Reglets (REGLET-1): Manufactured units formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and
22 counterflashing pieces.
23 B. Counterflashing; Refer to Section 07 62 00.

25 A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of slip-resisting
26 polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-
27 paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
28 1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970/D 1970M; stable after testing at 240 deg F.
29 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970/D 1970M; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F.

31 A. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to meet
32 performance requirements. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated:
33 1. Exposed Penetrating Fasteners: Gasketed screws with hex washer heads matching color of sheet
34 metal.
35 2. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.
36 3. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip zinc-
37 coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 with finish matching sheet finish.
38 B. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant of type, grade, class, and use
39 classifications required by roofing-specialty manufacturer for each application.
40 C. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
41

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

3 A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with temperature
4 restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed
5 water, and with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges
6 not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.
7 1. Apply continuously under copings.
8 2. Coordinate application of self-adhering sheet underlayment under roof specialties with requirements
9 for continuity with adjacent air barrier materials.

11 A. General: Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof specialties
12 securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective
13 coatings, separators, underlayments, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete roof-
14 specialty systems.
15 1. Install roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation; with limited oil-canning and without
16 warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.
17 2. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder and sealant.
18 3. Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in weathertight performance. Verify shapes and
19 dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture.
20 4. Torch cutting of roof specialties is not permitted.
21 5. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
22 B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with
23 each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other
24 permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
25 1. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of roof
26 specialties for waterproof performance.
27 C. Expansion Provisions: Allow for thermal expansion of exposed roof specialties.
28 1. Space movement joints at a maximum of 12 feet with no joints within 18 inches of corners or
29 intersections unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
30 2. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for
31 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient
32 temperatures.
33 D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches
34 for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.
35 E. Seal concealed joints with sealant as required by roofing-specialty manufacturer.
36 F. Seal joints as required for weathertight construction. Place sealant to be completely concealed in joint. Do
37 not install sealants at temperatures below 40 deg F.
38 3.3 COPING INSTALLATION

39 A. Install cleats, anchor plates, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed
40 fasteners.
41 B. Anchor copings with manufacturer's required devices, fasteners, and fastener spacing to meet performance
42 requirements.
43 1. Interlock face-leg drip edge into continuous cleat anchored to substrate at manufacturer's required
44 spacing that meets performance requirements. Anchor back leg of coping with screw fasteners and
45 elastomeric washers at manufacturer's required spacing that meets performance requirements.
46 3.4 ROOF-EDGE SPECIALITIES INSTALLATION

47 A. Install cleats, cants, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed fasteners.
48 B. Anchor roof edgings with manufacturer's required devices, fasteners, and fastener spacing to meet
49 performance requirements.
50 3.5 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

51 A. General: Install components to produce a complete roof-edge drainage system according to manufacturer's
52 written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-edge drainage
53 system.
54 B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in cited sheet
55 metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat
56 anchored to substrate.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in cited sheet metal
2 standard unless otherwise indicated.
3 D. Downspouts: Join sections with manufacturer's standard telescoping joints. Provide hangers with fasteners
4 designed to hold downspouts securely to walls and 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and
5 bottom and at approximately 48 inches o.c.
6 1. Provide elbows at base of downspouts at grade to direct water away from building.
7 E. Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers through parapet where indicated. Continuously support scupper, set to
8 correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing
9 membrane.
10 3.6 REGLET AND COUNTERFLASHING INSTALLATION

11 A. Embedded Reglets: See Drawings for installation of reglets.
12 B. Surface-Mounted Reglets: Install reglets to receive flashings where flashing without embedded reglets is
13 required. Install at height so that inserted counterflashings overlap 4 inches over top edge of base flashings.

15 A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.
16 B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are installed.
17 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 07 71 29
2 MANUFACTURED ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS
5 1.2 SUMMARY
10 1.7 WARRANTY
13 2.2 BELLOWS-TYPE ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS (ROOFJNT-1)
14 2.3 MATERIALS
16 3.1 INSTALLATION
17 PART 1 - GENERAL

21 1.2 SUMMARY
22 A. Section includes flanged bellows-type roof expansion joints.


30 materials.
31 C. Shop Drawings: For roof expansion joints.
32 D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color specified.

35 B. Product Test Reports: For each fire-barrier provided as part of a roof-expansion-joint assembly, for tests
36 performed by a qualified testing agency.
37 C. Sample Warranties: For special warranty.

39 A. Installer Qualifications: Installer of roofing membrane.
40 1.7 WARRANTY
41 A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace roof expansion joints and
42 components that leak, deteriorate beyond normal weathering, or otherwise fail in materials or workmanship
43 within specified warranty period.
44 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 077129 - 1 MANUFACTURED ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

3 A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fire-barrier assemblies with fire-test-response characteristics
4 as determined by testing identical products, per test method indicated, by UL or another testing agency
5 acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Fire-barrier products shall bear classification marking of
7 1. Exterior Wall Rating; One hour.
8 2.2 BELLOWS-TYPE ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS (ROOFJNT-1)

9 A. Source Limitations: Obtain bellows-type roof expansion joints approved by roofing manufacturer and that
10 are part of roofing membrane warranty.
11 B. Flanged Bellows Roof Expansion Joint (ROOFJNT-1): Manufactured, continuous, waterproof, joint-cover
12 assembly, consisting of exposed membrane bellows, laminated to flexible, closed-cell support foam, and
13 secured along each edge to a metal flange for nailing to substrate. Provide factory-fabricated units for corner
14 and joint intersections and horizontal and vertical transitions including those to other building expansion
15 joints.
16 1. Bellows: EPDM flexible membrane.
17 2. Flanges: Galvanized steel.
18 3. Vapor barrier.
19 4. Fire rated.
20 C. Basis of Design: Johns Manville: Expand-O-Flash EJ expansion joint cover with 520 Fire Barrier (bottom
21 mount).
22 D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may
24 1. C/S Group: Model: BRJ EJ with fire barrier.
25 2. Johns Manville. Comparable joingt system.
26 3. InPro Corporation (IPC); Jointmaster 672 Series with Vapor Barrier and 972 fire blanket.
27 4. Cover Membrane: Flexible membrane, factory laminated to bellows and covering entire joint
28 assembly and curbs.
29 E. Fire-Resistance Rating: Comply with ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079; testing by a qualified testing agency to resist
30 the spread of fire and to accommodate building thermal movements without impairing its ability to resist the
31 passage of fire and hot gases. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
32 1. Rating: Not less than 1-hour.
33 2. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another
35 2.3 MATERIALS
36 A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, hot-dip zinc-coating designation G90.
37 B. EPDM Membrane: ASTM D 4637, Type standard with manufacturer for application.
38 C. Adhesives: As recommended by roof-expansion-joint manufacturer.
39 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of [70] <Insert value> g/L or less.
40 2. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of
41 Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical
42 Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
43 D. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to withstand
44 design loads.
45 1. Exposed Fasteners: Gasketed. Use screws with hex washer heads matching color of material being
46 fastened.
47

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
2 3.1 INSTALLATION
3 A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling and installing roof expansion joints.
4 1. Anchor roof expansion joints securely in place, with provisions for required movement.
5 2. Install roof expansion joints true to line and elevation; with limited oil-canning and without warping,
6 jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.
7 3. Provide for linear thermal expansion of roof expansion joint materials.
8 4. Provide uniform profile of roof expansion joint throughout its length; do not stretch or squeeze
9 membranes.
10 5. Provide uniform, neat seams.
11 6. Install roof expansion joints to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.
12 B. Directional Changes and Other Expansion-Control Joint Systems: Install factory-fabricated units at
13 directional changes and at transitions between roof expansion joints and exterior expansion-control joint
14 systems specified in Section 07 95 00 "Expansion Control" to provide continuous, uninterrupted, and
15 watertight joints.
16 C. Splices: Splice roof expansion joints with materials provided by roof-expansion-joint manufacturer for this
17 purpose.
18 1. Install waterproof splices and prefabricated end dams to prevent leakage of secondary-seal
19 membrane.
20 D. Fire Barrier: Install fire barrier where indicated to provide continuous, uninterrupted fire resistance throughout
21 length of roof expansion joint, including transitions and end joints.
22 E. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with
25 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 07 72 00
2 ROOF ACCESSORIES
5 1.2 SUMMARY
6 1.3 COORDINATION
10 1.7 WARRANTY
12 2.1 ROOF HATCH
15 3.1 INSTALLATION
16 3.2 REPAIR AND CLEANING
17 PART 1 - GENERAL

21 1.2 SUMMARY
23 1. Roof hatches.
24 B. Related Work:
25 1. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry: for field constructed curbs (CURB-2)
26 1.3 COORDINATION
27 A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing
28 and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and noncorrosive
29 installation.
30 B. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.

32 A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory.
33 B. Shop Drawings: For roof accessories.

35 A. Sample warranties.

37 A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roof accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
38 1.7 WARRANTY
39 A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
40 finishes or replace roof accessories that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within
41 specified warranty period.
42 1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
43 a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
44 b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
45 c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 077200 - 1 ROOF ACCESSORIES
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 2.1 ROOF HATCH

3 A. Roof Hatches (HATCH-1): Metal roof-hatch units with lids and insulated double-walled curbs, welded or
4 mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, continuous lid-to-curb counterflashing and weathertight
5 perimeter gasketing, straight sides and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom. Provide
6 non-penetrating roof railings and gates.
7 1. Basis of Design: Bilco Type L, thermally broken, insulated aluminum roof hatch.
10 a. Acudor Products, Inc.
11 b. Babcock-Davis.
12 c. Bilco Company (The).
13 B. Type and Size: Single-leaf lid, 30 by 96 inches.
14 C. Loads: Minimum 40-lbf/sq. ft. external live load and 20-lbf/sq. ft. internal uplift load.
15 D. Hatch Material (Cover and Frame): Aluminum sheet.
16 1. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard thickness for hatch size indicated.
17 2. Finish: Mill.
18 E. Construction:
19 1. Insulation: Minimum one inch Fiberglass board or equivalent foam board at cover, frame and curb.
20 2. Nailer: Factory-installed wood nailer continuous around hatch perimeter.
21 3. Hatch Lid: Opaque, insulated, and double walled, with manufacturer's standard metal liner of same
22 material and finish as outer metal lid.
23 4. Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard, of same material and finish as metal curb.
24 5. Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches above roofing surface unless otherwise indicated.
25 6. Sloping Roofs: Where slope or roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb with perimeter curb height that
26 is constant. Equip hatch with water diverter or cricket on side that obstructs water flow.
27 F. Hardware: Spring operators, hold-open arm, stainless-steel spring latch with turn handles, stainless-steel
28 butt- or pintle-type hinge system, and padlock hasps inside and outside.
29 1. Provide two-point latch on lids larger than 84 inches.
30 G. Hatch Rail System:
31 1. Hatch rail system satisfies the requirements of OSHA 29 CFR 1910.23 and meets OSHA strength
32 requirements.
33 2. Basis of Design: Bil-Guard ® 2.0 Hatch Railing System
34 a. Aluminum rail construction.
35 b. Fixed hatch railing system provides a permanent means of fall protection for roof hatch
36 openings.
37 3. Warranty: 25-year warranty against defects in material and workmanship.

39 A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous
40 items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.
41 B. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for aboveground use,
42 acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, containing no arsenic or chromium, and complying with
43 AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick.
45 3.1 INSTALLATION
46 A. General: Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories. Install roof accessories according to
48 1. Install roof accessories level; plumb; true to line and elevation; and without warping, jogs in alignment,
49 buckling, or tool marks.
50 2. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated loads.
51 3. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete
52 installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates.
53 4. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, or loosening of
54 fasteners and seals.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with
4 C. Seal joints with elastomeric or butyl sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer.
5 3.2 REPAIR AND CLEANING

6 A. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting according to
7 Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting."
8 B. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
9 C. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup
10 or similar minor repair procedures.
11 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 07 81 00
2 APPLIED FIREPROOFING
5 1.2 SUMMARY
12 2.2 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS
15 3.1 EXAMINATION
16 3.2 APPLICATION
18 3.4 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIRING
19 PART 1 - GENERAL

23 1.2 SUMMARY
24 A. Section includes sprayed fire-resistive materials (SFRM).
26 1. Over coating with paint: Refer to Section 09 91 23 – Interior Painting.

29 B. Shop Drawings: Framing plans, schedules, or both, indicating the following:
30 1. Extent of fireproofing for each construction and fire-resistance rating.
31 2. Applicable fire-resistance design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting agency
33 3. Minimum fireproofing thicknesses needed to achieve required fire-resistance rating of each structural
34 component and assembly.
35 4. Treatment of fireproofing after application.

38 B. Installer’s Qualifications.
39 C. LEED Submittal:
40 1. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For paints and coatings used inside the weatherproofing
41 system, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of
42 the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
43 Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
44 D. Product Certificates: For each type of fireproofing.
45 E. Evaluation Reports: For fireproofing, from ICC-ES.
46 F. Field quality-control reports.

48 A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by fireproofing
49 manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's products according to
50 specified requirements.
51

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 078100 - 1 APPLIED FIREPROOFING
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply fireproofing when ambient or substrate temperature is 44 deg F or
3 lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain temperature at or above this level for
4 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product application.
5 B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of fireproofing, providing complete air
6 exchanges according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use natural means or, if they are inadequate,
7 forced-air circulation until fireproofing dries thoroughly.
8 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

10 A. Assemblies: Provide fireproofing, including auxiliary materials, according to requirements of each fire-
11 resistance design and manufacturer's written instructions.
12 B. Source Limitations: Obtain fireproofing for each fire-resistance design from single source.
13 C. Fire-Resistance Design: Indicated on Drawings, tested according to ASTM E 119 or UL 263 by a qualified
14 testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
15 1. Steel members are to be considered unrestrained unless specifically noted otherwise.
16 D. Low-Emitting Materials: Fireproofing used within the weatherproofing system shall comply with the testing
17 and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing
18 of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
19 E. Asbestos: Provide products containing no detectable asbestos.
20 2.2 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS

21 A. Standard Durability SFRM Interior locations and concealed conditions: Manufacturer's standard,
22 factory-mixed, lightweight, dry formulation, complying with indicated fire-resistance design, and mixed with
23 water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar before conveyance and application.
24 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
25 a. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn; Grace Construction Products;
26 Monokote MK-6 Series.
27 2. Bond Strength: Minimum 200-lbf/sq. ft.) cohesive and adhesive strength based on field testing
28 according to ASTM E 736.
29 3. Density: Not less than 15 lb/cu. ft. and as specified in the approved fire-resistance design, according
30 to ASTM E 605.
31 4. Thickness: As required for fire-resistance design indicated, measured according to requirements of
32 fire-resistance design or ASTM E 605, whichever is thicker, but not less than 0.375 inch (9 mm).
33 5. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency.
35 a. Flame-Spread Index: 0.
36 b. Smoke-Developed Index: 0.
37 6. Compressive Strength: Minimum 10 lbf/sq. in. according to ASTM E 761.
38 7. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion according to ASTM E 937.
39 8. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination according to ASTM E 759.
40 9. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination according to ASTM E 760.
41 10. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.0 g/sq. ft. in 24 hours according to ASTM E 859.
42 11. Fungal Resistance: Treat products with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation to result
43 in no growth on specimens per ASTM G 21.
44 12. Finish: Spray-textured finish.

46 A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that are compatible with fireproofing and substrates and are approved
47 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-
48 resistance designs indicated.
49

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 B. Substrate Primers: Primers approved by fireproofing manufacturer and complying with one or both of the
2 following requirements:
3 1. Primer and substrate are identical to those tested in required fire-resistance design by UL or another
4 testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
5 2. Primer's bond strength in required fire-resistance design complies with specified bond strength for
6 fireproofing and with requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listings of another
7 qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on a series of bond tests
9 C. Bonding Agent: Product approved by fireproofing manufacturer and complying with requirements in UL's
10 "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listings of another qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities
13 3.1 EXAMINATION
15 substrates and other conditions affecting performance of the Work and according to each fire-resistance
16 design. Verify compliance with the following:
17 1. Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale,
18 incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants, or other foreign substances capable of impairing
19 bond of fireproofing with substrates under conditions of normal use or fire exposure.
20 2. Objects penetrating fireproofing, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items, are
21 securely attached to substrates.
22 3. Substrates receiving fireproofing are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, or other suspended
23 construction that will interfere with fireproofing application.
24 3.2 APPLICATION
25 A. Construct fireproofing assemblies that are identical to fire-resistance design indicated and products as
26 specified, tested, and substantiated by test reports; for thickness, primers, sealers, topcoats, finishing, and
27 other materials and procedures affecting fireproofing work.
28 B. Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, application procedures,
29 and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and apply fireproofing; as applicable to particular conditions of
30 installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
31 C. Coordinate application of fireproofing with other construction to minimize need to cut or remove fireproofing.
32 1. Do not begin applying fireproofing until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items penetrating
33 fireproofing are in place.
34 2. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fireproofing until
35 application of fireproofing is completed.
36 D. Metal Decks:
37 1. Do not apply fireproofing to underside of metal deck substrates until concrete topping, if any, has
38 been completed.
39 2. Do not apply fireproofing to underside of metal roof deck until roofing has been completed; prohibit
40 roof traffic during application and drying of fireproofing.

42 A. Special Inspections: Owner shall engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special
43 inspections:
44 1. Test and inspect as required by the IBC, 1704.10.
45 B. Perform the tests and inspections of completed Work in successive stages. Do not proceed with application
46 of fireproofing for the next area until test results for previously completed applications of fireproofing show
47 compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or exceed values as specified and as indicated
48 and required for approved fire-resistance design.
49 C. Fireproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
50 1. Remove and replace fireproofing that does not pass tests and inspections, and retest.
51 2. Apply additional fireproofing, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results indicate
52 insufficient thickness, and retest.
54

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3.4 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIRING

2 A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove
3 material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove
4 evidence of soiling.
5 B. Protect fireproofing, according to advice of manufacturer and Installer, from damage resulting from
6 construction operations or other causes, so fireproofing will be without damage or deterioration at time of
7 Substantial Completion.
8 C. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect fireproofing and repair damaged areas and
9 fireproofing removed due to work of other trades.
10 D. Repair fireproofing damaged by other work before concealing it with other construction.
11 E. Repair fireproofing by reapplying it using same method as original installation or using manufacturer's
12 recommended trowel-applied product.
13 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 07 84 13
2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
5 1.2 SUMMARY
12 1.9 COORDINATION
15 2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS (FB-01, FB-02)
16 2.3 TELECOMMUNICATIONS AND ELECTRICAL APPLICATIONS
17 2.4 FILL MATERIALS
19 3.1 INSTALLATION
20 3.2 IDENTIFICATION
22 PART 1 - GENERAL

26 1.2 SUMMARY
28 1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls (FB-1).
29 2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies (FB-2).


35 1. Product Data: For sealants, indicating VOC content.
36 2. Laboratory Test Reports: For sealants, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting
37 materials.
38 C. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location, illustration of firestopping
39 system, and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
40 1. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and
41 inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping system, submit illustration,
42 with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping system manufacturer's fire-
43 protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.
44 Obtain approval of authorities having jurisdiction prior to submittal.


49 A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that penetration firestopping systems have been installed in
50 compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 078413 - 1 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991,
3 "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified
4 Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."
5 B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following requirements:
6 1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities
8 2. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Penetration
9 Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:
10 a. Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified testing and
11 inspecting agency.
12 b. Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to designations listed by the
13 following:
14 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."
15 C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

17 A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures
18 are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet because
19 of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
20 B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of
21 ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
22 1.9 COORDINATION
23 A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping is
24 installed according to specified requirements.
25 B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration
26 firestopping.

29 A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
30 1. Perform penetration firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to
32 2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Penetration Firestopping Systems" Article. Provide rated
33 systems complying with the following requirements:
34 a. Penetration firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified testing
35 agency.
37 2) Intertek Group in its "Directory of Listed Building Products."
38 3) FM Global in its "Building Materials Approval Guide."
39 2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS (FB-1, FB-2)

40 A. Penetration Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases,
41 and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems
42 shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if
43 any.
46 a. 3M Fire Protection Products:
47 b. Hilti, Inc.
48 c. Tremco, Inc.
49 B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per
50 ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.
51 1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
52

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per
2 ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.
3 1. F-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
4 2. T-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated
5 except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.
6 3. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping systems showing no evidence of water leakage when
7 tested according to UL 1479.
8 D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per UL 1479,
9 based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.30-inch wg.
10 1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. of penetration opening at and no more than 50-cfm
11 cumulative total for any 100 sq. ft. at both ambient and elevated temperatures.
12 E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25
13 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
14 1. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.
15 F. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill
16 materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration
17 firestopping system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for conditions
18 indicated.
19 2.3 TELECOMMUNICATIONS AND ELECTRICAL APPLICATIONS

20 A. Cable Bundling Protection:
21 1. Composite Sheet (Intumescent): The intumescent sheet shall be capable of passing ASTM E 814
22 (ANSI/UL 1479) Standard Method of Fire Tests for Through-Penetration Fire Stops up to the
23 desired fire resistance rating.
24 2. Basis of Design: 3M CS-195+ Composite Sheet.
25 3. Systems Components:
26 a. Fire barrier caulk or putty.
27 b. Fire barrier wrap strip.
28 c. Graphite intumescent seal.
29 d. Sheet metal, anchors, washers and screws.
30 e. Cardboard.
31 4. Single Cable Tray - Wall (One and Two Hour Wall): Based on W-L-40004.
32 5. Single and Multiple Cable Trays – Concrete Floor (One and Two Hours): Based on C-AJ-4003.
33 6. Single Cable Tray – Concrete Curb Retrofit (One and Two Hours): Based on F-B-3004.
34 2.4 FILL MATERIALS

35 A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and
36 consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to
37 one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.
38 B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to
39 moisture.
40 C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent
41 material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.
42 D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric sheet bonded
43 to galvanized-steel sheet.
44 E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic
45 fibers, or silicone compounds.
46 F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one
47 side.
48 G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and
49 lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking,
50 homogeneous mortar.
51 H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a
52 combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. Where
53 exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily
54 removed.
55 I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in
56 place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
57

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 J. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade

2 indicated below:
3 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces,
4 and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped surfaces, unless indicated firestopping
5 limits use of nonsag grade for both opening conditions.
7 3.1 INSTALLATION
8 A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening
9 configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
10 B. General: Install penetration firestopping systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation
11 instructions and published drawings for products and applications.
12 C. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their
13 application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve
14 fire ratings.
15 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials
16 and other accessories not forming permanent components of firestopping.
17 D. Install fill materials by proven techniques to produce the following results:
18 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories and penetrating items to
19 achieve required fire-resistance ratings.
20 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating
21 items.
22 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth,
23 uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
25 A. Wall Identification: Permanently label walls containing penetration firestopping systems with the words
26 "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," using lettering not less than 3 inches
27 high and with minimum 0.375-inch strokes.
28 1. Locate in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling, or attic space at 15 feet from end of wall and at
29 intervals not exceeding 30 feet.
30 B. Penetration Identification: Identify each penetration firestopping system with legible metal or plastic labels.
31 Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of penetration firestopping system
32 edge so labels are visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping systems. Use
33 mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to
34 surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:
35 1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of
36 Any Damage."
37 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
38 3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
39 4. Date of installation.
40 5. Manufacturer's name.
41 6. Installer's name.

43 A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections according to ASTM E 2174.
44 B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping system is damaged or removed because of
45 testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping system to comply with requirements.
46 C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping systems with other construction only after inspection
47 reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.
48 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 07 84 43
2 JOINT FIRESTOPPING
5 1.2 SUMMARY
13 2.2 JOINT FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS [SFRM-2]
15 3.1 INSTALLATION
18 PART 1 - GENERAL

22 1.2 SUMMARY
24 1. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions.
25 2. Joints at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections.
26 3. Joints in smoke barriers.


33 C. Installer certification.
34 D. Product Schedule: For each joint firestopping system. Include location, illustration of firestopping system,
35 and design designation of qualified testing agency.
36 1. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing
37 agency's illustration for a particular joint firestopping system condition, submit illustration, with
38 modifications marked, approved by joint firestopping system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer
39 as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.


43 A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that joint firestopping systems have been installed in
44 compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.

46 A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991,
47 "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with UL's "Qualified
48 Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 078443 - 1 JOINT FIRESTOPPING
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

3 A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
4 1. Perform joint firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities
6 2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Joint Firestopping Systems" Article. Provide rated
7 systems complying with the following requirements:
8 a. Joint firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified testing agency.
10 2) Intertek Group in its "Directory of Listed Building Products."
11 2.2 JOINT FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS (JFS)

12 A. Joint Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases, and
13 maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which joint firestopping systems are
14 installed. Joint firestopping systems shall accommodate building movements without impairing their ability
15 to resist the passage of fire and hot gases.
16 B. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide joint firestopping systems with ratings
17 determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079.
18 1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the wall, floor, or roof in
19 or between which it is installed.
20 C. Joints at Exterior Curtain-Wall/Floor Intersections: Provide joint firestopping systems with rating
21 determined per ASTM E 2307.
22 1. F-Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the floor assembly.
23 D. Joints in Smoke Barriers: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with ratings determined per UL 2079 based
24 on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.30-inch wg.
25 1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/ft. of joint at both ambient and elevated temperatures.
26 E. Exposed Joint Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and
27 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.
29 F. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials,
30 that are needed to install elastomeric fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only components
31 specified by joint firestopping system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for
32 conditions indicated.
34 3.1 INSTALLATION
35 A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint
36 configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
37 B. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions
38 and published drawings for products and applications indicated.
39 C. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support elastomeric fill materials during
40 their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve
41 fire ratings indicated.
42 1. After installing elastomeric fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible
43 forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of fire-resistive
44 joint system.
45 D. Install elastomeric fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the
46 following results:
47 1. Elastomeric fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to achieve fire-
48 resistance ratings indicated.
49 2. Apply elastomeric fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints.
50 3. For elastomeric fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce
51 smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
52

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
2 A. Joint Identification: Identify joint firestopping systems with legible metal or plastic labels. Attach labels
3 permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of joint edge so labels are visible to anyone
4 seeking to remove or joint firestopping system. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with
5 adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the
6 following information on labels:
7 1. The words "Warning - Joint Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any
8 Damage."
9 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
10 3. Designation of applicable testing agency.
11 4. Date of installation.
12 5. Manufacturer's name.
13 6. Installer's name.

15 A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections
17 B. Where deficiencies are found or joint firestopping systems are damaged or removed due to testing, repair
18 or replace joint firestopping systems so they comply with requirements.
19 C. Proceed with enclosing joint firestopping systems with other construction only after inspection reports are
20 issued and installations comply with requirements.
21 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 07 92 00
2 JOINT SEALANTS
5 1.2 SUMMARY
11 1.8 WARRANTY
13 2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL
14 2.2 NONSTAINING SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
15 2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS
16 2.4 IMMERSIBLE JOINT SEALANTS
17 2.5 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS
18 2.6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
21 3.1 PREPARATION
22 3.2 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
24 3.4 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
25 PART 1 - GENERAL

29 1.2 SUMMARY
31 1. Silicone joint sealants.
32 2. Nonstaining silicone joint sealants.
33 3. Mildew-resistant joint sealants.
34 4. Latex joint sealants.


38 A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.
42 materials.
43 C. Samples: For each kind and color of joint sealant required.
44 D. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
45 1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.
46 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
47 3. Joint-sealant formulation.
48 4. Joint-sealant color.
49

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 079200 - 1 JOINT SEALANTS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

3 B. Preconstruction laboratory test reports.
4 C. Preconstruction field-adhesion-test reports.
5 D. Field-adhesion-test reports.
6 E. Sample warranties.

8 A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

10 A. Preconstruction Laboratory Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below,
11 samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.
12 1. Adhesion Testing: Use ASTM C 794 to determine whether priming and other specific joint
13 preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint
14 substrates.
15 2. Compatibility Testing: Use ASTM C 1087 to determine sealant compatibility when in contact with
16 glazing and gasket materials.
17 3. Stain Testing: Use ASTM C 1248 to determine stain potential of sealant when in contact with stone
18 and masonry substrates.
19 B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint
20 substrates. Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in
21 Appendix X1.1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.
22 1.8 WARRANTY
23 A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with
24 performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
25 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
26 B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those
27 joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within
28 specified warranty period.
31 2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL

32 A. VOC Content: Sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the following:
33 1. Architectural sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.
34 2. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.
35 3. Sealants and sealant primers for porous substrates shall have a VOC content of 775 g/L or less.
36 B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
37 2.2 NONSTAINING SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

38 A. Nonstaining Joint Sealants: No staining of substrates when tested according to ASTM C 1248.
39 B. Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT: Nonstaining, single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50
40 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S,
41 Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.
44 a. Dow Corning Corporation.
45 b. Pecora Corporation.
46 c. Sika Corporation; Joint Sealants.
47 d. Tremco Incorporated.
48

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

2 A. Urethane, S, NS, 50, T, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement
3 capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25,
4 Uses T and NT.
7 a. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems.
8 b. LymTal International Inc.
9 2.4 IMMERSIBLE JOINT SEALANTS

10 A. Immersible Joint Sealants. Suitable for immersion in liquids; ASTM C 1247, Class 1; tested in deionized
11 water unless otherwise indicated
12 B. Urethane, Immersible, S, P, 50, T, NT, I: Immersible, single-component, pourable, plus 50 percent and
13 minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920,
14 Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T, NT, and I.
17 a. Sika Corporation; Joint Sealants.
18 b. Tremco Incorporated.
19 c. W. R. Meadows, Inc.
20 2.5 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS

21 A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide to prevent
22 mold and mildew growth.
23 B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 50, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-component, nonsag, plus 50
24 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid-curing silicone joint sealant;
25 ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.
28 a. Dow Corning Corporation.
29 b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.
30 c. Tremco Incorporated.
31 C. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.
36 c. Tremco Incorporated.
37 2.6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

38 A. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), and of size
39 and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
42 a. Alcot Plastics Ltd.
43 b. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems.
44 c. Construction Foam Products; a division of Nomaco, Inc.
45 B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer.
46 C. Preformed Expanding Foam Sealant (JS-EXP): Backerseal (Greyflex) by Emseal.
47 1. Secondary Seal and Backer for Sealant: Size and application as indicated.
48 2. Refer to Drawings for application and installation notes.

50 A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint
51 substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
52 B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant
53 backing materials.
54 C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to
55 joints.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
2 3.1 PREPARATION
3 A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-
4 sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
5 1. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
6 2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain,
7 harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion.
8 B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by
9 preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience.
10 C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining
11 surfaces.
12 3.2 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

13 A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1193 and joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for
14 products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
15 B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to
16 produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum
17 sealant movement capability.
18 C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs
19 of joints.
20 D. Preformed Expanding Foam Sealant:
21 1. For installation behind liquid-sealant and backer-rod:
22 a. Set backerseal sufficiently deep into joint to allow for installation of properly sized backer-rod
23 set at its appropriate depth.
24 2. For installation behind directly-applied sealant:
25 a. Set backerseal back from the face of the joint to maintain effective joint geometry of 1 to 2.
26 b. Before applying primary wet sealant, ensure that backerseal is firmly expanded in the joint.
27 c. Primary sealant shall be well tooled against backerseal.
28 E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are
29 installed:
30 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
31 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
32 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum
33 sealant movement capability.
34 F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool
35 sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated. Use tooling agents that are approved in
36 writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
37 1. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated.

39 A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
40 1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:
41 a. Perform 5 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.
42 2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab,
43 in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.
44 B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or
45 noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail
46 to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications
47 until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.
48

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3.4 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

2 A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces <JS-1>.
3 1. Joint Locations:
4 a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
5 b. Joints in stone paving units, including steps.
6 c. Tile control and expansion joints.
7 d. Joints between different materials listed above.
8 e. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
9 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, M, P, 50, T, NT.
10 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
11 B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces subject to water immersion <JS-2>.
13 a. Joints in pedestrian plazas.
14 b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
15 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, immersible, S, P, 50, T, NT, I.
17 C. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces <JS-3>.
19 a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete.
20 b. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete units.
21 c. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
22 d. Joints in dimension stone cladding.
23 e. Joints between stone or masonry exterior envelope components/assemblies and window and
24 door frames and/or subframes.
25 f. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
26 2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT.
27 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors
28 D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces <JS-4>.
30 a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
31 b. Control and expansion joints in stone flooring.
32 c. Control and expansion joints in brick flooring.
33 d. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.
35 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, P, 50, T, NT.
37 E. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces JS-5.
39 a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
40 b. Tile control and expansion joints.
41 c. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of unit masonry walls and partitions.
42 d. Joints on underside of plant-precast structural concrete
44 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, NS, 50, NT.
46 F. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces not subject to
47 significant movement <JS-6>.
49 a. Control joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
50 b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows and
51 elevator entrances.
52 c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
53 2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex.
55

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 G. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic
2 surfaces <JS-7>.
4 a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
5 b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated.
7 2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant, acid curing, S, NS, 50, NT.
9 H. Joint-Sealant Application: Concealed mastics <JS-8>.
11 a. Aluminum thresholds.
12 b. Sill plates.
14 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 07 92 19
2 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
5 1.2 SUMMARY
8 1.5 WARRANTY
11 2.2 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
13 3.1 PREPARATION
14 3.2 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
15 3.3 CLEANING
16 3.4 PROTECTION
17 PART 1 - GENERAL

21 1.2 SUMMARY
22 A. Section includes acoustical joint sealants.

24 A. Product Data: For each acoustical joint sealant.
28 materials.
29 C. Samples: For each kind and color of acoustical joint sealant required.
30 D. Acoustical-Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
31 1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.
32 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
33 3. Joint-sealant formulation.
34 4. Joint-sealant color.

37 B. Sample warranties.
38 1.5 WARRANTY
39 A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace acoustical joint sealants that do not comply
40 with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
41 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
42 B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish acoustical joint sealants to repair or
43 replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this
44 Section within specified warranty period.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 079219 - 1 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

3 A. Provide acoustical joint-sealant products that effectively reduce airborne sound transmission through
4 perimeter joints and openings in building construction, as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies
7 2.2 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

8 A. Acoustical Sealant [AJS-1]: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex acoustical sealant
9 complying with ASTM C 834.
12 a. Dynatrol I-XL, Pecora Corpoeration.
13 b. 860, 890 or 895 series Silicone Sealant, Pecora Corperation.
14 c. Ultra Pruf II Silicone Sealant, General Electric Company.
15 d. SpecSeal ES100, Specified Technologies, Inc.
16 e. Sonoplastic NP1, Manufacturer.
17 f. Spectrem 3, Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing.
18 g. Dymonic, Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing.
19 h. Vulkem 45, Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing.
20 i. Speedspray 572, Hilti.
21 j. CP 506 Smoke and Acoustic Sealant, Hilti.
22 k. BA-98, Pecora Corporatation.
23 l. Acoustic Sealant, Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing.
24 2. Colors of Exposed Acoustical Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range
25 of colors.
26 B. For backbox putty, select one of the following, including all manufacturer-recommended accessories, in
27 conformance with Division 7 - Sealants:
28 1. SpecSeal SSP Intumescent Putty, Specified Technologies, Inc., Somerville, NJ
29 2. IsoBacker, Kinetics Noise Products
30 3. Firestop Putty Pads, Acoustical Solutions
31 C. Primer: Material recommended by acoustical-joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
32 sealant to joint substrates.
33 D. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant
34 backing materials.
35 E. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to
36 joints.
37

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
2 3.1 PREPARATION
3 A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing acoustical joint sealants to comply
4 with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
5 B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by acoustical-joint-sealant manufacturer.
6 C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining
7 surfaces.
8 3.2 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

9 A. Comply with acoustical joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent
10 requirements apply.
11 B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and
12 penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical joint sealant. Install acoustical joint sealants at both faces
13 of partitions, at perimeters, and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919, ASTM C 1193, and
14 manufacturer's written recommendations for closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies,
15 including sealing partitions to underside of floor slabs above acoustical ceilings.
16 C. Acoustical Ceiling Areas: Apply acoustical joint sealant at perimeter edge moldings of acoustical ceiling
17 areas in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.
18 3.3 CLEANING
19 A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with
20 cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of acoustical joint sealants and of products in which
21 joints occur.
22 3.4 PROTECTION
23 A. Protect acoustical joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
24 and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
25 deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or
26 deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated acoustical joint sealants
27 immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
28 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 07 95 00
2 EXPANSION CONTROL
5 1.2 SUMMARY
8 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
10 2.3 INTERIOR EXPANSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
11 2.4 EXTERIOR WALL EXPANSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
13 3.1 PREPARATION
14 3.2 INSTALLATION
15 3.3 PROTECTION
16 PART 1 - GENERAL

20 1.2 SUMMARY
22 1. Interior floor expansion control systems.
23 2. Exterior wall expansion control systems.

25 A. Shop Drawings: For each expansion control system specified. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
26 splices, block out requirement, attachments to other work, and line diagrams.
27 B. Samples: For each exposed expansion control system and for each color and texture specified.

30 A. General: Provide expansion control systems of design, basic profile, materials, and operation indicated.
31 Provide units with capability to accommodate variations in adjacent surfaces.
32 1. Furnish units in longest practicable lengths to minimize field splicing. Install with hairline mitered
33 corners where expansion control systems change direction or abut other materials.
34 2. Include factory-fabricated closure materials and transition pieces, T-joints, corners, curbs, cross-
35 connections, and other accessories as required to provide continuous expansion control systems.
36 B. Coordination: Coordinate installation of exterior wall expansion control systems with roof expansion control
37 systems to ensure that wall transitions are watertight. Roof expansion joint assemblies are specified
38 elsewhere.

40 A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide expansion control systems with fire barriers identical to
41 those of systems tested for fire resistance per UL 2079 or ASTM E 1966 by a testing and inspecting agency
43 1. Hose Stream Test: Wall-to-wall and wall-to-ceiling systems shall be subjected to hose stream testing.
44

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 079500 - 1 EXPANSION CONTROL
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2.3 INTERIOR EXPANSION CONTROL SYSTEMS (JNT-1)

2 A. Floor-to-Floor:
3 1. The work shall consist of furnishing and installing waterproof expansion joints in accordance with the
4 details shown on the plans and the requirements of the specifications. Expansion joints shall be
5 silicone-coated, precompressed foam seal installed into metal rail system leveled and bolted to the
6 structural slab and incorporating integral side flashing sheets for watertight encapsulation into the
7 floor slab.
8 2. LEED Building Performance Requirements: The VOC of the silicone shall not exceed 50 grams/liter.
9 B. Basis-of-Design Product: DSM-FP as manufactured by Emseal Joint Systems Ltd and as indicated on
10 drawings for horizontal expansion joint locations as (JNT-1).
11 1. Sealant system shall be comprised of two subassemblies: a) the joint sealing assembly and b) the
12 structural-slab mounted supporting legs with integral waterproofing side sheets. The two
13 subassemblies shall be comprised of the following components: 1) cellular polyurethane foam
14 impregnated with hydrophobic 100% acrylic, water-based emulsion, factory coated with highway-
15 grade, fuel resistant silicone; 2) field-applied epoxy adhesive primer, 3) field-injected silicone sealant
16 bands, 4.) structural-slab mounted retainer legs, 5.) integral heat weldable NBR modified PVC
17 waterproofing side sheets, 6.) stainless steel capping strips, 7.) hi-mod epoxy-gel leveling bed and
18 dielectric separator layer, 8) carbon Steel Grade II zinc dichromate yellow finish, UNC 16, anchors
19 and nuts and, and 9.) hi-mod anchor epoxy.
20 2. Material shall be capable of movements of +50%, -50% (100% total) of nominal material size. Sizes
21 as scheduled. Depth of seal as recommended by manufacturer.
22 3. Silicone coating to be highway-grade, low-modulus, jet-fuel resistant silicone factory-applied to the
23 foam while it is partially pre-compressed to a width greater than maximum joint extension and cured
24 before final compression.
25 4. Epoxy-mortar setting/leveling bed shall be provided to act as dielectric separator as well as to ensure
26 that the system is fully supported and at the appropriate elevation throughout its length.
27 5. Manufacturer’s field-applied epoxy gel adhesive shall be applied to the faces of the previously
28 installed mounting leg assembly. DSM-FP foam seal is lowered into the adhesive slightly recessed
29 from the surface. Field-injected silicone sealant bands shall be injected at the bellow to leg assembly
30 interface to complete the waterproofing.
31 6. The side flashing sheets shall be 12” (300 mm) wide and .012” (3mm) thick.
32 7. Side flashing sheets are locked into a reglet in top surface of retainer leg on each side of joint. With
33 the side flashing sheets pulled out of the way deck waterproofing membrane is installed on the deck
34 and brought over and up the DSM-FP system retainer legs. The side flashing sheets are lowered into
35 the liquid membrane (or into the non-sag mastic component of a sheet waterproofing system and
36 sandwiched with another layer of waterproofing. Wearing course material is installed up to the
37 stainless steel retaining caps on the mounting rails. Concrete as a wear course is poured up to a 1/4
38 inch (6 mm) form strip placed against the stainless steel retainer caps. After the concrete has cured,
39 the form strip is removed and the control joint caulked with a liquid sealant.
40 C. Fabrication:
41 1. DSM-FP shall be supplied precompressed to less than the joint size, packaged in shrink-wrapped
42 lengths (sticks).
43 2. Expansion joint supporting aluminum rail extrusions shall be factory set at mid-point of movement
44 range and held at this dimension by spacers to be removed after attachment of the rails to the deck.
45 Furnish in lengths to minimize number of end joins.
46

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2.4 EXTERIOR WALL EXPANSION CONTROL SYSTEMS (JNT-2)

2 A. Source Limitations: Obtain expansion control systems from single source from single manufacturer.
3 B. Wall Corner Expansion Control Joint: Surface Mount Wall/Corner.
4 1. Basis-of-Design Product: JointMaster 620-A09 Series – Pleated Seal.
5 a. Insulated Vapor Barrier for vertical applications.
6 b. Drainage fittings for vertical applications.
7 c. Installation adhesive as required.
8 2. Design Criteria:
9 a. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings.
10 b. Minimum Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings.
11 c. Maximum Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings.
12 d. Movement Capability: -25 percent/+75 percent.
13 e. Type of Movement: As indicated on Drawings.
14 f. Fire-Resistance Rating: Provide expansion control system and fire-barrier assembly with a
15 rating not less than 1 hour.
16 3. Materials:
17 a. Elastomeric Seal: Pleated santoprene seal with durometer of 70 shore A. Colors to be
18 selected from manufacturer’s standard range.
19 1) Seal shall be GREENGUARD Gold certified.
20 b. Insulated Vapor Barrier: Owens Corning EcoTouch Batt insulation sandwiched by an adhered
21 and pinned 45 mil fabric reinforced EPDM.
22 c. Fire Barrier: Blanket System with hose stream test to walls required for indicated fire
23 resistance rating.
24 d. Fasteners, accessories and other materials required for complete installation in accordance
25 with the manufacturer’s instructions.
26 e. Centering Bars (where required) shall be fabricated from zinc coated steel.
27 4. Fabrication:
28 a. Field assemble components provided in standard lengths with pre-packaged fasteners and
29 accessories.
30 b. Fabricate special transitions and corner fittings as required. Miter and weld elastomeric seal
31 as applicable.
33 3.1 PREPARATION
34 A. Prepare substrates according to expansion control system manufacturer's written instructions.
35 B. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, and instructions for installing expansion control
36 systems.
37 C. Cast-In Frames: Coordinate and furnish frames to be cast into concrete.
38 3.2 INSTALLATION
39 A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for storing, handling, and installing expansion control
40 systems and materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
41 B. Interior Floor Expansion Joint (JNT-1):
42 1. Manufacturer’s field technician shall be present during initial preparation, inspection, and material
43 installation.
44 C. Seals in Metal Frames: Install seals and membranes in frames to comply with manufacturer's written
45 instructions. Install with minimum number of end joints.
46 1. Provide in continuous lengths for straight sections.
47 2. Seal transitions according to manufacturer's written instructions. Vulcanize or heat-weld field-spliced
48 joints as recommended by manufacturer.
49 3. Installation: Mechanically lock seals into frames or adhere to frames with adhesive or pressure-
50 sensitive tape as recommended by manufacturer.
51 D. Foam Seals: Install with adhesive recommended by manufacturer.
52 E. Terminate exposed ends of expansion control systems with field- or factory-fabricated termination devices.
53

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3.3 PROTECTION
2 A. Do not remove protective covering until finish work in adjacent areas is complete.
3 B. Protect the installation from damage by work of other Sections.
4 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 08 11 13
2 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
5 1.2 SUMMARY
6 1.3 DEFINITIONS
7 1.4 COORDINATION
14 2.3 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES
15 2.4 EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
16 2.5 BORROWED LITES
17 2.6 FRAME ANCHORS
18 2.7 MATERIALS
19 2.8 FABRICATION
20 2.9 STEEL FINISHES
21 2.10 ACCESSORIES
23 3.1 INSTALLATION
25 PART 1 - GENERAL

29 1.2 SUMMARY
30 A. Section includes hollow-metal work.
32 1. Section 08 34 73.13 “Metal Sound Control Door Assemblies”.
33 1.3 DEFINITIONS
34 A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803
35 or SDI A250.8.
36 1.4 COORDINATION
37 A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
38 directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with
39 integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
40 B. Coordinate requirements for installation of door hardware, electrified door hardware, and access control
41 and security systems.


48 and cost.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 081113 - 1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 C. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses, preparations for
2 hardware, and other details.
3 D. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
4 E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.
5 F. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and
6 openings as those on Drawings.

9 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
11 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that
12 may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
13 1. Amweld Building Products, LLC
14 2. Curries Company; ASSA ABLOY.
15 3. LaForce, Inc.
16 4. Steelcraft; an Allegion brand

18 A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency
19 acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings and temperature-rise limits indicated,
20 based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
21 1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and labeled for
22 smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
23 based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.
24 B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Lite Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a testing and
25 inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based
26 on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9.
27 2.3 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES

28 A. Standard-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 1. At locations indicated in the Door and Frame
29 Schedule.
30 1. Physical Performance: Level C according to SDI A250.4.
31 2. Doors:
32 a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
33 b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.
34 c. Face: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.032 inch.
35 d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush.
36 e. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane,
37 polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core.
38 1) Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings
39 indicated.
40 2) Acoustic Rated Door: As required to provide acoustic ratings indicated.
41 3. Frames:
42 a. Materials: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch.
43 b. Sidelite and Transom Frames: Fabricated from same thickness material as adjacent door
44 frame.
45 c. Construction: Full profile welded.
46 4. Exposed Finish: Factory Prime, factory or field painted PT-3G unless noted otherwise on drawings..
47

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 B. "Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames" Paragraph below describes interior-use assemblies fabricated to
2 SDI requirements and containing doors with 0.053-inch (1.3-mm) thick, 16-gage face sheets and laminated
3 cores.
4 2.4 EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

5 A. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2. At locations indicated in the Door and Frame
6 Schedule.
7 1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4.
8 2. Doors:
9 a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
10 b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.
11 c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, with minimum A40
12 coating.
13 d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush.
14 e. Core: Manufacturer's standard insulation material: Polystyrene, Polyurethane or
15 Polyisocyanurate.
16 3. Thermal-Rated Doors: Provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less
17 than 6.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363.
18 4. Frames:
19 a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with minimum A40
20 coating.
21 b. Construction: Full profile welded.
22 5. Exposed Finish: Factory Prime, factory or field painted PT-7A unless noted otherwise on drawings.
23 2.5 BORROWED LITES

24 A. Hollow-metal frames of uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch.
25 B. Construction: Full profile welded.
26 2.6 FRAME ANCHORS

27 A. Jamb Anchors:
28 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than
29 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long;
30 or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.
31 2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick.
32 3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.
33 4. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch-diameter bolts
34 with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement
35 plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.
36 B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, and as follows:
37 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.
38 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less
39 than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.
40 2.7 MATERIALS
43 B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed
44 applications.
45 C. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or
46 surface defects; pickled and oiled.
47 D. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
48 E. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill
49 phosphatized.
50 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or
51 ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
52 F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
53 G. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: From corrosion-resistant materials.
54 H. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to
55 ASTM C 143/C 143M.
56 I. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing).
57 J. Glazing: Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 K. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat.
2 2.8 FABRICATION
3 A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to
4 required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble
5 units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot
6 be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
7 B. Hollow-Metal Doors:
8 1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to
9 escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.
10 2. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80
11 for fire-performance rating or where indicated.
12 C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations,
13 provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.
14 1. Sidelite and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or
15 joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by
16 butt welding.
17 2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless
19 3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted.
20 4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor;
21 however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs.
22 5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
23 a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches from top and bottom of frame.
24 Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c., to match coursing, and as follows:
25 1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
26 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
27 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high.
28 4) Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or
29 fraction thereof above 120 inches high.
30 b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame.
31 Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
32 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
33 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
34 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.
35 4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or
36 fraction thereof above 96 inches high.
37 c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each frame.
38 d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom
39 of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.
40 6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers.
41 a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.
42 b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.
43 D. Removable Center Mullions: Interior frames scheduled for pairs of doors shall be provided with removable
44 center mullion. Refer to Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware for door frame and door hardware preparation
45 required.
46

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware;
2 include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door
3 Hardware Schedule, and templates.
4 1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door
5 hardware.
6 2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow-
7 metal work for hardware.
8 F. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where indicated. Form
9 corners of stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints.
10 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow-metal work.
11 2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is
12 capable of being removed independently.
13 3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and
14 frames.
15 4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work.
16 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types
17 indicated.
18 2.9 STEEL FINISHES

19 A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.
20 1. Shop Primer: SDI A250.10.
21 B. Factory Finish: SDI A250.3.
22 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
23 2.10 ACCESSORIES
24 A. Louvers: Provide sightproof louvers for interior doors, where indicated, which comply with SDI 111C, with
25 blades or baffles formed of 0.020-inch-thick, cold-rolled steel sheet set into 0.032-inch-thick steel frame.
26 1. Fire-Rated Automatic Louvers: Movable blades closed by actuating fusible link, and listed and
27 labeled for use in fire-rated door assemblies of type and fire-resistance rating indicated.
28 B. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.
29 C. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.
31 3.1 INSTALLATION
32 A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelites, borrowed lites, and other
33 openings, of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by
34 standards specified.
35 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors
36 are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and
37 undamaged.
38 a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.
39 b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field
40 splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make
41 splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
42 c. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening.
43 d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
44 e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly
45 set and secured.
46 f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to
47 comply with installation tolerances.
48 g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout containing
49 antifreezing agents.
50 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure
51 with postinstalled expansion anchors.
52 a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion
53 anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
54 3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.
55 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames
56 and masonry with grout.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral-fiber insulation.
2 6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion
3 anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
4 7. In-Place Metal or Wood-Stud Partitions: Secure slip-on drywall frames in place according to
6 8. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and
7 plumb to the following tolerances:
8 a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from
9 jamb perpendicular to frame head.
10 b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane
11 of wall.
12 c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines,
13 and perpendicular to plane of wall.
14 d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.
15 B. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim
16 as necessary.
17 1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:
18 a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.
19 b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.
20 c. At Bottom of Door: 5/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.
21 d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.
22 2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
23 3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors and gaskets according to NFPA 105.
24 C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing" and with hollow-metal
26 1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9
27 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.

29 A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection.
30 Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including
31 hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
32 B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation.
33 C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and
34 apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
35 D. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according
37 E. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting
38 Sections.
39 END OF SECTION

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2016
1 SECTION 08 21 10
2 WOOD DOORS REHABILITATION
3
6 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
7 1.3 SUBMITTALS
11 1.7 WARRANTY
13 2.1 MATERIALS
14 2.2 NEW DOORS
15 2.3 EXISTING DOORS
17 3.1 FABRICATION
18 3.2 INSTALLATION
19 3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION
20
21 PART 1 - GENERAL
22
24
25 A. Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work of this Section.
26
28
29 A. Work of this Section includes the following:
30
31 1. Renovation of existing stile and rail panel wood doors.
32 2. New stile and rail panel wood doors to match existing doors.
33 3. Replacement of leather covering on existing Room 260 wood core doors.
34 4. Replacement of leather desk top panel at Judge’s Bench in Room 260.
35 5. Installation of relocated existing wood doors.
36 6. Repair of wood panels in doors.
37
38 B. Extent and location of each type of wood door is indicated on drawings and in schedules.
39
40 C. Related Work:
41
42 1. Section 060312 – Historic Wood Repair. Wood door frames and other woodwork in juxtaposition
43 to wood doors.
44 2. Section 099300 - Staining and Varnishes.
45
46 1.3 SUBMITTALS
47
48 A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating location and size of each door, elevation of each kind
49 of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire ratings and other pertinent
50 data.
51
52 1. Identify doors in accordance with established method in the bid documents.
53 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts for locksets and other cutouts adjacent to light
54 openings.
55
56 B. Samples: Submit samples, 1-0" square or as indicated, for the required finish representing range of
57 color and grain appearance and color and finished appearance of leather-covered doors.
58

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS #10129 082110 WOOD DOOR REHABILITATION
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2016
1 C. Samples: 6” square of solid wood and veneer panels for new stile and rail doors.
2
3 D. Confirm AWI Grade of doors being manufactured in writing.
4
5 E. Submit samples of leather illustrating range of color and veining. Minimum size shall be 24” square.
6
8
9 A. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards".
10
11 B. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA) grading rules for selection of wood by appearance
12 requirements.
13
14 C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Provide wood doors which are identical in materials and construction to units
15 tested in door and frame assemblies per ASTM E 152 and which are labeled and listed for ratings
16 indicated by UL.
17
18 D. Manufacturer: Obtain doors from a single manufacturer.
19
20 E. Off-site storage locations for existing doors during refurbishing and for new doors prior to delivery to site
21 shall be approved by Architect.
22
24
25 A. Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration.
26 Comply with requirements of referenced standards and recommendations.
27
28 B. Identify each door with individual opening numbers which correlate with designation system used on
29 shop drawings and bid documents for door, frames, and hardware, using designations established in
30 the bid documents.
31
33
34 A. Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have
35 been stabilized and can be maintained in site storage and installation areas during remainder of
36 construction period to comply with AWI quality standard including Section 100-S-3 "Moisture Content".
37
38 1.7 WARRANTY
39
40 A. Submit written agreement in door manufacturer's standard form signed by Manufacturer, Installer and
41 Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors that have warped (bow, cup or twist) or that
42 show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of
43 referenced quality standards.
44
45 1. Warranty shall also include reinstallation which may be required due to repair or replacement of
46 defective doors where defect was not apparent prior to hanging.
47 2. Warranty shall be in effect for two years after date of Substantial Completion.
48
49 B. Replace or refinish doors where Contractor's work contributed to rejection or to voiding of
50 manufacturer's warranty.
51
53
54 2.1 MATERIALS
55
56 A. New Wood Doors.
57
58 1. Finished faces, panels and edges quartersawn white oak, select grade B and better for superior
59 finish in accordance with WWPA grading or to match existing wood doors and as approved by

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2016
1 Architect.
2
3 2. Cores: For AWI Premium Grade doors.
4
5 3. Fire rated doors: Panels shall include 5/8 inch, Type X gypsum wallboard as shown in drawings.
6
7 B. Existing Wood Doors.
8
9 1. Re-use existing quartersawn white oak wood doors stored on-site as designated in Door
10 Schedule.
11 2. Stripping and re-finishing shall be done on-site by Section 099300 contractor.
12
13 C. Leather Covered Doors and Judge’s Bench desk top.
14
15 1. Designated existing flush doors with leather coverings shall have leather replaced with new
16 leather and brass buttons to match existing.
17 2. New Leather: 4-5 oz, Aniline dyed, full grain leather to be used for doors and Judge’s Bench top.
18 Single piece for each side of door, no joints in leather except at edges covered by wood trim.
19 3. Adhesive: Masters of Barge as recommended for this specific use.
20 4. Fastening Devices: Upholstery buttons/nails, pyramid shape nails, with flat top, finish to match
21 existing buttons. Location and spacing shall match existing.
22
23 2.2 NEW DOORS
24
25 A. Comply with tolerance requirements of AWI for Premium Grade doors, final hardware schedules, shop
26 drawings and hardware templates.
27
28 B. Glass Openings: Neatly cut and trim openings for glass in doors to match existing doors and existing
29 molding profiles.
30
31 C. Fabricate new wood doors to match existing doors in 2-1/4 inch and 2 inch nominal thicknesses in
32 dimensions, joining and finished appearance and in compliance with AWI Standard 1400 for Premium
33 Grade Rail and Stile door construction.
34
35 1. Face construction of stiles and rails may be made of two widths of veneer for wide widths
36 provided the veneers are split adjacent to each other from the same board and turned and laid
37 side by side to match grains. Carefully plane edges and tightly fit sheets together.
38 2. Cores shall match existing and be made up of 1-3/4 inch and/or 1-1/2 inch by 1-1/2 inch solid
39 wood strips with 1/4 inch veneer on all sides. Tenons shall be 3 to 3-1/2 inches long.
40 3. Match existing molding profiles.
41 4. Panels shall be solid lumber construction with two outer panels made of white oak veneer and
42 milled to match existing and comply with AWI Premium Grade construction for flat panels.
43 5. Laminate veneers to cores with 100 percent waterproof phenolic resin glue.
44
45 D. Bevel lock side of doors at an angle of 1/8 inch per 2 inches thickness. Break or ease all edges.
46
47 E. New doors shall be fabricated to fit finished door openings such that a clearance of no less than 1/8" is
48 provided at the head and jambs.
49
50
51 2.3 EXISTING DOORS
52
53 A. Refer to Door Schedule for number of existing doors to be reused and the extent of the specific
54 refinishing, repair and rehabilitation work required for each door.
55 B. Repair of existing door panels as noted in Door Schedule shall be as follows.
56 1. Tag and carefully remove door. Protect and store until ready for repair, refinish and
57 reinstallation.
58 2. Clean and completely remove glue from all areas where veneer has lifted from panel core.
59 3. Inject core at existing gaps and cracks (1/64” min.) with wood and glue and cold press until

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2016
1 solidified.
2 4. Allow to cure.
3 5. Inject glue and evenly coat the underside of delaminated areas.
4 6. Cover both sides of panel with non-adhering wax-type paper and place in cold press at 60 psi.
5 7. Hot presses and increased pressure are not allowed.
6 8. Allow to cure.
7 9. Where veneer gaps remain, route out veneer only to a 1/8” maximum to patch with veneer strips
8 cut with sap wood cutter to allow maximum bonding edge. All veneer patches shall be quarter
9 sawn white oak and match abutting components for grain and color.
10 10. Strip and refinish as required. Reinstall.
11
13
14 3.1 FABRICATION
15
16 A. Manufacture of all new wood doors shall be in accordance with AWI standards for Premium Grade door
17 construction or as amended herein.
18
19 B. All new moldings and profiles, joining, size, graining and appearance shall match existing as approved
20 by the Architect.
21
22 C. All joints shall be coped and/or mitered as required, surfaces shall be sanded smooth and be free from
23 tool and machine marks that might show through transparent finish.
24
25 D. Match abutting components for grain and color.
26
27 E. Door panels:
28
29 1. Standard panels shall have two raised areas on each side and may be fabricated from one layer
30 of veneer on each side of core.
31 2. Panels for fire rated doors shall consist of a 1/4 inch medite core with white oak veneer faces.
32 3. Exposed panel veneers shall have grain running in vertical direction only.
33
34 F. Leather-covered doors and Judge’s Bench desk top:
35
36 1. Carefully lay leather on surfaces of doors and bench desk top to plan for best coverage of each
37 hide. Location of joints, matching of colors and grain shall be approved by Owner and Architect.
38 2. Apply full bed of adhesive to doors and desk top and lay out leather carefully stretched over flat
39 surfaces, hand molded around edges and neatly tucked under moldings at glass openings and
40 under trim pieces at back edge of door.
41 3. Wrinkles, gouges, scratches, tool marks and glue marks shall not be acceptable. Unacceptable
42 applications shall be re-done with new leather covering at no expense to the Owner.
43 4. Clean leather with approved cleaner and leather preservative such as "Lustre Cream".
44 5. For doors, install upholstery buttons in pattern to match original door button pattern. Set in
45 straight lines and space evenly.
46 6. Cut leather neatly as required for door locks or other hardware.
47
48
49 3.2 INSTALLATION
50
51 A. Install wood doors to comply with referenced AWI standard and as indicated.
52
53 B. Examine installed door frames prior to hanging doors. Verify that frames comply with indicated
54 requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb
55 jambs and level heads.
56
57 C. Where existing door casing is to be re-used, all screw holes at hinges shall be drilled out and plugged
58 during installation.
59

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2016
1 D. On all existing doors to be re-used, drill and plug screw holes on hinge side.
2
3 E. Notify Architect if conditions do not allow for work to proceed. Do not proceed with installation until
4 unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
5
6 F. Coordinate with Section 087100 - "Door Hardware" section for installation of door hardware.
7 G. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames in accordance with requirements of NFPA No.
8 80.
9
10 H. Install, align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances as indicated below; do not trim stiles and
11 rails in excess of limits permitted with fire-rated doors.
12
13 1. Fitting Clearances for Non-Rated Doors: Provide 1/8" at jambs and heads; 1/8" per leaf at
14 meeting stiles for pairs of doors; and 5/8" from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or
15 covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4" clearance from bottom of door
16 to top of threshold.
17 2. Fitting Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors: Complying with NFPA 80.
18
19 I. Coordinate with Section 099300 to remove doors after installation and adjustment for staining and
20 varnishing of door tops, bottoms and edges. Reinstall after Section 099300 work is complete.
21
22 3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION
23
24 A. Operation: Re-hang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
25
26 B. Replace doors damaged during installation.
27
28 C. Protect doors to ensure that wood doors will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
29 Completion.
30
31

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 08 31 13
2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES.
5 1.2 SUMMARY
9 2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
10 2.3 FIRE-RATED ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
11 2.4 MATERIALS
12 2.5 FABRICATION
13 2.6 FINISHES
15 3.1 INSTALLATION
16 PART 1 - GENERAL

20 1.2 SUMMARY
21 A. Section includes access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.

24 B. Samples: For each type of access door and frame and for each finish specified.
25 C. Product Schedule: For access doors and frames use same designations indicated on Drawings.

28 A. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by
29 a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B.
30 2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

31 A. Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges (ACCESS-1):
35 b. Babcock-Davis.
36 c. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group.
37 d. Larsens Manufacturing Company.
38 e. MIFAB, Inc.
39 f. Milcor; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
40 g. Nystrom, Inc.
41 2. Description: Face of door flush with frame, with exposed flange and concealed hinge.
42 3. Locations: Wall and ceiling.
43 4. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch, 16 gage, factory primed.
44 5. Latch and Lock: Cam latch, screwdriver operated.
45 2.3 FIRE-RATED ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

46 A. Fire-Rated, Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges (ACCESS-2):

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 083113 - 1 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 b. Babcock-Davis.
3 d. Larsens Manufacturing Company.
4 e. MIFAB, Inc.
5 f. Milcor; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
6 g. Nystrom, Inc.
7 2. Description: Door face flush with frame, with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet
8 metal; with exposed flange, self-closing door, and concealed hinge.
9 3. Locations: Wall and ceiling.
10 4. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction.
11 5. Temperature-Rise Rating: 450 deg F at the end of 30 minutes.
12 6. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.036 inch, 20 gage, factory primed.
13 7. Latch and Lock: Self-latching door hardware, prepared for mortise cylinder.
14 2.4 MATERIALS
15 A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
16 B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with cold-rolled steel sheet
17 substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.
18 C. Frame Anchors: Same material as door face.
19 D. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or
20 ASTM F 2329.
21 2.5 FABRICATION
22 A. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with
23 smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller
24 marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
25 B. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish mounting
26 holes, attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports
27 indicated.
28 C. Latch and Lock Hardware:
29 1. Quantity: Furnish number of latches and locks required to hold doors tightly closed.
30 2. Keys: Furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.
31 3. Mortise Cylinder Preparation: Where indicated, prepare door panel to accept cylinder specified in
32 Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware."
33 2.6 FINISHES
34 A. Painted Finishes: Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating,
35 and applying and baking finish.
36 1. Factory Primed: Apply manufacturer's standard, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer
37 immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.
39 3.1 INSTALLATION
40 A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
41 B. Install fire rated access doors to comply with tested assembly installation instructions
42 C. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.
43 END OF SECTION

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 083113 - 2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 08 33 23
2 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
5 1.2 SUMMARY
11 2.2 OVERHEAD COILING SELF STORAGE SHEET DOORS (COIL-2)
12 2.3 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
13 2.4 STEEL AND GALVANIZED-STEEL FINISHES
15 3.1 EXAMINATION
16 3.2 INSTALLATION
17 3.3 ADJUSTING
18 PART 1 - GENERAL

22 1.2 SUMMARY
24 1. Overhead coiling sheet doors.
26 1. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports.

28 A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory.
29 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles for
30 slats, and finishes.
31 B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in
32 manufacturer's product data.
33 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details.
34 2. Include points of attachment and their corresponding static and dynamic loads imposed on
35 structure.

37 A. Maintenance Data: For overhead coiling doors to include in maintenance manuals.

40 manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
41 B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation
42 Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines,,.
43

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 083323 - 1 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

3 A. Structural Performance, Exterior Doors: Capable of withstanding the design wind loads.
4 1. Design Wind Load: As indicated on Drawings.
5 2. Testing: According to ASTM E 330 or DASMA 108 for garage doors and meeting the acceptance
6 criteria of DASMA 108.
7 3. Deflection Limits: Design overhead coiling doors to withstand design wind load without evidencing
8 permanent deformation or disengagement of door components.
9 4. Operability under Wind Load: Design overhead coiling doors to remain operable under design wind
10 load, acting inward and outward.
11 2.2 OVERHEAD COILING SELF STORAGE SHEET DOORS (COIL-2):

12 A. Basis of Design: Overhead Door Corporation 770 Series.
13 1. Comparable products by the following manufacturers:
14 a. Raynor Duracoil Basic.
15 b. Clopay 150c.
16 B. Curtain: Roll formed, galvanized steel, per ASTM A 653 SQ Grade 80, Galvanized G-30. Sections
17 interlocked and permanently seamed together to form a continuous curtain. Provided with a PVC edge
18 strip stapled on the edge of curtain’s exterior side to minimize steel-to-steel contact.
19 1. Slats: Partially perforated panels representing roughly 25% free area of exposed door. Bottom 24
20 inches shall be unperforated.
21 2. Finish:
22 a. Curtain slats shall receive rust-inhibitive, roll coating process, including 0.2 mils thick baked-
23 on prime paint, and 0.6 mils thick baked-on polyester top coat.
24 b. Top Coat Color: As selected by the Architect from the manufacturer’s standard colors.
25 c. Guides, angles, bottom bar stops, headplates and rings galvanized. Aluminum bottom bar
26 clear anodized.
27 3. Bottom Bar: Extruded aluminum reinforced with roll formed steel angle and provided with a flexible
28 PVC bulb type astragal to ensure a consistent seal along the floor. Extrusion designed to interlock
29 with door curtain.
30 4. Bottom Bar Stops: Bottom bar stops shall be 14 gauge.
31 5. Guides: Guide roll-formed from 18-gauge steel. Guides 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide with UHMW
32 polypropylene rub strips on each edge of the guide.
33 6. Headplates: 14-gauge steel and includes steel roller bearings to prevent steel-to-steel contact.
34 7. Counterbalance: Counterbalance assembly with “stepped” designed steel rings to ensure a tight
35 and uniform curtain wrap. 3-3/8 inch (86 mm) I.D. springs \lubricated at factory to enhance long life
36 and door operation. Shaft 1-5/16 inch (35 mm) diameter with .065 inch (1.65 mm) wall thickness to
37 minimize door deflection
38 8. Operation: Manual push up.
39 9. Locking: Dual Exterior curtain locks, slide bolt lock.

41 A. Comply with NAAMM/NOMMA's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products (AMP 500-
42 06)" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
43 B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in
44 appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and
45 are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
46 2.4 STEEL AND GALVANIZED-STEEL FINISHES

47 A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-on finish consisting of prime coat
48 and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning,
49 pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness.
51 3.1 EXAMINATION
52 A. Examine substrates areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

3 3.2 INSTALLATION
4 A. Install overhead coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors,
5 inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as
6 specified.
7 3.3 ADJUSTING
8 A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or
9 distortion.
10 1. Adjust exterior doors and components to be weather-resistant.
11 B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer.
12 C. Adjust seals to provide tight fit around entire perimeter.
13 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 08 33 26
2 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES
5 1.2 SUMMARY
10 2.1 OPEN-CURTAIN GRILLE ASSEMBLY (COIL-1)
12 2.3 GRILLE CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
13 2.4 HOODS AND ACCESSORIES
14 2.5 LOCKING DEVICES
15 2.6 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM
17 3.1 INSTALLATION
18 3.2 DEMONSTRATION
19 PART 1 - GENERAL

23 1.2 SUMMARY
24 A. Section includes open-curtain overhead coiling grilles.
26 1. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports, angle-framing of grille
27 opening.

29 A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling grille and accessory.
30 B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in
31 manufacturer's product data.
32 1. Include points of attachment and their corresponding static and dynamic loads imposed on
33 structure.
34 2. Show locations of controls, locking devices, and other accessories.
35 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
36 C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.


41 manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
42

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 083326 - 1 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 2.1 OPEN-CURTAIN GRILLE ASSEMBLY (COIL-1)

3 A. Open-Curtain Grille (COIL-1): Overhead coiling, countertop grille with a curtain having a network of
4 horizontal rods and tube spacers with vertical links in a brick pattern.
5 1. Basis of Design: Cornell ESG12 motor operated rolling grille.
8 a. Clopay Building Products.
9 b. Cookson.
10 B. Operation Cycles: Grille components and operators capable of operating for not less than 5 times per day.
11 C. Grille Curtain Material: Aluminum.
12 1. Pattern: Brick.
13 D. Bottom Bar: Continuous aluminum and finished to match grille.
14 E. Curtain Jamb Guides: Heavy duty extruded aluminum with exposed finish matching grille. Provide
15 continuous integral wear strips to prevent metal-to-metal contact and to minimize operational noise.
16 F. Hood: Match curtain material and finish.
17 1. Mounting Position: As indicated on Drawings.
18 G. Locking Devices: Equip grille with locking device assembly. Keyed cylinder locking into both jambs
19 operable from both sides of curtain with motor interlock cutout switches.
20 H. Electric Grille Operator:
21 1. Usage Classification: Standard duty, up to 5 cycles per day.
22 2. Motor Exposure: Interior.
23 3. Emergency Manual Operation: provide wall manual release system pull handle to disengage motor
24 operator and automatically open grille for emergency egress without the use of electrical power.
25 Release of pull handle will reset grille to normal motor operation.
26 4. Control Station: Interior mounted, where indicated on Drawings.
27 5. Other Equipment: none.
28 I. Grille Finish:
29 1. Aluminum Finish: Clear anodized.
30 2. PVC Spacers: Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

32 A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
33 qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
34 2.3 GRILLE CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

35 A. Open-Curtain Grilles: Fabricate metal grille curtain as an open network of horizontal rods, spaced at
36 regular intervals, that are interconnected with vertical links, which are formed and spaced as indicated and
37 are free to rotate on the rods.
38 B. Bottom Bar: Manufacturer's standard continuous shape unless otherwise indicated, finished to match
39 grille.
40 1. Astragal: Equip grille bottom bar with a replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible gasket of
41 flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene as a cushion bumper.
42 C. Grille Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard shape having curtain groove with return lips or bars
43 to retain curtain. Provide continuous integral wear strips to prevent metal-to-metal contact and to minimize
44 operational noise; with removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain.
45 1. Removable Posts and Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard.
46 2.4 HOODS AND ACCESSORIES

47 A. General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening
48 head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for
49 stiffness. Form closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between-jamb
50 mounting that projects beyond wall face. Equip hood with intermediate support brackets as required to
51 prevent sagging.
52 B. Removable Metal Soffit: Formed or extruded from same metal and with same finish as curtain if hood is
53 mounted above ceiling, unless otherwise indicated.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2.5 LOCKING DEVICES

2 A. Locking Device Assembly: Fabricate with cylinder lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, operating handle, cam
3 plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in tracks.
4 1. Lock Cylinders: Cylinders specified in Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware".
5 2. Keys: Three for each cylinder.
6 B. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated grilles with safety interlock switch to disengage power
7 supply when grille is locked.
8 2.6 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM

9 A. General: Counterbalance grilles by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustable-
10 tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel
11 connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite
12 bearings for rotating members.
13 B. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate.
14 2.7 ELECTRIC GRILLE OPERATORS

15 A. General: Electric grille operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by grille
16 manufacturer for grille and operation cycles requirement specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired
17 motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, control stations, control
18 devices, integral gearing for locking grille, and accessories required for proper operation.
19 1. Comply with NFPA 70.
20 2. Control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6, with NFPA 70
21 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc.
22 B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than number of
23 cycles per hour indicated for each grille.
24 C. Motors: Reversible-type motor with controller (disconnect switch) for motor exposure indicated.
25 1. Electrical Characteristics:
26 a. Phase: Single phase.
27 b. Volts: 115 V.
28 c. Hertz: 60.
29 2. Motor Size: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough to start, accelerate, and
30 operate grille in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than 8 in./sec. and not more
31 than 12 in./sec., without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor.
32 3. Operating Controls, Controllers (Disconnect Switches), Wiring Devices, and Wiring: Manufacturer's
33 standard unless otherwise indicated.
34 D. Control Station: Three-button control station in fixed location with momentary-contact push-button controls
35 labeled "Open" and "Stop" and sustained- or constant-pressure push-button control labeled "Close."
36 1. Interior-Mounted Units: Full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-purpose
37 NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.
38 E. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip electrically powered grille with capability for emergency manual
39 operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for grille operation does not exceed 25 lbf
40 F. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and
41 without affecting emergency manual operation.
43 3.1 INSTALLATION
44 A. Install overhead coiling grilles and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors,
45 inserts, hangers, and equipment supports, according to manufacturer's written instructions and as
46 specified.
47 B. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly, so that grilles operate easily, free of warp, twist, or
48 distortion. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer.
50 A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,
51 operate, and maintain overhead coiling grilles.
52 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 08 34 73.13
2 METAL SOUND CONTROL DOOR ASSEMBLIES
5 1.2 SUMMARY
6 1.3 COORDINATION
14 2.2 ACOUSTIC DOOR ASSEMBLIES
15 2.3 FABRICATION
17 3.1 EXAMINATION
18 3.2 PREPARATION
19 3.3 INSTALLATION
21 PART 1 - GENERAL

25 1.2 SUMMARY
26 A. Section includes metal sound control door assemblies.
28 1. Section 08 71 00 "Door hardware" for additional hardware not supplied with acoustical door
29 assembly.
30 1.3 COORDINATION
31 A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for sound control door assemblies. Furnish setting drawings,
32 templates, and directions for installing anchorages. Deliver sleeves, inserts, anchor bolts, and items with
33 integral anchors to Project site in time for installation.

35 A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include sound ratings, construction details, material descriptions,
36 core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, and finishes.
37 B. Shop Drawings: For sound control door assemblies.
38 1. Include elevations of each door design.
39 2. Include details of sound control seals, door bottoms, and thresholds.
40 3. Include details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses.
41 4. Include frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.
42 5. Include locations of reinforcements and preparations for hardware.
43 6. Include details of each different wall opening condition.
44 7. Include details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.
45 8. Include details of accessories.
46

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 08347313 - 1 METAL SOUND CONTROL DOOR ASSEMBLIES
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 C. Product Compliance Certificates: ASTM E 90 and ASTM E 413; substitution of test data not in accordance
2 with ASTM E 90 and ASTM E 413 is not acceptable.
3 1. Provide certification that the door construction utilized has been tested at an independent laboratory.
4 2. The laboratory referenced in the certification must be qualified under the National Voluntary
5 Accreditation Program (NVLAP) of the US Bureau of Standards. Certification must reference
6 laboratory name, test report number, and date of test.
7 3. Fire Resistance: Certify that assemblies have been tested in accordance with Standard for Safety
8 UL 10b for neutral pressure requirements or Standard for Safety UL 10C/UBC 7-2 for positive
9 pressure requirements of labeled fire doors and frames, and meet the applicable requirements of
10 NFPA 80.
11 a. When positive pressure fire ratings are required, Category B frame mounted intumescent
12 shall be used.

14 A. Product Certificates: For each type of sound control door assembly.
15 B. Product Test Reports: For each sound control door assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing
16 agency.

18 A. Maintenance Data: For sound control door assemblies to include in maintenance manuals.

21 manufacturer.

23 A. Deliver doors and frames palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site
24 storage. Avoid the use of nonvented plastic.
25 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.
26 B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs
27 and mullions.
28 C. Store doors and frames vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch-high
29 wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inchspace between each stacked door to permit air circulation.
30 1.9 WARRANTY
31 A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sound control door assemblies
32 that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
34 a. Failure to meet sound rating requirements.
35 b. Faulty operation of sound seals.
36 c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use or weathering.
37 2. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

40 A. Sound Rating: Provide sound control door assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested as sound-
41 retardant units by an acoustical testing agency, and have the minimum rating scheduled.
42 1. STC Rating: As calculated by ASTM E 413 when tested in an operable condition according to ASTM
43 E 90.
44 B. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency
45 acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive
46 pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
47 1. Smoke- and Draft Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and labeled for
48 smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
49 based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.
50

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2.2 ACOUSTIC DOOR ASSEMBLIES

2 A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated or comparable
3 product by one of the following:
4 1. Overly Door Company.
5 2. Ceco Door/ASSA ABLOY.
6 3. Wenger/JR Clancy.
7 4. Krieger.
8 5. Specialty Products.
9 B. Basis of Design: Overly Model 509575; single swinging flush metal doors.
10 1. STC Rating (ASTM E 90 and ASTM E 413): 50.
11 2. Perimeter Seals: Single "H" Gasket.
12 a. Description: Single compression type perimeter seal, with a metal retainer and cover.
13 b. Material: Felt/neoprene combination.
14 3. Bottom Seals: Super "H" Door Bottom.
15 4. Door Thickness: 1-7/8 inches (47 mm).
16 5. Minimum Frame Depth: 4-3/4 inches (120 mm).
17 6. Fire Resistance Requirements: One hour.
18 C. Basis of Design: Overly Model 509391; pair of metal doors with one leaf active.
19 1. STC Rating (ASTM E 90 and ASTM E 413): 50.
20 2. Perimeter Seals: Single "H" Gasket.
21 a. Description: Single compression type perimeter seal, with a metal retainer and cover.
22 b. Material: Felt/neoprene combination.
23 3. Bottom Seals: Super "H" Door Bottom.
24 4. Door Thickness: 1-7/8 inches (47 mm).
25 5. Minimum Frame Depth: 4-3/4 inches (120 mm).
26 6. Fire Resistance Requirements: One hour.
27 2.3 FABRICATION
28 A. Steel Sound Control Door Fabrication: Sound control doors to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle.
29 Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal.
30 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated and smoke control doors.
31 2. Components: Assemblies to be complete with metal frame, doors, sealing systems, and hinge
32 systems.
33 3. Finishes: Zinc-rich primer, as approved by manufacturer.
34 B. Materials: Formed sheet steel or structural shapes and bars.
35 1. Lead or asbestos in door construction to achieve STC performance is not acceptable.
36 2. Sheet Steel: Commercial quality, level, cold rolled steel conforming to ASTM A 366.
37 3. Steel Shapes: Complies with ASTM A 36 and steel bars with ASTM A 108, Grade 1018.
38 C. Door Design: Face gauges, internal sound retardant core and perimeter door edge construction to be
39 manufacturer's standard for the specified model.
40 1. Seams: No visible seams shall be permitted on door faces.
41 D. Frame Design: With integral trim and shipped with temporary spreader.
42 1. Thickness: 14 gauge minimum.
43 2. Construction: Welded units.
44 3. Knock-down frames are not acceptable.
45 E. Cam Lift Hinges: When required to achieve STC, manufacturer to furnish laboratory test data certifying
46 hinges have been cycled a minimum of 1,000,000 while supporting a minimum door weight of 350 pounds.
47 F. Hardware Reinforcements:
48 1. Mortise Hardware: Factory mortise, reinforce, drill and tap components as required by hardware
49 manufacturer's template.
50 2. Surface Mounted Hardware: Provide reinforcement plates.
51 3. Drilling and Tapping: Performed in field by installer.
52 4. Frame Mortises: Provide dust cover boxes.
53 G. Anchors: Provide anchors to install frames in partition types indicated on approved Drawings.
54

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
2 3.1 EXAMINATION
5 B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations of sound control door frame
6 connections before frame installation.
8 3.2 PREPARATION
9 A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and
10 dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
11 B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace sound control door frames to the following tolerances:
12 1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb
13 perpendicular to frame head.
14 2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.
15 3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and
16 perpendicular to plane of wall.
17 4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor.
18 C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated mortised and surface-mounted door hardware.
19 3.3 INSTALLATION
20 A. General: Install sound control door assemblies plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place;
21 comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
22 B. Frames: Install sound control door frames in sizes and profiles indicated.
23 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors
24 are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and
25 undamaged.
26 a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.
27 b. At openings requiring smoke and draft control, install frames according to NFPA 105.
28 c. Remove temporary braces only after frames or bucks have been properly set and secured.
29 d. Check squareness, twist, and plumbness of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as
30 necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
31 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with
32 postinstalled expansion anchors.
33 3. Installation Tolerances: Adjust sound control door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and
34 plumbness to the following tolerances:
35 a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from
36 jamb perpendicular to frame head.
37 b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane
38 of wall.
39 c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines,
40 and perpendicular to plane of wall.
41 d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head
42 to floor.
43 C. Doors: Fit sound control doors accurately in frames, within clearances indicated below. Shim as necessary.
44 1. Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Fit non-fire-rated doors accurately in frames with the following clearances:
45 a. Jambs: 1/8 inch.
46 b. Head with Cam-Lift Hinges: As required by manufacturer, but not more than 3/8 inch.
47 c. Sill: Manufacturer's standard.
48 d. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch.
49 2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install fire-rated doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
50 D. Sound Control Seals: Where seals have been factory prefit and preinstalled and subsequently removed for
51 shipping, reinstall seals and adjust according to manufacturer's written instructions.
52 E. Cam-Lift Hinges: Install hinges according to manufacturer's written instructions.
53 F. Thresholds: Set thresholds in full bed of sealant complying with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint
54 Sealants."
55

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 A. Final Adjustments: Check and adjust seals, door bottoms, and other sound control hardware items right
3 before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition.
4 B. Remove and replace defective work, including defective or damaged sound seals and doors and frames that
5 are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
6 1. Adjust gaskets, gasket retainers, and retainer covers to provide contact required to achieve STC
7 rating.
8 C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and
9 apply touchup of compatible, rust-inhibitive, air-drying primer.
10 D. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas of doors and repair with galvanizing repair paint according
12 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 08 41 13
2 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
5 1.2 SUMMARY
11 1.8 WARRANTY
15 2.3 INTERIOR STOREFRONT FRAMING (GLWS-1, GLWS-2 (acoustical))
16 2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS
17 2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE
18 2.6 GLAZING
19 2.7 FABRICATION
22 3.1 INSTALLATION
23 PART 1 - GENERAL

27 1.2 SUMMARY
29 1. Interior storefront framing.
30 2. Interior manual-swing entrance doors and door-frame units.


38 materials.
39 C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.
40 1. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers.
41 D. Samples: For each exposed finish required.
42 E. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and
43 assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.

45 A. Energy Performance Certificates: NFRC-certified energy performance values from manufacturer.
48 D. Sample warranties.


CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 084113 - 1 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

3 manufacturer.
4 B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.
5 C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic
6 effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions,
7 arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one
8 another, and to adjoining construction.
9 1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's
10 approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.
11 1.8 WARRANTY
12 A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed entrances and
13 storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
14 warranty period.
16 B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum

21 A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of
22 aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without failure due
23 to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
24 1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting structure
25 including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from
26 uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
27 2. Failure also includes the following:
28 a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
29 b. Glass breakage.
30 c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
31 d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
32 e. Failure of operating units.
33 B. Structural Loads:
34 1. Other Design Loads: 5psf for interior storefront loads.
35 C. Performance: Results are based upon 1 inch clear insulating glass (1/4 inch clear with e= 0.035 low e coating
36 on #2 surface, 1/2 inch as with warm edge spacer and 90% argon gas fill, 1/4 inch clear). Refer to Section
37 08 80 00 for GL-3 for glass performance.
38 1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the thermal
39 transmittance (U-factor) shall not be more than:
40 a. Glass to Exterior – 0.47 (low-e).
41 2. Condensation Resistance (CRF): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the condensation
42 resistance factor shall not be less than:
43 a. Glass to Exterior – 70 frame and 69 glass (low-e).
44 D. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows:
45 1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area:
46 a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft..
47 2. Entrance Doors:
48 a. Pair of Doors: Maximum air leakage of 1.0 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of
49 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.
50 b. Single Doors: Maximum air leakage of 0.5 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of
51 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.
53

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2.2 MANUFACTURERS
4 1. EFCO Corporation.
5 2. Kawneer North America.
6 3. Tubelite Inc.
7 2.3 INTERIOR STOREFRONT FRAMING (GLWS-1, GLWS-2 - acoustical)

8 A. Basis of Design: Kawneer North America; TriFab 451-Series, front glazed, with SSG in selected locations,
9 per the drawings.
10 B. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required
11 and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
12 1. Construction: Non-thermal.
13 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.
14 3. Glazing Plane: Front.
15 4. Finish: Baked-enamel finish.
16 5. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system.
17 C. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral,
18 where framing abuts adjacent construction.
19 D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining,
20 nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
21 E. Materials:
22 1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.
23 a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
24 b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221.
25 c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M.
26 d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
27 2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS

28 A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.
29 1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch-thick, extruded-aluminum
30 tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply
31 penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.
32 2. Door Design: Wide style. 5 inches wide stile. Coordinate with hardware space requirement.
33 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets.
34 a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.
35 2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE

36 A. Entrance Door Hardware: Hardware not specified in this Section is specified in Section 08 71 00 "Door
37 Hardware."
38 2.6 GLAZING
39 A. Glazing: Comply with Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
40 B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilient
41 elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.
42 C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer.
43 1. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.~$s~45~S$
44 2.7 FABRICATION
45 A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
46 B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish.
47 Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.
48 C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:
49 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
50 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
51 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
52 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required
53 glazing edge clearances.
54 5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior.
55 6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible.
56 D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing
2 entrance door hardware.
3 F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.
4 G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible.
5 Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes.
6 H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.

8 A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils.
9 1. Color and Gloss: Match Architect's sample.
11 3.1 INSTALLATION
12 A. General:
15 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
16 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
17 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration
18 and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.
19 6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
20 B. Metal Protection:
21 1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact
22 surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or by installing nonconductive
23 spacers.
24 2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact
25 surfaces with bituminous paint.
26 C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants"
27 to produce weathertight installation.
28 D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.
29 E. Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust weather-stripping
30 contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation.
31 F. Install glazing as specified in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
32 G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.
33 1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping.
34 2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according
35 to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest
36 extent possible.
37 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 08 41 14
2 GLASS PARTITION SYSTEMS
5 1.2 SUMMARY
6 1.3 SUBMITTALS
9 1.6 SITE CONDITIONS
12 2.2 DESCRIPTION
13 2.3 PERFORMANCE / DESIGN CRITERIA
14 2.4 MATERIALS
15 2.5 FULL HEIGHT DOUBLE GLAZED PARTITION SYSTEM (GLWS-5)
16 2.6 FINISHES
18 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
19 3.2 INSTALLATION
21 3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
22 PART 1 - GENERAL

26 1.2 SUMMARY
27 A. Section includes, but is not limited to, fabricating, furnishing, delivering, erecting and installing the following
28 work:
29 1. Full height double-glazed partition system.
30 2. Accessories required for a complete working installation.
31 B. Related Documents and Sections:
32 1. Glass doors and door hardware: Refer to Section 08 41 13 and 08 71 00.
33 1.3 SUBMITTALS
34 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s printed product literature indicating product characteristics,
35 performance criteria, product use limitations, requirements and recommendations, and Manufacturers'
36 Instructions.
37 B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating plans, elevations, and details showing type and
38 thickness of metal and glass, glazing, anchoring, and joining, electrical wiring and power requirements,
39 hardware, trim, and accessories. Provide Field Measurements.
40 C. Samples:
41 1. Initial for Selection: Submit two (2) complete full range sets of color chips.
42 2. Final Selection: Submit two (2) 12 inch (30 cm) square samples for acceptance.
43 D. Manufacturer's Certificates
44 E. Sustainable Design (USGBC LEED®) Submittals: Refer to Section 01 81 13.13, LEED Design
45 Requirements.
46 1. LEED 2009 (v3) Credits. Complete online LEED forms and submit other required materials as
47 follows:
48 a. Materials and Resources (MR) Credits:
49 1) MR Credit 3: Materials Reuse - 5%.
50 2) MR Credit 4: Recycled Content - 10% (post-consumer + 1/2 pre-consumer).
51 3) MR Credit 5: Regional Materials: 10% Extracted, Processed & Manufactured
52 Regionally.
53 b. Indoor Environmental Quality (EQ) Credits:
54 1) EQ Credit 4.2 (EQc4.2): Low-Emitting Materials - Paints & Coatings
55 2) EQ Credit 8.1 (EQc8.1): Daylight & Views - Daylight 75% of Spaces
56 3) EQ Credit 8.2 (EQc8.2): Daylight & Views - Views for 90% of Spaces

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 084114 - 1 GLASS PARTITION SYSTEMS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 F. LEED Closeout Documentation:

2 1. LEED 2009 (v3). Submit completed LEEDTM submittal Worksheet Templates for credits:

4 A. Regulatory Agency Approvals: Comply where required by authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ).
5 1. Glazing: GANA (GM), GANA (LGRM), and CPSC 16 CFR 1201
6 2. Accessibility: ADAAG (28 CFR Part 32) and ICC / ANSI 117.1
7 B. Qualifications: Manufacturer to have minimum five (5) years documented experience; Installer to have
8 minimum two (2) years documented experience.
9 C. Source Limitations: Obtain Glass Partition System materials from one manufacturer.
12 1. Level 1 Public Area partial height conference room: Portion of GLWS-5 feature glass system
13 assembly and junctions at conference room including perimeter ceiling assembly and conference
14 room “cap” assembly. Size approx. 4ft x 4ft in plan at corner x full height to ceiling cap assembly.

16 A. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations, GANA (GM), GANA (LGRM), and Division
17 01 requirements.
18 1.6 SITE CONDITIONS

19 A. Ambient Conditions: Do not deliver or install product until building is enclosed and HVAC system has been
20 operating at occupancy levels in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 55; Acclimate product to installation
21 location at least 48 hours before installation.
24 A. Basis of Design Product by Manufacturer: Solare DG by Avanti Systems USA, 200 William St. Suite 306;
25 Port Chester, NY 10573.
26 2.2 DESCRIPTION
27 A. Regulatory Requirements: Provide tempered or laminated safety glass for locations subject to human
28 impact as required by authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ).
29 B. Sustainability Characteristics:
30 1. Fully demountable system for ease of reuse or recycling.
31 2. Assembly components (glass, aluminum and stainless steel) contain recycled material and are
32 infinitely recyclable.
33 3. No adhesives used (no VOC) with dry joint glazing.
34 2.3 PERFORMANCE / DESIGN CRITERIA

35 A. Performance Criteria:
36 1. Acoustical: Sound reduction tested in accordance with BS EN ISO 140-4 or ASTM E90 and ASTM
37 E336, and rated in accordance with BS EN ISO 717-1 or ASTM E413.
38 a. Solare DG - System Acoustic Rating: 44 dB (Rw).
39 b. (US Equivalent) STC: 44.
40 2. Impact Safety Resistance: CPSC 16 CFR 1201, Cat. I & II.
41 B. Design Criteria:
42 1. Structural Live Load - Deflection: Maximum L/120.
43 2. Structural Stability: BS 5234, BS 6180; or IBC 1621.1.2, ASCE 7 9.6.2.8.
44 2.4 MATERIALS
45 A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, 6063-T6 alloy and temper.
46 B. Glass: Refer to spec section 08 80 00 for glass types and schedule.
47 C. Fasteners: Type best suited to application, and acceptable to glass partition system manufacturer.
48 D. Door Hardware: Refer to Section 08 71 00.
49

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2.5 FULL HEIGHT DOUBLE GLAZED PARTITION SYSTEM (GLWS-5)

2 A. Solare DG full height, relocatable, double dry glazed glass partition system as manufactured by Avanti
3 Systems USA.
4 1. Configuration: Straight wall as indicated by Drawings.
5 2. Double Glazed: Where indicated on the drawings.
6 a. Tempered Clear Glass Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm)
7 b. Laminated Clear Glass Thickness: 7/16 inch (11 mm)
8 3. Head and Sill Channels and Vertical Wall Trim: 1 x 4 inch (25 mm x 104 mm) extruded aluminum
9 channels with rubber flap seals.
10 4. Prefabricated Glass Joints: Vertical, Horizontal, 90 degree Corner H section PVC joint seals by
11 Crystal Clear
12 5. Doorframe Type: Extruded aluminum Slimline with rubber flap seals.
13 2.6 FINISHES
14 A. Aluminum: AAMA 2604, polyester powder coating; Stock color RAL 9006 Metallic Silver.
16 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

17 A. Examination, Preparation, and Acceptance of Conditions in accordance with Division 01 requirements,
18 manufacturer's instructions, approved Shop Drawings, and as follows:
19 1. Carefully examine installation areas with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
20 affecting Work performance.
21 a. Shimming on top of existing, historic clay floor tile and/or concrete will be needed to achieve
22 level +/- 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m) non-cumulative.
23 b. Verify concealed overhead structural supports meet project requirements.
24 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
25 3. Broom sweep and vacuum clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
26 3.2 INSTALLATION
27 A. Install in accordance with Division 01 requirements, manufacturer's instructions, approved Shop Drawings,
28 GANA (GM), GANA (LGRM), and as follows:
29 1. Securely anchor assembly to structure with components installed plumb and level, in proper plane,
30 free from warp and twist.

32 A. Non-Conforming Work: Repair or replace as directed by the Architect; see General and Supplementary
33 Conditions, and Division 01, General Requirements.
34 1. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or otherwise damaged,
35 including natural causes, accidents and vandalism, during construction period.

37 A. Adjust doors for smooth operation throughout full operating range.
38 B. Waste Management: Comply with Division 01requirements; recycle shipping pallets, cardboard protection,
39 and scrap metal.
40 C. Cleaning: Clean metal and glass surfaces to remove foreign materials; clean glazing to GANA Bulletin 01-
41 0300.
42 D. Touch-up, clean, repair or replace damaged products prior to Substantial Completion.
43 E. Protect installed work from construction operations until date of Final Completion or Owner occupancy,
44 whichever occurs first.
45 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 08 44 10
2 FIRE RATED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALL
5 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
8 1.5 REFERENCES
10 1.7 SUBMITTALS
15 2.1 FIRE-RATED ALUMINUM FIXED WINDOWS (GLWS-3):
16 2.2 MATERIALS – ALUMINUM FRAMING
17 2.4 MATERIALS – GLAZING AND ASSEMBLY ACCESSORIES
18 2.5 FABRICATION
19 2.6 FINISHES
20 2.7 DOOR HARDWARE
22 3.1 EXAMINATION
23 3.2 INSTALLATION
24 3.3 CLEANING
25 PART 1 - GENERAL

29 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

30 A. Fire-rated aluminum curtain wall including frame and glazing.
31 B. Fire-rated aluminum full vision door system including pre-finished door, frame, glazing, and hardware.

33 A. Section 08 88 13: Fire-Resistant Glazing.

36 1.5 REFERENCES
37 A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
38 1. ASTM E119 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
39 2. ASTM E2010 Standard Test Method for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Window Assemblies.
40 B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
41 1. NFPA 80: Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows.
42 2. NFPA 251: Standard Methods of Tests of Fire Endurance of Building Construction and Materials.
43 3. NFPA 252: Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
44 4. NFPA 257: Standard on Fire Test for Window and Glass Block Assemblies.
45 C. Uniform Building Code (UBC):
46 1. UBC-7-4: Methods for Fire Tests of Window Assemblies.
47 2. UBC-7-2: Methods for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
48 3. UL 10C: Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
49 D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
50 1. UL 9: Fire Tests of Window Assemblies.
51 2. UL 263: Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
52

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 084410 - 1 FIRE RATED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALL
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 E. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

2 1. ANSI Z97.1 Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings – Safety Performance Specifications and
3 Methods of Test.
4 F. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC):
5 1. CPSC 16 CFR 1201 Categories I and II: Safety Standard for Glazing Materials.

7 A. Performance Requirements – Curtain Wall:
8 1. Fire Rating: 120 minutes.
9 2. Certification: Windows shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 2010, NFPA 252, UBC 7-4,
10 UL263.
11 3. Testing Laboratory: Fire tests shall have been conducted by an approved independent testing
12 laboratory, similar to Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.
13 B. Performance Requirements – Doors:
14 1. Fire Rating: 90 minutes.
15 2. Certification: Doors and frames shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 2074, NFPA 252, UBC
16 7-2, UL 10C.
17 3. Testing Laboratory: Fire tests shall have been conducted by an approved independent testing
18 laboratory, similar to Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.
19 1.7 SUBMITTALS
20 A. Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedure
21 Section.
22 1. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layouts, profiles and product components.
23 2. Samples: Submit samples for finishes, colors and textures.
24 3. Technical Information: Submit latest edition of manufacturer’s product data providing product
25 description, technical data and installation instructions.

27 A. Listings and Labels:
28 1. Fire rated framing and glazing shall be under current follow-up services by an approved
29 independent agency and maintain a current listing or certification. Assemblies shall be labeled in
30 accordance with limits of listings.
33 1. Rated glass wall GLWS-3 and associated egress door at Level 3, east stair side. Include glass
34 panel above door, glass panel at one side of door, door hardware, and fire stopping sealant all
35 around frame.

37 A. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to avoid
38 construction delays.
39 B. Delivery: Deliver materials to specified destination in manufacturer’s packaging undamaged, complete with
40 installation instructions.
41 C. Storage and Protection: Store off ground, under cover, protected from weather, direct sunlight,
42 construction activities and at temperature conditions recommended by manufacturer, +10°F to +110°F.
43 D. Handling: Protect materials and finish during handling and installation to prevent damage.

45 A. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements for openings by field measurements before fabrication.
46 Show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication
47 schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays.
48

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 2.1 FIRE-RATED ALUMINUM FIXED WINDOWS, DOORS AND FRAMES (GLWS-3):

3 A. Basis of Design: SaftiFirst
4 1. GPX Wall with 120 Min fire resistive rating.
5 2. GPX door pair with 90 Min fire resistive rating. Builder Series Steel Door Leafs.
6 3. Glass: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide SAFTI FIRST
7 Fire Rated Glazing Solutions; SuperLite II-XL.
8 2.2 MATERIALS – ALUMINUM FRAMING

9 A. Frame construction: Integral structure, pressure plate, and cap from extruded aluminum profiles. Filled
10 internally with cement composite material.
11 B. Dimensions (Basis of design dimensions only: other system dimensions may vary within 1/4 inch of the
12 sightline width/framing face dimension indicated):
13 1. Curtain Wall:
14 a. Perimeter framing face dimension: 3 inch
15 b. Depth of vertical framing: 7-5/8 inch
16 c. Depth of horizontal framing: 7-5/8 inch.
17 2. Door and Frame:
18 a. Door framing face dimension: 2-1/2 inches
19 b. Depth of door framing: 4-1/2 for 90 Min Door
20 c. Door stile face dimension: 5 inches for 90 Min Door
21 d. Door cross rail: N/A for 90 Min Door.
22 C. Assembly:
23 1. Window frame corners assembled with mechanical fasteners – in factory or in the field.
24 2. Door frame corners assembled by means of crimped and bonded miter joints.
25 D. Sealing: Framing system shall insulate against effects of fire, smoke, and heat transfer from either side.
26 Perimeter of the framing system to the rough opening shall be firmly packed with mineral wool insulation.
27 E. Wall assemblies shall be glazed with 120 minute rated 1-1/2 inches inch thick SuperLite II-XL fire resistant
28 glazing material as manufactured by Saftifirst
29 F. Door assemblies shall be glazed with 90 minute rated 1-1/2 inches thick SuperLite II-XL fire resistant
30 glazing material as manufactured by SaftiFirst
31 G. Individual lites shall be permanently identified with a listing mark.
32 H. Glazing material installed in “Hazardous Locations” (subject to human impact) shall be certified to meet the
33 applicable requirements for fire rated assemblies referenced in ANSI Z97.1 Standard for Safety Glazing
34 Materials Used In Buildings and/or CPSC 16 CFR 1201 Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing
35 Materials.
36 I. Visible daylight transmission shall be a minimum of 70% for window glazing and 81 % for door glazing.
37 Glazing material shall be optically clear, colorless and free from unusual distortion.
38 J. All framing, doors and glazing materials must be fabricated by the manufacture NOT a third party or
39 distributor.
40 K. All framing, doors and glazing materials must be fabricated in the U.S.A.
41 2.3 MATERIALS – GLAZING AND ASSEMBLY ACCESSORIES

42 A. Fasteners: All fasteners, setting pads, and glazing clips, shall be stainless or zinc-plated steel.
43 B. Glazing Accessories: The glazing material perimeter shall be separated from the perimeter framing system
44 with approved flame retardant intumescent glazing tape. Ceramic setting blocks shall be placed between
45 the metal setting pads and the glazing material. Setting pads and blocks provided by manufacturer.
46 2.4 FABRICATION
47 A. Curtainwall frames shall be furnished pre-assembled or K-D. Curtainwall assemblies shall be field glazed.
48 B. Door frames and door leaves shall be furnished pre-assembled. Door assemblies shall be field glazed.
49 C. Fabrication Dimensions: Fabricate to approved dimensions. The general contractor shall guarantee
50 dimensions within required tolerance (+ - 1/8”). Obtain approved shop drawings prior to fabrication.
51 2.5 FINISHES
52 A. Framing shall be chemically cleaned and pretreated, then shop finished on all exposed areas with:
53 1. PPG paint finish “light silver ref: AD3Y1346N to match clear anodized aluminum.
54 B. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering
55 before shipping.
56

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 C. Slight variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable. Noticeable variations in the
2 same piece are not acceptable.
3 2.6 DOOR HARDWARE

4 A. Hardware shall be supplied from door manufacturer’s standard recommended hardware groups as
5 specified.
6 HW SET: 74A
2 EA CONTINUOUS HINGES OKC PEM

2 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 VON
1 EA MULLION KR-9954 VON
1 EA ELEC FIRE EXIT RX-33A-EO-F VON
HARDWARE
1 EA ELEC FIRE EXIT RX-QEL+-33A-NL-OP-F-388 VON
HARDWARE
2 EA TRIM 996L VON
2 EA INTERCHANGEABLE CYLINDER AS REQUIRED SCH
CORE
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4011 / 4111 EDA LCN
1 EA SURF. AUTO OPERATOR BY 08 7100 MINIMUM DOOR WEIGHT
400LBS
2 EA ACTUATOR, WALL MOUNT 8310-813 LCN
(Touch less)
(Touch less)
2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW B4E CS IVE
2 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX IVE
1 EA SMOKE SEALS S44D PEM
2 EA DOOR BOTTOM 420APKL PEM
1 EA MEETING EDGE SEALS 328 (EACH LEAF) ZER
(NEOPRENE)
1 EA WIRING DIAGRAMS RISER & POINT-TO-POINT (BY HARDWARE
SUPPLIER)
1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 900-4R FA900 SCE
7
8 HW SET: 74B

1 EA ELEC FIRE EXIT RX-QEL-33A-NL-OP VON
HARDWARE
1 EA TRIM 996-L VON
CORE
1 EA OH STOP 100S GLY
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4021 LCN
CREDENTIAL READER (BY TECHNOLOGY CONTRACTOR)
1 EA DOOR CONTACT 7764 SCE
1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 900-4R SCE
SUPPLIER).
9 FUNCTION: Latchbolt retracted inside by exit device push pad and outside by key in cylinder. Door locks when key is
10 removed and door is closed. A valid credential will unlock the door.
11

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 HW SET: 74C
2
HARDWARE
1 EA TRIM 996-L VON
CORE
400LBS
(Touch less)
1 EA JUNCTION BOX JB7 R2 VON
SUPPLIER)
3
5 removed and door is closed. This door has a power operator. Interior actuator always active to unlock and open the
6 door. A valid credential will unlock the door and make the exterior actuator active.
7
8
9 HW SET: DOOR 300A/B (PAIR) 74D
10
2 EA ELEC FIRE EXIT Von Duprin EL 98/99 US26D VON
HARDWARE
2 EA TRIM 996-L VON
CORE
400LBS
(Touch less)
SUPPLIER)
11
15
16
17

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 HW SET: 74E
2
2 EA ELEC FIRE EXIT RX-CD-33A-EO-299 VON
HARDWARE
2 EA TRIM 996L VON

CORE
1 EA MULLION SEAL 8780 ZER
SUPPLIER)
3
4 FUNCTION: (NL) Latchbolt retracted inside by exit device push pad and outside by key in cylinder. Door locks when
5 key is removed and door is closed. Access from exterior when exit device push pad is dogged down. A valid
6 credential retracts latch bolt and push pad on active door.
7
8 HW SET: 74F
9
2 EA ELEC FIRE EXIT RX-CD-33A-EO-299 VON
HARDWARE
HARDWARE
2 EA TRIM 996L VON
CORE

400LBS
(Touch less)
SUPPLIER)
10
12 key is removed and door is closed. Access from exterior when exit device push pad is dogged down. This door has
13 a power operator. Interior actuator always active to unlock and open the door. A valid credential will unlock the active
14 door and make the exterior actuator active. Loss of power or activation of fire alarm will disable power operator and
15 insure fire door remains latched.
16

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
2 3.1 EXAMINATION
3 A. Examine area to receive curtainwall. Openings shall be plumb, square and within allowable tolerances.
4 Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent use. Do not proceed
5 with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
6 3.2 INSTALLATION
7 A. Curtainwall installation shall be by a specialty contractor with appropriate experience qualifications; and in
8 strict accordance with the approved shop drawings.
9 3.3 CLEANING
10 A. Cleaning: Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Glass and frame should be
11 cleaned using soft clean cloth, chamois leathers, sponges or soft paper. Use clean warm water with a mild
12 detergent. Do not use detergent that contains either alkaline, acids or fluoride! Abrasive cleaning methods
13 can damage surfaces! Clean prior to owner’s acceptance. Remove construction debris from project site
14 and legally dispose of debris.
15 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 08 44 13
2 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
5 1.2 SUMMARY
10 1.7 WARRANTY
14 2.3 FRAMING
15 2.4 GLAZING
16 2.5 FABRICATION
19 3.1 INSTALLATION
21 PART 1 - GENERAL

25 1.2 SUMMARY
26 A. Section includes glazed aluminum curtain walls.
27 B. Related Work:
28 1. Section 08 80 00 – Glazing: for IG units required for curtainwalls.


36 materials.
37 C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.
38 1. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers.
39 D. Samples: For each exposed finish required.
40 E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glazed aluminum curtain walls indicated to comply with performance
41 requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional
42 engineer licensed in the State of Wisconsin responsible for their preparation.

44 A. Energy Performance Certificates: NFRC-certified energy performance values from manufacturer.
47 D. Sample warranties.


CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 084413 - 1 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

3 manufacturer.
4 B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.
5 C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic
6 effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions,
7 arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one
8 another, and to adjoining construction.
9 1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's
10 approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.
13 1. Junction of new curtain wall system GLWS-4 with existing clay brick masonry wall at the north
14 elevation. Size to be based on either Level 0 or Level 1 entry door framing height and width at the
15 north elevation, and to include the special shape movement joint at the intersection between framing
16 system and masonry wall.
17 1.8 WARRANTY
18 A. Special Assembly Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace components of glazed aluminum curtain
19 wall that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
20 period.
22 B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum

28 in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design glazed aluminum curtain walls.
29 B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of glazed
30 aluminum curtain walls representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective
31 manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
32 1. Glazed aluminum curtain walls shall withstand movements of supporting structure including, but not
33 limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly
34 distributed and concentrated live loads.
35 2. Failure also includes the following:
36 a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
37 b. Glass breakage.
38 c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
39 d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
40 e. Failure of operating units.
41 C. Structural Loads:
42 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
43 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
44 D. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:
45 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane
46 not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts
47 edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less.
48 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which reduces glazing bite
49 to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between framing
50 members and glazing or other fixed components to less than 1/8 inch.
51 a. Operable Units: Provide a minimum 1/16-inch clearance between framing members and
52 operable units.
53 3. Cantilever Deflection: Where framing members overhang an anchor point, as follows:
54 a. Perpendicular to Plane of Wall: No greater than 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4-inch for spans
55 greater than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches or 1/175 times span, for spans less than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches.
56

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 E. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows:

2 1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not evidence
3 deflection exceeding specified limits.
4 2. Uniform Load: A static air design load of 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design
5 pressures shall be applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E 330.
6 There shall be no deflection in excess of L/175 of the span of any framing member at design load. At
7 structural test load equal to 1.5 times the specified design load, no glass breakage or permanent set
8 in the framing members in excess of 0.2% of their clear spans shall occur.
9 3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.
10 F. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows:
11 1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area:
12 a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..
13 G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows:
14 1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to
15 a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not
16 less than 12 psf (575 Pa).
17 2. Water Resistance, (dynamic): The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with AAMA 501.1.
18 There shall be no leakage at an air pressure differential of 12 psf (575 Pa) as defined in AAMA 501.
19 H. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows: Glazing for test
20 standard shall be 1 inch IG clear (U value 0.48 and SHGC 0.70). Refer to Section 08 80 00 GL-3 for glass
21 performance.
22 1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-factor in the range
23 of 0.34 to 0.37 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to NFRC 100.
24 2. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC-certified
25 condensation resistance rating of no less than 63 as determined according to AAMA Specification
26 1503.
27 I. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature
28 changes:
31 A. Basis of Design: Kawneer 1600 Wall System 1 and 2 with 4 Sided Captured and SSG curtain wall system.
32 1. 2-1/2" x 6" (63.5 x 152.4) outside glazed captured and SSG format.
33 2. 2-1/2" x 10-1/2" (63.5 x 267) outside glazed captured format.
36 1. EFCO Corporation.
37 2. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company.
38 3. Oldcastle, Inc.
39 4. Tubelite Inc.
40 5. Wausau Window and Wall Systems; Apogee Wausau Group.
41 2.3 FRAMING
42 A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required
43 and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
44 1. Construction: Thermally broken.
45 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets at perimeter and at horizontal transoms, with
46 SSG butt joints, silicon sealed, at intermediate verticals.
47 3. Glazing Plane: Front.
48 4. Finish: High-performance organic finish.
49 5. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system.
50 B. Pressure Caps: Manufacturer's standard aluminum components that mechanically retain glazing at
51 perimeter and at transomes.
52 1. Include snap-on aluminum trim that conceals fasteners.
53 C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining,
54 nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
55 D. Canopy Framing: Versoleil SunShade - Outrigger System (without blades)
56 1. 36 inches square outrigger, (omit blades), rectangular fascia, and shallow cover.
57 2. Finish: Organic finish as specified. Color to affect zinc appearance.
58

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 E. Materials:
2 1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.
3 a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
4 b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221.
5 c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M.
6 d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
7 2. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying with
8 SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select
9 surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare
10 surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.
11 a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
12 b. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
13 c. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
14 2.4 GLAZING
15 A. Glazing: Comply with Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
16 B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilient
17 elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.
18 C. 3M VHB tape for mounting butt-jointed glass to a back-box.
19 D. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer.
21 2.5 FABRICATION
22 A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
23 B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish.
24 Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.
25 C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:
26 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
27 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
28 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
29 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required
30 glazing edge clearances.
31 5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior.
32 6. Provisions for safety railings mounted on interior face of mullions or between mullions at interior.
33 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible.
34 D. Fabricate components to resist water penetration as follows:
35 1. Pressure-equalized system or double barrier design with primary air and vapor barrier at interior side
36 of glazed aluminum curtain wall and secondary seal weeped and vented to exterior.
37 E. Factory-Assembled Frame Units:
39 2. Prepare surfaces that are in contact structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written
40 instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion.
41 3. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.
42 4. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
43 5. Install glazing to comply with requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
44 F. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.

46 A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and
47 containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare,
48 pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'
50 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
51

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
2 3.1 INSTALLATION
3 A. General:
6 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
8 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration
9 and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.
10 6. Where welding is required, weld components in concealed locations to minimize distortion or
11 discoloration of finish. Protect glazing surfaces from welding.
12 7. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
13 B. Metal Protection:
14 1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting
15 contact surfaces with primer, applying sealant or tape, or installing nonconductive spacers as
16 recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
17 2. Where aluminum is in contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact
18 surfaces with bituminous paint.
19 C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and
20 moisture migrating within glazed aluminum curtain wall to exterior.
21 D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.
22 E. Install glazing as specified in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."

24 A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
25 B. Test Area: Perform tests on representative areas of glazed aluminum curtain walls.
26 C. Field Quality-Control Testing: Perform the following test on representative areas of glazed aluminum curtain
27 walls.
28 1. Water-Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated by Architect
29 shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration.
30 a. Perform a minimum of two tests in areas as directed by Architect.
31 D. Glazed aluminum curtain walls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
32 E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
33 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 08 51 13
2 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
5 1.2 SUMMARY
9 1.6 WARRANTY
12 2.2 WINDOW PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
13 2.3 ALUMINUM WINDOWS (WIN-1)
15 2.5 HEAT RESISTANT PANEL
16 2.6 MATERIALS
17 2.7 COMPONENTS
18 2.8 FABRICATION
21 3.1 INSTALLATION
23 PART 1 - GENERAL

27 1.2 SUMMARY
29 1. All exterior Architectural Performance Class (AW) historical windows furnished and installed as
30 shown on drawings, specified in this section and designated in AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-
31 11 North American Fenestration Standard (NAFS-2011).
32 2. All labor, materials, tools, equipment and services needed to furnish and install AW Class windows.
33 3. Components furnished with installed windows.
34 4. Installation accessories furnished and installed.

37 B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, operational clearances, and
38 half-size details of installation, including anchor, flashing, and sealant installation.
39 C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color specified, 2 by 4 inches in size.
40 D. Product Schedule: For aluminum windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

42 A. Test Reports and Calculations:
43 1. Submit certified independent laboratory test reports verifying compliance with all performance
44 requirements.
45 2. Submit structural calculations indicating adequacy of all materials furnished under this section, to
46 meet the uniform and structural load requirements as specified.
47 B. Provide copies of original manifests verifying window production is within 500 miles of the Project location.
48 C. Sample warranties.
49

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 085113 - 1 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 A. Qualifications: Upon request, the window manufacturer shall provide written consent for the installation
3 subcontractor to install window products to be used on this project.
4 B. In-Plant Testing: Conduct detailed quality audits and ASTM E331 static water infiltration testing on a
5 minimum of 4% of factory-glazed windows prior to shipping, subject to reasonable unit size restrictions.
6 1. Each tested unit shall be identified with a removable sticker on the inside glass face.
7 2. Provide detailed documentation of in-plant testing upon request.
8 C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
12 1. New replacement window WIN-1 at level 2 Storage Room 221. One complete window type W12
13 including window sill and jamb and head finishes.
14 2. New factory-style replacement window WIN-2 in place of demo’d brick infill panel at north elevation.
15 One entire window type W4 including jamb and head finishes and new window sill.
16 1.6 WARRANTY
17 A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows that fail in materials
18 or workmanship within specified warranty period.
19 1. Warranty Period:
20 a. Window: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
21 b. Glazing Units: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
22 c. Aluminum Finish: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
25 A. Drawings and specification are based on:
26 1. Wausau Window and Wall Systems 4250i-XLT INvent Retro Beveled Profile Historical Fixed
27 Windows.
28 B. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering comparable products that may be
29 incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
30 1. Graham Architectural Products.
31 2. St Cloud Window.

33 A. Design Wind Loads - Allowable Stress Design (ASD)
34 1. The design wind pressure for the project will be:
35 a. Per local building codes
36 2. All structural components, including meeting rails, mullions and anchors shall be designed
37 accordingly, complying with deflection and stress requirements.
38 B. Air, Water and Structural Performance Requirements
39 1. When tested in accordance with cited test procedures, windows shall meet or exceed the following
40 performance criteria, as well as those indicated in NAFS-2011 for Architectural AW Performance
41 Class windows, Performance Grade 100 (AW100) unless otherwise noted herein.
42 a. Test units shall not be smaller in either width or height than the “Gateway Test Size” specified
43 in NAFS-2011 for AW Performance Class.
44 b. “Downsize” testing to meet Optional Performance Class requirements specified herein shall
45 not be permitted.
46 c. Test units shall employ manufacturer’s standard sealing, lock spacing and anchorage.
47 2. Air Test Performance Requirements
48 a. Air infiltration maximum 0.1 cfm per square foot at 6.24 psf pressure differential when tested
49 in accord with ASTM E283.
50 3. Water Test Performance Requirements
51 a. No uncontrolled water leakage at 15.00 psf static pressure differential, with water application
52 rate of 5 gallons/hr/sq ft when tested in accord with both ASTM E331 and ASTM E547.
53

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 4. Structural Test Performance Requirements

2 a. Uniform Load Deflection Test
3 1) No deflection of any unsupported span L of test unit (framing rails, muntins, mullions,
4 etc.) in excess of L/175 at both a positive and negative load of 100 psf (design test
5 pressure) when tested in accord with ASTM E330.
6 b. Uniform Load Structural Test
7 1) Unit to be tested at 1.5 x design test pressure, both positive and negative, acting
8 normal to plane of wall in accord with ASTM E330.
9 2) No glass breakage; permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, or anchors;
10 damage to make windows inoperable; or permanent deformation of any main frame
11 or ventilator member in excess of 0.2% of its clear span.
12 C. Life Cycle Testing
13 1. When tested in accordance with AAMA 910-10, there is to be no damage to fasteners, hardware
14 parts, support arms, activating mechanisms or any other damage that would cause the window to be
15 inoperable at the conclusion of testing.
16 a. Air infiltration and water resistance tests shall meet the primary performance requirements
17 specified after completion of 4,000 operational cycles and misuse testing.
18 D. Condensation Resistance and Thermal Transmittance Performance Requirements
19 1. Perform thermal tests in accordance with NFRC 102 and AAMA 1503, or provide finite element
20 computer thermal modeling and calculations per NFRC 100, NFRC 705 or AAMA 507, using
21 DOE/LBL THERM, WINDOW, and/or CMAST software.
22 a. Thermal Transmittance (U-Factor) for the overall window area shall be less than or equal to
23 0.31 BTU/hr-ft2-F.
24 b. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC) for the overall window area shall not exceed 0.33.
25 c. Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF) requirements: CRF minimum 61 (Frame) and CRF
26 minimum 65 (Glass).
27 E. Acoustic Performance Requirements
28 1. Perform acoustical tests in accordance with ASTM E90 and ASTM E1425 on the glass type(s)
29 specified in 08 80 00, rigidly supported in aluminum framing of the same product type.
30 2. “Glass-only” test results shall not be acceptable.
31 3. Sound Transmission Class (STC) shall not be less than 31.
32 4. Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class (OITC) shall not be less than 25.
33 F. Sustainable Design Requirements
34 1. The products provided under this section may affect LEED® certification for the project. Provide
35 documentation in accordance with the applicable version of USGBC’s “LEED® for New Construction
36 and Major Renovation Version,” verifying that the components, processes and/or assemblies
37 specified herein conform to the following requirements.
38 a. Regional Materials: The specified products shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project
39 site.
40 b. MR Credit 4.1 and 4.2: Recycled Content
41 1) Provide window assemblies (aluminum framing, glass and other components)
42 containing no less than 15% combined recycled content by assembly weight.
43 2) Combined content to be calculated as post-consumer plus one-half pre-consumer
44 recycled content by weight.
45 3) Report pre- and post-consumer recycled content separately.
46 4) All recycled secondary aluminum billet must meet Aluminum Association content
47 requirements for the alloy used.
48 c. EQ Credit 4.1: Low-Emitting Materials – Adhesives and Sealants
49 1) All interior primers, structural glazing adhesives and metal-to-metal sealants used on
50 site must meet applicable South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD)
51 Rule #1168 VOC limits.

53 A. Drawings and specification are based on Wausau Window and Wall Systems :
54 1. Wausau Window and Wall Systems 4250i-XLT INvent Retro Beveled Profile Historical Fixed
55 Windows.
56 2. Windows to be Simulated Double Hung with a 2 inches offset glass plane from upper to lower lites,
57 where indicated on the architectural drawings.
58 B. Substitute products not pre-approved by the Architect via addenda will not be considered. Clear preference
59 will be given to products produced in LEED®-certified manufacturing facilities. Operating Types: As indicated
60 on Drawings.
61

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 A. Drawings and specification are based on Wausau Window and Wall Systems 4250i-XLT INvent Retro
3 Beveled Profile Historical Fixed Windows..
4 1. Windows to be flush glazed (non-Simulated Double Hung) with simulated floating vent operables.
5 a. Simulated divided lites at WIN-2 shall be in accordance with the architectural drawings to
6 mimic the operable vents, no exceptions.
7 B. Substitute products not pre-approved by the Architect via addenda will not be considered. Clear preference
8 will be given to products produced in LEED®-certified manufacturing facilities. Operating Types: As indicated
9 on Drawings.
10 2.5 HEAT RESISTANT PANEL

11 A. Where indicated at WIN-1 window type for application at MEP pipe penetration.
12 2.6 MATERIALS
13 A. Aluminum Framing Members
14 1. Extruded aluminum billet, 6063-T5 or T6 alloy for primary non-radius components; 6063-T5 or T6,
15 6005-T5, 6105-T5 or 6061-T6 for anchor components; all meeting the requirements of ASTM B221.
16 2. Aluminum sheet alloy 5005-H32 (for anodic finishing), or alloy 3003-H14 (for painted or unfinished
17 sheet) meeting the requirements of ASTM B209.
18 3. Principal window frame members will be a minimum 0.125 inch in thickness at glazing legs and
19 section flanges.
20 4. Extruded or formed trim components will be a minimum 0.060 inch in thickness.
21 5. Frame depth 4-7/8 inches minimum.
22 6. Glass plane shall be recessed 1" from exterior plane of window members. Framing members shall
23 have a beveled profile at glazing rebates as shown on architectural details.
24 2.7 COMPONENTS
25 A. Hardware
26 1. All steel components including attachment fasteners to be 300 Series stainless steel except as noted.
27 2. Extruded aluminum components 6063-T5 or -T6.
28 B. Sealants
29 1. All sealants shall comply with applicable provisions of AAMA 800 and/or Federal Specifications FS-
30 TT-001 and 002 Series.
31 2. Frame joinery sealants shall be suitable for application specified and as tested and approved by
32 window manufacturer.
33 C. Glass
34 1. Provide in accordance with Section 08 80 00.
35 2. Sealed insulated glass shall be tested and certified in accord with ASTM E2190.
36 D. Glazing
37 1. Provide in general accordance with Section 08 80 00.
38 2. Glazing method shall be as approved by the glass fabricator, and warrantable.
39 E. Glazing Materials
40 1. Setting Blocks/Edge Blocking: Provide in sizes and locations recommended by GANA Glazing
41 Manual. Setting blocks used in conjunction with soft-coat low-e glass shall be silicone.
42 2. Back-bedding tapes, expanded cellular glazing tapes, toe beads, heel beads and cap beads shall
43 meet the requirements of applicable specifications cited in AAMA 800.
44 3. Glazing gaskets shall be non-shrinking, weather-resistant, and compatible with all materials in
45 contact.
46 4. Structural silicone sealant where used shall meet the requirements of ASTM C1184.
47 5. Spacer tape in continuous contact with structural silicone shall be tested for compatibility and
48 approved by the sealant manufacturer for the intended application.
49 6. Gaskets in continuous contact with structural silicone shall be extruded silicone or compatible
50 material.
51 F. Steel Components
52 1. Provide steel reinforcements as necessary to meet the performance requirements.
53 2. Concealed steel anchors and reinforcing shall be factory painted after fabrication with TGIC powder
54 coating, or rust-inhibitive primer complying with Federal Specification TT-P-645B.
55

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 G. Simulated Divided Lite (SDL) Muntins:

2 1. Provide beveled profile muntins on the exterior of the glass as shown on the architectural drawings.
3 Dimensions to be minimum 3/4 inch, match the bevel angle of the perimeter frame, and bevel cut at
4 overlapping joints.
5 2. Provide between glass muntin grid with dimensions of 3/8” x 3/4", colored to match the insulated
6 glass mill finish spacer.
7 3. Provide tape applied aluminum flat bar muntin on the interior of the glass with dimensions as shown
8 on the architectural drawings, no exceptions.
9 H. Historic Horizontal Accent (at WIN-1):
10 1. A thermally broken “H-mullion” shall separate the upper and the lower windows in this location, per
11 the architectural drawings.
12 2. Utilize a pressure plate and custom snap cover applied and sealed to the “H-mullion” to give the
13 exterior the historic aesthetic per the architectural drawings, no exceptions.
14 3. From the exterior, the horizontal historic band must remain uninterrupted across multiple units, no
15 exceptions.
16 4. All maximum dimensions of this horizontal must be per the architectural drawings, no exceptions.
17 I. Anchorage:
18 1. All windows must be adequately anchored into surrounding conditions for imposed loads per
19 structural calculations.
20 2. Anchorage devices, accessories and means must not add to aesthetic sightlines shown in the
21 architectural drawings.
22
23 2.8 FABRICATION
24 A. General:
25 1. Finish, fabricate and shop assemble frame members into complete windows under the responsibility
26 of one manufacturer.
27 2. No bolts, screws or fastenings shall impair independent frame movement, or bridge the thermal
28 barrier, unless such bridging was also present in thermal test units and thermal models.
29 3. Fabricate to allow for thermal movement of materials when subjected to a temperature differential
30 from -30 F exterior ambient temperature to +180 F exterior surface temperature.
31 B. Frames:
32 1. Cope or miter and weld or mechanically fasten each corner; then seal weather tight.
33 2. Make provisions for continuity of frame joinery seals at extrusion webs.
34 C. Simulated Divided Lite (SDL) Muntins:
35 1. Exterior muntin-to-muntin joints shall be partially coped to create an interlock cross and epoxy
36 bonded together.
37 2. Exterior muntin-to-frame joints shall be mitered to overlap and connected via concealed spring pin
38 plunger.
39 D. Glass Drainage: (field glazed units only)
40 1. Provision shall be made to insure that water will not accumulate and remain in contact with the
41 perimeter area of sealed insulated glass.
42 E. Thermal Break Construction:
43 1. Continuous extruded polyamide with 25% glass fiber reinforcing, mechanically crimped into cross-
44 knurled cavities.
45 2. Minimum thermal barrier width 24 mm.
46 3. Quality assurance records must be maintained and available as requested.

48 A. High-Performance Organic Finish (Two-Coat Fluoropolymer): Thermocured system consisting of inhibitive
49 primer and fluoropolymer color coat with color coat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene
50 fluoride resin by weight complying with AAMA 2605.
51 1. Color and Gloss:
52 a. For WIN-1, WIN-2: AL-A: Benjamin Moore # HC-131 (Lehigh Green), 30% gloss.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
2 3.1 INSTALLATION
3 A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other
4 components. For installation procedures and requirements not addressed in manufacturer's written
5 instructions, comply with installation requirements in ASTM E 2112.
6 B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored
7 securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction
8 to produce weathertight construction.
9 C. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating
10 within windows to the exterior.
11 D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points
12 of contact with other materials.
13 E. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and
14 finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.
15 F. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during
16 construction period.

18 A. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and
20 1. Keep protective films and coverings in place until final cleaning.
21 B. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during
23 C. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations.
24 If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to
26 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 08 51 13.23
2 ALUMINUM ACCESSORY WINDOWS
5 1.2 SUMMARY
9 1.6 WARRANTY
13 2.6 INTERIOR ACCESSORY WINDOWS (IAW-1)
14 2.7 FABRICATION
17 3.1 INSTALLATION
19 PART 1 - GENERAL

23 1.2 SUMMARY
25 1. All interior accessory windows furnished and installed as shown on drawings, specified in this section
26 and designated in AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.
27 2. All labor, materials, tools, equipment and services needed to furnish and install interior accessory
28 windows for sound, energy, air and/or light control enhancement of existing weather tight windows.
29 3. Components furnished with installed interior windows.
30 4. Installation accessories furnished and installed.

33 B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, insect screens, operational
34 clearances, and half-size details of installation, including anchor, flashing, and sealant installation.
35 C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color specified, 2 by 4 inches in size.
36 D. Product Schedule: For aluminum windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

39 B. Provide copies of original manifests verifying window production is within 500 miles of the Project location.
40 C. Sample warranties.

42 A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
46 1. One large interior accessory window IAW-1 on the inside of historic window type W11 at level 2
47 mockup, including support steel for IAW, jamb and head conditions, and new window sill.
48

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 085113 - 1 ALUMINUM ACCESSORY WINDOWS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 1.6 WARRANTY
2 A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows that fail in materials
3 or workmanship within specified warranty period.
4 1. Warranty Period:
5 a. Window: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
6 b. Glazing Units: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
7 c. Aluminum Finish: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
8 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
9 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
10 A. Drawings and specification are based on:
11 1. Wausau Window and Wall Systems - 1297 S.E.A.L.TM Series Interior Accessory Windows.
13 be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
14 1. Graham Architectural Products.
15 2. Wausau Window and Wall Systems; Apogee Wausau Group.

17 A. Air Infiltration/Exfiltration Performance Requirements:
18 1. When tested in accordance with cited test procedures, and with all purposeful vent holes plugged,
19 windows shall meet or exceed the following performance criteria.
20 2. Air infiltration and exfiltration maximum 0.3 cfm per square foot at 6.24 psf pressure differential when
21 tested in accord with ASTM E283.
22 B. Sustainable Design Requirements
23 1. The products provided under this section may affect LEED® certification for the project. Provide
24 documentation in accordance with USGBC’s “LEED® for New Construction and Major Renovation
25 Version 2.2”, verifying that the components, processes and/or assemblies specified herein conform
26 to the following requirements.
27 a. Regional Materials: The specified products shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project
28 site.
29 b. MR Credit 4.1 and 4.2: Recycled Content
30 1) Provide window assemblies (aluminum framing, glass and other components)
31 containing no less than 15% combined recycled content by assembly weight.
32 2) Combined content to be calculated as post-consumer plus one-half pre-consumer
33 recycled content by weight.
34 3) Report pre- and post-consumer recycled content separately.
35 4) All recycled secondary aluminum billet must meet Aluminum Association content
36 requirements for the alloy used.
37 c. EQ Credit 4.1: Low-Emitting Materials – Adhesives and Sealants
38 1) All interior primers, structural glazing adhesives and metal-to-metal sealants used on
39 site must meet applicable South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD)
40 Rule #1168 VOC limits.
41 2.3 INTERIOR ACCESSORY WINDOWS (IAW-1)

42 A. Drawings and specification are based on Wausau Window and Wall Systems - 1297 S.E.A.L.TM Series
43 Interior Prime Windows. Substitute products not pre-approved by the Architect via addenda will not be
44 considered. Clear preference will be given to products produced in LEED®-certified manufacturing facilities.
45 B. Operating Types: As indicated on Drawings.
46 C. Insulating-Glass Units: ASTM E 2190.
47 1. Refer to Section 08 80 00: Glass Designation GL-4.
48 D. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight seal.
49

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 E. Aluminum Framing Members

2 1. Extruded aluminum billet, 6063-T5 or T6 alloy for primary components; 6063-T5 or T6, 6005-T5,
3 6105-T5 or 6061-T6 for structural components; all meeting the requirements of ASTM B221.
4 2. Aluminum sheet alloy 5005-H32 (for anodic finishing), or alloy 3003-H14 (for painted or unfinished
5 sheet) meeting the requirements of ASTM B209.
6 3. Principal window frame and access panel members will be a minimum 0.093" in thickness at glazing
7 legs, hardware mounting webs and section flanges.
8 4. Extruded or formed trim components will be a minimum 0.125" in thickness.
9 5. Frame depth 1-1/2 inches minimum.
10 6. “Stacking” sightlines must be within ¼” of the existing cast iron window sections.
11 7. Access panel sections must close flush with adjoining frame surfaces at interior and exterior.
12 a. Overlap access panels will not be accepted.
13 F. Hardware
14 1. All steel components including attachment fasteners to be 300 Series stainless steel except as noted.
15 2. Extruded aluminum components 6063-T5 or -T6.
16 3. Locking handles, bases and strikes to be die cast, white bronze or stainless steel.
17 4. Thermo-plastic or thermo-set plastic caps, housings and other components to be injection-molded
18 nylon, extruded PVC, or other suitable compound.
19 5. Hardware to be custodial-operated.
20 G. Sealants
21 1. All sealants shall comply with applicable provisions of AAMA 800 and/or Federal Specifications FS-
22 TT-001 and 002 Series.
23 2. Frame joinery sealants shall be suitable for application specified and as tested and approved by
24 window manufacturer.
25 H. Glazing Materials
26 1. Setting Blocks/Edge Blocking: Provide in sizes and locations recommended by GANA Glazing
27 Manual. Setting blocks used in conjunction with soft-coat low-e glass shall be silicone.
28 2. Back-bedding tapes, expanded cellular glazing tapes, toe beads, heel beads and cap beads shall
29 meet the requirements of applicable specifications cited in AAMA 800.
30 3. Glazing gaskets shall be non-shrinking, weather-resistant, and compatible with all materials in
31 contact.
32 4. Structural silicone sealant where used shall meet the requirements of ASTM C1184.
33 5. Spacer tape in continuous contact with structural silicone shall be tested for compatibility and
34 approved by the sealant manufacturer for the intended application.
35 6. Gaskets in continuous contact with structural silicone shall be extruded silicone or compatible
36 material.
37 I. Glazed Access Panel:
38 1. Hinged and Lift-Off access panels shall be provided with Allen locks for custodial operation.
39 2.4 FABRICATION
40 A. General:
41 1. Finish, fabricate and shop assemble frame and access panel members into complete windows under
42 the responsibility of one manufacturer.
43 B. Frames:
44 1. Miter all corners and mechanically stake over a solid extruded aluminum corner block, set and sealed
45 in epoxy; or miter and weld each corner.
46 C. Interior Operable Panel
47 1. Miter all corners and mechanically stake over a solid extruded aluminum corner block, set and sealed
48 in epoxy, leaving hairline joinery.
49 D. Hardware:
50 1. Concealed Hinges at Sash Ventilator and Fixed Lite Access Panels
51 a. Provide two concealed extruded aluminum “walk-around” butt hinges with stainless steel pins.
52 Provide three/four hinges on in-swing casement units over 4’-0” in height.
53 2. Locks
54 a. Die cast or stainless steel Allen-keyed locks for custodial operation shall secure panel in
55 closed position.
56 b. Provide locks at maximum 40" spacing.
57 E. Weather-stripping:
58 1. Bulb- or fin-type neoprene, EPDM, dual-durometer PVC, polypropylene, TPE, or other suitable
59 material as approved by the window manufacturer.
60 2. Miter, crowd, stake or join at corners.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 A. High-Performance Organic Finish (Two-Coat Fluoropolymer): Thermocured system consisting of inhibitive
3 primer, fluoropolymer color coa with not less than 50 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight
4 complying with AAMA 2603.
5 1. Color and Gloss:
6 a. For IAW-1: Factory painted to match paint color PT-_A Benjamin Moore Lehigh Green HC-
7 131.
9 3.1 INSTALLATION
10 A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other
11 components. For installation procedures and requirements not addressed in manufacturer's written
12 instructions, comply with installation requirements in ASTM E 2112.
13 B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored
14 securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction
15 to produce weathertight construction.
16 C. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and

19 A. Adjust operating sashes and hardware for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth
20 operation and weathertight closure.
21 B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and
23 1. Keep protective films and coverings in place until final cleaning.
24 C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during
26 D. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations.
27 If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to
29 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 08 6200
2 UNIT SKYLIGHTS
5 1.2 SUMMARY
10 1.7 WARRANTY
13 1.2 UNIT SKYLIGHTS
14 1.3 FRAMING MATERIALS
18 1.1 EXAMINATION
19 1.2 INSTALLATION
20 1.3 CLEANING
21 PART 1 - GENERAL

25 1.2 SUMMARY
27 1. Unit skylights mounted on site-erected curbs.
29 1. Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" for site built curbs.


33 A. Shop Drawings: For unit skylight work.
34 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and connections to supporting structure and other
35 adjoining work.

37 A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

39 A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating unit skylights that meet or exceed
40 performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion in lists and by
41 labels, test reports, and calculations.
42 B. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to unit skylight manufacturer for installation of units required
43 for this Project.
44 1.7 WARRANTY
45 A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of unit skylights that fail in
48 a. Uncontrolled water leakage.
49 b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
50 c. Deterioration of insulating-glass hermetic seal.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 086200 - 1 UNIT SKYLIGHTS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
3 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Pinnacle 350 system by Wasco
4 Products, Inc., Commercial Division, Wells, ME.
5 1. Wasco ‘G’ Series.
6 B. Acceptable Alternate: Comparable skylight as manufactured by Velux.
7 2.2 UNIT SKYLIGHTS (SKYLIGHT-1)

8 A. General: Provide factory-assembled unit skylights that include glazing, extruded-aluminum glazing
9 retainers, gaskets, and inner frames and that are capable of withstanding performance requirements
10 indicated.
11 B. Insulating Glass: Clear, sealed units that comply with Section 08 8000 "Glazing,"(GL-7).
12 C. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard.
13 D. Condensation Control: Fabricate unit skylights with integral internal gutters and nonclogging weeps to
14 collect and drain condensation to the exterior.
15 E. Thermal Break: Fabricate unit skylights with thermal barrier separating exterior and interior metal framing.
16 2.3 FRAMING MATERIALS

17 A. Framing Members: Extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T5 or T6, ASTM B 221 with minimum effective
18 thickness of 0.109 inches.
19 B. Exterior Pressure Caps: Extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T5 or T6, ASTM B 221 with minimum effective
20 thickness of 0.090 inches.
21 C. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer’s standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, non-bleeding flashing;
22 compatible with adjacent materials.
23 D. Exposed Flashing and Closures: Aluminum sheet alloy and temper of 1100-H14, thickness as require for
24 proper performance.
25 1. Minimum Thickness: 0.032 inch Apron Flashing.
26 2. Minimum Thickness: 0.062 inch Closures.
27 E. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, non-bleeding
28 fasteners and accessories; compatible with adjacent materials.
29 1. Aluminum Retaining Cap Fasteners and Framing Members Fasteners: ASTM A 193/A 193M,
30 Series 300 stainless-steel screws; type as recommended by manufacturer.
31 2. Connections to Supporting Structure: Series 300 Stainless Steel or ASTM A 307, hot dipped
32 galvanized steel fasteners by installer.
33 F. Framing-System Sealants: Single-component, non-sag, high performance, non-priming, gun-grade
34 elastomeric polyurethane sealant furnished by skylight manufacturer.
35 1. Sealant complies with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use T, NT, M, A, G, and O.
36 G. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except containing no
37 asbestos, and formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.

39 A. Fasteners: Same metal as metal being fastened, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other noncorrosive metal
40 as recommended by manufacturer. Finish exposed fasteners to match material being fastened.
41 1. Where removal of exterior exposed fasteners might allow access to building, provide nonremovable
42 fastener heads.
43 B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mildry film thickness per coat.

45 A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
47 3.1 EXAMINATION
48 A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for
49 compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the
50 Work.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3.2 INSTALLATION
2 A. Coordinate installation of unit skylight with installation of substrates, vapor retarders, roof insulation,
3 roofing membrane, and flashing as required to ensure that each element of the Work performs properly
4 and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight.
5 B. Comply with recommendations in AAMA 1607 and with manufacturer's written instructions for installing
6 unit skylights.
7 C. Install unit skylights level, plumb, and true to line, without distortion.
8 D. Anchor unit skylights securely to supporting substrates.
9 E. Where aluminum surfaces of unit skylights will contact another metal or corrosive substrates, such as
10 preservative-treated wood, apply bituminous coating on concealed metal surfaces or provide other
11 approved permanent separation recommended in writing by unit skylight manufacturer.
12 3.3 CLEANING
13 A. Clean exposed unit skylight surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Touch up damaged
14 metal coatings and finishes.
15 B. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.
16 C. Remove and replace glazing that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during
18 D. Protect unit skylight surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
19 operations.
20 END OF SECTION

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 086210
2 STEEL DOOR REHABILITATION

3
5 1.1 SUMMARY
6 1.2 UNIT PRICES
7 1.3 DEFINITIONS
8 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETING
12 2.1 GLASS
13 2.2 HARDWARE
14 2.3 CLEANERS
15 2.4 DOOR FRAME AND SUBFRAME PAINT
16 2.5 WEATHERSTRIPPING
19 3.1 PROTECTION
20 3.2 REHABILITATION SEQUENCE
21 3.3 INTERIOR FRAME
22 3.4 REPLACEMENT OF MISSING SECTIONS
23 3.5 REPAIRS TO STEEL SECTIONS
24 3.6 REPAIRS TO CAST IRON
25 3.7 FINAL CLEANING
26 3.8 WARRANTY
27 PART 1 - GENERAL
28 1.1 SUMMARY
29 A. Section includes complete rehabilitation of existing, exterior steel doors, frames and decorative grilles. All work will
30 match existing historic details and finishes.
31 B. The goal of the rehabilitation work on the exterior steel doors, frames, and decorative grilles is to retain and
32 improve to contemporary standards through repair and alterations while retaining and preserving the original
33 elements, portions and features.
34 C. Work shall follow the recommendations of The Secretary of the Interior’s Standards for Historic Preservation:
35 Preservation Briefs and Preservation Tech Notes as noted below.
36 D. Steel doors, frames and grilles have historically been coated with lead based paint. The removal and proper
37 disposal of such materials shall be the responsibility of the contractor.
38 E. All damaged steel will be repaired with new or with rehabilitated salvaged materials to match existing.
39 F. Contractor shall provide all required access.
40 G. Special Notes:
41 1. Preservation Brief 27, The Maintenance and Repair of Architectural Cast Iron provide an overview of
42 methods and materials associated with rehabilitation of cast iron components.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 086210 - 1 STEEL DOOR REHABILITATION
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 1.2
2 1.3 DEFINITIONS
3 A. Rehabilitation: The process of making possible a compatible use through repair and alterations while retaining and
4 preserving the original elements, portions and features.
5 B. Hand Tool Cleaning: Removes all loose mill scale, loose rust, and other detrimental foreign matter. It is not
6 intended that adherent mill scale, rust and paint be removed by this process. Mill scale, rust and paint are
7 considered adherent if they cannot be lifted with a dull putty knife. Before hand tool cleaning, remove visible oil,
8 grease, soluble residues and salts by the methods outlined in SSPC-SP1. For complete instructions refer to Steel
9 Structures Paint Council Surface Preparation Specification No. 2 (SSPC-SP2).
10 C. Power Tool Cleaning: Removes all loose mill scale, loose rust, and other detrimental foreign matter. It is not
11 intended that adherent mill scale, rust and paint be removed by this process. Mill scale, rust and paint are
12 considered adherent if they cannot be lifted with a dull putty knife. Before power tool cleaning, remove visible oil,
13 grease, soluble residues and salts by the methods outlined in SSPC-SP1. For complete instructions refer to Steel
14 Structures Paint Council Surface Preparation Specification No. 3 (SSPC-PC3).
16 A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project a minimum of one week in advance of starting mockup.
20 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and detail drawings describing damage and missing sections,
21 deterioration and deficiencies doors and grilles and proposed repairs and treatment methods.
22 2. Include drawings and description of protection.
23
24 C. Samples:
25
26 1. 6” x12” Paint samples on metal (for both interior metal paint and exterior metal paint)
27 2. 12” x12” Glass type GL-1.
28 3. Weatherstripping (sealant)
30 A. Door Rehabilitation Specialist Qualifications: Engage an experienced metals repair firm to perform work of this
31 Section. Firm shall have completed work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project with
32 a record of successful in-service performance. Firm must have successfully completed three similar projects in the
33 last five years.
34 B. Rehabilitation Worker Qualifications: Persons who are experienced and specialize in rehabilitation work of types
35 they will be performing. Workers shall have minimum of three years of documented experience. Key staff shall be
36 of sufficient number to accomplish the required work with the required project schedule.
37 C. Submit documentation of firm experience, qualifications and worker resumes. Submittals shall include:
38 1. Name of firm and location of office.
39 2. Description and location of a minimum of three required projects.
40 3. References for five required projects including contact information.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 4. Name of individuals that worked on the five required projects that will work on this project.
2 5. Brief resumes of individual Rehabilitation workers, including supervisors, proposed for this project.
3 D. The owner and the architect will review submittals, check references and project information submitted by the
4 contractor and determine if the specialist firm and individuals identified meet the qualification requirements as
5 outlined above. Firms and individuals not meeting the qualifications, as assessed by the owner and architect, will
6 not be permitted to engage in work of this Section.
7 E. Mockups: Refer to Section 014339. Prepare one complete mockup of steel rehabilitation to demonstrate aesthetic
8 effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution and for repair and rehabilitation. Mock-up shall
9 include and document every process of the repair, including: steel and cast iron repair, primer, base coat, filler, top
10 coat, final top coat and sealants.
11 1. Construct mockup in location in where directed by Owner and Architect.
12 2. Prepare mockup for review and approval by Owner. Correct all conditions noted during review process. Re-
13 check until approved by Owner, at no additional cost to Owner.
14 3. Approved mockup shall become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial
15 Completion.
17 2.1 GLASS [GL-1]
18 A. Provide new glass where existing glass is damaged or missing.
19 1. 1/8” clear annealed float glass. Safety glazing shall be used as required by code and correctly labeled on
20 glass.
21 2.2 DOOR, GRILLE AND RELATED FRAMES AND SUBFRAMES PAINT:
22 A. INTERIOR: PT-12A
23 a. Interior Primer: Sherwin Williams oil based alkyd slow drying primer, tinted 50% of finish coat.
24 b. Interior Finish Coat: Sherwin Williams oil based alkyd, satin finish
25 B. EXTERIOR: PT-6A
26 a. Exterior Primer: Sherwin Williams, 646-100 HS Epoxy Primer B58-600 Series, tint to 50% final finish, per MPI#
27 108.
28 b. Exterior Finish Coats: First coat, Sherwin Williams Corothane 1 HS Aliphatic Urethane, tint to 75 final finish. 2.0-3.0
29 DFT. Second coat, Sherwin Williams Corothane 1 HS Aliphatic Urethane, per MPI# 203.
30 C. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish
31 coats.
32 D. Paint applicators must be manufacturer certified to apply products. Provide documentation of certification.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 E. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
2 a. Primers, sealers, filling compounds and fasteners. Provide materials required to complete the Work.
4 3.1 PROTECTION Provide durable temporary interior and exterior protection for adjacent finishes, surfaces and
5 materials.
6 A. Provide temporary closure panels for window / door opening to maintain weather tight building.
7 B. If interior and/or exterior finishes, surfaces or materials are damaged by the door rehabilitation process, repair
8 will be done by the selected subcontractor responsible for damaged areas and paid for by the window
9 rehabilitation subcontractor by way of credit or subsequent payment applications.
11 A. Determination was made that recognizes that the existing doors are in generally sound condition. The
12 rehabilitation work of this project includes, but is not limited to, the following:
13
14 In Field Work for Interior
15
16 i. Protect all adjacent finishes, materials and surfaces.
17 ii. Carefully lightly sand steel and cast iron components to provide a key for new coatings. Remove and loose or
18 scaling paint.
19 Coordinate with window exterior contractor relative to repairs to window frames and sash.
20 iii. Apply tinted primer coat.
21 iv. Apply finish coats.
22 v. Discard temporary enclosure and protection.
23
24 In Field Work for Exterior
25
26 i. Protect all adjacent finishes, materials and surfaces.
27 ii. Provide for collection of chemical strippers and rinse agents.
28 iii. Carefully strip steel and cast iron components down to either a stable base layer or the original primer coat, not
29 beyond the original primer coat.
30 iv. Prepare surfaces by hand tool cleaning.
31 v. Rinse and neutralize stripper per manufacturers recommendations.
32 vi. Prepare all new metal surfaces and repairs.
33 vii. Apply tinted primer coat.
34 viii. Apply finish coats (2).
35 ix. Discard temporary enclosure and protection.
36
37 3.3 INTERIOR FRAME
38 3.4 REPAIRS TO STEEL SECTIONS
39 Repairs include:
40 1. Straightening of warped or bent sections for proper alignment.
41 2. Polyester based automotive putty for small holes or imperfections
42 3. Removal and replacement of structurally weakened sections, welding and grinding smooth.
43 4. Utilize salvaged sections where possible.
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3.5 REPAIRS TO CAST IRON
2 Non-structural repairs.
3 1. Polyester based automotive putty for small holes or imperfections
4 2. Filler compound containing iron particles in an epoxy resin binder for non-structural cracks.
5 3. Brazing of major cracks with special nickel-alloy welding rods.
6 4. Grind repairs smooth to adjacent surfaces.
7 3.6 FINAL CLEANING
8 A. After rehabilitation the Contractor shall remove all paint spatter, sealants, caulking and other misplaced materials
9 from all surfaces including adjacent work. The door frame and glass shall be cleaned thoroughly with materials
10 and methods recommended by the door and glass manufacturers and shall not cause any defacement of the
11 work.
12
13 3.7 WARRANTY
14
15 A. Doors and frames shall be free of rehabilitation and/or material defects for a period of 5 years from date of substantial
16 completion under normal use and service conditions.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 087100.00
2 DOOR HARDWARE
4 1.1 CONDITIONS
5 1.2 WORK INCLUDED
6 1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
7 1.4 REFERENCES
8 1.5 SUBMITTALS
12 1.9 WARRANTY
14 2.1 FASTENERS
15 2.2 BUTT HINGES
16 2.3 CONTINUOUS GEARED HINGES
17 2.4 POWER TRANSFERS
18 2.5 FLUSH BOLTS AND DUST PROOF STRIKES
19 2.6 EXIT DEVICES
20 2.7 LOCKS AND LATCHES
21 2.8 PULLS, PUSH BARS, PUSH/PULL PLATES
22 2.9 COORDINATORS
23 2.10 CLOSERS
24 2.11 LOW ENERGY ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC AUTOMATIC OPERATORS
25 2.12 KICK PLATES AND MOP PLATE
26 2.13 OVERHEAD STOPS
27 2.14 WALL STOPS AND HOLDERS
28 2.15 WEATHERSTRIP, GASKETING
29 2.16 THRESHOLDS
30 2.17 ELECTRIC STRIKES
31 2.18 POWER SUPPLIES
32 2.19 DOOR POSITION SWITCHES
33 2.20 FINISHES AND BASE MATERIALS
34 2.21 KEYING
35 2.22 KEY CABINETS
37 3.1 EXAMINATION
38 3.2 INSTALLATION
40 3.4 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
41 3.5 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
42 1. GENERAL
43 1.1 CONDITIONS
44 A. Conditions of the contract (General and Supplementary Conditions) and Division One General
45 Requirements, govern the work of this section.
46 B. This section includes all material, and related service necessary to furnish all finish hardware indicated on
47 the drawings, or specified herein.
48 C. Furnish UL listed hardware for all labeled and 20 min. openings in conformance with the requirements for
49 the class of opening scheduled. Underwriters' requirements shall have precedence over specification where
50 conflicts exist.
51 D. All work shall be in accordance with all applicable state and local building codes. Code requirements shall
52 have precedence over this specification where conflicts exist.
MADISON MUNICIPAL BUILDING RENOVATION BID ADDENDUM 2

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 087100 - 1 DOOR HARDWARE
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 1.2 WORK INCLUDED
2 A. This section includes the following:

3 1. Furnish door hardware (for hollow metal, wood and aluminum doors) specified herein, listed in the
4 hardware schedule, and/or required by the drawings.
5 2. Cylinders for Aluminum Doors
6 3. Thresholds and Weather-stripping (Aluminum frame seals to be provided by aluminum door supplier)
7 4. Electro-Mechanical Devices
8 5. Access Control components and or systems specified within this section.
9 B. Where items of hardware are not definitely or correctly specified and is required for the intended service,
10 such omission, error or other discrepancy should be directed to the Architect prior to the bid date for
11 clarification by addendum. Otherwise furnish such items in the type and quantity established by this
12 specification for the appropriate service intended.
13 1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
14 A. This section includes coordination with related work in the following sections:
15 1. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry".
16 2. Division 6 Section "Cabinet Hardware"
17 3. Division 8 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames".
18 4. Division 8 Section "Wood Doors"
19 5. Division 8 Section "Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts"
20 6. Division 28 Sections "Electrical".
21 1.4 REFERENCES
22 A. Publications of agencies and organizations listed below form a part of this specification section to the extent
23 referenced.
24 1. DHI - Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware.
25 2. NFPA 80 - Standards for Fire Doors and Windows.
26 3. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures.
27 4. UL - Building Material Directory.
28 5. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute
29 6. WHI - Warnock Hersey
30 7. BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
31 8. ANSI – American National Standards Institute
32 9. IBC 2009 - International Building Code 2009 Edition (as amended by local building code)
33 1.5 SUBMITTALS
34 A. Within ten days after award of contract, submit detailed hardware schedule in quantities as required by
35 Division 1 - General Conditions.
36 B. Schedule format shall be consistent with recommendations for a vertical format as set forth in the Door &
37 Hardware Institute's (DHI) publication "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule". Hardware sets
38 shall be consolidated to group multiple door openings which share similar hardware requirements.
39 Schedule shall include the following information:
40 1. Door number, location, size, handing, and rating.

41 2. Door and frame material, handing.
42 3. Degree of swing.
43 4. Manufacturer
44 5. Product name and catalog number
45 6. Function, type and style
46 7. Size and finish of each item
47 8. Mounting heights
48 9. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, etc.
49 10. Numerical door index, indicating the hardware set/ group number for each door.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 C. When universal type door closers are to be provided, the schedule shall indicate the application method to
2 be used for installation at each door: (regular arm, parallel arm, or top jamb).
3 D. The schedule will be prepared under the direct supervision of a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant
4 (AHC) employed by the hardware distributor. The hardware schedule shall be signed and embossed with
5 the DHI certification seal of the supervising AHC. The supervising AHC shall attend any meetings related to
6 the project when requested by the architect.
7 E. Hardware supplier shall field verify with the Owner all existing doors and frames to remain (including those
8 to be relocated) for existing hardware suitability to remain I.L.O. specified hardware prior to ordering new
9 hardware, and check the specified hardware for suitability and adaptability to the details and surrounding
10 conditions.
11 F. Review drawings from related trades as required to verify compatibility with specified hardware. Indicate
12 unsuitable or in compatible items, and proposed substitutions in the hardware schedule.
13 G. Provide documentation for all hardware to be furnished on labeled fire doors indicating compliance with
14 positive pressure fire testing UL 10C.
15 H. Furnish manufacturers' catalog data for each item of hardware in quantities as required by Division 1 -
16 General Conditions.
17 I. Submit a sample of each type of hardware requested by the architect. Samples shall be of the same finish,
18 style, and function as specified herein. Tag each sample with its permanent location so that it may be used
19 in the final work.
20 J. Furnish with first submittal, a list of required lead times for all hardware items.
21 K. After final approved schedule is returned, transmit corrected copies for distribution and field use in
22 quantities as required by Division 1 - General Conditions.
23 L. Furnish approved hardware schedules, template lists, and pertinent templates as requested by related
24 trades.
25 M. Furnish necessary diagrams, schematics, voltage and amperage requirements for all electro-mechanical
26 devices or systems as required by related trades. Wiring diagrams shall be opening specific and include
27 both a riser diagram and point to point diagram showing all wiring terminations.
28 N. After receipt of approved hardware schedule, Hardware supplier shall initiate a meeting including the
29 owner's representative to determine keying requirements. Upon completion of the initial key meeting,
30 hardware supplier shall prepare a proposed key schedule with symbols and abbreviations as set forth in the
31 door and hardware institute's publication "Keying Procedures, Systems, and Nomenclature". Submit copies
32 of owner approved key schedule for review and field use in quantities as required by Division 1 - General
33 Conditions. Wiring diagrams shall be included in final submittals transmitted for distribution and field use.
35 A. Manufacturers and model numbers listed are to establish a standard of function and quality. Similar items
36 by approved manufacturers that are equal in design, function, and quality, may be considered for prior
37 approval of the architect, provided the required data and physical samples are submitted for approval as set
38 forth in Division One General Requirements.
39 B. Where indicated in this specification, products shall be independently certified by ANSI for compliance with
40 relevant ANSI/BHMA standards A156.1 - A156.36 – Standards for Hardware and Specialties. All products
41 shall meet or exceed certification requirements for the respective grade indicated within this specification.
42 Supplier shall provide evidence of certification when requested by the architect.
43 C. Obtain each type of hardware (hinges, latch & locksets, exit devices, closers, etc.) from a single
44 manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 D. Electrical drawings and electrical specifications are based on the specific electrified hardware components
2 specified in hardware sets. When electronic hardware components other than those indicated in hardware
3 sets are provided, the supplier shall be responsible for all costs incurred by the design team and their
4 consultants to review, and revise electrical drawings and electrical specifications. Supplier shall also be
5 responsible for any additional costs associated with required changes in related equipment, materials,
6 installation, or final hook up to insure the system will operate and function as indicated in the construction
7 documents, including hardware set operational / functional descriptions.
8 E. All hardware items shall be manufactured no earlier than 6 months prior to delivery to site.
9 F. Hardware supplier shall be factory trained and certified by the manufacture to provide and support all
10 computer managed locks and system components.
11 G. Installation of hardware shall be installed or directly supervised and inspected by a skilled installer certified
12 by the manufacturer of locksets, door closers, and exit devices used on the project, or with not less than 3
13 years’ experience in successful completion of projects similar in size and scope.
14 H. Provide hardware for all labeled fire doors, which complies with positive pressure fire testing UL 10C.
15 I. Comply with all applicable provisions of the standards referenced within section 1.4 of this specification.
16 J. Hardware supplier shall participate when reasonably requested to meet with the contractor and or architect
17 to inspect any claim for incorrect or non-functioning materials; following such inspection, the hardware
18 supplier shall provide a written statement documenting the cause and proposed remedy of any unresolved
19 items.
21 A. Hardware supplier shall deliver hardware to the job site unless otherwise specified.
22 B. All hardware shall be delivered in manufacturers' original cartons and shall be clearly marked with set and
23 door number.
24 C. Coordinate with contractor prior to hardware delivery and recommend secure storage and protection
25 against loss and damage at job site.
26 D. Contractor shall receive all hardware and provide secure and proper protection of all hardware items to
27 avoid delays caused by lost or damaged hardware. Contractor shall report shortages to the Architect and
28 hardware supplier immediately after receipt of material at the job site.
29 E. Coordinate with related trades under the direction of the contractor for delivery of hardware items
30 necessary for factory installation.
31 1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
32 A. Schedule a hardware pre-installation meeting on site to review and discuss the installation of continuous
33 hinges, locksets, door closers, exit devices, overhead stops, and electromechanical door hardware.
34 B. Meeting attendees shall be notified 7 days in advance and shall include: Architect, Contractor, Door
35 Hardware Installers (including low voltage hardware), Manufacturers representatives for above hardware
36 items, and any other effected subcontractors or suppliers.
37 C. All attendees shall be prepared to distribute installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates, and
38 physical hardware samples.
39 1.9 WARRANTY
40 A. All hardware items shall be warranted against defects in material and workmanship as set forth in Division
41 One General Requirements.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 B. Repair, replace, or otherwise correct deficient materials and workmanship without additional cost to owner.
2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
3 2.1 FASTENERS
4 A. All exposed fasteners shall be Phillips head or as otherwise specified, and shall match the finish of the
5 adjacent hardware. All fasteners ex-posed to the weather shall be non-ferrous or stainless steel. Furnish
6 correct fasteners to accommodate surrounding conditions.
7 B. Coordinate required reinforcements for doors and frames. Seek approval of the architect prior to furnishing
8 through-bolts. Furnish through-bolts as required for materials not readily reinforced.
9 2.2 BUTT HINGES
10 A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers:

Ives Stanley Hager McKinney
1. Standard Weight, Plain Bearing 5PB1 F179 1279 T2714
2. Standard Weight, Ball Bearing 5BB1 BB179 BB1279 TB2714
3. Standard Weight, Ball Bearing, Non-Ferrous 5BB1 FBB191 BB1191 TB2314
4. Heavy Weight, Ball Bearing 5BB1HW FBB168 BB1168 T4B3786
5. Heavy Weight, Ball Bearing, Non-Ferrous 5BB1HW FBB199 BB1199 T4B3386
11 B. Hinges shall be independently certified by ANSI for compliance with ANSI A156.1 (2006). Hinges shall
12 meet or exceed the following ANSI grade requirements as indicated below:
13 1. Standard Weight, Plain Bearing Hinges: Grade 3

14 2. Standard Weight, 2 Ball Bearing Hinges: Grade 2
15 3. Heavy Weight, 4 Ball Bearing Hinges: Grade 1
16 C. Unless otherwise specified, furnish the following hinge quantities for each door leaf.
17 1. 3 hinges for doors up to 90 inches.

18 2. 1 additional hinge for every 30 inch on doors over 90 inches.
19 3. 4 hinges for Dutch door applications.
20 D. Unless otherwise specified, top and bottom hinges shall be located as specified in division 8 Section
21 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames". Intermediate hinges shall be located equidistant from others.
22 E. Unless otherwise specified, furnish hinge weight and type as follows:
23 1. Standard weight: plain bearing hinge 5PB1 for interior openings through 36 inches wide without a door
24 closer.
25 2. Standard weight: ball bearing hinge 5BB1 for interior opening over 36 through 40 inches wide without a
26 door closer, and for interior openings through 40 inches wide with a door closer.
27 3. Heavyweight: 4 ball bearing hinge 5BB1HW for interior openings over 40 inches wide, and for all
28 vestibule doors.
29 4. Heavyweight: 4 ball bearing hinge 5BB1HWss for exterior openings unless otherwise listed in groups.
30 F. Unless otherwise specified, furnish hinges for exterior doors, fabricated from brass, bronze, or stainless
31 steel. Unless otherwise specified, hinges for interior doors may be fabricated from steel.
32 G. Unless otherwise specified, furnish hinges in the following sizes:
1. 5" x 5" 2-1/4" thick doors

2. 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" 1-3/4" thick doors
3. 3-1/2" x 3-1/2" 1-3/8" thick doors
33 H. Furnish hinges with sufficient width to accommodate trim and allow for 180-degree swing.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 I. Unless otherwise specified, furnish hinges with flat button tips with non-rising pins at interior doors, non-
2 removable loose pins (NRP) at exterior and out-swinging interior doors.
3 J. Unless otherwise specified, furnish all hinges to template standards.
4 2.3 CONTINUOUS GEARED HINGES

Ives HAGER STANLEY
Full Mortise 112HD 780-112HD 661HD
6 B. Hinges shall be independently certified by ANSI for compliance with ANSI A156.26, Grade 1 (2012).
7 C. Continuous hinges shall be geared type hinge providing full height door support up to 600 lbs.
8 D. Hinge shall be non-handed with symmetrical template hole pattern and factory drilled.
9 E. Hinge to be able to carry Warnock Hersey Int. or UL for fire rated doors and frames up to 90 minutes.
10 F. Provide machine screws for doors which have been reinforced to accept machine screws.
11 G. Note: Fire label for doors and frames should be placed on the header and top rail of fire rated doors and
12 frames.
13 2.4 POWER TRANSFERS
Von Duprin
1. Concealed Two Wire EPT-2

2. Concealed Ten Wire EPT-10
3. Armored Door Cord Four Wire 788C-12
4. Armored Door Cord Four Wire 788C-18
15 B. Door cords shall be armored cable with screw on caps.
16 C. Concealed power transfers shall be concealed in the door and frame when the door is closed.
17 D. Concealed power transfers shall have a steel tube to protect wires from being cut.
18 E. Concealed power transfers with spring tubes shall be rejected.
19 F. Concealed power transfers shall be supplied with a mud box to house all terminations.
20 2.5 FLUSH BOLTS AND DUST PROOF STRIKES
Ives Door Controls Hager
1. Dust Proof Strike DP2 80 280X

2. Auto Flush Bolt (Metal Door) FB31P 842 292D
3. Auto Flush Bolt (Wood Door) FB41P 942 291D
4. Manual Flush Bolt FB458 780 282D
22 B. Unless otherwise specified, provide 12" rods for manual flush bolts for door 7'6" or less, 24" top rods for
23 doors over 7'6" to 8'6".

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 C. Unless otherwise specified, provide doors over 8'6" with automatic top bolts.
2 D. Provide automatic flush bolts where required to maintain fire door listing and or egress requirements on
3 pairs of doors.
4 E. All flush-bolt applications shall be UL listed to be installed with top flush-bolt only. Provide auxiliary fire bolt
5 as required for fire rated openings where less bottom bolt has been specified.
6 F. Provide all bottom flush bolts with non-locking dust proof strikes.
7 2.6 EXIT DEVICES
Von Duprin No Substitution
1. Wide Stile, Push Pad 98 / 99 Series

2. Wide Stile, Electric Latch Retraction (motor driven) QEL 98 / 99 Series
3. Lever Trim 996 Series
4. Pull Trim 990 Series
5. Pull Trim 550 Series
9 A. Exit devices shall be independently certified by ANSI for compliance with ANSI A156.3, Grade 1 (2008).
10 B. Obtain exit devices from a single manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products
11 complying with requirements.
12 C. All exit devices shall be equipped with a sound-dampening feature to reduce touch pad return noise.
13 D. Quiet Electric Latch Retraction shall be accomplished using a motor driven assembly, and shall incorporate
14 the following features:
15 1. Motor shall retract both the push pad assembly and latchbolt.
16 2. Automatic calibration of latch throw and pull.
17 3. Built-in time delay.
18 4. On-board installation and troubleshooting diagnostics built into power supply and device.
19 5. Retry mode if device does not pull on the first try.
20 E. On full glass doors there shall be no exposed fasteners on the back of the mechanism visible through the
21 glass.
22 F. All exit devices shall be provided with flush end caps to reduce potential damage from impact.
23 G. All exit devices shall be provided with dead-locking latch bolts to insure security.
24 H. All exit devices shall be U.L. listed for accident hazard. Exit device for use on fire doors shall also be U.L.
25 listed for fire exit hardware.
26 I. Provide optional strikes, special length rods, and adapter plates to accommodate door and frame
27 conditions. Provide narrow style series devices in lieu of wide stile series devices where optional strikes
28 will not accommodate door and frame conditions.
29 J. Coordinate with related trades to insure adequate clearance and reinforcement is provided in doors and
30 frames. Provide thru bolts as required.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 K. Refer to hardware groups for exit device applications utilizing the option of: "less bottom rod and floor
2 strike" (LBR)
3 L. All exit devices shall be provided with optional trim designs to match other lever and pull designs used on
4 the project.
5 M. Unless specific exit device dogging options are noted within hardware sets, provide dogging options as
6 follows:
7 N. Fire Rated devices: Dogging not permitted.
8 O. Non-Rated Exit Only functions not equipped with outside trim or pull: Less Dogging.
9 P. Non-Rated Classroom functions: Less Dogging.
10 Q. Non-Rated devices utilizing electric latch retraction or electrified outside trim: Less Dogging.
11 R. All Other Non-Rated devices: Cylinder Dogging utilizing interchangeable core cylinders. Cylinder keyway
12 shall match locksets furnished on this project.
13 S. Provide glass bead kits as required to accommodate door conditions. Screws shall not be visible through
14 full glass doors.
15 T. Where specified, provide compatible keyed mullions with cylinder for pairs of doors.
16 U. Provide reinforced crossbars for all traditional style exit devices applied to doors over 36" wide.
17 2.7 LOCKS AND LATCHES
Schlage No Substitution
1. Grade 1 Mortise L Series Latitude x N Escutcheon
19 B. Bored locks shall be independently certified by ANSI for compliance with ANSI A156.2 (2011).
20 Interconnected locks shall be independently certified by ANSI for compliance with ANSI A156.12 (2013).
21 Mortise locks shall be independently certified by ANSI for compliance with ANSI A156.13 (2012).
22 C. Minimize transmission of heat to lock trim. Provide temperature control modules (TCM) on all electrified
23 locks when cataloged by the lock manufacturer.
24 D. Unless otherwise specified, all locks and latches to have:
25 1. 2-3/4" Backset
26 2. 1/2" minimum throw latchbolt
27 3. 1" throw deadbolt
28 4. 6 pin cylinders
29 5. ANSI A115.2 strikes
30 E. Provide guarded latch bolts for all locksets, and latch bolts with sufficient throw to maintain fire rating of
31 both single and paired door assemblies.
32 F. Length of strike lip shall be sufficient to clear surrounding trim.
33 G. Provide wrought boxes for strikes at inactive doors, wood frames, and metal frames without integral mortar
34 covers.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2.8 PULLS, PUSH BARS, PUSH/PULL PLATES
Burns Hager Ives

1. Straight Pull (1" dia., 10" ctc) 26C 4J 8103-0
2. Straight Pull (3/4” dia., 8” ctc) 25B 3G 8102-8
3. Offset Door Pull (1" dia., 10" ctc) 39C 12J 8190-0
4. Pull / Push-Bar (1" dia., 10" ctc Pull) 422 x 26C 153 9103-0
5. Offset Pull / Push-Bar (1" dia., 10" ctc Pull) 422 x 39C 159 9190-0
6. Push Plate (.050 4"X 16") 54 30S 4 x 16 8200 4 x 16
7. Push Plate (.050 6"X 16") 56 30S 6 x 16 8200 6" X 16"
8. Pull Plate (1" dia., 10" ctc - .050" X 4" X 16") 5426C 34J 4 x 16 8303-0 4" X 16"
3 B. Adjust dimensions of push plates to accommodate stile and rail dimensions, lite and louver cutouts, and
4 adjacent hardware. Where required by adjacent hardware, push plates shall be factory drilled for cylinders
5 or other mortised hardware. All push plates shall be beveled 4 sides and counter sunk.
6 C. Where possible, provide back-to-back, and concealed mounting for pulls and push bars. Push bar length
7 shall be 3" less door width, or center of stile to center of stile for stile & rail or full glass doors.
8 2.9 COORDINATORS
Ives Door Controls Hager

1. Bar Coordinator COR x FL 600 x Filler 297D x 297F
2. Mounting Bracket MB Series AB, C Series 297 Series
10 B. Provide coordinators at all pairs of doors having automatic flush bolts and closers on the inactive leaf, and
11 for pairs of doors having vertical rod/mortise exit device combinations with overlapping astragals.
12 C. Provide appropriate filler bars, closer mounting brackets, carry bars, and special top latch preparations as
13 required by adjacent hardware.
14 2.10 CLOSERS
LCN Sargent No Substitution
1. 4011 /4111 EDA 281 / 281P10 (less PRV valve)
16 B. Door closers shall be independently certified by ANSI for compliance with ANSI A156.4, Grade 1 (2013).
17 C. Obtain door closers from a single manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products
18 complying with requirements.
19 D. Provide extra heavy duty arm (EDA / HD) when closer is to be installed using parallel arm mounting.
20 E. Hardware supplier shall coordinate with related trades to insure aluminum frame profiles will accommodate
21 specified door closers.
22 F. Provide “SPECIAL TEMPLATE - #1728 / #0723” closer arms as required to accommodate aluminum frame
23 head details with “non-structural stops” when closers will be required to utilize parallel arm mounting
24 positions. Frame mounting shoe shall be shortened, and pivot hub height shall be increased to permit
25 frame mounted shoe to be positioned on frame rabbit (rather than the frame stop), and behind the frame

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 stop rather than on top of the frame stop. Contact LCN Door Closers at: 877-671-7011 for pricing and
2 design assistance.
3 G. Closers shall use high strength cast iron cylinders, forged main arms, and 1 piece forged steel pistons.
4 H. Closers shall utilize a stable fluid withstanding temperature range of +120deg F to -30deg F without
5 seasonal adjustment of closer speed to properly close the door. Closers for fire-rated doors shall be
6 provided with temperature stabilizing fluid that complies with standards UL10C.
7 I. Unless otherwise specified, all door closers shall have full covers and separate adjusting valves for sweeps,
8 latch, and backcheck.
9 J. Provide closers for all labeled doors. Provide closer series and type consistent with other closers for similar
10 doors specified elsewhere on the project.
11 K. Provide closers with adjustable spring power. Size closers to insure exterior and fire rated doors will
12 consistently close and latch doors under existing conditions. Size all other door closers to allow for reduced
13 opening force not to exceed 5 lbs.
14 L. Install closers on the room side of corridor doors, stair side of stairways and interior side of exterior doors.
15 M. Closers shall be furnished complete with all mounting brackets and cover plates as required by door and
16 frame conditions, and by adjacent hardware.
17 N. Door closers shall be provided with a powder coat finish to provide superior protection against the effects of
18 weathering. Powder coat finish shall successfully pass a 100 hour salt spray test.
19 O. Pressure Relief Valve, PRV, shall not be acceptable.
20 2.11 LOW ENERGY ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC AUTOMATIC OPERATORS
LCN No Substitution
1. Electro-Hydraulic Operator 4640
22 B. Low energy operators shall be independently certified by ANSI for compliance with ANSI A156.19 (2002).
23 C. Where low kinetic energy, as defined by ANSI/BHMA Standard A156.19, power operators are indicated for
24 doors required to be accessible to the disabled, provide electrically powered operators complying with the
25 ADA for opening force and time to close standards.
26 D. The closing action shall be controlled by modern type cast iron door closer cylinder filled with a flat viscosity
27 fluid, stable from +120F to -30F that would require no seasonal adjustments. The closer shall have field
28 adjustable spring power; have two independent closing speed adjustment valves, and hydraulic back-
29 check.
30 E. Full closing force shall be provided when the power or assist cycle ends.
31 F. All power operator systems shall include the following features and functions:
32 1. Provisions for separate conduits to carry high and low voltage wiring in compliance with the National
33 Electrical Code, section 725-31.
34 2. The operator will be designed with an electronically controlled mechanical clutching mechanism to
35 prevent damage to the operator if the system is actuated while the door is latched or if the door is
36 forced closed during the opening cycle.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3. All covers, mounting plates and arm systems shall be powder coated and successfully pass a minimum
2 of 100 hours testing as outlined in ANSI/BHMA Standard A156.18.
3 4. UL listed for use on labeled doors.
4 5. All operators shall be non-handed with spring power over a range of at least four sizes; either 1 through
5 4 or 2 through 5.
6 6. The power operator shall incorporate microprocessor controlled digital controls including: factory default
7 memory settings, on-board diagnostics, non-volatile memory, and integrated delay and relay for
8 controlling door release devices.
9 7. Provisions in the control box or module shall provide control {inputs and outputs) for; electric strike
10 delay, auxiliary contacts, sequential operation, fire alarms systems, actuators, swing side sensors, and
11 stop side sensors.
12 8. Wall mounted actuators shall consist of a 4-1/2 inch diameter stainless steel touch plate with a blue
13 filled handicapped symbol. Switches shall be weather resistant and mount on a single gang electrical
14 box furnished by Division 16.
15 G. All electrically powered operators shall include the following features or functions:
16 1. When an obstruction or resistance to the opening swing is encountered, the operator will pause at that
17 point, then attempt to continue opening the door. If the obstruction or resistance remains, the operator
18 will again pause the door.
19 2. Easily accessible main power and maintain hold open switches will be provided on the operator.
20 3. An electronically controlled clutch to provide adjustable opening force.
21 4. A microprocessor to control all motor and clutch functions.
22 5. An on-board power supply capable of delivering both 12V and 24V outputs up to a maximum of 1.0
23 ampere combined load.
24 6. All input and output power wiring shall be protected by slow blow fuses. These fuses shall be easily
25 replaceable without special tools or component replacement.
26 7. If electrical failure occurs, the unit shall operate as a standard door closer.
27 H. Power Operators shall be warranted by the manufacturer to be free from defects in material and
28 workmanship for a period of two years.
29 2.12 KICK PLATES AND MOP PLATES
30 A. Furnish protective plates as specified in hardware groups.
31 B. Where specified, provide 10" kick plates, 34" armor plates, and 4" mop plates. Unless otherwise specified,
32 metal protective plates shall be .050" thick; plastic plates shall be 1/8" thick.
33 C. Protective plates shall be 2" less door width, or 1" less door width at pairs. All protective plates shall be
34 beveled 4 sides and counter sunk. Protection plates over 16" shall not be provided for labeled doors unless
35 specifically approved by door manufacturers listing.
36 D. Where specified, provide surface mounted door edges. Edges shall butt to protective plates. Provide
37 edges with cutouts as required adjacent hardware.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 E. Adjust dimensions of protection plates to accommodate stile and rail dimensions, lite and louver cutouts,
2 and adjacent hardware. Where required by adjacent hardware, protection plates shall be factory drilled for
3 cylinders or other mortised hardware.
4 2.13 OVERHEAD STOPS
Glynn-Johnson Rixson Sargent

1. Heavy Duty Surface Mount GJ900 Series 9 Series 590
2. Heavy Duty Concealed Mount GJ100 Series 1 Series 690
3. Medium Duty Surface Mount GJ450 Series 10 Series 1540
4. Medium Duty Concealed Mount GJ410 2 Series 1530
6 B. Unless otherwise specified, furnish GJ900 series overhead stop for hollow metal or 1-3/4” solid core doors
7 equipped with regular arm surface type closers that swing more than 140 degrees before striking a wall, for
8 hollow metal or 1-3/4” solid core doors that open against equipment, casework, sidelights, or other objects
9 that would make wall bumpers inappropriate, and as specified in hardware groups.
10 C. Furnish sex bolt attachments for wood and mineral core doors unless doors are supplied with proper
11 reinforcing blocks.
12 D. Provide special stop only (“SE” suffix) overhead stops when used in conjunction with electronic hold open
13 closers.
14 E. Do not provide holder function for labeled doors.
15 2.14 WALL STOPS AND HOLDERS
Ives Hager Burns

1. Wrought Convex Wall Bumper WS406CVX 232W 570
2. Wrought Concave Wall Bumper WS406CCV 236W 575
3. Extended Wall Stop WS11/WS11X 255W 530
4. Extended Wall Stop WS33/WS33X **** ****
5. Automatic Wall Holder WS40 326W 533
6. Hinge Pin Stop 70 **** ****
17 B. Furnish a stop or holder for all doors. Furnish floor stops or hinge pin stops only where specifically
18 specified.
19 C. Where wall stops are not applicable, furnish overhead stops.
20 D. Do not provide holder function for labeled doors.
21 2.15 MAGNETIC HOLD OPENS
LCN ABH Edwards

1. Wall Holder SEM 7800 2000 1500
23 B. Magnetic hold opens shall be independently certified by ANSI for compliance with ANSI A156.15, Grade 1
24 (2006).
25 C. Magnetic holder's housing and armature shall be constructed of a die cast zinc material.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 D. Provide types as listed in groups.
2 E. Where wall conditions do not permit the armature to reach the magnet, provide extensions.
3 F. Provide proper voltage and power consumption as required by Division 16.
4 G. Coordinate electrical requirements and mounting locations with other trades.
5 2.16 WEATHERSTRIP, GASKETING
Zero Pemko NGP Reese

1. Weatherstrip 429 2891_PK 700NA 755
2. Adhesive Gasket 188 S88 5050 797
3. Mullion Seal/Silencer 8780 5110 5100N
4. Meeting Edge Seals 8193 18041 9605 959
5. Adhesive Edge Seal **** S77 5060 ****
6. Automatic Door Bottom (Surface Mtd.) 321 4131 222 320
7. Automatic Door Bottom (HD Concealed) 360 434_RL 423N 430
(When Sealing Against A Solid Surface)
8. Automatic Door Bottom (HD Concealed) 360 434_NBL 683 943
(When Sealing Against Carpet)
9. Automatic Door Bottom 355 420APKL 320N 372A
10. Sweeps 8192 18061_NB B606 964
11. Sweep w/ drip 8198 345_N C627 354
12. Drip Cap 142 346 16 R201
7 B. Weatherstrip and gasketing shall be independently certified by ANSI for compliance with ANSI A156.22
8 (2005).
9 C. Where specified in the hardware groups, furnish the above products unless otherwise detailed in groups.
10 D. Provide weatherstripping all exterior doors and where specified.
11 E. Provide intumescent and other required edge sealing systems as required by individual fire door listings to
12 comply with positive pressure standards UL 10C.
13 F. Provide Zero 188 smoke gaskets at all fire rated doors and smoke and draft control assemblies.
14 G. Provide gasketing for all meeting edges on pairs of fire doors. Gasketing shall be compatible with astragal
15 design provided by door supplier as required for specific fire door listings.
16 2.17 THRESHOLDS
Zero Pemko NGP Reese

1. Saddle Thresholds 8655 171 425 S205
2. Half Saddle Thresholds 1674 227 324 S239
3. Interlocking Threshold 74A 114 442-5 T550
18 B. Thresholds shall be independently certified by ANSI for compliance with ANSI A156.21 (2001).
19 C. Hardware supplier shall verify all finish floor conditions and coordinate proper threshold as required to
20 insure a smooth transition between threshold and interior floor finish.
21 D. Threshold Types:

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 1. Unless otherwise specified, provide saddle threshold similar to Zero 8655 for all exterior openings with
2 an interior floor finish less than or equal to 1/4" in height.
3 2. Unless otherwise specified, provide half saddle threshold similar to Zero 1674 for all exterior openings
4 with an interior floor finish greater than 1/4" in height. Threshold height shall match thickness of interior
5 floor finish.
6 2.18 ELECTRIC STRIKES
Von Duprin Folger Adams
1. Type 1 6000 Series 300 Series
8 B. Provide electric strikes designed for use with the type of locks shown at each opening where specified.
9 C. Electric strikes shall be UL listed as Burglary-Resistant Electric Door Strikes and where required shall be
10 UL listed as Electric Strike for Fire Doors.
11 D. Provide transformers and rectifiers for each strike as required. Verify voltage with electrical contractor.
12 2.19 POWER SUPPLIES
13 A. Provide quantities and types as specified in hardware sets. Shared power supplies will not be accepted
14 without prior approval from the owner.
15 B. All power supplies shall have the following features:

16 1. 12/24 VDC Output, field selectable.
17 2. Class 2 Rated power limited output.
18 3. Universal 120-240 VAC input.
19 4. Low voltage DC, regulated and filtered.
20 5. Polarized connector for distribution boards.
21 6. Fused primary input.
22 7. AC input and DC output monitoring circuit w/LED indicators.
23 8. Cover mounted AC Input indication.
24 9. Tested and certified to meet UL294.
25 10. NEMA 1 enclosure.
26 11. Hinged cover w/lock down screws.
27 12. High voltage protective cover.
28 C. All power supplies shall incorporate fused distribution boards.
29 D. All electro-mechanical systems requiring fail safe circuits shall be capable of interfacing with the fire alarm
30 system to cut power to appropriate system components. Unless already provided in another system
31 component, all power supplies utilized in fail safe circuits shall include an integral relay which when
32 connected to the N/C fire alarm contact will cut power to all openings connected to the individual power
33 supply. Power supply, unless otherwise specified, will automatically reset itself when fire alarm relay returns
34 to normal state following a fire alarm.
35 2.20 DOOR POSITION SWITCHES
Schlage Electronics Sentrol Sargent
1. Concealed (wood & hollow metal doors) 679 Series 1076W 3287

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
2. Concealed (aluminum doors) 7764 ***** ****
1 2.21 FINISHES AND BASE MATERIALS
2 A. All hollow metal doors and aluminum doors shall be provided with satin chrome hardware with the
3 exception of the front metal door areas at Doty, MLK, and Wilson which shall be provided with bronze
4 hardware. All wood doors shall be provided with bronze hardware.
5 B. Unless otherwise indicated in the hardware groups or herein, hardware finishes shall be applied over base
6 metals as specified in the following finish schedule:
SATIN CHROME SATIN BRASS

BHMA FINISH AND BASE BHMA FINISH AND BASE
HARDWARE ITEM MATERIAL MATERIAL
1. Butt Hinges: Exterior, or Non- 630 (US32D - Satin Stainless Steel) 606 (US4 - Satin Brass)
Ferrous
2. Butt Hinges: Interior 652 (US26D - Satin Chromium) 633 (US4 - Satin Brass)
3. Continuous Hinges 628 (US28 – Anodized Clear 688 (US4 Gold Anodized)
Aluminum)
4. Flush Bolts 626 (US26D - Satin Chromium) 606 (US4 - Satin Brass)
5. Exit Devices and Exit Device Trim 626 (US26D - Satin Chromium) 606 (US4 - Satin Brass)
6. Locks and Latches 626 (US26D - Satin Chromium) 606 (US4 - Satin Brass)
7. Pulls and Push 630 (US32D - Satin Stainless Steel) 606 (US4 - Satin Brass)
Plates/Bars
8. Coordinators 600 (Prime painted or mill alum.) 600 (Prime painted)
9. Closers 689 (Powder Coat Aluminum) 696 (Powder Coat Brass)
10. Protective Plates 630 (US32D - Satin Stainless Steel) 606 (US4 - Satin Brass)
11. Overhead Stops 630 (US32D - Satin Stainless Steel) 606 (US4 - Satin Brass)
12. Wall Stops and Holders 630 (US32D - Satin Stainless Steel) 606 (US4 - Satin Brass)
13. Thresholds 628 (Mill Aluminum) 628 (Mill Aluminum)
14. Weather-strip, Sweeps Drip Caps Aluminum Anodized Gold Anodized
(wood and hollow metal doors)
15. Weather-strip, Sweeps Drip Caps Match finish of aluminum doors. Match finish of aluminum doors.
(aluminum doors)
16. Magnetic Holders Sprayed Aluminum Sprayed Aluminum
17. Magnetic Locks 628 (US28) 606 (US4 - Satin Brass)
18. Miscellaneous 626 (US26D - Satin Chromium) 606 (US4 - Satin Brass)
7
8
9 2.22 KEYING
10 A. Provide all cylinders in keyways as required to accommodate owners existing key system.
11 B. All locks under this section shall be keyed as directed by the owner to an existing Master Key System.
12 C. Furnish a total of 2 keys per cylinder. Actual cut keys to be determined by owner.
13 D. Master keys, control keys, and change keys shall be delivered by registered mail to the owner.
14 Construction keys shall be delivered to the contractor.
15 2.23 KEY CABINETS
Lund Key Control Telkee
1. 1200-1205 AA M228-2480 RWC-AWC

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 B. Furnish 1 each model 1200 or 1205 AA key cabinet with a capacity 1.5 times the number of key sets.
2 C. Provide one key cabinet with at least one hook for each key set, plus additional hooks for 50% expansion.
3 D. Furnish key cabinet complete with cam lock, permanent key tags, and change key cards.
4 E. Hardware supplier shall prepare all key change index records, tag all keys and place permanent file keys in
5 cabinet.
7 3.1 EXAMINATION
8 A. Prior to installation of hardware, installer shall examine door frame installation to insure frames have been
9 set square and plumb. Installer shall examine doors, door frames, and adjacent wall, floor, and ceiling for
10 conditions, which would adversely affect proper operation and function of door assemblies. Do not proceed
11 with hardware installation until such deficiencies have been corrected.
12 3.2 INSTALLATION
13 A. Before hardware installation, general contractor/construction manager shall coordinate a hardware

14 installation seminar with a 1 week notice to all parties involved. The seminar is to be conducted on the
15 installation of hardware, specifically of locksets, closers, exit devices, continuous hinges and overhead
16 stops. Manufacturer's representative of the above products to present seminar. Seminar to be held at the
17 job site and attended by installers of hardware (including low voltage hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal
18 and wood doors. Training to include use of installation manuals, hardware schedule, templates and
19 physical products samples.
20 B. Install all hardware in accordance with the approved hardware schedule and manufacturers instructions for
21 installation and adjustment.
22 C. Set units level, plumb and true to the line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as
23 necessary for proper installation and operation.
24 D. Drill and countersink units which are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and
25 anchors in accord with industry standards.
26 E. Drill appropriate size pilot holes for all hardware attached to wood doors and frames.
27 F. Shim doors as required to maintain proper operating clearance between door and frame.
28 G. Unless otherwise specified, locate all hardware in accordance with the recommended locations for builders
29 hardware for standard doors and frames as published by the Door and Hardware Institute.
30 H. Use only fasteners supplied by or approved by the manufacturer for each respective item of hardware.
31 I. Mortise and cut to close tolerance and conceal evidence of cutting in the finished work.
32 J. Conceal push and pull bar fasteners where possible. Do not install through bolts through push plates.
33 K. Install hardware on UL labeled openings in accordance with manufacturer's requirements to maintain the
34 label.
35 L. Apply self-adhesive gasketing on frame stop at head & latch side and on rabbet of frame at hinge side.
36 M. Install hardware in accordance with supplemental "S" label instructions on all fire rated openings.
37 N. Install wall stops to contact lever handles or pulls. Do not mount wall stops on casework, or equipment.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 O. Where necessary, adjust doors and hardware as required to eliminate binding between strike and latchbolt.
2 Doors should not rattle.
3 P. Overhead stops used in conjunction with electrified hold open closers shall be templated and installed to
4 coincide with engagement of closer hold open position.
5 Q. Install door closers on corridor side of lobby doors, room side of corridor doors, and stair side of stairways.
6 R. Adjust spring power of door closers to the minimum force required to insure exterior and fire rated doors will
7 consistently close and latch doors under existing conditions. Adjust all other door closers to insure opening
8 force does not to exceed 5 lbs.
9 S. Adjust "sweep", "latch", & "back check" valves on all door closers to properly control door throughout the
10 opening and closing cycle. Adjust total closing speed as required to comply with all applicable state and
11 local building codes.
12 T. Install "hardware compatible" (bar stock) type weatherstripping continuously for an uninterrupted
13 seal. Adjust templating for parallel arm door closers, exit devices, etc., as required to accommodate
14 weatherstripping.
15 U. Unless otherwise specified or detailed, install thresholds with the bevel in vertical alignment with the outside
16 door face. Notch and closely fit thresholds to frame profile. Set thresholds in full bed of sealant.
17 V. Compress sweep during installation as recommended by sweep manufacturer to facilitate a water resistant
18 seal.
19 W. Deliver to the owner 1 complete set of installation and adjustment instructions, and tools as furnished with
20 the hardware.
22 A. After installation has been completed, the hardware supplier and manufacturers representative for locksets,
23 door closers, exit devices, and overhead stops shall check the project and verify compliance with
24 installation instructions, adjustment of all hardware items, and proper application according to the approved
25 hardware schedule. Hardware supplier shall submit a list of all hardware that has not been installed
26 correctly.
27 B. After installation has been completed, the hardware supplier and manufacturers representative shall meet
28 with the owner to explain the functions, uses, adjustment, and maintenance of each item of hardware.
29 Hardware supplier shall provide the owner with a copy of all wiring diagrams. Wiring diagrams shall be
30 opening specific and include both a riser diagram and point to point diagram showing all wiring
31 terminations.
32 3.4 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
33 A. At final completion, and when H.V.A.C. equipment is in operation, installer shall make final adjustments to
34 and verify proper operation of all door closers and other items of hardware. . Lubricate moving parts with
35 type lubrication recommended by the manufacturer.
36 B. All hardware shall be left clean and in good operation. Hardware found to be disfigured, defective, or
37 inoperative shall be repaired or replaced.
38 3.5 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
39 A. The following schedule of hardware groups are intended to describe opening function. The hardware
40 supplier is cautioned to refer to the preamble of this specification for a complete description of all materials
41 and services to be furnished under this section.
42

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
2 HW SET: 01
3
1 EA CONT. HINGE 112HD IVE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070 SCH
4
5 FUNCTION: L9070 (F05) Classroom Lock
6 Latchbolt retracted by lever from either side unless outside is locked by key. Unlocked from outside by key. Inside
7 lever always free for immediate exit. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt when door is closed.
8
9
10
11 HW SET: 01A
12
1 EA PASSAGE SET L9010 SCH
13
14 FUNCTION: L9010 (F01) Passage Latch
15 Latchbolt retracted by lever from either side at all times.
16
17
18
19 HW SET: 01B
20
21
24
25
26
27 HW SET: 06
28
1 EA INSTITUTION LOCK L9082 SCH
29
30 FUNCTION: L9082 Institution Lock
31 Latchbolt retracted by key from either side. Lever on both sides always inoperative. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt
32 when door is closed.
33
34 Hardware supplier shall field verify existing door and frame will accommodate specified hardware.
35
36
37
38 HW SET: 07

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080 SCH
2
3 FUNCTION: L9080 (F07) Storeroom Lock
4 Latchbolt retracted by key outside or by lever inside. Outside lever always inoperative. Auxiliary latch deadlocks
5 latchbolt when door is closed.
6
7
8
9 HW SET: 09
10
2 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT FB458 IVE
1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 IVE
1 EA OVERLAP ASTRAGAL (BY DOOR SUPPLIER)
11
15
16
17
18 HW SET: 10
19
1 EA SMOKE SEAL 188S (AT RATED OR SMOKE & DRAFT ZER
CONTROL DRS ONLY)
20
23
24
25
26 HW SET: 11A
27
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 SCUSH LCN
CONTROL DRS ONLY)
28
31
32

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
2 HW SET: 11B
3
4
5 Balance of hardware by acoustical assembly provider.
6
7
8
9 HW SET: 11C
10
CONTROL DRS ONLY)
11
13
14
15
16 HW SET: 13
17
CONTROL DRS ONLY)
18
22
23
24
25 HW SET: 17
26
CONTROL DRS ONLY)
27

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1
3
4
5
6 HW SET: 18
7
CONTROL DRS ONLY)
8
12
14
15
16
17 HW SET: 19
18
CONTROL DRS ONLY)
19
23
24
25
26 HW SET: 20
27
CONTROL DRS ONLY)
28
32
33
34

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 HW SET: 20A
2
CONTROL DRS ONLY)
1 EA DOOR CONTACT 679 SERIES SCE
3
7
8
9
10 HW SET: 21A
11
1 EA SMOKE SEALS 188S (AT RATED OR SMOKE & DRAFT ZER
CONTROL DRS ONLY)
12
16
18
19
20
21 HW SET: 23
22
1 EA PRIVACY W/DB & IND L9496 L583-363 SCH
1 EA SEALS 188S ZER
23
24 FUNCTION: L9496 Privacy With "OCCUPIED" Indicator
25 Lever retracts latchbolt from either side. Deadbolt thrown or retracted by key outside (retraction by key required in the
26 event of an emergency) or inside thumbturn. Throwing deadbolt locks outside lever and displays "OCCUPIED" plate.
27 Rotating inside lever simultaneously retracts both deadbolt and latchbolt and unlocks outside lever.
28
29
30
31 HW SET: 24
32

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017

1 EA SEALS 188S ZER
1
6
8
9
10
11 HW SET: 25A
12
1 EA SEALS 188S ZER
13
18
19
20
21 HW SET: 26B
22
2 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV IVE
23
25
26
27
28 HW SET: 28
29
1 SET AUTO FLUSH BOLT FB31P / FB41P IVE
1 EA COORDINATOR COR X FL IVE
CONTROL DRS ONLY)

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 EA MEETING EDGE SEALS 188S (AT RATED OR SMOKE & DRAFT ZER
CONTROL DRS ONLY)
1
5
6
7
8 HW SET: 28B
9
CORE
10
12
13
14
15 HW SET: 29
16
CONTROL DRS ONLY)
CONTROL DRS ONLY)
17
21
22
23
24 HW SET: 30
25
1 EA CONT. HINGE 112HD EPT IVE
1 EA EU MORTISE LOCK L9092EU SCH
CONTROL DRS ONLY)

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
CONTROL DRS ONLY)
1 EA POWER SUPPLY (BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR)
SUPPLIER)
1
2 FUNCTION: L9092EU Electrically Unlocked (Fail Secure)
3 Outside lever unlocked by 24V AC or DC. Latchbolt retracted by key outside or lever inside. Auxiliary latch deadlocks
4 latchbolt when door is closed. Inside lever always free for immediate exit. Valid credential unlocks door.
5
6
7
8 HW SET: 31B
9
2 EA OH STOP & HOLDER 90H GLY
2 EA ARMOR PLATE 8400 34" X 2" LDW B4E CS IVE
1 EA SEALS 188S ZER
1 EA MEETING EDGE SEALS 188S ZER
2 EA DOOR SWEEP 8192 ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD PROFILE AS REQUIRED ZER
10
14
15
16
17 HW SET: 32A
18
(Less Outside trim)
1 SET WEATHERSTRIPPING 429 ZER
1 EA MEETING EDGE SEALS 188S ZER
1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A ZER
19
20 FUNCTION: L9080 (Less Outside Trim) Exit Latch
21 Latchbolt retracted by lever inside. No outside trim. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt when door is closed.
22
23
24

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 HW SET: 33
2
CONTROL DRS ONLY)
SUPPLIER)
3
7
8
9
10 HW SET: 34
11
CONTROL DRS ONLY)
SUPPLIER)
12
16
17
18
19 HW SET: 34A
20
21
23
24
25
26 HW SET: 35

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1
CONTROL DRS ONLY)
SUPPLIER)
2
6
7
8
9 HW SET: 36
10
1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6211 FSE VON
CONTROL DRS ONLY)
SUPPLIER)
11
12 FUNCTION: L9080 (F07) Storeroom Lock x Electric Strike
14 latchbolt when door is closed. A valid credential releases electric strike.
15
17
18
19
20 HW SET: 38
21
CONTROL DRS ONLY)

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017

SUPPLIER)
1
4 latchbolt when door is closed. A valid credential releases electric strike.
5
7
8
9
10 HW SET: 38A
11
1 EA SURF. AUTO OPERATOR 4642 LCN
(Touchless)
CONTROL DRS ONLY)
SUPPLIER)
12
15 latchbolt when door is closed. A valid credential releases electric strike. This door has a power operator. Interior
16 actuator always active to unlock and open the door. A valid credential will unlock the door and make the exterior
17 actuator active.
18
20
21
22
23 HW SET: 39A
24
(Touchless)
CONTROL DRS ONLY)
SUPPLIER)

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1
4 latchbolt when door is closed. This door has a power operator. Interior actuator always active to unlock and open the
5 door. A valid credential will unlock the door and make the exterior actuator active. Door may be held open using
6 switch on power operator.
7
9
10
11
12 HW SET: 40
13
1 EA ARMOR PLATE 8400 34" X 2" LDW B4E CS IVE
SUPPLIER)
14
18
19
20
21 HW SET: 41
22
1 EA ELEC PANIC HARDWARE RX-LD-99-EO VON
23
24 FUNCTION: (EO) Latchbolt retracted inside by exit device push pad. No exterior trim.
25
26
27
28 HW SET: 41A
29
1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 99-L-BE VON

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017

CORE
CONTROL DRS ONLY)
1
2 FUNCTION: (L-BE) Latchbolt retracted inside by exit device push pad, exterior by lever. Lever does not lock.
3
5
6
7
8 HW SET: 45
9
1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 33A-L VON
CORE
CONTROL DRS ONLY)
SUPPLIER)
10
11 FUNCTION: (L) Latchbolt retracted inside by exit device push pad and outside by lever. Key in exterior cylinder locks
12 or unlocks lever. A valid credential releases electric strike.
13
15
16
17
18 HW SET: 48A
19
1 EA ELEC FIRE EXIT RX-33A-EO-F VON
HARDWARE
1 EA ELEC FIRE EXIT RX-QEL+-33A-NL-OP-F-388 VON
HARDWARE
2 EA TRIM 550-DT VON
CORE
(Touchless)
(Touchless)

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017

CONTROL DRS ONLY)
(NEOPRENE)
SUPPLIER)
1
2 FUNCTION: (NL - less dogging) Latchbolt retracted inside by exit device push pad and outside by key in cylinder.
3 Door locks when key is removed and door is closed. This door has a power operator. Interior actuator always active
4 to unlock and open the door. A valid credential will unlock the active door and make the exterior actuator active. Loss
5 of power or activation of fire alarm will disable power operator and insure fire door remains latched.
6
7
8
9 HW SET: 48B
10
1 EA ELEC PANIC HARDWARE RX-CD-33A-EO-299 VON
1 EA ELEC PANIC HARDWARE RX-QEL+-33A-NL-OP-388-299 VON
CORE
(Touchless)
1 EA ACTUATOR, BOLLARD 8310-836T LCN
MOUNT (Locate at Exterior - 36" Tall)
CONTROL DRS ONLY)
(NEOPRENE)
SET WEATHERSTRIPPING 429 ZER
1 EA MEETING EDGE SEALS 8193 ZER
(BRUSH)
2 EA DOOR SWEEP (BRUSH) 8192 ZER
SUPPLIER)
11
13 key is removed and door is closed. Access from exterior when exit device push pad is dogged down. This door has
14 a power operator. Interior actuator always active to unlock and open the door. A valid credential will unlock the active
15 door and make the exterior actuator active. Loss of power or activation of fire alarm will disable power operator and
16 insure fire door remains latched.
17
18
19

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 HW SET: 49A
2
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4011 H LCN
3
4 FUNCTION: (F05) Classroom Lock
7
8 Provide complete latching assembly including lock body, strike, scalp, spindle, levers, roses, cylinder, cylinder cam,
9 blocking ring, and all required fasteners.
10
11 Hardware supplier shall coordinate with related trades to insure door and frame construction will accommodate
12 specified hardware.
13
14
15
16 HW SET: 49B
17
(Where Applicable)
(Where Applicable)
18
19 FUNCTION: (F01) Passage Latch
21
24
27
28
29
30 HW SET: 49C
31
32
33 FUNCTION: (F05) Classroom Lock
36
39
42
43

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
2 HW SET: 49D
3
CORE
(Touchless)
1 EA KEY SWITCH 653-1414 L2 SCE
4
8 This door has a power operator. Interior actuator always active to release electric strike and power open the door. A
9 valid credential will unlock the door and make the exterior actuator active. Wall mounted key switch permits electric
10 strike to be unlocked for extended periods of time.
11
14
17
18
19
20 HW SET: 50
21
(Where Applicable)
(Where Applicable)
EA POWER SUPPLY (BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR)
22
23 FUNCTION: Electrically Unlocked (Fail Secure)
26
29
32
33
34
35 HW SET: 50A

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1
(Where Wall Stop Or Stop Arm Closer Is Not
Applicable)
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4011 / 4111 EDA / 4111 SCUSH LCN
(Where Applicable)
2
6
9
12
13
14
15 HW SET: 50B
16
(Where Wall Stop Or Stop Arm Closer Is Not
Applicable)
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4011 / 4111 EDA / 4111 SCUSH LCN
(Where Applicable)
17
21
24
27
28
29
30 HW SET: 51
31
1 EA PANIC HARDWARE CD-33A-NL-OP VON

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017

CORE
1
3 key is removed and door is closed. Access from exterior when exit device push pad is dogged down.
4
5
6
7 HW SET: 53
8
1 EA ELEC PANIC HARDWARE RX-QEL-33A-NL-OP VON
CORE
(Touchless)
SUPPLIER)
9
13
14
15
16 HW SET: 53A
17
1 EA ELEC PANIC HARDWARE RX-LD-33A-EO VON
CORE
18
19 FUNCTION: (EO) Latchbolt retracted inside by exit device push pad. No exterior trim.
20
21
22
23 HW SET: 54A
24
1 EA ELEC FIRE EXIT RX-QEL-3347A-NL-OP-F VON
HARDWARE

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017

CORE
(Touchless)
EA WEATHERSTRIP BY DR/FR SUPPLIER
1 EA MEETING EDGE SEALS 8193 ZER
(BRUSH)
SUPPLIER)
1
5
6 Hardware supplier shall coordinate with door and frame supplier to insure fixed side panel is compatible with
8
9
10
11 HW SET: 56
12
CORE
SUPPLIER)
13
17
18
19
20 HW SET: 57

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1
CORE
SUPPLIER)
2
6
7
8
9 HW SET: 58A
10
1 EA ELEC PANIC HARDWARE RX-QEL-33A-EO VON
CORE
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 SHCUSH LCN
SUPPLIER)
11
13 key is removed and door is closed. A valid credential retracts latch bolt and push pad on both doors.
14
15
16
17 HW SET: 60
18
1 EA ELEC PANIC HARDWARE RX-CD-3347A-EO VON
1 EA ELEC PANIC HARDWARE RX-CD-3347A-NL-OP VON
CORE

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017

1
3 key is removed and door is closed. Access from exterior when exit device push pad is dogged down.
4
5
6
7 HW SET: 61B
8
1 EA ELEC PANIC HARDWARE RX-QEL-3347A-EO VON
CORE
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 SHCUSH LCN
SUPPLIER)
9
11 key is removed and door is closed. A valid credential will unlock both doors.
12
13
14
15 HW SET: 62A
16
2 EA ELEC FIRE EXIT RX-QEL+-3347A-EO-F VON
HARDWARE
CORE
(Shared with doors F8, F9, and F10)
SUPPLIER)
17
18 FUNCTION: (DT) Latchbolt retracted inside by exit device push pad. Wall mounted key switch will dog exit device
19 push pad down. Access from exterior when exit device push pad is dogged down. Loss of power or activation of fire
20 alarm will release push pad, and insure fire door is latched.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1
2
3
4 HW SET: 62B
5
1 EA ELEC FIRE EXIT RX-QEL+-3347A-EO-F VON
HARDWARE
1 EA ELEC FIRE EXIT RX-QEL-3347A-NL-OP-F VON
HARDWARE
CORE
(Touchless)
(Shared with doors F8, F9, and F10)
SUPPLIER)
6
7 FUNCTION: (DT) Latchbolt retracted inside by exit device push pad. Wall mounted key switch will dog exit device
8 push pad down. Access from exterior when exit device push pad is dogged down. This door has a power operator.
9 Interior actuator always active to unlock and open the door. A valid credential will unlock the door and make the
10 exterior actuator active. Loss of power or activation of fire alarm will release push pad, and insure fire door is latched.
11
12
13
14 HW SET: 65
15
2 EA FLOOR STOP/HOLDER FS40 SERIES IVE
16
17 FUNCTION: Push/Pull
18 Salvage and reuse existing hardware.
19 Hardware supplier shall coordinate door stop height with existing conditions.
20 Remove existing kick down door holders for accessibility compliance.
21 Existing hardware shall be modified to prevent latching or locking and to insure egress at all times by pushing on face
22 of door.
23
24
25
26 HW SET: 66
27

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017

1 EA DUMMY PUSH BAR 330 VON
1
2 FUNCTION: Push/Pull.
3
4
5
6 HW SET: 66A
7
1 EA DUMMY PUSH BAR 330 VON
(Touchless)
8
9 FUNCTION: Push/Pull.
10 This door has a power operator. Both actuators always active to open the door.
11
12
13
14 HW SET: 67
15
(less outside trim)
1 EA GATE CLOSER 359 RIX
16
17 FUNCTION: L9080 (less outside trim) Storeroom Lock x Electric Strike
18 Latchbolt retracted by lever inside. No outside trim. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt when door is closed. A valid
19 credential releases electric strike.
20
21 Hardware supplier shall field verify gate door and frame will accommodate specified hardware.
22
23
24
25 HW SET: 68
26
27
28 All hardware by door supplier.
29
30
31
32 HW SET: 69

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1
1 EA CLASSROOM DEAD LOCK L463 XB11-720 SCH
1 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED SAR
1 EA PUSH PLATE 8200 6" X 16" IVE
1 EA PULL PLATE 8303 10" 4" X 16" IVE
2
3 FUNCTION: L463 E06091 Classroom Lock
4 Deadbolt thrown or retracted by key from outside. Inside thumbturn cylinder retracts deadbolt but cannot project it.
5
6
7
8 HW SET: 69A
9
10
12 Salvage and reuse existing hardware.
13 Remove existing kick down door holders for accessibility compliance.
14 Existing hardware shall be modified to prevent latching or locking and to insure egress at all times by pushing on face
15 of door.
16
17
18
19 HW SET: 69B
20
1 EA CLASSROOM DEAD LOCK L463 XB11-720 SCH
1 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED SAR
1 EA PULL PLATE 8303 10" 4" X 16" IVE
21
22 FUNCTION: L463 E06091 Classroom Lock
23 Deadbolt thrown or retracted by key from outside. Inside thumbturn cylinder retracts deadbolt but cannot project it.
24
26
27
28
29 HW SET: 70
30
1 EA CORRIDOR LOCK L9456 L583-363 SCH

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1
2 FUNCTION: L9456 (F13) Corridor Lock
3 Note: Door must be handed to place cylinder on the inside of storage room 221. Latchbolt retracted by lever from
4 either side. Deadbolt thrown or retracted by key inside or outside thumbturn. Throwing deadbolt locks inside lever.
5 Turning outside lever simultaneously retracts deadbolt and latchbolt and unlocks inside lever.
6
11
12
13
14 HW SET: 70A
15
16
19 either side. Deadbolt thrown or retracted by key inside or outside thumbturn. Throwing deadbolt locks inside lever.
21
22
23
24 HW SET: 70B
25
1 EA SURFACE DOOR BOTTOM 111 ZER
1 EA HD THRESHOLD 1/2" X 3" 653 ZER
26
29 either side. Deadbolt thrown or retracted by key inside or outside thumb turn. Throwing deadbolt locks inside lever.
31
32 Hardware supplier shall coordinate threshold height and profile with floor finishes and sill seal to insure a smooth
33 transition between floor finishes.
34
35
36
37 HW SET: 71
38

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA LCN
1
3
4
5
6 HW SET: 72
7
1 EA TWO PT CLASSRM LOCK LM9270 SCH
8
9 FUNCTION: LM9270 Classroom Lock
12
13
14
15 HW SET: 74A-F
16
CORE
17
18 Balance of hardware by door supplier. See SECTION 08 44 10 FIRE RATED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALL.
19 Hardware supplier shall coordinate with related trades to determine cylinder type and quantity will accommodate
20 hardware.
21
22
23
24 HW SET: 75
25
1 EA FIRE EXIT DEVICE 99L-F VON
CORE
CONTROL DRS ONLY)
26
27 FUNCTION: (L) Latchbolt retracted inside by exit device push pad and outside by lever. Key in exterior cylinder locks
28 or unlocks lever.
29
30
31
32
33

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 08 80 00
2 GLAZING
5 1.2 SUMMARY
6 1.3 COORDINATION
10 1.7 WARRANTY
14 2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
15 2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS
16 2.5 LAMINATED GLASS
17 2.6 INSULATING GLASS
18 2.7 GLAZING SEALANTS
19 2.8 GLAZING TAPES
20 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
22 3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL
23 3.2 TAPE GLAZING
24 3.3 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
25 3.4 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
27 3.6 MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE
28 3.7 LAMINATED GLASS SCHEDULE
29 3.8 INSULATING GLASS SCHEDULE
30 3.9 INSULATING-LAMINATED-GLASS SCHEDULE
31 PART 1 - GENERAL

35 1.2 SUMMARY
37 1. Glass for windows, doors, interior borrowed lites, storefront framing, glazed curtain walls, skylights.
38 2. Glazing sealants and accessories.
39 1.3 COORDINATION
40 A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face
41 clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

47 materials.
48 C. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square.
49 D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same
50 designations indicated on Drawings.
51 E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design
52 criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
53 preparation.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 088000 - 1 GLAZING
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 A. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.

4 A. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021
5 to conduct the testing indicated.

7 A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glass product, tape sealant, gasket, glazing
8 accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants.
9 1. Testing is not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant products
10 and glazing materials matching those submitted.
11 1.8 WARRANTY
12 A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass
13 units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects
14 developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated
15 glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications
16 of deterioration in coating.
18 B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units
19 that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects
20 developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated
21 glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination
22 materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced
23 laminated-glass standard.
25 C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units
26 that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of
27 hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning
28 insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision
29 by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.
35 1. Guardian Industries Corp.; SunGuard.
36 2. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope™.
37 3. PPG Flat Glass; PPG Industries, Inc.
38 4. Viracon, Inc.

41 in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design glazing.
42 B. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions
43 indicated determined according to the International Building Code and ASTM E 1300.
44 1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings.
45 2. Design Snow Loads: 40 PSF.
46 3. Thickness of Patterned Glass: Base design of patterned glass on thickness at thinnest part of the
47 glass.
48 4. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within
49 individual glass lites.
50 C. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201,
51 Category II.
52

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as
2 indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:
3 1. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2
4 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F.
5 2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to
6 NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.
7 3. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

9 A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and
10 organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing
11 terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
12 1. GANA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "Glazing Manual."
13 2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and AAMA TIR A7, "Sloped
14 Glazing Guidelines."
15 3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped Glazing."
16 4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for
17 Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."
18 B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label
19 of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate
20 manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.
21 C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component
22 lite of units with appropriate certification label of IgCC.
23 D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with
24 performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated.
25 E. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat-strengthened float
26 glass, or fully tempered float glass. Where heat-strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heat-
27 strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide
28 fully tempered float glass.

30 A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.
31 B. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless
32 otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.
33 C. Heat-Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I, Condition A
34 (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.
35 D. Ceramic-Coated Vision Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition C, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as
36 indicated, Quality-Q3; and complying with Specification No. 95-1-31 in GANA's "Engineering Standards
37 Manual."

39 A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor,
40 or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation.
41 1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer to comply with interlayer manufacturer's
43 2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with
44 requirements.
45 3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.
46 2.6 INSULATING GLASS

47 A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a
48 dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190.
49 1. Sealing System: Dual seals.
50 2. Spacer: Thermally broken Aluminum with mill or clear anodic finish.
51

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 A. General:
3 1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass
4 products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service
5 and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
6 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing
7 sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.
9 4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
10 B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,
11 Class 100/50, Use NT or as recommended by glass manufacturer for glazing application.

13 A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape;
14 nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as
15 recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with
16 ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
17 1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.
18 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure.
19 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure.
20 B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both
21 surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
22 1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
23 2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of
24 liquid sealant.

26 A. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
27 B. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.
28 C. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to
29 maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
30 D. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).
31 E. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to
32 control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

35 A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing
36 materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing
37 publications.
38 B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project
39 site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other
40 imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance.
41 C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction
42 testing.
43 D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless
44 otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel
45 bead.
46 E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
47 F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.
48 G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing
49 channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced
50 glazing publications.
51

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3.2 TAPE GLAZING

2 A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or
3 protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
4 B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them
5 fit opening.
6 C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing
7 joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills.
8 D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in
9 tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
10 E. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.
11 F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting dense
12 compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket
13 applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
14 G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
15 3.3 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

16 A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with
17 allowance for stretch during installation.
18 B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints
19 miter cut and bonded together at corners.
20 C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly
21 against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in
22 place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of
23 openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass.
24 Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
25 D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly
26 against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying
27 pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without
28 developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
29 E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

31 A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and
32 glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel
33 and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in
34 position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.
35 B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant
36 to glass and channel surfaces.
37 C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.

39 A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
40 B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine
41 glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during
42 construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.
43 1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove
44 substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace
45 glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.
46 C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.
47 3.6 MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE

48 A. Glass Type GL-1; GL-2: Clear float glass, tempered where indicated on the drawings.
49 1. Minimum Thickness: Refer to Material Tag index.
50 2. Safety glazing required where indicated on the drawings.
51

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3.7 LAMINATED GLASS SCHEDULE

2 A. Glass Type Component of GL-5, or safety glass alternate to fully tempered safety glass: Clear laminated
3 glass with two plies of annealed float glass.
4 1. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 6 mm.
5 2. Interlayer Thickness: 0.060 inch.
6 3. Safety glazing required.
7 B. Glass Type GL-8: Tinted laminated glass with two plies of clear fully tempered float glass and tinted
8 interlayer.
9 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Saflex Vanceva Range of opaque color interlayer laminated glass products.
10 2. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 6 mm.
11 3. Interlayer Thickness: 0.060 inch.
12 4. Interlayer Color: Blue-green
13 5. Visible Light Transmittance: N.A..
14 6. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: N.A.
16 3.8 INSULATING GLASS SCHEDULE

17 A. Glass Type GL-3: Low-E-coated, clear insulating glass to new exterior windows and curtain wall.
18 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Oldcastle: Solarban
19 2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch.
20 3. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6 mm.
21 4. Outdoor Lite: 1/4 inch Heat-strengthened float glass.
22 5. Interspace Content: Argon.
23 6. Indoor Lite: 1/4 inch Annealed float glass.
24 7. Low-E Coatings: Pyrolytic on second, hard low-e on fourth surface.
25 8. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.19 btu/hr-sf-F maximum.
26 9. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.16 btu/hr-sf-F maximum.
27 10. Visible Light Transmittance: 60 percent minimum
28 11. Exterior reflectance: 12%.
29 12. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.26 maximum.
30 13. Safety glazing required where noted on the drawings.
31 B. Glass Type GL-4: Low-E-coated, clear insulating glass to Interior Accessory Windows.
32 1. Basis-of-Design Product: PPG: Solaban 70XL.
33 2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch.
34 3. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6 mm.
35 4. Outdoor Lite: Annealed float glass.
37 6. Indoor Lite: Annealed float glass.
38 7. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic on second surface.
41 10. Visible Light Transmittance: 64 percent minimum.
42 11. Exterior reflectance: 12%.
45

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3.9 INSULATING-LAMINATED-GLASS SCHEDULE

2 A. Glass Type GL-5: Clear insulating laminated glass to interior, acoustical partitions.
3 1. Basis-of-Design Product: PPG: Solarban 70XL Starphire.
4 2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1-1/16 inch.
5 3. Minimum Thickness of Outdoor Lite: 6 mm.
6 4. Outdoor Lite: Annealed float glass.
7 5. Interspace Content: Air.
8 6. Indoor Lite: Clear laminated glass with two plies of annealed float glass.
9 a. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 6 mm.
10 b. Interlayer Thickness: 0.060 inch.
11 7. Low-E Coating: none.
12 8. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: n.a.
13 9. Summer Daytime U-Factor: n.a.
15 11. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: n.a.
17 B. Glass Type GL-7: Low-E-coated, clear insulating laminated glass to skylight.
18 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Oldcastle: Solarban 60 Starphire.
19 2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1-3/16 inch.
20 3. Minimum Thickness of Outdoor Lite: 6 mm.
21 4. Outdoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass with warm grey 50% ceramic frit, Standard Line Pattern on
22 surface 1 or 2.
24 6. Indoor Lite: 9/16” clear PPG Starphire laminated glass with two plies of fully tempered float glass.
25 a. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 6 mm.
26 b. Interlayer Thickness: 0.090 inch.
27 7. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic on third surface.
33 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 08 81 13
2 DECORATIVE GLASS GLAZING
5 1.2 SUMMARY
13 3.1 PREPARATION
14 3.2 INSTALLATION
16 3.4 DECORATIVE GLASS SCHEDULE
17 PART 1 - GENERAL

21 1.2 SUMMARY
23 1. Glass with decorative film overlay.
25 1. Section 08 80 00 “Glazing” for glass substrate for decorative film.

28 B. Glass Samples: For each type of decorative glass, 12 inches square of decorative film on 1/4 inch clear
29 glass.
30 C. Decorative Glazing Schedule: List decorative glass types for each location. Use same designations indicated
31 on Drawings.

33 A. Product Certificates: For each type of decorative glass.


39 1. Typical window film WF-1 and WF-2 on conference room storefront system GLWS-2 glass panel.
40 Min. width one glass panel width of finally installed system panel.
41

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 088113 - 1 DECORATIVE GLASS GLAZING
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

3 A. Decorative Film Overlay: Translucent, dimensionally stable, cast PVC film, 2-mil-minimum thickness, with
4 pressure-sensitive, clear adhesive back for adhering to glass and releasable protective backing.
7 a. 3M.
8 b. Avery Dennison Graphics.
9 c. FDC Graphic Films, Inc.
10 2. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
12 3.1 PREPARATION
13 A. Clean glass.
14 3.2 INSTALLATION
15 A. Install film. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

17 A. Decorative Glass: Install glazing film.
18 3.4 DECORATIVE GLASS SCHEDULE

19 A. Decorative Glass Type GL-2: Glass with decorative film overlay WF-1.
20 1. Basis-of-Design Product: 3M Fasara Decorative Film: 10% VLT.
21 2. Glass Type: Clear float glass.
22 3. Tint Color: Opaque White.
23 4. Glass Thickness: 4.0 mm.
25 6. Use: Suitable for interior applications.
26 7. Patterns: As indicated on the drawings.
27 END OF SECTION

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 088113 - 2 DECORATIVE GLASS GLAZING
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 08 88 13
2 FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING
5 1.2 SUMMARY
6 1.3 COORDINATION
9 1.6 WARRANTY
13 2.3 FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED GLAZING
14 2.4 GLAZING ACCESSORIES
16 3.1 GLAZING
18 3.3 FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED GLAZING SCHEDULE
19 PART 1 - GENERAL

23 1.2 SUMMARY
25 1. Fire-resistance-rated glazing.
26 1.3 COORDINATION
27 A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face
28 clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

34 materials.
35 C. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product; 12 inches square.
36 D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same
37 designations indicated on Drawings.

39 A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
43 1. Typical window film WF-1 and WF-2 on conference room storefront system GLWS-2 glass panel.
44 Min. width one glass panel width of finally installed system panel.
45

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 088813 - 1 FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 1.6 WARRANTY
2 A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units
3 that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects
9 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

11 A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and
12 organization below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing
13 terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
15 B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark glazing with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification
16 Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate
17 manufacturer's name, type of glass, glass thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

21 2.3 FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED GLAZING

22 A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Glazing: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
23 jurisdiction, for fire-resistance ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 119 or UL 263.
24 B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-resistance-rated glazing with certification
25 label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's
26 name, test standard, that the glazing is approved for use in walls, and the fire-resistance rating in minutes.
27 C. 120 minute fire resisting Laminated Glass with Intumescent Interlayers: Laminated glass made from multiple
28 plies of uncoated, ultraclear float glass; with intumescent interlayers; and complying with 16 CFR 1201,
29 Category II.
32 a. Pilkington North America: PyroStop.
33 b. SAFTI FIRST Fire Rated Glazing Solutions: SuperLite III-XL.
34 c. Technical Glass Products: FireLite PLUS.
35 d. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain: SGG Contraflam.
36 2.4 GLAZING ACCESSORIES

37 A. Provide glazing gaskets, glazing sealants, glazing tapes, setting blocks, spacers, edge blocks, and other
38 glazing accessories that are compatible with glazing products and each other and are approved by testing
39 agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which products are used for applications
40 and fire-protection ratings indicated.
41 B. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with
42 ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written
43 instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated.
46

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
2 3.1 GLAZING
3 A. Use methods approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products.
4 B. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing
5 materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing
6 publications.
7 C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project
8 site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections
9 that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.
10 D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction
11 testing.
12 E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications unless
13 otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel
14 bead.
15 F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
16 G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.
17 H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing
18 channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced
19 glazing publications.

21 A. Immediately after installation, remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
22 B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine
23 glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during
24 construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.
25 1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove
26 substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
27 C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.
28 3.3 FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED GLAZING SCHEDULE

29 A. Glass Type (FRGL-1): 120-minute fire-resistance-rated glazing with 450 deg F temperature-rise limitation;
30 laminated glass with intumescent interlayers
31 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 08 88 53
2 SECURITY GLAZING
5 1.2 SUMMARY
6 1.3 COORDINATION
10 1.7 WARRANTY
17 2.6 FABRICATION OF SECURITY GLAZING
20 3.2 TAPE GLAZING
23 3.5 LAMINATED-GLASS SECURITY GLAZING SCHEDULE
24 PART 1 - GENERAL

28 1.2 SUMMARY
29 A. Section includes forced entry security laminated glass.
30 1.3 COORDINATION
31 A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on security glazing, minimum edge and
32 face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

37 C. Security Glazing Samples: For each type of security glazing; 12 inches square.
38 D. Security Glazing Schedule: List security glazing types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.
39 Use same designations indicated on Drawings. Indicate coordinated dimensions of security glazing and
40 construction that receives security glazing, including clearances and glazing channel dimensions.
41 E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For security glazing indicated to comply with performance requirements and
42 design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible
43 for their preparation.

45 A. Product Test Reports: For each type of security glazing, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
46 B. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test reports.
47

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 088853 - 1 SECURITY GLAZING
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each security glazing type, tape sealant, gasket,
3 glazing accessory, and glazing-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing
4 sealants.
5 1. Testing will not be required if data based on previous testing of current sealant products and glazing
6 materials match those submitted.
7 1.7 WARRANTY
8 A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace laminated glass that
9 deteriorates within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects

18 in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design security glazing.
19 B. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions
20 indicated.
21 1. Design Procedure for Glass: ASTM E 1300 and ICC's International Building Code.
22 2. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings.
23 C. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category
24 II.
25 2.2 SECURITY GLAZING, GENERAL

26 A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of security glazing and glazing material
27 manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these
28 publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
30 B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label
31 of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having
32 jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glazing, glass thickness, and safety glazing
33 standard with which glazing complies.

35 A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.
36 B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of
37 kind and condition indicated.

41 1. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with
42 requirements.
43 2. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.
44

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 A. General:
3 1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials
4 they contact, including security glazing, seals of insulating security glazing and air-gap security
5 glazing, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as
6 demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
7 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and security glazing manufacturers' written instructions for selecting
8 glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.
11 B. Security Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, nonsag, tamper-resistant sealant for joints with low movement
12 complying with ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12.5 or 25, Use NT, and with a Shore A hardness of at least
13 45 when tested according to ASTM C 661.

19 A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape;
20 nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as
21 recommended in writing by tape and security glazing manufacturers for application indicated; and complying
22 with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
23 1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure.
24 2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure.
25 B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both
26 surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
27 1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
28 2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of
29 liquid sealant.

31 A. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
32 B. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.
33 C. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by security glazing manufacturer
34 to maintain security glazing lites in place for installation indicated.
35 D. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit security glazing lateral movement (side
36 walking).
37 E. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to
38 control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.
39 2.8 FABRICATION OF SECURITY GLAZING

40 A. Fabricate security glazing in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face
41 clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product
42 manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.
43

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

3 A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of security glazing, sealants, gaskets, and other
4 glazing materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing
5 publications.
6 B. Protect edges of security glazing from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged security
7 glazing from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged security glazing includes units with
8 edge or face damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken security glazing and impair
9 performance and appearance.
10 C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction
11 testing.
12 D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications unless
13 otherwise required by glazing unit manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for
14 heel bead.
15 E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by security glazing manufacturers for installing lites.
16 F. Provide spacers for security glazing lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches.
17 G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent security glazing from moving sideways in
18 glazing channel, as recommended in writing by security glazing manufacturer and according to requirements
19 in referenced glazing publications.
20 3.2 TAPE GLAZING

21 A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by security glazing, their exposed edges are flush
22 with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
23 B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them
24 fit opening.
25 C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal
26 framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
27 D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in
28 tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
29 E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed.
30 F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.
31 G. Center security glazing in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense
32 compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket
33 applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
34 H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

36 A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between security glazing
37 and glazing stops to maintain face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glazing channel
38 and blocking weep systems. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control
39 depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.
40 B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant
41 to security glazing and channel surfaces.
42 C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial washaway from security glazing.

44 A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
45 B. Protect security glazing from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations,
46 including weld splatter.
47 1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with security glazing,
48 remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by security glazing manufacturer.
49 Remove and replace security glazing that cannot be cleaned without damage.
50

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3.5 LAMINATED-GLASS SECURITY GLAZING SCHEDULE

2 A. Security Glazing (Type SGL-1): Clear laminated glass.
3 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into
4 the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
5 2. Basis for design Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope® ArmorProtect® Plus #121000.
6 3. Type SG-FE1 - Glass-clad polycarbonate, Clear: Inner and outer lites shall be 3mm heat
7 strengthened glass with a single ply polycarbonate core. Overall nominal thickness shall be 7/16".
8 Product shall comply with:
9 a. HPW-TP-0500, Forced Entry Level 1 and Ballistics Level A, .38 Special (ballistics stoppage
10 spall penetration)
11 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 08 91 19
2 FIXED LOUVERS
5 1.2 SUMMARY
10 2.2 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS
11 2.3 LOUVER SCREENS
12 2.4 MATERIALS
13 2.5 FABRICATION
16 3.1 INSTALLATION
17 3.2 ADJUSTING
18 PART 1 - GENERAL

22 1.2 SUMMARY
23 A. Section includes fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers.
25 1. Section 08 11 13 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for louvers in hollow-metal doors.
26 2. Section 08 14 16 "Flush Wood Doors" for louvers in flush wood doors.

29 1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models
30 with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.
31 B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments
32 to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing.
33 C. Samples: For each type of metal finish required.
34 D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For louvers indicated to comply with structural performance requirements,
35 including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
36 preparation.

38 A. Product Test Reports: Based on tests performed according to AMCA 500-L.
39 B. Windborne-debris-impact-resistance test reports.

42 A. Delegated Design: Design louvers, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified
43 professional engineer licensed in the State of Wisconsin, using structural performance requirements and
44 design criteria indicated.
45

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 089119 - 1 FIXED LOUVERS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 B. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and
2 stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver components,
3 noise or metal fatigue caused by louver-blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and
4 anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act normal to the face of the building.
5 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on pressures as indicated on Drawings.
6 2. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on a uniform pressure acting inward or outward.
7 a. Refer to drawings.
8 C. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as demonstrated by
9 testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width according to
10 AMCA 500-L.
11 2.2 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS

12 A. Horizontal, Drainable-Blade Louver (LOUVER-1):
13 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
14 a. Airolite Company, LLC (The).
15 b. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
16 c. Ruskin Company.
17 B. Fixed-Blade Extruded-Aluminum Louvers: Horizontal Drainable-Blade Louvers as manufactured by The
18 Airolite Co.
19 1. Product: K6776:
20 a. Depth: 6 inches (152 mm) nominal louver depth.
21 b. Type: Concealed mullion.
22 c. Percent Free Area: 54%.
23 d. Beginning Point of Water Penetration: 1,250 fpm (6.35 m/s).
24 e. Air Volume Flow Rate at Beginning Point of Water Penetration: 10,700 cfm (5.06 m³/s).
25 f. Pressure Drop at Beginning Point of Water Penetration: 0.18 in. H2O (0.045 kPa).
26 g. Blade Thickness: 0.081 in (2 mm) 0.125 in (3 mm).
27 h. Frame Thickness: 0.081 in (2 mm) 0.125 in (3 mm)
28 2. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
29 2.3 LOUVER SCREENS

30 A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver.
31 1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Exterior face.
32 2. Screening Type: Bird screening.
33 B. Louver Screen Frames: Same type and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are
34 attached.
35 C. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers:
36 1. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2-inch-square mesh, 0.063-inch wire.
37 2.4 MATERIALS
38 A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.
39 B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise
40 recommended by metal producer for required finish.
41 C. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.
42 1. Use hex-head or Phillips pan-head screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
43 2. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners.
44 3. For fastening galvanized steel, use hot-dip-galvanized steel or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners.
45 4. For fastening stainless steel, use 300 series stainless-steel fasteners.
46 5. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.
47 D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
48 2.5 FABRICATION
49 A. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for
50 fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.
51 B. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view, unless
52 otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members
53 necessary.
54

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and
3 containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare,
4 pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'
6 1. Color and Gloss: Match Architect's sample.
8 3.1 INSTALLATION
9 A. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.
10 B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required
11 to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.
12 C. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.
13 D. Protect unpainted galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that are in contact with concrete, masonry, or
14 dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by
15 separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing.
16 3.2 ADJUSTING
17 A. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. If
18 results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace
19 with new units.
20 END OF SECTION

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2016
1 SECTION 09 03 20
2 HISTORIC TREATMENT OF PLASTER
3
5 1.1 SUMMARY
7 1.3 SUBMITTALS
9 1.5 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
12 2.2 MATERIALS
13 2.3 MIXES
15 3.1 EXAMINATION
16 3.2 PREPARATION
17 3.3 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION
18 3.4 ADJUSTING/CLEANING
19 3.5 PROTECTION
20
21
22 PART 1---GENERAL
23
24 1.1 SUMMARY
25
26 A. This section includes replicating ornamental plaster trim (cornice, crown molding, beams, moldings, etc.) and
27 flat plaster work to replace that which is damaged or missing.
28
29 B. Work shall follow the recommendations of the Secretary of the Interior’s Standards for Historic Preservation,
30 Preservation Briefs #21, Repairing Historic Flat Plaster Walls and Ceilings and # 23 Preserving Historic Ornamental
31 Plaster.
32
34 A. Pre-installation conference: Conduct conference at Project a minimum of one week in advance of starting
35 mockup.
36
37 1.3 SUBMITTALS
38
39 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for plaster materials, lath and accessories.
40
41 B. Design Data/Test Reports/Certificates:
42
43 1. Material Certificates: Submit producer's certificates for plaster aggregates to show that
44 materials comply with requirements.
45
46 2. Schedule of Work: Submit a schedule of spaces that require flat and ornamental plaster, and a list of
47 ornamental plaster items or areas that require repair or replacement in each of the affected, spaces. Indicate
48 procedures to be used, and general time requirements.
49
51
52 A. Regulatory Requirements: Reference Standards: Comply with applicable requirements of Chapter 9 -
53 Ornamental Plaster, in "Plastering Skills", published by American Technical Publishers, Inc. Comply with other
54 specified standards.
55 B. Plaster Specialist Qualifications: Engage an experienced plastering firm to perform work of this Section. Firm
56 shall have completed work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record
57 of successful in-service performance. Submit documentation of firm experience, qualification and worker

CONTRACT #7939 MUNIS #10129 090320 HISTORIC TREATMENT OF PLASTER
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2016
1 resumes. Experience only with installing new flat plaster is insufficient experience for historic treatment of
2 plaster work.
3 C. Worker Qualifications: Persons who are experienced and specialize in work of types they will be performing.
4 Submit documentation of firm experience, qualification and worker resumes.
5 D. Quality-Control Program: Prepare a written quality-control program for this Project. To include; processes,
6 procedures, sequencing and systems used, demonstrate the ability of personnel to properly follow methods
7 and use materials and tools without damaging adjacent materials and surfaces. Include provisions for
8 supervising performance and preventing damage.
9 E. Mockups: Refer to Section 014339. Prepare one complete mockup (4ft. x 8ft.) of plaster repair at ceiling/beam
10 to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution and for repair. Mock-
11 up shall include and document every process of the repair.
12
13
14 Construct mockup in location in where directed by Architect as illustrated in the drawings.
15 Prepare mockup for review and approval by owner. Correct all conditions noted during review
16 process. Re-check until approved by Owner, at no additional cost to Owner.
17 Approved mockup shall become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial
18 Completion.
19
20
21 1.5 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
22
23 A. Environmental Requirements:
24
25 1. General: Comply with requirements of reference plaster application standards and recommendations of
26 plaster manufacturer for environmental conditions before, during and after application of plaster.
27
28 2. Cold Weather Protection: When outdoor temperature is below 55 degrees F., maintain continuous uniform
29 temperature of not less than 55 degrees F., nor more than 70 degrees F., for not less than 1 week prior to plaster
30 application, during its application, and until plaster is dry but for not less than one week after application is complete.
31 Distribute heat evenly; prevent concentrated or uneven heat from contacting plaster near heat source.
32
33 3. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to remove water in excess of that required for
34 hydration of plaster. Begin ventilation immediately after plaster is applied and continue
35 until it sets.
36
37 4. Protection: Protect adjacent work from soiling, splattering, moisture and other harmful effects
38 which might result from plastering. Obtain approval of the protection from the architect.
39
40
41 PART 2---PRODUCTS
42
44
45 A. National Gypsum Co.
46 Gold Bond Building Products Division www.nationalgypsum.com
47
48 B. USG Corporation
49 www.usg.com
50
51 C. Perma-Flex Mold Company
52 www.perma-flex.com
53
54 D. Charles Street Supply Co.
55 www.charlesstsupply.com
56
57
58 2.2 MATERIALS
59
60 A. Gypsum Plaster Materials:
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2016
1
2 1. Base coat plasters: ASTM C28, types as indicated
3 below.
4
5 a. Gypsum neat plaster such as "Red Top Gypsum Plaster" (USG.com), "Two-Way Hardwall Gypsum
6 Plaster" (National Gypsum Co.), or approved equal.
7
8 b. High strength gypsum neat plaster with a minimum average dry compressive strength of
9 2,800 psi per ASTM C472 for a mix of 100 lbs. plaster and 2 cu. ft. of sand such as "Structo-Base" (USG), or
10 approved equal.
11
12 2. Finish coat plasters: Types as indicated below:
13
14 a. Gypsum gauging plaster, ASTM C28; for flatwork such as, "Red Top Gauging Plaster" (USG), "Gold
15 Bond Gauging Plaster" (National Gypsum Co.), or approved equal.
16
17 b. Gypsum molding plaster, ASTM C59; for crown moldings such as "USG No. 1 Moulding Plaster"
18 (USG) "Gold Bond Moulding Plaster" (National Gypsum Co.), or approved equal.
19
20 c. Gypsum casting plaster, ASTM C59; for ornamental plaster such as "USG No. 1 Casting
21 Plaster" (USG), or approved equal.
22
23 3. Finishing Hydrated Limes: ASTM C206; Type S, or approved
24 equal.
25
26 4. Aggregates for Base Coat Plasters: ASTM C35, sand.
27
28 B. Clean, potable water
29
30 C. Bonding Compound for Gypsum Plaster: ASTM C631.
31
32 D. Plaster Molds: Urethane rubber liquid mold material that can produce detailed impressions (Perma Flex Mold
33 Co.), or approved equal.
34
35 E. Reinforcing Fibers: Sisal hemp fibers, or polypropylene fibers, not more than 2" long (Plastic Tooling Co.), or
36 approved equal.
37
38 F. Anchors for Reattachment of Existing Plaster: Zinc plated washers with appropriate mechanical fasteners for
39 existing substrates, (Charles Street Supply Co.), or approved equal.
40
41 2.3 MIXES
42
43 A. Plaster Base Coat Compositions: Comply with ASTM C842 and manufacturer's directions for gypsum plaster
44 base coat proportions for three-coat work:
45
46 1. Scratch Coat: High strength gypsum gauging plaster with job-mixed sand.
47
48 2. Brown Coat: High strength gypsum gauging plaster with job-mixed sand.
49
50 B. For Finish Coat: Proportion casting plaster and molding plaster to comply with the manufacturer's instructions.
51 Proportion gypsum gauging plaster to comply with ASTM C842; 1 part plaster and 2 parts lime.
52
53
54 PART 3---EXECUTION
55
56 3.1 EXAMINATION
57
58 A. Examine surfaces to receive ornamental plaster and conditions under which the ornamental plaster will be
59 installed. Proceed with the ornamental plaster work only when substrate surfaces and conditions comply with
60 referenced standards, to ensure satisfactory installations.
61
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2016
1 1. Promptly notify the architect of conditions that need to be corrected or coordinated.

2
3 3.2 PREPARATION
4
5 A. Surface Preparation:
6
7 1. Remove ornamental or flat plaster that is damaged or loose and requires replacement, or that has to be
8 reset.
9
10 2. Reinforce and secure loose ornamental or flat plaster that is to remain, using appropriate concealed
11 methods.
12
13 3. Make molds, blades or screeds as necessary for replacement of ornamental plaster. Match existing plaster
14 profiles.
15
16 4. Make accurate reproductions for missing, deteriorated or damaged ornamental plaster.
17
18 5. Clean plaster surfaces to be restored, to remove loose and deleterious materials that may affect
19 adhesion or application of new plaster. Re-attach loose lath or install new lath as required.
20
21 6. Spray existing plaster to be pointed or patched with water, or use bonding agent, to ensure
22 adhesion of new plaster. Install keying systems for larger pieces as necessary. Comply with
23 referenced standards.
24
25 7. (Deleted ADD # 3)
26
27 8. Measure and layout ornamental plaster accurately to maintain pattern and alignment of the work.
28
29 3.3 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION
30
31 NOTE: Conform to the requirements of the latest edition of "Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by USG
32 Corporation concerning application of ornamental plaster.
33
34 A. Make a template from sheets of metal (brass) cut full-scale in shapes to match existing; use to screed or form
35 gypsum plaster to desired shapes and contours.
36
37 1. Coat metal sheet with layout dye - a blue dye that makes the scribed pattern easier to follow.
38
39 2. When the dye is dry, scribe, cut and carefully file the template to remove any roughness or other
40 imperfections that might be transferred to the finished work.
41
42 3. Use a sled to guide the template as it is pushed through the plastic mass. Basic parts of the sled
43 include a "slipper-board" and the board to which the template is nailed.
44
45 a. For bench work the sled is guided by the table edge. Bench-run molds are installed on the
46 job with mechanical fasteners or adhesively attached with gypsum plaster.
47
48 b. For run-in-place work, a guide strip is attached to the wall or ceiling and forms one
49 edge of the pattern; after work is completed the guide strip is removed.
50
51 C. Mix Plaster: Use special plaster designed and manufactured for ornamental plaster work.
52
53 NOTE: Mix the plaster a little below normal consistency for the first mix, then allow the mix to "cream" a bit
54 before placing it on the bench in front of the template. For run-in-place work a slightly stiffer consistency is
55 desirable.
56
57 1. For Hand Mixing:
58
59 a. Weigh the plaster, and measure or weigh the water.
60
61 b. Sift plaster into water evenly. Do not drop handsful of plaster into the water at one
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2016
1 time.
2
3 c. Allow to soak 2 minutes undisturbed, then mix thoroughly. Stir from bottom, forcing
4 material to top. Take care to avoid beating air into mix. Proper mixing forces air out of
5 mix.
6
7 d. Continue mixing until a smooth, even mass is produced.
8
9 2. For Mechanical Mixing: Mechanically mix cementitious and aggregate materials for plasters
10 to comply with applicable referenced application standards and with recommendations of plasters
11 manufacturer.
12
13 a. Weigh plaster and measure water accurately.
14
15 b. Sift or strew plaster slowly and evenly.
16
17 c. Allow it to soak 2 to 5 minutes, and mix for 2 to 5 minutes.
18
19 NOTE: For batches of 10 to 50 lbs., use a 3" diameter, 3-blade, 25 degree pitch propeller with
20 1/4 or 1/3 hp. 1,760 rpm direct-drive motor. For batches of 50 to 200 lb., use a 4" diameter, 3-
21 blade, 25 degree pitch propeller with 1/2 hp. 1,760 rpm direct-drive motor.
22
23 D. Replicate the Ornamental Trim:
24
25 1. For Run Work or Straight Mold:
26
27 NOTE: This method is used to produce staff work or pattern stock having parallel edges or to form a
28 straight molding.
29
30 a. For bench work, some plaster should be allowed to lap over the end of the bench to act as an
31 anchor and prevent the mold from loosening from the bench before work is completed.
32
33 b. Press small lumps of modeling clay onto the bench before the plaster is placed provide a
34 grip for the plaster and help hold it in place.
35
36 2. For Circular Shapes (Turning): Like run work, turning can be done in the shop or run-in-place.
37
38 a. For bench work, place a center post in a hole in the bench.
39
40 b. For run-in-place work, position the center post accurately at the center of the circular
41 shape to be formed and securely attach or brace to the structural supports.
42
43 NOTE: THE CENTER POST SHOULD HAVE A RUNNING THREAD, WITH A DOUBLE NUT FOR
44 HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT. THE PIVOT POINT MUST BE ABSOLUTELY RIGID AND SET HIGHER THAN THE TOP
45 OF THE PATTERN TO BE MADE, SO THAT THE TEMPLATE WILL SCREED CLEARLY AS IT
46 ROTATES AROUND THE PIVOT POINT.
47
48 3. Duplicate plaster molds by taking impressions from existing plaster molds; create new rubber molds
49 from these impressions and cast plaster into these molds.
50
51 4. Remove plaster molds after plaster has cured following plaster manufacturer's instructions.
52
53 5. Strip and clean existing decoration to produce a clean, sharp mold.
54
55 3.4 ADJUSTING/CLEANING
56
57 A. When replication and plasterwork is completed, remove unused materials, containers and equipment. Clean
58 floors and adjacent surfaces of all plaster debris, including plaster droppings daily.
59
60 3.5 PROTECTION

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2016
1 A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to ensure ornamental
2 plaster being without damage or deterioration at time of
3 substantial completion.
4 END OF SECTION
5

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 09 21 16.23
2 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
5 1.2 SUMMARY
9 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES (GYP-1)
10 2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS
11 2.4 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING
14 3.1 INSTALLATION
15 PART 1 - GENERAL

19 1.2 SUMMARY
20 A. Section Includes: Gypsum board shaft wall assemblies.

22 A. Product Data: For each component of gypsum board shaft wall assembly.
25 and cost.

31 A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and
32 construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent
33 testing agency.
34 B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested
35 according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a testing and inspecting agency.
36 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES (GYP-1)

37 A. Fire-Resistance Rating: 2 hours.
38 B. Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members, corner and end members, and fire-
39 resistance-rated assembly indicated.
40 1. Depth: 4 inches.
41 2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch.
42 C. Runner Tracks: Manufacturer's standard J-profile track with manufacturer's standard long-leg length, but at
43 least 2 inches long and matching studs in depth.
44 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs.
45 D. Firestop Tracks: Provide firestop track at head of shaft wall on each floor level.
46 E. Elevator Hoistway Entrances: Manufacturer's standard J-profile jamb strut with long-leg length of 3 inches,
47 matching studs in depth.
48 F. Room-Side Finish: Gypsum board.
49 G. Shaft-Side Finish: Gypsum shaftliner board, Type X, As indicated by fire-resistance-rated assembly design
50 designation.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 09211623 - 1 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 H. Insulation: Sound attenuation blankets.
2 2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS

3 A. Panel products shall be GREENGUARD Gold Certified.
4 B. Regional Materials: Products shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site from
5 materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles
6 (800 km) of Project site.
7 C. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and
8 that correspond with support system indicated.
9 D. Gypsum Shaftliner Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; manufacturer's proprietary fire-resistive liner
10 panels with paper faces.
13 a. American Gypsum.
14 b. Georgia-Pacific Building Products.
15 c. National Gypsum Company.
16 d. United States Gypsum Company.
17 2. Thickness: 1 inch.
18 3. Long Edges: Double bevel.
19 E. Gypsum Board: As specified in Section 09 29 00 "Gypsum Board."
20 2.4 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING

23 1. Minimum Recycled Content: 34.9%.
24 2. Minimum Post-Consumer Recycled Content: 24.3%.
25 3. Minimum Pre-Consumer (Post Industrial) Recycled Content: 9.4%.
26 B. Steel Framing Members: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal.
27 C. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement
28 of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

30 A. Trim Accessories: Material and shapes as specified in Section 09 29 00 "Gypsum Board" that comply with
31 gypsum board shaft wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations for application indicated.
32 B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.
33 C. Track Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand loading conditions.
34 D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: As specified in Section 09 29 00 "Gypsum Board."
35 E. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 07 92 19 "Acoustical Joint Sealants."
37 3.1 INSTALLATION
38 A. General: Comply with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated, manufacturer's written
39 installation instructions, and ASTM C 754 other than stud-spacing requirements.
40 B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
41 C. Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: Patch or replace sprayed fire-resistive materials removed or damaged
42 during installation of shaft wall assemblies. After application, remove only to extent necessary for
43 installation of gypsum board shaft wall assemblies.
44 D. Building Expansion Joints: Frame both sides of expansion joints with furring and other support.
45 E. Install supplementary framing around openings and as required for blocking, bracing, and support of
46 gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment, handrails, and similar items.
47 1. Elevator Hoistway: Provide jamb struts on each side of door frame.
48 F. Penetrations: Install supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration behind boxes containing
49 wiring devices, elevator call buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items.
50 G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum panels from building structure, while maintaining continuity of fire-rated
51 construction.
52 H. Firestop Tracks: Install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.
53 I. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by
54 Architect while maintaining fire-resistance rating of gypsum board shaft wall assemblies.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 J. Sound-Rated Shaft Wall Assemblies: Seal with acoustical sealant at perimeter of each assembly and at
2 joints and penetrations.
3 K. Cant Panels: At projections into shaft exceeding 4 inches, install 1/2- or 5/8-inch-thick gypsum board cants
4 covering tops of projections.
5 L. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from
6 the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
7 M. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
8 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 09 22 16
2 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
5 1.2 SUMMARY
10 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS
11 2.3 FURRING
12 2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
17 PART 1 - GENERAL

21 1.2 SUMMARY
23 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions.
24 2. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffits.

29 and cost.

31 A. Evaluation reports for firestop tracks.

34 A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-
35 bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated,
36 according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
37 B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those
38 tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an

43 1. Minimum Recycled Content: 34.9%.
44 2. Minimum Post-Consumer Recycled Content: 24.3%.
45 3. Minimum Pre-Consumer (Post Industrial) Recycled Content: 9.4%.
46

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 092216 - 1 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
2 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise
3 indicated.
4 2. Protective Coating: Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-
5 dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.
6 C. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
7 1. Steel Studs and Runners:
8 a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch.
9 b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
10 D. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following:
11 1. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to
12 interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than
13 indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
14 E. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement
15 of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less
16 than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
17 F. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.
18 G. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.0538-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-
19 wide flanges.
20 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches.
21 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch-thick, galvanized steel.
22 H. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of
23 7/8 inch, minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness
24 indicated.
25 2.3 FURRING (FURR-1)

26 A. Refer to Drawings for type and size.
27 B. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
28 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0296 inch.
29 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
30 C. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch-deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission.
31 1. Configuration: Asymmetrical.
32 D. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges.
33 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
34 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge-type steel sheet with minimum uncoated-steel
35 thickness of 0.0329 inch.
36 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-diameter wire, or
37 double strand of 0.048-inch-diameter wire.

39 A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-diameter wire, or double
40 strand of 0.048-inch-diameter wire.
41 B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:
42 1. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load or strength
43 design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or equal to the
44 design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488/E 488M conducted by a qualified testing
45 agency.
46 2. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated
47 from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated according to ICC-
48 ES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190
49 conducted by a qualified testing agency.
50 C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter.
51 D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated.
52 E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538 inch and
53 minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges.
54 1. Depth: 2-1/2 inches.
55

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 F. Furring Channels (Furring Members):

2 1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges,
3 3/4 inch deep.
4 2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
6 b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings or as required to meet deflection requirements.
7 3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep.
9 4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch-deep members designed to reduce sound transmission.
10 a. Configuration: Asymmetrical .

12 A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
13 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other
14 properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
15 B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:
16 1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated.
17 2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration
18 without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.

21 A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.
22 1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply to framing
23 installation.
24 2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063 that apply to
25 framing installation.
26 3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844 that apply to
27 framing installation.
28 4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing
29 installation.
30 B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely fastened.
31 C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars,
32 toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
33 D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
34 E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame
35 both sides of joints independently.
36 3.2 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

37 A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required
38 by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
39 B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls,
40 install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
41 C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
42 D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or
43 substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended
44 ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above ceiling.
45 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce
46 joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.
47 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner
48 track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
49 a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
50 b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch clearance
51 from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.
52 c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead
53 structure.
54 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door
55 openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing
56 required above door heads.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly

2 indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid
3 structure.
4 a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated
5 assembly indicated.
6 5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.
7 6. Curved Partitions:
8 a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs.
9 b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs. On
10 straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches o.c.
11 E. Direct Furring:
12 1. Screw to wood framing.
13 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or
14 powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.
15 F. Z-Shaped Furring Members:
16 1. Erect insulation, specified in Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation," vertically and hold in place with
17 Z-shaped furring members spaced 24 inches o.c. unless noted otherwise.
18 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete
19 stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches
20 o.c.
21 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending
22 beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of
23 attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner
24 and cut insulation to fit.
25 G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from
26 the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
27 3.3 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

28 A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings
29 required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
30 B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure
31 to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
32 C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:
33 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum
34 that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
35 a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal
36 forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
37 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that
38 interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members,
39 install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent
40 devices.
41 a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
42 performance limits established by referenced installation standards.
43 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye
44 screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a
45 manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
46 4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts,
47 eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and
48 hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
49 5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.
50 6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend
51 through forms.
52 7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
53 8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
54 D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.
55 E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured
56 lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will
57 receive finishes.
58 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
SECTION 09 24 00
CEMENT PLASTERING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL LATH
2.2 ACCESSORIES
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
2.4 PLASTER MATERIALS
2.5 PLASTER MIXES
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
3.3 INSTALLING METAL LATH
3.4 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES
3.5 PLASTER APPLICATION
3.6 PLASTER REPAIRS
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Interior vertical plasterwork (stucco) ONLY where indicated on the interior elevation drawings.
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints, including plans,
elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work.
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic
effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockups for each substrate and finish texture indicated for cement plastering, including
accessories.
a. Size: 10 sq. ft. in surface area.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents
contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 092400 - 1 CEMENT PLASTERING
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed
Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover, and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather,
moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements.
B. Exterior Plasterwork:
1. Apply and cure plaster to prevent plaster drying out during curing period. Use procedures required
by climatic conditions, including moist curing, providing coverings, and providing barriers to deflect
sunlight and wind.
2. Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).
3. Protect plaster coats from freezing for not less than 48 hours after set of plaster coat has occurred.
C. Factory-Prepared Finishes: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for environmental

conditions for applying finishes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL LATH
A. Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C 847, cold-rolled carbon-steel sheet with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180),
hot-dip galvanized-zinc coating.
1. Diamond-Mesh Lath: Self-furring, 2.5 lb/sq. yd. (1.4 kg/sq. m).
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063, and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses and
number of plaster coats required.
B. Metal Accessories:
1. Cornerbeads: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel.
a. Smallnose cornerbead with expanded flanges; use unless otherwise indicated.
b. Smallnose cornerbead with perforated flanges; use on curved corners.
c. Smallnose cornerbead with expanded flanges reinforced by perforated stiffening rib; use on
columns and for finishing unit masonry corners.
2. Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; square-edged style; with expanded
flanges.
3. Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; one-piece-type, folded pair of
unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective
tape on plaster face of control joint.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or
of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories.
B. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: ASTM C 1063.
2.4 PLASTER MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I.

1. Color for Finish Coats: White.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
B. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897.

1. Color for Job-Mixed Finish Coats: White.
C. Ready-Mixed Finish-Coat Plaster: Mill-mixed Portland cement, aggregates, and proprietary ingredients.
1. Pure white marble aggregate (no quartz), 100% acrylic polymers
2.5 PLASTER MIXES
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated.
B. Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat plasterwork as follows:
1. Portland Cement Mixes:
a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts
lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.
b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts
lime. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material, but not less than volume
of aggregate used in scratch coat.
C. Factory-Prepared Finish-Coat Mixes: For ready-mixed finish-coat plasters, comply with manufacturer's
written instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects caused by
plastering.
B. Prepare smooth, solid substrates for plaster according to ASTM C 926.
3.3 INSTALLING METAL LATH
A. Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063.

1. On Solid Surfaces, Not Otherwise Furred: Install self-furring, diamond-mesh lath.
3.4 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES
A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings.
B. Reinforcement for External (Outside) Corners:

1. Install cornerbead at interior locations where applicable.
C. Control Joints: Locate as approved by Architect for visual effect and as follows:
1. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) of the following maximum sizes:
a. Vertical Surfaces: 144 sq. ft. (13.4 sq. m).
2. At distances between control joints of not greater than 18 feet (5.5 m) o.c.
3. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) with length-to-width ratios of not greater
than 2-1/2:1.
4. Where control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind plaster.
5. Where plasterwork areas change dimensions, to delineate rectangular-shaped areas (panels) and
to relieve the stress that occurs at the corner formed by the dimension change.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
3.5 PLASTER APPLICATION
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926.

1. Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m) from a true plane in
finished plaster surfaces when measured by a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge placed on surface.
2. Finish plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a
plaster ground unless otherwise indicated. Where casing bead does not terminate plaster at metal
frame, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctures
with metal.
B. Walls; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: For scratch and brown coats, for three-coat plasterwork
with 3/4-inch (19-mm) total thickness.
C. Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to provide Insert requirements finish to match Architect's sample.
3.6 PLASTER REPAIRS
A. Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check cracking, dry outs,
efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed ONLY where
indicated on the interior elevation drawings.
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work after plastering is complete. Promptly remove
plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair floors, walls,
and other surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during plastering.
END OF SECTION 09 24 00

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 09 29 00
2 GYPSUM BOARD
5 1.2 SUMMARY
9 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
10 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
11 2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS
12 2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES
13 2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
15 2.8 ACOUSTIC CEILING ASSEMBLY (ACA-1)
17 3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS
18 3.2 ACOUSTIC SEPERATION
19 3.3 PROTECTION
20 PART 1 - GENERAL

24 1.2 SUMMARY
26 1. Interior gypsum board.
27 2. Tile backing panels.

32 cost.
36 3. Product Data: For adhesives and sealants, indicating VOC content.
37 C. Samples: For each texture finish indicated on same backing indicated for Work.

40 A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction
41 identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
42 B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those
43 tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an
45 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

46 A. Gypsum board products shall be GREENGUARD Gold Certified.
47 B. Regional Materials: Products shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project site from materials that have
48 been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site.
49 C. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that
50 correspond with support system indicated.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 092900 - 1 GYPSUM BOARD
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

2 A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
3 B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M (GYP-3 and GYP-4).
5 2. Long Edges: Tapered.
6 3. Acoustical isolation hangers: where applicable for wall designation on the drawings, use the following
7 product in the assembly per the detail drawings: Acoustical Surfaces Inc.: RSIC-1 Resilient Sound
8 Isolation Clips at 16” o.c..
9 C. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M (GYP-2).
12 D. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M (ACA-1).
15 3. Acoustical isolation hangers: where applicable for ceiling designation ACA-1 on the drawings, use
16 the following product in the assembly per the detail drawings: Acoustical Surfaces Inc.: RSIC-1
17 Resilient Sound Isolation Clips at 16” o.c..

19 A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or ASTM C 1325, with manufacturer's standard
20 edges.
22 2. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
23 2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES

24 A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
25 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized-
26 steel sheet.
27 2. Shapes:
28 a. Cornerbead (TRIM-2).
29 b. Bullnose bead.
30 c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound [TRIM-1].
31 d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
32 e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
33 f. Expansion (control) joint.
34 g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges
35 h. Shadow gap trim mid-panel (TRIM-3).
36 i. Shadow gap trim at panel edge (TRIM-4).
37 2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

38 A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
39 B. Joint Tape:
40 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
41 2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper.
42 3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh.
43 4. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
44 C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other
45 compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
46 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-
47 type taping compound.
48 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges,
49 use setting-type taping compound.
50 a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.
51 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
52 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
53 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use high-build interior coating product designed for
54 application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish.
55

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications:

2 1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type, sandable topping
3 compound.
4 2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by sheathing board manufacturer.
5 E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
6 1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer.
7 2. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.

9 A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's
11 B. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 6-mil- (0.15-mm-) thick sheet, with maximum permeance
12 rating of 0.1 perm (5.7 ng/Pa x s x sq. m).
13 C. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to
14 continuous substrate.
16 D. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.
17 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112
18 inch thick.
19 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel
20 manufacturer.
21 E. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by
22 combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
23 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.
24 2. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content
25 not less than 50 percent.
26 F. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with
27 ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and
28 openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to
29 ASTM E 90.
31 G. For backbox putty, select one of the following, including all manufacturer-recommended accessories, in
32 conformance with Division 7 - Sealants:
33 1. SpecSeal SSP Intumescent Putty, Specified Technologies, Inc., Somerville, NJ.
34 2. IsoBacker, Kinetics Noise Products.
35 3. Firestop Putty Pads, Acoustical Solutions.
36 H. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation."
37 2.8 ACOUSTIC CEILING ASSEMBLY (ACA-1)

38 A. Beneath Mechanical Rooms at 3, and In Chiller Room. Refer to Drawings for assembly and components.
40 3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS

41 A. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
42 B. Comply with ASTM C 840.
43 C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide
44 1/4- to 1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are
45 exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
46 D. For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels.
47 Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
48 E. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
49 F. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to
50 receive tape.
51 G. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:
52 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.
53 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile.
54 3. Level 3: not required.
55 4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.
56 a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 5. Level 5: not required.

2 H. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for use as
3 exposed soffit board.
4 I. Glass-Mat Faced Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
5 J. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
6 3.2 ACOUSTIC SEPERATION

7 A. Electrical boxes, electrical conduits, pipes, ducts, structure and other penetrations of walls, floors and slabs
8 within Acoustically Sensitive Rooms, Electrical Equipment Rooms of all types, Mechanical Equipment
9 Rooms of all types and Elevator Equipment Rooms of all types shall be caulked to achieve an airtight and
10 light tight closure.
11 1. For electrical boxes, audio and video panels, fire extinguisher cabinets, HVAC system control
12 devices, and similar elements recessed into acoustically-sensitive partitions or where backboxes
13 serving adjacent rooms but located in the same partition within the same stud space, wrap entire
14 concealed surface with putty to form airtight, light-tight closure of the entire surface of the backbox
15 extending to and bonding with the back face of the adjacent gypsum board or other wall cladding.
16 Install in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations.
17 2. Provide intumescent putty at fire rated wall assemblies. Refer to Section 07 84 43 – Joint
18 Firestopping.
19 3.3 PROTECTION
20 A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other
21 causes during remainder of the construction period.
22 B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
23 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 09 30 13
2 CERAMIC TILING
5 1.2 SUMMARY
6 1.3 DEFINITIONS
10 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
13 2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL
14 2.2 TILE PRODUCTS
15 2.3 THRESHOLDS
17 2.5 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE
18 2.6 SETTING MATERIALS
19 2.7 GROUT MATERIALS
22 3.1 EXAMINATION
23 3.2 PREPARATION
24 3.3 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION
25 3.4 TILE BACKING PANEL INSTALLATION
27 3.6 PROTECTION
28 3.7 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
29 PART 1 - GENERAL
33 1.2 SUMMARY
35 1. Ceramic mosaic wall tile.
36 2. Porcelain floor tile.
37 3. Stone thresholds.
38 4. Tile base and caps
39 5. Metal edge strips and trim.
41 1. Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints
42 in tile surfaces.
43 2. Section 09 29 00 "Gypsum Board" for cementitious backer units.
44 1.3 DEFINITIONS
45 A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work
46 of this Section unless otherwise specified.
47 B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI
48 A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI
49 A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are
50 contained in its "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile."
51 C. Retain terms that remain after this Section has been edited for a project. Coordinate with tile sizes used in
52 "Tile Products" Article.
53 D. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.
54 E. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.
55

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 09 30 13 - 1 CERAMIC TILING
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

3 1. Review requirements in ANSI A108.01 for substrates and for preparation by other trades.

8 2. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.3: For grout sealers, documentation indicating that products comply
9 with requirements of FloorScore certification.
11 materials.
12 C. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern for typical applications. Show widths,
13 details, and locations of industry recommended expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile
14 substrates and finished tile surfaces for specific room by room applications.
15 D. Samples:
16 1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.
17 2. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of
18 tile and for each color and finish required.
19 3. Stone thresholds.


23 A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are
24 packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
25 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each
26 type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.

28 A. Installer Qualifications:
29 1. Foreman or supervising installer is a five-star member of the National Tile Contractors Association
30 or a Trowel of Excellence member of the Tile Contractors' Association of America.
31 2. Installer employs Ceramic Tile Education Foundation Certified Installers or installers recognized by
32 the U.S. Department of Labor as Journeyman Tile Layers.
33 B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
35 1. Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation.
39 2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

40 A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard-grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types,
41 compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
42 B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI
43 standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods
44 specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified.
45

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2.2 TILE PRODUCTS

2 A. Ceramic Tile Type (CT-1# and CT-2#): glazed ceramic wall tile. Refer to material Tag List.
3 1. Composition: Ceramic.
4 2. Certification: Porcelain tile certified by the Porcelain Tile Certification Agency.
5 3. Module Size: 4”x7” Rhomboid and 8”x8” Hexagonal.
6 4. Grout Color: Match Architect's sample.
7 5. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and matching
8 characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard
9 shapes:
10 a. Trim Units CT#ACC-#: Refer to Material Tag List.
11 b. External Corners for thinset Mortar Installations
12 c. Internal Corners for thinset Mortar Installations.
13 B. Ceramic Tile Type CT-3: Porcelain floor tile.
14 1. Refer to material Tag List.
15 2. Certification: Tile certified by the Porcelain Tile Certification Agency.
16 3. Face Size: 12”x12”
17 4. Face Size Variation: Rectified.
18 5. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42.
19 6. Grout Color: Match Architect's sample.
20 2.3 THRESHOLDS
21 A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor
22 finishes.
23 1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or no greater than 1/16 inch above
24 adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1/2
25 inch or less above adjacent floor surface.
26 B. Marble Thresholds (THOLD-1): ASTM C 503/C 503M, with a minimum abrasion resistance of 12 according
27 to ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241/C 241M and with honed finish.
28 1. Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained white stone with gray veining. Refer to Material Tag
29 Index.

31 A. Cementitious Backer Units: Refer to Section 09 29 00 – Gypsum Board.
33 2.5 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE

34 A. Application: Provide at bathroom floors.
35 B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
36 1. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company.
37 2. LATICRETE LLC.
38 3. MAPEI Corporation.
39 C. General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following that complies with ANSI A118.10 and
40 is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories
41 recommended by manufacturer.
42 D. Fluid-Applied Membrane: Liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer.
43 1. Basis of Design: Laticrete Hydroban.
44

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
4 2. LATICRETE LLC.
6 B. Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset) Installation Materials: ANSI A108.02.
7 1. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of
8 gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with field-
9 mixed portland cement and aggregate mortar bed.
10 a. Basis of Design: Laticrete 3701 Mortar Admixture.
11 C. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.4.
12 1. Product shall be approved for setting beds up to 5/8 inch.
13 a. Basis of Design: Laticrete 253 Gold (bagged).
14 2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic additive
15 to which only water is added at Project site.
16 3. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber liquid-
17 latex additive at Project site.
18 4. For large format floor tile (tile of 8 inches by 8 inches or greater) provide medium setting bed to
19 achieve 100% coverage.
20 5. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in
21 addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.
22 2.7 GROUT MATERIALS

25 2. LATICRETE LLC.
27 B. High-Performance Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7.
28 1. Polymer Type: Ethylene vinyl acetate or acrylic additive, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with
29 other dry ingredients.
30 2. Unsanded and sanded grout with polymer additive added in field.
31 a. Basis of Design: Laticrete 1500 and 1600 (bagged).
32 b. Basis of Design: Laticrete 1776 Grout Enhancer.
33 C. Grout for Pregrouted Tile Sheets: Same product used in factory to pregrout tile sheets.
34 D. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard.

36 A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation
37 provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.
38 B. Floor Transition Edge:
39 1. Description; Tile to concrete transition.
40 a. Manufacturer: Schluter.
41 b. Collection: SCHIENE
42 c. Size: 1/4” height.
43 2. Description: wood to tile transition.
44 a. Manufacturer: Schluter.
45 b. Collection: RENO-T.
47 C. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or combination
48 of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications; stainless-steel,
49 ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material.
50 D. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not change color or
51 appearance of grout.
52 1. Grout sealers shall comply with requirements of FloorScore certification.
53 2.9 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

54 A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written
55 instructions.
56 B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.
57 C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other
58 procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for
59 installations indicated.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
2 3.1 EXAMINATION
3 A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance
4 with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
5 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are incompatible with
6 tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil,
7 or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
8 2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work,
9 and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.
10 3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not
11 coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.
13 3.2 PREPARATION
14 A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives with
15 trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.
16 B. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile
17 units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match
18 approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before
19 installing.
20 3.3 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION

21 A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA installation
22 methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 series "Specifications
23 for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation
24 schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.
25 1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards
26 for providing 95 percent mortar coverage:
27 a. Tile floors consisting of tiles 8 by 8 inchesor larger.
28 B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without
29 interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without
30 disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
31 C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces.
32 Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely
33 to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
34 D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.
35 E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting-bed thickness so that tiles are flush.
36 F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in
37 both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are
38 less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated.
39 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so
40 joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.
41 2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align
42 joints.
43 3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base,
44 walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.
45 G. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and
46 isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do
47 not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
48 1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them.
49 H. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise
50 indicated.
51 1. At locations where mortar bed (thickset) would otherwise be exposed above adjacent floor finishes,
52 set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar (thinset).
53 I. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated.
54 J. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints in tile floors according to grout-sealer
55 manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess
56 sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3.4 TILE BACKING PANEL INSTALLATION

2 A. Use latex-portland cement mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written
3 instructions.

5 A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new matching units,
6 installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement.
7 B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign
8 matter.
9 1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible.
10 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions
11 but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout
12 manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile
13 and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of
14 cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.
15 3.6 PROTECTION
16 A. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent
17 staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner
18 to completed tile walls and floors.
19 B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed.
20 C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces.
21 3.7 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

22 A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor:
23 1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA F112 and ANSI A108.1A; cement mortar bed (thickset) bonded to
24 concrete.
25 a. Ceramic Tile Type: Refer to Materials Tag list.
26 b. Grout: High-performance grout.
27 2. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA F113; thinset mortar.
28 a. Ceramic Tile Type:
29 b. Thinset Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar.
30 c. Mediumset Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. Large format tile.
31 d. Grout: High-performance grout. Color as selected.
32 e. Grout Sealer: As specified.
33 B. Interior Wall Installations, Metal Studs or Furring:
34 1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA W244C or TCNA W244F; thinset mortar on cementitious backer
35 units or fiber-cement backer board.
36 a. Ceramic Tile Type: Refer Material Tag List.
37 b. Thinset Mortar: Improved modified dry-set mortar.
38 c. Grout: High-performance grout. Color as selected.
39 END OF SECTION

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2016
1 SECTION 09 30 16.00
2 CLAY TILE FLOOR REHABILITATION
3
5 1.1 SUMMARY
6 1.2 UNIT PRICES
7 1.3 DEFINITIONS
12 2.1 TILE
13 2.2 SETTING BED MORTAR
14 2.3 GROUT
15 2.4 CLEANERS
16 2.5 SEALER
18 3.1 EXAMINATION
19 3.2 PROTECTION DURING WORK
21 3.4 REPLACEMENT OF SEVERELY DAMAGED TILES
22 3.5 REPAIR OF CLAY TILES
23 3.6 ADJUSTMENT/CLEANING
24 3.7 PROTECTION
25 PART 1 - GENERAL
26 1.1 SUMMARY
27 A. Section includes complete rehabilitation and selective replacement (with new or salvaged tile) of unglazed
28 clay tile floors. All work will match existing color range and variations, historic details and finishes.
29 B. Portions of the original clay tile floors have been covered with a self-leveling, cement-based underlayment
30 and carpet or rubber disk flooring. The testing, proper removal and disposal of such materials shall be the
31 responsibility of the contractor.
32 C. Portions of the original clay tile floor have been damaged by the installation of fasteners to hold steel stud
33 partition tracks. All damaged tile (holes, chips, broken edges, cracks) will be repaired with materials to match
34 existing. Severely damaged clay tiles will be selectively replaced with new or salvaged tile.
35 D. Work shall follow the recommendations of The Secretary of the Interior’s Standards for Historic Preservation:
36 Preservation Briefs #40, Preserving Historic Ceramic Tile Floors.
37 1.2 UNIT PRICES

38 A. Refer to Sheet G002.
39 1.3 DEFINITIONS
40 A. Rehabilitation: The process of making possible a compatible use through repair and alterations while
41 retaining and preserving the original elements, portions and features.

43 A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project a minimum of one week in advance of starting
44 mockup.

48 1. Include plans and detail drawings illustrating areas of damage and missing sections, deterioration
49 and deficiencies in existing clay tile floor and proposed repairs and treatment methods.
50 C. Samples:
51 1. Replacement tile: Salvaged or new, six 12x12” tile representing the range and variation of colors
52 2. Cured grout sample

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 093016 CLAY FLOOR TILE REHABILITATION
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2016

2 A. Clay Tile Floor Rehabilitation Specialist Qualifications: Engage an experienced flooring firm to perform work
3 of this Section. Firm shall have completed work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for
4 this Project with a record of successful in-service performance. Submit documentation of firm experience,
5 qualification and worker resumes. Experience only with installing new clay tile floors is insufficient experience
6 clay tile floor rehabilitation work.
7 B. Rehabilitation Worker Qualifications: Persons who are experienced and specialize in rehabilitation work of
8 types they will be performing. Submit documentation of firm experience, qualification and worker resumes.
9 C. Quality-Control Program: Prepare a written quality-control program for this Project. To include; processes,
10 procedures, sequencing and systems used, demonstrate the ability of personnel to properly follow methods
11 and use materials and tools without damaging adjacent materials and surfaces. Include provisions for
12 supervising performance and preventing damage.
13 D. Mockups: Refer to Section 01 4339. Prepare one complete mockup (8ft. x 8ft.) of clay tile floor repair and
14 rehabilitation to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution and
15 for repair and rehabilitation. Mock-up shall include and document every process of the repair and
16 rehabilitation, including: removal of applied underlayment, tile preparation and repair, removal of damaged
17 tile, installation of salvaged tile and final finish.
18 1. Construct mockup in location in where directed by Architect as illustrated in the drawings.
19 2. Prepare mockup for review and approval by owner. Correct all conditions noted during review
20 process. Re-check until approved by Owner, at no additional cost to Owner.
21 3. Approved mockup shall become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial
22 Completion.
24 2.1 TILE
25 A. Provide new or salvaged tile:
26 1. 12” x 12” x ¾” unglazed clay tile [XTILE-2A], custom color range and variation to match existing floor
27 tile.
28 2. 6” x 6” x ¾” unglazed clay tile [XTILE-2E], custom color range and variation to match existing floor
29 tile.
30 3. Manufacturers:
31 a. Rustico Tile and Stone of Leander, TX
32 rusticotile.com
33 512-260-9111
34 Saltillo Tile, 12 x 12", traditional finish, unglazed, custom terra cotta color range
35
36 b. Classic Terra Cotta of Topanga, CA
37 Terracotta pavers.com
38 888-837-7286
39 12x12” paver, Villa Style, traditional finish, custom terra cotta color range
40
41 c. Western Quarry Tile of Gardena, CA
42 westernquarry.com
43 310-768-8500
44 2 x 12" paver, flat surface, wire cut, unglazed, custom terra cotta color range
45
46 d. Ancient Floors of Springfield, MO
47 ancientfloors.com
48 417-664-3524
49 12 x 12" paver, Mexican Saltillo Tile, traditional finish, unglazed, custom terra cotta color
50 range
51 2.2 SETTING BED MORTAR

52 A. Complying with ANSI A108 .1.
53 2.3 GROUT
54 A. Grey sanded grout:
55 1. Manufacturer’s standard grey sanded grout for use with clay tiles.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2016
1 2.4 CLEANERS
2 A. Accomplish cleaning of clay tile with a multi-purpose high-alkaline cleaner, stripper and degreaser. Tile
3 Doctor, Pro-Clean, or equal.
4 2.5 SEALER
5 A. Water-based acrylic polymers, low-sheen finish. Tile Doctor, Seal & Go, or equal.
7 3.1 EXAMINATION
8 A. Examine the areas, substrate and conditions of the existing clay tile floor areas.
9 3.2 PROTECTION DURING WORK

10 1. Provide durable temporary interior protection for adjacent finishes, surfaces and materials.
11 2. If interior finishes, surfaces or materials are damaged by the repair or rehabilitation process, repair
12 will be done by the selected subcontractor responsible for damaged areas and paid for by the clay
13 tile floor rehabilitation subcontractor by way of credit or subsequent payment applications.

15 A. The clay tile floor repair and rehabilitation work of this project includes, but is not limited to, the following:
16 1. Initial examination of existing clay tile floor areas.
17 2. Protect adjacent surfaces and materials.
18 3. Remove floor covering (carpet/rubber disk flooring) over clay tile flooring.
19 4. Remove underlayment materials over clay tile flooring.
20 5. Examine and document condition of clay tile floor areas.
21 6. Remove severely damaged clay floor tiles.
22 7. Clean clay floor tiles.
23 8. Repair clay floor tiles.
24 9. Install new or salvaged clay floor tiles
25 10. Grout.
26 11. Clean and seal clay floor tiles.
27 12. Protect clay tile floors until substantial completion.
28 3.4 REPLACEMENT OF SEVERELY DAMAGED TILES

29 A. Carefully remove grout surrounding severely damage tile using a grout saw and hand tools to minimize
30 potential damage to adjacent tile.
31 B. Carefully remove tile using hand tools.
32 C. Carefully remove tile setting bed using hand tools.
33 D. Install new setting bed mortar and install tile and grout and seal.
34 3.5 REPAIR OF CLAY TILES

35 A. Clean tile. Utilize mortar patch tinted to blend with each individual tile or epoxy-mixed with colored enamel
36 to blend with each individual tile. Clean all reside from tile and seal.
37 3.6 ADJUSTMENT/CLEANING
38 A. Clean grout and setting materials from face of tile while materials are workable. Leave face of tile clean and
39 free of all foreign matter.
40 B. Leave finished installation clean and free of defective tile work.
41 3.7 PROTECTION
42 A. Protect competed tile work with heavy covering during the construction period to prevent damage and wear.
43 B. Prohibit all foot and wheel traffic from using tiled areas for at least 7 days upon completion of the Work.
44 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 09 51 13
2 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
5 1.2 SUMMARY
16 2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS (ACT-1)
18 2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM
19 2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM
20 2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
22 3.1 EXAMINATION
23 3.2 PREPARATION
24 3.3 INSTALLATION
25 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
26 3.5 CLEANING
27 PART 1 - GENERAL

31 1.2 SUMMARY
32 A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for interior ceilings.
34 1. Section 09 51 23 "Acoustical Tile Ceilings" for ceilings consisting of mineral-base acoustical tiles
35 used with fully concealed suspension systems, stapling, or adhesive bonding.
36 C. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling
37 attachment devices to be cast in concrete.


43 1. Recycled content.
44 2. Laboratory Test Reports: For ceiling products, indicating compliance with requirements for low-
45 emitting materials.
46 C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches in size.
47 D. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on
48 Samples of sizes indicated below:
49 1. Acoustical Panels: Set of full-size Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture.
50 2. Exposed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 6-inch- long Samples of each
51 type, finish, and color.
52

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 095113 - 1 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown
3 and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
4 1. Ceiling suspension-system members.
5 2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached.
6 3. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
7 a. Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices whose
8 installation is specified in other Sections.
9 4. Carrying channels or other supplemental support for hanger-wire attachment where conditions do
10 not permit installation of hanger wires at required spacing.
11 5. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical panels.
12 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling and ceiling-mounted items including the following:
13 a. Lighting fixtures.
14 b. Diffusers.
15 c. Grilles.
16 d. Speakers.
17 e. Sprinklers.
18 f. Access panels.
19 g. Perimeter moldings.
20 7. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch = 1 foot.
21 B. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling, for tests performed by manufacturer and
22 witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

24 A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.

26 A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged
27 with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
28 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.

30 A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site and store them
31 in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture,
32 humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
33 B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture
34 content.

36 A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until wet-work in spaces is complete and
37 dry, work above ceilings is complete.
42 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
43 2. CertainTeed Corporation.
44 3. United States Gypsum Company.
45 B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and its supporting suspension system
46 from single source from single manufacturer.
47

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
2 A. Ceiling products shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public Health's
3 "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor
4 Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
5 B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify
6 products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
7 1. Flame-Spread Index: Class A according to ASTM E 1264.
8 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

10 A. Basis of Design: Armstrong Optima Square Tegular 2’ x 2’
11 B. Classification: Class A.
12 C. Color: White
13 D. LR: 0.90.
14 E. NRC: 0.95, Type E-400 mounting according to ASTM E 795.
15 F. CAC: N.A.
16 G. AC: 190.
17 H. Edge/Joint Detail: Tegular.
18 I. Thickness: 1”.
19 J. Modular Size: 24” x 24”.
20 K. Suspension System: Narrow faced suspension system.

22 A. Basis of Design: Armstrong Ultima Vector 2’ x 2’
23 B. Classification: Class A.
24 C. Color: White
25 D. LR: 0.87.
26 E. NRC: 0.80, Type E-400 mounting according to ASTM E 795.
27 F. CAC: 35.
28 G. AC: 170.
29 H. Edge/Joint Detail: Vector (per Armstrong).
30 I. Thickness: 1”.
31 J. Modular Size: 24” x 24”.
32 K. Ensure Vector tiles are mounted facing the same direction per the markings on the backs of the tiles.
33 L. Suspension System: Wide faced suspension system.

35 A. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard, direct-hung, metal suspension
36 system and accessories according to ASTM C 635/C 635M and designated by type, structural
37 classification, and finish indicated.
38 B. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less
39 than 25 percent.
40 C. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from
41 cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized, G30 coating
42 designation; with prefinished 15/16-inch-wide metal caps on flanges.
43 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.
44 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type.
45 3. Face Design: Flat, flush.
46 4. Cap Material: Cold-rolled steel.
47 5. Cap Finish: Painted white.
48 D. Narrow-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from
49 cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized, G30 coating
50 designation; with prefinished 9/16-inch-wide metal caps on flanges.
51 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.
52 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type.
53 3. Face Design: Flat, flush.
54 4. Cap Material: Cold-rolled steel.
55 5. Cap Finish: Painted white.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2.6 ACCESSORIES
2 A. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct
3 Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
4 1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for
5 attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to
6 five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to
7 ASTM E 488/E 488M or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and
8 inspecting agency.
9 a. Type: Postinstalled bonded anchors.
10 b. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated according to ASTM B 633,
11 Class SC 1 (mild) service condition.
12 B. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires as follows:
13 1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
14 2. Size: Wire diameter sufficient for its stress at three times hanger design load
15 (ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but not less
16 than 0.106-inch- diameter wire.
17 C. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
18 D. Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
19 E. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04-inch-thick, galvanized-steel
20 sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-
21 inch-diameter bolts.
22 2.7 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM

23 A. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated,
24 manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design
25 requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges
26 of suspension-system runners.
27 1. Edge moldings shall fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and match
28 width and configuration of exposed runners unless otherwise indicated.
29 2. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same
30 depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member.
31 3. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit
32 penetration exactly.
33 2.8 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

34 A. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 07 92 19 "Acoustical Joint Sealants."
36 3.1 EXAMINATION
37 A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings
38 attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections
39 that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other
40 conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.
41 B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or
42 mold damaged.
44 3.2 PREPARATION
45 A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite
46 edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders unless otherwise indicated, and
47 comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
48 B. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items.
49

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3.3 INSTALLATION
2 A. Install acoustical panel ceilings according to ASTM C 636/C 636M and manufacturer's written instructions.
3 B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
4 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum
5 that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
6 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by
7 bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
8 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that
9 interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system
10 members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent
11 devices.
12 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of
13 three tight turns. Connect hangers directly to structure or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices
14 that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to
15 age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
16 5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members,
17 by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the
18 structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a
19 manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated
20 temperatures.
21 6. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying
22 channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.
23 7. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers
24 unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member.
25 8. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance
26 limits established by referenced standards.
27 C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where
28 necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
29 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings
30 before they are installed.
31 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3
32 inches from ends. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
33 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
34 D. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove
35 and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
36 E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system runners and
37 edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide precise fit.
38 1. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm
39 contact with top surface of runner flanges.
40 2. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel
41 surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer.
42 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES

43 A. Suspended Ceilings: Install main and cross runners level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet, non-
44 cumulative.
45 B. Moldings and Trim: Install moldings and trim to substrate and level with ceiling suspension system to a
46 tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet, non-cumulative.
47 3.5 CLEANING
48 A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension-
49 system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish
50 damage.
51 B. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently
52 eliminate evidence of damage.
53 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 09 51 23
2 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
5 1.2 SUMMARY
13 2.2 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS, GENERAL
14 2.5 ACOUSTICAL TILES (ACT-3)
17 3.1 INSTALLATION
18 PART 1 - GENERAL

22 1.2 SUMMARY
23 A. Section includes acoustical tiles and concealed suspension systems for ceilings.
25 1. Section 095113 "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for ceilings consisting of mineral-base and glass-fiber-
26 base acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems.


33 and cost.
35

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 095123 - 1 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown
3 and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
4 1. Ceiling suspension-system members.
5 2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached.
6 3. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
7 a. Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices whose
8 installation is specified in other Sections.
9 4. Carrying channels or other supplemental support for hanger-wire attachment where conditions do
10 not permit installation of hanger wires at required spacing.
11 5. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
12 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling and ceiling-mounted items including the following:
13 a. Lighting fixtures.
14 b. Diffusers.
15 c. Grilles.
16 d. Speakers.
17 e. Sprinklers.
18 f. Access panels.
19 g. Perimeter moldings.
20 7. Show operation of hinged and sliding components adjacent to acoustical tiles.
21 8. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch = 1 foot (1:96).
23 C. Evaluation reports.


27 A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to NVLAP.
30 1. Typical ACT-3 and ESS-1 assembly in open office bay, min. full structural bay x 4ft wide panels
31 each side of ESS-1. Location to be south-east corner of open office at Ground Level.

36 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
37 2. CertainTeed Corporation.
38 3. United States Gypsum Company.
39 B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify
41 1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials.
43 2.2 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS, GENERAL

44 A. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less
45 than 50 percent.
46 B. Acoustical Tile Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264.
47 C. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635.
48 D. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung,"
49 unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
50

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2.3 ACOUSTICAL TILES ACT-3

2 A. Basis of Design: Armstrong Optima Capz 4’ x 4’ nominal, some cut, per the drawings
3 1. Classification: Class A.
4 2. Color: White
5 3. LR: 0.90.
6 4. NRC: 0.95.
7 5. CAC: N.A.
8 6. AC: 190.
9 7. Edge/Joint Detail: square edged, exposed, painted white.
10 8. Thickness: 1”.
11 9. Modular Size: 48” x 48”.
12 B. Butt tile edges hard up against central Unistrut spine in each field of this ceiling type. Ensure slotted
13 channel system is spaced from deck mount to finish flush with this ACT type.

17 B. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.
18 C. Access: Upward, except for Armstrong Capz, which is not accessible.
19 D. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and
20 penetrations complying with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material,
21 finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.
23 3.1 INSTALLATION
24 A. Install acoustical tile ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements
25 indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
26 B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at opposite
27 edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders, and comply with layout shown on
28 reflected ceiling plans.
29 C. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical tiles as indicated on reflected ceiling plans.
30 D. Provide 5% attic stock for each ceiling tile type.
31 END OF SECTION

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2016
1 SECTION 096429
2 WOOD FLOORING
5 1.2 SUMMARY
6 1.3 SUBMITTALS
9 1.6 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS
11 1.8 PROTECTION
12 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
14 2.1 FIELD-FINISHED WOOD FLOORING
17 3.1 EXAMINATION
18 3.2 PREPARATION
19 3.3 INSTALLATION OF WOOD FLOORS ON JOIST FLOOR CONSTRUCTION
20 3.4 FIELD FINISHING OF NEW AND EXISTING WOOD FLOORING
21 3.5 AFTER FINISHING - PROTECTION
22 PART 1 - GENERAL

26 1.2 SUMMARY
27 A. This Section includes:
28 1. Field finished tongue and groove plank wood flooring.
29 2. Re-finishing of existing tongue and groove wood plank flooring.
31 1. Section 26 0533 - Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems to receive wood flooring at recessed
32 electrical floor boxes.
33 1.3 SUBMITTALS
34 A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
35 B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details including location and layout of each type of wood flooring.
36 C. A list of techniques to obtain a finished product. This detailed list shall include all incremental steps and a
37 schedule of preparation, installation, sanding, finishing, and protection.
38 D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's wood species and installer’s color charts showing the full range
39 of colors and finishes available for wood flooring. If re-claimed or salvaged hardwood flooring is to be used,
40 provide samples representative of the flooring to be used.
41 E. Re-claimed flooring products: Prior to obtaining re-claimed flooring, mock-ups shall be constructed in order
42 to illustrate the likeness between the original floor and the re-claimed floor materials.
43 F. Samples for Verification: For each type of wood flooring and accessory, with stain color and finish required,
44 approximately 24 inches long and of same thickness and material indicated for the Work and showing the
45 full range of normal color and texture variations expected.
46 G. Mockups: Refer to Section 01 43 39. Provide mock up quantities and locations.
47 1. Mockups for material installation shall be a minimum of 3’x3’ to serve as the representative sample
48 of each type of wood to be installed. Wood type mock-ups may be placed on moveable plates but
49 all materials in constructing the plates shall match the substrates of the floor to which the actual wood
50 floor is to be installed. Material sample mockups shall be constructed of the anticipated range of
51 quality of the delivered on-site product. “Typical” sample boards supplied by the hardwood flooring
52 supplier will not be accepted. Mockups shall serve to set quality standards for installation and shall
53 determine the color and texture range for floor to be installed. Approved mock-ups shall stay on-site
54 following approval. See section 1.4 of this specification for additional mock-up requirements.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 096429 - 1 WOOD FLOORING
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2016
1 2. Locations for finishes and care shall be a minimum of 3’ x 3’ to serve as representative samples of
2 each type of wood flooring in the house and shall serve as the standard of work quality to the
3 remainder of the work. Finish mockup locations are indicated on the drawing accompanying this
4 specification. Mock-ups shall stay on-site following approval.

6 A. Source Limitations: For new field-finished wood flooring, obtain each species, grade, and cut of wood from
7 one source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and
8 physical properties.
9 B. Re-claimed Wood: For wood flooring products to be installed from re-claimed supply, the source and location
10 of the reclaimed wood shall come from one location and supplier.
11 C. Forest Certification: Provide new wood flooring produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an
12 FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC 1.2, "Principles and Criteria."
13 D. Hardwood Flooring: Comply with NOFMA's "Official Flooring Grading Rules" for species, grade, and cut.
14 1. Certification: Provide flooring that carries NOFMA grade stamp on each bundle or piece.
15 2. Overstock: Provide 5% overstock of each floor tile type that does not meet the approved color range.
16 E. Conform to the National Wood Flooring Association’s (NWFA) "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring”.
17 F. Mockups: Refer to Section 01043 39. Install mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals
18 and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
19 1. To set quality standards for installation, install mockups of each representative floor area at locations
20 approved in the shop submittals
21 2. To set quality standards for material installation, sanding and application of field finishes, prepare
22 finish mockup of floor area.
23 3. Mock ups in areas where the existing floor is present shall be completed while the existing floor
24 remains shall be done in a way that protects the existing floor.
25 4. Work can continue only after written authorization from the architect to that finish and appearance
26 are acceptable

28 A. Prior to the delivery of materials, supplier, contractor and installer shall coordinate the time and location of
29 material delivery.
30 B. On the day of material delivery, installer must be present to verify the material is correct as specified. The
31 installer shall approve all deliveries of material and will coordinate the location of storage for the material to
32 be delivered with contractor.
33 C. Deliver wood flooring materials in unopened cartons or bundles. Cartons or bundles delivered on wood
34 pallets shall be evenly stacked, and thoroughly wrapped in secured to prevent damage after delivery. Each
35 pallet, carton or bundle shall be clearly marked with the following
36 1. Species
37 2. Plank size
38 3. Floor or general location where product will be used
39 D. Protect wood flooring from exposure to moisture. Do not deliver wood flooring until after concrete, masonry,
40 plaster, ceramic tile, and similar wet work is complete and dry. Proceed with delivery of wood floor materials
41 as directed by the contractor.
42 E. Do not store wood flooring in plastic containers or in wrapping that might cases moisture or condensation to
43 be trapped in the containers.
44 F. Do not store wood flooring, even if it is in a container, directly in contact with concrete, dirt or the ground,
45 plumbing or any other water source.
46 G. Store wood flooring materials away from exterior doors, HVAC equipment, supply ducts or return duct work
47 H. Store wood flooring materials away from areas where painting,, welding, soldering, or use of power driven
48 tools are used.
49 I. Store wood flooring materials in a dry, warm, ventilated, weather tight location.
50 J. While in storage, conduct selected moisture tests weekly and monitor the moisture content of the floor.
51 Maintain a moisture content between 5%-8%
52 K. If the product is to be moved it shall be handled carefully so as not to cause damage. The flooring materials
53 may not be moved using power or motorized equipment, such as a fork lift, unless it is stored on wood
54 pallets.
55 1.6 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS

56 A. Installer shall have completed similar scale and scope of projects prior to beginning of the work.
57 B. Installer shall have at least 10 years of experience in installing, re-finishing, and finishing wood floors of
58 tongue and groove maple.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2016
1 C. Installer shall be able to provide the owner with a portfolio of projects illustrating similar completed work and
2 references with contacts to verify work. Projects shall be similar in scope and size to this project. Similar
3 projects included within the portfolio shall be in number: a minimum of 5 projects completed within the last
4 three years.
5 D. Installer shall be a member of the National Wood Flooring Association in good standing and shall have
6 access to their full array of publications, technical specifications and product literature. Such documents are
7 referenced within this specification and guide the standard of quality for this project.
8 E. The installer must be prepared to show in writing that a source for re-claimed wood flooring has been located
9 and will be acquired upon approval by the owner and architect.
10 F. Installer shall have the necessary tools and equipment to fulfill the work as specified. It shall be the
11 responsibility of the installer to operate and maintain the equipment so it functions within the correct
12 operating and safety perimeters.

14 A. The building should be completely enclosed
15 B. All outside doors and windows must be in place and have latching mechanisms
16 C. Surface Drainage should direct water away from the building
17 D. All concrete, masonry, plastering, drywall, and other wet work should be completed and thoroughly dry.
18 Verify these conditions with the contractor
19 E. All existing flooring to be refinished should have a moisture content within the parameters indicated in
20 NWFA's "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring”.
21 F. Substrate Inspection: Prior to installation, carefully inspect the substrate plywood or boards for the following:
22 1. Level and true
23 2. Properly nailed or fastened
24 3. Correct joinery
25 4. Proper coverage
26 5. Unused holes or penetrations
27 6. If holes or penetrations are intended but no yet cut though substrate, conduct at this time. Provide
28 proper blocking beneath substrate to prevent deflection
29
30 G. Upon completion of the inspection of the substrate it shall be the responsibility of the contractor to fix all
31 substrate deficiencies prior to installation and finishing
32 H. HVAC system shall be in place and properly functioning
33 I. All texturing and painting primer coats should be completed prior to installation of the wood floors
34 J. Floor will not be exposed to extremes of humidity or moisture. Interior environmental conditions must be
35 near the average for the geographical area.
36 K. Conditioning period begins not less than seven days before wood flooring installation, is continuous through
37 installation, and continues not less than seven days after wood flooring installation.
38 1. Environmental Conditioning: Maintain an ambient temperature between 65 and 75 deg F and relative
39 humidity planned for building occupants in spaces to receive wood flooring during the conditioning
40 period.
41 2. Wood Flooring Conditioning: Move wood flooring into spaces where it will be installed, no later than
42 the beginning of the conditioning period.
43 a. Do not install flooring until it adjusts to relative humidity of, and is at same temperature as,
44 space where it is to be installed.
45 b. Open sealed packages to allow wood flooring to acclimatize immediately on moving flooring
46 into spaces in which it will be installed.
47 L. After conditioning period, maintain relative humidity and ambient temperature planned for building
48 occupants.
49 M. Finish wood flooring after other finishing operations, including painting of plaster, have been completed but
50 before the installation of the finish baseboards .
51 1.8 PROTECTION
52 A. Protect adjacent walls, plaster, trim and finished surfaces from scratches, dents, or other damage during all
53 phases of the installation. Use pads, guards, protection board or sheets to prevent damage
54 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

55 A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that
56 are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
57 1. Wood Flooring: Equal to 2 (two) percent of amount installed for each type of wood flooring indicated.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2016
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 2.1 FIELD-FINISHED WOOD FLOORING

3 A. If new, the wood shall be Kiln dried to 6 to 9 percent maximum moisture content, tongue and groove, edge
4 grain, and end matched, and with backs channeled (kerfed) for stress relief.
5 B. Solid-Wood, Strip flooring Type WD-1: This wood type may be existing to remain, re-claimed historic, or new
6 to match historic.
7 1. Species and Grade: White Maple.
8 2. Cut: edge grain
9 3. Thickness: 3/4 inch
10 4. Face Width: 2-1/4 inches.
11 5. Lengths: 4’-0 minimum.
12 6. Location: Provide flooring type WD-1 to areas indicated on the room finish schedule.
13 7. This wood type, as approved from mockups, shall be reclaimed or brand new. Provide samples of
14 both new and reclaimed for approval.
15 8. Obtain written approval of sample prior to purchasing wood floor type WD-1 new or reclaimed.
16 C. Solid Wood Strip flooring Type WD-2: Soft Maple Flooring. This wood type may be existing to remain or re-
17 claimed historic, or new.
18 1. Species and Grade: Select Soft Maple – White Maple.
19 2. Cut: Rift Sawn.
21 4. Face Width: 2-1/4 inches.
22 5. Lengths: Comply to NOFMA and NWFA standards.
23 6. Location: Provide flooring type WD-2 to areas indicated on the attached floor plans.
24 7. This wood type, as approved from samples, shall be brand new.
25 8. Obtain written approval of samples prior to purchasing wood floor type WD-2 new or reclaimed.

27 A. Sand Paper: Use materials as recommended by NWFA's "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring”.
28 B. Application Materials: Use materials as recommended by NWFA's "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring”.
29 C. Wood Flooring Adhesive: Mastic recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers for application
30 indicated.
31 D. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compound: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation
32 approved by wood flooring manufacturer.
33 E. Resilient acoustical mat below all areas of new wood floor over existing concrete topping: MAT-2 – refer to
34 Materials List 000020 for product reference.
35 F. Fasteners: As recommended by NWFA's "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring”. Use sizes and spacing
36 to conform to Section V appendix item CA
37 G. Cork Expansion Strip: Composition cork strip.
38 H. Trim:
39 1. Base: Existing and new where required – see A700-series drawings
40 2. Base Shoe Molding: None
41 3. Threshold: Of the same species as the floor. Threshold locations shall match the original profiles
42 and locations. Installer shall coordinate with the contractor to obtain profiles and locations of original
43 thresholds. Each threshold shall be tapered on each side and routed at bottom of one side to
44 accommodate wood flooring. See detail 1 on sheet A6.1.
45 4. Reducer Strip: wide, tapered on 1 side, and in thickness matching wood flooring.
46 5. Grille Frames: Coordinate with contractor and grille installer for grille sizes. All grille openings shall
47 be trimmed in picture frame style edges sized to fit the respective grille opening. Cut proper profile
48 to ensure the grille is properly set in the opening and site flush with the top of the wood floor.
49 I. Finishing Materials: As approved from submittals. Finishing materials shall be water-based.
50 1. Materials for finishing shall include penetrating stains to achieve proper color and a natural
51 conversion varnish for a durable finish coat
52 2. Manufacturers:
53 a. Bonakemi USA, Inc.-Stains and polyurethane coatings
54 b. Approved equal

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2016
2 3.1 EXAMINATION
3 A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
4 maximum moisture content, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of wood
5 flooring.
6 1. Verify that substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections.
7 2. For adhesively applied wood flooring, verify that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions,
8 scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
9 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
10 B. Substrate Moisture Testing, General: Perform tests to comply with applicable recommendations in NWFA's
11 "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring.".
12 3.2 PREPARATION
13 A. Grind high spots and fill low spots on concrete substrates to produce a maximum 1/8-inch deviation in any
14 direction when checked with a 10-foot straight edge.
15 B. Repair substrate boards to ensure level surfaces within the tolerances indicated in NWFA's "Installation
16 Guidelines: Wood Flooring."
17 C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances on substrates that are incompatible
18 with installation adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods
19 recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
20 D. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before product installation. After cleaning,
21 examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with installation only after
22 unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
23 E. Layout all flooring for a given area and select boards of uniform color range for installation. Discard all
24 boards not of uniform color or install these boards inside closets.
25 3.3 INSTALLATION OF WOOD FLOORS ON WOOD SLEEPER CONSTRUCTION

26 A. Comply with flooring manufacturer's written installation instructions, but not less than applicable
27 recommendations in NWFA's "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring."
28 B. Subfloor: Prepare and according to requirements within this specification and with NWFA's "Installation
29 Guidelines: Wood Flooring."
30 C. Provide expansion space at walls and other obstructions and terminations of flooring per the specifications
31 indicated in of NWFA's "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring."
32 D. Asphalt-Saturated Felt: Where strip or plank flooring is nailed to solid-wood subfloor, install flooring over a
33 layer of asphalt-saturated felt.
34 E. Solid-Wood, Plank Flooring: Blind nail or staple flooring to substrate with method recommended by NWFA's
35 "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring."
36 1. Wood Trim: Nail baseboard to wall and nail shoe molding or other trim to baseboard; do not nail to
37 flooring.
38 3.4 FIELD FINISHING OF NEW AND EXISTING WOOD FLOORING

39 A. Machine-sand flooring to remove offsets, ridges, cups, and sanding-machine marks that would be noticeable
40 after finishing. Vacuum and tack with a clean cloth immediately before applying finish.
41 1. Comply with applicable recommendations in NWFA's "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring."
42 B. Where possible Fill and repair wood flooring seams and defects.
43 1. Apply floor-finish materials as recommended by finish manufacturer for application indicated and as
44 specified in NWFA's "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring."
45 C. Do not use less than one coat of floor sealer and Four finish coats.
46 1. Apply stains and preservative coats to achieve an even color distribution matching approved
47 Samples and mock-up panels.
48 D. Cover wood flooring after finishing.
49 E. Do not cover wood flooring after finishing until finish reaches full cure, and not before seven days after
50 applying last finish coat.
51 3.5 AFTER FINISHING - PROTECTION

52 A. Protect installed wood flooring during remainder of construction period with covering of heavy kraft paper or
53 other suitable material. Do not use plastic sheet or film that might cause condensation.
54 1. Use Red Rosin Kraft Paper to cover all surfaces. Leave max. of 6” around the edges of all walls for
55 installation of finish trim and shoe.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2016
1 2. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over kraft-paper-covered wood flooring. Protect
2 flooring with plywood or hardboard panels to prevent damage from storing or moving objects over
3 flooring.
4 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 09 65 13
2 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
5 1.2 SUMMARY
8 2.1 THERMOSET-RUBBER BASE (RB-1)
9 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
11 3.1 PREPARATION
12 3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
14 PART 1 - GENERAL

18 1.2 SUMMARY
20 1. Resilient base.

25 C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12 inches long.
27 2.1 THERMOSET-RUBBER BASE (RB-1)

29 may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
30 1. Johnsonite; A Tarkett Company.
31 B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group I (solid, homogeneous).
32 1. Style and Location:
33 a. Style A, Straight: Provide in areas with carpet and resilient flooring.
34 C. Thickness: 0.125 inch.
35 D. Height: 4 inches.
36 E. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long or coils in manufacturer's standard length.
37 F. Outside Corners: Job formed or preformed.
38 G. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed.
39 H. Colors: 63 Burnt Umber
40 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

41 A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended
42 hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for
43 applications indicated.
44 B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and
45 substrate conditions indicated.
46 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50] g/L or less and 60 g/L or less for rubber stair treads.
47 C. Stair-Tread Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient stair-tread manufacturer to
48 fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.
49 D. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by resilient stair-tread
50 manufacturer.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 096513 - 1 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
2 3.1 PREPARATION
3 A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient
4 products.
5 B. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be
6 installed.
7 3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

8 A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
9 B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
10 permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
11 C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces
12 aligned.
13 D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact
14 with horizontal and vertical substrates.
15 E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
16 F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with
17 manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
18 G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.
19 H. Job-Formed Corners:
20 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less
21 than 6 inches in length.
22 a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.
23 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less
24 than 3 inches in length.
25 a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints.

27 A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.
28 END OF SECTION

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 096513 - 2 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 09 66 13
2 PORTLAND CEMENT TERRAZZO FLOORING
5 1.2 SUMMARY
12 2.2 PORTLAND CEMENT TERRAZZO
13 2.3 STRIP MATERIALS
14 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
16 3.1 PREPARATION
17 3.2 INSTALLATION
19 PART 1 - GENERAL

23 1.2 SUMMARY
24 A. Section includes poured-in-place portland cement terrazzo flooring.

29 cost.
31 C. Shop Drawings: Include terrazzo installation requirements. Include plans, elevations, sections, component
32 details, and attachments to other work.


37 A. Installer Qualifications: An installer who is a contractor member of NTMA.
38 B. Mockup: Refer to Section 01 43 39 – Mockups for description of construction required to complete a mockup
40 C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic

43 A. Environmental Limitations: Maintain temperature above 50 deg F for 48 hours before and during terrazzo
44 installation.
45 B. Control and collect water and dust produced by grinding operations. Protect adjacent construction from
46 detrimental effects of grinding operations.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 096613 - 1 PORTLAND CEMENT TERRAZZO FLOORING
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

3 A. NTMA Standards: Comply with NTMA's "Terrazzo Specifications and Design Guide" and with written
4 recommendations for terrazzo type indicated unless more stringent requirements are specified.
5 2.2 PORTLAND CEMENT TERRAZZO

6 A. Portland Cement Terrazzo System (TZ-1): Monolithic.
7 1. Underbed: Comply with NTMA's "Terrazzo Specifications and Design Guide" for terrazzo system
8 indicated for component proportions and mixing.
9 2. Topping: Comply with NTMA's "Terrazzo Specifications and Design Guide" for terrazzo system
10 indicated for matrix and aggregate proportions and mixing.
11 a. Terrazzo Topping Thickness: As indicated.
12 b. Mix Color and Pattern: Refer to Material Tag Index.
13 B. Materials:
14 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1.
15 a. Color for Exposed Matrix: Refer to Material Tag Index.
16 2. Water: Potable.
17 3. Sand: ASTM C 33/C 33M.
18 4. Aggregates: Comply with NTMA gradation standards for mix indicated and contain no deleterious or
19 foreign matter.
20 a. Abrasion and Impact Resistance: Less than 40 percent loss per ASTM C 131.
21 b. 24-Hour Absorption Rate: Less than 0.75 percent.
22 c. Dust Content: Less than 1.0 percent by weight.
23 5. Matrix Pigments: Pure mineral or synthetic pigments, alkali resistant, durable under exposure to
24 sunlight, and compatible with terrazzo matrix.
25 6. Bonding Agent: Neat portland cement, or epoxy or acrylic bonding agents formulated for use with
26 topping indicated.
27 2.3 STRIP MATERIALS

28 A. Standard Divider Strips: One-piece, flat-type strips for grouting into sawed joints prepared in substrate.
29 1. Material: Brass.
30 2. Depth: As indicated.
31 3. Width: As indicated.
32 B. Control-Joint Strips: Separate, double L-type angles, positioned back to back, that match material and color
33 of divider strips and in depth required for topping thickness indicated.
34 C. Accessory Strips: Match divider-strip width, material, and color unless otherwise indicated. Use the following
35 types of accessory strips as required to provide a complete installation:
36 1. Base-bead strips for exposed top edge of terrazzo base.
37 2. Edge-bead strips for exposed edges of terrazzo.
38 3. Nosings for terrazzo stair treads and landings.
39 D. Abrasive Strips: Abrasive nosing strip and two-line abrasive inserts at nosings. Silicon carbide or aluminum
40 oxide, or combination of both, in epoxy-resin binder and set in channel.
41 1. Width: 1/2 inch.
42 2. Depth: As required by terrazzo thickness.
43 3. Length: 4 inches less than stair width.
44 4. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
45 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES

46 A. Strip Adhesive: Recommended by manufacturer for this use.
48 B. Strip Anchoring Devices: Provide mechanical anchoring devices or adhesives for strip materials as
49 recommended by manufacturer and as required for secure attachment to substrate.
50 C. Isolation and Expansion-Joint Material: Closed-cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid water and
51 gas, and non-outgassing in unruptured state; butyl rubber; rubber; or cork; minimum 1/2 inch wide.
52 D. Portland Cement Terrazzo Cleaner: Chemically neutral cleaner with pH factor between 7 and 10 that is
53 biodegradable, phosphate free, and recommended by cleaner manufacturer for use on terrazzo type
54 indicated.
55

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 E. Sealer: Slip- and stain-resistant, penetrating-type sealer that is chemically neutral; does not affect terrazzo
2 color or physical properties; is recommended by sealer manufacturer; and complies with NTMA's "Terrazzo
3 Specifications and Design Guide" for terrazzo type indicated.
4 1. Surface Friction: Not less than 0.6 according to ASTM D 2047.
5 2. Acid-Base Properties: With pH factor between 7 and 10.
7 3.1 PREPARATION
8 A. Clean substrates of substances, including oil, grease, and curing compounds, that might impair terrazzo
9 bond. Provide clean, dry, and neutral substrate for terrazzo application.
10 1. Roughen concrete substrates before installing terrazzo system according to NTMA's written
11 recommendations.
12 B. Verify that concrete substrates are dry and moisture-vapor emissions are within acceptable levels according
14 1. Moisture Testing: Test for moisture content by method recommended in writing by terrazzo
15 manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
16 3.2 INSTALLATION
17 A. Comply with NTMA's written recommendations for terrazzo and accessory installation.
18 B. Installation Tolerance: Limit variation in terrazzo surface from level to 1/4 inch in 10 feet; noncumulative.
19 C. Underbed:
20 1. Comply with NTMA's "Terrazzo Specifications and Design Guide" for underbed installation.
21 2. Cover entire surface to receive terrazzo with dusting of sand.
22 3. Install isolation membrane over sand, overlapping ends and edges a minimum of 3 inches.
23 4. Install welded-wire reinforcement, overlapping at edges and ends at least two squares. Stop mesh a
24 minimum of 1 inch short of expansion joints.
25 5. Place underbed and screed to elevation indicated below finished floor elevation.
26 D. Strip Materials:
27 1. Divider and Control-Joint Strips:
28 a. Locate divider strips directly over control joints, breaks, and saw cuts in concrete slabs.
29 2. Accessory Strips: Install as required to provide a complete installation.
30 3. Abrasive Strips: Install with surface of abrasive strip positioned 1/16 inch higher than terrazzo
31 surface.
32 E. Terrazzo Installation: Pour in place and seed additional aggregates in matrix to uniformly distribute granular
33 material and produce a surface with a minimum of 70 percent aggregate exposure. Cure and finish portland
34 cement terrazzo according to NTMA's "Terrazzo Specifications and Design Guide" for terrazzo type
35 indicated.
36 F. Repair: Cut out and replace terrazzo areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate or underbed, including
37 areas that emit a "hollow" sound if tapped. Cut out terrazzo areas in panels defined by strips and replace to
38 match adjacent terrazzo, or repair panels according to NTMA's written recommendations, as approved by
39 Architect.

41 A. Terrazzo Cleaning:
42 1. Remove grinding dust from installation and adjacent areas.
43 2. Wash surfaces with cleaner immediately after final cleaning of terrazzo flooring according to NTMA's
44 written recommendations and manufacturer's written instructions; rinse surfaces with water and allow
45 them to dry thoroughly.
46 B. Sealing:
47 1. Seal surfaces according to NTMA's written recommendations.
48 2. Apply sealer according to sealer manufacturer's written instructions.
49 C. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure
50 that terrazzo is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
51 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 09 67 23
2 RESINOUS FLOORING
4 1.1 SUMMARY
12 2.2 RESINOUS FLOORING (EPOXY-1)
14 3.1 PREPARATION
15 3.2 APPLICATION
16 PART 1 - GENERAL
17 1.1 SUMMARY
18 A. Section includes resinous flooring systems.


24 C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.

26 A. Material certificates.
27 B. Material test reports.


31 A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.

33 A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrate
34 temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions affecting resinous flooring
35 application.
36 B. Lighting: Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate permanent lighting
37 conditions during resinous flooring application.
38 C. Close spaces to traffic during resinous flooring application and for 24 hours after application unless
39 manufacturer recommends a longer period.
40
MADISON MUNICIPAL BUILDING RENOVATION ` BID ISSUE

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 096723 - 1 RESINOUS FLOORING
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 2.1 RESINOUS FLOORING (EPOXY-1)

3 A. Resinous Flooring System: Abrasion-, impact-, and chemical-resistant, aggregate-filled, and resin-based
4 monolithic floor surfacing designed to produce a seamless floor and integral cove base.
5 B. System Characteristics:
6 1. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
7 2. Wearing Surface: Textured for slip resistance.
8 3. Overall System Thickness: Minimum 3/16 inch.
9 4. Federal Agency Approvals: USDA approved for food-processing environments.
10 C. Primer: Type recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer for substrate and resinous flooring system
11 indicated.
12 D. Patching and Fill Material: Resinous product of or approved by resinous flooring manufacturer and
13 recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.
14 E. Body Coats:
15 1. Resin: Epoxy.
16 2. Formulation Description: 100 percent solids.
17 3. Type: Pigmented.
18 4. Application Method: Troweled or screeded.
19 5. Number of Coats: One.
20 6. Thickness of Coats: 1/8 inch.
21 7. Aggregates: Colored quartz (ceramic-coated silica).
22 F. Topcoats: Sealing or finish coats.
23 1. Resin: Epoxy.
24 2. Formulation Description: 100 percent solids.
25 3. Type: Clear.
26 4. Number of Coats: One.
27 5. Thickness of Coats: 1/16 inch.
28 6. Finish: Matte.
29 G. System Physical Properties: Provide resinous flooring system with the following minimum physical
30 property requirements when tested according to test methods indicated:
31 1. Compressive Strength: 10,000 psi minimum according to ASTM C 579.
32 2. Tensile Strength: 2000 psi minimum according to ASTM C 307.
33 3. Flexural Strength: 4000 psi minimum according to ASTM C 580.
34 4. Water Absorption: 0.05 percent maximum according to ASTM C 413.
35 5. Coefficient of Friction: 0.9 according to ASTM D-2047.
37 3.1 PREPARATION
38 A. Prepare and clean substrates according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for
39 substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry substrate for resinous flooring application.
40 B. Concrete Substrates: Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing
41 compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants incompatible with resinous
42 flooring.
43 1. Roughen concrete substrates as follows:
44 a. Shot-blast surfaces with an apparatus that abrades the concrete surface, contains the
45 dispensed shot within the apparatus, and recirculates the shot by vacuum pickup.
46 b. Comply with ASTM C 811 requirements unless manufacturer's written instructions are more
47 stringent.
48 2. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written
49 instructions.
50 3. Verify that concrete substrates are dry and moisture-vapor emissions are within acceptable levels
51 according to manufacturer's written instructions.
52 4. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Verify that concrete substrates have pH within acceptable range.
53 Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with application only after substrates pass
54 testing.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 C. Patching and Filling: Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according to
3 D. Resinous Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to resinous flooring manufacturer's
5 3.2 APPLICATION
6 A. Apply components of resinous flooring system according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce
7 a uniform, monolithic wearing surface of thickness indicated.
8 1. Expansion and Isolation Joint Treatment: At substrate expansion and isolation joints, comply with
9 resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions.
10 B. Primer: Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.
11 C. Integral Cove Base: Apply cove base mix to wall surfaces before applying flooring. Apply according to
12 manufacturer's written instructions. Round internal and external corners.
13 1. Integral Cove Base: 4 inches high.
14 D. Troweled or Screeded Body Coats: Apply troweled or screeded body coats in thickness indicated for
15 flooring system. Hand or power trowel and grout to fill voids. When body coats are cured, remove trowel
16 marks and roughness using method recommended by manufacturer.
17 1. Aggregates: Broadcast aggregates at rate recommended by manufacturer and, after resin is cured,
18 remove excess aggregates to provide surface texture indicated.
19 E. Topcoats: Apply topcoats in number indicated for flooring system and at spreading rates recommended in
20 writing by manufacturer and to produce wearing surface indicated.
21 F. Protect resinous flooring from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period.
22 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 09 68 13
2 TILE CARPETING
5 1.2 SUMMARY
11 1.8 WARRANTY
13 2.1 CARPET TILE (CPT-1)
14 2.2 CARPET TILE (MAT-1)
15 2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
17 3.2 PREPARATION
18 3.3 INSTALLATION
19 PART 1 - GENERAL

23 1.2 SUMMARY
24 A. Section includes modular carpet tile.


31 2. Laboratory Test Reports: For flooring products, indicating compliance with requirements for testing
32 and product requirements of CRI's "Green Label Plus" testing program.
33 3. Laboratory Test Reports: For flooring products, indicating compliance with requirements for low-
35 C. Shop Drawings: For carpet tile installation, plans showing the following:
36 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are
37 required in carpet tiles.
38 2. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot.
39 3. Type of subfloor.
40 4. Type of installation.
41 5. Pattern of installation.
42 6. Pattern type, location, and direction.
43 7. Pile direction.
44 8. Type, color, and location of insets and borders.
45 9. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips.
46 10. Transition details to other flooring materials.
47 D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture required.
48

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 096813 - 1 TILE CARPETING
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

3 B. Sample warranty.


7 A. Installer Qualifications: Certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the
8 Commercial II certification level.
9 1.8 WARRANTY
10 A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile
11 installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
14 2.1 CARPET TILE (CPT-1)

15 A. Tandus, Centiva
16 B. Color: Galvanized Pewter 11709
17 C. Pattern: Avant 04840
18 D. Installation: Vertical Ashlar
19 E. Reclamation: 100% recyclable in the ReStart® Program
20 F. Stain Resistance: >8 (AATCC 175-08 Stain Resistance Pile Floor Coverings)
21 G. Platform Sizes: 9 inches x 36 inches tile.
22 H. Primary Backing: ER3® Modular with RS adhesive, 10-40 OSY yarn
23 1. Minimum 45% Recycled Content, with at least 20% Post-consumer content and the balance (25%)
24 Pre-consumer content (dry weightbasis).
25 I. Construction: Stratatec® Patterned Symtex®
26 J. Face Weight: 25 oz/sq yd | 848 g/sq m
27 K. Gauge: 5/64 | 50.4 rows/ 10 cm
28 L. Stitches Per Inch: 10.4 stitches / inch | 40.9 stitches/10 cm
29 M. Pile Height Average: .187 inch | 4.7 mm
30 N. Fiber System: Dynex SD® Nylon (Permanent Stain Resistance)
31 O. Dye Method: 100% Solution Dyed
32 P. Soil/Stain Protection: Ensure
33 Q. Colorfastness to Light: > 4 after 100 hours (AATCC 16E)
34 R. Fluorine: Minimum 500 ppm (CRI TM-102).
35 S. Antimicrobial Chemicals: No antimicrobials (EPA Registered pesticides) added to product (ASTM E2471-
36 05)
37 T. Electrostatic Propensity: 1.4 kV (AATCC 134); Permanent Conductive Fiber
38 U. Surface Flammability: Passes CPSC FF 1-70 (ASTM D-2859)
39 V. Flooring Radiant Panel: Class 1 (mean average CRF: 0.45 w/sq cm or higher) (ASTM E-648)
40 W. Smoke Generation: Less than 450 (ASTM E-662)
41 X. Installation Method: Vertical Ashlar -9 inches X 36 inches.
42 2.2 CARPET TILE (MAT-1)

43 A. Interface – Entry Level Colorline.
44 B. Color: Refer to Material Tag List.
45 C. Style: 1290102500.
46 D. Installation: Refer to Drawing.
47 E. Fiber Content: 100 percent nylon 6, 6.
48 F. Fiber Type: Solution dyed.
49 G. Pile Characteristic: Tufted textured loop.
50 H. Density: 6720 oz./cu. yd.
51 I. Pile Thickness: .150 inches for finished carpet tile.
52 J. Primary Backing/Backcoating: Glasbac tile.
53 K. Size: 50 cm by 50 cm.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 L. Applied Treatments:
2 1. Preservative Treatment: Intersept.
3 2. Soil-Resistance Treatment: Protekt2.
4 M. Sustainable Design Requirements:
5 1. Carpet and cushion shall comply with testing and product requirements of CRI's "Green Label Plus"
6 testing program.
7 2. Recycled Content: 42%.
8 N. Warranty: 15 years.
9 2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

10 A. Carpet Accessory: Trim CPTTRIM-1: Refer to Material Tag list.
11 1. Description: Carpet to concrete transition.
12 a. Manufacturer: TrafficMaster
13 b. Collection: Silver Hammared carpet tack bar
15 B. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation
16 provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
17 C. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and
18 subfloor conditions indicated, that comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile, and are
19 recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.
22 3.1 PREPARATION
23 A. General: Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standards" and with carpet tile manufacturer's written
24 installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile.
25 B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill
26 cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8
27 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch unless more stringent requirements are required
28 by manufacturer's written instructions.
29 C. Concrete Substrates: Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are
30 incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use
31 mechanical methods recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet tile manufacturers.
32 D. Metal Substrates: Clean grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if recommended in writing by adhesive
33 manufacturer. Rough sand painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum surfaces, to
34 remove metal oxides, immediately before applying adhesive.
35 E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.
36 3.2 INSTALLATION
37 A. General: Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard," Section 18, "Modular Carpet" and with
38 carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.
39 B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
40 C. Maintain dye-lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.
41 D. Maintain pile-direction patterns recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
42 E. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including
43 cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by
44 carpet tile manufacturer.
45 F. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges,
46 alcoves, and similar openings.
47 G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating
48 on carpet tile as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.
49 H. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
50 I. Access Flooring: Stagger joints of carpet tiles so carpet tile grid is offset from access flooring panel grid.
51 Do not fill seams of access flooring panels with carpet adhesive; keep seams free of adhesive.
52 J. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures
53 during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing
54 by carpet tile manufacturer.
55 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 09 75 16
2 STONE BASE
5 1.2 SUMMARY
9 2.1 STONE, GENERAL
10 2.2 MARBLE [BASE-1]
13 2.5 GROUT
14 2.6 POINTING MORTAR MATERIALS
15 2.7 STONE FABRICATION
16 2.8 MIXES
18 3.1 SETTING STONE, GENERAL
19 3.2 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
20 3.3 INSTALLATION OF STONE BASE
21 3.4 GROUTING JOINTS
23 PART 1 - GENERAL

27 1.2 SUMMARY
28 A. Section includes stone base.

30 A. Product Data: For each variety of stone, stone accessory, and manufactured product.
36 C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for stone base, including dimensions and profiles
37 of stone units.
38 D. Samples for Verification:
39 1. For each stone type indicated. Include two or more Samples in each set and show the full range of
40 variations in appearance characteristics in completed Work.
41 2. For each color of grout required.

45 B. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and
46 installation.
47 1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings.
48 2. Build mockup for stone base, not less than 72 inches long.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 097516 - 1 STONE BASE
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 2.1 STONE, GENERAL

3 A. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone, regardless of finish, from a single
4 quarry, whether specified in this Section or in another Section of the Specifications.
5 B. Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide stone of varieties and from
6 sources complying with Section 04 45 50 "Existing Marble Refrbishment."
7 C. Regional Materials: Stone shall be fabricated within 500 miles of Project site from materials that have been
8 extracted, harvested, or recovered within 500 miles of Project site.

10 A. Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 503.
11 B. Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
12 1. Stone Species: Tinos Oasis Green Marble Polished.
13 C. Finish: Match Architect's sample of existing historic marble wall base.
14 D. Match Architect's samples.

16 A. Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 503.
17 B. Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
18 1. Stone Species: White Carrera Marble – polished..
19 C. Finish: Match Architect's sample, and match profile of existing historic marble wall base.
20 D. Match Architect's samples.

22 A. Molding Plaster (Dry locations): ASTM C 59/C 59M.
23 B. Setting Spots (Wet location): Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II.
24 1. Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114.
25 C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
26 D. Aggregate: ASTM C 144.
27 E. Water: Potable.
28 F. Adhesives, General: Use only adhesives formulated for stone and ceramic tile and recommended by their
29 manufacturer for the application indicated.
30 G. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Adhesive (As needed for application): ANSI A118.3.
32 2.5 GROUT
33 A. Grout Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
34 B. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, composed of white or gray cement and white or colored
35 aggregate to produce required color.
36 C. Standard Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, packaged.
37 D. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7, packaged.
38 2.6 POINTING MORTAR MATERIALS

39 A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II. Provide natural color or white cement as required to
40 produce mortar color indicated.
41 1. Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114.
42 B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
43 2.7 STONE FABRICATION

44 A. Select stone for intended use to prevent fabricated units from containing cracks, seams, and starts that
45 could impair structural integrity or function.
46 B. Cut stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated and to comply with fabrication and
47 construction tolerances recommended by applicable stone association.
48 1. Where items are installed with adhesive or where stone edges are visible in the finished work,
49 make items uniform in thickness and of identical thickness for each type of item; gage back of
50 stone if necessary.
51 2. Dress joints straight and at right angle to face unless otherwise indicated.
52

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 C. Fabricate molded work to produce stone shapes with a uniform profile throughout entire unit length and
2 with precisely formed arris slightly eased to prevent snipping, and matched at joints between units.
3 1. Produce moldings with machines having abrasive shaping wheels made to reverse contour of
4 molding shape; do not sculpt moldings.
5 D. Nominal Thickness: Refer to Drawings.
6 E. Top-Edge Detail: square to match existing historic marble base.
7 F. Ends: square to match existing historic marble base unless otherwise indicated.
8 G. Joints: 3/16-inch-wide grouted joints.
9 1. Locate joints at midpoints between adjacent paneling joints unless otherwise indicated.
10 2.8 MIXES
11 A. Spotting Plaster: Stiff mix of molding plaster and water.
12 B. Mortar, General: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written instructions for mix
13 proportions, mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures
14 needed to produce mortar of uniform quality and with optimum performance characteristics.
15 1. Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-
16 repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. Do not
17 use calcium chloride.
18 2. Combine and thoroughly mix cementitious materials, water, and aggregates in a mechanical batch
19 mixer unless otherwise indicated. Discard mortar when it has reached initial set.
20 C. Setting Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, Type N.
21 D. Pointing Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, Type O. Provide pointing mortar
22 mixed to match Architect's sample and complying with the following:
23 1. Pigmented Pointing Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color
24 required. Do not exceed pigment-to-cement ratio of 1:10, by weight.
25 E. Grout: Comply with mixing requirements of referenced ANSI standards and with manufacturer's written
26 instructions.
28 3.1 SETTING STONE, GENERAL

29 A. Do necessary field cutting as stone is set. Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone. Cut lines
30 straight and true, with edges eased slightly to prevent snipping.
31 B. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other
32 attachments indicated or necessary to secure stone in place. Shim and adjust anchors, supports, and
33 accessories to set stone accurately in locations indicated, with edges and faces aligned according to
34 established relationships and indicated tolerances.
35 C. Provide expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints of widths and at locations indicated.
36 1. Sealing of expansion and other joints is specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."
37 2. Keep expansion joints free of plaster, mortar, grout, and other rigid materials.
38 3.2 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES

39 A. Variation from Level: For lintels, sills, chair rails, horizontal bands, horizontal grooves, and other
40 conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, 3/8 inch maximum.
41 B. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary from average joint width more than plus or minus 1/16 inch or one-
42 fourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less.
43 C. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Stone Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/32-inch difference between
44 planes of adjacent units.
45 3.3 INSTALLATION OF STONE BASE

46 A. Stone Base: At locations with stone paneling, set units firmly against setting spots. Locate setting spots at
47 anchors and spaced not more than 18 inches apart unless otherwise indicated. Provide no fewer than two
48 anchors per piece for stone base up to 48 inches in length, plus one additional anchor for each additional
49 24 inches of length.
50 B. Stone Base: At locations without stone paneling, adhere units to plywood backing with full spread of water-
51 cleanable epoxy adhesive. Hold adhesive back from exposed edges of joints to allow for grouting.
52 C. Stone Base: At locations without stone paneling, adhere units to gypsum board with full spread of water-
53 cleanable epoxy adhesive. Hold adhesive back from exposed edges of joints to allow for grouting.
54 D. Grout joints after setting stone.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3.4 GROUTING JOINTS

2 A. Grout stone to comply with ANSI A108.10.
3 1. Use unsanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch and narrower.
4 B. Remove temporary shims before grouting.
5 C. Tool joints uniformly and smoothly with plastic tool.

7 A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stone base as work progresses. Remove adhesive, grout, mortar, and
8 sealant smears immediately.
9 B. Clean stone base no fewer than six days after completion of grouting and pointing, using clean water and
10 soft rags or stiff-bristle fiber brushes. Do not use wire brushes, acid-type cleaning agents, cleaning
11 compounds with caustic or harsh fillers, or other materials or methods that could damage stone.
12 C. Sealer Application: Apply stone sealer to comply with stone producer's and sealer manufacturer's written
13 instructions and recommendations.
14 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 09 84 33
2 SOUND-ABSORBING FABRIC UNITS
5 1.2 SUMMARY
13 1.10 WARRANTY
14 1.11 MAINTENANCE
17 2.2 SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS
18 2.3 MATERIALS
19 2.4 FABRICATION
21 3.1 INSTALLATION
22 3.2 CLEANING
23 PART 1 - GENERAL

27 1.2 SUMMARY
28 A. Section includes shop-fabricated, sound-absorbing acoustical panel units tested for acoustical
29 performance.


36 and cost.
44 formaldehyde.
45 C. Shop Drawings: For unit assembly and installation.



CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 098433 - 1 SOUND-ABSORBING FABRIC UNITS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

5 body.
8 1. Room 260: One typical acoustical wall panel AWP-1A and new wood muntin detail. West side of
9 Room 260.
10 2. Room 260: Typical acoustical ceiling panel AWP-1B and refinished wood nailer detail. West end of
11 ceiling.
12 3. Room 260: Typical acoustical ceiling panel AWP-1B at new HVAC diffuser assembly. West end of
13 ceiling.

15 A. Delivery: Deliver acoustical wall panels to the project site in unbroken and undamaged original factory
16 packaging and clearly labeled with the manufacturer's identification label, quality or grade.
17 B. Storage: Store materials in a clean, dry, climate controlled storage area within temperature and humidity
18 ranges recommended by manufacturer. Provide protection from damage and exposure to harmful
19 environmental conditions.
20 C. Acclimatization: Before installing acoustical wall panels, allow panels to acclimatize to room temperature
21 and humidity.
22 D. Handling: Carefully handle acoustical wall panels to avoid soiling and damage.

24 A. Environmental Conditions:
25 1. Do not apply acoustical treatments when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the
26 temperature ranges required by the wall panel manufacturer.
27 2. Do not install acoustical panels until wet work such as concrete, plastering and painting is done and
28 building is completely enclosed.
29 3. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain substrate surface and ambient
30 temperatures above 60 degrees F and not more than 85 degrees F unless required otherwise by
31 manufacturer's instructions.
32 4. Maintain constant recommended temperature and humidity for at least 48 hours prior to, throughout
33 the installation period and continuously after panel installation completion.
34 5. Field Measurements: Check and verify actual wall surfaces by accurate field measurements before
35 fabrication.
36 1.10 WARRANTY
37 A. Submit manufacturer’s 1 year written warranty against manufacturing defects from date of substantial
38 completion.
39 1.11 MAINTENANCE
40 A. Replacement Materials: Provide each type of acoustical wall panel fabric for maintenance purposes.
41 Furnish replacement materials from the same production run as installed materials. Protect material with
42 clearly marked packaging indicating product identification and project location.

45 A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Units shall comply with "Surface-Burning Characteristics" or "Fire
46 Growth Contribution" Subparagraph below, or both, as determined by testing identical products by UL or
47 another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
48 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified testing
49 agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
50 a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
51 b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
52 2. Fire Growth Contribution: Comply with acceptance criteria of local code and authorities having
53 jurisdiction when tested according to NFPA 265 Method B Protocol or NFPA 286.
54

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2.2 SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS

2 A. Sound-Absorbing Wall Panel AWP-1A (1 inch thick), AWP-1B (2 inches thick), AWP-2 (2 inches thick):
3 Manufacturer's standard panel construction consisting of facing material laminated to front face, edges,
4 and back edge border of core.
5 1. Surface Material (FABRIC-A): Provide material fully laminated to the fiberglass core face, edges
6 and returned no less than 1 inches to the back of the panel to provide fully finished edges and
7 tailored corners.
8 a. Product: Luum, Linen Weave Sesame, 1018-07, Panel fabric 66”w, 100% recycled
9 polyester, class A rated.
10 2. Surface Material (FABRIC-B): Provide material fully laminated to the fiberglass core face, edges
11 and returned no less than 2 inches to the back of the panel to provide fully finished edges and
12 tailored corners.
13 a. Product: DesignTex, Gammut 3468-808, Panel fabric 54”w, 100% postconsumer recycled
14 polyester, class A rated.
15 3. Basis-of-Design Product for AWP-1A and 1B and AWP-2: Subject to compliance with requirements,
16 provide Sound Designs™, Koroseal Acoustical Treatments, Koroseal Interior Products, LLC,
17 Fairlawn, OH or comparable product by one of the following:
18 a. Armstrong World Industries.
19 b. Decoustics Limited; a Saint Gobain company.
20 c. Pinta Acoustic, Inc.
21 d. Wenger Corporation.
22 B. Core Composition: 6-7 pound per cubic foot fiberglass insulation containing a minimum 40% post-
23 consumer recycled glass as a percent of glass weight as certified by Scientific Certification Systems.
24 C. Core surface: Plain.
25 D. Z-Clip Mounting to walls. Existing wood nailers hold panels in place in ceiling of Room 260.
26 E. Panel Dimensions: Size and shape as indicated on Drawings
27 F. Edge Profile: Square edge hardened with water-based resin hardener.
28 G. Surface Burning Characteristics: All panel components have a Class 1/A fire rating when tested in
29 accordance with ASTM E 84.
30 2.3 MATERIALS
31 A. Composite Wood Products: Products shall be made without urea formaldehyde.
33 than 95 percent.
34 C. Regional Materials: Products shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project site.
35 D. Certified Wood: Wood products shall be certified as "FSC Pure" or "FSC Mixed Credit" according to
36 FSC STD-01-00 and FSC STD-40-004.
37 2.4 FABRICATION
38 A. Standard Construction: Use manufacturer's standard construction unless otherwise indicated; with facing
39 material applied to face, edges, and back border of dimensionally stable core; and with rigid edges to
40 reinforce panel perimeter against warpage and damage.
41 B. Core-Face Layer: Evenly stretched over core face and edges and securely attached to core; free from
42 puckers, ripples, wrinkles, or sags.
43 C. Facing Material: Apply fabric facing fully covering visible surfaces of unit; with material stretched straight,
44 on the grain, tight, square, and free from puckers, ripples, wrinkles, sags, blisters, seams, adhesive, or
45 other visible distortions or foreign matter.
46 1. Fabrics with Directional or Repeating Patterns or Directional Weave: Mark fabric top and attach
47 fabric in same direction so pattern or weave matches in adjacent units.
48 D. Dimensional Tolerances of Finished Units: Plus or minus 1/16 inch.
49

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
2 3.1 INSTALLATION
3 A. Install units in locations indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, install units with vertical surfaces and edges
4 plumb, top edges level and in alignment with other units, faces flush, and scribed to fit adjoining work
5 accurately at borders and at penetrations.
6 B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installation of units using type of mounting devices
7 indicated. Mount units securely to supporting substrate.
8 C. Align fabric pattern and grain with adjacent units.
9 3.2 CLEANING
10 A. Clip loose threads; remove pills and extraneous materials.
11 B. Clean panels on completion of installation to remove dust and other foreign materials according to
13 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 09 91 13
2 EXTERIOR PAINTING
5 1.2 SUMMARY
6 1.3 DEFINITIONS
11 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
13 3.1 EXAMINATION
14 3.2 PREPARATION
15 3.3 APPLICATION
17 3.5 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
18 PART 1 - GENERAL

22 1.2 SUMMARY
23 A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following exterior
24 substrates:
25 1. Concrete.
26 2. Steel and iron.
27 3. Galvanized metal.
28 1.3 DEFINITIONS
29 A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to
30 ASTM D 523.
31 B. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
32 C. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to
33 ASTM D 523.
34 D. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
35 E. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
36 F. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

38 A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.
39 1. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the
40 proposed product highlighted.
42 1. Product Data: For paints and coatings, indicating VOC content.
44 C. Samples: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.
45

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 099113 - 1 EXTERIOR PAINTING
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

4 B. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify
5 preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality
6 standards for materials and execution.
7 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint
8 system.
9 a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.
10 b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
11 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.
12 a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors
13 selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
17 be incorporated into the Work:
18 1. Benjamin Moore & Co.
19 2. Hallman Lindsay Paints, Inc.
20 3. PPG: including their Dulux/ICI Paints, AkzoNobel.
21 4. Sherwin-Williams Company (The), including their Valspar range.
22 B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the
23 Work include, but are not limited to products listed in the Exterior Painting Schedule for the paint category
24 indicated.

26 A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved
27 Products Lists."
28 B. Material Compatibility:
29 1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates
30 indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on
31 testing and field experience.
32 2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers
33 for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
34 C. VOC Content: For field applications, paints and coatings shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities
35 having jurisdiction and the following VOC content limits:
36 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
37 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
38 3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 150 g/L.
39 4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 100 g/L.
40 5. Rust-Preventive Coatings: 100 g/L.
41 6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 100 g/L.
42 7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.
43 8. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L.
44 9. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.
45 D. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule.
46

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
2 3.1 EXAMINATION
3 A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum
4 moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
5 B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:
6 1. Concrete: 12 percent.
7 2. Fiber-Cement Board: 12 percent.
8 3. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent.
9 4. Wood: 15 percent.
10 5. Portland Cement Plaster: 12 percent.
11 6. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
12 C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and
13 primers.
14 D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
15 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
16 3.2 PREPARATION
17 A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting
18 Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
19 B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be
20 painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied
21 protection before surface preparation and painting.
22 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that
23 were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.
24 3.3 APPLICATION
25 A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual."
26 B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller
27 tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

29 A. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades
30 by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged
31 condition.
32 B. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted
33 surfaces.
34 3.5 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

35 A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:
36 1. Latex System MPI EXT 3.1A (PT-8):
37 a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based, MPI #3.
38 b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
39 c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1), MPI #10.
40 B. Steel and Iron Substrates (PT-7):
41 1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System MPI EXT 5.1C:
42 a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive for metal, MPI #79.
43 b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching topcoat.
44 c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #161.
45 C. Galvanized-Metal Substrates (PT-9):
46 1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System MPI EXT 5.3J:
47 a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134.
48 b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching topcoat.
49 c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #161.
50 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 09 91 23
2 INTERIOR PAINTING
5 1.2 SUMMARY
6 1.3 DEFINITIONS
12 2.3 SPECIAL COATING
14 3.1 EXAMINATION
15 3.2 PREPARATION
16 3.3 APPLICATION
17 3.4 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
18 3.5 PAINT COLOR SCHEDULE
19 PART 1 - GENERAL

23 B. Section 06 03 12 “Historic Wood Repair and Handrails” for historic treatment using clear coats and varnishes.
24 C. Section 09 93 00 “Stains and Varnishes” for historic treatment using clear coats and varnishes.
25 1.2 SUMMARY
26 A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates:
27 1. Concrete.
28 2. Cement board.
29 3. Concrete masonry units (CMUs).
30 4. Steel and iron.
31 5. Galvanized metal.
32 6. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated).
33 7. Wood.
34 8. Gypsum board.
35 9. Plaster.
36 1.3 DEFINITIONS
37 A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to
38 ASTM D 523.
39 B. MPI Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to
40 ASTM D 523.
41 C. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
42 D. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to
43 ASTM D 523.
44 E. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
45 F. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
46 G. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

48 A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.
49 1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with
50 the proposed product highlighted.
53 C. Samples: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 099123 - 1 INTERIOR PAINTING
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

4 B. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify
5 preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality
6 standards for materials and execution.
7 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint
8 system.
9 a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.
12 a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors
13 selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
14 C. Qualifications for Decorative Finishes Installer
15 1. The Contractor shall be proficient in the application of specialized decorative finishes. He shall have
16 the ability to produce new work as well as replicate existing finishes. The Contractor shall have ten
17 years of documented experience in providing work of this type and size and have worked in at least
18 three similar projects in the last five years. The work of this Contract includes the application of
19 decorative paint in accordance with established schedules or as specified by the Owner. The ability
20 to read a schedule and determine the color and type of coating is required of the Contractor. The
21 Contractor shall be required to apply stippled surfaces, as well as faux marble, to match existing real
22 and faux surfaces. Restoration of existing stenciled surfaces and creation and application of new
23 stencil designs is part of the work of this Contract. Designing as well as applying raised plaster
24 stencils is required. The contractor shall have the ability to provide touch up services to complicated,
25 multi-colored murals and trompe l'oeil finishes. Palette matching and tint-machine mixing of colors
26 is required. Contractor shall have a comprehensive knowledge of color systems and the capability
27 to utilize a paint-tinting machine. Knowledge of gold leaf, its handling and application is essential.
28 Additionally the Contractor will be required to match and touchup complicated paint and/or stain
29 finishes on woodwork and furniture. The Contractor shall have the ability to determine the type of
30 coatings and have the knowledge and experience to work with them.
31 2. Work of this contract will occur, but not limited to, in Room 260, Level Two Corridor 263/264, Level
32 One Main Corridor Room 101; 150 and 190.
36 be incorporated into the Work:
37 1. Benjamin Moore & Co.
38 2. Hallman Lindsay Paints, Inc.
39 3. PPG: including their Dulux/ICI Paints, AkzoNobel.
40 4. Sherwin-Williams Company (The), including their Valspar range.
41 B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in the Interior Painting
42 Schedule for the paint category indicated.

44 A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved
45 Products Lists."
46 B. Material Compatibility:
50 2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers
51 for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
52

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 C. VOC Content: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, paints and coatings shall
2 comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the following VOC content limits:
5 3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L.
6 4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L.
7 5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L.
8 6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L.
9 7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.
10 8. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L.
11 9. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.
12 D. Low-Emitting Materials: Interior paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements
13 of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile
14 Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
15 E. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule.
16 F. Decorative Finishes: The Project includes preservation or rehabilitation of historic designated painted
17 surfaces. Replicating historic paints, and restoration of historic designated painted surfaces is not included
18 in the scope of Work.
19 1. Paint companies products selected shall make latex paints in colors that are close to historic colors
20 as well as appropriate gloss levels, but contain no white lead and no hazardous volatile organic
21 compounds.
22 2.3 SPECIAL COATING (PT-5)
23 A. Basis of Design: Products specified are those as manufactured by Master Coating Technologies.
24 1. System: Two-component polyurethane-fortified coating and cross-linker.
25 2. Product; “Scuffmaster ScrubTough,” Master Coating Technologies.
26 B. Performance:
27 1. VOC: Coatings shall have less than 50 g/l of VOC’s.
28 2. Fire Rating: Coatings shall be Type I or Class A fire-rated, ASTM E 84.
29 3. Scrub Test: Greater than 8000 cycles, ASTM D 2486.
30 4. Impact Resistance: Greater than 60 in/lbs, ASTM D 2794.
31 5. Chemical Resistance: 10 (test maximum) for all chemicals tested, ASTM D 1308.
32 6. Finish: 10 percent to 15 percent gloss at 60 degrees.
33 7. Stain Removal: 8 to 10 (test maximum) for all stains tested, four-hour Open Spot Test.
34 C. Primers: Provide primer recommended by manufacturer for substrate.

35 1. Concrete and Masonry: Suitable heavy-bodied latex vinyl acrylic block filler (if filling pores is desired).
36 Provide manufacturer’s recommended product if uniform base color with pores exposed is desired.
37 a. Basis of Design: “Primemaster Primer/Sealer,” Master Coating Technologies.
38 2. Primed Metals: No primer required.
39 3. Unprimed Metals: In accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
40 4. New Gypsum Board:
41 a. Basis of Design: “Primemaster Primer/Sealer,” Master Coating Technologies.
42 5. Ceramic Tile and Glazed Block:
43 a. Basis of Design: “Primemaster Bonding Primer,” Master Coating Technologies.
44 6. Vinyl Wall Covering and Plastic: In accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
45

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
2 3.1 EXAMINATION
3 A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum
4 moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
5 B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:
6 1. Concrete: 12 percent.
7 2. Fiber-Cement Board: 12 percent.
8 3. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent.
9 4. Wood: 15 percent.
10 5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
11 6. Plaster: 12 percent.
12 C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and
13 primers.
14 1. Historic Designated Painted Surfaces: Acrylic latex paints are stronger than oil/alkyd paints. When a
15 stronger paint is applied over a weaker paint, it will tend to pull off any weaker paint which may have
16 begun to lose its bond with its substrate. Verify existing paint and test for compatibility.
17 D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
18 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
19 3.2 PREPARATION
20 A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting
21 Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
22 B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be
23 painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied
24 protection before surface preparation and painting.
25 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that
26 were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
27 C. Historic Designated Painted Surfaces: Heat/scraping, mechanical sanders and chemical stripping is
28 prohibited.
29 3.3 APPLICATION
30 A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural
31 Painting Specification Manual."
32 B. Historic Designated Painted Surfaces: Surfaces shall receive an intermediate coat that is compatible with
33 the existing paint to form a bond and with the topcoat paint type and finish scheduled.
34 C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller
35 tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.
36 3.4 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

37 A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces (PT-1 for non-traffic concrete):
38 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 3.1M:
39 a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, MPI #149.
40 b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat.
41 c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (MPI Gloss Level 2), MPI #143.
42 B. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces (PT-1 for traffic concrete, non-mechanical areas):
43 1. Latex Floor Enamel System MPI INT 3.2A:
44 a. Prime Coat: Floor paint, latex, matching topcoat.
45 b. Intermediate Coat: Floor paint, latex, matching topcoat.
46 c. Topcoat: Floor paint, latex, low gloss (maximum MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #60.
47 C. CMU Substrates (PT-3 for CMU):
52 D. Steel Substrates (PT-2 for steel):
53 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 5.1S:
54 a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust inhibitive, water based MPI #107.
56 c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 2), MPI #144.
57

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 E. Aluminum (Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated) Substrates (PT-2 for aluminum):
2 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 5.4G:
3 a. Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum, MPI #95.
5 c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 2), MPI #144.
6 F. Gypsum Board and Plaster Substrates (PT-1 and PT-4 (dryfall) for gypsum board):
11 G. Insulation-Covering Substrates: Including pipe and duct coverings (PT-4 for exposed building services).
12 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Dryfall Latex System MPI INT 10.1D:
13 a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50.
16 H. Existing Anodized Window Frames (PT-7) at Levels 0 and 1.
17 1. Color to match Benjamin Moore HC-131.
18 3.5 PAINT COLOR SCHEDULE

19 A. TABLE OF PAINT COLORS
20
DESIGNATION BENJAMIN MOORE COLOR REFERENCE
PT-_A Lehigh Green HC-131
PT-_B Chantily Lace 2121-70
PT-_C Not Used
PT-_D Not Used
PT-_E Not Used
PT-_F Woodland Snow 2161-70
PT-_G Gray 2121-10
PT-_H Metallic Silver 2132-60
PT-_J Byzantine Gold 1099
OTHER REFERENCES
Scuffmaster: Scrubtough Max, Ref GOH 11459544, Color XC
PT-_K
019 STM
PT-_L PPG Light Silver, ref: AD3Y1346N
21 END OF SECTION

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 09 93 00
2 STAINS AND VARNISHES
3
6 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
7 1.3 DEFINITIONS
8 1.4 SUBMITTALS
11 1.7 PROTECTION
14 2.1 MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURERS
16 3.1 EXAMINATION
17 3.2 PREPARATION
18 3.3 STRIPPING
19 3.4 STAINING AND VARNISHING
20 3.5 APPLICATION
22 3.7 CLEANING
23 3.8 PROTECTION
24 3.9 SCHEDULE
25
26
27 PART 1 - GENERAL
28
30
31 A. Applicable provisions of Division 1 govern work of this Section.
32
34
35 A. Work of this Section includes on-site surface preparation, stripping, wood staining and
36 finishing of new and existing finished wood items and surfaces. The terms “Varnish,”
37 “Transparent Finish” and “Shellac” are used interchangeably in this specification section and
38 imply the same finish material, per the products listings. Components and surfaces to be
39 finished include the following:
40
41 1 Room 260: Strip down to original, unfinished wood surface per 3.2 and 3.3 below, and
42 refinish all existing wood; doors, casing, wainscot, paneling, beam support moldings, base
43 and shoe per finishing sections below.
44 2 Room 260: Finish all new wood to match refinished, existing wood per the finishing
45 sections below.
46 3 Second Floor Corridor 263 and existing, historic wall bases at Level 2 and 3: Prepare per
47 3.2 and 3.3 below and finish all existing wood; doors, transoms, casings, wainscot.
48 4 All Historic doors and frames, architraves, wood wall bases (either left in place or
49 relocated): Prepare per 3.2 and 3.3 below and finish per finishing sections below.
50 5 All new wood and wood handrails: Finish per finishing sections below.
51
52 B. Related Work.
53
54 1. Section 06 03 12 – Historic Wood Repair
55 2. Section 08 21 10 - Wood Door Rehabilitation.
56 3. Section 09 90 23 – Interior Painting.
57
58 1.3 DEFINITIONS
59
60 A. Stain and Transparent Finish includes coating systems materials, primers, emulsions, stains,

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 099300 - 1 STAINS AND VARNISHES
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish
2 transparent coats on finished wood.
3 B. Refinishing is defined as all the process(es) necessary to restore woodwork. Stripping is
4 defined as the process of removing existing coatings from woodwork without damage to the
5 wood. Finishing is defined as the process of applying stain and protective coating and all
6 related preparatory and follow-up tasks.
7
8 1.4 SUBMITTALS
9
10 A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical information, label analysis, and application instructions
11 for each material proposed for use.
12
13 1. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating and finish system and
14 application. Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general
15 classification. Indicate VOC content.
16
17 B. Samples for initial and final color selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts.
18
19 C. Mock-ups and Samples: Refer to Section 01 43 39. Prepare samples of staining and shellac
20 finish, on new and existing woods, and stripping on existing wood for review and approval by
21 Architect. Include one existing door, and a minimum of four 10' long lengths of wood trim of
22 each type as selected by the Architect. Duplicate finishes of Owner samples.
23
24 1. Sample submission must include example of blending new and existing woods and
25 stain and light and dark areas of wood to produce even, matched colors and tones.
26
27 D. Mock-up Room 260: Refer to Section 01 43 39. Provide full-finish example in mock-up Room
28 260, 4 feet wide by height of wainscot, until required sheen, color and texture are achieved
29 and approved by Architect.
30
31 1. Apply stain and varnish on sample surfaces in accordance with the schedule or as
32 specified. After finishes are accepted, the mock-up suite will be used as a basis for
33 evaluation of stain and varnish during other finished work.
34
35 E. All samples shall be produced by contractor's staff proposed to work on the project.
36
37 F. Samples of stripping, cleaning, bleaching and staining materials with manufacturer product
38 data for each.
39
41
42 A. Provide stain and finish produced by the same manufacturers stated in the Products section.
43
44 B. Coordination of Work: Review other applicable sections in which primers are provided to
45 ensure compatibility of the total systems for various substrates. On request, furnish
46 information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
47
48 1. Notify the Architect of problems anticipated using the materials specified.
49
50 C. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best quality stain and varnish material of the
51 various coating types specified. Material containers not displaying manufacturer's product
52 identification will not be acceptable.
53
54 1. The objectives of wood refinishing and cleaning are to give wood surfaces a smooth,
55 uniform appearance consistent with the original design intent, and to preserve the
56 inherent patina. Splotches, streaks, runs, or any other kind of spotty appearance
57 shall not be accepted. Too aggressive cleaning or sanding shall not be accepted.
58 2. Sample areas shall be prepared which shall form a standard for wood refinishing.
59 3. Products that comply with qualitative requirements of applicable Federal Specifications,
60 yet differ in quantitative requirements, may be considered for use when acceptable to
61 the Architect. Furnish material data and manufacturer's certificate of performance to

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 Architect for proposed substitutions.

2
3
4 D. Contractor Qualifications: Contractor performing work of this Section shall have no less than
5 ten documented years of experience providing highest quality staining and varnishing work
6 including blending of colors and touching-up or restoring ornamental wood on at least three
7 similar sized and quality projects. Contractor's key staff on project shall each have a minimum
8 of three years of experience in this trade including experience on at least two of three
9 documented similar projects. Key staff shall be of sufficient number to accomplish required
10 work within required project schedule.
11
12
14
15 A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and
16 containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information:
17
18 1. Product name or title of material.
19 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).
20 3. Federal Specification number, if applicable.
21 4. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
22 5. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
23 6. Thinning instructions.
24 7. Application instructions.
25 8. Color name and number.
26
27 B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum
28 ambient temperature of 45F. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of
29 foreign materials and residue.
30
31 C. Do not store materials throughout building, but in designated area. Store flammable materials
32 in metal safety containers.
33
34 D. Provide appropriate type and size fire extinguishers in place of storage.
35
36 E. Protect materials from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove application
37 rags and waste from building daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and
38 work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and
39 application.
40
41 1.7 PROTECTION
42
43 A. Cover materials and surfaces, including floors, adjoining work in progress with clean drop
44 cloths or canvas.
45
46 B. Remove hardware, accessories, plates, lighting fixtures and similar items or otherwise mask
47 item for protection from staining and varnishing materials. Stain color and clear finishes will
48 continue under any hardware or plates that are in place.
49
50 C. The contractor shall be responsible to provide the proper respiratory equipment, as necessary,
51 for workers doing the staining and varnishing.
52
53 D. The contractor shall take reasonable precautions to contain materials and odors to areas of
54 work.
55
57
58 A. All staining and varnishing work shall be provided on site after installation of wood products
59 requiring work of this Section except for backpriming.
60
61 B. Apply stain and varnish only when the temperature of surfaces to be finished and surrounding

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 air temperatures are between 50F and 90F.

2
3 C. Do not apply stain or varnish when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, at temperatures
4 less than 5F above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces.
5
6 D. Contractor shall be responsible for providing adequate heat and humidity control in work
7 space.
8
9
11
12 2.1 MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURERS
13
14 A. Manufacturers: Refer to subsections below.
15
16 B. Stripper:
17
18 1. Strippers: Nonvolatile, nonsolvent, low odor type product using products such as
19 organic esters. Solvent-based; methylene chloride type strippers are not allowed.
20
21 2. Back to Nature Multi-Strip or equal as approved by Architect.
22
23 3. Rinse shall be mineral spirits or other materials as recommended by the stripper
24 manufacturer.
25
26 C. Bleach: Not permitted.
27
28 D. Stain [CCT-1].
29
30 1. Existing Oak Wood: Old Masters Wiping Stain, Natural Walnut 12804.
31
32 2. Stain mix for woods receiving varnish shall be adjusted to compensate for color of
33 varnish and submitted to Architect for approval.
34
35 E. Varnish [CCT-2]:
36
37 3. Type I Varnish: Graham Aqua Borne Ceramic-Cermithane Satin tinted to match
38 Amber Shellac.
39
40 4. Type II Varnish, Second Coat & Finish Coat: Graham Aqua Borne Ceramithane Catin
41 finish.
42
43
44 F. Filler/Sealer: As required.
45
46 G. Accessory Materials:
47
48 1. Solvent as recommended by Pratt and Lambert.
49 2. Tack Cloths.
50 3. Wood glue.
51 4. Sandpaper: Maximum grit shall be "00".
52
54
55 3.1 EXAMINATION
56
57 A. Examine substrates and conditions under which staining and varnishing will be performed for
58 compliance with requirements for application of materials. Do not begin application until
59 unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Start of finishing will be construed as the
60 Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area.
61

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3.2 PREPARATION
2
3 A. General Procedures: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined
4 surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place that are not to be finished or provide
5 surface-applied protection prior to beginning work. Remove these items if necessary for
6 complete finishing of the wood items. Following completion of staining and varnishing
7 operations in each space or area, have items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades
8 involved.
9
10 B. Surface Preparation of Wood: Clean and prepare surfaces to be finished in accordance with
11 the manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
12
13 1. Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits,
14 and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.
15 2. Back prime wood trim and casing receiving clear finishes prior to installation with spar
16 varnish compatible with materials and finishes listed in the Products section of this
17 specification. Include edges, ends and backsides of wood trim.
18 3. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer
19 compatible with surface finishes prior to installation or hardware installation.
20
21 C. Coordinate to have wood doors which are planned to be removed from existing openings, per
22 the drawings, to have tops, bottoms and edges finished.
23
24 3.3 STRIPPING
25
26 A. Room 260 only, excluding Judge’s Bench: Remove all existing finishes from wood doors,
27 windows, handrails and casing using specified remover and methods recommended by
28 remover manufacturer.
29
30 B. Wash wood surfaces with mineral spirits and allow to dry.
31
32 C. Historic wood outside Room 260, and Judge’s Bench in Room 260: Sand lightly with
33 sandpaper and remove all dust with tackcloths.
34
35 D. Fill minor holes, sand out scratches and gouges, and for doors as required by the Door
36 Schedule.
37
38
39 3.4 STAINING AND VARNISHING
40
41 A. Stain and varnish wood after installation
42
43 B. New and reused wood shall be stained to match samples submitted by contractor and
44 approved by Architect. Contractor shall carefully blend staining as required to match old and
45 new wood, and compensate for color differences in heartwood and sapwood and
46 inconsistencies in the color of the natural wood.
47
48 C. Finish woodwork on edges, tops and bottoms in same manner as approved for faces.
49
50 D. Stain all stripped wood where original stain is deteriorated or lost, and all new wood as follows:
51
52 1. Apply one or more coats of stain as necessary to match approved samples and mock-
53 ups.
54 2. Seal stained wood.
55
56 E. Varnish.
57
58 1. Varnish shall not be thinned.
59 2. Do not apply in temperatures less than 70 degrees F.
60 3. Apply evenly without runs, sags or brush marks.
61

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3.5 APPLICATION
2
3 A. Apply finishes in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use brush applicators and
4 techniques best suited for wood material and type of finish material being applied.
5
6 B. Do not varnish over dirt, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to
7 formation of a durable film.
8
9 1. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of the
10 application method.
11 2. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by
12 the manufacturer.
13 3. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce an even smooth
14 surface in accordance with the manufacturer's directions and project requirements.
15 4. Apply additional coats of final varnish until film is of uniform finish, and appearance.
16 Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices,
17 welds, and exposed fasteners, receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat
18 surfaces.
19 5. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures,
20 convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are
21 in place. Extend coatings in these areas as required to maintain the system integrity
22 and provide desired protection.
23 6. Finish surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed
24 surfaces.
25 7. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat
26 until previous coat has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky
27 under moderate thumb pressure and where application of another coat of finish does
28 not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat.
29
30 C. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Refinish
31 unacceptable work.
32
34
35 A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often
36 as the Owner deems necessary during the period when finishes are being applied:
37
38 1. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing laboratory to sample the
39 finish materials being used. Samples of materials delivered to the project will be taken,
40 identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor.
41
42 2. The testing laboratory will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as
43 required by the Owner:
44
45 a. Quantitative materials analysis.
46 b. Abrasion resistance.
47 c. Apparent reflectivity.
48 d. Flexibility.
49 e. Washability.
50 f. Absorption.
51 g. Accelerated weathering.
52 h. Accelerated yellowness.
53
54 3. If test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements,
55 the Contractor may be directed to stop work, remove noncomplying finish materials
56 from job, pay for testing, refinish surfaces that were coated with rejected finishes.
57
58 3.7 CLEANING
59
60 A. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded
61 paint materials from the site.

MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1
2 B. Upon completion of finishing, clean glass and stain-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered
3 stain by washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or damage adjacent finished
4 surfaces.
5
6 C. Touch up varnish and stain after all other trades have completed their work in preparation for
7 final acceptance of work.
8
9 3.8 PROTECTION
10
11 A. Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by this section.
12 Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect
13 and Owner Project representative.
14
15 B. Provide "wet varnish" signs to protect newly applied finishes. Remove temporary protective
16 wrappings provided by other subcontractors as part of this contract for protection of their work
17 after completion of finishing work.
18
19 C. Touch up and restore damaged or defaced finished surfaces at completion of project
20 construction activities of other trades and in compliance with final punch list by Architect.
21
22 3.9 SCHEDULE: REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SPECIFIC AREAS OF SCOPE
23
24 A. Historic wood doors:
25 1. One or more coats of CCT-1 wood stain as necessary to match approved sample.
26 2. One coat of CCT-2 Type I varnish.
27 3. One coat of CCT-2 Type II varnish and one coat 50% gloss/50% satin.
28
29 B. Historic wood wainscot and/or paneling, Room 260 ceiling beams and other exposed framing
30 members, Room 260 window trim:
31 1. One or more coats of CCT-1 wood stain as approved to match approved sample.
32 . 2. One coat of CCT-2 Type I varnish.
33 4. Two coats of CCT-2 Type II varnish.
34
35
36
37

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 09 96 46
2 INTUMESCENT PAINTING
5 1.2 SUMMARY
9 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
10 2.2 INTUMESCENT PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL (SFRM-1)
12 3.1 EXAMINATION
13 3.2 PREPARATION
14 3.3 APPLICATION
15 PART 1 - GENERAL

19 1.2 SUMMARY
20 A. Section includes surface preparation and application of fire-retardant intumescent paint to interior items
21 and surfaces.

24 1. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with
25 the proposed product highlighted.
28 2. Laboratory Test Reports: For paints and coatings, indicating compliance with requirements for low-
30 C. Samples: For each type of coating system and each color and gloss of intumescent paint finish indicated.

32 A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated to verify preliminary selections made under
33 Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and
34 execution.
35 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each coating
36 system.
37 a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft..
40 a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional
41 colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
42

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 099646 - 1 INTUMESCENT PAINTING
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
5 1. Diamond Vogel Paints.
6 2. FireFree Coatings, Inc.
7 3. Isolatech International
8 4. PPG Architectural Coatings.
9 B. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated in the
10 Exterior Intumescent Painting Schedule and Interior Intumescent Painting Schedule or comparable product
11 by one of the following:
12 1. Isolatech International.
13 C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the
14 Work include, but are not limited to products from Isolatech International CAFCO Spray Film WB-5.
15 2.2 INTUMESCENT PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL (SFRM-1)

16 A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI
17 Approved Products Lists."
18 B. Surface-Burning Characteristics of Fire-Retardant Systems: As tested according to ASTM E 84; testing by
19 a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
20 1. Flame-Spread Index: 5 or less.
22 C. Material Compatibility:
26 2. For each material or coat, products and spreading rates shall be as recommended in writing by
27 intumescent paint manufacturer for use on substrate indicated. Comply with requirements for fire-
28 retardant coating classification and surface-burning characteristics indicated.
29 D. VOC Content: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, paints and coatings shall
30 comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the following VOC content limits:
33 3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC not more than 200 g/L.
34 4. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L.
35 E. Colors and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
36

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
2 3.1 EXAMINATION
3 A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with manufacturer's
4 requirements for surface treatments, shop-primed surfaces, maximum moisture content, and other
5 conditions affecting performance of the Work.
6 B. Begin coating only when moisture content of wood substrate is 15 percent or less when measured with an
7 electronic moisture meter.
8 C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions, and compatibility with existing finishes and
9 primers.
10 D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are
11 dry.
12 3.2 PREPARATION
13 A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in the "MPI Architectural Painting
14 Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and coating systems indicated.
15 B. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, light fixtures, and similar items
16 already installed that are not to be coated. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight
17 of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and coating.
18 1. After completing coating operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that
19 were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
20 3.3 APPLICATION
21 A. General: Apply intumescent paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with
22 requirements for listing and labeling for surface-burning characteristics specified.
23 1. Finish doors on faces with intumescent finish. Paint tops, bottoms, and side edges with fire-inert
24 finish.
25 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 10 11 00
2 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
5 1.2 SUMMARY
13 2.2 GLASS MARKERBOARDS
14 2.3 TACKBOARDS
16 3.1 EXAMINATION
17 3.2 PREPARATION
18 3.3 INSTALLATION
21 PART 1 - GENERAL

25 1.2 SUMMARY
27 1. Glass marker boards (MKBD-1).

30 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and
31 profiles, finishes, and accessories for visual display units.
32 B. Shop Drawings: For visual display units.
33 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment to other work.
34 2. Show locations of panel joints.
35 C. Samples for Verification: For each type of visual display unit indicated.
36 1. Visual Display Panel: Not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches, with glass facing indicated for final Work.
37 Include one panel for each type, color, and texture required.
38 2. Accessories: Full-size Sample of each type of accessory.
39 D. Product Schedule: For visual display units. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

41 A. Maintenance Data: For visual display units to include in maintenance manuals.

44 manufacturer.

46 A. Deliver factory-fabricated visual display units completely assembled in one piece. If dimensions exceed
47 maximum manufactured unit size, or if unit size is impracticable to ship in one piece, provide two or more
48 pieces with joints in locations indicated on approved Shop Drawings.
49

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 101100 - 1 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install visual display units until spaces are enclosed and
3 weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and temporary
4 HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy
5 levels during the remainder of the construction period.
6 B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with visual display units by field
7 measurements before fabrication.
8 1. Allow for trimming and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication might delay the
9 Work.
12 A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of visual display unit from single source from a single manufacturer.
13 2.2 GLASS MARKERBOARDS

14 A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Skyline Design; Vitracolor or
15 comparable product by one of the following:
16 1. Egan Visual Inc.
17 2. Element Designs.
18 B. Units: Refer to MKBD-1 on the Material ID List:
19 1. Back Painted Magnetic Glass (Marker Boards). Mfr: Skyline Design. Product: Vitracolor.
20 2. Color: As scheduled.
21 3. Thickness: As scheduled.
22 4. Glass: Low-iron, PPG Starphire tempered safety glass.
23 5. Glass Markerboards: tempered glass markerboard, with smooth polished edge and corners as
24 indicated. Color coated on back surface.
25 C. Mounting: Stainless-steel standoffs, holding glass approximately 1 inch from wall surface; mounted
26 through holes in markerboard or mounted in notches in standoffs at top and bottom edges of markerboard
27 as scheduled or indicated on the drawings..
28 D. Marker Tray: Glass, supported by stainless-steel clips.
29 2.3 TACKBOARDS
30 A. Metal Framed Tackboard (TACK-1): Linoleum tackboard panel on core with factory finished metal frame.
31 1. Koroseal Wall-Talker Aluminum J-CapTrim, size indicated on Drawings.
32 2. Metal Framed Tackboard: Uni-color linoleum cork self-healing tackbord with Koroseal Wall-Talker
33 Aluminum J-CapTrim.
34 3. Core: Uni-colored linoleum; raw materials that are used are of natural origin and include: linseed,
35 oil, rosin binders, ground cork, and mineral fillers.
36 4. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from full range of colors.
38 3.1 EXAMINATION
39 A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
40 tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
41 B. Examine walls and partitions for proper preparation and backing for visual display units.
43 3.2 PREPARATION
44 A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.
45 B. Clean substrates of substances, such as dirt, mold, and mildew, that could impair the performance of and
46 affect the smooth, finished surfaces of visual display boards.
47 C. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks,
48 defects, projections, depressions, and substances that will impair bond between visual display units and
49 wall surfaces.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 3.3 INSTALLATION
2 A. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings, or if
3 not indicated, at heights indicated below. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds,
4 clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete
5 installation.
6 B. Factory-Fabricated Visual Display Board Assemblies: Attach concealed clips, hangers, and grounds to wall
7 surfaces and to visual display board assemblies with fasteners at not more than 16 incheso.c. Secure tops
8 and bottoms of boards to walls.
9 C. Visual Display Board Assembly Mounting Heights: Install visual display units at mounting heights indicated
10 on Drawings.

12 A. Clean visual display units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one removable cleaning
13 instructions label to visual display unit in each room.
14 B. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
15 C. Cover and protect visual display units after installation and cleaning.
17 A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,
18 operate, and maintain motorized, sliding visual display units.
19 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 10 12 00
2 DISPLAY CASES
5 1.2 SUMMARY
6 1.3 DEFINITIONS
13 2.3 DISPLAY CASE (DISPLAY-1)
14 2.4 MATERIALS
15 2.5 FABRICATION
19 3.1 EXAMINATION
20 3.2 INSTALLATION
22 PART 1 - GENERAL

26 1.2 SUMMARY
28 1. Display cases.
30 1. Section 10 11 00 "Visual Display Units" for “tackboards”.
31 1.3 DEFINITIONS
32 A. Display Case: Glazed cabinet with tackboard panel back surface and adjustable shelves.

35 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles,
36 and finishes for display cases. Include furnished specialties and accessories.
38 1. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives, documentation indicating that products
39 comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's
40 (formerly, the California Department of Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and
41 Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental
42 Chambers."
43 C. Shop Drawings: For display cases.
45 2. Show location of seams and joints in tackboard panels.
46 3. Include sections of typical trim members.

48 A. Maintenance Data: For display cases to include in maintenance manuals.
49

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 101200 - 1 DISPLAY CASES
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install display cases for indoor installations until spaces are
3 enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and
4 temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at
5 occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
6 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
7 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
8 A. Source Limitations: Obtain display cases from single source from single manufacturer.

10 A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify
14 2.3 DISPLAY CASE (DISPLAY-1)

17 1. C.R. Laurence Company (CRL)
18 2. A-1 Visual Systems.
19 3. Architectural School Products Ltd.
20 4. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
21 B. Surface-Mounted Display Case: Factory-fabricated display case; with finished interior, and glazed doors at
22 front.
23 1. Construction: Extruded-aluminum top, bottom, and side panels.
24 2. Aluminum Finish: Color anodic. Satin.
25 a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
26 3. Display Case Base: No base, for wall mounting.
27 C. Glazed Hinged Doors: Tempered glass; set in frame matching cabinet material and finish. Equip each door
28 with full-height continuous hinge and cylinder lock with two keys.
29 1. Thickness: Not less than 5 mm thick.
30 2. Number of Doors: One.
31 D. Back Panel: Plastic-Impregnated-Cork Tackboard Panel: 1/8-inch-thick, plastic-impregnated-cork sheet
32 factory laminated to 3/8-inch-thick fiberboard backing.
33 E. Size: See Materials Tag List.
34 2.4 MATERIALS
35 A. Fiberboard: ASTM C 208.
36 B. Plastic-Impregnated-Cork Sheet: Seamless, homogeneous, self-sealing sheet consisting of granulated cork,
37 linseed oil, resin binders, and dry pigments that are mixed and calendared onto burlap backing; with
38 washable vinyl finish and integral color throughout.
39 C. Aluminum Tubing: ASTM B 429/B 429M, Alloy 6063.
40 D. Clear Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1, Quality Q3, with exposed
41 edges seamed before tempering.
42 E. Fasteners: Provide screws, bolts, and other fastening devices made from same material as items being
43 fastened, except provide hot-dip galvanized, stainless-steel, or aluminum fasteners for exterior applications.
44 Provide types, sizes, and lengths to suit installation conditions. Use security fasteners where exposed to
45 view.
46 F. Adhesives: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with the testing and product requirements of the
47 California Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California Department of Health Services') "Standard
48 Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using
49 Environmental Chambers."
50

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2.5 FABRICATION
2 A. Fabricate display cases to requirements indicated for dimensions, design, and thickness and finish of
3 materials.
4 B. Use metals and shapes of thickness and reinforcing required to produce flat surfaces, and to impart strength
5 for size, design, and application indicated.
6 C. Fabricate cabinets and door frames with reinforced corners, mitered to a hairline fit, with no exposed
7 fasteners.
8 D. Fabricate shelf standards plumb and at heights to align shelf brackets for level shelves.

10 A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations
11 for applying and designating finishes.
12 B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
13 protective covering before shipping.
14 C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in

18 A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A32/A34, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.
20 3.1 EXAMINATION
21 A. Examine walls, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, surface
22 conditions of wall, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
23 B. Examine walls and partitions for proper backing for display cases.
25 3.2 INSTALLATION
26 A. General: Install units in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, at
27 heights indicated below. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing
28 materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation.
29 1. Mounting Height: 72 inches above finished floor to top of cabinet.
30 B. Surface-Mounted Display Cases: Attach units to wall surfaces with concealed clips, hangers, or grounds
31 fastened at not more than 16 inches o.c. Secure tops and bottoms of display cases to walls.
32 C. Comply with requirements specified elsewhere for connecting illuminated display cases.

34 A. Adjust doors to operate smoothly without warp or bind and so contact points meet accurately. Lubricate
35 operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.
36 B. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged areas.
37 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 10 21 13.15
2 STAINLESS-STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS
5 1.2 SUMMARY
11 2.2 STAINLESS-STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS
12 2.3 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
13 2.4 FABRICATION
15 3.1 INSTALLATION
16 3.2 ADJUSTING
17 PART 1 - GENERAL

21 1.2 SUMMARY
22 A. Section includes stainless-steel toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens.

27 cost.
28 C. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment details.
29 D. Samples for each type of toilet compartment material indicated.


34

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 10211315 - 1 STAINLESS-STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

3 A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled
5 B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation
6 Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities for toilet
7 compartments designated as accessible.
8 2.2 STAINLESS-STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS

10 1. All American Metal Corp.
11 2. American Sanitary Partition Corporation.
12 3. Bradley Corporation.
13 4. General Partitions Mfg. Corp.
14 5. Global Partitions; ASI Group.
15 6. Hadrian Manufacturing Inc.
16 7. Metpar Corp.
17 B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Ceiling hung (TOIL-1).
18 C. Shower-Entry Door.
19 D. Urinal-Screen Style: Wall hung with integral flanges (TOIL-2).
20 E. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Seamless, metal facing sheets pressure laminated to core material;
21 with continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped-and-formed edge closures; corners secured by welding
22 or clips and exposed welds ground smooth. Provide with no-sightline system. Exposed surfaces shall be
23 free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other
24 imperfections.
25 1. Core Material: Manufacturer's standard sound-deadening honeycomb of resin-impregnated kraft
26 paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1 inch for doors and panels and 1-1/4
27 inches for pilasters.
28 2. Grab-Bar Reinforcement: Provide concealed internal reinforcement for grab bars mounted on units
29 of size and material adequate for panel to withstand applied downward load on grab bar of at least
30 250 lbf, when tested according to ASTM F 446, without deformation of panel.
31 3. Tapping Reinforcement: Provide concealed reinforcement for tapping (threading) at locations where
32 machine screws are used for attaching items to units.
33 F. Urinal-Screen Construction:
34 1. Integral-Flange, Wall-Hung Urinal Screen: Similar to panel construction, with integral full-height
35 flanges for wall attachment, and maximum 1-1/4 inches thick.
36 G. Facing Sheets and Closures: Stainless-steel sheet of nominal thicknesses as follows:
37 1. Panels: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.031 inch.
38 2. Doors: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.031 inch.
39 3. Integral-Flange, Wall-Hung Urinal Screens: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than
40 0.031 inch.
41 H. Brackets (Fittings):
42 1. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel.
43 I. Stainless-Steel Finish: No. 4 bright, directional polish on exposed faces. Protect exposed surfaces from
44 damage by application of strippable, temporary protective covering before shipment.
45

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2.3 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

2 A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard stainless-steel operating hardware and accessories.
3 1. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated
4 as accessible.
5 B. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's heavy-duty stainless-steel operating hardware and accessories.
6 1. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated
7 as accessible.
8 C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, finished to match
9 the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt
10 applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless-steel, hot-dip galvanized-steel, or other rust-resistant,
11 protective-coated steel anchors compatible with related materials.
12 2.4 FABRICATION
13 A. Fabrication, General: Fabricate toilet compartment components to sizes indicated. Coordinate requirements
14 and provide cutouts for through-partition toilet accessories and solid blocking within panel where required
15 for attachment of toilet accessories.
16 B. Ceiling-Hung Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling
17 adjustment nuts at pilasters for connection to structural support above finished ceiling. Provide assemblies
18 that support pilasters from structure without transmitting load to finished ceiling. Provide sleeves (caps) at
19 tops of pilasters to conceal anchorage.
20 C. Urinal-Screen Posts: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with
21 leveling adjustment nuts at bottoms of posts. Provide shoes and sleeves (caps) at posts to conceal
22 anchorage.
23 D. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch-wide in-swinging doors for standard
24 toilet compartments and 36-inch-wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch-wide clear opening for
27 3.1 INSTALLATION
28 A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and
29 plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.
30 1. Maximum Clearances:
31 a. Panels and Walls: 1 inch.
32 2. Full-Height (Continuous) Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with full-height brackets.
33 a. Locate bracket fasteners so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints.
34 b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.
35 3.2 ADJUSTING
36 A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written
37 instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30
38 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors and doors in shower
39 screens to return doors to fully closed position.
40 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 10 21 16.19
2 SHOWER COMPARTMENTS
5 1.2 SUMMARY
11 2.2 SOLID-POLYMER COMPARTMENTS (SHOWER-1)
12 2.3 SHOWER RECEPTORS (SHOWER-2)
13 2.4 ACCESSORIES
14 2.5 FABRICATION
16 3.1 INSTALLATION
17 3.2 ADJUSTING
18 PART 1 - GENERAL

22 1.2 SUMMARY
24 1. Solid-polymer compartments.
25 2. Shower receptors
26 3. Solid polymer shower door.

31 cost.
32 C. Shop Drawings: For shower and dressing compartments.



41 A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified testing agency.
46 than 20 percent.
47 C. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers
48 Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities for shower and dressing

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 102116.19 - 1 SHOWER COMPARTMENTS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2.2 SOLID-POLYMER COMPARTMENTS (SHOWER-1)

2 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
3 1. DuPont: Corian 1/4 inch thick Wall Panels.
4 B. Configuration: Shower compartment as indicated on Drawings. Provide radiused inside corners per
5 Manufacturer’s standards.
6 C. Enclosure Style: wall anchored
7 D. Panel and Pilaster Construction: Solid polymer panel material, not less than 1/4 inch thick, seamless, with
8 eased edges and with homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of material.
9 1. Integral Hinges: Configure doors and pilasters to receive integral hinges.
10 2. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard, continuous, stainless-steel strip fastened to exposed
11 bottom edges of solid-polymer components to hinder malicious combustion.
12 3. Color and Pattern: as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
13 E. Brackets (Fittings):
14 1. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; solid polymer matching the panels.
15 2.3 SHOWER RECEPTORS (SHOWER-2)

16 A. Basis of Design (no substitutions): Acorn Engineering Company: Terrazzo ADA Shower Base, Model
17 SBADA-36-3F.
18 B. General: Manufacturer's standard, prefabricated, terrazzo receptor complete with integral drain.
19 1. Provide each unit with a ramped entrance surface for accessible compartments.
20 2. Drain Strainer: Manufacturer's standard; removable.
21 3. Drain Gasket: Manufacturer's standard gasket sized to fit waste pipe.
22 C. Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish on exposed surfaces, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's
23 full range and with slip-resistant floor surface texture
24 2.4 ACCESSORIES
25 A. Door Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty, operating hardware and
26 accessories. Mount to panels with through-bolts.
27 1. Material: Stainless steel.
28 2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard, paired, self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors open
29 at any angle up to 90 degrees, allowing emergency access by lifting door.
30 3. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard, surface-mounted latch unit designed for emergency
31 access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with
32 regulatory requirements for accessibility at each compartment, accessible or not.
33 4. Clothing Hooks: Manufacturer's standard clothing hooks in each dressing compartment; include one
34 combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper at inswinging doors, sized to prevent door from hitting
35 wall panel or compartment-mounted accessories.
36 5. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard, rubber-tipped bumper at outswinging doors.
37 6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at outswinging doors that complies with regulatory
38 requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as
39 accessible.
40 B. Headrail with Hooks: Manufacturer's standard, continuous, extruded-aluminum headrail or cap with curtain
41 hooks running in concealed track; with antigrip profile; in manufacturer's standard finish.
42 C. Curtain Rod with Hooks: Manufacturer's standard, 1-inch-diameter, stainless-steel curtain rod with matching
43 hooks.
44 D. Curtain: Flame-resistant, polyester-reinforced vinyl fabric that is stain resistant, self-sanitizing, antistatic,
45 antimicrobial, and launderable to a temperature of not less than 90 deg F.
46 1. Flame Resistance: Passes NFPA 701 tests when tested by a testing and inspecting agency
48 2. Labeling: Identify fabrics with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
49 3. Length: Where curtain extends to a floor surface, size so that bottom hem clears finished floor by not
50 more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch above floor surface. Where curtains extend to a shower-
51 receptor curb, size so that bottom hem hangs above curb line and clears curb line by not more than
52 1/2 inch.
53 4. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
54 E. Soap Holder: Surface-mounted, seamless stainless-steel soap dish.
55 F. Seats: Manufacturer's standard, wall-mounted benches.
56 1. Material: Solid phenolic.
57 2. Operation: Folding.
58 3. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 G. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, exposed fasteners of stainless steel, chrome-plated
2 steel, or solid brass, finished to match the items they are securing; with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide
3 sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications.
4 2.5 FABRICATION
5 A. Overhead-Braced Compartments: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant supports, leveling method,
6 and anchors at pilasters and walls to suit floor and wall conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal
7 supports and leveling method.
8 B. Floor-and-Ceiling-Anchored Compartments: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant anchoring
9 assemblies at pilasters and walls, with leveling adjustment at tops and bottoms of pilasters. Provide shoes
10 and sleeves (caps) at pilasters to conceal anchorage.
11 C. Door Sizes and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch-wide, inswinging doors for standard
12 shower and dressing compartments, and 36-inch-wide, outswinging doors with a minimum 32-inch-wide,
13 clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.
15 3.1 INSTALLATION
16 A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install compartments rigid, straight,
17 level, and plumb. Secure compartments in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.
18 1. Clearances for Dressing Compartments: Maximum 1/2 inch between pilasters and panels; 1 inch
19 between panels and walls.
20 2. Stirrup Brackets for Dressing Compartments: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with no fewer
21 than three brackets attached at midpoint and near top and bottom of panel.
22 a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints.
24 3. Full-Height (Continuous) Brackets for Dressing Compartments: Secure panels to walls and to
25 pilasters with full-height brackets.
26 a. Locate bracket fasteners so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints.
28 B. Curtains: Install curtains to specified length, and verify that they hang vertically without stress points or
29 diagonal folds.
30 C. Shower Receptors: Install prefabricated shower receptors with drain gasket compression fit to OD of waste
31 pipe.
32 3.2 ADJUSTING
33 A. Curtain Adjustment: After hanging curtains, test and adjust each track or rod to produce unencumbered,
34 smooth operation. Steam and dress down curtains as required to produce crease- and wrinkle-free
35 installation. Remove and replace curtains that are stained or soiled or that have stress points or diagonal
36 folds.
37 B. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written
38 instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on inswinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30
39 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on outswinging doors to return doors to fully closed
40 position.
41 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 10 28 00
2 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
5 1.2 SUMMARY
9 1.6 WARRANTY
12 2.2 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
13 2.3 PUBLIC-USE SHOWER ROOM ACCESSORIES
14 2.4 WARM-AIR DRYERS
15 2.5 CHILDCARE ACCESSORIES
16 2.6 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS
17 2.7 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES
18 2.8 AUTOMATED EXTERNAL DEFIBRILLATOR (AED) CABINET
19 2.9 FABRICATION
21 3.1 INSTALLATION
22 PART 1 - GENERAL

26 1.2 SUMMARY
28 1. Public-use washroom accessories.
29 2. Public-use shower room accessories.
30 3. Private-use bathroom accessories.
31 4. Warm-air dryers.
32 5. Childcare accessories.
33 6. Underlavatory guards
34 7. Kitchenette accessories.
35 8. Custodial accessories.
36 9. Automated external defibrillator (AED) cabinet.

39 B. Samples: Full size, for each exposed product and for each finish specified.

41 A. Sample warranty.

44 1.6 WARRANTY
45 A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Mirrors: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace mirrors that fail in

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 102800 - 1 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

3 A. Provide similar style by same manufacturer in rooms with multiple accessories.
4 B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products, where manufacturer not listed,
5 by the following:
6 1. American Specialties, Inc.
7 2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. (Basis of Design)
8 3. Bradley Corporation.
9 4. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc.
10 C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified
11 testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
12 2.2 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES

13 A. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser TA-04: See Materials List for product reference.
14 1. Description: Triple-roll dispenser
15 2. Mounting: Surface mounted.
16 3. Operation: Noncontrol delivery with theft-resistant spindle.
17 B. Manual Paper Towel (Roll) Dispenser TA-05 (for kitchenettes): See Materials List for product reference.
19 2. Minimum Capacity: 8-inch-wide, 8" diameter.
20 3. Material and Finish: Type 304 stainless steel.
21 4. Lockset: Manufacturer's standard type.
22 C. Waste Receptacle TA-07: See Materials List for product reference.
23 1. Mounting: free standing.
24 2. Minimum Capacity: 16 Gallon: 16" diameter, 30" high.
25 3. Material and Finish: smudge-free brushed stainless steel..
26 D. Liquid-Soap Dispenser TA-11: See Materials List for product reference.
27 1. Description: Designed for dispensing antibacterial soap in liquid or lotion form.
28 2. Mounting: Surface mounted above sinks.
29 3. Capacity: 1200 ml
30 4. Materials: ABS Plastic, Color: Nickel Finish.
31 5. Lockset: Tumbler type.
32 6. Refill Indicator: Window type.
33 E. Grab Bar TA-12:
34 1. Bobrick
35 2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.
36 3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick.
37 a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin).
38 4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches.
39 5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings
40 F. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit TA-14
41 1. Bobrick
42 2. Mounting: Partition mounted, dual access
43 3. Door or Cover: Self-closing, disposal-opening cover and hinged face panel with tumbler lockset.
44 4. Receptacle: Removable.
45 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin)
46 G. Seat-Cover Dispenser TA-15:
48 2. Minimum Capacity: 250 seat covers.
49 3. Exposed Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
50 4. Lockset: Tumbler type.
51 H. Mirror Unit TA-17:
52 1. Frame: Stainless-steel channel.
53 a. Corners: Welded and ground smooth.
54 2. Integral Shelf: 5 inches deep.
55 3. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated below.
56 a. One-piece, galvanized-steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking mechanism to hold
57 mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts.
58 b. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special
59 tool to remove.
60 4. Size: As indicated on Drawings.

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 I. Coat / Robe Hook TA-19:

2 1. Bobrick
3 2. Description: Single-prong unit.
4 3. Material and Finish: One-piece brass casting with satin nickel-plated finish to match stainless steel.
5 2.3 PUBLIC-USE SHOWER ROOM ACCESSORIES

6 A. Folding Shower Seat TA-21:
7 1. Configuration: L-shaped seat, designed for wheelchair access.
8 2. Seat: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin); 0.05-inch minimum nominal thickness; with single-piece,
9 pan-type construction and edge seams welded and ground smooth.
10 3. Mounting Mechanism: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
11 4. Dimensions:
12 B. Towel Rack TA-18:
13 1. Description: Surface-mounted, guest-towel unit with approximately 1/4-inch-diameter wire rings
14 welded to upright wire bracket.
15 2. Capacity: Four sets of bath towels.
16 3. Nominal Height: [21 inches.
17 4. Material and Finish: Polished chrome-plated zinc alloy (zamac).
18 2.4 WARM-AIR DRYERS

19 A. Warm-Air Dryer TA-23:
21 a. Excel Dryer Inc: XLERATOReco Hand Dryer.
22 2. Description: Standard-speed, warm-air hand dryer.
24 4. Operation: Electronic-sensor activated with timed power cut-off switch.
25 a. Operation Time: 12 seconds.
26 5. Cover Material and Finish: Stainless steel, brushed.
27 6. Electrical Requirements: 110-120 V, 13 A, 425 Watts to 530 Watts.
28 2.5 CHILDCARE ACCESSORIES

29 A. Diaper-Changing Station TA-24:
30 1. Description: Horizontal unit that opens by folding down from stored position and with child-protection
31 strap.
32 a. Engineered to support minimum of 250-lb static load when opened.
33 2. Mounting: Surface mounted, with unit projecting not more than 4 inches from wall when closed.
34 3. Operation: By pneumatic shock-absorbing mechanism.
35 4. Material and Finish: HDPE with plastic-laminate insert in color selected by Architect.
36 5. Liner Dispenser: Built in.
37 2.6 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS

38 A. Underlavatory Guard TA-25: See Materials List for product reference.
39 1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevents direct
40 contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing coverings.
41 2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white.
42 2.7 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES

43 A. Utility Shelf TA-31:
44 1. Description: With exposed edges turned down not less than 1/2 inch and supported by two triangular
45 brackets welded to shelf underside.
46 2. Size: 16 inches long by 6 inches deep.
47 3. Material and Finish: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch-thick stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
48 B. Mop and Broom Holder TA-30:
49 1. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rod suspended beneath shelf.
50 2. Length: 36 inches.
51 3. Hooks: Four.
52 4. Mop/Broom Holders: Three, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type.
53 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
54 a. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch-thick stainless steel.
55 b. Rod: Approximately 1/4-inch-diameter stainless steel.
56

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2.8 AUTOMATED EXTERNAL DEFIBRILLATOR (AED) CABINET

2 A. Construction: Painted steel cabinet with glass window door. Pull friction latch with audible and visual alarm
3 that sounds on opening or tampering. Back printed graphics of “AED” on the door glass with “Emergency
4 Defibrillator” on the cabinet face.
5 B. Type: Surface mount and semi-recessed. Provide remote strobe where indicated for semi-recessed
6 applications.
7 C. Inside Dimensions: 14.125 inches square x 7 inches deep minimum.
8 D. Acceptable Manufacturers: Allied Medical Products, Cardiac Science, ZOLL Medical.
9 2.9 FABRICATION
10 A. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide
11 minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
13 3.1 INSTALLATION
14 A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate
15 indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations
16 and at heights indicated.
17 B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to ASTM F 446.
18 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 10 44 16
2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
5 1.2 SUMMARY
9 1.6 COORDINATION
10 1.7 WARRANTY
13 2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
14 2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS
16 3.1 INSTALLATION
17 PART 1 - GENERAL

21 1.2 SUMMARY
22 A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers.


26 A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

28 A. Operation and maintenance data.
29 1.6 COORDINATION
30 A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire-protection cabinets to ensure fit and function.
31 1.7 WARRANTY
32 A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire
33 extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
34 1. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.
35

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 104416 - 1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

3 A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire
4 Extinguishers."
5 B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency
7 2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

8 A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each mounting bracket indicated.
11 a. Amerex Corporation.
12 b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International.
14 d. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division.
15 2. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B, and bar
16 coding for documenting fire-extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging.
17 B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type (FEX-1): UL-rated 2A-20B nominal capacity, with monoammonium
18 phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container.
19 2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS

20 A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall
21 or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated finish.
22 B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and
23 location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
24 1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter
25 decals applied to mounting surface.
26 a. Orientation: Vertical
28 3.1 INSTALLATION
29 A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
30 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.
31 B. Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements
32 of authorities having jurisdiction.
33 1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.
34 C. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated.
35 END OF SECTION

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 104416 - 2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 10 51 13
2 LOCKERS
5 1.2 SUMMARY
9 1.6 WARRANTY
12 2.2 PLASTIC LAMINATE LOCKERS (LOCKER-2)
13 2.3 SOLID PHENOLIC LOCKERS (LOCKER-1)
15 3.1 INSTALLATION
16 PART 1 - GENERAL

20 1.2 SUMMARY
22 1. Welded corridor lockers.
23 2. Phenolic shower room lockers.
24 3. Locker benches.

26 A. Product data.
28 1. Product Data: For composite wood products, indicating that product contains no urea formaldehyde.
29 2. Laboratory Test Reports: For composite wood products, indicating compliance with requirements for
31 C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and locker
32 identification system and numbering sequence.
33 D. Samples: For each color specified.

35 A. Sample warranties.

38 1.6 WARRANTY
39 A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal lockers that fail in materials
40 or workmanship, excluding finish, within specified warranty period.
41 1. Warranty Period for Welded Metal Lockers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

44 A. Accessibility Requirements: For lockers indicated to be accessible, comply with applicable provisions in the
45 U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and
46 ICC A117.1.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 105113 - 1 LOCKERS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2.2 PLASTIC LAMINATE LOCKERS (LOCKER-2)

2 A. Manufacturers:
3 1. Plastic laminate clad lockers shall be as manufactured by Hollman Inc.
4 2. Other manufacturers as approved by Architect.
5 B. Materials:
6 1. Locker Frame: Tops, sides, and back shall be constructed of 5/8 inch high density thermo-fused
7 melamine.
8 a. Expansion / contraction within +/- 1/16 inch per locker.
9 2. Available Locker Models: Refer to Drawings.
10 a. Single tier, Model A: 1-Top Shelf, 1-Coat Rod, 1-Coat Hook
11 b. Double tier, Model B: 1-Coat Rod, 1-Coat Hook
12 c. Triple tier, Model C: 2- Coat Hooks
13 d. Four tier, Model D.
14 e. Five tier, Model E.
15 f. Six tier, Model F.
16 3. Visible Edges: Sealed with a 1.5 millimeter PVC edge banding to closely match locker doors
17 4. Locker Doors:
18 a. Laminate: 5/8 inch high-industrial grade particle board core with .030 inch vertical grade high
19 pressure Class II-B fire retardant plastic laminate.
20 1) Matching laminate applied to interior & exterior door face.
21 2) Door edges sealed with eased edge 1.5 mm PVC edge banding to closely match
22 laminate.
23 5. Standard hardware:
24 a. Number disk, 1-1/2 inches diameter flush mounted disc with 3/8 inch high contrast digits. US
25 Block 1L font.
26 b. Coat Rod, 1 inch diameter recessed rod.
27 c. Coat Hook(s), 2-prong metal hooks.
28 d. Hinges shall be nickel finished, concealed, heavy duty European steel allowing 110 degree
29 door opening with a limited lifetime warranty.
30 1) 4 hinges per door 60 inches high and over.
31 2) 3 hinges per door 36 inches to 59 inches high.
32 3) 2 hinges per door 35 inches high and under.
33 6. Locks: Centered vertically in door & spaced horizontally per lock type.
34 7. Venting: 12 millimeter openings between door and top and bottom of locker and dividers on multiple
35 opening frames provide continuous natural air flow.
36 C. Fabrication:
37 1. Locker shall be fabricated using doweled and glued & nailed assembly process.
38 2. Fabricate lockers square, rigid and without warp, with the finished faces flat and free of scratches and
39 chips.
40 3. Machine all parts and attachment holes accurately and without chips.
41 2.3 SOLID PHENOLIC LOCKERS (LOCKER-1)
42 A. Manufacturers:
43 1. Solid Phenolic Lockers, and Locker Benches shall be Hollman Series PH6000.
44 2. Other manufacturers as approved by Architect.
45 B. Materials:
46 1. Material shall be Solid Phenolic with a High Pressure Melamine matte finish surface made as an
47 integral part of the core material. Laminated surfaces are not acceptable. Surface and edges
48 shall be non-porous and shall not support fungus or bacteria.
49 a. Provide material which has been selected for uniform color, surface flatness and smoothness.
50 Exposed surfaces which exhibit discolorations, pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
51 telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable.
52 Defects such as chipping along edges and corners are unacceptable.
53 b. Columbia Solid Phenolic shall meet or exceed all requirements for Class B Flame Spread
54 Rating and Smoke Developed calculated according to ASTM E84, and shall carry a Class
55 B Fire Rating Certification. Class B Fire Rating Certification shall be in the name of the Locker
56 Manufacturer and shall be less than six (6) months old. Materials shall contribute to LEED®
57 Certification credits. MR 4.1, 4.2, 5.1 & 5.2, and EQ 4.
58 2. Material Thicknesses:

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 a. Doors, Slope Tops, End Panels, and Toe Kick Plates – Minimum .50 inch (13 mm) Finished
2 Thickness.
3 b. Locker Uni-Box®, Tops, Bottoms, and Shelves – Minimum .375” (10 mm) Finished Thick-
4 ness. Sides and Locker Backs – Minimum .3125” (8 mm) Finished Thickness.
5 c. Locker Pedestal Benches – Minimum .75” (19 mm) Finished Thickness.
6 d. Locker Bench Tops – Minimum .75” (19 mm) Finished Thickness.
7 3. Colors: Solid Surface White Quartz.
8 4. Locker Doors: Locker Door shall be the full width of the Locker Uni-Box® and shall be frameless,
9 allowing access to the entire width of the Locker. Framed Doors are unacceptable. Perimeter ven-
10 tilation shall provide superior ventilation properties to traditional framed doors. Doors shall be at-
11 tached to the Hinge with Stainless Steel Theft Proof Torx Head with Pin fasteners.
12 5. Locker Body: Locker Body shall incorporate the Uni-Box® Locker Construction to allow for multiple
13 Locker configurations within the same Locker Body. The Locker Body shall be white in color. The
14 Uni-Box® shall incorporate mortise and tenon construction and shall be mechanically fastened
15 together with Stainless Steel fasteners. Locker Shelves shall be mortised into side walls of the
16 Uni-Box® at location determined by Architect. Relocation of Shelves in the field shall be possible
17 without the need for special tools or welders. The Hinge shall be attached to the Uni-Box® with
18 Stainless Steel Theft Proof Torx Head with Pin Bolts. Lockers shall arrive at construction site fully
19 assembled.
20 6. Slope Tops, End Panels, and Toe Kick Plates: Shall be manufactured of the same color, thickness
21 and material as the Locker Doors.
22 C. Hardware
23 1. Locker Hinges: Hinges shall be concealed and shall be made of 14 Gauge Type 304 Stainless
24 Steel and have a Satin finish. Hinge shall have five (5) knuckles and shall allow door to open 90°.
25 2. Locker Hasp Bar: Hasp shall be fabricated of 11 Gauge Type 304 Stainless Steel with a Satin Fin-
26 ish. All edges shall be polished and smooth. Hasp shall be attached to the Locker Body with two
27 (2) Stainless Steel Theft Proof Torx Head with Pin, Through Bolts. Hasp shall extend through a
28 slot in the face of the Locker Door and the Locker Number Plate. Locker Hasp Bar is to be used
29 with padlocks (padlocks are not included).
30 3. Coat Hooks: Coat Hooks shall be fabricated of 11 Gauge Type 304 Stainless Steel with a Satin
31 Finish. All edges shall be polished and smooth. Coat Hooks shall be attached to the Locker Body
32 with Stainless Steel Theft Proof Torx Head with Pin fasteners or Through Bolts. Provide three (3)
33 Coat Hooks for Single Tier Lockers and three (3) for Double Tier and “Z” Lockers. Plastic and alu-
34 minum Coat Hooks are unacceptable.
35 4. Number Plates: Provide a Number Plate for each Door or opening, in the sequence as indicated
36 on the drawings. Number Plate shall be engraved from the back side to prevent the accumulation
37 of dirt and grime.
38 5. Provide base mounted Lockers. Refer to Drawings for custom phenolic integral bae and
39 bench provided by locker manufacturer.
40 D. Fabrication
41 1. General: Provide factory pre-assembled Locker units. Lockers shall be complete with all hardware
42 and accessories listed above. Knock down units are unacceptable.
43 2. End Panels: Provide End Panels as required to complete the installation of the Lockers.
45 3.1 INSTALLATION
46 A. General: Install lockers level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims.
47 1. Anchor locker runs at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but not more than 36
48 inches o.c. Using concealed fasteners, install anchors through backup reinforcing plates, channels,
49 or blocking as required to prevent metal distortion.
50 2. Anchor single rows of metal lockers to walls near top.
51 3. Anchor back-to-back metal lockers to floor.
52 B. Lockers: Connect groups together with standard fasteners, with no exposed fasteners on face frames.
53

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 C. Trim: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures accurately together to form tight, hairline joints,
2 with concealed fasteners and splice plates.
3 1. Attach recess trim to recessed metal lockers with concealed clips.
4 2. Attach filler panels with concealed fasteners.
5 3. Attach sloping-top units to metal lockers, with closures at exposed ends.
6 D. Fixed Locker Benches: Provide benches in material and quantity as indicated on the Drawings.
7 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 12 24 13
2 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
5 1.2 SUMMARY
12 2.2 ROLLER SHADES
13 2.3 ROLLER SHADES (SHADE-1)
14 2.4 SHADEBAND MATERIALS
15 2.5 ROLLER-SHADE FABRICATION
17 3.1 ROLLER-SHADE INSTALLATION
18 PART 1 - GENERAL

22 1.2 SUMMARY
23 A. Section includes manually operated roller shades.

26 1. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and
27 profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller shades.
28 B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including shadeband materials,
29 their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations.
31 D. Roller-Shade Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.



39 B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic
40 effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
41 1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents
42 contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.
45

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 122413 - 1 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
4 1. Basis of Design: Springs Window Fashions as marketed as MechoShade Systems, Inc.
5 2. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.
6 3. Nysan Solar Control Inc.; a Hunter Douglas company.
7 2.2 ROLLER SHADES

8 A. Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and clutch that stops shade
9 movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated.
10 1. Bead Chains: Nickel-plated metal.
11 a. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade.
12 b. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops.
13 c. Chain-Retainer Type: Clip, jamb mount.
14 2. Spring Lift-Assist Mechanisms: Manufacturer's standard for balancing roller-shade weight and lifting
15 heavy roller shades.
16 a. Provide for shadebands that weigh more than 10 lb or for shades as recommended by
17 manufacturer, whichever criteria are more stringent.
18 2.3 ROLLER SHADES [SHADE-1]

19 A. Manual Operating Mechanisms: Manufacturer's complete system and accessories suitable for conditions
20 indicated, recommended by manufacturer for use with shade indicated, and as required for reliable
21 operation without malfunction.
22 B. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required
23 to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands indicated without
24 deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end assemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to
25 facilitate removal of shadebands for service.
26 1. Roller Drive-End Location: Right side of inside face of shade.
27 2. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back of roller.
28 3. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method.
29 C. Shadeband Retention System: Manufacturer's standard system for guiding shadeband through range of
30 travel and holding shadeband taut with edges of shadeband supported by side channels or angles.
31 D. Mounting Hardware: Corrosion resistant and compatible with operating mechanism, installation
32 accessories, and mounting location and conditions indicated.
33 E. Shadebands:
34 1. Shadeband Material: Light-filtering fabric.
35 2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Manufacturer's standard for operating mechanism indicated.
36 a. Color and Finish of Exposed Bottom Bar: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
37 range.
38 F. Installation Accessories:
39 1. Exposed Headboxes and Bottom Boxes: Rectangular, extruded-aluminum enclosure including front
40 fasciae, top and back covers, endcaps, and removable closures.
41 a. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to enclose roller and shadeband when
42 shade is fully open, but not less than height indicated on Drawings.
43 2. Channels or Angles: Manufacturer's standard design for operating mechanism indicated and
44 shadeband take-up and support.
45 3. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
46

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 2.4 SHADEBAND MATERIALS

2 A. Shadeband Material Flame-Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701. Testing by a qualified testing
3 agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
4 B. Light-Filtering Fabric: Woven fabric, stain and fade resistant.
5 1. Source: Roller-shade manufacturer.
6 2. Type: 75% PVC (coating), 25% polyester (yarn).
7 3. Weave: Basketweave.
8 4. Roll Width: As required – no seams.
9 5. Orientation on Shadeband: Up the bolt.
10 6. Openness Factor: 3 percent.
11 7. Color (SHADE-1): 1513 - Grey.
12 2.5 ROLLER-SHADE FABRICATION

13 A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1, including requirements
14 for flexible, chain-loop devices; lead content of components; and warning labels.
15 B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F:
16 1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which
17 shade is installed less 1/4 inch per side or 1/2-inch total, plus or minus 1/8 inch. Length equal to
18 head-to-sill or -floor dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch, plus or minus
19 1/8 inch.
20 2. Outside of Jamb Installation: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between shades of
21 end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations between
22 openings.
23 3. Railroaded Materials: Railroad material where material roll width is less than the required width of
24 shadeband and where indicated. Provide battens and seams as required by railroaded material to
25 produce shadebands with full roll-width panel(s) plus, if required, one partial roll-width panel located
26 at top of shadeband.
28 3.1 ROLLER-SHADE INSTALLATION

30 installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
32 C. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units, according to manufacturer's written
33 instructions.
34 D. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction
35 throughout entire operational range.
36 E. Clean roller-shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
37 END OF SECTION

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 12 36 61
2 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
5 1.2 SUMMARY
9 1.6 COORDINATION
11 2.1 SOLID-SURFACE-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS (SSF-1 & SSF-3)
12 2.2 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOPS (SSF-2)
13 2.3 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS
15 3.1 INSTALLATION
16 PART 1 - GENERAL

20 1.2 SUMMARY
22 1. Solid-surface-material countertops and backsplashes.
23 2. Quartz agglomerate countertops and backsplashes.

25 A. Product Data: For countertop materials.
28 and cost.
31 materials.
33 formaldehyde.
36 C. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of
37 joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.
38 D. Samples: For each type of material exposed to view.
43 body.

45 A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base cabinets are
46 installed but before countertop fabrication is complete.
47 1.6 COORDINATION
48 A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes.

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 123661 - 1 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 2.1 SOLID-SURFACE-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS (SSF-1 & SSF-3)

3 A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style:
4 1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top
5 2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner.
6 3. Endsplash: Matching backsplash
7 B. Countertops: 1/2-inch-with front edge built up with same material].
8 1. SSF-3: Formica Classics – Luna Sand 757
9 2. SSF-1: Formica Classics – Luna Concrete 781
10 C. Backsplashes: 1/2-inch-thick, solid surface material.
11 2.2 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOPS (SSF-2)

12 A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style:
13 1. Front: Refer to Drawings.
14 2. Backsplash:Refer to Drawings.
15 3. Endsplash: Refer to Drawings.
16 B. Countertops: 3/4-inch thick, quartz agglomerate with front edge built up with same material.
17 C. Backsplashes: 3/4-inch-thick, quartz agglomerate.
18 D. Material: Sileston – Niebla.
19 2.3 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS
20 A. Adhesives: Use adhesives that meet the testing and product requirements of the California Department of
21 Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions
22 from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
23 B. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ANSI SS1.
26 a. E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company.
27 b. Formica Corporation.
28 c. LG Chemical, Ltd.
29 d. Silestone by Cosentino
30 e. Wilsonart International.
31 2. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
32 C. Quartz Agglomerate: Solid sheets consisting of quartz aggregates bound together with a matrix of filled
33 plastic resin and complying with the "Physical Characteristics of Materials" Article of ANSI SS1.
36 a. Cosentino USA. (Silestone)
37 2. Colors and Patterns: Match Architect's samples.
38 a. SSF-2: Silestone Niebla
40 3.1 INSTALLATION
41 A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet (3 mm in 2.4 m).
42 B. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Align
43 adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with
44 manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean
45 entire surface.
46 END OF SECTION

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 123661 - 2 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 12 48 13
2 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
5 1.2 SUMMARY
9 2.1 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES, GENERAL
10 2.2 ROLL-UP RAIL MATS
11 2.4 FRAMES
12 2.5 FABRICATION
14 3.1 INSTALLATION
15 3.2 PROTECTION
16 PART 1 - GENERAL

20 1.2 SUMMARY
22 1. Roll-up rail mats with recessed frames.

26 1. Items penetrating floor mats and frames, including door control devices.
27 2. Divisions between mat sections.
28 3. Perimeter floor moldings.
29 4. Custom Graphics: Scale drawing indicating colors.
30 C. Samples: For each floor mat, tread rail, and frame member.

34 2.1 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES, GENERAL

35 A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC A117.1 and local requirements.
36 2.2 ROLL-UP RAIL MATS

39 a. Basis of Design: JL Industries: Activar JL-600 series roll-up grating, 3/4" deep, clear
40 anodized aluminum frame JL-AA.
41 b. Ronick Matting Systems: Peditred.
42 c. Balco: FMR recessed Roll-Up. .
43 d. Pawling: EM-70 Seies.
44

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 124813 - 1 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 B. Roll-up, Aluminum-Rail Hinged Mats: Extruded-aluminum tread rails 1-1/2 inches wide by 3/4 inch thick,
2 sitting on continuous vinyl cushions.
3 1. Tread Inserts: carpet.
4 2. Colors, Textures, and Patterns of Inserts: Refer to Material Tag List.
5 3. Rail Color: Clear anodized.
6 4. Hinges: Plastic or Aluminum.
7 5. Mat Size: As indicated.
8 2.3 FRAMES
9 A. Recessed Frames: ASTM B 221. Manufacturer's standard extrusion.
10 1. Color: Clear anodized.
11 2.4 FABRICATION
12 A. Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to greatest extent possible in sizes indicated. Unless otherwise indicated,
13 provide single unit for each mat installation; do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum sizes
14 for units that are removed for maintenance and cleaning. Where joints in mats are necessary, space
15 symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. Miter corner joints in framing elements with hairline
16 joints or provide prefabricated corner units without joints.
17 B. Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum frames that contact cementitious material with manufacturer's
18 standard protective coating.
20 3.1 INSTALLATION
21 A. Install recessed mat frames to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Set mat tops at height
22 recommended by manufacturer for most effective cleaning action; coordinate tops of mat surfaces with
23 bottoms of doors that swing across mats to provide clearance between door and mat.
24 B. Install surface-type units to comply with manufacturer's written instructions at locations indicated;
25 coordinate with entrance locations and traffic patterns.
26 3.2 PROTECTION
27 A. After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in
28 recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction traffic
29 has ended and Project is near Substantial Completion.
30 END OF SECTION

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 124813 - 2 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 12 93 00
2 SITE FURNISHINGS
3
4
7 1.2 SUMMARY
13 2.1 BICYCLE RACKS
16 3.1 EXAMINATION
18
19
20 PART 1 - GENERAL
21
25
26 1.2 SUMMARY
28 1. Bicycle racks.
30 Section 32 "Portland Cement Concrete Paving" for coordination with site concrete flatwork.
31
33 A. Product Data: For each type of product, including physical characteristics such as shape, dimension,
34 capacity and finish for each type of site furnishings.
35 B. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings for each type of site furnishing indicating installation details.
36 C. LEED Submittals:
37 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1and Credit MR 4.2: For products having recycled content,
38 documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled
39 content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.
41 E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish, not less than 6-inch- long linear components and
42 4-inch-square sheet components.
43 F. Product Schedule: For site furnishings. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
44
46 A. Material Certificates: For site furnishings.
47
49 A. Maintenance Data: For site furnishings to include in maintenance manuals. Include recommended
50 methods for repairing damage to the finish.
51
53 A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing site furnishings similar to those required
54 for this project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
55 B. Source Limitations: Obtain each color, finish, shape and type of site furnishing from a single source with
56 resources to provide components of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.
57
58
60
61 2.1 BICYCLE RACKS
62 A. Description: Steel bike rack with the following dimensional characteristics:

CONTRACT #7939 MUNIS # 10129 129300 - 1 SITE FURNISHINGS
MSR, LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 1. Center beam: 3” OD, 7 GA tube

2 2. Ears: 1.25” OD, 11 GA tube
3 3. Feet: 1.4” x 3/16” x 24” channels
4 B. Basis of Design: “Campus Rack” by Dero Bike Rack Co., 1-888-337-6729, www.dero.com
5 C. Model(s): S6 and S4; refer to Drawings for quantities and locations.
6 D. Finish: Thermoplastic Coating
7 E. Color: Signal Black, RAL9004
8 F. Mounting: Surface (flange) ground mount for each rack as indicated in manufacturer’s standard
9 specifications and detail drawings.
10 G. Hardware: Provide Grade 316 stainless steel, tamper-proof anchoring hardware in sizes and quantities
11 indicated by manufacturer’s standard specifications and detail drawings.
12 H. Installation: Install and anchor to concrete pavements per manufacturer’s standard specifications and
13 detail drawings.
14
16 A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in
19
20
22
23 3.1 EXAMINATION
24 A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for correct and
25 level finished grade, mounting surfaces, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance
26 of the Work.
28
30 A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements are
31 indicated. Complete field assembly of site furnishings where required.
32 B. Unless otherwise indicated, install site furnishings after landscaping and paving have been completed.
33 C. Install site furnishings level, plumb, true, and securely anchored at locations indicated on Drawings.
34 D. Clean all site furnishings after installation and inspect for damage. Document any damage to installed
35 furnishings and provide documentation to Owner; repair damage per manufacturer’s recommendations OR
36 be responsible for a full replacement of any site furnishings with damage that exceeds small repairs or
37 touch-ups as determined by the Owner.
38
39
40 END OF SECTION

CONTRACT #7939 MUNIS # 10129 129300 - 2 SITE FURNISHINGS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 12 93 00.10
2 BICYCLE RACKS
5 1.2 SUMMARY
9 2.1 BICYCLE RACKS (RACK-1)
10 2.2 IRON FINISHES
12 3.1 INSTALLATION
13 PART 1 - GENERAL

17 1.2 SUMMARY
18 A. Section includes bicycle racks.


24 2.1 BICYCLE RACKS (RACK-1)

27 1. Ground Control Systems; Side Stage Free Standing Vertical Rack System.
28 B. Bicycle Rack Construction:
29 1. Frame: Galvanized steel.
30 a. Pipe and Tubing.
31 2. Style: Double-side hanging.
32 a. Capacity: Designed to accommodate no fewer than 10 bicycles.
33 3. Accessories: Polyvinyl sleeve at hanger ends
34 4. Installation Method: Free Standing.
35 C. Steel Finish: Galvanized Black powder coat finish
36 2.2 IRON FINISHES

37 A. Baked-Enamel, Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked, polyester, powder-coat finish
38 complying with finish manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation, including pretreatment,
39 application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.
40

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 129300.10 - 1 BICYCLE RACKS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
2 3.1 INSTALLATION
3 A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements are
4 indicated. Complete field assembly of site furnishings where required.
5 B. Unless otherwise indicated, install site furnishings after landscaping and paving have been completed.
6 C. Install site furnishings level, plumb, true, and securely anchored at locations indicated on Drawings.
7 END OF SECTION

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 129300.10 - 2 BICYCLE RACKS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 SECTION 14 21 00
2 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
4 1.1 SUMMARY
5 1.2 RELATED WORK REQUIRED BY OTHER SECTIONS OF THE CONTRACT
6 1.3 APPLICABLE CODES
7 1.4 SUBMITTALS
9 1.6 WARRANTY
11 2.1 ELEVATORS
12 2.2 CAR ENCLOSURE
13 2.3 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES
14 2.4 COUNTERWEIGHT
16 3.1 INSTALLATION
18 PART 1 - GENERAL
19 1.1 SUMMARY
20 A. Section includes change in power supply by others and new car enclosure finishes for one existing electric
21 traction passenger elevator, State Registration No 15877. This section will indicate the extent of the
22 renovations.
23 1.2 RELATED WORK REQUIRED BY OTHER SECTIONS OF THE CONTRACT

24 A. Electrical service:
25 1. Provide a drawing showing the proposed location of a new 3 phase transformer in the existing
26 machine room and the clearances to other equipment, for review by the Elevator Contractor.
27 2. Furnish and install a new 3 phase transformer to supply power of the required voltage and current.
28 3. New transformer to supply 230 VAC directly to the disconnecting means for the existing elevator
29 controller.
30 4. Verify existing voltage to controller which shall be identical to the new secondary voltage supplied
31 to the disconnecting means.
32 B. Painting:
33 1. Refinishing and painting of the existing hoistway entrance frame and door panels at each landing.
34 2. Refinishing and painting of the underside of the car ceiling (canopy).
35 1.3 APPLICABLE CODES

36 A. Elevator system design and installation shall comply with all applicable safety codes, including but not
37 limited to the following, or subsequent code editions in effect as of date of contract signature.
38 1. ASME A17.1-2013 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators
39 2. NFPA 70-2011 National Electric Code
40 3. Wisconsin Administrative Code Chapter SPS 318 effective 9/1/2014
41 4. Madison Chapter 40 Conveyance Code
42 B. Elevator Contractor shall apply for any permits necessary for work under this Section, obtain all installer
43 and contractor licenses, perform all required alteration acceptance tests, and pay all City, State, and Local
44 fees.
45 1.4 SUBMITTALS
46 A. Product Data:
47 1. Cleaning and care instructions for new stainless steel wall panel finishes
48 2. Cleaning and care instructions for existing satin stainless steel car front finishes
49 3. Recommended cleaning products and instructions for use
50 4. Identify products that may damage finishes and should not be used
51 5. Color chart for new protection pads
53 1. Car enclosure renovations
54 2. Color rendering of car enclosure with new finishes
55 C. Samples:
56 1. Car wall panel finishes, where requested

CONTRACT # 7939 MUNIS # 10129 142100 - 1 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017

2 A. Deliver materials to installation site in manufacturer's original packaging. Handle products in accordance
3 with manufacturer's instructions. Store in dry, secure location, protected against direct sunlight and
4 excessive heat. Protect finished surfaces.
5 1.6 WARRANTY
6 A. The equipment installed shall be warranted by Contractor against defects in materials and workmanship
7 for a period of 12 months starting on the date of final acceptance by Owner. Warranty shall include
8 correction of defective material or workmanship to the satisfaction of the Owner and Consultant.
9 B. Defective is defined to include, but is not limited to: failure of new equipment or components, finishes
10 showing unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes, and other unusual, unexpected, or
11 unsatisfactory conditions.
13 2.1 ELEVATORS
14 A. Existing Elevator Description:
15 1. Elevator Number(s): 1
16 2. Type: Geared electric passenger
17 3. Rated load: 2000 lbs
18 4. Rated speed: 200 FPM
19 5. Net Travel: Approx 45’0”
20 6. Landings: 4 in line from LL-*1-2-3
21 7. Opening size: 4’0”w x 7’0”h
22 8. Opening type: Two-speed side opening left hand
23 B. Existing Equipment Manufacturer
24 1. Traction machine: Hollister-Whitney - No 44
25 2. Controls: Motion Control Engineering – Motion 4000
26 3. Door operator equipment: GAL Manufacturing
27 4. Signal fixtures: Innovation Industries
28 5. Car enclosure finishes: SnapCab (job no 4516 11/2010)
29 2.2 CAR ENCLOSURE

30 A. General: Provide pre-engineered elevator interior finish system including the following:
31 B. Side and rear wall panels
32 1. Description: Interlocking panel system comprised of removable horizontal wall panels
33 with interlocking joints, toe kicks, top caps with sight and vent guards, panel binders at
34 exposed panel edges near doors and corner/flat reveals.
35 2. Panel model: Industrial 1 with 4-5 rows and 5WL textured stainless steel finish.
36 3. Rigidized textured stainless steel, 20 gauge. Assembly to be Class B or better fire rated as per
37 ASTM E 84.
38 C. Toe Kick and Toe Kick Binder
39 1. Integral concealed ventilation gap for interlocking panels.
40 2. Satin No. 4 finish 20 gauge stainless steel toe kick with anodized mill finish aluminum
41 binder (new or existing if in mutually agreeable condition).
42 D. Top Cap: Anodized mill finish aluminum top cap with integrated pad hook channel.
43 E. Handrails
44 1. Flat bar type with returned ends on side and rear walls
45 2. 3/8” thick x 2” (polish and reuse existing handrails)
46 F. Corner and Flat Reveals: Stainless steel, 20 gauge, No. 4 satin finish.
47 G. Panel Binders: At exposed panel edges near door jambs with anodized mill finish aluminum.
48 H. Protection pads.
49 1. Vinyl protection pads for cab walls and front return.
50 2. Integral pre-attached pad hooks that lock into integrated pad hook channel in new top
51 cap.
52 3. Two complete sets protection pads in standard color selected by Owner.
53 I. Ceiling and lighting: Retain existing
54 J. Cab ventilation: Replace. Man-D-Tec MVS-14. Two speeds (300 cfm for high, 250 cfm for low). Man-D-
55 Tec and Quality Elevator fan manufacturers are acceptable.
56

MSR. LTD
24 MARCH 2017
1 K. Door panels:
2 1. Rigidized textured stainless steel, 20 gauge
3 2. Doors shall be of hollow metal construction with vertical internal channel reinforcements, reinforced
4 and drilled to accept the door operator equipment, and flush construction on front and rear sides.
5 3. The car enclosure side of the panels shall be clad in textured stainless steel with 5WL, with the
6 cladding wrapped around the leading edge of the car door panels. Exposed fasteners on the car
7 side or edges of the panels are not acceptable.
8 4. Panel thickness shall be designed to promote sufficient clearance between panels and returns so
9 that the new finishes are not scratched.
10 L. Car Floor Finish: Rubber Sheet Flooring (Grey): Noraplan Sentica, Color 6521 Sunday Paper.
11 M. Car sill: Retain existing
12 N. Car front equipment:
13 1. Satin stainless steel return panel, entrance columns, and transom: Retain existing.
14 a. SS-1: Refer to Material Tag Index.
15 2. Car operating panel: Retain existing.
16 2.3 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES

17 A. Elevator entrance frames and door panels
18 1. Retain existing.
19 2. Refinishing and painting by other than the elevator contractor
20 2.4 COUNTERWEIGHT
21 A. Elevator car shall be suitably counter-balanced by adjusting the quantity of existing and/or new
22 counterweight fillers to a 40-45% ratio per industry standards.
23 B. A preliminary estimate by SnapCab calculates the net increase in cab panel weight as 111 lbs.
25 3.1 INSTALLATION
26 A. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer in printed installation instructions
27 for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
28 B. Shim existing sheet steel car enclosure to properly align new wall panels prior to fastening in place.
29 C. Install flooring over secure prepared subfloor per floor manufacturer’s requirements.

31 A. Clean exposed surfaces per manufacturer’s instructions.
32 B. Protect elevator finishes, fixtures and equipment from damage.
33 END OF SECTION


7939 Exhibit N - MMB - Project Manual Volume 1 - 2017-03-24 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

7939 Exhibit N - MMB - Project Manual Volume 1 - 2017-03-24 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

7939 Exhibit N - MMB - Project Manual Volume 1 - 2017-03-24 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EXHIBIT N - PROJECT MANUAL - VOLUME 1

MADISON MUNICIPAL BUILDING RENOVATION

BPW CONTRACT #7939 MUNIS 10129

Date: 24 MARCH 2017

STRUCTURAL AND TECHNOLOGY ENGINEER

BUILDING ENVELOPE CONSULTANT

MECHANICAL / ELECTRICAL / PLUMBING ENGINEER

CODE AND LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS

4 DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

10 DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

MADISON MUNICIPAL BUILDING RENOVATION BID ISSUE

1 DIVISION 02 – SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

28 DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

36 DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

MADISON MUNICIPAL BUILDING RENOVATION BID ISSUE

MADISON MUNICIPAL BUILDING RENOVATION BID ISSUE

17 DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

MADISON MUNICIPAL BUILDING RENOVATION BID ISSUE

2 DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

30 DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

MADISON MUNICIPAL BUILDING RENOVATION BID ISSUE

1 23 73 13 Modular Indoor Central-Station Air-Handling Units

42 DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

MADISON MUNICIPAL BUILDING RENOVATION BID ISSUE

1 DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

MADISON MUNICIPAL BUILDING RENOVATION BID ISSUE

SECTION TAG DESCRIPTION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

033000 SAF SLIP-RESISTANT AGGREGATE FINISH

AT LOCATIONS PER DRAWINGS TO BRING EXISTING FLOORS UP TO GENERAL

MADISON MUNICIPAL BUILDING RENOVATION BID ISSUE

SECTION TAG DESCRIPTION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

NEW WHITE CARRARA FLOOR TILE TO MATCH FEATURE

044550 XTILE-2D LEVEL 1 PUBLIC AREA

MADISON MUNICIPAL BUILDING RENOVATION BID ISSUE

SECTION TAG DESCRIPTION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

064116 PLAM-2 PLASTIC LAMINATE: Not used ARCHITECTURAL FACED CABINETS

DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

MADISON MUNICIPAL BUILDING RENOVATION BID ISSUE

SECTION TAG DESCRIPTION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

INTERIOR PAINT FOR GLWS-3 DOORS TO MATCH CLEAR

MADISON MUNICIPAL BUILDING RENOVATION BID ISSUE

SECTION TAG DESCRIPTION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

ALUMINUM WINDOWS (New, generally). B.O.D.: Wausau 4250 Invent

MADISON MUNICIPAL BUILDING RENOVATION BID ISSUE

SECTION TAG DESCRIPTION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

AT FULL HEIGHT WALLS TO DECK, WITH AXIOM TRIM AT ACT "CLOUDS" AT

MADISON MUNICIPAL BUILDING RENOVATION BID ISSUE

SECTION TAG DESCRIPTION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

096813 CPTTRIM-1 EDGES OF CARPET AT TRANSITIONS, PER FINISHES PLAN

ENTRY FLOOR MAT 1, Interface - Style 1290102500 - Entry Level

MADISON MUNICIPAL BUILDING RENOVATION BID ISSUE

SECTION TAG DESCRIPTION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

PT-11_ REFER TO 084410 ABOVE FACTORY-APPLIED FINISH TO GLWS-3 DOORS

099123 PT-_A Benjamin Moore Lehigh Green HC-131. HISTORIC GREEN

099300 CCT-1 STAIN TO MATCH HISTORIC TRIM, DOORS, PANELS.

MADISON MUNICIPAL BUILDING RENOVATION BID ISSUE

SECTION TAG DESCRIPTION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

GLASS DISPLAY CASE: CRL Architectural Products, Self-healing cork,

AT NEW RESTROOMS, AND AT SELECTED LOCATIONS ON LEVELS 2 AND 3.